404 not found not found the requested url was not found on this server. microsoft word inner cover.docx editorial preface systems and control theory is a constantly evolving scientific area and the dominant driving force in key industries and engineering fields e.g. process engineering, automotive engineering, bioengineering, and the energy industry. the aim of the current issue (volume 42, number 2) is to provide an overview of research topics pursued by selected phd students. the papers presented here were selected from contributions at the 13th international phd workshop on systems and control conference held on august 25, 2014 (virt.uni-pannon.hu/phdws2014). the objective of the conference was to establish an international forum for young researchers. the meeting provided opportunities for the participants to present and discuss the latest results and up-to-date applications in systems and control. this issue represents the entire spectrum of systems and control engineering as follows: • process modelling and analysis • control (traditional, intelligent, adaptive, etc.) • process monitoring and supervision • system identification and signal processing • bioengineering • traffic control • reaction kinetic networks • modelling of complex systems (classical, hierarchical, bayesian, fuzzy, networks) • image processing and pattern recognition • artificial intelligence • soft computing (neural, genetic, fuzzy algorithms, etc.) • software (parallel computing, distributed and network computing, data visualization) • decision making (decision support, data mining) • applications of systems and control theory the organizers are grateful for the contributions of the authors. the tradition of the international phd workshop continues. you are invited to participate at the 14th international phd workshop in veszprém in 2015! attila magyar university of pannonia, veszprém, hungary guest editor hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprem vol. 30. pp. 191 -192 (2002) mathematical equivalence of infinite mixed flow reactors in series and plug flow reactor t. renganathan and k. krishnaiah (department of chemical engineering, indian institute of technology madras, chennai 600 036, india) received: december 30, 2001; revised: july 8, 2002 ~is paper. pro~es the ~athem~tical equivalenc~ of infinite mixed flow reactors in series and a plug flow reactor. in the ?me d~mam usmg an impulse mput. the proof is mathematically less complicated, compared to the previous statements m the literature. keywords: chemical reactors, mixed flow reactor, plug flow reactor, residence time distribution, convergence introduction the basic concept, that infinite mixed flow reactors (mfr) in series give the same performance as a plug flow reactor (pfr) is well known in chemical engineering for many years. but, only a few mathematical proofs of this concept are available in literature. villermaux [1] proved the convergence in the laplace domain. molin and gervais [2] showed the convergence in time domain with step input using limiting values of incomplete gamma function. chen [3] used asymptotic equation for treatment of incomplete gamma function and proved the convergence in time domain with step input. in this work, the mathematical equivalence of a plug flow reactor and infinite mixed flow reactors in series is shown in time domain using an impulse input (dirac delta function). the mathematical complexity is less, compared to the previous works. proof of equivalence a series of mixed flow reactors (mfrs) with delta input are shown in fig.l. the dimensionless exit age distribution function, e( 8), for n tanks in series can be derived easily [4] as n(n8)n -le -no e(b) = (n -1)! (l) where 8 = th: is the dimensionless time, t is the time variable and -r the average residence time of the entire system. the response curves, eq.( 1 ), for different number of mfrs in series (n = 1, 2, 5, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 and oo) are shown in fig.2. as the number of tanks approaches infinity, the response approaches an impulse output with a time lag of average residence time r ( 8 = 1) of the entire system. this response is characteristic of a piug flow reactor with delta input. by definition of plug flow, each cross-section should correspond to an ideal mixer. therefore intuitively a plug flow reactor can be considered as infinite mixed flow reactors in series. this is validated here mathematically, by proving that the function e((}) tend~ towards a dirac delta function with point of impulse at e = 1, as n tends towards oo, which is the response of a plug flow reactor to an impulse input. using stirling's approximation, n! =nn e-n .j21rn and rearranging, eq.( 1) can be written as e{-n(-in9-l-t6)-ln9+(112)1nn) e(fj)= .fbi (2) (3) to show that eq.(3) approaches a dirac delta function when n tends towards infinity, the following have to be proved [5]: such that e(fl) = oo =0 ... 8=1 o:t=l j e(8)dfj = l (4a) (4b) 192 2 fig.l schematic ofmfrs in series at 8= 1, fromeq.(3), e(8)= jn en n therefore as n approaches=, e((j) tends towards oo. (5) 109 8 7 6 & 200 ~ 5 4 for values of e in the intervals [0,1) and (1, oo], -ln8 -1 +8 is always positive. therefore, the leading term in the exponent of eq.(3) i.e. -n(-ln8 -1+8) tends towards·oo as n approaches oo. so in these intervals, e((j) tends 0 -~:=.::~~~!zll_:c~ss~~=~ towards 0 as n tends to =. now, since negative values ofe are inadmissible, j e(o)d8 = j e(8)d8 = ~ j 8n-te-ne d8 (6) _.,.. o (n -1)! o using the definition of gamma function [5], j= 8 n-1e-ne db = r(n) = (n -1)! nn nn 0 (7) therefore, from eq.(6), je(o)do = 1 n?.1 (8) 0 thus for infinite mfrs in series, the function e( 8) converges to a dirac delta function characteristic of a plug flow reactor. conclusion using an impulse input, the equivalence of a series of infinite mixed flow reactors to a plug flow reactor is proved mathematically in the time domain. the proof is less complicated compared to the previous works in the literature. symbols e( 8) dimensionless exit age distribution function n number of mfrs in series t time variable, s 0 0.5 1 8 1.5 fig.2 rtd curves for mfrs in series greek letters e dimensionless time 1: average residence time, s r(n) gamma function references 2 1. villermaux j.: genie de la reaction chimique, tee et doc, lavoisier, paris, 1993 2. molin p. and gervais p.: aiche j., 1995, 41, 1346-1348 3. chenw. y.: hung. j. ind. chern., 1995,23,21-24 4. levenspiel 0.: chemical reaction engineering, 3rd edn., john wiley & sons, new york, pp. 321-323, 1999 5. wylie c. r.: advanced engineering mathematics, 3rd edn., mcgraw-hill, new york, 1966 page 193 page 194 microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 35-38 (2008) application of nir spectroscopy by determination of quality properties of vegetable oils and their derivatives a. fülöp , m. krár, j. hancsók department of hydrocarbon and coal processing, university of pannonia, p. o. box 158., h-8201 veszprém, hungary phone: +3688624414, fax:+3688624520 e-mail: fulopa@almos.uni-pannon.hu this study shows that near-infrared spectroscopy is a reliable technique to determine the concentration of the key fatty acid (fa) components (oleic, linoleic, linolenic acid), the acid number, the iodine value and the kinematic viscosity at 40 and 100 °c in sunflower and rapeseed oils. to establish the chemometric model, a calibration set of 36 rapeseed oil samples and 47 sunflower oil samples were used and 51 oil samples were used for external validation. all samples were measured on a bruker-mpa spectrometer in transmittance mode. the samples were scanned in a wave number range of 12000–4000 cm-1 with a resolution of 2 cm-1. the sample scan time was 32 scans. to develop and optimize the calibration models partial least squares (pls) method was used with cross validation. the result of the experiment showed that this technique is sufficiently accurate for estimating the fa composition, the acid number, the iodine value and the kinematic viscosity at 40 and 100 °c in sunflower and rapeseed oil. the calibration results had root mean square error of cross validation (rmsecv) for oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, acid number, iodine value, viscosity at 40 °c, viscosity at 100 °c of 0.395, 0.451, 0.0932, 0.208, 0.418, 0.12, 0.0237 respectively and determination coefficient (r2) (%) for the same properties of 99.96, 99.97, 99.95, 99.47, 99.88, 99.7, 99.22 respectively. keywords: near infrared spectroscopy, sunflower oil, rapeseed oil introduction the rising population and thus, the increasing amount of motor vehicles on the world cause higher and higher fuel consumption. besides this, the amount of the fossil fuels is decreasing in the world. that’s why the research of possibilities how the use of fossil fuels can be reduced is a very important challenge nowadays. vegetable oils and their derivatives are one of the most important sources to substitute fossil fuels. besides, the use of vegetable oils and their derivatives as fuel reduces the amount of carbon-dioxide in the air, because the emitted carbon-dioxide will be used for photosynthesis by the growing oil plants. for that reason the determination of the quality of vegetable oils and their derivatives became important not only for the use as edible oil but also for the use as fuel. the near-infrared spectroscopy (nir) is a wellestablished analytical technique based on the absorption of electromagnetic energy in the region of 12000–4000 cm−1. this type of technique allows the determination of physical and chemical properties of multi-component systems (gasoline, diesel oil, vegetable oil, etc.) in a fast and non-destructive way, without requiring complex sample pre-treatments [1-2]. in the nir region, a component typically absorbs at more than one wavelength. on the other hand, absorbance at a given wavelength may have contributions from more than one property. therefore, a wellestablished tool like partial least square (pls) was used for the determination of the vegetable oil properties. the correlation between the absorption of nir radiation and the analytical reference data can be improved through the use of specific spectra pre-processing methods. preprocessing of spectra reduces variations that not directly related to the given property, such as random noise, baseline drift, etc [3-4]. in respect of using vegetable oils and their derivatives as fuel there are many significant quality properties that we have to measure such as fatty acid composition, acid number, iodine value etc. in this study we dealt with the determination of the concentration of the key fatty acid (fa) components (oleic, linoleic, linolenic acid), the acid number, the iodine value and the kinematic viscosity at 40 and 100 °c in sunflower and rapeseed oils. materials and methods oil samples the 134 different types of rapeseed and sunflower oil samples were obtained from various locations of hungary. the sample set was split in to two parts: 83 samples were used to establish and develop the 36 chemometric models and 51 samples were used for external validation. the properties of the samples were determined by the appropriate en iso standard methods. spectra collection and data pre-treatment to perform the nir spectroscopic analysis a brukermpa near-infrared spectrometer was used that works with the opus controller software. all samples were measured in transmittance mode in a wave number range of 12000–4000 cm-1 with a resolution of 2 cm-1. the sample scan time was 32 scans. the spectral data of the oil samples were collected as absorbance spectra. the raw nir spectrums are shown in fig. 1. for data pre-processing two manipulation methods were applied: the base line correction and the smoothing with smoothing points of 25. the manipulated spectrums are shown in fig. 2. the opus software applied further data treatment methods during the optimization process if it is necessary. a bs or ba nc e un it wavenumber, cm-1 figure 1: the raw spectrums of the samples a bs or ba nc e un it wavenumber, cm-1 figure 2: the manipulated spectrums of the samples calibration in our experiment 36 rapeseed and 47 sunflower oil samples were used for calibration. for the better accuracy all samples were measured two times. to create the chemometric models opus software used the partial least-square (pls) regression in cross validation mode. the advantage of this technique is that a stable, robust and accurate chemometric model could be created even if the calibration set contains fewer number of calibration samples. the goodness of a model could be expressed by the root mean square error of cross validation (rmsecv) and with the determination coefficient (r2). 37 the better the model is the rmsecv more converges to zero and the r2 more converges to 100%. the chemometric models can be improved by model optimization. in the optimization process the software applies variations of many different mathematical data treatment method in different wavelength range (that we can set) to select the best approximation. the selection is based on the value of the rmsecv. results calibration results after model optimization, the results of the best approximations are shown in figs 3-9. these figures are the diagrammatic representation of the calibration results, where the true values of the vegetable oil properties were plotted as a function of the predicted values. the true values are the values that were determined by the appropriate en iso standard methods, the predicted values are estimated by nir. in the figures the straight line represents the true, the dots represent the predicted values of the given property. figure 3: the true concentration vs. predicted concentration values of oleic acid figure 4: the true concentration vs. predicted concentration values of linoleic acid figure 5: the true concentration vs. predicted concentration values of linolenic acid figure 6: the true vs. predicted values of acid number true value of iodine number , gi2/100g pr ed ic te d va lu e of io di ne n um be r, gi 2 /1 00 g figure 7: the true vs. predicted values of iodine number true value of kinematic viscosity at 40°c, mm2/s pr ed ic te d va lu e of k in em at ic v is co si ty a t 4 0° c , m m 2 /s figure 8: the true vs. predicted values of kinematic viscosity at 40 °c rmsecv=0.395 r2=99.96 rmsecv=0.451 r2=99.97 rmsecv=0.093 r2=99.95 rmsecv=0.208 r2=99.47 rmsecv=0.418 r2=99.88 rmsecv=0.120 r2=99.71 38 true value of kinematic viscosity at 100°c, mm2/s pr ed ic te d va lu e of k in em at ic vi sc os ity a t 1 00 °c , m m 2 /s figure 9: the true vs. predicted values of kinematic viscosity at 100 °c the figures indicate that the dots match the straight line well enough, so the predicted values are very close to the true values in respect of all properties. the numerical forms of the results are summarized in table 1. in this table the rmsecv and r2 values are shown for each property. table 1: the results of the calibration property rmsecv r2, % oleic acid concentration 0.395 99.96 linoleic acid concentration 0.451 99.97 linolenic acid concentration 0.093 99.95 acid number 0.208 99.47 iodine value 0.418 99.88 kinematic viscosity (40 °c) 0.120 99.71 kinematic viscosity (100 °c) 0.024 99.22 table 1 shows that the r2 values are above 99% and the rmsecv values are under one in all cases. according to the calibration results we found that the created calibration models are suitable for the determination of vegetable oil properties. external validation results in the course of external validation the established calibration models were tested with samples that properties are quantitatively known, and were excluded from the calibration set. as a result of this experiment the efficiency of the models could be concluded by the root mean squared error of prediction (rmsep) and the determination coefficient (r2). the better the prediction is the rmsep more converges to zero and the r2 more converges to 100%. the external validation was executed with 51 different types of rapeseed and sunflower oil samples which spectrums were acquired with the same conditions that were applied at the calibration. the results of the experiment are shown in table 2. table 2: the results of the external validation property rmsep r2, % oleic acid concentration 1.092 99. 89 linoleic acid concentration 1.194 99.86 linolenic acid concentration 0.234 99.88 acid number 0.639 91.47 iodine value 1.494 99.57 kinematic viscosity (40 °c) 0.239 99.59 kinematic viscosity (100 °c) 0.028 99.40 apart from the acid number the r2 values are higher than 99% in all cases and the rmsep values are adequately small as well. conclusions according to the results it may be concluded that the nir technique is applicable for the determination of vegetable oil properties. the advantages of this method are the short analysis time, the non-destructive nature, no complex sample pre-treatment is needed and physical properties can also be determined. the difficulty of the technique is that calibration models must be created for the determinations with the help of a carefully collected calibration set. references 1. kim k. s., park s. h., choung m. g., jang y. s.: journal of crop science and biotechnology, (2007) 15. 2. baptistap., felizardo p., menezes j. c., neiva correia j.: analytica chimica acta, (2008) 153. 3. felizardo p., baptista p., menezes j. c., neiva correia j.: analytica chimica acta, (2007) 107. 4. fülöp a., magyar sz., krár m., hancsók j.: proceedings of 43rd international petroleum conference, (2007) 7. rmsecv=0.024 r2=99.22 microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 34. pp. 51-54 (2006) magnetic field analysis on electromagnetic water treatment device v. kozic1, j. krope2, l. c. lipus 3 and i. ticar4 1zdraviliško naselje 14, 9252 radenci, slovenia 2faculty of chemistry and chemical technology, 3faculty of mechanical engineering, 4faculty of electrical engineering and computer science, university of maribor, smetanova 17, 2000 maribor, slovenia a short review of magnetic water treatment devices is given. analysis of electromagnetic industrial units named em i – iv is presented. the distribution of magnetic flux density of the models was measured and analyzed by the computer program electromagnetic field analysis tools. results for em iv show that an improvement can be achieved by replacing a metallic tooth, used for placing the washer ring, with nonmagnetic material. keywords: magnetic water treatment, scale prevention, magnetism introduction scale deposits by natural waters often lead to numerous technical and economical problems in industrial plants and domestic equipment by blocking the water flow in pipes or limiting heat transfer in heat exchangers. traditional chemical methods for scale control are effective but significantly change the solution composition and are expensive. therefore, an interest for physical methods is rising. one of these methods is magnetic water treatment (mwt), where water flows through a magnetic field. in the literature, there is a number of reports about mwt being effective [1-4]. when the device is properly designed, hard scale is prevented by forming sludge or alternatively, linings with low mechanical strength, which can be easily removed. the mechanism how magnetic fields affect the crystallization of calcium carbonate, is still the matter of research. it is the most possible that treatment leads to the formation of calcium carbonate particles in the bulk of the scaling water, which cannot precipitate on the walls of distribution pipes and other equipment [5]. commercial mwt devices are available in various configurations from numerous manufacturers, some using electromagnets and others using single or arrays of permanent magnets with different orientations of the magnetic field [6]. the most effective arrangements are those with perpendicular or radial magnetic fields (fig. 1). furthermore, magnetic fields can be alternating (fig. 1/a, b) or homogeneous (fig. 1/c). alternating fields seem to be more effective [5,7]. some mwt units are electromagnets using electrical input with alternating current or direct current voltage. many interesting results of laboratory research were found when samples were exposed to static magnetic field [4,8], but better results are expected when water flows through the magnetic field [9,10]. for practical use, there is a general recommendation that water flows through the magnetic field with the velocity from 0.1 to 2 m/s and the magnetic flux density is more than 0.05 t. fig.1: some basic types of magnetic fields: (a) perpendicular (parallel arrangement of magnets) (b) radial (magnetic kernel in ferromagnetic tube) (c) homogeneous (horse-shoe magnets) in this article we describe electromagnetic units named em (shown in fig. 2 with basic data given in table 1). they have alternating current electrical input and are designed for different water flow rates (i-iv). 52 the housing is iron-casting electroplating with nickel. the inner plate is from steel. the electromagnetic winding is a solenoid with rectified alternating currents, which produce pulsating magnetic field. water enters in the center on the top of the device, overflows the inner plate in radial directions, passes the rubber ring down into the lower zone, flows to the center of the inner plate and leaves out of the device. bb1 a fig.2: electromagnetic device, model em (1 – housing, 2 – rubber ring, 3 – solenoid, 4 – inner plate) table 1: basic data for em electromagnetic devices dimensions (mm) type flow rate (l/min) power (w) a b b1 connection em i 10 – 25 40 168 54 40 no 20 (3/4) em ii 15 – 40 55 168 54 40 no 26 (1) em iii 25 – 60 75 220 76 51 no 32 (r 5/4) em iv 150 400 110 320 100 52 no 65 (r 2 1/2) measurements of the magnetic field in the device em i electromagnetic measurements and characteristic results of the model em i were made in the laboratories at faculty of electrical engineering and computer science and faculty of mechanical engineering, university of maribor. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 radius, r (mm) m ag ne tic fl ux d en si ty , b ( m t ) solenoid in the air solenoid in the housing fig.3: magnetic flux density of solenoid (a) in the air and (b) of the same solenoid in the housing with inner plate in em i device. radial distributions of the magnetic flux density b(r) are presented in fig. 3. the magnetic flux density was measured for solenoid (a) in the air and (b) with inner plate and housing together. because the value of b should be higher than 0.05 t for good efficiency of a magnetic device, em i model has good values of b from radius r1 = 30 mm to r2 = 45 mm. relative effective area ( ) ( )221222122 /1/ rrrrr −=− πππ is 56% of whole area of the inner plate. figure 4 shows the measurements for magnetization curve (magnetic flux density, b (t), versus magnetic field intensity, h (a/m)) of housing and inner plate for em i model. 0,00 0,25 0,50 0,75 1,00 1,25 1,50 1,75 2,00 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 magnetic field intensity, h (a/m) m ag ne tic fl ux d en si ty , b ( t ) inner plate housing fig.4: magnetization curve of housing (grade 350) and inner plate (fe360b) for em i device. conditions of v and b for effective operating of mwt devices were checked. from measurement result of em i device (fig. 1), it can be seen that the zone of efficient magnetic field (b > 50 mt) is from r1 = 30 mm to r2 = 45 mm. water flux is for radial flow expressed with the relationship: qv = 2·π·h·v (1) 53 parameters are: r = radial distance on the inner plate h = thickness of the gap = 1 cm v = water flow velocity velocity v decreases with increasing of r, being the lowest at the edge of the inner plate. for fulfillment of the condition v > 0.1 m/s in whole area of the inner plate, the water flux should be 17 l/min (calculated by eq.1 for v = 0.1 m/s at the edge of the plate). numerical calculations of the magnetic field in the device em i the distribution of magnetic flux density was also analyzed numerically. the computer program electromagnetic field analysis tools (elefant2d, elefant3d) was used. it is developed by igte, tu graz with the purpose for solving two(2d) and three dimensional (3d) problems in electromagnetic fields by the finite element method. the program enables us to determine the distribution and the magnitude of static and time depending electromagnetic fields. it comprises: 2d and 3d input graphical processors for description of a device geometry, boundary conditions, materials and sources, the main program with different mathematical numerical calculation possibilities (scalar or vector potentials) and the postprocessor for numerical and 2d or 3d graphical presentation of device’s parameters. figure 5 presents 3d mesh for em model. fig.5: 3d – mesh of em model the numerical calculation was made for dimensions of the model em iv in 2d-axisisymmetric mesh. figure 6 presents the magnetic flux density distribution. it is obvious that ''a magnetic bridge'' occurs due to the metallic tooth used for placing the rubber ring. the magnetic field very weakly penetrates into the zone of water flow and the inner plate. for constructing an improved model, a good solution was replacing the metallic tooth with a nonmagnetic ring. results are presented in fig. 7. distribution of the magnetic flux density is now favorable. magnetic field in water zone is stronger and perpendicular to the water flow direction. both facts are important for the effectiveness of the device. the comparison of the magnetic flux density curve between the manufacturer’s and the improved model is presented in fig. 8. fig.6: the distribution of the magnetic flux density, bz, in the manufacturer’s model em fig.7: the distribution of the magnetic flux density, bz, in the improved model em fig.8: distribution of magnetic flux density for em model and for the improved model. results of the numerical analysis of the improved model em iv (fig. 8) show that the zone of efficient magnetic field (b > 50 mt) is from r1 = 60 mm to r2 = 105 mm at the edge of the inner plate. relative effective area is 67%. 54 conclusion we analyzed em magnetic devices, which have been used in industry for many years and show good results in scale prevention. laboratory measurements and numerical calculations with elefant computer program of magnetic field distribution in these devices are in good agreement. it was found that the metallic tooth considerably reduces the magnetic flux density in the water zone. therefore, we made a computer simulation with nonmagnetic material, which gave much better distribution of the magnetic field. references 1. donaldson j. d., grimes s.: lifting the scales from our pipes; new scient., 1988, 117, 43-46. 2. wang y., babchin a. j., cherneyi l. t., chow r. s., sawatzky r. p.: rapid onset of calcium carbonate crystallization under the influence of a magnetic field; water research, 1997,vol.31, no.2, 346-350. 3. parsons s. a., wang b. l., judd s. j., stephenson t.: magnetic treatment of calcium carbonate scale – effect of ph control; water research, 1997, vol.31, no.2, 339-342. 4. coey j. m. d., cass s.: magnetic water treatment; journal of magnetism and magnetic materials, 2000, 209, 71-74. 5. gabrielli c., lauhari r., maurin g., keddam m.: magnetic water treatment for scale prevention; water research, 2001, vol.35, no.13, 3249-3259. 6. gruber c. e., carda d. d.: performance analysis of permanent magnet type water treatment devices; wsa research report, water quality association, 1981. 7. oshitani j., uehara r., higashitani k.: magnetic effects on electrolyte solutions in pulse and alternating fields; journal of colloid and interface science, 1999, 209, 374-379. 8. higashitani k., kage a., katamura s., imai k., hatade s.: effects of magnetic field on the formation caco3 particles; journal of colloid and interface science, 1993, 156, 90-95. 9. busch k. w., busch m. a.: laboratory studies on magnetic water treatment and their relationship to a possible mechanism for scale reduction; desalination, 1997, 109, 131-148. 10. lipus l. c., krope j., crepinsek l.: dispersion destabilization in magnetic water treatment; journal of colloid and interface science, 2001, 235, 60-66. 11. kozic v., lipus l.c.: magnetic water treatment for less tenacious scale. journal of chemical information and computer science, 2003, vol. 43, no. 6, 1815-1819. hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprem vol. 30. pp. 167170 (2002) a fuzzy logic approach to the control of the drying process m. baldea, v. m. cristea andp. s. agachi (department of chemistry and chemical engineering, "babes-bolyai" university, 11, arany janos st., 3400 clujnapoca, romania) received: march 8, 2002 the paper presents the simulation results of an advanced control algorithm used for the control of the drying process of electric insulators. the industrial batch drier is modelled and three different approaches are taken for its control. in order to investigate its capabilities, fuzzy logic control (flc) is used for controlling the air temperature in the drying chamber. the results describing the controlled variables behaviour under the influence of some typical disturbances are compared with data obtained using model predictive control (mpc) and traditional pid control. the requested drying program consists of a ramp-constant profile, obtained by manipulating the air and natural gas flow rate. moisture content control is actually achieved by controlling the air temperature inside the drying chamber. simulation results reveal clear benefits of the flc approach over the other control methods subjected to our investigation, and prove real incentives for industrial implementation. keywords: batch drying, fuzzy logic, model predictive control, non linear control introduction the high-voltage electric insulator production implies a two-stage batch drying process. during the first step, the moisture content of the drying product is reduced from 18-20% to 0.4% in special gas heated chambers. the second step is carried out in high temperature ovens, in order to achieve an even lower moisture content. gas and air flow rates are controlled according to a special program, during a period of about 100 hours, in order to obtain the desired moisture content and avoiding the risk of unsafe tensions in the drying products. an analytical dynamic model of the process is derived for model predictive control purposes. model description mass and energy balance equations are used to describe the dynamic behaviour of the system. the main studied outputs of the model are: moisture content of the drying product x, outlet air temperature t0 and air humidity x0 ; the input variables: natural gas flow rate if and mass . flow rate of fresh air m,1 • the chamber is divided into three sections as shown in fig.l. section 1 represents contact information: e~mail: mbaldea@chem.ubbcluj.ro the air volume within the drying chamber, section 2 the direct surroundings of the drying product. section 3 represents the drying product itself. the mass balance of steam within section 1 is described by . . ( . . ) v dxo (1) mal ·xf +ma ·xma +mai ·xoacfl. pa ·dt with vach being the volume of the air in section 1. in section 2, the steam fluxes around the drying product are modelled by m ·(x -x)-m · dx ==.e_fy ·p ·x) (2) a o s dt dt \ 42 a with v a2 being the infinitesimal small volume of air in section 2. due to this fact, the last term of the equation can be neglected, which results in the differential equation dx = (x -x)· ma. dt " ms (3) as a result of differentiation of eq.(3) and assuming that, d!x!dr""' 0 the eq.( 1) becomes: ! = 1 ·(m"; ·x1 +m, ·x-(m .. +m"}x,}(4) v.,ch ·pa 168 fig. i description of the drying chamber in section 3, the behaviour of the drying good itself is described with a normalised diagram by means of the following equation [1, 2]: dx __ m., ·a dt m 5 s · (5) the drying velocity for the three periods of the drying process of a hygroscopic material are characterised by the diagrams of fig.2 [2]. this diagram a), only available by experiments and valid for the certain conditions can be normalized to b) according to: (6) it is assumed that x c is constant, not depending on the drying conditions, and that x equ only depends on relative air humidity, but no other factors. it is also assumed that all diagrams of the drying velocity for different drying conditions are geometrically similar. the equilibrium humidity x equ in dependence of the relative air humidity
-44.4 44.2 44 1 setpoint : 1 -~-· fuzzy logic -· mpc -pid 1.155 1.16 1.165 1.17 1.175 1.18 1.165 1.19 1.195 1.2 1.205 time [s) x 10' fig.s detailed presentation of the comparative behaviour of fl, mpc and pid control in the presence of the heating power disturbance profile on the air temperature. the setup of the simulated system is shown in fig3. performance testing was carried out for three significant disturbances typically occurring in the industrial practice: a 10 °c inlet air temperature t" drop (from 16 °c to 6 °c), a 10 %heating power capacity hf drop of natural gas and a 10% rise in the moisture content of the inlet air. the disturbances were 169 45.5 l se!point j ··-· fuzz.ylog[c -· mpc -pid 44 • 1.155 1.16 1.185 1.17 1.175 1.18 1.185 1.19 1.195 1.2 1.205 1irre [s] x to' fig.6 detailed presentation of the comparative behaviour of fl, mpc and pid control in the presence of the air inlet temperature drop disturbance 45.6 45.4 44.8 i setpoint l -··· fuzzy !ogle -· mpc -pid 44.6 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.2 1.21 1irne [s] xto' fig. 7 detailed presentation of the comparative behaviour of fl, mpc and pid control in the presence of the air inlet humidity increase disturbance introduced as steps at time t=l16000 s. the simulation results for case of the heating power disturbance are presented in figs.4 and 5. the figures show the response of the controlled variable over the entire time interval and a detailed representation of the period when the disturbance acts and is eliminated. the behaviour of three investigated control methods (fuzzy logic controlflc, model predictive control-mpc and pid control) is presented comparatively. figs.s-7 are magnifications of the area marked as detail a on fig.4. fig.6 presents a detail of the controlled output temperature for the air inlet temperature drop disturbance and fig. 7 represents in the same manner the case of the disturbance consisting in a humidity increase of the inlet air. with respect to setpoint tracking performance, the . results reveal a good behaviour in case of pid and mpc, fl control featuring superior abilities. as it can be seen, flc is very accurate, following with precision both the constant and the ramp sections of the temperature setpoint scheduling· function. 170 63 2.755 2.76 2.755 2.77 2.775 2.78 2.785 2.79 2.795 time [s[ x 10s fig.8 detailed presentation of the ramp setpoint following performance of flc, mpc and pid control all control methods exhibit a low offset behaviour f?r the constant parts of the setpoint function. for the ramp sections, as in fig.8 (detail b on fig.4), the mpc and pid control proved to be less accurate than fl showing a larger offset. this accuracy of the fl control is largely due to the asymmetrical membership function definition. the definition takes into account the need for an asymmetric amplitude of the manipulated variable change (i.e. a controller response of higher amplitude to a negative error compared to a lower amplitude response for a positive error) in the ramp section of the setpoint function. . with respect to disturbance rejection performance, fl control showed a considerably shorter (more than 10 times) response time and smaller (more than five times) overshoot than the other control strategies. conclusions a comparative study of three control methods for the process of drying high voltage ceramic insulators (flc, mpc and pid) was carried out. setpoint tracking and disturbance rejection were investigated for disturbances typically occurring in the industrial practice. fuzzy logic clearly stands out as the preferable control method for the considered process, due to the good setpoint tracking performance, low overshoot and short settling time. flc is easy to implement and adapt in case of process modification due to its similarity with natural language. also, the controller's simple structure is another argument in favour of the industrial implementation of this control method. further research is envisioned for the control of the inferred moisture content of the drying product, with the implementation of an artificial intelligence based method for tuning the fl controller. references 1. van meel d. a.: chern. engng. sci., 1958, 9, 3644 2. krischer 0. and kast w.: die wissenschaftlichen grundlagen der trocknungstechnik, springerverlag, 1992 3. perry r. and chilton c.: chemical engineers' handbook, 5. edition, me graw hill,l973 4. fuzzy logic toolbox, for use with matlab®, user's guide v. 2.0, the mathworks, inc. natick, ma, 1999 5. russom.: ieee trans. fuzzy systems, 1998, 6(3), 372-388 6. garcia c. e., preit m. p. and morari m.: automatica, 1989, 25(3), 335-348 7. cristea v. m., baldea m. and agaciit s. p.: model predictive control of an industrial dryer, european symposium on computer aided process engineering-10, florence 2000 page 170 page 171 page 172 page 173 hungarian journal
of industry and chemistry vol. pp.45(1) pp. 5–8 (2017) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2017-0002 separation of gases by membranes: the effects of pollutants on the stability of membranes nándor nemestóthy* research institute of bioengineering, membrane technology and energetics, university of pannonia, egyetem u. 10, veszprém, h-8200, hungary the long-term stability of membranes is determined mainly by their sensitivity to pollutants. their stability was tested using a novel, multichannel measuring system, which is based on pressure differences. this measuring system is suitable to determine the changes in permeability of polymer membranes. the damaging effects of h2s, btx and n-dodecane were investigated in terms of polyimide gas separation membranes using nitrogen gas. keywords: multichannel test equipment, pressure difference, hydrogen sulphide, btx 1. introduction previously, it was thought that the stability of membranes is determined by the mechanical stress (shear) and the natural aging of polymers. recently, however, it has been confirmed that their stability is limited mainly by the sensitivity of membranes to certain pollutants. these aggressive compounds, pollutants, e.g. chlorine, hydrogen sulphide, hydrocarbons, etc., may damage the structure of the polymer, thus its physical and chemical properties change, and consequently the permselectivity of the membrane changes, as well. it is known that polymeric reverse osmosis membranes are sensitive to strong oxidising agents, especially chlorine compounds [1], therefore, intensive research has been conducted to avoid or at least reduce any damage [2-3]. similar levels of membrane degradation are observed in proton-exchange membrane (pem) fuel cells and batteries containing membranes, where oxidising compounds are in contact with the membranes, as well [4-5]. the stability of polymeric gas separation membranes has hardly been investigated. the long-term effects of h2s on inorganic membranes has been studied by australian researchers at low concentrations (50 ppm) [6]. however, h2s may not only cause long-term, but immediate damage, mainly in the form of swelling, which strongly influences the gas transport properties of membranes. koros and co-workers presented the effects of extremely high h2s concentrations on a polymer membrane (50,000 100,000 ppm) [7]. in the field of membrane technology, sensitivity can be measured by a sort of effectiveness unit. the *correspondence: nemesn@almos.uni-pannon.hu product of the concentration and time period yields a value where the effectiveness of the membrane decreases from 95 to 90 and then to 70% of its original value (e.g. 1000 ppm*hour means that the membrane was exposed to 1000 ppm of pollutant for 1 hour, or 0.1 ppm of pollutant for 10,000 hours during the tests). according to the literature these types of measurements have yet to be published for gas separation membranes, thus the aim of this work was to design, construct and operate a piece of test equipment that conducts reliable laboratory tests. for the determination of stability, direct and indirect methods can be used to measure the gas volumes passing through the membranes. direct methods are usually preferred, and – if the composition of the gas is known – are more exact than indirect ones. however, when the gas composition varies and small amounts of gases need to be measured, indirect methods are often more suitable. in this work an indirect method based on a pressure differential technique was chosen, where the pressure of a closed vessel is measured and the varying pressure yields information about the volume of the gas passing through the membrane. during the investigation the effects of pollutants on the permeability of nitrogen was to be studied. the following pollutants were used: compounds containing sulphur at associated gas btx mixture (benzene, toluene, xylene) heavy hydrocarbons in this research the aim was to determine quantitatively the effects of pollutants on the membranes to define the tolerance range of particular membranes. nemestóthy hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 6 figure 1. the small modules constructed for the tests 2. experimental for this series of measurements, polyimide gas separation membranes (synthesised by ube) were used. they were taken from a hollow fibre module and can accurately model the properties of industrial gas separation membranes. from the hollow fibres small modules containing 6 capillaries were constructed (fig.1) and their ends were closed, thus their tests were carried out in a “sack” configuration. in the design of the test system it was important that several parallel measurements should be conducted and the measuring channels combined with each other. the scheme of a measuring channel can be seen in fig.2 the gas was introduced into the measuring system through valve v1 (which can be adjusted by valve v2 if necessary). before measurements were taken the pressure of the vessel was checked by pressure transducer pt1. to start the test the pressure was adjusted by regulating valve pv1, which was checked by pressure transducer pt2. then the membrane was installed into the thermostatic system in a way that ensured its mobility was not restricted, thus the permeation of gas could not influence the flux. a photograph of the measuring system is shown in fig.3. for the permeability measurements nitrogen gas from a cylinder was used (99.5%; messer hungarogáz kft., hungary). the permeability of the membrane was determined from the pressure of the vessel and the transmembrane pressure measured on-line during the experiments. in the experiments, h2s, methyl mercaptan and ammonia (compounds containing s or n), oleic acid, ethyl figure 2. the scheme of the test system figure 3. the test system alcohol, moreover, a benzene-toluene-xylene mixture (btx) and n-dodecane (as a heavier hydrocarbon) were used as pollutants. for the stability experiments the small membrane modules were put in a closed vessel (fig.4) where the headspace was saturated with the given pollutant. the vessels were placed in a thermostatic incubator at 27 °c usually for between 1 and 7 days. certain materials (e.g. btx) damaged the epoxy resin glue used to adhere the fibres of the membranes, therefore, these experiments were repeated using polyether-sulfone glue instead. 3. results the nitrogen permeability of the membranes was determined before and after the incubations. in the preliminary experiments, the ammonia solution and methyl mercaptan severely damaged the surface of the membranes, thus no flux could be measured. oleic acid and ethyl alcohol hardly influenced the flux, while btx, h2s and n-dodecane changed the permeability of nitrogen considerably. for further investigation of the pollutants an experimental design was constructed, using appropriate figure 4: the membranes in the closed vessel the effects of pollutants on the stability of membranes 45(1) pp. 5–8 (2017) 7 table 1. the parameters of the experimental design pollutant cmin ppm cav ppm cmax ppm tmin d tav d tmax d h2s 100,000 300,000 500,000 1 3.5 7 btx mixt. 1,000 750 500 1 3.5 7 dodecane 1,000 5,500 10,000 1 3.5 7 statistical methods. the parameters selected were the concentrations of the pollutants (minimum, maximum and average) and the incubation time (minimum, maximum and average). the statistica 8 computer program was applied to the design presented in table 1. firstly the effect of h2s on the nitrogen permeability of the membranes was measured. the experimental results are presented in fig.5. it can be seen that the permeability of nitrogen increased even when the concentrations of pollutants were low and rose by using higher concentrations and longer periods of exposure. from the h2s concentration and the incubation time it was possible to calculate a special parameter of exposure with the unit of ppm*h. permeability was presented as a function of this parameter (fig.6), where an almost linear relationship was observed. the results suggest that the process can be described as a first-order reaction, which means that no safe limit can be determined where h2s is regarded as harmless, on the contrary, it should be considered at all times. the effect of the btx mixture was studied using a similar methodology. the results are summarized in fig.7. this figure shows that the permeability of nitrogen increased at low concentrations of the btx mixture. at higher concentrations and over longer periods of time, no further significant changes were observed. the exposure parameter was also calculated in the unit of ppm*h and permeability was presented as its function (fig.8). the diagram can be described as a saturation-type curve. 2**(2-0) design; ms residual=49886.27 > 2000 < 2000 < 1500 < 1000 < 500 < 0 figure 5. the effect of h2s on the nitrogen permeability exposure [m ppm * h] 0 20 40 60 80 100 p e rm e a b il it y c h a n g e [ % ] 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 figure 6. permeability changes against exposure to h2s 2**(2-0) design; ms residual=2675.592 > 400 < 360 < 310 < 260 < 210 < 160 < 110 < 60 figure 7: the effect of the btx mixture in the last series of experiments, the effect of exposure to n-dodecane was investigated experimentally. the results are presented in fig.9. n-dodecane caused – unlike h2s and btx – a reduction in the permeability of nitrogen even at low concentrations. the flux fell to zero at higher concentrations and over longer incubation periods. permeability was investigated as a function of exposure (fig.10). the process can be described as a first-order reaction, thus the effect of heavier hydrocarbons, e.g. n-dodecane, should always be considered. exposure [k ppm * h] 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 p e rm e a b ili ty c h a n g e [ % ] 0 100 200 300 400 figure 8: permeability changes against btx exposure nemestóthy hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 8 2**(2-0) design; ms residual=40.32141 > 100 < 96 < 76 < 56 < 36 figure 9: the effect of n-dodecane 4. conclusion the long-term stability of polyimide gas separation membranes was tested against various pollutants: h2s, a btx mixture and n-dodecane. these compounds significantly affected the nitrogen permeability of the membranes which were described by using a special parameter of exposure. it was found that h2s and the btx mixture increased the permeability, while ndodecane reduced the permeability of the membranes. further investigations are planned to investigate the effect of other pollutants, moreover, to determine the permeability of additional gases, e.g. carbon dioxide, methane, etc. acknowledgement we acknowledge the financial support of széchenyi 2020 under the efop-3.6.1-16-2016-00015 project. this research was supported by the jános bolyai research scholarship of the hungarian academy of sciences. references [1] glater, j.; hong, s.k.; elimelech, m.: the search for a chlorine-resistant reverse osmosis membrane, desalination, 1994 95(3), 325-345 doi: 10.1016/0011-9164(94)00068-9 exposure [ k ppm * h] 0 50 100 150 200 p e rm e a b ili ty c h a n g e [ % ] 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 figure 10. change in permeability against exposure to n-dodecane [2] zhang, y.; zhao, c.; yan, h.; pan, g.; guo, m.; na, h.; liu, y.: highly chlorine-resistant multilayer reverse osmosis membranes based on sulfonated poly(arylene ether sulfone) and poly(vinyl alcohol), desalination, 2014 336, 58-63 doi: 10.1016/j.desal.2013.12.034 [3] gohil, j.m.; suresh, a.k.: chlorine attack on reverse osmosis membranes: mechanisms and mitigation strategies, j. membr. sci., 2017 541, 108-126 doi: 10.1016/j.memsci.2017.06.092 [4] huang, x.; pu, y.; zhou, y.; zhang, y.; zhang, h.: in-situ and ex-situ degradation of sulfonated polyimide membrane for vanadium redox flow battery application, j. membr. sci., 2017 526, 281292 doi: 10.1016/j.memsci.2016.09.053 [5] lapicque, f.; belhadj, m.; bonnet, c.; pauchet, j.; thomas, y.: a critical review on gas diffusion micro and macroporous layers degradations for improved membrane fuel cell durability, j. power sources, 2016 336, 40-53 doi: 10.1016/j.jpowsour.2016.10.037 [6] uhlmann, d.; smart, s.; diniz da costa, j.c.: h2s stability and separation performance of cobalt oxide silica membranes, j. membr. sci., 2011 380(1), 48-54 doi: 1016/j.memsci.2011.06.025 [7] kraftschik, b.; koros, w.j.; johnson, j.r.; karvan, o.: dense film polyimide membranes for aggressive sour gas feed separations, j. membr. sci., 2013 428, 608-619 doi: 10.1016/j.memsci.2012.10.025 microsoft word 16.05 bobek.docx hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 44(1) pp. 51–54 (2016) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0006 selective hydrogen sulphide removal from acid gas by alkali chemisorption in a jet reactor janka bobek,* dóra rippel-pethő, éva molnár, and róbert bocsi department of chemical engineering science, university of pannonia, egyetem str. 10, veszprém, 8200, hungary natural gas is a primary energy source that contains a number of light paraffins. it also contains several undesirable components, such as water, ammonia, hydrogen sulphide, etc. in our study, a selective hydrogen sulphide removal process was achieved by alkali chemisorption in a custom-designed jet reactor. several model gas compositions (co2-h2s-n2) were evaluated to find parameters that enable h2s absorption instead of co2. the negative effect of the presence of co2 in the raw gas on the efficiency of h2s removal was observed. the beneficial effect of the low residence time (less than 1 s) on the efficiency of h2s removal was recognized. optimal operational parameters were defined to reach at least a 50% efficiency of h2s removal and minimal alkali consumption. keywords: acid gas, h2s selective removal, co2, competition with h2s, chemisorption 1. introduction natural gas is one of our primary energy sources, which contains mainly methane. however, it us comprised of several undesirable components like carbon dioxide (co2), hydrogen sulphide (h2s), ammonia (nh3), water (h2o), etc. [1]. table 1 shows a typical composition of natural gas [2]; however, the content significantly depends on locality. in most cases, natural gas contains h2s in various quantities between 10 to 20,000 ppm [1]. the gases with a measurable amount of h2s are called sour gases. the acid gases are defined as gases containing some acidic component such as co2 or h2s [3]. the h2s containing hydrocarbon gases causes problems during the delivery, processing, and storage. h2s is converted into so2 during combustion, which poses a health hazard and causes acid rain, smog. in the presence of water, acid components cause corrosion in pipelines and containers. consequently, h2s removal from natural gas is absolutely necessary [3]. there are several methods for reducing the h2s content of natural gas. membrane techniques also exist, but the adsorption and absorption processes are the most widespread. in the adsorption process, the fixed bed construction is the most common. the adsorber is usually filled with metal ions (iron, copper, zinc, cobalt, etc.) and an impregnated solid host (zeolite, activatedcarbon, etc.). the disadvantage of this technique is the huge energy demand of adsorber regeneration. in the absorption process, one of the main points is the high ph value of the medium due to h2s dissociation. there *correspondence: bobekj@almos.uni-pannon.hu are numerous solvents for absorbing h2s, namely alcanol-amines (mea, dea, dipa, tea, mdea, etc.), alkali-hydroxides (koh, naoh), water, and ammonia. the alcanol-amines and the alkali-hydroxides are the most efficient. the alcanol-amines are widely used in h2s removal, but their selectivity can be problematic and foaming appears during the process [4]. the use of alkali-hydroxides seems to be the most efficient process. by choosing the correct parameters, such as residence time, ph, solvent concentration, and intake, the procedure can be h2s selective. in an alkalihydroxide medium competitive chemisorption takes place between co2 and h2s. although co2 is a stronger acid than h2s, it is a slower adsorber, thus h2s absorption can be achieved over a short residence time. intensive phase connection and fast phase separation afterwards are essential steps to facilitate a h2s selective process [2]. the spray technique is a widespread method for the intensification of the reaction between the reactants. the pneumatic nozzles act as two-phase sprayers, because the gas at high speed breaks up the liquid into little droplets [5]. table 1. a typical composition of natural gas [2]. component concentration (%, m3/m3) methane (ch4) 97 nitrogen (n2) 0.936 ethane (c2h6) 0.919 carbon dioxide (co2) 0.527 propane (c3h8) 0.363 butane (c4h10) 0.162 oxygen (o2) 0-0.800 noble gases (ar, he, ne) trace other (e.g. h2s) 0-0.001 bobek, rippel-pethő, molnár, and bocsi hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 52 2. experimental the aim of our research is selective hydrogen sulphide removal from model gases that also contain co2. our goal is to achieve the highest h2s removal efficiency with the lowest alkali specificity as defined by the ratio of naoh and h2s expressed in moles. to find the parameters that support h2s removal several experiments were carried out in a custom-designed jet reactor (fig.1). owing to the construction of the reactor, the gas pressure, gas flow, alkali inlet flow, and alkali concentration were variable. all experiments were carried out at 30 bar total pressure. the absorbent was an aqueous naoh solution of different concentrations, such as 0.5, 1.5, and 2.5% (g/g). the model gas mixtures (table 2) were produced in an acid-proof gas mixing bridge. for the first set of samples the h2s content of the model gas mixtures was kept approximately constant; thus, the effect of co2 could be studied. for the last three samples, the co2 content was kept approximately constant; thus, the sensitivity of the process with regards to the variation of h2s concentration could be investigated. 3. results and analysis first, the effect of naoh concentration, naoh inlet flow, gas flow (residence time), and co2 concentration were investigated on the efficiency of h2s removal. 3.1. effect of residence time to observe the effect of residence time on the efficiency of h2s removal, the gas flow rate as a single parameter was varied. by increasing the gas flow rate, the residence time decreased. the gas flow rates were 3.9, 3.2, 2.4, and 1.6 n m3 h-1, which correspond to residence time rates of 0.05, 0.06, 0.09, and 0.13 s, respectively. fig.2 shows the effect of decreasing residence time. at a constant specific alkali value, the efficiency of h2s removal increased as a result of a decrease in residence time. furthermore, fig.2 also shows that the alkali specificity values decreased by raising the gas flow rate under a constant efficiency of h2s removal. 3.2. effect of naoh concentration the value of alkali specificity depends on the h2s content of the raw gas, the concentration and the flow rate of the absorbent. by increasing the concentration and the flow rate of the absorbent, the efficiency of h2s removal is increased. however, the efficiency could not be improved after a point by the absorbent concentration or flow rate, because the efficiency reached a nearly constant value while the alkali specificity continued to increase (fig.3). 3.3. effect of co2 concentration model gases of different co2 concentrations were used to study the effect of co2 concentration on the efficiency of h2s removal. the difference in h2s concentrations of model gases is a result of non-exact gas mixing, but this does not affect the comparability of the results. fig.4 shows that the efficiency of h2s removal is decreased by increasing co2 content. the competition between h2s and co2 in alkali absorbents is documented. figure 1. experimental device equipped with a 1. gas cylinder, 2. gas inlet, 3. alkali vessel, 4. chemical feeder pump, 5. alkali inlet, 6. reactor space, 7. nozzle, 8. separation space, 9. wastewater removal, 10. drop catcher, 11. outlet of purified gas, 12. gas sampling, and 13. gas analyzer. figure 2. effect of different residence times on the efficiency of h2s removal (gas mixture 4, 30 bar, 2.5% (g/g) naoh). table 2. composition of the tested model gas mixture samples. samples co2 % (m3/m3) h2s ppmv n2 % (m3/m3) 1 0 100 99.999 2 23 90 76.999 3 41 80 58.999 4 60 80 39.999 5 76 85 23.999 6 72 520 27.999 selective hydrogen sulphide removal 44(1) pp. 51–54 (2016) doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0006 53 3.4. effect of h2s concentration the influence of h2s concentration on the efficiency of h2s removal was investigated under a nearly constant co2 level (76 and 72% (m 3/m3)) and greatly differing h2s (85 and 520 ppmv) containing model gases. when the 85 ppmv h2s containing gas was compared to the 520 ppmv h2s sample, the alkali specificity value measured was five times less (fig.5). on the other hand, fig.5 shows that the efficiency of h2s removal does not depend on the h2s concentration in this process. the alkali hydroxide absorbent technique shows little sensitivity to the changes in the h2s content of the inlet gas. 3.5. optimization of operational parameters based on the above-mentioned results, our aim was to find the optimal operational parameters for model gases of any composition in order to achieve an h2s removal efficiency of at least 50%, while applying the minimal amount of alkali specificity. this efficiency of h2s removal can be achieved by increasing the naoh concentration. a low alkali specificity value can be achieved by adopting a low residence time. as shown in table 3, when the co2 content is below 50% (m3/m3), 1.5% (g/g) naoh absorbent is enough to achieve an h2s removal efficiency of 50% in the given type of reactor at a pressure of 30 bar. a gas flow rate of 2.5 nm3 h-1 with a 0.08 s residence time is needed. when the co2 content is above 50% (m 3/m3), 2.5% (g/g) naoh is necessary to achieve a removal efficiency of 50%. the applied gas flow rate needs to be 3.8 nm3 h-1 corresponding to 0.05 s residence time in the given type of reactor at a pressure of 30 bar. 4. discussion in this study, model gases with different h2s-co2-n2 contents were investigated in a custom-designed jet reactor. our aim was to achieve a h2s removal efficiency of at least 50% with minimal alkali consumption. the effect of the naoh, co2, and h2s concentrations, and the residence time on the efficiency of h2s removal was studied. during our experiments co2 absorption was not investigated because the dräger x-am 7000 analyser we used is only able to measure the co2 concentration in percent magnitude. a positive effect of low residence time on h2s removal was observed. by increasing the gas flow rate, the efficiency of h2s removal was increased under constant alkali specificity. if the efficiency of h2s removal is constant, the alkali specificity can be reduced by decreasing the residence time. by increasing the naoh concentration and flow rate, the efficiency of h2s removal was improved until a point after which it nearly remained constant while the alkali specificity was still rising. to study the effect of different co2 concentrations on the efficiency of h2s removal, several co2 concentrations were investigated under nearly the same h2s levels. the removal efficiency was reduced radically by increasing the co2 concentration. when comparing the model gases that contain different h2s concentrations, a reduction in the alkali specificity was observed. the alkali specificity value decreased as the h2s content increased. the removal efficiency remained constant irrespective of the h2s concentration of the model gases, which improves the efficiency of the alkali absorption process in terms of selective removal of h2s. figure 4. effect of different co2 concentrations on the efficiency of h2s removal (gas mixtures 0-5, 30 bar, 0.08 s residence time, 0.5% g/g naoh). figure 3. effect of different naoh concentrations on the efficiency of h2s removal (gas mixture 2, 30 bar, 0.2 s residence time). figure 5. effect of different h2s concentrations on the efficiency of h2s removal (gas mixtures 5-6, 30 bar, 0.09 s residence time, 1.5% (g/g) naoh). bobek, rippel-pethő, molnár, and bocsi hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 54 we observed that when the co2 concentration was less than 50% (m3/m3), a 1.5% (g/g) naoh concentration and 0.08 s residence time is necessary to achieve an h2s removal efficiency of 50% at a pressure of 30 bar under the given experimental conditions. when the co2 concentration was above 50% (m 3/m3), we found that this is sufficient to provide a naoh concentration of 2.5% (g/g) over a residence time of 0.05 s at a pressure of 30 bar. based on our experiments a high efficiency of h2s selective removal can be achieved by naoh absorption. references [1] balogh, k.: sedimentology iii (akadémia kiadó, budapest, hungary), 1992 (in hungarian) [2] vágó, á.; rippel-pethő, d.; horváth, g.; tóth, i.; oláh, k.: removal of hydrogen sulphide from natural gas, a motor vehicle fuel, hung. j. ind. chem., 2011, 39(2) 283–287 [3] wu, y.; caroll, j.j.; zhu, w.: sour gas and related technologies (scrivener publishing llc, beverly, ma, usa) 2012 pp. xiv–xvii [4] kohl, a.l.; nielsen, r.b.: gas purification (gulf publishing company, houston, tx, usa) 1997 pp. 40–466 [5] tuba, j.: carburators (műszaki könyvkiadó, budapest, hungary), 1976 pp. 23–24 (in hungarian) table 3. the best operational parameters of the tested model gases at a pressure of 30 bar. co2 content, % (m3/m3) naoh concentration, % (g/g) alkali specificity, mol naoh (mol h2s) -1 h2s removal efficiency, % residence time, s gas flow rate, nm3 h-1 23 0.5 15 44 0.20 1.0 1.5 14 51 0.08 2.5 2.5 19 51 0.10 2.0 41 0.5 12 44 0.20 1.0 1.5 15 50 0.08 2.5 2.5 20 50 0.10 2.0 60 0.5 6 27 0.06 3.0 1.5 24 41 0.09 2.3 2.5 24 55 0.05 3.8 76 0.5 6 20 0.07 3.0 1.5 16 47 0.05 3.8 2.5 22 56 0.05 3.8 hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprem vol. 30. pp. 41 45 (2002) liquid-solid heat transfer with the phase-change of solid s. petrescu and a. bacaoanu (department of chemical engineering, the "gh. asachi" technical university of iasi, romania) received: may 14,2001 this paper presents a study of the heat transfer for a singular spherical particle melting in a stagnant liquid phase. the proposed mathematical model allows the calculation of process duration, the radius of melting front and the degree of melting. in order to verify the mathematical model, the degree of melting, the melting rate and the heat transfer coefficient were experimentally determined, using spherical ice particles at 267 k. the melting medium was distilled water at temperatures of288, 298 and 318 k. the experimental results have been compared with those corresponding to relation: nu == 2 + 0.6ra114 pr113 • the agreement isgood. keywords: melting, heat transfer, heat transfer coefficient, melting rate introduction technical literature provides a large onumber of papers regarding the heat transfer in liquid solid systems. part of these papers [1-9] approach theoretically and experimentally the heat transfers at the melting process by direct contact with a liquid phase of a singular particle or assembly of particles. the available studies regard equally to heat transfer by natural and forced convection. thereby, woods [2] presents a review about the dissolution and melting of solids in contact with a melted substance. jochem and koerber [3] studied theoretically the heat and mass transfer of ice, melting in sodium chloride solution and glycerin. using an iterative method based on the newton algorithm; they solved the differential equations of the melting process. fukusako et all [4] approach experimentauy the heat transfer by natural convection at the melting of an ice cylinder in 3.5% saline solution. they determined the local heat transfer coefficient for the range of 274.8292,8 k temperatures. okada et all [5] studied experimentally the melting of a fix bed of spherical ice particles using water as melting medium. gobin and bernard [6] treated the metal melting by natural convection and analyzed the influeoce of prandtl and rayleigh numbers. other investigations [7 .8] approached theoretically and experimentally the heat transfer at the melting of a spherical ice, moving upwards through a column with water. the authors established a mathematical model, which was applied to the determination of temperature distribution, in the inner of the particle, as function of radius and time. also, they determined experimentally the heat transfer coefficient. this paper presents a mathematical model allowing the determination of melting front radius, degree of phase change and process duration at the melting of a singular spherical particle in a stagnant liquid phase. the heat transfer coefficient was experimentally determined. the influence of the liquid phase temperature on the rate melting and heat transfer coefficient was also studied. the proposed model was verified. mathematical formulation the melting process of a solid, being in direct contact with a liquid phase, when the particle temperature is different of that of the melting temperature, has two stages: in the first stage, the heating of the particle takes place until the temperature at the solid-liquid interface becomes equally to the melting temperature. at that moment, the second stage begins, that is, the proper melting. if the initial temperature of the particle is close to the melting temperature value, the duration of the primary stage is short and can be neglected. in the case of the melting of a spherical particle containing a single a component in a solution 42 i i r fig .1 physical model containing also a component, the following three elementary processes are involved: the heat transfer from the solution to the particle surface the proper melting at the solid-liquid interface the mass transfer of the a component from the particle surface to the liquid phase. the physical model is presented in the fig.]. according to the physical model, at the initial moment, the radius of particle is r and decreases as the melted region grows. for a given moment, the radius of the particle is r{}. the temperature· is ti at the solid-liquid interface and r_ in the bulk solution. since the aim of the mathematical modelling is to establish the equation of process duration or the radius of melting front (degree of transformation) in time, one considers the energy equation for the radial direction: ar a. a ( 2 ar) pep-a/= r 2 dr r tr the boundary conditions are: t so. r sr5rb t= t ... t > 0, r = ro. (1) (2) (3} ~(rz dt)=o dr dr by integration of the eq.(5) one obtains: dt =_!_c dr r 2 1 c r = _ ___!_ + c 2 r (6) (7) (8) the integration constants, c1 and c2, result from the boundary conditions: (9) (10) from relations (9) and (10) one obtains: t,t~ =at= -c{:, -~~) (11) or: t:..t 1 1 substitution of eq.(l2) into eq.(jo) gives: (12) c 2 = t.,., + at(_!__!_)1 (13) rl ro rl also, substitution of the cl constant into (7) gives: dt dr (14) the boundary condition (3) associated with eq.( 14) is: (15) since, 1 1 8 r0 r1 r0 (r0 +s) t= t ... (4) and to simplify the solution of the differential equations, when the temperature is constant on an infinitesimal time, one considers the quasi-steady state. thus, the process can mathematically be described by the equation: (5) or: il -=a 8 eq.( 15) becomes: ciat{r0 +o) (16) the integration of eq.(16), between 0 t and r r0, leads to: 4 6 fig.2 experimental installation. 1 -cylindrical glass vase, 2 43 table 1 the variation of the particle mass with time t=288 k t 103&n (s) (kg) 30 4.5 60 7.5 90 9.4 120 12.0 '150 15.1 12 0,6 0,5 0,4 t=298 k t 103&n (s) (kg) 30 6.0 60 10.8 90 17.2 120 20.3 150 25.7 t=308k t 103&n (s) (kg) 20 6.9 40 12.4 60 17.5 80 21.7 100 27.5 t=318k t 103.8.m (s) (kg) 15 7.6 30 13.6 45 19.3 60 24.0 75 28.8 cover, 3 glass recipient, 4rod, 5 support, 60,3 · semiautomatic scales, 7 control thermometer, 8 agitator (17) for small values of 5, results: (18) the radius (the location) of the melting front can be written as function of the degree of melting, 11: ro = r9 -1})113 replacing (19) into (18) gives: (19) t rpsl.\hm [1-(l-7])113 ] (20) a!lt the relations (18) and (20) allow the calculation of the melting front radius, respectively, the process duration. experimental apparatus and procedure according to fig.2, the experimental arrangement consists of a cylindrical glass vase {1) with a cover (2), a glass recipient (3), rod ( 4}, support {5), semiautomatic scales (6), control thermometer (7). the vase (1) represents the melting chamber, where the melting of particle ice takes place. the vase is provided with a dismountable agitator (8) for the temperature homogenization of the melting medium (distilled water). during of the particles melting, the agitator is removed from the melting · chamber. a thermostat connected to recipient (3) supplies the necessary thermal energy for the temperature homogenization. for investigations, the spherical ice particles have been used. the ice particles have been obtained by freezing of distilled water at 267 k, using a special 0.2 0,1 ot:288k ot:o291 k t. t:308k vt:318k o~-2~0---4~o--ro~--8~0~1~0~0~12~0~1~4~0-t~(~sl~~ fig.3 variation of the degree of melting with time device. the melting medium was distilled water of temperatures of 288, 298, 308 and 318 k. in the experiments, the mass variations function in time has been determined separately, for every particle. results and discussion experimental results for the mass variation of the ice particle in time are presented in table i. these results have been used for the calculation of the melting level, 1], with the following relation: (21) graphically, the fj values are shown in fig.3. as may be seen the degree of melting is increasing with the temperature increase. the medium melting temperature has a positive influence on the melting process: in the following, using the above data and relations: (22) (23) the melting rate (vm) and the heat transfer coefficient (a.} have been determined. the melting rate bas been calculated taking into account the degree of melting 44 0,08 0,06 0,04 0.()2 290 300 310 320 t(k} fig.4 temperature influence on melting rate 500 400 290 300 310 320 t{k) fig.s temperature influence on heat transfer coefficient corresponding to a 60-sec. duration. the diagram in fig.4 shows an increase of the melting rate with the temperature. also, the water temperature has a positive effect on the heat transfer coefficient (fig.5). the temperature increase amplifies the natural circulation of water around the particle ice. consequently, the transferred heat flux from water to ice particle will increase and will amplify the heat transfer coefficient and the melting rate. the proposed mathematical model represented by eq.(20) is verifying. based on the values of the heat transfer coefficient~ using the relation (20), the process duration values have been calculated. for the degree of melting. the values corresponding to the ro..sec. duration have been considered. the obtained results are presented in table 2. according to this table. one may see that the calculated values of the process duration are close to the experimental values (60 sec.). therefore. one may assert that experimental data verify the proposed mathematical model. further on. the experimental data obtained in this study agree with the other authors data. to this purpose .. one considers the dimensionless equation [ 1}: nu = 2+0.6ra114 prll3 (24) the experimental values of nusselt number have been determined for more values of rayleigh and table 2 verifying of the mathematical model temperature (k) degree of melting experimental time (s) calculated time (s) 6 . 288 0.172 60 59.61 298 0.247 60 59.08 308 0.400 60 58.72 2 --ra 3 318 0.549 60 58.93 fig.6 the dependence of the experimental nusselt numbers with the rayleigh numbers prandtl numbers. these values are graphically represented in fig.6. this figure contains also the calculated values, using eq.(24), for nusselt number. data from fig. 6 indicate small differences between experimental data obtained by our study and those obtained using eq.(24). conclusions in this paper a mathematical model of the heat transfer at melting of a spherical particle by direct contact with a stagnant liquid phase has been established. the model allows determination of the process duration, the melting front radius and the degree o:f melting. the proposed mathematical model has been experimentally verified. for this purpose, the experimental values of the melting rate and the heat transfer coefficient have been determined. the experiments were carried out in a laboratory installation, using spherical ice particles and distilled water at different temperatures, as melting medium. the comparison of the calculated values, based on the proposed model, with those obtained experimentally were in good agreement. the experimental data obtained in this work were also verified with those of other authors. there can be noted a good agreement. based on experimental data, the influence of the melting medium temperature on the melting rate and on the heat transfer coefficient was studied. cp d g symbols specific heat. jkg-1k-1 partic1e diameter~ m gravitation acceleration, ms-2 mo q=vm11hm r s t ti t= vm t1hm l\m ra=grpr pvd re=-a [3 1 1j ).l p ps j.l particle mass at time t=o, kg specific heat flux, wm·2 radial coordinate, m external surface area of particle, m2 time, s temperature at solid -liquid interface, k temperature in the bulk solution, k melting rate, kg m·2 s·1 latent heat of melting, j kg·1 variation of particle mass, kg rayleigh number reynolds number heat transfer coefficient, w m·2 k·1 thermal expansion coefficient, k.1 heat conductivity, wm-1k-1 degree of melting liquid viscosity, nsm·2 density of liquid, kg m·3 density of particle, kg m·3 references 1. blrd b. r., stewart w. e. and lightfoot n. e.: transport phenomena, new york, j. wiley, 1960 45 2. woods a. w.: j.fluid mech., 1992,239,429-438 3. jochem m., koerber c.: waerme·staffuebertrag 1993, 28, 195-204 4. fukusako s., yamada m., horibe a. and watanabe c.: general papers in heat mass transfer, instalation and turbomachinery asme, 1994, 271, 81-87 5. okada m., hashimoto k. and 01ha 1.: proc. asme-jsme therm. eng. conf. 3 rd., 3, 327-333, 1991 6. gobin d. and bernard c.: j. heat transfer, 1992, 114 (2) 1992,521-524 7. fetecau c. and petrescu s.: rev. roum. sci. techn. mec. appl., 1994,39 (1),. 92 -97 8. petrescu s. and lisa c.: bul. chern. comm., 1996, 29 (1), 34-39 9. sun y. and bernard c.: melting of ice in the presence of thermosolutal convection in the melt, fast (univ. of paris vi and xi, cnrs) campus univ. 91405 orsay 10. raznievic k.: termodinamicke tablia i diagrami, skolska kniga, zagreb, 1975 11. pavlov f. k., romankov p.g. and noskov a. a.: processes and apparatus in chemical engineering, bucharest, 1981 page 40 page 41 page 42 page 43 page 44 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 48(1) pp. 81–85 (2020) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.33927/hjic-2020-13 optimizing the planning and manufacturing processes of electromagnetic energy harvesting equipment lászló móricz*1 and istván szalai1 1institute of mechatronics engineering and research, faculty of engineering, university of pannonia, gasparich márk u. 18/a, zalaegerszeg, 8900, hungary the main aim of this paper is to create an energy harvesting system, which can convert vibrational energy into electrical energy efficiently. our research was carried out in the field of electromagnetic energy conversion using the principles of linear generator construction for both low and high frequency vibrations. energy can be recovered efficiently. during the measurements, how the induced voltage is dependent on the impulsive frequency and the amplitude of impulses was investigated. keywords: energy harvesting, induced voltage, vibration, linear generator, energy 1. introduction many forms of energy sources exist (vibrational, thermal, wind) in the environment which can be converted into electrical energy with a good degree of efficiency. the harvesting of this energy from the environment has the potential to reduce the rate of depletion of non-renewable energy sources [1] and can be converted by using electromagnetic [2, 3], electrostatic [4, 5] and piezoelectric [6, 7] energy conversion processes. our research was conducted in the field of electromagnetic energy conversion for both low and high frequency vibrations. numerous energy harvesting mechanisms are based on the damped driven harmonic oscillator (ddho) [8]. the essence of the process is to create relative displacement between a permanent magnet and a coil [9]. electric power (energy) is induced in the coil due to changes in magnetic flux. to achieve the relative displacement, the magnet and leading house must come into physical contact which can be achieved mechanically or magnetically [10]. each mechanical system has a mechanical damping factor. if the damping of the system is too low, the device exhibits no resistance to harmonic motion. however, if the value becomes too high, the resistance of the device to motion increases dramatically, thus no relative displacement of the device occurs. both the damping force and relative displacement are essential to convert energy efficiently into the system [11]. one of the most difficult tasks of the design process is to define the appropriate degree of damping that maximizes the extractable efficiency. an important aspect of *correspondence: moricz.laszlo@mk.uni-pannon.hu the design process is the tuning of the natural frequency of the structure. if the impulsive frequency deviates from the resonant frequency, a loss of power can be detected. one possibility is that the bandwidth of operation is enhanced which results in the value of the “quality (q) factor” decreasing and diminishes the amount of extractable energy [5]. to achieve a good degree of efficiency of the system, the harvesting of very low frequency vibrations must be taken into account. regarding energy harvesting systems for low frequency applications, the possibilities of frequency upconversion are introduced and achieved in different ways. ashraf et al. [11] optimized the mechanical design of the system by applying the finite element method to broaden the low frequency range. haroun et al. [9] tried to keep the natural frequency of their system, namely ceh, low. they concluded that if the spring is not fixed to the moving frame (fieh), then the natural frequency of the system is lower than that of the fixed spring system (ceh). 2. design process and evolution of the structure there are two types of generator-based energy harvesting systems: • system 1: based on linear movement • system 2: based on rotational movement the linear generator converts the mechanical movement directly into electrical energy. several basic construction solutions can achieve this, e.g. the linear motors can https://doi.org/10.33927/hjic-2020-13 mailto:moricz.laszlo@mk.uni-pannon.hu 82 móricz and szalai figure 1: mechanical structure of the eh system be straightened versions of permanent magnet motors. the structure chosen is presented in fig. 1. the energy harvesting model was made using solidworks 2016 software. the assembled system is shown in fig. 2. the structure consists of two main parts; the stationary part possesses a coil holder and the moving part was produced from a square section slip. four horseshoe neodymium magnets were mounted on the moving part. the horseshoe magnets consisted of two iron plates and a square neodymium magnet. the thickness of the two iron plates was equal to that of the square neodymium magnet. it is important that the iron plate contains less alloys. the best solution from the options available was to use an iron core of a transformer. to determine the optimum layout of the magnets, the direction of the current vectors (e) must be identical. as the direction of movement of the structure was definite (v), according to the right-hand rule the direction of the magnetic induction vectors (b) must point to the center as shown in fig. 3. figure 2: the assembled system figure 3: optimum layout of the magnets figure 4: schematic structure of the loop test 3. structure of the loop test the equipment for the loop test was provided by the institute of mechatronics engineering and research of the university of pannonia in zalaegerszeg. the schematic structure of the loop test is shown in fig. 4. energy harvesting was executed by a type of labworks et-139 electrodynamic shaker. the induced voltage was displayed by an agilent dso5054a digital oscilloscope. the examined parameters were changed by a function generator, which was connected to a labworks pa-138 amplifier on a vibration table as illustrated in fig. 5. 4. results and analysis 4.1 based on experiments throughout the experiments, the following attributes were examined: figure 5: the set-up of the loop test hungarian journal of industry and chemistry optimizing electromagnetic energy harvesting equipment 83 figure 6: energy-harvesting circuit diagram • maximum induced voltage without load • power without load • load on the power • the impact of the number of coils on the induced voltage and power the examined energy-harvesting circuit diagram is shown in fig. 6. the structure consists of an internal resistance rb and an external resistance rt (load). ptotal = u2ind rtotal = u2ind rb + rt (1) um = uind rt rt + rb (2) as a result of the impulsive frequency and amplitude of impulses, electrical energy was induced. the induced voltage was equal to the measured voltage in the absence of external resistance. measured and induced voltages differed when the system was subjected to an external resistance. the relationship between them is described in eq. 2. the maximum power can be determined from eq. 1. 4.2 results initially, the device was tested with 100 turns of the coil. the internal resistance of the coil was 3.1 ω. the impulsive frequency was set between 1 and 20 hz and the amplitude of impulses between 2.5 and 15 mm. during figure 7: induced voltage by applying 100 turns of the coil in the absence of external resistance figure 8: induced voltage by applying 100 turns of the coil in the presence of an external resistance the experiment, a decrease in the induced voltage was observed above 20 hz. thus, the investigated bandwidth was maximized at 20 hz, whereas the trend was still visible in terms of the change in the curves, so 20 measurement points were examined during the experiments. the results are summarized in fig. 7. the maximum induced voltage and power were 986 mv and 322 mw, respectively. during the experiments below, an internal resistance equal to the external resistance was applied to the structure. the applied external resistance was 3.4 ω. the results are summarized in fig. 8. the maximum voltage measured was 520 mv. given the values of the external and internal resistances, the induced voltage was 994 mv based on eq. 2. the maximum power was calculated to be 152 mw from eq. 1. the impact of the external resistance on the power during the experiment, a constant excitation amplitude of 15 mm was applied, while the impact of the resistance on the power was examined. the resistances applied were 1, 3.4, 10, 22, 47 and 74 ω. the relationship between the changes in resistance and power are summarized in fig. 9. as is shown in fig. 9, an exponential decrease in power was observed as the resistance increased. based on previous studies, an external resistance that is smaller figure 9: the relationship between the resistance and power 48(1) pp. 81–85 (2020) 84 móricz and szalai figure 10: induced voltage by applying 240 turns of the coil in the absence of an external resistance than the internal resistance is impractical. ideally, the external resistance would be equal to the internal resistance of the coil. next, the number of turns of the coil was increased from 100 to 240. the other aforementioned variables remained unchanged. the results are summarized in fig. 10. as shown in fig. 11, the maximum induced voltage without a load and the maximum power were 2020 mv and 559 mw, respectively. following the aforementioned procedures, the loaded system was analyzed. the external resistance applied was 8 ω. the maximum voltage measured was 1060 mv. by taking into account the values of the external and internal resistances, the induced voltage was 2020 mv based on eq. 2. based on eq. 1, the maximum power calculated was 268 mw. both the induced voltage and power of the system were doubled by increasing the number of turns of the coil by 60 %, the induced voltage increased from 994 mv to 2020 mv and the maximum power rose from 152 mw to 268 mw to be exact. 5. discussion the aim of the research was based on the principles of linear generator construction and manufacturing. at this stage of the process, it was important that the structure was free of mechanical damping. during the experiment, the structure was examined by means of changing the load resistance and number of turns of the coil in addition to the specified amplitude and frequency. an exponential decrease in the efficiency was observed as the resistance increased. ideally, the external resistance would be equal to the internal resistance of the coil. the induced voltage and the power of the system were doubled by increasing the number of turns of the coil by 60 %. as a result, by increasing the number of turns of the coil by 60 %, the efficiency of the system also increased by approximately 57 %. however, a deeper understanding of the relationship between the efficiency of the structure and variables figure 11: induced voltage by applying 240 turns of the coil in the presence of an external resistance requires further investigation. after doubling the number of turns of the coil, the maximum power generated was 1 w. one advantage of this system in particular is that the neodymium magnets are cheap to produce. applying a series connection to this system results in a sufficient degree of efficiency to operate the electronic devices in cars. 6. conclusion in the aforementioned experiments, the maximum induced voltage and power achieved by applying 240 turns of the coil were 2020 mv and 559 mw, respectively. during the experiments in the presence of a load resistance, the best value of the power was calculated when the external resistance was equal to the internal resistance of the coil. the efficiency of this energy harvesting system can be further enhanced by increasing the number of turns of the coil and the strength of the neodymium magnet. symbols uind induced voltage um measured voltage ptotal power rb internal resistance rt external resistance acknowledgements the project was supported by the european union and co-financed by the european social fund through the project efop-3.6.2-16-2017-00002. references [1] elmes, j.; gaydarzhiev, v.; mensah, a.; rustom, k.; shen, j.; batarseh, i.: maximum energy harvesting control for oscillating energy harvesting systems, 2007 ieee power electronics specialists conference, 2007 doi: 10.1109/pesc.2007.4342461 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1109/pesc.2007.4342461 optimizing electromagnetic energy harvesting equipment 85 [2] von büren, t.; tröster, g.: design and optimization of a linear vibration-driven electromagnetic micropower generator, sensor actuat. a-phys., 2007, 135(2), 765–775 doi: 10.1016/j.sna.2006.08.009 [3] beeby, s.p.; torah, r.n.; tudor, m.j.; glynnejones, p.; o’donnell, t.; saha, c.r.; roy, s.: micro electromagnetic generator for vibration energy harvesting, j. micromech. microeng., 2007, 117(7), 1257–1265 doi: 10.1088/0960-1317/17/7/007 [4] mitcheson, p.d.; green, t.c.: maximum effectiveness of electrostatic energy harvesters when coupled to interface circuits, ieee t. circuits-i, 2012,59(12), 3098–3111 doi: 10.1109/tcsi.2012.2206432 [5] kiziroglou, m.e.; he, c.; yeatman, e.m.: electrostatic energy harvester with external proof mass, proceedings of powermems, 2007, 117–120 [6] marzencki, m.; basrour, s.; charlot, b.; spirkovich, s.; clin, m.: amems piezoelectric vibration energy harvesting device, proceedings of powermems, 2005, 45–48 [7] isarakorn, d.; briand, d.; janphuang, p.; sambri, a.; gariglio, s.; tricone, j. m.; guy, f.; reiner, j. w.; ahn, c.h.; de rooij, n. f.: energy harvesting mems device based on an epitaxial pzt thin film: fabrication and characterization, technical digest of powermems, 2010, 203–206 [8] niu, p.; chapman, p.: design and performance of linear biomechanical energy conversion devices, (power electronics specialists conference, 2006. pesc ’06. 37th ieee), 2006, 1–6 doi: 10.1109/pesc.2006.1711996 [9] haroun, a.; yamada,i.; warisawa, s.: study of electromagnetic vibration energy harvesting with free/impact motion for low frequency operation, j. sound vib., 2015, 349, 389–402 doi: 10.1016/j.jsv.2015.03.048 [10] móricz, l.; szalai, i.: mágneses lebegtetés elvén működő vibrációs energiaátalakító tervezése és építése, (ogét 2019 xxvii. nemzetközi gépészeti konferencia, nagyvárad, románia), 2019, 352–355 [11] ashraf, k.; md khir, m.h.; dennis, j.o.; baharudin, z.: improved energy harvesting from low frequency vibrations by resonance amplification at multiple frequencies, sensor actuat. a-phys., 2013, 195, 123–132 doi: 10.1016/j.sna.2013.03.026 48(1) pp. 81–85 (2020) https://doi.org/10.1016/j.sna.2006.08.009 https://doi.org/10.1088/0960-1317/17/7/007 https://doi.org/10.1109/tcsi.2012.2206432 https://doi.org/10.1109/pesc.2006.1711996 https://doi.org/10.1109/pesc.2006.1711996 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jsv.2015.03.048 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jsv.2015.03.048 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.sna.2013.03.026 introduction design process and evolution of the structure structure of the loop test results and analysis based on experiments results discussion conclusion microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 5-9 (2008) techno-economic aspects of on-site cellulase production zs. barta1 , p. sassner2, g. zacchi2, k. réczey1 1budapest university of technology and economics, department of applied biotechnology and food science h-1111 budapest gellért tér 4, hungary e-mail: zsolt_barta@mkt.bme.hu 2lund university, department of chemical engineering, p. o. box 124, s 221 00 lund, sweden on-site cellulase production for lignocellulosic ethanol production based on so2-impregnated steam pretreatment followed by simultaneous saccharification and fermentation was investigated from a techno-economic aspect using aspen plus and aspen icarus softwares. the enzyme fermentation was assumed to operate batch-wise with a cycle time of 100 hours. the base case included sixteen 343 m3 aerated fermentors arranged in four lines operating according to a merry-go-round pattern. besides the base case, three cases, with improved productivities, were investigated. the cost of the on-site enzyme production was estimated to range between 6.7-16.5 eurocent/l ethanol. the cost of carbon source was not included in the total production cost, since the pretreated material was produced in the process. keywords: process simulation, cellulase fermentation, on-site, ethanol production, economics introduction the second generation fuel-ethanol production has not been demonstrated on full-scale so far, although some pilot plants already exist in europe and north-america. the lignocellulosic ethanol production is the most complex technology compared to sugarand starch-based processes, which are already well-known and mature. due to their complex structure the lignocellulosic feedstock require pretreatment prior to the cellulose hydrolysis and ethanol fermentation, that adds one more step to the process. one alternative of cellulose hydrolysis is the enzymatic way. although substantial improvements have been made in the last decades, the cost of enzyme is still a major problem in the enzymatic process. in this study on-site cellulase fermentation was modeled and economic evaluation for the enzyme production was conducted. materials and methods the simulation software the process was modeled by aspen plus flow-sheeting software (aspen tech inc, cambridge, ma, usa) capable to solve mass and energy balances. it is a powerful tool in comparing different process configurations in terms of efficiency, energy demand or – coupled with aspen icarus process evaluator (aspen tech inc, cambridge, ma, usa) – production cost. the later software is able to evaluate the process economics, nevertheless in our case it was used for sizing and estimating the capital investment. the built-in databases of aspen plus did not contain all the chemical components e.g. the ones of wood such as cellulose, lignin etc. they were obtained from the biomass databank of nrel. economic evaluation before performing economic evaluation the process equipments had to be sized. most of them were sized manually on excel worksheets except the heat exchanger which was sized by icarus using the report file from aspen plus containing the results of material and energy balances. the manual sizing was also based on aspen plus simulation data. the fixed capital investment – both the direct and indirect costs – was estimated by icarus, where equipments not present in the aspen plus flowsheet, such as pumps, compressors and additional vessels were also included. the built-in database of icarus was used for cost estimation of all the process components except the fermentors where modifications were made introducing factors to obtain the costs given by a swedish supplier. the fermentors, however, were cost-estimated as stainless-steel (ss 304) storage tanks and their agitators as well as cooling coils were added separately. the annual fixed capital investment was calculated by use of an annuity factor of 0.110, corresponding to 15-year life of the plant, 7% interest rate, linear 6 deprecation and zero scrap-value. the reference year was 2008 and 8000 working hours per year were assumed. the working capital investment was calculated according to the recommendation of peters and timmerhaus [1]. to obtain its annual representation the working capital was multiplied by the interest rate. table 1 summarizes the specific costs employed in the operating cost estimation. table 1: cost used in the evaluation chemicals, nutrients soy-meal (48% protein) 0,16 €/kg (nh4)2so4 0,10 €/kg kh2po4 0,10 €/kg feso4*7h2o 0,11 €/kg nh3 (25%) 0,22 €/kg cc. h2so4 0,05 €/kg defoamer 2,15 €/kg utilities electricity 48,4 €/mwh cooling water 0,02 €/m3 other costs insurance 1% of fixed capital maintenance 2% of fixed capital by-product credit co2 3,2 €/t base case description the enzyme production step was based on literature data [2,3], and the process step was implemented in an aspen plus model including all major process steps shown in fig. 1 described in detail in a previous study [4]. the ethanol plant was assumed to be located in sweden, with the capacity to process 200 000 dry tons of spruce annually. the pre-treated material stream was divided into a major stream fed directly to the simultaneous saccharification and fermentation (ssf) step and a minor stream (7.5% in the base case) led to the trichoderma fermentation where the enzyme amount required by ssf assumed to be 15 fpu/g wis (filter paper unit/g water insoluble solid) was obtained. the whole broth could be added to ssf since it was carried out at 37 °c and above 35 °c the growth of mycelia is entirely inhibited. using the whole culture had several advantages: i) no additional separation was needed, which decreased the cost; ii) the enzymes adsorbed on the surface of the lignin and the cells as well as the ones trapped in the cytoplasm could also be utilized. all the sugars present in the fermentation medium were taken into account in anhydro equivalent i.e. the polymer and monomer sugars in the pretreated material and the carbohydrate content of the soy-meal (26%) were assumed to be consumed entirely. the yields were the same for the hexosans and pentosans (table 2). it must be mentioned that the fermentation whose results were used in the model was carried out on sulphitepulp [2]. in order to apply these data key-assumptions had to be made: the lignin content did not affect the enzyme production, which was concluded in the same article, furthermore the monomer sugars present in the medium did not result in catabolite repression. the base case included 16 aerated agitated fermentors, each 343 m3 in volume, arranged in four lines. the working volume was 72% of the total one. cooling was performed by use of cooling coils. the fermentors operated in atmospheric pressure, and were not pressure-rated for steam sterilization. the pretreated material and the makeup water coming entirely from the evaporation step were considered sterile, hence only cleaning-inplace was applied in the tanks. the cost of nutrient sterilization was assumed to be negligible. feedstock handling steam-pretreatment simultaneous saccharification and fermentation (ssf) enzyme production yeast cultivation distillation separationevaporation drying pellet productioncomb. heat&powerwastewater treatment ethanol stillage liquid solid so2 steam water condensate molasses liquid syrup steam solid fuel methane spruce electricity a.) b.) c.) figure 1: boundary conditions of the modelled wood-to-ethanol process (a. steam pre-treated spruce slurry, b. condensate recycled to enzyme fermentation, c. fermentation broth) 7 table 2: the features of t. reesei mcg-77 fermentation temperature 30 °c [2] ph 6 [2] fermentation time 90 h [2] cycle time 100 h [5] aeration rate 0.5 vvm 1 [2] power to the broth 0.5 kw/m3 [5] mycelium yield 0.27 g/g ch [3] soluble protein yield 0.26 g/g ch [3] activity yield 185 fpu/g ch [2] specific activity 0.71 fpu/mg protein * ch concentration 2 2 % [2] productivity 61 fpu/(l*h) [2] *calculated 1 air volume/working volume/minute 2 carbohydrate concentration given in anhydro equivalent compressed air(2,7 bar) fermentation broth medium 1. 2. 3. 4. figure 2: schematic flowsheet of kornuta process (1 line – 4 fermentors) the four fermentors in a given line followed the same schedule, however they started being shifted in 25 hour intervals. at 25 hour 10% of the culture in the first vessel was transferred to the second one and used as inoculum (the second one gave inoculum to the third one etc.). the culture was at its peak growth and the cellulase concentration was low enough, hence fast sugar formation i.e. catabolite repression in the second vessel could be avoided. the fermentation lasted for 90 hours and was followed by a 10 hour harvesting, cleaning, charging period giving a 100 hour cycle time. after 100 hours from the start of the first fermentation the fourth vessel was ready to transfer inoculum to the first one closing the line to a loop (fig. 2). this operation pattern was referred as “kornuta merry-go-round” [5]. in case of contamination inoculum could be transferred from a vessel in another line and both lines could continue uninterrupted. the air supply was provided by compressors, one for each line. the four lines had a common medium preparation vessel that received the pretreated material, the makeup water and the nutrients whose concentrations were the following: 0.5% soy-meal, 0.15% (nh4)2so4, 0.07% kh2po4, 0.001% feso4·7h2o. the outlet stream before being fed to the fermentors was cooled down to 30 °c in a heat exchanger. the system contained 16 inlet and 16 outlet pumps. other investigated cases besides the base case (a) three hypothetical cases with improved productivities were investigated (table 3). in case b the activity yield was enhanced by 50%, which also connoted 1.5-fold productivity. in case c the carbohydrate content (ch) was increased to 4% and the same yield with doubled productivity was assumed. in case d both parameters was enhanced, which resulted in tripled productivity. table 3: modified parameters in the various cases base case (a) enhanced yield (b) enhanced ch conc. (c) enhanced yield, ch (d) activity y., fpu/g ch 185 278 (1,5x) 185 278 (1,5x) ch conc. 2% 2% 4% (2x) 4% (2x) prod., fpu/(l*h) 61 92 (1,5x) 122 (2x) 183 (3x) results and discussion while according to the model the trichoderma fermentation consumed all the sugars being fed, it did not alter the amount of other substances (lignin, inhibitors etc.). the water consumption declined monotonous from a to d, whereas the other components had two levels. table 4: component flows entering and departing the enzyme fermentation flow, kg/h a b c d in hexosans 782 535 782 535 pentosans 15 11 15 11 hexoses 352 241 352 241 pentoses 63 43 63 43 lignin 439 300 439 300 water 55814 38167 27031 18485 produced enzyme 304 208 304 208 mycelium 317 217 317 217 co2 712 487 712 487 they were higher in scenario a/c and lower at b/d (table 4). it can be due to the two activity yields applied which determined the carbon source demand as well as the product formation. the total capital investment, i.e. the sum of fixed and working capitals varied in a range between 16 and 34 m€ which multiplied by the annuity factor gave the annual capital cost of 1.8–3.7 m€/year (table 5). 8 table 5: total capital investment and the annual costs in m€ a b c d total capital investment, m€ 34 25 19 16 costs, m€/year capital 3.72 (41%) 2.74 (43%) 2.06 (41%) 1.75 (46%) chemicals, nutrients 0.49 (5%) 0.34 (5%) 0.44 (9%) 0.30 (8%) utilities 3.89 (43%) 2.62 (41%) 1.96 (39%) 1.28 (34%) other costs 1.02 (11%) 0.75 (11%) 0.56 (11%) 0.48 (12%) by-product credit, m€/year co2 -0.02 -0.01 -0.02 -0.01 total, m€/year 9.09 6.44 5.00 3.81 besides the capital the utilities namely the electricity used by agitators, compressors, pumps was found the other largest contributor in production cost. the cost of cooling water was negligible. the carbon-dioxide credits were two order smaller than the costs. the sum of chemicals, nutrients and other costs were estimated not being more than 20% of the total. it must be pointed out, that the cost of carbon source was not included in either the annual or the specific enzyme production cost, since the pre-treated material was produced in the process. the on-site cellulase production reduced the produced ethanol amount providing the same feedstock utilization, since the carbohydrates were consumed partially by the enzyme fermentation. the ethanol plant using commercial enzyme produced 59 563 m3 ethanol per year, whereas the base case (a) and case c merely 55 000 m3. the cases b/d with enhanced activity yield produced more ethanol (56 441 m3/year), since less pre-treated material was needed for the cellulase fermentation. y = 464.032x-0.815 r2 = 0.997 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 50 100 150 200 produktivitás, fpu /(l*h) cent/l e toh figure 3: specific enzyme cost as a function of productivity by increasing the productivity the specific enzyme cost reduced monotonously. the fitted curve was close to hyperbola having the index of 0.8 (fig. 3). the breakdown of specific enzyme cost also shows that the main contributors were the capital and the utilities (fig. 4). in the base case 16.5 eurocent/l etoh was found. at tripled productivity (d) the specific enzyme cost was 6.7 eurocent/l (41% of the base case). 11.4 6.7 9.1 16.5 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 a b c d cent/l etoh total capital chemicals utilities other figure 4: breakdown of specific enzyme cost (produced ethanol: 55 000 m3/year at a/c, 56 441 m3/year at b/d) summary the total cost of on-site cellulase production (diminished with cost of carbon source) was estimated to range between 6.7–16.5 eurocent/l ethanol for the four investigated scenarios. capital investment and electricity were found the main contributors. acknowledgement the 6th framework programme of the european commission is gratefully acknowledged for its financial support (nile-project, contract no. 019882). 9 references 1. peters, m. s., timmerhaus, k. d.: plant design and economics for chemical engineers, mcgrawhill, new york (1991) 2. doppelbauer, r., esterbauer, h., steiner, w., lafferty, r. m., steinmüller, h.: applied microbiology and biotechnology 26 (1987) 485-494 3. esterbauer, h., steiner, w., labudova, i., hermann, a., hayn, m.: bioresource technology 36 (1991) 51-65 4. sassner, p., galbe, m., zacchi, g.: biomass and bioenergy 32 (2008) 422-430 5. nystrom, j. m., allen, a. l.: biotechnology and bioengineering symposium 6 (1976) 57-74 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 46(2) pp. 63–66 (2018) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2018-0020 investigations into flour mixes of triticum monococcum and triticum spelta katalin kóczán-manninger *1 and katalin badak-kerti1 1department of grain and industrial plant processing, szent istván university, villányi út 29-43, budapest, 1118, hungary bread samples were made using flour mixes of triticum monococcum (tr. monococcum) and triticum spelta (tr. spelta). they were tested for their rheological behaviour over the first 3 days of storage at room temperature, and for their characteristics based on a hungarian standard. parameters were set such as the volume of the baked product, baking loss, crumb characteristics and elasticity of crumbs. the behaviour of flour from einkorn wheat is different to that of tr. spelta. the properties of the tested flour mixes measured by a farinograph show that tr. spelta produces an acceptable dough, on the other hand, the dough of tr. monococcum develops quickly but is very unstable so weakens within minutes of being kneaded. this also suggests that doughs composed of einkorn wheat flour require a different type of kneading than those of tr. spelta (or tr. aestivum, also referred to as common wheat) flours. breads composed of tr. spelta were comparable with those made with tr. aestivum, the crumb elasticity was above 90 % on the day of baking, which indicates high quality. the tr. monococcum breads, however, were of low grade: the volume of the breads decreased by increasing the ratio of tr. monococcum to tr. spelta and the elasticity reduced to unacceptable levels (less than 60 %). it should be mentioned that the grading was based on breads made purely from tr. aestivum flours. keywords: spelt, einkorn, bread, texture analysis 1. introduction as a result of the increasing number of cases of celiac disease and allergies, as well as the growing popularity of conscious nutrition, interest in older varieties of wheat is once again on the rise. in general, consumers think that these species of wheat are potentially less immunogenic than their modern equivalents. the manufacturing properties of doughs produced from ancient varieties of wheat are much weaker than those of common wheat. in order to obtain good quality bakery products, it may be necessary to use mixtures of flours from different varieties. in our research, the properties of the flour of einkorn and spelt wheats in addition to breads that consist of different proportions of these flours were prepared and investigated. during measurements, attempts were made to determine whether these wheat species – which are in theory suitable for baking bread – could improve the baking performance or whether a significant difference exists between the characteristics of the finished products of various compositions. crossing more modern varieties results in higher yields, greater resistance, more uniform ripening times and higher gluten contents. although these breeding procedures facilitated processing, the genetic diversity and nutritional value decreased significantly which virtually *correspondence: koczan.gyorgyne@etk.szie.hu resulted in the total displacement of indigenous species [1, 2]. one reason for this is that tr. monococcum was consumed primarily as a mush or simply cooked; these methods did not require proofing, which was originally used in ancient egypt during bread baking [3]. bread made from spelt flour is also of lower quality than that of common wheat, both in terms of specific volume and crumb structure [4]. according to previous research, spelt wheat flour produces less stable and elastic but stickier dough than plain flour. due to its sticky and soft nature after kneading, it is difficult to handle [5, 6]. breads made from einkorn flour exhibit a wide range of possible specific volumes, ranging from very low to high. although only a few subtypes are suitable for making breads, most versions are suitable for preparing pasta or biscuits [7], or utilisation for special purposes like fermentation processes [8]. the first phase of the investigations concerned the quality of the gluten, followed by the preparation and testing of loaves of bread. the main question concerned how the blends of flours of these species of wheat influence the quality of the final products. mailto: koczan.gyorgyne@etk.szie.hu 64 kóczán-manninger and badak-kerti 2. experimental 2.1 samples and measurements triticum monococcum (einkorn) and triticum spelta wheat flours were manufactured by szabó hengermalom kft. using conventional technology and contained no additives or bread improvers. for the measurements fine flours were used, i.e. small grain particles with low bran content, to ensure they contained only a negligible amount of outer shell. the determination of wet gluten content was performed according to a standard using the glutomatic system. after gluten washing, a gluten index was also calculated using a gluten centrifuge. the moisture content was determined by a sartorius moisture analyser. the uniformly dispersed sample of 2.5 g was dried at 105 ◦c to a constant weight (which has not changed for 20 seconds more than 1 mg). the change in mass could be deduced from the moisture content of the whole test substance. the determination of water absorption was conducted by a brabender farinograph in accordance with a hungarian standard (msz 6369-6:2013) in duplicates, followed by further experimentation using a baking test (msz 6369-8:1988). the volume of the bread samples was measured by placing a loaf in a container of known volume and pouring in a known quantity of mustard seeds around the loaf until the container was full. by measuring the amount of seeds remaining once the container was full, the volume of the loaf could be calculated. the quality of the bread texture was evaluated by a ta.xtplus texture analyser (stable micro systems, surrey, uk), following a modified american association of cereal chemists (aacc) international approved method (74-09) and expressed as crumb firmness (force, 1/g) and relative elasticity (%). a 40 % compression of a 25 mmthick sample was achieved, following a resting time of 30 seconds (at the same compression depth) and then the measuring head was slowly lifted and the springiness of the sample calculated. thus, it was a “measure of force in compression” test using an aacc 36mm-diameter cylinder probe with radius (p/36r). the analyser was set at a ‘return to start’ cycle with a pre-test speed of 1 mm s−1, a test speed of 0.5mm s−1, a post-test speed of 10 mm s−1 and a pre-defined percentage (40 %) of the original sample height. the relative elasticity was calculated from the difference between the original height and the height to which the sample recovered (after pressing and releasing the pressure). measurements were conducted in triplicates. statistical evaluations were carried out using anova (analysis of variance) tests in excel. bread samples were stored at room temperature in plastic bags. texture measurements were taken on the day of baking after the bread had been cooled to room temperature (day 0) and on the following 2 days, namely days 1 and 2. table 1: composition of the samples (%) 100a 80a 60a 40a 20a 100t tr. monoc. (a) % 100 80 60 40 20 0 tr. spelta (t) % 0 20 40 60 80 100 water % 57 62 64 65.4 65.8 71 yeast % 4 4 4 4 4 4 salt % 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 the ingredients consisted of 250 g of flour, 10 g of yeast and 3 g of salt, the only variable parameter was the amount of water used to make the dough. initially, the dough consisted of approximately 60 % (150 ml) water based on the weight of the flour, and the amount of water was increased to form a homogeneous dough. the final compositions are shown in table 1. 3. results and discussion 3.1 experiments in the case of the einkorn flour, gluten washing was ineffective as it could not be washed out. after the mixing phase, a yellowish substance remained on the bottom of the washer. in the case of spelt flour, gluten tests could be conducted without any problems. the wet gluten content of the tr. spelta flour was 46.73 %. according to the hungarian regulations bread wheat flours must have a minimum wet gluten content of 28 % and for wheat flours used to improve the baking quality a minimum of 34 %. bakers consider a gluten content in excess of 30 % to be good. the wet gluten content of the spelt flour examined is well above this value, but other factors are also taken into account to determine the quality of flour. the gluten index, a measure of gluten quality, of spelt flour was 45.73 %. a value of between 60 and 90 % is considered to be ideal, below 60 % weak and in excess of 90 % too strong. thus, the gluten quality of the spelt flour was clearly weak. the gluten quality calculated from the results of the farinograph tests for spelt flour was 98 % which is acceptable but does not fully reflect the quality of the flour. although the kneading and stability times of the doughs fell within the range of expected values, the planimetric area was greater due to the degree of softening. thus, the quality score obtained by hankóczy’s evaluation method was smaller. the farinogram of spelt flour more closely resembles a flour of medium quality (fig. 1). this is especially true for the tr. monococcum flour. it reaches its maximum consistency very quickly; the top of the curve barely exceeds the consistency line (500 bu – brabender units). the degree of softening is enormous, as is reflected well by the large planimetric area. the qualitative value assigned to the curve is very low (fig. 2). hungarian journal of industry and chemistry investigations into flour mixes of triticum monococcum and triticum spelta 65 figure 1: farinogram of triticum spelta flour. a direct correlation was identified between the volume of the bread samples and the amount of spelt flour in the flour blend (fig. 3). this is in accordance with the gluten quality of the flour blends, as is seen from the results of the farinograph measurements. the crumb hardness of the bread samples is shown in fig. 4. as the samples started to age the compression force increased. by examining the initial and final forces (measures of crumb hardness), it can be stated that sample 60a showed the best results. in this case, the force increased by 29 % between day 0 and day 2. for samples containing less einkorn flour the crumbs seemed to be softer and the relative increase in hardness during storage less (when values on day 2 were compared to those on day 0). even though sample 80a was initially even softer than 60a, by the end of day 2 it needed 1.7 times the force to compress it. an explanation of this phenomenon can also be given with regard to the different compositions of the starch molecules in einkorn flour compared to those in spelt flour. the staling of bread is related to the crystallization processes of starch molecules. significant differences between samples consisting of 100 % spelt flour and those of 20 % einkorn flour mixed with 80 % spelt flour were shown by the results. the increase in crumb hardness during storage resulted in significant differences in all samples of identical compositions. figure 2: farinogram of triticum monococcum flour figure 3: volume of bread samples (a – einkorn flour, t – spelt flour; the numbers are the percentages of einkorn flour in the flour blend) the elasticity of the bread crumbs increased as the amount of spelt flour increased in the flour blend (fig. 5). this tendency persisted during storage as well. the slight increase in the elasticity of the bread composed of 100 % triticum monococcum flour was probably due to improper handling of the samples, i.e. improper cooling before being packed, although it is questionable whether any moisture originating from the headspace of the packaging could cause such a change. taking into account that the results obtained could be derived from measurement and/or calculation errors, it may be worthwhile to consider the role of the chemical structure of einkorn flour during the baking process, and its effect on the elasticity during further targeted experiments. by using a rating system for the tr. aestivum flours, the bread samples can be classified. although the same judgment about the “marketability” of the bread samples cannot be made for breads based on these special types of flour, trends can clearly be observed. by adding more einkorn flour to the flour blends, the “quality” of the crumb structure decreased. most of the samples did not achieve an elasticity of 80 % meaning that they did not return to 80 % of their original height after compression. with these values, most of the breads fall into the non-marketable category. elasticfigure 4: crumb hardness (force, 1/g) as a function of different flour compositions over 3 days 46(2) pp. 63–66 (2018) 66 kóczán-manninger and badak-kerti figure 5: change in the elasticity of the bread samples during storage at room temperature ities of between 90 and 95 % are indicative of good quality breads. such values were only achieved when 100 % triticum spelta flour was used. after 2 days of storage at room temperature, the crumbs of 100 % spelt flour bread degraded to an average quality. 4. conclusion the purpose of our investigations was to examine the quality of flours from varieties of ancient wheats. gluten could not be washed out of einkorn samples and the wet gluten content of tr. spelta was also very low. farinograph measurements revealed that when only einkorn flour is used, the dough forms very fast but is very soft and almost completely unstable. by mixing einkorn and spelt flours bread can be made, however, an acceptable ratio would not exceed 20 % of einkorn to 80 % of tr. spelta flour. with this flour blend, the resulting bread volume is comparable to the accepted low values of bread composed of 100 % spelt flour. the hardness and elasticity of the bread crumbs already changed significantly at the lowest mixing ratios. further studies on the sensory characteristics of these breads and consumer tests are needed before deciding on the use of flour blends of triticum monococcum and triticum spelta in the absence of any addition of triticum aestivum flour. references [1] draskovics, m. r.: seed plants (spermatophyta) in: turcsányi, g. (ed.) agricultural botany, mezőgazdasági szaktudási kiadó, budapest, hungary, 2000 pp 363-365 isbn: 9633563593 [2] dinu, m.; whittaker, a.; paglia, g.; benedettelli, s.; sofi, f.: ancient wheat species and human health: biochemical and clinical implications. j. nutr. biochem., 2018 52, 1-9 doi: 10.1016/j.jnutbio.2017.09.001 [3] brandolini, a.; hidalgo, a.: chapter 8: einkorn (triticum monococcum) flour and bread in flour and breads and their fortification in: preedy v. r.; watson r. r.; patel v. b.: health and disease prevention, academic press/elsevier, uk, 2011 pp 7988 isbn: 978-0-12-380886-8 [4] abdel-aal, e-s. m.; hucl, p.; sosulski, w.; bhirud, p. r.: kernel, milling and baking properties of spring-type spelt and einkorn wheats. j. cereal sci., 1997 26, 363-370 doi: 10.1006/jcrs.1997.0139 [5] callejo, m. j.; vargas-kostiuk, m. e., rodríguezquijano, m.: selection, training and validation process of a sensory panel for bread analysis: influence of cultivar on the quality of breads made from common wheat and spelt wheat. j. cereal sci., 2015 61, 55-62 doi: 10.1016/ j.jcs.2014.09.008 [6] frakolaki, g.; giannou, v.; topakas, e.; tzia, c.: chemical characterization and breadmaking potential of spelt versus wheat flour. j. cereal sci., 2017 79, 50-56 doi: 10.1016/j.jcs.2014.09.008 [7] hidalgo, a., brandolini, a.: lipoxygenase activity in wholemeal flours from triticum monococcum, triticum turgidum and triticum aestivum. food chem., 2012 131, 1499-1503 doi: 10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.09.132 [8] hetényi, k.; németh, á.; sevella, a.: examination of medium supplementation for lactic acid fermentation. hung. j. ind. chem., 2008 36(1-2) 49-53 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jnutbio.2017.09.001 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jnutbio.2017.09.001 https://doi.org/10.1006/jcrs.1997.0139 https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.jcs.2014.09.008 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jcs.2014.09.008 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.09.132 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.09.132 introduction experimental samples and measurements results and discussion experiments conclusion hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 45(2) pp. 41–44 (2017) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2017-0019 state-of-the-art recovery of fermentative organic acids by ionic liquids: an overview konstantza tonova* institute of chemical engineering, bulgarian academy of sciences, acad. g. bonchev str., bl. 103, 1113 sofia, bulgaria the main achievements of liquid–liquid extraction (lle) of fermentative organic acids from their aqueous sources using a diverse range of ionic liquids are summarized since the first study appeared in 2004. the literature survey is organized in consideration of the distinct chemical structures of the organic acids. the acids discussed include mono– or dicarboxylic ones (butyric, l-malic and succinic acids), acids bearing both carboxyl and hydroxyl groups (l-lactic, citric and mevalonic acids), and volatile organic acids (mainly acetic acid). information is given about ionic liquids applied in recovery, and the resultant extraction efficiencies and partition coefficients. as the topic is novel and experimental studies scarce, the selection of the ionic liquids that were tested still seems random. this may well change in the future, especially after improving the ecological and toxicological characteristics of the ionic liquids in order to bring about an “in situ” method of extraction without harming the microbial producers of the organic acids. keywords: extraction, ionic liquid, organic acid, recovery, re–extraction 1. introduction room temperature ionic liquids (ils) exist as molten salts at ambient temperature and consist entirely of ions, usually a charge–stabilized organic cation and an inorganic or organic anion. ils can be tailored to a wide variety of applications by combining different ions [1] and for this reason they are often called “designer solvents”. ils exhibit a broad range of unique properties, including negligible vapor pressure, high thermal stability and low chemical reactivity [2]. the union of these particular properties, together with finely tunable density, viscosity, polarity and miscibility with other common solvents favor the application of ils in different kinds of separation and reaction processes [3– 8]. considering the benefits that arise from the properties of ils, matsumoto et al. [9] first proposed an environmentally friendly system for the extraction of fermentative l-lactic acid. they used hydrophobic [cnc1im][pf6] instead of volatile organic solvents as diluents of reactive organic bases. these ils proved to be nontoxic towards the lactic acid producing bacterium lactobacillus rhamnosus, but provided low degrees of solubility of the reactive amines which resulted in insufficient levels of extraction efficiency. nevertheless, these results suggest possible applications of ils in extractive fermentations. *correspondence: konstantzatonova@yahoo.com 2. discussion on the organic acids extracted and the ionic liquids applied 2.1. butyric acid and phosphinate–based ils the most remarkable results regarding the partition coefficient of an organic acid in an il have been documented with regards to the extraction of butyric acid, the four–carbon fatty acid, with phosphinate-based ([phos]) ils. [p6,6,6,14][phos] and a novel ammonium phosphinate, [cncncnc1n][phos], were studied [10-11]. distribution coefficients of about 80 were obtained using the low concentrations of butyric acid, and the extraction efficiency was just as high in the pure (water saturated) il as in the il/water/dodecane reversed micellar solution. the ammonium phosphinate absorbed a relatively high amount of water until saturation was achieved, ca 21 wt%. (about 12 water molecules per ion pair of the il), which implies that an aqueous biphasic system was formed. 2.2. dicarboxylic acids and phosphoniumor imidazolium-based ils among phosphonium-based ils, [p6,6,6,14]cl seems the most suitable extractant for the recovery of low and moderate concentrations of dicarboxylic l-malic acid in aqueous solutions [12]. the other phosphonium-based ils and higher acid concentrations entrain third-phase formation, especially in the case of [p6,6,6,14][phos] when a large amount of the acid content (ca 40%) remains tonova hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 42 uncovered in both phases. the [p6,6,6,14]cl–rich phase is also the best extractant for another dicarboxylic acid, succinic acid [12]. extractions with [dec]and [phos]– based ils resulted in a substantial amount of undetectable acid in both phases, which was attributed to the formation of complexes between the organic acid and the extractants that were not quantified. more recently succinic acid attracted special attention in a comprehensive study where the extraction was carried out by aqueous biphasic systems (abs) of alcohols/salts or imidazolium-based ils/salts [13]. successful recovery was achieved by both systems. succinic acid preferentially migrates to the il–rich phase in all systems formed of [c6c1im]br and a kosmotropic salt (phosphate, sulfate, carbonate or citrate). the il salted out by (nh4)2so4 or k2co3 exhibited the highest levels of extractability. the ph values of these systems were quite different. the ph of the system with (nh4)2so4 was 3.43 which is below the pka values of succinic acid (pka1 = 4.21, pka2 = 5.72), while ph = 10.50 for k2co3 greatly exceeded the pkas. this suggests that unlike the aqueous biphasic systems with alcohols, the extraction capacity of the il/salts systems towards succinic acid is not ph–dependent and is most likely related to the proper nature of the solvent (il/salt) and the solute (acid). for the same il, [c6c1im]br, an excellent solvating capacity to the lactic acid was reported [14] so that the acid could be extracted from a concentrate of white wine. this way the extraction efficiencies of the abs of [c6c1im]br/(nh4)2so4 or k2co3 are comparable to those obtained with the hydrophobic il [p6,6,6,14]cl [12]. moreover, the re–extraction efficiency achieved was superior at ~71%. succinic acid was obtained in a crystalline form by direct precipitation with sodium hydroxide. 2.3. acids with both hydroxyl and carboxyl groups and phosphoniumor imidazolium-based ils different types of phosphonium-based il biphasic systems were applied for l–lactic acid recovery. an extraction efficiency of above 80% was achieved by using either pure [p6,6,6,14][phos] [12] or a mixed biphasic system of [p6,6,6,14]cl and an inorganic kosmotrope, mgso4 [15]. the kosmotropic salt engages more water molecules when hydrated thus rendering the microenvironment of the acid more hydrophobic which favors the undissociated form of acid suitable for extraction. all extraction systems of phosphoniumbased ils with long side chains suffer from the common disadvantage of forming stable emulsions or a third phase between the il–rich phase and aqueous solution. this drawback is avoided by applying ils of an imidazolium cationic moiety, however, in the majority of the cases these ils exhibit low levels of extraction efficiency towards lactic acid [9,16] and other acids bearing both hydroxyl and carboxyl groups (citric and mevalonic acids) [16]. an advantageous abs of imidazolium saccharinate, that possesses a long side chain, [c8/10c1im][sac], has been exploited lately and it was shown that when it is combined with an inorganic kosmotropic salt (that retains water from solubilization into the il–rich phase) an extraction efficiency of 81% and partition coefficient of 5.5 could be achieved [17]. the extraction yield of lactic acid was as high as 90% in a two–step recovery by [c8c1im][sac] with or without the addition of a kosmotropic salt (mgso4). moreover, successful acid re–extraction of 95% from the il–rich phase was attained by means of a solution containing an alkaline kosmotrope, k2hpo4. 2.4. volatile fatty acids and phosphoniumbased ils apart from culture broths, fermented wastewater streams still represent an unexploited source of platform chemicals, including volatile organic acids. volatile fatty acids are versatile carboxylic acids involved in the synthesis of bioplastics and other value–added chemicals [18]. the composition of fermented wastewater typically contains ~1 wt% of volatile fatty acids, but also a significant amount of various dissolved salts. the low concentrations of the volatile fatty acids and the large quantity of inorganic salt–originating ions result in ph–values of between 4 and 6, which are in favor of the deprotonated acid form and thus do not support complexation with the il. the distribution of acetic acid between model solutions with or without salts and different solvents, including phosphoniumbased ils, was recently studied [19]. similarly to the butyric and lactic acids [10,20], the low concentration of acetic acid and the use of [p6,6,6,14][phos] were the best conditions to obtain the highest partition coefficient in the il–rich phase starting from an idealized aqueous solution containing only the acetic acid. in the presence of salts (kcl, na2so4 or na2hpo4), however, the partition coefficients reported for [p6,6,6,14]cl were the highest in the series of ils tested and exceeded even those obtained in the classical extraction by trioctylamine (toa)/n-octanol. [p6,6,6,14]cl as a solvent has an inevitable drawback related to its measurable level of leaching into the aqueous phase due to the hydrophilicity of the [cl] – . contrary to [p6,6,6,14]cl, [p6,6,6,14][phos] and [p6,6,6,14][n(cn)2] were found to be highly stable as significant leaching was not detected in the aqueous phases [19]. extraction by [p6,6,6,14][phos], however, was strongly affected by the ions of the salts present in the feed, while [p6,6,6,14]cl and [p6,6,6,14][n(cn)2] kept extraction capacities constant for acetic acid. when the source contained different acids, mimicking actual fermented wastewater, it was found that the growing hydrophobic domain in the acid leads to higher degrees of extraction. butyric acid was the most extracted acid from the fermented wastewater, while lactic acid was the most challenging acid to extract. by modifying the solvent properties of [p6,6,6,14][phos] by sparging pressurized co2, a further increase in the extractability of acetic acid was observed recovery of fermentative organic acids by ionic liquids: overview 45(2) pp. 41–44 (2017) 43 [21]. the effect was attributed to the altered structure of the fluid which becomes more accessible for the acetic acid. this finding constitutes a general concept for the improvement of extraction processes other than those involving volatile fatty acids. ils can act as solvents and simultaneously mediate reactive extraction to valorize low–titer volatile fatty acids. this has been recently shown through an il– mediated esterification of acetic acid recovered from dilute aqueous streams [22]. the acids produced in anaerobic digestion or fermentation were transferred to a nonvolatile hydrophobic phase where they reacted with an alcohol (ethanol) in order to generate volatile, value–added esters of low solubility. [p6,6,6,14]–ils were selected for their potentially high extracting capacity and hydrophobicity. their hydrophobic character provides a water-excluding site for esterification and a nonvolatile carrier for the evaporation of the ester produced. significant accumulation of acetic acid in the il was achieved by using [p6,6,6,14][n(cn)2], but this was mainly due to the exchange of [n(cn)2] – for the acetate anion as the dicyanamide anion was found to hydrolyze under the extraction conditions used, including at an elevated temperature (75 °c). contrary to the extraction, [p6,6,6,14][n(cn)2] and [p6,6,6,14]cl appeared to be the worst media for performing esterification, while the best was [p6,6,6,14][tf2n], which, however, is poor and costly extractant. thus an il of combined anions, cl – + [tf2n] – , was tested which could be used in a multistage way. starting from an aqueous stream of 0.33 mol dm -3 acetic acid, 0.44 mol dm -3 accumulated in the mixed [p6,6,6,14]cl+[tf2n] which allowed an esterification conversion of 56% to be achieved over 30 min. 3. conclusion ils are commonly considered more sustainable than classical organic solvents. it is well known that the toxicity level of conventional solvents to microbes limits their compatibility with fermentation broths. however, the label of “green solvent”, assigned to the ils, has led to the delusion that they are nontoxic and biodegradable, which is not true about some of the most employed ils. for example, the commonly used [p6,6,6,14]cl may be regarded as toxic in aquatic environments exhibiting much higher levels of ecotoxicity compared to ordinary organic solvents [23]. the biocompetitiveness and biodegradability of ils are not still convincingly argued for [24-25]. the need for novel extractants with improved characteristics from ecological and toxicological standpoints can be put forward. by taking into account that aqueous streams and bioorganics are treated, the environmental impact of ils should be resolved as a result of future studies. symbols il’s cationic moiety: [cnc1im] 1-alkyl-3-methylimidazolium [cncncnc1n] trialkylmethylammonium [p6,6,6,14] tetradecyl(trihexyl)phosphonium il’s anionic moiety: [dec] decanoate [n(cn)2] dicyanamide [phos] bis(2,4,4-trimethylpentyl)phosphinate [sac] saccharinate (which is a benzoic sulfimide) [tf2n] bis(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)imide other: toa trioctylamine acknowledgement this research was supported by the bulgarian science fund (contract grant dfni–b01/23). references [1] blundell, r.k.; licence, p.: quaternary ammonium and phosphonium based ionic liquids: a comparison of common anions, phys. chem. chem. phys., 2014 16(29), 15278–15288 doi: 10.1039/c4cp01901f [2] freemantle, m.: an introduction to ionic liquids (rsc publishing, cambridge, uk) 2009 [3] mutelet, f.; jaubert, j.-n.: interactions between organic compounds and ionic liquids. selectivity and capacity characteristics of ionic liquids, chapter 10 in ionic liquids: theory, properties, new approaches, ed.: kokorin, a. (intech) 2011 doi: 10.5772/14291 [4] tonova, k.: separation of polyand disaccharides by biphasic systems based on ionic liquids, sep. purif. technol., 2012 89, 57–65 doi: 10.1016/j.seppur.2012.01.007 [5] keremedchieva, r.; svinyarov, i.; bogdanov, m.g.: ionic liquid–based aqueous biphasic systems – a facile approach for ionic liquid regeneration from crude plant extracts, processes, 2015 3(4), 769–778 doi: 10.3390/pr3040769 [6] tonova, k.; bogdanov, m.g.: partitioning of αamylase in aqueous biphasic system based on hydrophobic and polar ionic liquid: enzyme extraction, stripping and purification, sep. sci. technol., 2017 52(5), 812–823 doi: 10.1080/01496395.2016.1267211 [7] fehér, e.; illeová, v.; kelemen-horváth, i.; bélafibakó, k.; polakovič, m.; gubicza, l.: enzymatic production of isoamyl acetate in an ionic liquid– alcohol biphasic system, j. mol. catal. b: enz., 2008 50(1), 28–32 doi: 10.1016/j.molcatb.2007.09.019 [8] major, b.; nemestóthy, n.; bélafi-bakó, k.; gubicza, l.: enzymatic esterification of lactic acid under microwave conditions in ionic liquids, hung. j. ind. chem., 2008 36(1-2), 77–81 tonova hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 44 [9] matsumoto, m.; mochiduki, k.; fukunishi, k.; kondo, k.: extraction of organic acids using imidimidazolium–based ionic liquids and their toxicity to lactobacillus rhamnosus, sep. purif. technol., 2004 40(1), 97–101 doi: 10.1016/j.seppur.2004.01.009 [10] marták, j.; schlosser, š.: liquid–liquid equilibria of butyric acid for solvents containing a phosphonium ionic liquid, chem. pap., 2008 62(1), 42–50 doi: 10.2478/s11696-007-0077-5 [11] blahušiak, m.; schlosser, š.; marták, j.: extraction of butyric acid with a solvent containing ammonium ionic liquid, sep. purif. technol., 2013 119, 102–111 doi: 10.1016/j.seppur.2013.09.005 [12] oliveira, f.s.; araújo, j.m.m.; ferreira, r.; rebelo, l.p.n.; marrucho, i.m.: extraction of llactic, l-malic, and succinic acids using phosphonium–based ionic liquids, sep. purif. technol., 2012 85, 137–146 doi: 10.1016/j.seppur.2011.10.002 [13] pratiwi, a.i.; yokouchi, t.; matsumoto, m.; kondo, k.: extraction of succinic acid by aqueous two–phase system using alcohols/salts and ionic liquids/salts, sep. purif. technol., 2015 155, 127– 132 doi: 10.1016/j.seppur.2015.07.039 [14] lateef, h.; gooding, a.; grimes, s.: use of 1hexyl-3-methylimidazolium bromide ionic liquid in the recovery of lactic acid from wine, j. chem. technol. biotechnol., 2012 87(8), 1066–1073 doi: 10.1002/jctb.3843 [15] tonova, k.; svinyarov, i.; bogdanov, m.g.: biocompatible ionic liquids in liquid–liquid extraction of lactic acid: a comparative study, int. j. chem. nuclear mater. metallurgical eng., 2015 9(4), 526–530 https://www.waset.org/publications/10001024 [16] li, q.z.; jiang, x.l.; zou, h.b.; cao, z.f.; zhang, h.b.; xian, m.: extraction of short–chain organic acids using imidazolium–based ionic liquids from aqueous media, j. chem. pharm. res., 2014 6(5), 374–381 http://www.jocpr.com/articles/extraction-ofshortchain-organic-acids-using-imidazoliumbased-ionic-liquidsfrom-aqueous-media.pdf [17] tonova, k.; svinyarov, i.; bogdanov, m.g.: hydrophobic 3-alkyl-1-methylimidazolium saccharinates as extractants for l-lactic acid recovery, sep. purif. technol., 2014 125, 239–246 doi: 10.1016/j.seppur.2014.02.001 [18] straathof, a.j.j.: transformation of biomass into commodity chemicals using enzymes or cells, chem. rev., 2014 114(3), 1871–1908 doi: 10.1021/cr400309c [19] reyhanitash, e.; zaalberg, b.; kersten, s.r.a.; schuur, b.: extraction of volatile fatty acids from fermented wastewater, sep. purif. technol., 2016 161, 61–68 doi: 10.1016/j.seppur.2016.01.037 [20] marták, j.; schlosser, š.: extraction of lactic acid by phosphonium ionic liquids, sep. purif. technol., 2007 57, 483–494 doi: 10.1016/j.seppur.2006.09.013 [21] reyhanitash, e.; zaalberg, b.; ijmker, h.m.; kersten, s.r.a.; schuur, b.: co2–enhanced extraction of acetic acid from fermented wastewater, green chem., 2015 17(8), 4393–4400 doi: 10.1039/c5gc01061f [22] andersen, s.j.; berton, j.k.e.t.; naert, p.; gildemyn, s.; rabaey, k.; stevens, c.v.: extraction and esterification of low–titer short– chain volatile fatty acids from anaerobic fermentation with ionic liquids, chem. sus. chem., 2016 9(16), 2059–2063 doi: 10.1002/cssc.201600473 [23] wells, a.s.; coombe, v.t.: on the freshwater ecotoxicity and biodegradation properties of some common ionic liquids, org. process res. dev., 2006 10(4), 794–798 doi: 10.1021/op060048i [24] siedlecka, e.m.; czerwicka, m.; neumann, j.; stepnowski, p.; fernández, j.f.; thöming, j.: ionic liquids: methods of degradation and recovery, chapter 28 in ionic liquids: theory, properties, new approaches, ed.: kokorin, a. (intech) 2011 doi: 10.5772/15463 [25] egorova, k.s.; ananikov, v.p.: toxicity of ionic liquids: eco(cyto)activity as complicated, but unavoidable parameter for task–specific optimization, chem. sus. chem., 2014 7(2), 336– 360 doi: 10.1002/cssc.201300459 microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 59-63 (2008) investigation of enzyme-catalyzed transesterification of used frying oils s. kovács , m. krár, j. hancsók university of pannonia, institute of chemical and process engineering, department of hydrocarbon and coal processing veszprém, h-8201, p.o.box.: 158, hungary e-mail: kovacss@almos.uni-pannon.hu investigation of the possibility to convert used frying oils to less harmful but more valuable products is driven by the protection of environment and human health as well as economical reasons. one solution could be the conversion of these oils to transportation fuels and their application in diesel engines in “pure” form or as blend stocks of diesel fuels. the conversion to biodiesel can be realized by transesterification with various catalysts. this paper presents the results of some experiments made by applying used frying oils and a process which is studied less intensively in the literature. the main goal of our experiments was to compare the transesterification efficiency of the three commercially available immobilized lipases [candida antarctica (novozym 435), rhizomucor miehei (lipozyme rm im) and thermomyces lanuginosus (lipozyme tl im)] which were applied under the same conditions and using the same feed. based on our experimental results we established that we achieved the highest methyl ester content (>94%) approaching well the theoretical yield when we applied candida antarctica (novozym 435) among the investigated lipase enzymes. keywords: lipase, enzyme-catalyzed transesterification, used frying oil, biodiesel introduction nowadays the amount of vegetable oils used for human consumption has increased significantly. this causes the increase of quantity of the used frying oils and cooking greases which can no more be used in the food industry. the gathering, deposition, recycle or treatment of this high amount of used frying oils are becoming more important in these days. this is caused by the need for decreasing the quantity of wastes, saving our resources, lowering the load of the sewages and dumps, and economical aspects as well [1]. currently many applications of the used frying oils which can no more be used for edible purposes are known. the appropriately pre-treated used frying oil is an important feedstock for the colour industry, cosmetic industry and road-building industry. additionally it was used as a feed additive for animals, but now it is forbidden [2, 3, 4, 5]. beside the above mentioned areas the pre-treatment and purification of used frying oils and their use as fuels (or heating oils) with or without conversion are very important research areas nowadays. the application of used frying oils as fuels is favored by the european union. by 2005 1% of the fuels consummated by the eu was biomass derived, thanks to the 2003/30/ec directive of the european union which helped to merge the use of biofuels [6]. the „eu strategy for biofuels” [7] was a milestone in the application of used frying oils, because the european union declared the need for using new kind of feedstock [7]. according to the latest aims of the european union the quantity of the biofuels used should be 10% by 2020 [8]. this can also help the application and conversion of used frying oils. this proposed value can be accomplished by utilization of different vegetable oils, used frying oils and its derivatives as fuels. the utilization options of triglycerides as fuels can be the following: • direct blending into diesel fuels, • transesterification to biodiesel fuels, • production of fuel blending components by different cracking processes (engine gasoline, jet, diesel fuel). recently, among these methods the use of biodiesels obtained the transesterification of triglycerides with methanol is the most preferred. chemical transformation of used frying oils is not possible by the conventional method (alkali catalyst), because of its high free fatty acid content (5–35%). the adequate amount of alkali catalyst immediately reacts with the free fatty acids found in used frying oils resulting in soap formation and it is not able to catalyze the reaction. a possible way is the conversion of the used frying oils with acid catalyst (hydrochloric acid, sulphuric acid, acid ion-exchange resin). substantial amount of acid catalyst and significantly higher reaction time is 60 necessary for the transesterification, compared to the alkali catalyzed method [9, 10]. another option is the conversion of used frying oils by combined acid and alkali catalyzed transesterification. in this process the free fatty acid content of the used frying oils are first pre-esterified in the presence of acid catalyst, then the transesterification is completed by alkali catalyst [10, 11]. another possible way is the enzyme-catalyzed transesterification of used frying oils, because lipase enzymes can transform free fatty acids into esters. the application of enzyme catalysts compared to alkali catalysts has several advantages: it is carried out under mild temperature-, pressure-, ph-conditions and no hazardous by-products or wastes are formed (e.g. waste water, soaps), furthermore methyl esters are formed from also the free fatty acids of the raw materials. however, in all cases it is very practical to separate all undesired components present in the used frying oils before their use or conversion. these undesired components are for example the solid oxidation compounds which form during frying (oxidized triglycerides, epoxides, etc.), oxidized oligomers, nonpolar dimers and non-polar polymers, etc [12]. many processes are known to eliminate these undesired components, thus to clean the used frying oils [13, 14]. for example adsorbents (eg: calcite, sepiolite, montmorillonite, attapulgite), supercritical carbon-dioxide, ozone, water and inert gases can be used. after adequate pre-treatments the used frying oils can be converted with the similar method as the vegetable oils. this gives many advantages. the most important is that valuable product can be produced of a material that is concerned as waste, so the load of the dumps and the environment decreases. from economical point of view it can be attractive that the price of the used frying oils and that of the methyl-ester produced from them is lower than the price of the vegetable oils and of the vegetable oil fatty acid methyl-esters [13]. experimental the main goal of our experiments was to compare the transesterification efficiency of the three commercially available immobilized lipases [candida antarctica (novozym 435), rhizomucor miehei (lipozyme rm im) and thermomyces lanuginosus (lipozyme tl im)] which were applied under the same conditions and using the same feed. the operational parameters during our experimental work were based on our previous results [15-18]. experimental apparatus the enzyme catalysed transesterification was carried out in a heated shaker equipment with a capacity of 9 erlenmeyer flasks (new brunswick g24). simultaneously all feedstocks can be put into the shaker, so the same parameters can be assured. the temperature in the shaker equipment was controlled manually with a precision of ±1 °c. materials and their preparation durig our experimental work the feedstocks were hungarian sunflower oil with high oleic acid content (hoso), used frying oil (ufo) and the 50-50% mixture (mix) of the previous materials. the main characteristics of the different feeds is given in table 1 and their fatty acid composition in table 2. table 1: the main properties of the feeds properties ufo hoso mix density, 15°c, g/cm3 0.9216 0.9145 0.9195 kinematic viscosity, 40°c, mm2/s 39.8 33.7 35.6 sulphur content, mg/kg 10 5 8 nitrogen content, mg/kg 12 6 8 cfpp, °c 42 36 39 acid value, mg koh/g 2.3 0.5 1.5 iodine number, g i2/100g 132 89 103 ufo: used frying oil hoso: sunflover oil with high oleic acid content mix: 50-50% mixture of the previous cfpp: cold filter plugging point table 2: the fatty acid composition of the feeds fatty acid composition, %* ufo hoso mix c14:0 0.1 0.0 0.1 c16:0 7.9 3.3 4.8 c16:1 0.2 0.1 0.1 c18:0 3.8 3.3 3.5 c18:1 26.3 87.4 59.7 c18:2 60.3 4.2 30.2 c18:3 0.2 0.0 0.1 c20:0 0.2 0.3 0.3 c20:1 0.2 0.2 0.2 c22:0 0.6 0.9 0.8 c22:1 0.0 0.0 0.0 c24:0 0.2 0.3 0.2 c24:1 0.1 0.0 0.1 *the first number represents the number of carbon atoms and the second means the number of double bonds in the molecule ufo: used frying oil hoso: sunflover oil with high oleic acid content mix: 50-50% mixture of the previous during the transesterification reactions analitycal grade methanol (spektrum 3d) was used. the investigated enzyme catalysts were the macroporous resin immobilized lipase candida antarctica (novozym 435) (activity: 7000 plu/g), acrylic resin 61 immobilized thermomyces lanuginosus (lipozyme tl im) (activity: 250 iun/g) and anion-exchange resin immobilized rhizomucor miehei (lipozyme rm im) (activity: 150 iun/g) received as a kind gift from novozymes a/s (bagsvaerd, denmark). before the transesterification the first step was the pretreatment of the used frying oils and vegetable oils with tonsil® adsorption clay and adequate volume of pertfil filter aid. test method the methyl ester content of the products were determined according to the en 14103: 2004 standard [fat and oil derivatives – fatty acid methyl esters (fame) – determination of ester and linolenic acid methyl ester contents]. during the measurements we used gas chromatograph and we applied methyl heptadecanoate as an internal standard. the conditions of the gas chromatograhic measurements are summarized in table 3. table 3: the conditions of the gas chromatograhic measurements injector split/splitless injector, 260 °c, 200 ml/min column supelco omegawax-250 capillary column, 30 m x 0.25 mm x 0.25 μm furnace program 120 °c (1 min) initial temperature 240 °c (10 min) final temperature 5 °c/min detector fid detector, 260 °c amount of sample 1 μl experimental method the feeds in erlenmeyer flasks were shaken by the shaker equipment in the presence of immobilized enzyme catalyst at 50±1 °c, atmospheric pressure for a defined time. every flask contained 44 g of vegetable/used frying oil and 6g of immobilized lipase (12% of the total amount of reactants). methanol was added to the reaction mixture in 8 parts by applying a methanol-totriglyceride molar ratio of 4:1 (6.4 g methanol) instead of the stochiometric ratio of 3:1, considering that excess methanol favors the progress of the reaction. the stepwise addition is necessary to prevent the inhibiting effect of the methanol. all transesterification reactions were carried out under the same conditions, the reaction times were 4, 8, 12, 16 hours. after the reactions the ester containing phase was separated and the excess of methanol was removed by vacuum destillation. thereafter, the amount of the product and the methyl ester content of the ester phase obtained through the enzymatic transesterification were determined. results and disscussion in case of all feedstock the yield of the methyl-ester phase was 96–99% of the theoretical value using candida antarctica (novozym 435) immobilized lipase enzyme. methyl ester content of the products as a fuction of the reaction time is shown in fig. 1. it can be seen that methyl ester contents in case of a given reaction time differ only by few percents. after 16 hours reaction time methyl ester content of the product obtained form used frying oil (ufo) was the smallest (94.1%), is probably caused the oxided compounds present in the used frying oil, can not be converted by candida antarctica. yield of the product prepared from high oleic sunflower oil (hoso) approached the theoretical value by 99.8%, its methyl ester content was 99.0%, meanwhile methyl ester content of the mixture (mix) was 96.9% after 16 hours reaction time. methyl ester content of these two products fulfilled the requirements (>96.5%) of the en 14214:2004 standard. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 reaction time, h m et hy l e st er c on te nt , % hoso mix ufo figure 1: methyl ester content of products as a function of transesterification time (catalyst candida antarctica (novozym 435)) in case of the transesterification carried out in the presence of thermomyces lanuginosus (lipozyme tl im) immobilized lipase enzyme methyl ester content of the products differed by only few percents (fig. 2) as a function of the reaction time. however, methyl ester contents at a given reaction time were much lower than in case of candida antarctica (novozym 435). after 16 hours reaction time methyl ester content of the product prepared from high oleic sunflower oil (hoso) was the highest (77.3%), that of the mixture (mix) was 74.4%, menawhile that of the used frying oil (ufo) was only 71.1%. methyl ester content as a function of reaction time in case of rhizomucor miehei (lipozyme rm im) is shown in fig. 4. after 16 hours reaction time methyl ester content of the product prepared from used frying oil (ufo) was the smallest (63.8%), that of the high oilec sunflower oil (hoso) was 74.8%, meanwhile that of the mixture (mix) was 70.2%. methyl ester content of the mixture was between the results of the high oleic sunlfower oil and the used frying oil (fig. 3). 62 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 reaction time, h m et hy l e st er c on te nt , % hoso mix ufo figure 2: methyl ester content of products as a function of transesterification time (catalyst thermomyces lanuginosus (lipozyme tl im)) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 reaction time, h m et hy l e st er c on te nt , % hoso mix ufo figure 3: methyl ester content of products as a function of transesterification time (catalyst rhizomucor miehei (lipozyme rm im)) methyl ester content of the products after 16 hours reaction time prepared by the three different immobilized lipase enzymes is summarized in fig. 4. based on the results shown in the figure it can be established that there is significant difference between the methyl ester contents of the products prepared from the same feedstock but with different lipases. methyl ester content (94–99%) was the highest in case of candida antarctica (novozym 435) immobilized lipase enzyme in case of all three feedstocks. the lowest values (63–75%) were obtained by applying rhizomucor miehei (lipozyme rm im) in all case. methyl ester content of the products (71–78%) prepared by thermomyces lanuginosus (lipozyme tl im) was between that of the previously mentioned two enzymes, but it is closer to the results obtained by applying rhizomucor miehei (lipozyme rm im). based on our results it was found that in case of all three enzyme catalysts the highest methyl ester contents were achieved from high oleic sunflower oil (hoso) and the lowest in case of the used frying oil (ufo). 94.1 96.999.0 73.975.2 77.3 63.8 70.2 74.8 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 hoso mix ufo m et hy l e st er c on te nt , % candida antarctica thermomyces lanoginosus rhizomucor miehei figure 4: methyl ester content in case of different feeds and enzymes after 16 hours reaction) summary after the transesterifications carried out at the presence of three different immobilized enzyme catalysts we found that methyl ester content of the products prepared by candida antarctica (novozym 435) was the highest in all case. methyl ester content of the products prepared from high oleic sunflower oil (hoso) and from the 50-50% mixture (mix) of high oleic sunflower oil and used frying oil satisfied the requirements (≥96.5%) of the standard (en 14214:2004). however, the products prepared from used frying oil (ufo) did not reach this limit. theoretical yield of the methyl ester containing phase was approached by 96–99%. by the application of rhizomucor miehei (lipozyme rm im) and thermomyces lanuginosus (lipozyme tl im) immobilized lipases methyl ester content of the products was significantly lower, thus it did not satisfy the limit of the standard. in case of all three enzymes methyl ester content of the products prepared from high oleic sunflower oil (hoso) was the highest, meanwhile that of used frying oil (ufo) was the lowest. methyl ester content of the product prepared from the 50-50% mixture (mix) of high oleic sunflower oil and used frying oil was between the results of the previous two. methyl ester content of the products clearly depended on the used frying oil content of the feedstock. references 1. gaio t., cordeiro j.: report of the oilprodiesel project, (2006) 2. canaki m.: bioresource technology 98 (2007) 183-190 63 3. kulkarni m. g., dalai a. k.: ind. eng. chem. res. 45 (2006) 2901-2913 4. keöves s., sárfalvi n., lakatos á., gubicza l., bélafi-bakó k.: proc. 2nd int.conf. env. eng. veszprém, (1999) 248-250 5. nemestóthy n., lakatos g., bélafi-bakó k., gubicza l.: proc. 29th int. conf. ssche, tatranska matliare, (slovakia), 2002, cd-rom 6. commission of the european communities, com(2006) 845 final, (2007) 7. commission of the european communities, com(2006) 34 final, (2006) 8. commission of the european communities, com(2006) 848 final, (2006) 9. canakci m., gerpen j.v.: transactions of asae 42 (1999) 1203-1210 10. hancsók j., kovács f., krár m.: petroleum & coal 46 (2004) 36-47 11. boocock d. g. b.: 53rd canadian chem. eng. conf. (2003) 12. riera j. b., codony r., rafecas m., guardiola f.: working document for the stoa panel (2000) 13. cvengroš j., cvengošova z.: biomass and bioenergy 27 (2004) 172-181 14. canakci m., van gerpen j.: transactions of the asae 44 (2001) 1429 15. krár m., hancsók j., kovács f., holló a., boda l.: in proceedings of interfaces’05 (2005) 17-24 16. kovács f., hancsók j., bélafi-bakó k.: in proceedings of 4th international colloquium on fuels (2003) 147-154 17. bélafi-bakó k., kovács f., gubicza g., hancsók j.: biocatalysis and biotransformation 20 (2002) 437-439 18. kovács s., krár m., beck á, hancsók j.: 15th european biomass conference & exhibition. biomass for energy, industry and climate protection, in proceedings (isbn 978-88-89407-59-x) (2007) 1747-1750 microsoft word a_33_hatos_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 39(1) pp. 157-161 (2011) parameter sensitivity analysis of an induction motor p. hatos, a. fodor , a. magyar university of pannonia, department of electrical engineering and information systems, veszprém, hungary e-mail: foa@almos.uni-pannon.hu a simple dynamic model of an induction motor is presented in this paper based on engineering principles that describe the mechanical phenomena together with the electrical model. the investigated state space model consists of nonlinear state equations and linear output equations. the model has been verified under the usual controlled operating conditions when the speed is controlled. the effect of load on the controlled induction motor has been analyzed by simulation. the sensitivity analysis of the induction motor and the bridge of the inverter have been applied to determine the model parameters to be estimated. keywords: induction machine, dynamic state space model, parameter sensitivity analysis introduction the induction motors are the most commonly used electrical rotating machines in several industrial applications including the automotive industry, too. in the modern adjustable speed induction motor drives inverters are used to drive the three-phase motor as variable frequency voltage or current sources. whatever the size and the application area, these motors share the most important dynamic properties, and their dynamic models have a similar structure. therefore the final aim of our study is to design a controller that can control the speed and the torque of the induction motor. because of the specialties and great practical importance of the induction motor in industrial applications, their modelling for control purposes is well investigated in the literature. besides of the basic textbooks (see e.g. [1-3]), there are several papers that describe the modelling and use the developed models for the design of different types of controllers: vector control [1] and [4], sensor less vector control [5] and direct torque control (dtc) [6]. the aim of this paper is to build a simple dynamical model of the induction motor together with the threephase inverter and analyze the models sensitivity of its parameters. the result of this analysis will be the basis of a subsequent parameter estimation step. the state space model has been implemented in matlab/simulink environment which enables us to analyze the parametric sensitivity based on simulation experiments. the model of the induction motor in this section the statespace model for an induction motor is developed. modelling assumptions for constructing the induction motor model the following assumptions are made: ● symmetrical three phase windings, ● the slotting effect and the copper losses are neglected, ● the permeability of the iron parts is assumed to be infinite with linear magnetic properties, ● flux density is radial in the air gap, ● the spatial distribution of fluxes and apertures wave are considered to be sinusoidal, ● the spatial distribution of the stator fluxes and apertures wave are considered to be sinusoidal. according to the above modeling conditions the mathematical description of the induction motor is developed through the space vector theory. if the voltage of the stator is presumed to be the input excitation of the machine, then the spatial distribution along the stator of the x phase voltage can be described by the complex vector usx(t). we can determine the orientation of the voltage vector us the direction of the respective phase axis and the voltage polarity. (2.1) (2.2) 158 (2.3) , (2.4) where a = ej120° in equation (2.1) 2/3 is a normalizing factor. the flux density distribution can be obtained by integrating the current density wave along the cylinder of the stator. the flux linkage wave as a system variable, because it contains detailed information about the winding geometry. the rotating flux density wave induces voltages in the individual stator windings. thus stator voltage us(t) can be represented in the overall distributed voltages in all phase windings: (2.5) (2.6) (2.7) (2.8) considering the stator of the induction machine as the primer side of the transformer, then using the kirchoff’s voltage law the following equation can be written: (2.9) figure 1: the equivalent circuit of the induction motor as for the secondary side of the transformer, it can be deduced that the same relationship is true for the rotor side space vectors: (2.10) equations (2.9) and (2.10) describe the electromagnetic interaction as the connection of first order dynamical subsystems. since four complex variables (is(t), ir(t), ψs(t), ψr(t)) are presented in these two equations, (2.1) and (2.5) flux equations are needed to complete the relationship between them. (2.11) (2.12) where angle ρ(t) defines the position of the rotor compared to the axis of the stator, while and are the three-phase inductances and ls, lr are the inductances of a stator and a rotor phase winding, lm = 3/2*lm is the mutual inductance between the stator and the rotor. by applying the following substitutions: (2.13) (2.14) then the following equations are obtained with the flux connections in the model: (2.15) (2.16) the mechanical energy pmech(t) of the system can be defined as: (2.17) where the mechanical energy wmech(t) in case of rotating motor can be given by: (2.18) on the other hand, there is another expression for the mechanical energy: (2.19) where is the input electric power, is the resistive power loss, and is the air gap power. using the above equations it can be concluded that: (2.20) the transformer can be decomposed into d-axis and q-axis. park’s transformation converts the equations to a simplified and more tractable form. figure 2: the equivalent circuit of the d axis of the induction motor figure 3: the equivalent circuit of the q axis of the induction motor the actual terminal voltage v of the windings can be written in the following form 159 (2.21) where ij are the currents, rj are the winding resistances, and ψj are the flux linkages. assume, that the positive directions of the stator currents point out of the induction motor terminals. by considering the d-axis and the q-axis of the induction motor, the following equations can be written: (2.22) (2.23) (2.24) (2.25) , (2.26) where ω is the reference frame angular velocity and ωr is the electrical angular velocity. (2.27) (2.28) (2.28) (2.29) the above model can be summarized in a statespace model by expressing the fluxes from the voltage equations. parameter sensitivity analysis thirteen parameters of the state space model of the induction motor and the bridge have been selected for sensitivity analysis (collected in table 1), and the sensitivity of the state variables: voltage, phase a current, speed, electric torque, and outputs has been investigated for all of them by means of matlab/simulink dynamical simulation. some simulation results are shown in figs 4-7. the blue signal represents the simulation result with the nominal parameter values and the red signal represents the simulation result with the modified parameter values. fig. 4 shows the model responses for changing a critically sensitive parameter (stator self inductance ls). it is apparent, that the speed diverges even for a 10% change of the parameter value. it can be seen that the speed of the motor becomes minus infinity and the electronic torque is zero. the case of a sensitive parameter (stator resistance rs) can be seen on fig. 6. table 1: the parameters of the induction motor and the bridge parameter initial value dimension name of the parameter rs 0.435 ohm stator resistance lls 0.002 h stator leakage inductance rr 0.816 ohm rotor resistance llr 0.002 h rotor leakage inductance m 0.0693 h mutual inductance p 2 number of pole pairs in 0.089 kg·m2 inertia of the motor ed 1000 v voltage of the inverter rsn 10 5 ohm resistance of the snubber circuit csn 10 10 f capacitor of the snubber circuit rbr 10 -3 ohm resistance of the bridge ls m+lls h stator self inductance lr m+llr h rotor self inductance 160 figure 4: the -10% changing of parameter ls figure 5: the +50% changing of parameter m figure 6: the -90% changing of parameter rs figure 7: the -90% changing of the resistance of the snubber circuit 161 as a result, the model parameters have been partitioned to four groups: ● critically sensitive: the self inductance of the rotor widings (lr) and the self inductance of the stator widings (ls) ● sensitive: the inertia (in) and the resistance of the stator (rs) ● less sensitive: the stator leakage inductance (lls) and the resistance of the rotor (rr), the rotor leakage inductance (llr) and the mutual inductance (m) ● not sensitive: the resistance of the bridge (rbr ), the capacitor of the snubber circuit (csn) and the resistance of the snubber circuit (rsn). conclusions and future works based on the results presented here, it is possible to select the candidate parameters for model parameter estimation based on real data that is a further aim of the authors, the four parameters are rotor self inductance (lr), stator self inductance (ls), inertia and rotor resistance (rs). the final aim of is to develop a simple yet detailed state space model of the induction motor for control purposes which gives us the possibility to develop and analyze different control strategies for the induction motor. acknowledgement we acknowledge the financial support of this work for the hungarian state and the european union under the tamop-4.2.1/b-09/1/konv-2010-0003 project. references 1. p. vas: artifical-intelligence-based electrical machines and drives, oxford university press, (1999) 2. p. vas: sensorless vector and direct torque control, oxford university press, (1998) 3. l. zheng, j. e. fletcher, b. w. williams, x. he: dual-plane vector control of a five-phase induction machine for an improved flux pattern, ieee transaction on industrial electronics, 55(5), (2008), 1996–2005 4. e. levi: impact of iron loss on behavior of vector controlled induction machines, ieee transaction on industry applications, 31(6), (1995), 1287–1296 5. m. hasegawa, k. matsui: robust adaptive fullorder observer design with novel adaptive scheme for speed sensorless vector controlled induction motors, ieee-iecon, (2002) 6. t. geyer, g. papafotiu, m. morari: model predictive direct torque control—part i: concept, algorithm and analysis, ieee transaction on industrial electronics, 56(6), (2009), 1894–1905 7. h. m. emara, w. elshamy, a. bahgat: parameter identification of induction motor using modified particle swarm optimization algorithm, ieee international symposium on industrial electronics 2008, 841–847 << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 49(1) pp. 71–76 (2021) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.33927/hjic-2021-09 modelling of the pyrolysis zone of a downdraft gasification reactor márta kákonyi*1 , ágnes bárkányi1 , tibor chován1 , and sándor németh1 1research centre for biochemical, environmental and chemical engineering, university of pannonia, egyetem u. 10, veszprém, 8200, hungary the increasing amount of municipal solid waste (msw) is a growing challenge that current waste-treatment practices are having to face. therefore, technologies that can prevent waste from ending up in landfill sites have come to the fore. one of the technologies that produces a valuable product from waste, namely synthesis gas, is gasification. the raw material of this technology is the so-called refuse-derived fuel, which is made from msw. three separate zones are located in downdraft gasification reactors: the pyrolysis, oxidation and reduction zones. this work is concerned with the determination of kinetic parameters in the pyrolysis zone. it also discusses the estimation of the product composition of this zone, which defines the raw material of the following zone. keywords: gasification, modelling, waste, refuse-derived fuel 1. introduction management of the increasing quantity of municipal solid waste (msw) is an ongoing issue. the majority of the waste ends up in landfill sites or is incinerated, leading to the emission of significant amounts of greenhouse gases. according to data from the european union’s eurostat database [1], the eu27 countries produce in excess of 200 million tons of waste. the amount disposed of is continuously being reduced by separating recyclable and biodegradable materials. although less and less waste is being dumped as landfill, landfill sites cannot accommodate waste being generated therefore, the quantity of waste ending up in landfill sites is not reducing significantly. in 2019 the eu member states deposited 24 mass % of waste in landfill sites; that quantity was 53 million tons. in hungary, this value was 51 mass %, namely 1.9 million tons (fig. 1). as the waste deposited in landfill sites decomposes, methane is formed and released into the atmosphere as a result of a reduction in its volume through cracks in the soil layer used to cover the landfill. the global warming potential of methane (ch4) is 25 times greater than that of carbon dioxide (co2) [2]. therefore, the development of technologies that can prevent waste from ending up in landfill sites and further reduce greenhouse gas emissions through carbon capture, utilization and storage is justified. one such technology is gasification. different types of gasification reactors are available, namely moving bed, fluidized-bed, entrained-flow, rotary *correspondence: kakonyi.marta@mk.uni-pannon.hu figure 1: generation of municipal solid waste and the amount deposited as landfill [1]. kiln and plasma gasifiers, which have been reviewed in ref.[3,4]. updraft and downdraft reactors are moving bed gasifiers. in the case of the former, the product gas travels in the opposite direction to the feedstock and leaves through the top of the reactor. since the amount of tar contained in the product gas is higher than in the case of downdraft reactors, where the gas and feedstock flow in the same direction, the temperature of the effluent gas is higher. in fluidized-bed gasifiers, a bed material is used for the purpose of heat transfer and the raw material, which is fed into the reactor from the bottom, as well as the bed material are fluidized by air. the product gas contains a higher proportion of particles. the raw material of entrained-flow reactors is powdered, it along with https://doi.org/10.33927/hjic-2021-09 mailto:kakonyi.marta@mk.uni-pannon.hu 72 kákonyi, bárkányi, chován, and németh air is fed into the reactor from the top. rotary kiln gasifiers rotate around their axes to ensure the solid and gas phases mixture. plasma reactors use copper or carbon electrodes and the raw material is decompozed down to the atomic level. downdraft reactors are the most suitable for low tar content with high carbon conversion, as well as high hydrogen (h2) and carbon monoxide (co) content of the product. its operating temperature and residence time meet the requirements of waste, namely its investment and operating costs are low. the feedstock of downdraft reactors is fed from above while the air feed enters through the side of the reactor at a height slightly higher than halfway up the gasifier and is evenly distributed inside. therefore, three separate zones can be formed. at the top, in an oxygen-deficient environment, is the pyrolysis zone, before air is introduced and the raw material partially burned in the oxidation zone to meet the energy demand of the endothermic reactions that take place in the other two zones. by proceeding along the length of the reactor, the reduction processes occur in the reduction zone after passing through the oxidation zone. once the gas has passed through the reduction zone, it is extracted and the slag falls to the bottom of the reactor. the aim of this work is to create a simple model that estimates the amount of gaseous components in the pyrolysis zone as a function of temperature based on the composition of the raw material and the amounts of the gases. furthermore, such a model can be integrated into a model of a more complex gasification reactor. to calculate the amounts of the gases, the kinetic parameters of the pyrolysis zone are required, which were identified. the output of this zone is the raw material for the following oxidation zone. 2. identification of pyrolysis kinetic parameters various models using mainly biomass and cellulose feedstocks have been developed over the years to describe the pyrolysis zone. some of them are suitable for molecular level studies, others are designed for particle-level studies and some are also applied to study equipment. hameed at al. have compiled a detailed overview of them [5]. since the pyrolysis zone is only one component of the reactor model, the less complex model referred to as the one-step kinetic model was chosen, which is written for the mass conversion as [6] dm dt = −k m (1 − y). (1) here, y is the conversion factor calculated by using the mass of raw material (min), current mass (mactual), and the mass of the solid residue (mfinal) as [7] y = min − mactual min − mfinal . (2) the rate constant of the reaction, k, is defined by the arrhenius equation k = ae −ea rt , (3) from which the unknown parameters a and ea/r can be determined. the amount of gas can be calculated from eq. 1. the parameters for cellulose and lignin (a mixture of paper, cardboard and wood)–hereinafter referred to as cellulose, plastic (a mixture of pe, pp and pet) as well as a 50−50 m% blend of cellulose and plastic were identified separately. the kinetic parameters (a and ea/r) of both kinds of raw materials were unknown. since the search space was smaller when identifying the parameters of pure raw materials, faster and more accurate results were achieved. the parameters were determined using the matlab r2019b program based on experimental data from the literature [8]. the effect of a catalyst on the decomposition of waste was investigated by thermogravimetry and mass spectrometry in a mass spectrometer. the inert atmosphere was composed of argon, while the masses of the samples were between 0.5 and 4 mg. results in the absence of a catalyst are studied in this work. the heating rate of measurements was 20 °c/min. the degradation of cellulose started at approximately 250 °c, while that of plastic commenced at around 400 °c (fig. 2). in order to focus on the portion of the curves where the changes in mass were larger as well as the measured and calculated values deviated more, the temperature range was narrowed from 60−700 °c to 142−552 °c for cellulose and to 369 − 531 °c for plastic. the m% of the residue was read from the graph. a global extrema searcher, nomad, was used in matlab to identify the parameters. the differential equation (eq. 1) was solved using ode23s. the objective function to be minimized was the sum of the squares of the difference between the measured and calculated data for each temperature value: min(f) = ∑ t (m%measured-m%calculated) 2. (4) the identified parameters are shown in table 1. once the kinetic parameters of the pure fractions had been identified, the mixture was calculated using these values. the change in total weight is the sum of the change in weight of the cellulose (mc) and plastic (mp) (eq. 5). furthermore, the y-factor (eq. 2), the kinetic rate of the reaction (eq. 3) and the mass conversion (eq. 1) table 1: identified parameters ln(a) ea/r [k] correlation coefficient cellulose 16.83 13 540 0.915 plastic 55.3 43 502 0.765 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry modelling of the pyrolysis zone of a downdraft gasification reactor 73 figure 2: measured [8] and simulated results using the identified parameters: a) cellulose, b) plastic, c) cellulose and plastic 50 − 50% mixture; o experimental curve , — fitted curve, — fitted curve with modified ea/r, — degradation start were calculated separately for both components: dm dt = dmc dt + dmp dt (5) the results of the calculation using the applied model are shown in fig. 2. the simulated decomposition curves of plastic (fig. 2a) and cellulose (fig. 2b) follow the experimental results well; the end of the curve deviates to a small extent caused by the decomposition of the lignin [9]. in the case of the mixture (fig. 2c), a higher deviation in excess of 400 °c was observed. the decomposition of the cellulose commenced earlier at 250 °c, while that of the plastic started at 400 °c. the degradation of the plastic component started later. although lignin begins to degrade at 400 °c, which may affect the decomposition of plastic [8,9], the difference was not significant, so the degradation of the lignin was not treated separately from that of the cellulose. since the component of the arrhenius equation corresponding to the activation energy depends on the temperature, the ea/r value had to be modified. from the arrhenius equation (eq. 3), the value of k was calculated along with the parameters before the kinetic parameters were recalculated by retaining the k value. the parameter ea/r of plastic changed, its new value was 44 500 k, the values of the other parameters remained unchanged as is presented in table 1. using this new ea/r number, the recalculated curve (depicted in orange) fitted better. based on the one-step kinetic model, the mass of gas formed in the pyrolysis zone can be calculated. the disadvantage of this model is that it cannot determine the composition of the gas nor the quantities of its components. in the oxidation zone, since the products from the pyrolysis zone are partially oxidized, it is also necessary to quantify each gaseous component. 3. composition of the gas pyrolysis gas consists of different components; the main components are carbon monoxide (co), hydrogen (h2), carbon dioxide (co2), methane (ch4), water (h2o), and tar. the exact molecular formula of tar is unknown, its formula is represented as cahboc. an extrema search was used to determine its composition. 3.1 composition of refuse-derived fuel some waste-treatment plants include mechanical biological treatment plants that produce refuse-derived fuel (rdf) by filtering out and grinding msw. in such plants, glass, metal as well as inert and biodegradable materials are removed, msw is dried whilst being grinded and finally 3 % of its original weight will be equal to the mass of the rdf. as the raw material of the reactor is rdf, the results of studies into the composition of rdf were collected and averaged table 2. [10, 11] 3.2 objective function and constraints based on the composition, the constraints required for the extrema search can be determined. the total masses (mj ) of each element, namely c, o, h, cl, s, and n, were determined from eq. 6. the mass of the impurities (mcl, ms and mn) was subtracted from the total gas mass (mgas). the extrema finder searches for the minimum of the objective function, which is the absolute value of the 49(1) pp. 71–76 (2021) 74 kákonyi, bárkányi, chován, and németh table 2: average rdf composition proximate analysis [m%] moisture content 17.55 ash 12.3 volatile matter 63.18 fixed carbon 6.97 ultimate analysis of the dry basis [m%] c 40.83 h 5.36 o 37.08 n 1.18 s 0.29 cl 0.34 ash 14.92 difference between the total mass of the gas and the sum of the mass of each gaseous component according to eq. 7, where ni denotes the moles of gaseous compounds and mi represents the molecular weight. mj = mgas (m%)j 100 (6) min(f) = abs ( mgas−(mcl+ms+mn)− ∑ i mini ) (7) the total weight of each element should be equal to the sum of the weight of the same element in each compound. due to the strength of the constraints, only a minimal error is permissible. the nonlinear constraints are 0.01 ≥ abs [mc−mc(nco+nch4+nco2+antar)] mc (8) 0.01 ≥ abs [mo−mo(nco+2nco2+nh2o+cntar)] mo (9) 0.01 ≥ abs [mh−mh(4nch4+2nh2o+2nh2+bntar)] mh (10) the limits of the parameters a, b, and c are determined based on the measurement of the tar composition [12,13]. the constraints of these parameters are 12 > a > 6; 24 > b > 6; 6 > c > 0 (11) empirical relationships [14, 15] were applied to the mass ratios of co to co2, and ch4 to co2, which are temperature-dependent: yco/co2 = exp ( 1.8447896+ 7 730 313 t + 5 019 898 t ) (12) table 3: lower and upper limits limit co2 h2o h2 cahboc a b c lower [m%] 10 0 0.4 40 9 10 4 upper [m%] 25 10 0.7 95 11 20 6 ych4/co2 = 5 × 10 −16 t 5.06 (13) by measuring the composition of the pyrolysis gas [8,16], the lower and upper limits were determined for the mass percent of components (table 3). the m% limits were calculated from 0 ≥ m%lower 100 − ni mi mgas − (mcl + ms + mn) (14) 0 ≥ ni mi mgas − (mcl + ms + mn) − m%upper 100 (15) using the kinetic parameters identified in the previous section, the batch pyrolysis was simulated for 250 kg of raw material with a moisture content of 17.55 % as well as plastic and cellulose fractions of 50 − 50 %. during the process, the composition of the gas was calculated as a function of temperature based on the aforementioned equations. the heating rate which was used during identification was 20 °c/min. the dry raw material was taken into account in the calculation. to reduce the calculation time, the composition was estimated every 20 s so the total simulation time was 3600 s. in each step, the starting point of the extrema search was the result of the calculation during the previous step. the results of the simulation are shown in fig. 3 and table 4. above 500 °c, the tar began to decompose and the amount of co increased compared to that of co2. 4. conclusions the aim of this work was to develop a relatively simple model of the pyrolysis zone of a downdraft gasification reactor to estimate its kinetic parameters and based on these propose a methodology to determine the amount of gaseous components generated. the kinetic parameters of the pyrolysis zone were determined by an extrema finder and the calculated values fit well with the experimental results found in the literature. with the help of the proposed model, the kinetic parameters can be identified for any new raw material and heating rate. the method applied to determine the composition of gaseous components is suitable for estimating the quantity of components as a function of temperature based on the elemental composition of the raw material. the one-step kinetic model using a simple calculation of the gas composition can be easily applied to describe the pyrolysis zone of the rdf gasification reactor and even integrated into a more complex model of a gasification system because of the low computational capacity required. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry modelling of the pyrolysis zone of a downdraft gasification reactor 75 figure 3: evolution of molar quantity a) and weight percentage b) as a function of temperature table 4: gas composition as a function of temperature temperature [°c] 200 300 400 500 600 700 molar quantity [mol] co2 0 29.2 266.1 406.5 386.5 390.2 co 0 1.2 98.9 499.7 927.7 1361.5 ch4 0 3.6 74.7 229.9 404.6 707.1 h2o 0 21.2 157 499.8 696.8 804.4 h2 0 14 132 304.2 340.3 349.6 tar 0 23.6 211 483.1 489.8 387.1 a 0 9.1 9.2 9 9 9.5 b 0 17.3 18.2 17.3 17.3 18.2 c 0 5.6 5.9 6 5.9 6 mass [m%] co2 0 18.6 17.8 11.8 10 10.1 co 0 0.5 4.2 9.2 15.3 22.4 ch4 0 0.8 1.8 2.4 3.8 6.7 h2o 0 5.5 4.3 5.9 7.4 8.5 h2 0 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 tar 0 74.2 71.5 70.3 63.1 51.9 5. acknowledgements this work was supported by the tkp2020-nka-10 project financed under the 2020-4.1.1-tkp2020 thematic excellence programme by the national research, development and innovation fund of hungary. references [1] eustat-municipal waste by waste management, date of save: 2021. 04. 07. https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat [2] ipcc: fourth assessment report, 2006 [3] molino, a.; chianese, s.; musmarra, d.: biomass gasification technology: the state of the art overview, j. energy chem., 2016, 25(1), 10–25 doi: 10.1016/j.jechem.2015.11.005 [4] kumar, a.; jones, d.d.; hanna, m.a.: thermochemical biomass gasification: a review of the current status of the technology, energies, 2009, 2(3), 556–581 doi: 10.3390/en20300556 [5] hameed, s.; sharma, a.; pareek, v.; wu, h.; yu, y.: a review on biomass pyrolysis models: kinetic, network and mechanistic models, biomass bioenerg., 2019, 123, 104–122 doi: 10.1016/j.biombioe.2019.02.008 [6] varhegyi, g.; jakab, e.; antal jr, m.j.: is the broido-shafizadeh model for cellulose pyrolysis true?, energy fuels, 1994, 8(6), 1345–1352 doi: 10.1021/ef00048a025 [7] faravelli, t.; frassoldati, a.; hemings, e.b.; ranzi, e.: multistep kinetic model of biomass pyrolysis, in cleaner combustion, 2013, 111–139, http://link.springer.com [8] sebestyén, z.; barta-rajnai, e.; bozi, j.; blazsó, m.; jakab, e.; miskolczi, n.; sója, j.; czégény, z.: thermo-catalytic pyrolysis of biomass and plastic mixtures using hzsm-5, appl. energy, 2017, 207, 114–122 doi: 10.1016/j.apenergy.2017.06.032 [9] grammelis, p.; basinas, p.; malliopoulou, a.; sakellaropoulos, g.: pyrolysis kinetics and combustion characteristics of waste recovered fuels, fuel, 2009, 88(1), 195–205 doi: 10.1016/j.fuel.2008.02.002 [10] vounatsos, p.; atsonios, k.; itskos, g.; agraniotis, m.; grammelis, p.; kakaras, e.: classification 49(1) pp. 71–76 (2021) https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/databrowser/view/env_wasmun/default/table?lang=en. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jechem.2015.11.005 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jechem.2015.11.005 https://doi.org/10.3390/en20300556 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biombioe.2019.02.008 https://doi.org/10.1021/ef00048a025 https://doi.org/10.1021/ef00048a025 http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4471-5307-8_5 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.apenergy.2017.06.032 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.fuel.2008.02.002 76 kákonyi, bárkányi, chován, and németh of refuse derived fuel (rdf) and model development of a novel thermal utilization concept through air-gasification, waste biomass valori., 2016, 7(5), 1297–1308 doi: 10.1007/s12649-016-9520-6 [11] phyllis2: the results of rdf composition studies were collected and averaged, date of save 2020.12.11. https://phyllis.nl [12] blanco, p.h.; wu, c.; onwudili, j.a.; williams, p.t.: characterization of tar from the pyrolysis/gasification of refuse derived fuel: influence of process parameters and catalysis, energy fuels, 2012, 26(4), 2107–2115 doi: 10.1021/ef300031j [13] ponzio, a.; kalisz, s.; blasiak, w.: effect of operating conditions on tar and gas composition in high temperature air/steam gasification (htag) of plastic containing waste, fuel process. technol., 2006, 87(3), 223–233 doi: 10.1016/j.fuproc.2005.08.002 [14] salem, a.m.; paul, m.c.: an integrated kinetic model for downdraft gasifier based on a novel approach that optimises the reduction zone of gasifier, biomass bioenerg., 2018, 109, 172–181 doi: 10.1016/j.biombioe.2017.12.030 [15] sharma, a.k.: modeling and simulation of a downdraft biomass gasifier 1. model development and validation, energy convers. manag., 2011, 52(2), 1386–1396 doi: 10.1016/j.enconman.2010.10.001 [16] efika, e.c.; onwudili, j.a.; williams, p.t.: products from the high temperature pyrolysis of rdf at slow and rapid heating rates, j. anal. appl. pyrolysis, 2015, 112, 14–22 doi: 10.1016/j.jaap.2015.01.004 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1007/s12649-016-9520-6 https://phyllis.nl/browse/standard/ecn-phyllis#rdf https://doi.org/10.1021/ef300031j https://doi.org/10.1016/j.fuproc.2005.08.002 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biombioe.2017.12.030 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biombioe.2017.12.030 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enconman.2010.10.001 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jaap.2015.01.004 introduction identification of pyrolysis kinetic parameters composition of the gas composition of refuse-derived fuel objective function and constraints conclusions acknowledgements microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 34. pp. 35-39 (2006) optimization problems of fermentor aeration-agitation system l. kozma1, l. nyeste2 and a. szentirmai3 1chartered engineer, former leader of the technical division of biogal pharmaceuticals, postal address: őrség u. 17., h-1112 budapest, hungary, e-mail: multiplan@axelero.hu 2professor of department of biochemical engineering, budapest university of technology, szt. gellért tér 4., h-1521 budapest, hungary 3professor of microbiology and biotechnology, university of debrecen, haraszt u. 21., h-4010 debrecen, hungary after four decades of almost exclusive application of rushton turbines a number of types of impellers were developed for the fermentation industry in the last 20 years which were proven to be more efficient despite their lower power requirements. the efficiency of an impeller is affected strongly by the degree of their hydromechanical properties corresponding with the specific characteristics and requirements of a certain fermentation process. evaluation in case of non-newtonian broths cannot be carried out with proper accuracy, and their optimization becomes difficult. an increase in yield even by a few percent can be of great importance in large-scale fermentation vessels. consequently, the optimization of agitation system is a very important factor but it is only partially provided by scale-up using pilot plant data and similarity criteria. this is the reason why we need newer methods for optimization of aerationagitation systems for large-scale fermentation vessels by agitators equipped with changeable flow modifying parts. keywords: power number, non-newtonian broth, rushton turbine, shear power, scale-up, flooding advantages and disadvantages of newer agitation systems the disadvantages of flat-blade rushton turbines – less axial circulation capability and large power requirement applied in penicillin fermentation for many years due to their excellent dispersion capability became more and more obvious with the increase in size of fermentation vessels. due to these disadvantages newer types of impellers and complex agitation systems were developed. turbines the efficiency of rushton turbines (fig. 1) was increased by the application of impellers with parabolic profile instead of flat-blades in scaba 6srgt system (fig. 2). their power number has decreased from 5,56,0 to 3,2. the number of higher energy peaks around the impeller endangering more sensitive microorganisms decreased and by increasing impeller’s diameter larger volumes could be blended with the same power requirements. the impellers’ sensitivity to “flooding” phenomenon and increased viscosity had decreased, but still they had lower circulation capability. in the event of applying more impellers compart-mentalization (inadequately blended areas) may occur. that is why in newer agitation systems these are used only at the lowest, dispersion level. (a. baker et al. 1) closed turbines have better circulation capability but these are rarely applied due to their little dispersion capability. propeller agitators propeller agitators have excellent axial circulation properties but weak dispersion capability. due to their little power number of 0,5-1,1 their diameter could be larger with the same power requirement and this facilitates full blending of viscous broths and filamentous microorganisms. first ekato has developed propeller type impellers with pitched blades called mig and intermig (fig. 3). recently streamlined propeller agitators with twisted surface have been applied at the upper levels of complex agitation systems. impellers with larger diameter ratios of 1:0,5-1:0,6 narrower blades such as lightnin 310 are applied for blending of lower viscosity broths. impellers with less diameter and diameter ratio of 1:0,45 and broader blades which have power number of 1,0-1,1 such as lightnin a 315 and prochem maxflo (fig. 4 and fig. 5) are applied for blending of higher viscosity broths. according to a.w. nienow propeller agitators provide better blending efficiency for both the lower and higher viscosity broths and better mass and heat transfer than rushton turbines. other advantages of these agitators are their power number and indulgence with sensitive microorganisms (a.e. nienow 2.) vacuum agitators vacuum agitators has low power requirement, good dispersion capability but lesser circulation properties. these types can be used for blending less air volumes. 36 they are used only in certain technological processes such as in flotation devices and in yeast production. newer complex agitation sysems merely the last few decades the researchers and manufacturers have realized that the efficiency if agitation systems can be increased by development of complex systems including more agitators of different types and properties which satisfy better the requirements of the particular levels. despite many published paper literature dealt not so much with the problems of agitation of large-scale fermentation vessels. perhaps on the symposium in firenze in 1993 data on the mass transfer problems due to differences between the levels of large-scale fermentation vessels were published for the first time. these differences are stemming partially from the position of levels and partially from their different functions i.e. could be local or functional differences. local differences are mainly caused by the pressure differences due to 8-12 m height of fermentors and this may affect bubble size and the density of foaming broths, etc. functional differences are because the function of the lowest agitator is efficiently disperse air input, the function of the middle agitator(s) is the best intensity circulation of the broth-air mixture and the function of the upper agitator is recirculation of the foaming broths on the surface with less further foam formation possible. in the nineties the increase in differences due to larger and larger-scale fermentation vessels had led to the development of complex agitation systems considering the differences between levels. 6srgt modified turbine agitator with good dispersion capability is generally used on the lowest level, and high efficiency propeller agitators e.g. lightnin, prochem are applied on the highest level. (k. myers, 3.) these complex systems have better energy dissipation, dispersion and circulation capabilities, they are more efficient and more sensitive to flooding than the older systems built from components of the same type and size. optimization problems of agitation systems sizing and development of large-scale agitation systems is still based mainly on data from and experiences with pilot plant fermentors, and relations developed through the theory of similarity and dimension analysis. lately industrial measurements have been used more and more often. the application of the results of experimental measurements during scale-up is limited very much by the significant differences in the hydrodynamic fields and flow patterns of large-scale fermentors mainly due to the following reasons: a) because of the nearness of the baffles and impellers the large velocity gradient between the flowing layers in the experimental device results in large shear velocity and shear power, while in large-scale devices the much less velocity gradient due to larger sizes results less values. b) unlike in the large-scale vessels no free turbulence facilitating mass transfer is evolved because of the less reynolds number value due to the less size of the experimental device. c) flow of high viscosity broths can slow down so much in the large-scale vessels that inadequately mixed areas are formed even when newer agitation systems are applied. no secondary dispersion can occur along the baffles which may mask the deficiencies of the impeller type itself in pilot plant fermentors. d) due to the high pressure of large-scale fermentation vessels bubble size affecting oxygen transfer is decreased, solubility of gases, the density of liquidgas mixture and coalescence of bubbles are increased. e) in large-scale vessels the agitation time and crosssectional air flow velocity are increased with the same specific air volume and v/v input. kipke’s example can be cited for demonstration of the increase in agitation time, namely if a given agitation time can be produced in a laboratory fermentor of 5 liters with p/v = 1 kw/m3 power/unit volume, in a large-scale fermentation vessel of 50 m3 the same agitation time can only be achieved with 5000 kw power! the differences in magnitude show the problems of scale-up and the limitations of the application of experimental results. the scales are changed considerably during scale-up even during entirely proportioned geometric scale-up. for example, if the size of a model is increased only by tenfold, its surface increases hundred-fold but its volume increases thousand-fold. that is why even the name of similarity criteria is false since their application provides merely partial similarity. due to the unequal change in size and value ratios, physical, geometric, kinetic and dynamic similarity criteria cannot be selected simultaneously. due to the lack of a generally valid procedure many scale-up processes had been developed. the most often is to rely on power requirement per volume (p/v), volumetric oxygen transfer coefficient (kla), gas-holdup and shear stress (viscosity/velocity gradient). the variation of chosen considerations may lead to great differences. that is why many researchers’ opinion is that results do not comply with the technical and economical requirements of biotechnology and can only be informative data for developers of sizing procedures. according to m. charles: “in practice, scale-up strategies tend to be »mixed bags« engendering art enpricism, conventional wisdom and (frequently) wishful thinking” (4). for the optimization of fermentation process i.e. for the achievement of largest possible yields even distribution of the dissolved oxygen (do), medium and ingredients added during fermentation and optimum 37 mass transfer conditions should be provided besides application of high productivity microorganisms and adequate mediums. adequate oxygen level can be achieved by both proper air volume input and its best possible dispersion i.e. the least oxygen bubbles and their most even distribution. to achieve this, adequate agitation power, air volume and an agitation system is necessary which is suitable for effective dispersion of air, for creation of intensive circulation and for even distribution of bubbles. the level of dissolved oxygen (do) can be measured during fermentation and can be adjusted by the regulation of power input and/or air volume – if there are adequate quantities. considering the sometimes high values e.g. in case of penicillin fermentation the efficiency of the process is a significant factor and it is affected by the structure of the agitation system besides the power input and adequate air volume. the problem is that however, we can calculate – at least approximately the diameter and power requirement of the agitators and the air volume by the available procedures and relations, these data provide very little information on optimum design similarly to the added nutrients oxygen transfer occurs on the interfaces of air bubbles and medium particles and through the walls of microorganisms’ cells. according to the double layer theory thinning of the laminar layers on the interfaces by creating turbulent liquid flow and shear stress due to this turbulence is necessary for the acceleration of mass transfer. it is well known that vortexes are arisen during real liquid flow due to their viscosity and because of the collision of these vortexes turbulence proportional to the velocity of flow occurs. shear stresses proportional to the velocity of flow occur between turbulent liquid layers which have important role in oxygen (do) and mass transfer: these stresses thin the laminar layers of transferring interfaces, micromix the components of broths, disperse oil particles and air bubbles facilitating and accelerating mass transfer processes, disintegrate clots and in some cases cause morphological changes in the structure of microorganisms as in the case of penicillin fermentation. the magnitude of hydrodynamic forces created by agitation can be seen from the fact that according to the calculations of van’t riet and smith the centrifugal acceleration behind the vortexes created by impellers can be seven-hundredfold of the gravity (5). shear powers may, however, damage microorganisms which are especially sensitive, contribute to the creation of stable liquefied foams which generally decrease oxygen transfer, and aeration of carbon-dioxide and other gases partially on direct way and partially due to antifoaming oils. microorganisms on the interface of vortexes can be disrupted while those in the centre of the vortex may abrade each other. consequently the intensity of agitation should remain within a narrow range for keeping damaging effect at a minimum level while maintaining maximum advantages and this is the purpose of optimization. the characteristics of fermentation processes may vary due to the differences in viscosity, foaming properties, density, etc. a typical feature is that while foaming generally decreases the oxygen transfer, in certain cases the increased persistence of bubble may raise the rate of oxygen transfer in liquefied foams, and antifoaming agents may decrease it. some microorganisms such as oxytetracycline producers do not need agitation, and their fermentation can be made in slim vessels without agitator which are much cheaper. air inflated into the broths dispersed, distributed and circulated in the medium of the fermentor by the agitation system proportionally to power input. due to this procedure the volume of the medium is increasing and oxygen will be dissolved in the medium depending on the intensity of agitation, characteristics of medium and surface gas velocity vs. the degree of oxygen transfer is depending on the viscosity of the medium the characteristics of air, medium and microorganism system, and coalescing properties of air bubbles. the entrapment of air and this way oxygen fusion can decrease greatly due to increased viscosity and bubble coalescence (van’t riet, smith 5., and buchholz et al. 6.) besides the mentioned air entrapment broths volume can also be increased by the often very intensive foam formation depending on broths characteristics. stable so called liquefied foams are formed on more viscous mediums such as in penicillin fermentation. contrary to the air entrapment mentioned above this foam formation is detrimental since it limits oxygen transfer partially directly and partially through antifoaming agents, however rarely the opposite situation may occur. consequently maintaining the air input and power within a narrow range based on continuous instrumental measurement of fermentation parameters is an important requirement for dissolving oxygen and nutrients and also their transfer to microorganisms with adequate rate. considering economical importance of mass transfer problems arising from increasing size of fermentor vessels more efficient complex agitation systems were developed with lower power requirement, better dispersion and including far better circulation levels. in their paper published in 1987 b.c. buckland et al. had revealed that application of lightnin and prochem propeller agitators providing better “top to bottom” blending of viscous broths is cost effective due to saving power input and/or by the application of these agitators the production can be increased because of the higher cell concentration due to better agitation (buckland et al. 7). papers on complex agitation systems have been published more often since the beginning of 1990s (chemineer, 8). during their developmental activities manufacturers besides the relations for calculation of main sizes and powers could mainly rely on experimental results which, however, provided merely informative results due to the above reasons. it should also be noticed that uniformization, development of systems which can be distributed widely and production of their own types and licensed products are the main interests of manufacturers. all these factors eventually lead to 38 negligence of specific requirements of fermentations. exerting themselves to protect their trade secrets, factories generally provide very little possibilities for carrying out profound studies fermentation process by the professionals of manufacturers. according to the above characteristics and requirements of fermentation processes may differ very much. it follows from the above written that besides applied technologies and materials the success of fermentation processes also depends upon whether the agitation system used during fermentation is adequate for the specific requirements of fermentation. consequently the characteristics, dispersion and circulation capabilities of agitation levels should be adjusted to the features and requirements of the fermentation which may, conversely, vary because of the differences between the experimental and industrial levels. in case of viscous liquids experimental levels do not provide data and indications of adequate accuracy for the adjustment. although the analysis of experimental data has been improved very much since v. charles through the application of computers, lesser changes may also be of significance due to the large volume of industrial fermentors and these changes cannot be designed with adequate accuracy. it follows from the above that there is no adequate procedure available for actual optimization of industrial agitation systems and for establishment how much an agitation system can be considered optimal for a certain fermentation procedure. the efficiency of an agitation system is depending on its structure and considering fermentation it is depending on how the agitation system’s levels use power input for dispersion and circulation and how adequate this is for the requirements of a given fermentation process. a solution for this problem may be if manufacturers provide special separated parts for the particular levels of the agitation system which could be fixed on the system by screw this was changing the characteristics of agitation. it would not be especially difficult to solve since power input is proportionally changed with the fifth degree of the diameter of the agitator and the characteristic of flows can be modified within a wide range merely with changing the shape and angle of blades of the impeller. the application of this idea requires some change in viewpoint according to the following: 1. it cannot be expected that a manufacturer will provide an “optimal” agitation system, but it is expected to provide an agitation system of which perfusion properties can be modified within a wide range with auxiliary parts. it would be, of course, the obligation of the manufacturer to provide detailed user manuals and information sheet for the expectable effects of these auxiliary parts and provide professional assistance for testing on demand. 2. the obligation of the user would be the actual optimization of the agitation system according to provided directives and thorough analysis of the effects of the auxiliary parts. inclusion of factory professionals in the selection of the most efficient system may solve the problems of scale-up sometime mentioned as dream by m. charles (4) and may assist the establishment really optimal agitation systems. biogal pharmaceuticals established for the production of antibiotics together with research centers has endeavored to develop its devices since the beginning. according to the knowledge learned in the international symposium in prague in 1964 where both european and us professionals attended, biogal pharmaceutical was the first pharmaceutical company applying two-turns driver engine which increased power utilization by 3040%. at the beginning of 1970s the company changed the systems with rushton agitators which had asymmetric structure, and 20% better power on the lowest level. this was due to the cognition of the fact that in the applied asymmetric systems the efficiency of the lower agitators compared to the upper ones was considerably decreased by the function of dispersion. since the beginning of seventies the company had started to apply a complex system including propeller agitators and rushton turbines and with this method narrow otc fermentors without agitators could successfully be adapted for penicillin fermentation. based on these experiences also considering the construction of biogal’s newer complex agitation systems it can be concluded that there are more possibilities for the increase of efficiency and optimization of agitation systems through the application of modifiable impellers recommended above. conclusions conditions of optimization of the aeration-agitation systems of large-scale fermentors in case of viscous broths: 1. providing flow modifying parts for the agitations system for variation of dispersion and circulation capabilities and adjustment for the requirements of a specific fermentation process. 2. evaluation of the results of variation by fermentation professionals and choosing optimum variation. considering these on a long term basis may lead to gain profound knowledge about specific requirements of fermentation processes and industrial optimization may become unnecessary in the future. nonation do dissolves oxygen p/v power/volume kla volumetric oxygen transfer coefficient vs gas velocity 39 references 1. bakker a., smith j. m., meyers k. j., chemineer, po box 1123, daytona, oh45401, reprinted from chemical engineering 2. nienow a. w.: 9th biotech symposium, crystal city, usa, 1992 pp. 196-196 3. meyers k., reeder m., bakker a., rigden m.: agitating for success, the chemical engineering 4. charles m.: trends in biotechnology, vol 3., no.6 180 5. van’t riet k., smith j. m., chemical eng. sci. 1975, 30. 1083 6. buchholz h., buchholz r., niebenschutz h., schügerl k.: eur. j. appl. microb. and biotechn. 6. 1978, 115. 7. buckland et al. bioengineering vol. 31. 70. 737742. i. 1988 8. chemineer, inc. reprinted for chemical engineer crammer road, west meadows, daby, de 21 6xt, england microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 89-94 (2008) separation of a ternary homoazeotropic mixture by pressure swing batch distillation g. modla, p. lang bute department of building services and process engineering, h-1521 budapest, muegyetem rkp. 3-5, hungary e-mail: lang@mail.bme.hu the separation of a ternary mixture (n-pentane-acetone-cyclo-hexane) with two binary minimum azeotropes is studied by feasibility studies and rigorous simulation calculations. by the feasibility studies based on the analysis of the vessel paths in the residue curve maps at the two different pressures (pi, pii) the separation steps are determined for the two configurations studied (batch stripper (bs), double column batch stripper (dcbs)). the rigorous calculations are performed by the ccdcolumn professional dynamic flow-sheet simulator. for the dcbs two operational policies are compared. keywords: batch distillation, separation of azeotropes, pressure swing distillation, batch column configurations, feasibility study, rigorous process simulation introduction distillation is the separation method most frequently applied in the chemical industry, which is based on the difference of volatility of the components of a liquid mixture. for the separation of the two components (a and b) forming an azeotrope a special distillation method must be applied such as the pressure swing distillation (psd), extractive or heteroazeotropic distillation. the pressure swing distillation is the least studied from these three methods. batch distillation (bd) has always been an important part of seasonal, uncertain or low capacity and high-purity chemicals’ production. it is a process of key importance in the pharmaceutical and several other industries and in the regeneration of waste solvent mixtures. many mixtures form an azeotrope, whose position can be shifted substantially by changing system pressure, that is, a pressure sensitive azeotrope. (at some pressure the azeotrope may even disappear.) this effect can be exploited to separate azeotropic mixtures without the application of a separating agent by the so-called pressure swing distillation. lewis (1928) was the first, who suggested distilling the azeotropic mixtures by pressure swing distillation. this process has been suggested to separate azeotropic mixtures by e.g. black (1980), abu-eishah and luyben (1985), chang and shis (1989). more details about the pressure swing continuous distillation can be found in books of van winkle (1967) and wankat (1988). knapp et al. (1992) developed a new process, in which pressure swing continuous distillation was combined with entrainer addition. the possibility of the application of an entrainer for the separation of binary azeotropic mixtures increases to a large extent the number of mixtures separable by this process. on the other hand the separation of the original components from the entrainer means an additional task. phimister and seider (2000) studied the separation of a minimum azeotrope (thf-water) by semicontinuous psd and reverse-batch operation (batch stripping). in the semicontinuous column better performance was achieved than in the batch stripper. they also investigated the control and other practical aspects of these configurations, and their performance was compared with that of a continuous system, as well. wasylkiewicz et al. (2003) developed an algorithm which allows the variation of compositions of azeotropes with pressure to be tracked, and all new azeotropes that appear within specified pressure range to be found. to our knowledge repke et al. (2006) were the first, who investigated experimentally the application the pressure swing distillation in batch. they studied the separation of a minimum boiling, homoazeotropic mixture (acetonitrile-water) by pressure swing distillation in a batch rectifier and in a stripper with pilot-plant experiments and rigorous simulations. the aim of these authors was rather the experimental study of the pressure swing batch distillation than the exhausting theoretical study of the feasibility of the process. the above authors have not studied either the separation of ternary mixtures. the aim of our work is to study the separation of a ternary mixture (n-pentane-acetone-cyclo-hexane) forming two binary minimum azeotropes by feasibility studies and rigorous simulation calculations. by the feasibility studies based on the analysis of the vessel paths in the residue curve maps at the two 90 different pressures (pi, pii) the separation steps are determined for the two configurations studied (batch stripper (bs), double column batch stripper (dcbs)). the rigorous calculations are performed by the ccdcolumn professional dynamic flow-sheet simulator. feasibility method first the method applied for the assessment of feasibility is briefly presented, then the feasibility of different column configurations will be investigated. when making feasibility studies we suppose that maximal (perfect) separation can be produced. this involves the following assumptions: infinite number of stages, very high reflux/reboil ratio, negligible liquid plate hold-up, negligible vapour hold-up. the method is based on the determination of the feasible compositions of products (continuously withdrawn) and those of residues (remaining in the vessel). since we consider ternary mixtures for the feasibility analysis, we study the residue curve maps. classification of residue curve maps the concept of a residue curve map was first introduced by schreinemakers (1901). a residue curve map is a triangular diagram (with the pure components at each vertex) which shows the locus of the liquid-phase composition as it varies with time during a simple distillation process. the trajectories of the various residue curves have a directional character which is represented by arrows (pointing toward increasing temperatures, and also increasing time during the simple distillation process). a mathematical description is given by doherty and perkins (1978), who developed a set of nonlinear ordinary differential equations, which model the liquid composition profiles as a function of time. the most recently applied tools for the studing of the separation of ternary mixtures is the residue curve map analysis. gurikov (1958) was actually the first to derive the rule of azeotropy and propose a thermodynamic topological classification of ternary mixtures. later, serafimov (1970) defined the topological classification of ternary mixtures into 26 diagrams. an even more detailed classification is proposed by matsuyama and nishimura (1977), who also rank the components in the order of their boiling temperatures light(l), intermediate(i), and heavy(h). this classification includes 113 diagram classes of which 87 are graphically presented by doherty and caldarola (1985). nowadays these two methods are applied for the classification of ternary mixtures. neither of these two classification methods takes into consideration that with the variation of pressure: the azeotropic composition can considerably vary, the azeotrope may even disappear, the volatility order of components may change. first modla et al. (2008) recognised the necessity of modifying these methods in the case of mixtures whose components form pressure sensitive azeotrope(s). the classification of residue curve maps by matsuyama and nishimura is as follows: the three digits signify the type of binary azeotropes on the l-i, i-h, and h-l edges of the triangle, respectively. the numbers are assigned by the following rules: 0: no ateotropes, 1: binary minimum-boiling azeotrope, node (must be unstable) 2: binary minimum-boiling azeotrope, saddle, 3: binary maximum-boiling azeotrope, node (must be stable) 4: binary maximum-boiling azeotrope, saddle the single letter after the first three digits signifies the type of ternary azeotrope. m: minimum-boiling ternary azeotrope (must be an unstable node) m: maximum-boiling ternary azeotrope (must be a stable node) s: intermediate boiling ternary azeotrope (must be a saddle) for the psbd the classification of the rcm (eg by matsuyama and nishimura (1977, m&n) by serafimov (1970, s)) must be extended. the pressure sensitivity of an azeotrope must be always indicated even if there is no change in the type of rcm since it has influence on the separation method to be applied. (we write ‘p’ after the number of m&n if it is pressure sensitive). if the type of rcm varies it must be given for both pressures. feasibility region of the separation (fr) is defined as follows: all feed compositions, from where all components can be purely recovered by maximal separation at the given pressure or by applying pressure swing. the regions outside the fr can be conditionally feasible: from where fr can be reached by a preparatory step (distillation/stripping or addition of e) infeasible: from where a fr can not be reached. column configurations the pressure swing batch distillation (psbd) can be realised in configurations with either one or two column section(s). because of the occurrence of the azeotrope the two pure components must be produced at two different pressures. the different pressures can be applied at different times (in the same column section) or in different column sections (at the same time). 91 configurations with one column section in this case the pressure swing can be performed only in time. hence there must be at least two sequential production steps at different pressures in one cycle. the pressure swing batch distillation (psbd) can be realised in batch rectifier(br) or batch stripper(bs). the feed is charged into the bottom (rectifier, fig. 1a), or top vessel (stripper, fig. 1b). (in fig. 1a for the sake of better comparability the two functions of the reboiler (storage(vessel) and evaporation(total reboiler)) are separated.) continuous product withdrawal is performed from the top (rectifier) or the bottom (stripper). depending on the feed composition and the type of the azeotrope in the case of a binary mixture a-b the first (and the following) product withdrawn can be pure a, pure b or the azeotropic mixture (modla and lang, 2008). a) batch rectifier b) batch stripper figure 1: single column configurations a) double column batch rectifier b) double column batch stripper figure 2: double column configurations double column configurations the two different pressures are applied in different column sections. in the case of a ternary mixture it is theoretically possible to produce three pure components in a single production step. (two components are withdrawn continuously and the third remains in the vessel.) feasibility studies the vapour-liquid equilibrium data of the ternary mixture (n-pentane-acetone-c-hexane) studied are given in tables 1 and 2. the components of this mixture form two minimal boiling point binary azeotropes. one of them (acetone-n-pentane) is pressure sensitive, whilst the other one (c-hexane-acetone) is not. the c-hexane (h) and acetone (i) vertices are stable nodes, while the n-pentane (l) vertex is a saddle. (fig. 3a). the azeotrope i-h (azih), which is not pressure sensitive, is a saddle. the azeotrope l-i (azli), is the unstable node, its location considerably depends on the pressure (fig. 3b). the (extended) m&n class of the mixture: 1p-2-0. table 1: boiling points of the pure components at the two different pressures pi=1.01 bar pii=10 bar n-pentane (l) 36.07 °c 124.74 °c acetone (i) 56.25 °c 142.98 °c c-hexane (h) 80.72 °c 182.31 °c table 2: azeotropic data (temperature, composition) at the two different pressures 1.01 bar 10 bar n-pentane acetone 32.75 °c 0.75-0.25 116.99 °c 0.67-0.33 acetone c-hexane 53.95 °c 0.77-0.23 140,27 °c 0.79-0.21 92 figure 3: sketch of the residue curve map (a) and psbd regions (b) separation steps for the one column configuration a. charge composition in the region h: 1. removal of component h from the mixture with a batch stripper (the residue is mixture l-i). 2. separation l/i with pressure swing batch stripping. b. charge composition outside the region h: in this case pressure swing must be applied already in the ternary area, as well: 0. preparation step: the vessel composition is brought into the area of the triangle azili-az ii li-azih. 1. in the first production series we get alternately pure components h and i as bottoms, until the vessel composition reaches the edge l-i. 2. in the second production series we get alternately pure components i and l as bottoms. separation steps for the double column configuration a. charge composition in the region h: 1. removal of component h from the mixture by operating one of the two columns (the residue is mixture l-i). b. charge composition outside the region h: 0. preparation step: the vessel composition is brought into the area of the triangle azili-az ii li-azih by operating only one of the columns. 1. production of components h and i as bottom products of the two columns (the vessel residue is mixture l-i). 2. production of components l and i as bottom products of the two columns. a) one column b) double column figure 4: vessel path (---) and x-profiles (…) we investigate with rigorous simulation only the double column configuration since in the case of the one column configuration if the composition of the charge is located: in region h, the ternary separation can be reduced to a binary one, outside region h, sufficient recoveries can be only produced with a lot of separation steps beginning with pressure change. rigorous simulation results the amount of charge: 1 m3 (13.42 kmol). its composition is shown in table 3. table 3: the composition of the charge n-pentane (l) acetone (i) c-hexane (h) mol% 19.3 64.5 16.2 vol% 25.6 54.3 20.1 the prescribed purity for both products: 98 mol%. both columns of the dcbs contains 40 theoretical plates (ni= nii=40). the pressures: pi=1 bar, pii=10 bar, the liquid hold-up: 2 dm3/plate. the liquid flow rate leaving the common top vessel, which is divided between the two columns: ltotal = 10 m 3/h (cca. 11.6 kmol/h). (the reboil ratios are not fixed.) at different liquid division ratios (η = li/ltotal) the optimal operation conditions (where the energy consumption is minimal) are determined. two different operational policies are studied and compared: 1. the production is begun in each column immediately when the bottoms reaches its prescribed purity (policy 1). 2. the production is begun in both columns at the same time when both bottoms have already reached the prescribed purity (policy 2). in both cases two production steps can be performed: 1. production of h and i 2. production of l and i in our case (at the given charge composition) at the end of step 1 the amount of residue is so small, that this residue can not be separated in the given (industrial size) installation therefore only step 1 is performed. the evolution of the composition of vessel and two product tanks in step 1 is shown for policy 1 (η = 0.6) in figs. 5 and 6a-b, respectively. depending on the value of the bottoms composition the values of reboil ratios were varied with a pid controller whose parameters (ap i = 0.1, ti i = 0.9 s, td i = 13 s, ap ii = 0.1, ti ii = 0.9 s, td ii = 13 s) were selected by trials. 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 100 200 acetone c-hexane n-pentane min mol/mol figure 5: the evolution of the vessel liquid composition i h l az ih az ii li az i li i h l az ih az ii li az i li i h l az ih az ii li az i li i h l az ih az li h 93 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 50 100 150 200 250 acetone c-hexane n-pentane min mol/mol 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 50 100 150 200 250 acetone c-hexane n-pentane min mol/mol figure 6: the evolution of the two product compositions at the end of step 1 the whole amount of c-hexane is recovered. the vessel liquid of low quantity contains a binary mixture of n-pentane-acetone. the production is begun earlier in column i (fig. 6a) than in column ii (fig. 6b). the purity of acetone in product tank i remained at the prescribed value (0.98). the purity of the c-hexane slightly decreased in time but at the end it was near to its prescribed value (0.981). policy 1 step 1: production of h and i on the increase of the liquid division ratio the recovery of product h increases and that of product i decreases (fig. 7a). the average recovery slightly increases. the average energy consumption has a minimum at η = 0.55 (fig. 7b). figure 7: the effect of the liquid division ratio η on the a) recoveries b) energy consumptions (policy 1) policy 2 step 1: production of h and i on the increase of the liquid division ratio the recovery of product h increases and that of product i decreases (fig. 8a). the average recovery slightly increases. the average energy consumption has a minimum at η = 0.65 (fig. 8b). it must be still noted that for liquid division ratios smaller than 0.6 the prescribed product purity was not reached at all. figure 8: the effect of the liquid division ratio, η on the a) recoveries b) energy consumptions (policy 2) comparison of the different operational policies by the two operational policies similar recoveries were produced but the energy consumption was lower by the operational policy 1 (fig. 9). figure 9: comparison of the two operational policies a further advantage of this operational policy is that it can be applied in a wider liquid division ratio which is favourable from the point of view of the control of the process. the location of the minimum of the average energy consumption is different at the two operational policies. conclusion the separation of a ternary mixture (n-pentane-acetonecyclo-hexane) with pressure swing batch distillation was investigated by feasibility studies and rigorous simulation calculations. by the feasibility studies based on the analysis of the vessel paths in the residue curve maps at the two different pressures (pi, pii) the separation steps are determined for the two configurations studied (batch stripper (bs), double column batch stripper (dcbs)). we stated that it depends on the charge composition that the application of the one or the double column configuration is more favourable. η η η η η η 94 the rigorous simulation calculations were performed with the ccdcolumn program of the ccdcolumn professional dynamic flow-sheet simulator package for a given separation problem. for the double column batch stripper two different operational policies were compared. by the two policies similar recoveries were reached. however the operational policy by which in the column whose bottoms has already reached the prescribed purity we begin the production immediately (before reaching the prescribed purity in the other column) provided more favourable results from the point of view of energy consumption. a further advantage of this operational policy is that it can be applied in a wider liquid division ratio. acknowledgement this work was financially supported by the hungarian scientific research fund (otka) (no:t-049184) and by the janos bolyai research scholarship of the has. appendix a. antoine constants : ct b aln(p) + −= where p vapour pressure [torr], t temperature [k] component a b c n-pentane (l) 15.993 2554.6 -36.25 acetone (i) 16.732 2975.9 -34.52 c-hexane (h) 15.802 2797.6 -49.10 b. uniquac parameters i,j uij-ujj, cal/mol uji-uii , cal/mol l,i 571.98 -95.033 l,h -48.806 71.682 i,h -77.536 543.590 references 1. abu-eishah s. i., luyben w. l.: „design and control of two-column azeotropic column azeotropic distillation system”, ind. eng. chem. process. des. dev., 24, 132-140 (1985). 2. black c.: „distillation modelling of ethanol recovery and dehydration processes for ethanol and gasahol”, chem. eng. prog., 76, 78-85 (1980). 3. chang t., shih t. t.: „development of an azeotropic distillation scheme for purification of tetrahydrofuran”, fluid phase equilib., 52, 161168 (1989). 4. doherty m. f., caldarola g. a.: "design and synthesis of homogeneous azeotropic distillations. 3. the sequencing of columns for azeotropic and extractive distillation", ind. eng. chem. fundam. 24, 474 (1985) 5. doherty m. f., perkins j. d.: „on the dynamics of distillation process. i.”, chem. eng. sci., 33, 281301 (1978). 6. gurikov y. v.: „structure of the vapour–liquid equilibrium diagrams of ternary homogeneous solutions”, russ. journal of physical chem., 32(9), 1980-1996 (in russian, abstract in english) (1958). 7. knapp j. p., doherty m. f.: „a new pressure swing-distillation process for separating homogeneous azeotropic mixtures”, ind. eng. chem. res., 31, 346-357 (1992). 8. matsuyama h., nishimura h.: „topological and thermodynamic classification of ternary vle”, j. chem. eng. japan, 10, 181 (1977). 9. modla g., lang p.: „feasibility of new pressure swing batch distillation methods”, chem. eng. sci., 63(11), 2856-2874 (2008). 10. modla g., lang p., kopasz a.: „entrainer selection for pressure swing batch distillation”, escape-18, lyon, 6 pages on cd (2008). 11. lewis w. k.: „dehydrating alcohol and the like”, u.s. patent, 1, 676, 700, july 10 (1928). 12. phimister j. r., seider, w. d.: „semi-continuous, pressure swing distillation”, ind. eng. chem. res., 39, 122-130 (2000). 13. repke j. u., klein a., bogle d., wozny g.: „pressure swing batch distillation for homogenous azeotropic separation”, icheme symposium series, no. 152, 709-718 (2006). 14. schreinemakers f. a. h.: „dampfdrucke ternarer gemische. theoretischer teil: dritte abhandlung”, z. phys. chem., 36, 710-740 (1901). 15. serafimov l. a.: „the azeotropic rule and the classification of multicomponent mixtures vii. diagrams for ternary mixtures”. russ. j. phys. chem. 44(4), 567-571 (1970). 16. van winkle: „distillation”, mcgraw-hill, new york (1967). 17. wankat: (1988). „equilibrium-staged separations”, elsevier, new york. 18. wasylkiewicz s. k., kobylka l. c., castillo f. j. l., „pressure sensitivity analysis of azeotropes”, ind. eng. chem. res., 42, 207-213 (2003). hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 45(2) pp. 13–18 (2017) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2017-0014 investigations of the tlinp2se6–in4(p2se6)3 system and its optical properties valeria tovt, 1 igor barchiy, 1 * michal piasecki, 2 iwan kityk, 3 and anatolii fedorchuk 4 1 department of chemistry, uzhgorod national university, pidgirna st. 46, 88000 uzhgorod, ukraine 2 institute of physics, jan dlugosz university, armii krajowej 13/15, 42-200 częstochowa, poland 3 faculty of electrical engineering, częstochowa university of technology, dabrowskiego 69, 42201 częstochowa, poland 4 department of inorganic and organic chemistry, lviv national university of veterinary medicine and biotechnologies, pekarska st. 50, 79010 lviv, ukraine the equilibrium phases were investigated and the corresponding phase diagram constructed for the tlinp2se6– in4(p2se6)3 system from physical and chemical analyses, namely differential thermal analysis (dta), x-ray diffraction (xrd), and microstructural analysis (msa). it was established that this system belongs to the eutectic type and is characterized by the formation of boundary solid phases containing complex compounds. single crystals of the compounds tlinp2se6 and in4(p2se6)3 were grown using the bridgman method. both crystals were found to exhibit diffuse reflection spectra and photoinduced dependence of birefringence at various ir wavelengths generated by co2 laser irradiation. birefringence properties were investigated using the senarmont method. keywords: phase diagram, solid solution, crystal structure, optical properties, direct-gap semiconductor, indirect-gap semiconductor, photoinduced birefringence 1. introduction compounds with the formula m2p2se6 possess promising magneto-electric, piezoelectric, electro-optical, and thermoelectric properties that indicate their suitability as functional materials in optoelectronics [1-2]. due to their crystal structure, they exhibit anisotropy in terms of their physical properties. in a multilevel structure of m2p2se6 compounds, metal cations and pairs of phosphorous atoms occupy the octahedral positions between planes of selenium atoms. this structure is characterized by its layered arrangement of atoms, which contributes to the formation of a dipole moment between the layers of cationic and anionic groups. the replacement of the metal cation м 2+ by other metal cations (м + , м 3+ or м 4+ ) leads to the deformation of the structure [3-4], changes the magnitude of the dipole moment and, consequently, its physical properties. the tl2se–in2se3–“p2se4” ternary system is composed of binary tl2se–in2se3, tl2se–“p2se4” and in2se3–“p2se4” systems. the tl2se–in2se3 system is characterized by the formation of two intermediate ternary compounds: tlinse2 melts congruently at 1023 k and tlin5se8 is formed according to the peritectic reaction l + in2se3 tlin5se8 at 1029 k [5-6]. in the sys *correspondence: i_barchiy@ukr.net tem tl2se–“p2se4” with a ratio of 2 to 1, interoperable components form the compound tl4p2se6 which possesses a congruent nature of melting at 758 k [7]. the in2se3–“p2se4” system is characterized by the formation of the compound in4(p2se6)3 in a syntectic reaction of l1 + l2 in4(p2se6)3 at 880 k [8]. in the tl2se– in2se3–“p2se4” system at the intersection of incisions, the phases tl4p2se6–in4(p2se6)3 and tlinse2–“p2se4” form the complex compound tlinp2se6 [9]. 2. experimental ternary tl4p2se6 and in4(p2se6)3 compounds were prepared by melting stoichiometric quantities of binary tl2se with elementary indium, phosphorous and selenium under a vacuum of 0.13 pa in quartz ampoules using a single temperature method. in all syntheses, components were used that possess a purity greater than 99.999 %. the maximum temperatures of synthesis were 993 and 893 k for in4(p2se6)3 and tlinp2se6, respectively. the rate of heating up to the maximum temperature was 50 k h -1 . the melts were maintained at the maximum temperature for 72 hours. cooling was performed at a rate of 50 k h -1 down to an annealing temperature of 573 k. the linearity of the heating and cooling processes was achieved by a rif-101 temperature controller. the homogenization process occurred over 120 hours. identification of the complex compounds and alloys was conducted by differential thermal analy tovt, barchiy, piasecki, kityk, and fedorchuk hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 14 sis (dta) (pra-01, chrome-alumina thermocouple 5 k), x-ray diffraction (xrd) (dron-3 diffractometer, cukα radiation, ni filter) and microstructural analysis (msa) (metallurgical microscope lomo metam r-1). crystal structural calculations were conducted using the software package wincsd [10]. optical properties were investigated using an sf-18 spectrophotometer within the wavelength range of 400 – 750 nm. a co2 laser was used for photoinduced electrons in samples employing 200 ns pulses with a pulse repetition frequency of about 10 hz, a fundamental frequency of 10.6 μm and a frequency doubling of 5.3 μm beams. the birefringence was measured using a er:glass cw laser at 1540 nm by application of the senarmont method. 3. results and analysis 3.1. phase diagram of the tlinp2se6– in4(p2se6)3 system the tlinp2se6–in4(p2se6)3 system is a quasi-binary section of the tl2se–in2se3–“p2se4” ternary system (figs.1 and 2). it belongs to the eutectic type (v-type diagram by rozeboom). the complex compounds tlinp2se6 and in4(p2se6)3 melt congruently at 875 k and 963 k, respectively. tlinp2se6 is characterized by two polymorphic transformations lttlinp2se6 mttlinp2se6 at 680 k and mttlinp2se6 httlinp2se6 at 711 k. the prefixes lt–, mt– and ht– represent low–, medium–, and high–temperature modifications, respectively. in4(p2se6)3 is also characterized by two polymorphic transformations ltin4(p2se6)3 mtin4(p2se6)3 at 665 k and mtin4(p2se6)3 htin4(p2se6)3 at 903 k. when the temperature rises above 791 k, an invariant eutectic process is observed l httlinp2se6 + mtin4(p2se6)3 (in the presence of 15 mol% in4(p2se6)3). the system is described by the sequence of the efficient peritectic processes httlinp2se6 + mtin4(p2se6)3 mttlinp2se6 (714 k) and mttlinp2se6 + mtin4(p2se6)3 lttlinp2se6 (689 k) based on the polymorphic transformation of tlinp2se6. the polymorphism of in4(p2se6)3 produces metatectic htin4(p2se6)3 l + mtin4(p2se6)3 (884 k) and eutectic mtin4(p2se6)3 lttlinp2se6 + ltin4(p2se6)3 (652 k) processes. regions of homogeneity in solid solutions, based on the batched complex selenides during annealing at a temperature of 573 k, do not exceed 10 mol%. 3.2. crystal structure of the compounds in4(p2se6)3 and tlinp2se6 the crystal structures of the compounds tlinp2se6 and in4(p2se6)3 were solved using the rietveld method. as an initial model for tlinp2se6 [2], the parameters of in4(p2se6)3 were used [8]. analysis of the crystalline structures of the investigated compounds (table 1) showed that it is possible to define the structural group of the anionic group [p2se6] 4– , which is formed by two single tetrahedra (fig.3). cationic atoms occupy positions between the anionic groups and none are located between the layers. figure 1. results of the xrd analysis of the tlinp2se6–in4(p2se6)3 system. (i rel – intensity, 2 theta angle of reflection) figure 2. phase diagram of the tlinp2se6–in4(p2se6)3 system. (1–l, 2–l+htin4(p2se6)3, 3–htin4(p2se6)3, 4–httlinp2se6, 5–l+mtin4(p2se6)3, 6–htin4(p2se6)3+mtin4(p2se6)3, 7–httlinp2se6, 8–httlinp2se6+mtin4(p2se6)3, 9–mtin4(p2se6)3, 10–httlinp2se6+mttlinp2se6, 11–mttlinp2se6, 12–mttlinp2se6+mtin4(p2se6)3, 13–mttlinp2se6+lttlinp2se6, 14–lttlinp2se6+mtin4(p2se6)3, 15–mtin4(p2se6)3+ltin4(p2se6)3, 16–lttlinp2se6, 17–lttlinp2se6+ltin4(p2se6)3, 18–ltin4(p2se6)3). table 1. crystal data of tlinp2se6 and in4(p2se6)3 compounds. compound crystal system space group lattice constant in4(p2se6)3 [8] trigonal r3 h (146) a = 6.362(3), c = 19.929(6) å in4(p2se6)3 trigonal r3 h (146) a = 6.3808(8), c = 20.014(4) å tlinp2se6 [2] triclinic p-1 (2) a = 6.4310, b = 7.5002, c = 12.124 å, tlinp2se6 triclinic p-1 (2) α = 100.553, β = 93.735, γ = 113.451 investigations of the tlinp2se6–in4(p2se6)3 system 45(2) pp. 13–18 (2017) 15 the structure of in4(p2se6)3 can be derived from the structure of sn2p2se6 [11]. it is composed of multiple substitutions of the isovalent cations according to 2m 2+ m 4+ . the crystal structure of the compound in4(p2se6)3 can be presented based on the composition of the anionic group [p2se6] 4– (fig.4), in which the indium atoms occupy the space between the anionic groups. the second coordination environment (sce) [12] is of cuboctahedron form. indium cations are surrounded by a triangular environment of anionic atoms of the group [p2se6] 4– and within the frames of its environment bonding exists with six atoms of selenium while the coordination form is octahedral (fig.5). the structural and chemical properties of the ме і ме ііі р2se6 compositions are related to the important role concerning the dimension of the cation on its location between the layers of the anionic [p2se6] 4– groups. crystallographic analysis showed that smaller cations occupy a position in the plane perpendicular to the main axis. atoms located in a second coordination environment of anionic groups in the structure of tlinp2se6 compounds can be presented as a strongly distorted hexagonal-equivalent cuboctahedron (fig.6). the atoms of metallic cations, located in the cavities between the atoms of the anionic groups, are within an asymmetric environment (fig.7). in 3+ cations move toward tetrahedral cavities on the boundary between tetrahedral and octahedral cavities, and tl + cations move in the direction of the octahedral cavities. moreover the in 3+ cations are located in the same plane together with the centres of the anionic [p2se6] 4– groups (fig.8) and some tl + cations are shifted relative to the plane. therefore, this arrangement is a source of the interesting electro-physical and optical properties of materials based on compounds of this type. 3.3. optical response of single crystals of tlinp2se6 and in4(p2se6)3 the most important parameter of the energy spectra of semiconductors is the width of the band gap, eg, which is defined by the difference in energy between the bottom of the conduction band, ec, and the top of the valence band, ev. all semiconductors can be divided into two groups. in the first group, the minimum of the conduction band and the maximum of the valence band occupy the same point in the brillouin zone, i.e. at an identical location in the space of quasi-moments. in this case, the optical transitions of electrons from the valence band to the conduction band (with the absorption of a quantum of light) and from the conduction band to the valence band (with the emission of a quantum of light) occur so that the electrons practically do not change their quasi-moments. such transitions are characteristic of direct-gap semiconductors. for the second group, the absolute minimum of the conduction band and the absolute maximum of the valence band are at different points in the brillouin zone, and optical inter figure 3. structure of the anionic group [p2se6] 4–. figure 4. arrangement of the polyhedra anionic group [p2se6] 4– in in4(p2se6)3. figure 5. coordination environment of the indium atoms in the structure of in4(p2se6)3. figure 6. second (sce) and nearest (nce) coordination environments of atoms in the [p2se6] 4– anionic groups in the structure of tlinp2se6. tovt, barchiy, piasecki, kityk, and fedorchuk hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 16 band transitions must be accompanied by a large change in the electron quasi-moment. these are characteristic of indirect-gap semiconductors. since the photon moment is negligibly small compared with the electron quasi-moment, the latter case is possible only when the electron interacts with the phonon. according to the phase diagram, the single crystals of tlinp2se6 and in4(p2se6)3 were grown using the bridgman method in two vertical zone furnaces. experimental studies of optical spectra in the absorption region yielded information on the energy spectrum of electrons near the edges of the conduction band and band gap. studies concerning the dependence of diffuse reflection on wavelength (r = f(λ)) have shown that the compound tlinp2se6 refers to indirect-gap semiconductors. on the graph there are two rectilinear sections, one of which (for small wavelengths, , and large values of e) characterizes the interband transitions of electrons with phonon emission, and the other (for large and small e) describes the processes of phonon absorption (fig.9). the intersection of the first section with the wavelength axis, , yields the value of eg + ephonon ( = 560 nm, e = 2.21 ev), and the intersection of the second characterizes eg – ephonon ( = 605 nm and e = 2.05 ev). the length of the segment between the points of intersection of both straight lines with the wavelength axis, , is equal to the doubled energy of the phonons, 2ephonon (0.16 ev), interacting with the electron. the middle of this segment corresponds to the photon energy equal to the width of the band gap of the indirect-gap semiconductor, eg. experimental calculations in terms of the compound tlinp2se6 have shown that eg = 2.13 ev and ephonon = 0.08 ev. the compound in4(p2se6)3 refers to direct-gap semiconductors, which characterizes the interband transitions of electrons in terms of photon absorption (fig.10). the intersection of the line with the wavelength axis, ( = 651 nm), yields the value of eg = 1.91 ev. the crystals of in4(p2se6)3 and tlinp2se6 were illuminated by 10.6 μm and (its second harmonic) frequency doubling of 5.3 μm beams. each channel of the beam was split by 200-ns co2 laser pulses with a pulse repetition frequency of about 10 hz. the angle between these two laser beams was changed from 18º to 22º. figs.11 and 12 present these dependences. treatment with a 10.6 μm beam achieved a smaller maximum birefringence (about 1.5510 -2 ) in comparison to the 5.2 μm beam. this indicates a different photoinduced anisotropy for the in4(p2se6)3 and tlinp2se6 crystals. because a) b) . figure 7. coordination environments of the thallium (a) and indium (b) atoms in the structure of tlinp2se6. figure 8. arrangement of the polyhedra anionic group [p2se6] 4– in the structure of tlinp2se6. figure 9. dependence of the diffuse reflection r on the wavelength for the compound tlinp2se6. figure 10. dependence of the diffuse reflection r on the wavelength for the compound in4(p2se6)3. investigations of the tlinp2se6–in4(p2se6)3 system 45(2) pp. 13–18 (2017) 17 these crystals contain chalcogenide anions that contribute to the anharmonicity of the phonon, they play a crucial role in terms of the second harmonic generation [13-14]. the maximum changes in the birefringence achieved were less than 210 -2 and 6.310 -2 for co2 laser wavelengths of 10.6 μm and 5.3 μm, respectively. 4. conclusion differential thermal analysis, x-ray diffraction and microstructural analysis were used to construct a phase diagram for the tlinp2se6–in4(p2se6)3 system, which can be characterized by a eutectic-type interaction. the invariant eutectic process l httlinp2se6 + mtin4(p2se6)3 (15 mol% in4(p2se6)3) occurs at 791 k. two polymorphic transformations were identified for tlinp2se6 at 680 k and 711 k and for in4(p2se6)3 at 665 k and 903 k. new compounds were not detected in the binary system. the regions of solid phases of the complex compounds tlinp2se6 and in4(p2se6)3 do not exceed 10 mol%. single crystals of both test compounds were achieved by the bridgman method. investigations concerning the dependence of the diffuse reflection spectrum showed that the compound tlinp2se6 is characteristic of indirect-gap semiconductors (eg = 2.13 ev, ephonon = 0.08 ev), while the compound in4(p2se6)3 is characteristic of direct-gap semiconductors (eg = 1.91 ev, ephonon = 0.08 ev). the dependence of the birefringence was photoinduced by wavelengths of 5.3 μm and 10.6 μm, which is indicative of different photoinduced anisotropy. acknowledgement we are grateful for the financial support of this work by the ministry of education and science of ukraine under the project db874p_0117u000380. symbols ht high–temperature modification mt middle–temperature modification lt low–temperature modification sce second coordination environment nce nearest coordination environment eg band gap, ev ephonon phonon energy, ev r diffuse reflection wavelength, nm references galdamez, a., manriquez, v., kasaneva, j., avila, [1] r.e.: synthesis, characterization and electrical properties of quaternary selenodiphosphates: amp2se6 with a – cu, ag and m – bi, sb, mat. res. bull., 2003 38, 1063-1072 doi: 10.1016/s00255408(03)00068-0 mcguire, m.a.; reynolds, t.k.; di salvo, f.j.: [2] exploring thallium compounds as thermoelectric materials: seventeen new thallium chalcogenides, chem. mater., 2005 17, 2875-2884 doi: 10.1021/cm050412c gave, m.a.; bilc, d.; mahanti, s.d.; breshears, [3] j.d.; kanatzidis, m.g.: on the lamellar compounds cubip2se6, agbip2se6 and agbip2s6. antiferroelectric phase transitions due to cooperative cu + and bi 3+ ion motion, inorg. chem., 2005 44, 5293-5303 doi: 10.1021/ic050357 pfeiff, r.; kniep, r.: quaternary selenodiphos-[4] phates(iv): m(i)m(iii)[p2se6], (m(i) = cu, ag; m(iii) = cr, al, ga, in), j. alloys compd., 1992 186, 111-133 doi: 10.1016/0925-8388(92)90626-k figure 11. photoinduced birefringence dependence at wavelengths of 5.3 μm and 10.6 μm the two coherent beams were illuminated under different angles. during the two-beam coherent treatment at optimal power densities (about 400 mw/cm2) and incident angles (18-22 degrees) for crystals of in4(p2se6)3. the birefringence scale should be multiplied by 10-2. figure 12. photoinduced birefringence dependence at wavelengths of 5.3 μm and 10.6 μm the two coherent beams were illuminated under different angles. during the two-beam coherent treatment at optimal power densities (about 400 mw/cm2) and incident angles (18-22 degrees) for crystals of tlinp2se6. the birefringence scale should be multiplied by 10-2. tovt, barchiy, piasecki, kityk, and fedorchuk hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 18 mucha, i.: phase diagram for the quasi-binary thal-[5] lium(i) selenide–indium(iii) selenide system, thermochimica acta, 2012 550, 1-4 doi: 10.1016/j.tca.2012.09.028 guseinov, g.d.; abdullaev, g.b.; godzhaev, [6] e.m.; rzaeva, l.a.; agaev, g.a.: constitutional diagram and physical properties of thallium selenide–indium selenide pseudobinary system, mater. res. bull., 1972 7(12), 1497-1503 doi: 10.1016/00255408(72)90187-0 brockner, w.; ohse, l.; pätzmann, u.; eisenmann, [7] b.; schäfer, h.: kristallstruktur und schwingungsspektrum des tetra-thalliumhexaselenidohypodiphosphates tl4p2se6, z. naturforsch. a, 1985 40, 1248-1252 voroshilov, y.v.; gebesh, v.y.; potorii, m.v.: [8] phase equilibria in the system in–p–se and crystal structure of β-in4(p2se6)3, inorg. mater., 1991 27, 2141-2144 tovt, v.a.; barchiy, i.e.; piasecki, m.; kityk, i.v.; [9] fedorchuk, a.o.; solomon, a.m.; pogodin, a.i.: triangulation of the tl2se–in2se3–“p2se4” quasiternary system, nauch. vestn. uzhgorod. univ. (ser. khim.), 2016 35(2), 14–19 (in russian) akselrud, l.; grin, y.: wincsd: software package [10] for crystallographic calculations (ver.4), j. appl. crystallogr., 2014 47, 803-805 doi: 10.1107/s1600576714001058 israel, r.; de gelder, r.; smits, j.m.m.; [11] beurskens, p.t.; eijt, s.w.h.; rasing, t.h.; van kempen, h.; maior, m.m.; motrya, s.f.: crystal structures of di-tin-hexa(seleno)hypodiphosphate, sn2p2se6, in the ferroelectric and paraelectric phase, z. kristallogr., 1998 213, 34-41 doi: 10.1524/zkri.1998.213.1.34 fedorchuk, a.o.; parasyuk, o.v.; kityk, i.v.: sec-[12] ond anion coordination for wurtzite and sphalerite chalcogenide derivatives as a tool for the description of anion sub-lattice, mat. chem. phys., 2013 139, 92-99 doi: 10.1016/j.matchemphys.2012.12.058 kityk, i.v.: ir-stimulated second harmonic genera-[13] tion in sb2te2se–baf2–pbcl2 glasses, j. modern optics, 2004 51, 1179-1189 doi: 10.1080/09500340408230415 kityk, i.v.: ir-induced second harmonic genera-[14] tion in sb2te3–baf2–pbcl2 glasses, j. phys. chem. b, 2003 107, 10083-10087 doi: 10.1021/jp030058a microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 125-130 (2008) towards sustainable water usage in a beverage plant h. tokos , z. novak-pintarič university of maribor, faculty of chemistry and chemical engineering smetanova 17, si-2000 maribor, slovenia e-mail: hella.tokos@uni-mb.si the current drive towards environmental sustainability and the rising costs of freshwater and effluent treatment have forced the process industry to reduce freshwater consumption and wastewater generation, which can be achieved inter alia by water re-use. the mathematical models presented in the literature need to be modified in order to match industrial circumstances. this paper presents a mathematical model for water re-use in batch processes in the presence of continuous streams with acceptable purity. the model is based on a design method developed by kim and smith [7], modified to properly balance continuous streams. continuous streams are treated as limited freshwater sources. two cases were analysed: 1) re-use of continuous streams within those time intervals where the continuous streams exist, 2) re-use of continuous streams in later time intervals with intermediate storage of unused continuous streams. the opportunities of water re-use by the developed model were analysed in a brewery plant. by using the identified re-use connections, the brewery could save about 18% of its current freshwater demand. keywords: water minimisation; batch processes; continuous process; water re-use; industrial application. introduction waste minimisation and pollution prevention have become everyday terms in the process industry, as strict environmental regulations have induced producers to find new ways of reducing the environmental impact of their production. water is one of the most important natural resources used in process industries. excluding process changes, there are three approaches to reducing freshwater demand: re-use, regeneration-reuse, and regeneration-recycling. in the literature, studies on the design of water reuse and wastewater treatment networks in industry have been mainly concerned with continuous processes [1, 2], while little attention has been directed towards the development of water conservation strategies for batch operations. the complexities of batch process industries lie in the fact that the production processes consist of elementary tasks with operating conditions and resource demand varying over time. two main approaches are generally used to address the issue of freshwater demand minimisation, i.e. the graphical approach, and the mathematically based optimization approach. wang and smith [3] initiated a graphical design method based on water pinch analysis, where they combined time constraint with concentration driving force constraint. foo et al. [4] have developed a twostage graphical procedure for synthesizing the maximum water recovery network for a batch process system. majozi et al. [5] presented a graphical method where, in the first instance, the time dimension was taken as a primary constraint, and concentration as a secondary one. subsequently, the priority of constraints was reversed. almato et al. [6] developed an optimization framework for water use in batch processes based on the superstructure approach. kim and smith [7] developed a design method where water recovery was limited through time constraints. this model allows minimization of freshwater cost, storage tank costs and piping costs. majozi [8] presented a continuous-time mathematical formulation for freshwater minimisation with and without central reusable water storage. cheng and chang [9] incorporated three optimisation problems, the batch scheduling, the water re-use network, and the wastewater treatment network, in a single minlp model, to generate an integrated water network in batch processes. this paper presents a mathematical model for water re-use in batch processes in the presence of continuous streams with acceptable purity. the continuous streams are treated as limited freshwater sources, which can be integrated with batch water-using operations. this model is based on the design method developed by kim and smith [7], modified to properly balance the continuous streams. the opportunities for water re-use were analysed in a brewery plant where several continuous waste streams with low contaminant concentrations are available for re-use in batch operations with lower purity requirements. 126 extended mathematical model the water mass balance for an overall water-using system is defined by equation: 0lossgain outw , w , =−+ +−+ ∑∑ ∑ ∑∑∑∑ n n n n ww n n n nww fw n nfw mm mmm (1) where: w fw ,nm – water mass from freshwater source fw to operation n, t w ww,nm – wastewater mass from continuous operation ww to batch operation n, t out nm – wastewater mass from operation n to discharge, t gain nm – mass of water gain in operation n, t loss nm – water mass loss in operation n, t. in comparison with the original model, the mass balance is extended with additional variable, w n,wwm , which represents the integration of continuous streams with batch operations. the contaminant mass load balance for each waterusing operation is: ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0loss,lossgain,gain ml , out , opout , pp , w , w , w , w , =⋅−⋅+ ++⋅−⋅+ +⋅+⋅ ∑ ∑∑ ncnncn ncncn nc nccnnc ww wwcnww fw fwcnfw cmcm mcmcm cmcm (2) where: pp nc ,nm – re-use water mass from operation nc to operation n, t op nm – water mass inside operation n, t ml c ,nm – mass load of contaminant c removed by water in operation n, g w c , fwc – mass concentration of freshwater source, g/m³ w c ,wwc – mass concentration of continuous water source, g/m³ out c ,nc – outlet water mass concentration of operation n, g/m³ gain c ,nc – mass concentration of water gain in operation n, g/m³ loss c ,nc – mass concentration of water loss in operation n, g/m³. the water mass balance for each operation is obtained by equation: 0lossgainoutpp, pp , w , w , =−+−− −++ ∑ ∑∑∑ nnn nc ncn nc nnc ww nww fw nfw mmmm mmm (3) total water mass of the water-using operations is defined by: lossgain pp , w , w , op nn nc nnc ww nww fw nfwn mm mmmm −+ +++= ∑∑∑ (4) feasibility constraints on the inlet and outlet concentrations are: ( ) ( ) ( ) 0maxin,, op out , pp , w , w , w , w , ≤⋅− −⋅+⋅+⋅ ∑∑∑ ncn nc nccnnc ww wwcnww fw fwcnfw cm cmcmcm (5) 0maxout,, out , ≤− ncnc cc (6) where: in, max c ,nc – maximum inlet mass concentration of operation n, g/m³ out, max c ,nc – maximum outlet mass concentration of operation n, g/m³. upper and lower bounds for the water flows of each stream in the superstructure are: 0w, wub, , w , ≤⋅− nfwnfwnfw ymm (7) 0w, wlb, , w , ≥⋅− nfwnfwnfw ymm (8) 0w , wub, , w , ≤⋅− nwwnwwnww ymm (9) 0w , wlb, , w , ≥⋅− nwwnwwnww ymm (10) 0pp, pp ub, , pp , ≤⋅− ncnncnncn ymm (11) 0pp, pp lb, , pp , ≥⋅− ncnncnncn ymm (12) 0outout ub,out ≤⋅− nnn ymm (13) 0outout lb,out ≥⋅− nnn ymm (14) where: ub, w lb, w fw ,n fw ,nm , m – upper and lower bounds for water mass from freshwater source fw to operation n, t ub, w lb, w ww ,n ww ,nm , m – upper and lower bounds for water mass from continuous water source ww to operation n, t ub, pp lb, pp n ,nc n ,ncm , m – upper and lower bounds for re-used water mass from operation n to operation nc, t ub, out lb, out n nm , m – upper and lower bounds for wastewater mass from operation n to discharge, t w fw ,ny – binary variable for the existence or non existence of water mass from freshwater source fw to operation n w ww,ny – binary variable for the existence or non existence of water mass from continuous water source ww to operation n 127 pp n ,ncy – binary variable for re-used water mass from operation n to operation nc out ny – binary variable for wastewater mass from operation n to discharge. a logic constraint is used to identify the existence or non-existence of a storage tank within a network: esstpp , ,0 nncnncn ttnyy ≥∀≤− (15) where: st ny – binary variable for storage tank to operation n s nt – starting time of operation n, h e nt – terminal time of operation n, h. eq. 15 implies that water re-use between operations over different time interval is only allowed through a storage tank, however, operations within the same time intervals can be connected directly. the capacity of a storage tank is obtained by equation: espp , st , nnc nc ncnn ttnmm ≥∀= ∑ (16) where: st nm – capacity of a storage tank, t. storage tank investment cost: stst nnn ysmrct ⋅+⋅= (17) where: nct – storage tank investment cost of operation n, £ r – variable investment cost of storage tank s – fixed investment cost of storage tank. additional equations for water re-use from continuous operations in batch operations are given in the continuation. the overall water mass balance of the continuous stream is defined by equation: ( ) ∑∑ +=−⋅ j jww n nwwjww mmttq out , w , s 1 e (18) where: wwq – mass flow rate of the continuous stream, t/h e jt – finishing time of the continuous stream in the last time interval j, h, s 1t – starting time of the continuous stream, h out ww, jm – water mass from continuous process to discharge in the interval j, t. the water mass balance for each time interval, j, is: ( ) eess , seout , , jnjn n w nwwjjwwjww ttttn mttqm =∧=∀ −−⋅= ∑ (19) time intervals, j, for the continuous operations are defined according to the starting and ending times of batch processes. the objective function is the overall cost of the water network that involves the freshwater cost and annual investment cost of storage tank installation. ( ) ( )( ) anall ohy wseww ,obj fct t pttqpmf n n ww j wwjjww fw n fwnfw ⋅⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ + ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⋅−⋅+⋅= ∑ ∑∑∑∑ δ λ (20) where: fobj – objective function, £/a w fwp – price of freshwater source fw, £/t w wwp – price of continuous water source ww, £/t λohy – annual operating time, h/a alltδ – overall time interval, h fan – annualization factor. mathematical model extended with a storage tank the model presented in the previous section allows for water re-use between batch process streams and continuous ones, only over those time intervals where wastewater streams exist. the unused wastewater is discharged. collecting the unused wastewater in a storage tank would enable water re-use over the following time intervals. the contaminant mass load balance for each waterusing operation is: ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0loss,lossgain,gain ml , out , opout , pp , w , st , w , w , w , w , =⋅−⋅+ ++⋅−⋅+ +⋅+⋅+⋅ ∑ ∑∑∑ ncnncn ncncn nc nccnnc ww wwcnww ww wwcnww fw fwcnfw cmcm mcmcm cmcmcm (21) where: st ww,nm – re-use water mass from storage tank of water source ww to operation n, t. the additional expression in equation (21), ( )∑ ⋅ ww wwcnww cm w , st , , makes possible the incorporation of a storage tank for unused wastewater into the water-using system. the water mass balance for each operation is obtained by equation: 0lossgainoutpp, pp , st , w , w , =−+−− −+++ ∑ ∑∑∑∑ nnn nc ncn nc nnc ww nww ww nww fw nfw mmmm mmmm (22) total water flow through the water-using operation is defined by: lossgainpp , st , w , w , op nn nc nnc ww nww ww nww fw nfwn mmm mmmm −++ +++= ∑ ∑∑∑ (23) the feasibility constraint on the inlet concentration is: 128 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0maxin,, op out , pp , w , st , w , w , w , w , ≤⋅− −⋅+⋅+ +⋅+⋅ ∑∑ ∑∑ ncn nc nccnnc ww wwcnww ww fwcnww fw fwcnfw cm cmcm cmcm (24) upper and lower bounds for water mass from a storage tank are defined by equation: 0st, st ub, , st , ≤⋅− nwwnwwnww ymm (25) 0st, st lb, , st , ≥⋅− nwwnwwnww ymm (26) where: ub, st lb, st ww ,n ww ,nm , m – upper and lower bounds for water mass from storage tank of continuous water source ww to operation n, t st ww,ny – binary variable for water mass from storage tank of water source ww to operation n. the storage tank capacity for continuous source is obtained by summation of the re-used continuous wastewater stream, after the last time interval j: esst , stc, , jn n nwwww ttnmm ≥∀= ∑ (27) where: c, st wwm – storage tank capacity for the continuous stream ww, t. the sum of the re-used continuous streams can not exceed the available water mass from those time intervals before the last time interval j, where the continuous stream exists: esout . st , , jn j jww n nww ttnmm ≥∀≤ ∑∑ (28) storage tank investment cost: st , stc, nwwwwww ysmrct ⋅+⋅= (29) where: wwct – storage tank cost for water source ww, £. the objective function is: ( ) ( )( ) anall ohy wseww ,obj fctct t pttqpmf ww ww n n ww j wwjjww fw n fwnfw ⋅⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ++ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⋅−⋅+⋅= ∑∑ ∑∑∑∑ δ λ (30) equations (6)–(18) remain unchanged. illustrative example the model described in the previous section is illustrated by the first example from kim and smith [7], extended by one continuous stream, fig. 1. the limiting conditions and timing for the batch processes are shown in table 1. table 1: limiting water data for batch processes limiting mass concentration (g/m³) time (h) process cin cout limiting water mass (t) ts tf p1 0 200 40 0 0,5 p2 100 200 25 0,5 1,0 p3 100 400 50 0,5 1,0 p4 100 400 50 1,0 1,5 the average flow rate of the continuous process stream is 100 t/h, the contaminant concentration is 50 g/m³. the continuous stream is available within the time interval 0–1 h. in the case of no water re-use, the freshwater consumption per batch is 227,5 t. water re-use opportunities for batch processes without integration of the continuous stream, are shown in fig. 1. water re-use between batch operations enables a reduction in freshwater consumption per batch from 227,5 t to 202,5 t. according to the network design, a storage tank needs to be installed, with a capacity of 37,5 t. the overall cost for the freshwater and storage tank installation is 1 080,6 k£/a. figure 1: water network design for batch processes further reduction in freshwater consumption per batch can be achieved by integrating the continuous stream in the water network. the optimal network design is shown in fig. 2. 129 figure 2: water network design – extended model processes p2 and p3 use wastewater from the continuous process instead of freshwater, which reduces the freshwater consumption per batch to 165 t. the continuous water source can not be used in process p1 as the concentration of continuous stream is higher than the maximum inlet concentration of p1. the storage tank capacity is reduced to 25 t. the overall cost for the freshwater and storage tank installation is estimated to be 885,7 k£/a. as the continuous stream is absent during the last time period, an extended model was applied which included a storage tank for wastewater collection from the continuous process. the final network design is shown in fig. 3. the freshwater consumption per batch is reduced to 140 t. all processes, except the process p1, use wastewater from the continuous process. the capacity of the storage tank increases to 50 t, but the overall cost decreases to 753,7 k£/a because of higher water re-use. figure 3: final network design case study in the case of the brewery studied in this paper, the volume ratio of water consumption to beer sold was 6.04 l/l or 653 300 m3/a. compared with the ratio specified by the reference document on best available techniques in the food, drink and milk industries [10], the fresh water consumption exceeded the upper limit by 144 900 m3/a. in the first stage, the water balance was obtained and the most critical processes were identified by comparing their water consumption with those values given in bref [10], and the european brewery convention [11]. when comparing the results, the cellar with filters and the packing area were marked as the critical points in the brewery. in order to estimate any possibilities of water re-use, the maximal inlet values of contaminants (cod, ph and conductivity) were determined for each water consumer, and its flow rate measured. the water re-use opportunities were analysed in the packaging area. the freshwater consumption per batch is 5 503 t. the continues streams are: 1) the outlet stream of the rinser for non returnable glass bottles (k1), and 2) the wastewater from the rinser for cans (k2). the average water flows for the continuous processes are 48,37 t/h and 9,68 t/h, the average outlet concentrations are 34 g/m³ and 23 g/m³. the final water network design is shown in fig. 4. the wastewater from continuous process, k2, can be re-used in the pasteurisation processes p23–p31. based on the cod, the outlet stream of the rinser for non returnable glass bottles, k1, could be connected by the tunnel pasteurizer, however, this is forbidden because of the high quality requirements of pasteurisation. the wastewater from pasteurizers can be reused in the bottle washer for returnable bottles, processes p1–p5 and p20–p22. in case of the packing line for returnable glass bottles, filling line a and b, water consumption could be reduced by reusing the outlet stream of the bottle washer in the crate washer, processes p6–p19. the freshwater consumption per batch is reduced from 5 503 t to 4 498 t. no storage tank installation is needed. conclusion a mathematical model for water re-use in batch processes in the presence of continuous streams was developed by modifying the model by kim and smith [7]. in the first case, the model allows for re-use of the continuous wastewater stream over time intervals, where this stream exists. in the second case, the re-use in later time intervals is possible with the collection of an unused continuous wastewater stream. the results of examples and the case study show that incorporating continuous steams in the analysis of dominant batch processes, can contribute to the reduction of freshwater consumption, as well as the total cost of the network. 130 figure 4: water network design for the packaging area references 1. karuppiah r., grossmann i. e.: comp. chem. eng. (2006) 650-673 2. bagajewicz m.: comp. chem. eng. (2000) 20932113 3. wang y. p., smith r.: trans icheme (1995) 905-910 4. foo c. y., manan z. a., tan y. l.: journal of cleaner production (2005) 1381-1394 5. majozi t.: journal of environmental management (2006) 317-329 6. almato m., espuňa a., puigjaner l.: comp. chem. eng. (1999) 1427-1437 7. kim j. k., smith r.: trans icheme (2004) 238-248 8. majozi t.: comp. chem. eng. (2005) 1631-1646 9. cheng k. f., chang c. t.: ind. eng. chem. res. (2007) 1241-1253 10. bref, reference document on best available techniques in the food, drink and milk industries, european commission, seville, pp. 202-203, 2006 11. ebc, manual of good practice: water in brewing, european brewery convention, nürnberg, pp. 5, 1990 microsoft word content.doc hungarian journal of industry and chemistry veszprém vol. 40 (2) pp. 77–82 (2012) application of the remote earth potential in cathodic protection measurements z. lukacs indexon ltd., 8 veres acs str., 6725 szeged, hungary e-mail: lukacs.zoltan@indexon.hu the conventional potential measurements and evaluation methods of cathodic protection diagnostics do not give reliable results in some practically important cases: in systems where the whole amount of cathodic protection current cannot be interrupted for any reason or the equalizing currents affect the protection to a significant level or interference with other cathodic protection systems is encountered. the paper discusses a model and its practical application dealing with these difficult cases. the test measurement evaluation results justify the theoretical model. on the basis of the theory a very simple measurement method is proposed for the determination of the coating defects ir-free potentials. keywords: cathodic protection, ir-free potential, pipeline corrosion, coating defect 1. introduction the cathodic protection is a widely used, robust and reliable method of corrosion protection of underground pipelines, tank bottoms and underwater parts of immersed structures, e.g. ships and drilling platforms. in the past eight decades a lot of experience has been accumulated concerning the applicability and limitations of cathodic protection. in the most widespread type of cathodic protection, the impressed current systems, the structure to be protected is connected to the negative output of a dc current source („cp station”) and the positive output is connected to a so-called earthing anode which serves for the closing of the electrical circuit (see a typical arrangement for a cathodically protected pipeline in figure 1). the output of the dc source is variable and, in modern devices, can be regulated, either for constant potential or for constant current. if no cathodic protection is applied to a structure corroding in water or soil and no net current is flowing through the structure, then the sum of the anodic (corrosion) and cathodic currents is zero. the ultimate criterion of the effectiveness of cathodic protection is the level of suppression of the anodic current. this can be achieved with the cathodic polarization of the structure. the decrease of the anodic current cannot be measured directly. however, if the applied potential is sufficiently negative (cathodic) then the anodic current (and the corrosion rate) is suppressed, with increasing cathodic polarization theoretically beyond any limit; practically a decrease of 1–2 orders of magnitude can be implemented, which is satisfactory for the practical requirements in most cases. in conclusion, the negative polarization of the structure results in the suppression of the anodic current (this was the goal) and in the increase of the cathodic current, which is an unavoidable consequence of the potential shift, sometimes with unfavourable side effects. during the past decades a lot of empirical experience has been accumulated concerning the optimal operation conditions of cathodic protection. it has been assumed for a long time that cathodic protection has the best performance in typical applications in soils if the electrode potential of the structure is more negative than -850 mv, measured against a saturated copper/copper sulphate electrode [1] (its standard potential at 25°c is 320 mv; all potential data will be given against this type of reference electrode unless specified otherwise). the lower limit of the potential varies for different applications but it is typically assumed to be between 1100 and 1300 mv1. the electrode potential, as discussed above, is the potential that can be measured with a reference electrode placed to the direct vicinity of the electrode, i.e. which does not include any component from the ohmic potential drop through the electrolyte2. this potential, called as ir-free potential, is a central concept in cathodic protection. 1 at more negative potential the excessive rate of cathodic current may have adverse effects on the structure or on the coating. 2 there is another source of the ohmic potential drop, namely, the drop in the electric conductor, which can also be significantly high in the case of pipelines, but this source will not be dealt here; in this paper the ohmic drop is understood as the ohmic potential drop through the electrolyte between the anode and the cathode. 78 figure 1: schematic arrangement of cathodic protection and potential measurement circuitry the determination of the exact value of the ir-free potential is practically impossible in case of buried structures and with conventional methods. this paper is dealing with the mathematical properties of the electric field of the cathodic protection system and provides a simple method to give a good approximation of the irfree potential, with significant practical advantages that are facilitated by making use of the remote earth potential. the discussion below is dealing specifically with the case of coated, buried and cathodically protected steel pipelines. however, the situation with tanks bottoms and other buried structures is quite similar. for offshore and underwater structures the theory also applies but the application technology is slightly different – these cases will be dealt with in separate communications. 2. discussion 2.1. review of the conventional ways of determination of the ir-free potential in the first times of application of cathodic protection the cathodic protection was assumed as effective if the polarized potential was more negative to the opencircuit potential. it was realized very soon that the measured potential value was dependent on the location where the reference electrode was placed (owing to the location-dependent ohmic potential drop) and the need of a criterion of effectiveness was also recognized. the determination of the ir-free potential was carried out by the switching off the current source. this technique is routinely used in the laboratory electrochemical measurements, too. the determination of the ohmic drop compensated corrosion potential of a cathodically protected structure has an enormous literature. a short but concise general overview on the topic was given by bushmann and rizzo [2]. in the standard practice of cathodic protection nowadays the determination of the ir-free potential is carried out by periodically switching the current source off and on. typically a pattern of 2–4 seconds switched on and 0.5–1 second switched off is implemented (the time values may also vary in a wider range). the potential measurements are carried out after a delay of at least 0.1 second, in order to eliminate the effect of the inductive transients (these appear in case of long pipelines and large currents only). the potentials measured with cp stations turned on and off are generally named as on potential and off potential respectively. under field conditions in many cases it is nearly impossible or at least very cumbersome, expensive and time-consuming to switch all the cp stations that are effective in a certain area. if some of the current sources remain switched on while measuring the off potential that results in a major bias in assessing the ir-free potential. this bias may be up to a few hundreds of millivolts in extreme cases, and often leads to erroneous conclusions with respect to the level of protection of structures, sometimes with serious consequences. in spite of these obvious deficiencies, in the industrial practice in most cases the measured off potentials are identified with the ir-free potentials. another source of the uncertainties in assessing the ir-free potential via the off potentials is the ohmic potential drop generated by the equalizing currents flowing between the more and less polarized parts of the structure. stray current sources can also falsify the conventional ir-free potential determinations via the measured off potentials. nowadays typically gps-driven, high precision clock operated interrupters are applied in cp measurements, which facilitate an increased measurement precision and reliability. some manufacturers also provide cp stations with built-in interrupters and remote control options. 2.2. an alternative way of calculation of the ir-free potential from measurement data in spite of the enormous progress in measurement technique and the apparent inadequacy of the determination of the ir-free potential via the off-potential, no much progress has been achieved in the theory and in the evaluation of the measurement data. let us assume a cathodic protection system with an anode and a single coating defect at some part of the protected structure. the potential profile as a function of the distance between the coating defect and the anode is shown in figure 2. the potential field of the coating defect is defined as the domain where the potential is more negative than the remote earth potential and the potential gradients are directed towards the coating defect. figure 2: potential relations in the area of the anode and the coating defect surface equipotential lines coating defect test point potential meter reference electrode protected pipeline cp station anode interrupter with timer current flux vectors 79 let us mark two points in the potential field of the coating defect as p1 and p2. these two points determine two equipotential surfaces that surround the coating defect. also, these equipotential surfaces mark a domain of the space with a definite and constant (i.e. independent from the current flux) electrical resistance. let r1 and r2 be the ohmic resistance between the coating defect and the points p1 and p2 respectively. further on, let us assume that some perturbation is applied to the cp system, i.e. the current is interrupted (completely or partially – it is indifferent from the point of the model). from ohm’s law it follows that off off x x i ee r 0 − = , offon off x on x x ii ee r − − = , (1a, b) where x=1.2 refers to any of the two surfaces and the on and off superscripts refer to the potential or current in the respective states. e0 is the ir-free potential of the coating defect3. expressing rx and rearranging the equation, the irfree potential can be expressed as: ( ) offon off on x off x off x ii i eeee − −+=0 . (2) if ioff=0, i.e. all the current is switched, then eq. 2 is simplified to e0=e off, that is, the measured off potential is equal to the ir-free potential. however, if ioff≠0 then the determination of eo from eq. 2 is impossible, because the current values are indeterminable. let ioff and ion be expressed from the rearrangement of eq. 1a (for the determination of ion the off superscripts have to be changed to on, but this is allowed because the equation is valid also in the on state of the system). from ohm’s law it is obtained that 2,1 21 r ee i offoff off −= , (3a) 2,1 21 r ee i onon on −= , (3b) where r1,2 is the resistance between the two distinct equipotential surfaces. substituting eq. 3a and eq. 3b into eq. 2 it follows that ( )( ) ( )offoffonon offoff on x off x off x eeee ee ee ee 2121 21 0 −−− − − += , (4) where x=1.2. 3 throughout in this paper it is assumed that the polarization resistance is negligible to the ohmic resistance of the soil between the coating defect and the point of the reference electrode. in most practical cases of buried structures in soil this assumption is valid. effects of the transient decay of the charge/discharge of the electrochemical double layer and other transients related to the inductivity of the pipelines will be dealt with in a separate paper. by means of eq. 4 the ir-free potential is obtained from measurable potential data also in the case if the current, flowing to the coating defect, is interrupted only partially or perturbated in any other way. let us introduce the following notation: )()( 2121 21 offoffonon offoff eeee ee −−− − =ρ , (5) and note that ρ is the quotient of the “not switched” and “switched” currents, flowing to the coating defect, and thus is invariant within the potential field of a certain coating defect. ρ is named foreign current ratio hence because it denotes the ratio of the foreign (i.e. not switched) and switched current. using eq. 5, eq. 4 can be rewritten as ρ)( onoffoff eeee −+=0 , (6) where the x subscripts are no more needed because the equation is valid for potentials measured at any point in the potential field of the coating defect. by means of this calculation the value of the ir-free potential, which is not directly measurable if any current is flowing in the off state, can be determined by means of measurable potential data. an equation formally analogous to eq. 6 had earlier been reported by baeckmann and schwenk [3], but the evaluation presented in their work is started from a quite different approach and also their conclusions are very different. the practical implementation of their measurement method is published in [4]. an important consequence of eq. 6 is that e0 and ρ are linearly dependent if eoff and eon are substituted with the constant values of the remote earth potentials: ρ)(0 onoffoff eeee ∞∞∞ −+= , (7) taking into consideration that for the determination of ρ it is not necessary to connect to the structure with a measurement cable because it is calculated from the differences of potentials at two different places in the on and off state (cf. eq. 5 and fig. 1), eq. 7 provides a simple and fast method to determine the ir-free potential of coating defects where there is no test post in the vicinity. this method is a powerful alternative of the widely used cips (close interval potential survey) or intensive surveys [4]: the coating defect ir-free potentials are practically calculated from potential gradient data and the remote earth potentials recorded with a static data logger. further, by fitting the data received on different coating defects in a cathodic protection system using eq. 7, it is possible to provide data quality control facility: those data which are not fitting on the linear relationship and deviate over a threshold value are to be discarded. this is a unique feature in the practice of cathodic protection. 80 2.3. a practically important case: more coating defects in a system the calculation in section 2.2 is strictly valid if the cathodic protection system includes one anode and one coating defect. obviously, real systems are more complicated. further difficulty is that in real systems the potential of the coating defects is varying; small coating defects with less ohmic potential drop4 can be polarized to a more negative potential than the larger coating defects. this potential difference between the coating defects generates equalizing currents superimposed on the cathodic protection current and, consequently, on changing of the shape of the cathodic protection current vector space, the shape of the equipotential surfaces will be also changed. therefore the resistance between two equipotential surfaces, denoted as r1,2 above, will not be the same quantity for the on and the off state in eq. 3a and eq. 3b. this problem can be diminished by selecting the optimal measurement points for which the equipotential surfaces have the possible smallest distortion caused by the equalizing currents of vicinal coating defects. obviously, the closer the measurement point is to the coating defect the less the shape of the equipotential surface varies on changing of the equalizing current flowing to/from the vicinal coating defect. on the other hand, the remote earth potential is also invariant to the local changes in the vicinity of any coating defect. in conclusion the point nearest to the coating defect (where the measured potential has an extreme as a function of the surface coordinates) and the remote earth potential are to be chosen to maximize the precision of the determination of the ir-free potential. 3. experimental verification 3.1. conditions in order to verify the above conclusions, a test measurement was conducted on a pipeline. the pipeline was a dn 300 gas transfer line with polyethylene coating which was known to be in a bad condition. the measurement was a modified cips carried out with a cpm 401 universal cathodic protection diagnostic measurement system. unlike conventional cips measurements, here the two reference electrodes of the mobile data logger measured different potentials: one reference electrode (electrode no. 2) was measuring the potential above the pipeline and the other electrode (electrode no. 1) was measuring the potential some 3 m apart from the pipeline (cf. fig. 1). in this way the potential gradient, perpendicular to the axis of the 4 a smaller coating defect has a higher resistance. however, the resistance of a coating defect decreases (approximately) linearly with the diameter of the coating defect, while the electrode surface increases with second order. therefore a larger coating defect will always give larger ohmic potential drop in case of a similar geometry. pipeline, was determined both for the on and off states from the data of the mobile data logger. the switching time was 3 second on and 1 second off, the delay time after the switching was 0.1 second and the sampling time was also 0.1 second. the remote potentials were measured with a static data logger. 3.2. results the on and off potential data for the two mobile reference electrodes and the remote potentials are shown in function of the distance in figure 3, which also includes the ir-free potentials calculated for the localized coating defects determined by means eq. 4 and eq. 7. the ir-free potential as a function of the foreign current ratio (both determined from the data of the mobile data logger, based on eq. 4 and eq. 5) are shown in figure 4, with the best fitting line. as follows from eq. 7, the slope of this linear relationship gives the difference of the remote earth on and off potentials and the intercept gives the remote earth off potential. the obtained data, compared to the average of the experimentally measured ones are included in table 1. the “calibration curve” of the ir-free potentials obtained from eq. 4 and from eq. 7, using the remote earth potential data and the foreign current ratio obtained from the mobile logger data are shown in figure 5 (the line is the y=x calibration line) and the numerical values, with the absolute value of the differences are shown in table 2. 3.3. evaluation in fig. 3 six well developed coating defects are localized. the coating defects at 24 and 40 meters are very large, most likely they are more or less continuous series of coating defects of different sizes and positions. they are assumed to be “open” coating defects, where the damaged coating does not cover the exposed pipe area and the larger the coating defect the more positive the ir-free potential. the coating defect at 68 meter is presumably a blistering, because the apparent size is very small but the ir-free potential is very positive which is the sign of high ohmic potential drop due to the “coverage” by the damaged coating. the coating defects at 95, 125 and 130 meters are decreasing in apparent size but shifting to positive direction in ir-free potential and from this tendency it is assumed that their “coverage” is increasing. in conclusion, coating defects of different sizes and types are detected on the selected relatively short pipe section. 81 figure 3: measured and calculated potential data of the test measurement vs. distance figure 4: ir-free potential data, calculated via eq. 4, vs. foreign current ratio figure 5: calibration of ir-free potential data calculated via eq. 7 vs. ir-free potential data calculated via eq. 7 fig. 4 justifies the assumptions of eq. 7. the linear relationship between the foreign current ratio and the ir-free potential has a “double nine” (0.993) correlation coefficient. this data has to be qualified considering the extreme differences in type and size among the coating defects. this relatively good result has to be considered also in the light of the fact that the first two defects are actually a series of defects, which decreases the applicability of the theory of the equipotential surfaces. in short, these circumstances can be considered as a near-worst-case scenario. according to eq. 7, the remote potentials can be determined from the ir-free potential vs. foreign current ratio plot. from tab. 1 a moderate difference of a few tens of millivolts is concluded which justifies the theoretical expectations. table 1: comparison of measured and calculated values of remote earth potentials parameter measured/v calculated from eq. 7/v absolute value of difference/v slope ( )onoff ee ∞∞ − 0.284 0.262 0.022 intercept ( )offe∞ -1.269 -1.229 0.04 table 2: values of ir-free potential at the coating defects, calculated from eq. 4 and eq. 7 distance/m calculated from eq. 4/v calculated from eq. 7/v absolute value of difference/v 24 0.748 0.746 0.002 40 0.780 0.804 0.023 68 0.780 0.776 0.004 95 1.010 1.034 0.025 126 0.940 0.956 0.016 131 0.871 0.863 0.008 average 0.013 from eq. 7 it is also concluded that the ir-free potential of a coating defect can be determined from the potential differences measured with the two reference electrodes of the mobile data logger (i.e. it is not necessary to apply a contact to the pipeline (cf. fig. 1)). in tab. 2 it is shown that the error of the determination of the ir-free potentials using eq. 7, compared to the data using eq. 4, are an average of 13 mv which is far below the practically required precision limit. summary it has been shown that based on the concept of the equipotential surfaces and ohm’s law a linear formula can be provided for the determination of the ir-free potential. the precision of the formula is the highest if the points used for the determination of the foreign current ratio are the points nearest to the coating defect (i.e. where the measured potential data have an extreme) and the remote earth. the theory also provides the value of the foreign current ratio. it was pointed out that the foreign current ratio and the ir-free potential are in a linear relationship where the coefficients of the linear relationship are related to the remote earth on and off potentials. this relationship establishes the connection between the “global” remote 82 and the locally, above the pipeline measured potentials. also this relationship provides an alternative method for the assessment of the ir-free potential, which does not require a measuring cable to be pulled alongside the pipeline. all these theoretical results were confirmed with a test measurement made on a section of pipeline with coating defects of different size and type. the evaluation of the test measurements justified the theoretical assumptions and proved that the determination of the ir-free potential, based on the measurement of the overthe-line potential gradients and the remote on and off potential, is applicable and accurate enough for the practical requirements. references 1. r. j. kuhn: bureau of standards, 73b75 (1928) 2. j. b. bushmann, f. e. rizo: materials performance, july, 1978 3. w. von baeckmann, w. schwenk and w. prinz (editors): handbook of cathodic protection, gulf professional publishing (1997), pp. 88–96 4. w. von baeckmann, h. hildebrand et al.: werkstoffe und korrosion, 34 (1983), 230–235 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 46(2) pp. 27–31 (2018) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2018-0014 production of a biolubricant by enzymatic esterification: possible synergism between ionic liquid and enzyme zsófia bedő1 , katalin bélafi-bakó1 , nándor nemestóthy1 , and lászló gubicza *1 1research institute of bioengineering, membrane technology and energetics, university of pannonia, egyetem u. 10, veszprém, 8200, hungary the possible replacement of lubricants with fossil-fuel sources and the manufacture of biolubricants with more beneficial features were studied. oleic acid and isoamyl alcohol were reacted with an enzyme in an ionic liquid. during the reaction conventional as well as microwave heating was applied. after the experimental determination of the optimal reaction parameters, it was unexpectedly found that a synergistic effect occurred by applying ionic-liquid and microwave-heat treatment simultaneously. the enzyme exhibited a much higher level of activity than the value expected based on the measurements carried out separately by using an ionic liquid instead of an organic solvent and microwave-heat treatment or a conventional method. in the experiments with recycled enzyme it was found that ionic liquid maintained the enzyme more effectively, as if it was immobilized by it: the enzyme managed to maintain its activity and recycling ability. keywords: synergistic effect, ionic liquid and microwave heating, biolubricant production, enzyme reuse 1. introduction lubricants from mineral oils have a considerable detrimental effect on the environment due to the aromatic organic compounds within their chemical structures. mineral oils that have leached into water or soil are toxic for living organisms, they substantially decrease the level of dissolved oxygen in the water. these lubricants can hardly be degraded biologically. during their manufacture several by-products form and further additives are needed for the lubricants. hence the demand for biolubricants from plant oils has been growing recently, since they are natural, renewable, non-toxic as well as environmentally-friendly compounds, and often cheaper than synthetic oils. therefore, they are suitable for eliminating the disadvantages of mineral oil, moreover, our dependence on mineral oils and other non-renewable sources might be decreased [1, 2]. the production of synthetic and semi-synthetic lubricants is necessary since now it is not possible to conduct all lubrication tasks by using lubricants derived exclusively from mineral oils. in several cases non-coking lubricants with extremely high degrees of viscosity are able to operate at low temperatures (below -50 °c). biolubricants are used in numerous fields of application, but in all of them it is vital to prevent the contamination (only a negligible level is acceptable) of the product and environment. these provide an alternative to the mineral oilbased lubricants in industrial applications that are used in *correspondence: gubiczal@almos.uni-pannon.hu the automotive industry as hydraulic fluids during metal processing and oils for driving gears [3]. they are not considered as biological hazards in water systems when applied in watercrafts. in biotechnological methods for the manufacture of biolubricants, raw materials with a high oleic acid content are generally used for the transesterification processes. biolubricants are mainly produced from plant oils, e.g. sunflower oil, soybean oil and castor oil [4, 5]. the lifetime of these biolubricants that possess esters is usually longer than those obtained from mineral oils. on the other hand, their widespread industrial usage is hindered by the fact that certain equipment must be converted to run on biolubricants [6]. various esters can be enzymatically produced from acids and alcohols of different chain lengths in nonconventional systems (organic solvents, ionic liquids, supercritical fluids, solvent-free media). thus, the esterification of acids and alcohols of short chain lengths by lipase results in flavour esters [7, 8]. the esterification of fatty acids (acids with carbon numbers of between 12 and 18) and alcohols may yield both biolubricants and biofuels depending on alcohols’ chain lengths [9,10]. biodiesel is obtained when alcohols of short chain lengths are used, while biolubricants can be manufactured by alcohols of long chain lengths. the formation of a biolubricant from oleic acid and isoamyl alcohol in organic solvents has been studied previously [11–13]. the term ‘biolubricant’ may be used since both isoamyl alcohol and oleic acid are considered mailto:gubiczal@almos.uni-pannon.hu 28 bedő, bélafi-bakó, nemestóthy, and gubicza to occur naturally and the reaction is carried out by a naturally-occurring catalyst, an enzyme. koszorz et al. studied the same reaction and stated that the water formed as a by-product of the esterification reaction had a negative effect on the rate of reaction and activity of the enzyme. to enhance the effectiveness of the process, water had to be removed by an integrated system where the reaction was combined with a pervaporation unit [14]. turkish researchers applied fusel oil – a by-product of bioethanol production – containing a significant amount of isoamyl alcohol that was used to synthesize a biolubricant with high yield [15]. in addition to organic solvents, good results were achieved recently using ionic liquids as solvents. in the field of heat treatment microwave irradiation has yielded excellent results in both organic synthetic and enzymatic reactions [16, 17]. in transesterification reactions even a synergy effect was observed between the enzyme and ionic liquid [18–20]. the aim of this paper was twofold: (i) to study the possibility of applying ionic liquids instead of organic solvents; (ii) to investigate the role of microwave irradiation to achieve the highest possible degree of conversion in the minimum amount of time. 2. experimental the reactions were conducted in an incubator shaker and microwave equipment using conventional heating and microwave irradiation, respectively. similar compositions and reaction volumes were used in the measurements to be able to compare the experimental results. 2.1 samples and measurements all chemicals were commercially available and used without further purification. novozym 435 (immobilised candida antarctica lipase b, calb), a triacylglycerol acylhydrolase (e.c. 3.1.1.3.) immobilized on an acrylic resin, was a gift from novozymes (bagsvćrd, denmark). its nominal catalytic activity and water content were 7000 propyl laurate units (plu)/g and 1-2 %, respectively. isoamyl alcohol (98 %) and oleic acid (99 %) were used as received from sigmaaldrich. the ionic liquid 1-butyl-3-methylimidazolium hexafluorophosphate ([bmim]pf6) (≥98.5 %) was purchased from sigma-aldrich while n-hexane and isooctane (99 %) were acquired from reanal. to follow the yield of the ester, a hp-5890a gas chromatograph (gc) was used. the device was equipped with a split/splitless injector, flame ionization detector (fid), and db-ffap column (length: 10 m, inner diameter: 0.53 mm, film thickness: 1.00 µm). the following heating programme was applied: 130 °c, 3 mins.; temperature ramp up: 10 °c min−1; 240 °c, 5 mins. isooctane was used as an internal standard. for the analysis, a 10 µl sample of the reaction mixture was extracted. reaction mixtures that contain ionic liquids cannot be injected into the gc, since they – as a viscous liquid – form a deposit on the inner side of the column that causes fouling. moreover, they may be degraded due to the high temperature, thus, the precision of the measurements will be affected and undesirable peaks may appear in the chromatograms. during the measurements the components are usually separated from the ionic liquid by extraction and injected into the column. in our measurements – to preserve the gc column – fiberglass and adsorbent material were placed inside the injector, which retained the ionic liquid after injection while the component to be analysed was transferred in a gas phase to the column as a result of the high temperature. in this way extraction of the product from the reaction mixture could be avoided, therefore, the errors that originate from the incomplete extraction (effectiveness) could be eliminated. 2.2 experimental setups two different procedures were used for the production of biolubricants. firstly, by using conventional heating the synthesis of biolubricants was conducted in eppendorf tubes (1.5 ml) at 40 °c rotated at 200 rpm (ika incubator shaker ks 4000i). in a typical experiment 5 cm3 of reaction mixture (22.5 mmol of isoamyl alcohol and 3.75 mmol of oleic acid dissolved in n-hexane or [bmim]pf6) was prepared in a volumetric flask, and the eppendorf tubes were each filled with 1 cm3 of the reaction mixture. the reaction started when 10 mg of the enzyme was added. tests under microwave conditions were performed in a commercial microwave synthesizer (discover series, benchmate model, cem corporation, usa). it was equipped with a magnetic stirrer and a fibre-optic sensor to monitor the temperature, which was set by varying the power of the microwave. for the esterification of biolubricant, 10 w of energy was used to maintain the temperature of the reaction between 40 and 60 °c. the volume and composition of the reaction mixture was identical to under conventional conditions. experiments to study the reusability of enzymes were conducted by separating the enzyme from the reaction mixture and starting a novel reaction with a reaction mixture of the same volume. 3. results and analysis 3.1 experiments certain ionic liquids may catalyse esterification reactions. even though in the case of [bmim]pf6 this phenomenon does not occur according to earlier publications, measurements were conducted in reaction mixtures which did not contain enzymes to be able to exclude this effect. our experiments confirmed previous results from the literature: [bmim]pf6 did not catalyse the reactions. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry production of a biolubricant by enzymatic esterification 29 figure 1: biolubricant production in the organic solvent (dashed lines) and ionic liquid (solid lines) using conventional heating. the experimental conditions were selected according to data from the literature in addition to our earlier observations, and they were checked by preliminary measurements. thus, the molar ratio of isoamyl alcohol to oleic acid was adjusted to 6:1, with a shaking rate of 200 rpm. the measurements were conducted at a temperature of between 30 and 50 °c to follow the eventual changes at various temperatures. it would have been possible to carry out measurements at higher temperatures using the enzyme novozym 435 or the ionic liquid [bmim]pf6, furthermore, changes over longer reaction times could be more suitable to follow and evaluate. 3.2 experiments using conventional heating firstly, measurements under the conditions described in section 2.2 were conducted using conventional heating (fig. 1). as can be seen esters were produced in high yields during the reactions in the ionic liquid as well as expected, and the yield was always higher in the ionic liquid at the same temperature. 3.3 experiments using microwave heating the results of the measurements using microwave irradiation are presented in fig. 2. as can be observed, a much shorter time was necessary to reach equilibrium, and the reaction rate was also faster in the ionic liquid. 3.4 investigation of enzyme reuse the reusability of the enzyme novozym 435 was studied under similar conditions in an ionic liquid (i.e. using conventional and microwave heating). the results indicated figure 2: biolubricant production in the organic solvent (dashed lines) and ionic liquid (solid lines) using microwave irradiation. that the activity of the enzyme declined more rapidly using conventional heating. 4. discussion the results of the experiments conducted in the organic solvent, n-hexane, and in the ionic liquid, [bmim]pf6, under similar conditions provided a good basis to compare the effects of conventional and microwave heating during the production of biolubricants using enzymes since in both cases the same reaction volumes were used. as can be seen in fig. 1, the reaction rate was higher in the ionic liquid (il) than in n-hexane (n-h), the organic solvent that was usually applied. the data in table 1 can be further compared. by comparing the values of c, il/c and n-h (the ratio of enzyme activities in the ionic liquid and n-hexane using conventional (c) heating), it can be seen that the activity of the enzyme increased by a factor of 1.2 (on average) at each temperature due to the presence of the ionic liquid. in the organic solvent the activity of the enzyme was found to be 2.8 times greater as a result of the microwave irradiation at each temperature (data of mw, n-h/c, n-h) compared to the conventional heating. in similar experiments in ionic liquids even more significant increases in the activity of enzymes were observed: microwave irradiation (mw) resulted in a 5.8-fold rise (data of mw, il/c, il). a possible explanation for the significant increase is that the ionic liquid and microwave irradiation have a positive synergistic effect on the activity of the enzyme. previously it was observed that ionic liquids seem to protect the enzyme in a similar way to the immobilising suptable 1: comparison of the activity of the enzyme under various conditions. t / °c activity / µmol·min−1·g−1 conventional heating microwave heating c, il/c, n-h mw, n-h/c, n-h mw, il/c, il n-h il n-h il 30 162 194 475 1120 1.19 2.93 5.77 40 342 444 990 2510 1.29 2.89 5.65 50 575 660 1650 3840 1.15 2.86 5.82 46(2) pp. 27–31 (2018) 30 bedő, bélafi-bakó, nemestóthy, and gubicza figure 3: reusability of the enzyme in the ionic liquid using microwave and conventional heating port of the enzymes. in this work an immobilised enzyme was applied, thus, the synergistic effect simply strengthened the enzyme preparation or stabilised the active site of the enzyme. a similar effect has already been described in transesterification reactions in some papers in the literature [18, 20], but not with regard to esterification reactions. the stabilisation effect of the ionic liquid was confirmed by the results presented in fig. 3. by re-using the enzyme 5 times under conventional heating, the activity of the enzyme decreased much more rapidly than in the case of microwave heating. while in the first case 50 % of the original activity of the enzyme was maintained after the fifth application, using microwave irradiation this value was 70 %. 5. conclusion the experiments led to a definite answer to the original question, namely whether microwave irradiation may enhance the effectivity of the enzymatic production of a biolubricant from isoamyl alcohol and oleic acid. it was observed that microwave heating increased the rate of reaction. during the evaluation of the experiments an unexpected effect was discovered: a synergistic effect was observed between microwave irradiation and the ionic liquid. as a result, a significantly greater increase in the activity of the enzyme was achieved during the reaction in the ionic liquid using microwave irradiation than in the organic solvent or according to the value obtained in the ionic liquid using conventional heating. acknowledgement references [1] carrea, g.; riva, s.: organic synthesis with enzymes in non-aqueous media (wiley-vch verlag gmbh & co. kgaa, weinheim, germany) 2008 pp. 169–190 isbn: 978-3-527-31846-9 [2] salimon, j.; salih, n.; yousif, e.: improvement of pour point and oxidative stability of synthetic ester basestocks for biolubricant applications, arab j. chem., 2012 5, 193–200 doi: 10.1016/j.arabjc.2010.09.001 [3] akerman, c.o.; hagström, a.e.v.; mollaahmad, m.a.; karlsson, s.; hatti-kaul, r.: biolubricant synthesis using immobilised lipase: process optimisation of trimethylolpropane oleate production, proc. biochem., 2011 46, 2225–2231 doi: 10.1016/j.procbio.2011.08.006 [4] dossat, v.; combes, d.; marty, a.: lipasecatalysed transesterification of high oleic sunflower oil, enzyme microb. tech., 2002 30, 90–94 doi: s0141-0229(01)00453-7 [5] hajar, m.; vahabzadeh, f.: modeling the kinetics of biolubricant production from castor oil using novozym 435 in a fluidized-bed reactor, ind. crop prod., 2014 59, 252–259 doi: org/10.1016/j.indcrop.2014.05.032 [6] mobarak, h.m.; mohamed, e.n.; masjuki, h.h.; kalam, m.a.; al mahmud, k.a.h.; habibullah, m.; ashraful, a.m.: the prospects of biolubricants as alternatives in automotive applications, renew. sust. ener. rev., 2014 33, 34–43 doi: org/10.1016/j.rser.2014.01.062 [7] su, l.; hong, r.; guo, x.; wu, j.; xia, y.: shortchain aliphatic ester synthesis using thermobifida fusca cutinase, food chem., 2016 206, 131–136 doi: 10.1016/j.foodchem.2016.03.051 [8] cvjetko, m.; vorkapic-furac, j.; znidarsic-plazl, p.: isoamyl acetate synthesis in imidazolium-based ionic liquids using packed bed enzyme microreactor, proc. biochem., 2012 47, 1344–1350 doi: 10.1016/j.procbio.2012.04.028 [9] atadashi, i.m.; aroua, m.k.; aziz, a.r.a.; sulaiman, n.m.n.: production of biodiesel using high free fatty acid feedstocks, renew. sust. ener. rev., 2012 16, 3275–3285 doi: 10.1016/j.rser.2012.02.063 [10] verma, p.; sharma, m.p.: review of process parameters for biodiesel production from different feedstocks, renew. sust. ener. rev., 2016 62, 1063–1071 doi: 10.1016/j.rser.2016.04.054 [11] dörmő, n.; bélafi-bakó, k.; bartha, l.; ehrenstein, u.; gubicza, l.: manufacture of an environmentalsafe biolubricant from fusel oil by enzymatic esterification in solvent-free system, biochem. eng. j., 2004 21, 229–234 doi: 10.1016/j.bej.2004.06.011 [12] madarász, j.; németh, d.; bakos, j.; gubicza, l.; bakonyi, p.: solvent-free enzymatic process for biolubricant production in continuous microfluidic reactor, j. clean prod., 2015 93, 140–144 doi: 10.1016/j.jclepro.2015.01.028 [13] bányai, t.; bélafi-bakó, k.; nemestóthy, n.; gubicza, l.: biolubricant production in ionic liquids by enzymatic esterification, hung. j. ind. chem., 2011 39(3), 395–399 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1016/j.arabjc.2010.09.001 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.arabjc.2010.09.001 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procbio.2011.08.006 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procbio.2011.08.006 https://doi.org/s0141-0229(01)00453-7 https://doi.org/s0141-0229(01)00453-7 https://doi.org/org/10.1016/j.indcrop.2014.05.032 https://doi.org/org/10.1016/j.indcrop.2014.05.032 https://doi.org/org/10.1016/j.rser.2014.01.062 https://doi.org/org/10.1016/j.rser.2014.01.062 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2016.03.051 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procbio.2012.04.028 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procbio.2012.04.028 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2012.02.063 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2016.04.054 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.bej.2004.06.011 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2015.01.028 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2015.01.028 production of a biolubricant by enzymatic esterification 31 [14] koszorz, z.; nemestóthy, n.; ziobrowski, z.; bélafi-bakó, k.; krupiczka, r.: influence of pervaporation process parameters on enzymatic catalyst deactivation, desalination, 2004 162, 307–313 doi: 10.1016/s0011-9164(04)00064-5 [15] güvenc, a.; kapucu, n.; kapucu, h.; aydogan, ö.; mehmetoglu, ü.: enzymatic esterification of isoamyl alcohol obtained from fusel oil: optimization by response surface methodology, enzyme microb. tech., 2007 40, 778–785 doi: 10.1016/j.enzmictec.2006.06.010 [16] vekariya, r.l.: a review of ionic liquids: applications towards catalytic organic transformations, j. mol. liq., 2017 227, 44–60 doi: 10.1016/j.molliq.2016.11.123 [17] major, b.; nemestóthy, n.; bélafi-bakó, k.; gubicza, l.: enzymatic esterification of lactic acid under microwave conditions in ionic liquids, hung. j. ind. chem., 2008 36, 77–81 [18] yadav, g.d.; pawar, s.p.: synergism between microwave irradiation and enzyme catalysis in transesterification of ethyl-3-phenylpropanoate with nbutanol, bioresource technol., 2012 109, 1–6 doi: 10.1016/j.biortech.2012.01.030 [19] yu, d.; wang, c.; yin, y.; zhang, a.; gao, g.; fang, x.: a synergistic effect of microwave irradiation and ionic liquids on enzyme-catalyzed biodiesel production, green chem., 2011 13, 1869–1875 doi: 10.1039/c1gc15114b [20] kamble, m.p.; chaudhari, s.a.; singhal, r.s.; yadav, g.d.: synergism of microwave irradiation and enzyme catalysis in kinetic resolution of (r,s)-1phenylethanol by cutinase from novel isolate fusarium ict sac1, biochem. eng. j., 2017 117, 121– 128 doi: 10.1016/j.bej.2016.09.007 46(2) pp. 27–31 (2018) https://doi.org/10.1016/s0011-9164(04)00064-5 https://doi.org/10.1016/s0011-9164(04)00064-5 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enzmictec.2006.06.010 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enzmictec.2006.06.010 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.molliq.2016.11.123 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.molliq.2016.11.123 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biortech.2012.01.030 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biortech.2012.01.030 https://doi.org/10.1039/c1gc15114b https://doi.org/10.1039/c1gc15114b https://doi.org/10.1016/j.bej.2016.09.007 introduction experimental samples and measurements experimental setups results and analysis experiments experiments using conventional heating experiments using microwave heating investigation of enzyme reuse discussion conclusion microsoft word a_53_tofalvi_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 39(1) pp. 95-99 (2011) environmental significance and identification of metal-chelate complexes using ion chromatography r. tófalvi , a. sepsey, k. horváth, p. hajós university of pannonia, department of analytical chemistry, 8200 veszprém, egyetem u. 10., hungary e-mail: tofalvir@freemail.hu, hajosp@almos.uni-pannon.hu the trace analysis of metal-complexes has long been an area of interest for analytical chemists and environmental researchers due to the biological and toxic properties of these compounds. the method for the simultaneous separation of the metal cations and organic and inorganic anions is based on the use of strong chelating anion with high charge. when basic solution contains an excess of strong complexing anion of high charge, such as ethylenediaminetetraacetate (edta) or trans-1,2-diamine-cyclohexane-tetraacetic acid (dcta) ion, most heavy and transition metal ions will occur as anionic complexes. hence this method provides simultaneous metal and anion separation. the edta and dcta chelating agents exhibit strong complexing power. these aminopolycarboxylic acids can remobilize metals in nature. because aminopolycarboxylic acids are a potential risk to the environment, it is important to develop an effective analytical technique for their determination. several factors affect the retention in the separation of the complex anions: complex formation reactions, ion-exchange equilibria and protolysis depending on ph. the aim of this work is the optimization of a simultaneous chromatographic separation and identification of metal ions complexed by the ligand edta or dcta. the method was utilized to separate cuedta2-, cudcta2-, znedta2-, zndcta2-, aledta-, aldcta-, cl-, piruvate and maleate anions. an advantage of the developed method is that the same basic ph-range is favourable to the stability of the metal complexes and to the elution. keywords: transition metal complexes, edta, dcta ligands, ion exchange chromatography introduction metal ion speciation and the environment the presence of transition and heavy metals in the environmental and biological materials justifies the importance of high performance environmental qualitative and quantitative analysis of these species [1]. the transition metals exist in different oxidation states possessing different physical and chemical properties and different toxicity. the main sources of metalcontamination of the environment are the industrial emission, vehicle exhaustion, corrosion processes, households, agriculture, hazardous storage tanks, and waste disposal sites. the presence of inorganic pollutants, especially toxic metal ions, is a serious issue, as metal ions may often be carcinogenic in nature. the identification of pollutants in environmental matrices is a difficult task because of strong interference from other components of the sample. the extended use of palladium in automotive catalytic converters and in the chemical industry has also led to increasing concentrations of this metal in environmental compartments. platinum group and heavy metals may enter the environment and interact with complexing materials, such as humic substances. determination of palladium by ion chromatography with icp-ms detection was developed by m. c. bruzzoniti et al. [2] aluminium plays probably a role in the development of alzheimer’s disease [3]. the route of these toxic metal ions to the human body is through water and other foodstuffs. therefore, the monitoring of metal ions with different oxidation states in water bodies and foodstuffs is essential and important. some toxic metal ions are also present in the atmosphere and indirectly affect our health. some metal ion in oxoanion forms (aso4 3-, cro4 2-) are transported across cell membranes. copper and zinc within those metals that are essential to life although inherently toxic. the characteristic oxidation forms of copper are: cu(i) and cu(ii). in case of zinc the most frequent forms are zn(i) and zn(ii). the change of oxidation state of an element affects the degree of its bio-availability and toxicity. the different oxidation states of a particular metal ion possess different physical and chemical properties. these oxidation states differ in their redox potential, complexation, and hydration properties. therefore the speciation analysis can differentiate the complexed and free forms of metal ions. measuring the total concentration of metal ions gives no information about the actual chemical forms it exist, that is important to understand its toxicity and biotransformation. therefore the speciation of elements can not be omitted. 96 aminopolycarboxylic acids as ligands can remobilize heavy and transition metals and their release in nature may cause release of metals into ground water and their uptake by plants. degradation of chelating agents is controversial. while excessive uptake of heavy metals was viewed as a deterrent for the use of edta in agriculture, the same process is now being researched because of the possibility that it could be applied to the phytoremediation of heavy-metal contaminated soils. however, due to the lack of selective analytical techniques, the mechanisms of metal uptake by plants in the presence of edta still remain largely speculative. since aminopolycarboxylic acids are a potential risk to the environment, it is also important to develop a selective analytical technique for their determination. chelate chromatography chelate chromatography is a special type of ionchromatography in which chelating agents as eluent additives are employed. the ion chromatography is a suitable speciation technique and it offers reproducible results. simultaneous separation of metals and anions is based on the use of a strong complexing anion of high charge [4]. ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (edta) and trans-1,2-diamincyclohexanetetraacetic acid (dcta) are excellent chelating agents that are able to form sufficiently stable chelates with different metal ions. the strong complex-forming anions with high charge react with most of the diand trivalent metal cations and they form complexes with one or two negative charge that makes the simultaneous separation of metal cations, organic and inorganic anions possible. several factors affect the chromatographic retention of complex anions. these are the (1) complex formation reactions, (2) the ion-exchange equilibria, and (3) the protolysis that depends on the ph of elution. retention models have been developed by hajos et al. in order to study the retention behavior of metal-complexes in anion exchange chromatography [4, 5]. the theory [5] is based on the generalized ion-exchange-, protonation and complex-formation equilibria. the unknown ionexchange equilibrium constants for the sample and the eluent species can be determined from experimental retention data [6] by iterative minimization, using a non-linear regression algorithm. the model was utilized to predict the retention behavior of cdedta2-, coedta2-, mnedta2and niedta2ions. it was concluded that the chromatographic separation of these species are strongly influenced by the size of ion, the type, concentration, and ph of eluent, and the stability of complex. experimental instrumentation a dionex dx-300 ion chromatograph (sunnyvale, ca, usa) equipped with a conductivity detector and a dionex amms-i cation micromembrane suppressor was used during the work. the separations were carried out by as9-hc and as4a-sc separator columns (250 x 4 mm i.d.) packed with anion-exchangers functionalized with alkyl/alkanol quaternary ammonium ions. the recommended ph-range for the columns was 2–13. all chromatograms were obtained at room temperature at a flow rate of 1.2 ml min-1. the injection volume was 50 μl. the micromembrane suppressor was regenerated with sulphuric acid (0.025 m) at flow rate 3,5 ml min-1. reagents and solutions eluents were prepared by using analytical grade na2co3 and nahco3 (fluka, switzerland). high purity water was obtained by using a milli-q system (millipore, bedford, ma). the specific resistance of the water was 18.2 mω cm-1. sample solutions of metals, organic and inorganic anions and the chelating agents (edta and dcta) were prepared by dilution of a concentrated stock solution of analytical-grade salts (fluka). the sample solutions contained chloride salts of metal cations and complex forming ligands. before analysis, all eluents were treated in an ultrasonic bath for 5 mins in order to remove air. basic components and practice of chelatechromatography the basic components of chelate chromatography are presented in fig. 1. the delivery system consists of an eluent container (na2co3, nahco3, ph 8–11), liquid transfer lines, eluent and sample selection valves and a pump. the sample components (metal-halogenides, oxoanions) together with complexing agents (edta, dcta) are injected into the separation system via a valve injector. plastic valves made of chemically inert materials are used. typical injection volumes are between 10–100 μl. the separator columns are packed with pellicular anion exchanger in order to obtain optimum separation condition for ionic components (medta2-, a-) with an adequately short analysis time. after leaving the separator column, the separated species pass into the conductivity detector. the suppressor-type ion chromatography systems has a unique detection system in which an ion-exchange membrane enhances the sensitivity of analysis. the main function of the suppressor is to chemically reduce the high background conductivity 97 of the electrolyte used as eluent (naoh → h2o; na2co3 → h2co3), and to convert the sample anions into a much more conductive form (nacl → hcl). a major advantage of chelate-chromatography – in contrast to other instrumental analysis such as atomic spectroscopy – is its ability to detect different species of anions and cations simultaneously. figure 1: schematic flow diagram of chelate chromatography results and discussion by adding negatively charged edta or dcta ligand to positively charged metal ions complex anions with negative charge form in the solution according to the following equilibria: edta4+ m2+ ↔ [medta]2(1) dcta4+ m2+ ↔ [mdcta]2(2) the conjugate bases of edta and dcta are 6-dentate ligands. in case of complex formation, the 6 donoratoms of the ligand (4 oxygen and 2 nitrogen atoms) are located at octahedron vertices around the central metal ion. the high stability of the metal chelates is due to the fact that the ligand surrounds fully the metal ion and isolates it from molecules of the solvent. the stability of the complexes depends on the ph. when the ph increases, the chelating agents are more and more deprotonated and exhibit their complexing power. during the formation of metal chelates ph-dependent side-reactions occur. at the eluent ph range investigated edta and dcta exist in two forms: hy3and y4-. in this work, carbonate/hydrogencarbonate electrolyte was used as eluent at various concentrations and phs. the separation system contains three ionic species in the eluent (co3 2-, hco3 and oh-) and various forms of organic, inorganic and complex ions in the sample. during elution, the following simultaneous equilibria take place in the separator column: 2r-e + medta2↔ r2-medta + 2e (3) r-e + mhedta↔ r-mhedta + e(4) 2r-e + mdcta2↔ r2-mdcta + 2e (5) r-e + mhdcta↔ r-mhdcta + e(6) where: r – the charged functional group of the ionexchanger e – the anion of the eluent. in the suppressor reaction carbonic acid is formed from the eluent anions: co3 2+ 2 h+ ↔ h2co3 (7) the retention factors (log k’) of the investigated anions at different eluent concentrations and phs can be seen in table 1. the result shows clearly that the increasing eluent concentration decreases the retention of anions. at the same time, the changing eluent ph affects the sample composition by changing the fractions of differently protonated species. it can be seen in fig. 2 (ph vs. φ) that at the ph of elution the edta can exist in two distinct forms with triand four negative charges. it is important to note that the changing ph of the eluent does not affect the order of elution of the metal complexes. an advantage of the applied method is that the same basic ph-range is favorable to the stability of the metal complexes and also to the elution. figure 2: partial molar fractions of edta in the eluent at different phs. the cross-hatched area represents the ph region of the eluents used with this separation method, complexes with different ligands and the complexes of different metal ions can be separated in the same run (fig. 3-5). the simultaneous separation of negatively charged metal chelates and carboxylate anions can be performed as well (fig. 4). the results indicate that the retention is influenced by the ph of eluent (table 1). increasing eluent ph leads to decrease in retention (k’) because the predominant form of eluent species is the divalent carbonate above ph 10 that has higher elution strength than the monovalent hydrogen carbonate anion. this important factor has to be considered during the optimization of separation. 98 table 1: the effect of ph and eluent concentration on the retention of complexes and ligands k’ celu [mm] 5.0 6.5 8.0 9.0 ph 10.27 10.86 11.03 9.90 10.27 10.50 10.86 9.44 10.27 10.86 11.03 cl3.88 3.45 3.60 4.20 3.56 3.42 3.08 5.34 3.53 3.14 2.85 edta412.00 8.06 9.00 11.89 8.16 6.93 5.95 12.27 6.29 5.38 3.92 edta326.09 19.38 20.16 25.18 17.78 15.81 14.63 17.29 14.73 12.68 10.58 dcta412.80 9.28 9.81 13.54 10.04 8.73 7.11 n.r. 7.96 6.32 5.07 dcta315.86 11.23 11.93 14.36 12.10 10.55 8.62 21.01 16.96 13.27 10.84 cuedta230.27 25.98 25.95 22.53 21.67 19.92 18.87 n.r. 17.55 15.86 14.28 znedta222.87 19.30 19.95 n.r. 17.84 16.12 14.54 18.20 14.62 12.77 10.72 cudcta227.60 19.14 20.84 n.r. 20.41 17.08 14.66 20.22 16.96 13.27 10.65 zndcta228.58 20.01 21.31 n.r. 21.45 17.84 15.30 21.90 17.60 13.72 10.50 n.r.: no retention data figure 3: simultaneous separation of al and zn complexes with edta and dcta chelating agents. peaks: 1. cl-, 2. edta4-, 3. dcta4-, 4. [aledta]-, 5. [aldcta]-, 6. [znedta]2and [zndcta]2-. eluent: 9.0 mm na2co3, ph = 11.027. column: as9-hc anion exchanger. calibration data (table 2) demonstrate that the simultaneous ic analysis of metal-chelate complexes and ligands is sensitive and can be used for quantitation as well. figure 4: chromatogram of simultaneous separation of aliphatic carboxyl acids and copper-edta complex. peaks: 1. piruvate, 2. cl-, 3. edta4-, 4. maleate, 5. [cuedta]. eluent: 0.7 mm na2co3 + 1.8 mm nahco3; ph=9.66. column: as4a-sc. figure 5: chromatogram of edta-metal complexes. peaks: 1. cl-, 2. edta4-, 3. [cuedta], 4. [znedta]. eluent: 8.0 mm na2co3+ nahco3, ph = 10.27. column: as9-hc anion exchanger. table 2: calibration data of edta and dcta chelating agents and their complexes. sample sensitivity (μs sec l mg-1) linearity (r2) edta43×108 0.8645 edta33×108 0.8442 dcta44×108 0.8771 dcta32×107 0.7558 [cu-edta]2109 0.9931 [cu-dcta]2109 0.9894 conclusion our experiments verified that the simultaneous analysis of anions and metal cations can be achieved and the change of concentration of components can be detected, the metal complexes and their ligands can be identified. the retention data of chelate-complexes (cu2+, zn2+, edta, dcta) were given by the use of anion exchange column packed with pellicular stationary phase, and by the use of carbonate-hydrogencarbonate eluent and suppressed conductivity detection. the effective parameters of the separation were determined considering the composition of eluent. 99 acknowledgements present article was published in the frame of the projects támop-4.2.1/b-09/1/konv-2010-0003 and támop-4.2.2/b-10/1-2010-0025. the projects are realized with the support of the hungarian government and the european union, with the co-funding of the european social fund. financial and infrastructural support of the hungarian scientific research fund (otka k 81843), and the ntp_oka_viii_a_85 student grant is also gratefully acknowledged. references 1. i. ali, h. y. aboul-enein: instrumental methods in metal ion speciation, chromatographic science series; taylor & francis, 2006, 1–16 2. m. c. bruzzoniti, s. cavalli, a. mangia, c. mucchino, c. sarzanini, e. tarasco: ion chromatography with inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry, a powerful analytical tool for complex matrices. estimation of pt and p din environmental samples, journal of chromatography a, 997, (2003), 51–63 3. m. c. bruzzoniti, e. mentasti, c. sarzanini: simultaneous determination of inorganic anions and metal ions by suppressed ion chromatography, analytica chimica acta 382, (1999), 291–299 4. p. hajos, g. revesz, o. horvath, c. sarzanini: the simultaneous analysis of metal-edta complexes and inorganic anions by suppressed ion chromatography, journal of chromatographic science, 34(6), (1996), 291–299 5. p. hajos, g. revesz, c. sarzanini, g. sacchero, e. mentasti: retention model for the separation of anionic metal-edta complexes in ion chromatography, journal of chromatography, 640, (1993), 15–25 6. p. hajos, o. horvath, g. revesz: advances in chromatography, 38., marcel dekker inc., new york (1997) << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 33 (1-2). pp. 81-88. (2005) constrained pi(d) algorithms (c-pid) f. szeifert, l. nagy, t. chován* and j. abonyi department of process engeneering, university of veszprém, veszprém, egyetem u. 10, h-8200, hungary, www.fmt.vein.hu, chovan@fmt.vein.hu majority of control algorithms used in industrial processes is pid or pid modification and many of these is badly tuned. the reason for this is that the physical constraints of the manipulated variable are neglected. the pid algorithm, presented in the paper, is obtained by inverting the standard pid twice and it is able to handle the constraints. the first analytical inverting step results in a proper pid inverse. this is then transformed into a state-space model. the statespace model is then inverted again by using the same method which is applied in globally linearizing control and taking into account the physical constraints of the manipulated variable. the constrained pid (c-pid) algorithm obtained this way is an anti reset wind-up algorithm which can be readily implemented. a possible design methodology is also proposed. at the same time, regarding processes with not higher than second order dynamics, the solution a rigourous model-based one. keywords: constrained control, pid algorithm, model-based, constrained inverse introduction based on different surveys, 95% of control algorithms used in industrial processes is pid or pid modification and most of these is badly tuned. the consequence is that the dynamic performance is poor and in the worst cases even instability might occur. correct tuning is made difficult by several problems which are at the same time the reasons for the gap between the control engineering practice and the control theory. only a few of these are: on the practical side: • dynamics of the process is known only roughly. • dynamic properties can change with time (valve sticking, wearness, etc.). • the algorithm of the used pid modification is not known (because of the intellectual property rights, the documentation are non-algorithmic-level and superficial). • for the above reasons the “academic” tuning methods cannot be applied. • industrial implementation of algorithms established in control theory encounters difficulties. on the theoretical side: • most of the methods, thriving mathematical accuracy, start form assumption which are not satisfied in practice. • methods built on idealized models are preferred. • physical constraints are neglected (involving the constraints, the inherently linear models become non-linear). • the methods “in focus” are favoured. the paper defines a constrained pid algorithm which can be readily implemented in practice as well as discusses the limitations of pid-based algorithms and the possibilities of model-based design. the set of pid algorithms in spite of the two decades of industrial application and the intensive academic research providing the *correspondence concerning this article should be addressed to t. chovan (chovan@fmt.vein.hu) 82 theoretical bases, chemical processes are dominated by pid or pid-based controllers [1]. the main reasons for this dominancy are the role of pid controllers in the classical control technologies, their position in the engineering curriculum, their availability in dcs’s and not at least the efficiency of their application. on the top of these, certain model-based techniques, depending on the process model, often result in pid algorithms and therefore can be implemented as pid controllers. still the research and application of model-based control algorithms are rather important, first of all, in cases of processes where the application of pid is not efficient. the study of model-based control algorithms is getting more and more intensive as the technological possibilities are opening. at the same time the model of the controlled process gains more importance in the analysis. the input of the pid algorithm is the control error ( ), the output is the control signal ( ), and its continuous time ( ) model is: e u 0≥t sd t i u dt tde tde t tektu +⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ++= ∫ )( )( 1 )()( 0 ττ , (1) where di ttk ,, are the parameters (gain, integral and differential time constants) su is the steady-state control signal corresponding to setpoint )(tw design of the controller involves the determination of the three parameters, while the value of is often set to zero or sometimes to other constant (the i-term assures the settling without steady-state error). in case of more complex algorithms (e.g. for batch processes) the can be estimated more accurately: su su ),,(0 kzwffuu s += , (2) where 0u is constant (in batch processes it can be used for initialization in the different phases) ),,( kzwff is a feed-forward term based on the setpoint and the measured disturbance(s) ( k,z ). in the process control systems usually different (i) modifications are implemented. transfer functions of the common solutions are the following: parallel pid (p-pid): ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ + ++== 1 1 1 )( )( st st st k se su g d d i pidp α , (3) serial pid (s-pid): 1 1 1 + ⋅⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ += st st st kg d d i pids α , (4) filtered parallel pid: 1 1 + ⋅= st gg f pidfpidf , (5) where ]5.0,1.0[∈α , constant ft is the time constant of the first order filter, it must be determined during the design. the above controllers are in continuous time. discretizing with an appropriate sampling time the corresponding discrete pid algorithms can be obtained. using a sampling time, orders of magnitude less than the characteristic time constant of the process, the discrete pid approximate the results the corresponding continuous algorithm with the required accuracy. the time constant for the great majority of chemical processes is several orders of magnitude larger than the (hardware) sampling time of 100 msec or 1 sec, realized in the process control systems. in case of relatively high sampling time, the discrete pid algorithms require special analysis. it is well known that in feedback loops, the zero steadystate error is maintained by the integrating term, therefore the i-term must included in most of the cases. at the same time, since the physical control signal is constrained, the application of the i-term can lead to saturation (wind-up) which is treated by different “backward integration” algorithms. pid blocks of the process control systems allow realization of a large variety of pid modifications by using different configuration parameters. this solution, however, makes the correct application of pid algorithms more difficult in itself, since it may require the specification further several tens of parameters above the three or four tuning parameters. model-based algorithms the fundamental problem of feedback control is that the effect of the actual control output – especially in case of higher order systems with dead-time – is delayed in time. the small change induces higher control output which ultimately can even cause instability. the mathematical model of the process allows estimating the future effect of the control output and this way determining the optimal output. the model predictive controllers (mpc) solving the optimal control problem over a discrete prediction horizon determine the optimal future values of discrete time control outputs. the first element is then realized and the calculation is repeated 83 in every sampling period. industrial application of mpc has two decades of history and software tools (e.g. rmpct) for considerably supporting the design have been introduced. mpc superposed on pid loops can be efficiently used, first of all, for multivariable (mimo) problems. in case of simple siso problems the performance of mpc is comparable to that of a pid, however its calculation requirements and implementation cost can be significantly higher [2]. one of the simplest model-based design methods is the direct synthesis technique [3]. its basic idea is that the dynamics of the closed loop is defined and the controller providing this response is calculated backward using the known process model. in case of simple process models, very often a pid variant, which can be readily implemented on any dcs, is obtained as a result. the results of the design for a few simple processes are summarized in table 1, where the closed loop is defined as a first order filter (with dead-time) and is the time constant of the closed loop. ct controllers applying the internal model control (imc) principle are very popular in academic studies. their essence is a feed-forward term containing the inverse of the process model. the control offset coming from the model error is corrected by feeding back the filtered model error. depending on the process model, often a pid algorithm, which can be used in the classical feedback scheme, is obtained in this case too. applying the imc method on the processes in table 1 and using first order filters, the same results given in the table are obtained [3]. investigating the results in table 1 it can be concluded that up to second order systems the linear-model-based methods also result in pid algorithms. it is well known too that a large number of simple chemical processes can be modeled as first (or second) order system with dead-time. these facts support the widely accepted experience that a considerable part of chemical process control problems can be solved by different pid variants. for systems with dead-time, the smith predictor which can also be well inserted into imc structures lives its renaissance. in case of batch systems it is practical to specify the pid algorithm by phases and often more complex solutions have to be applied (e.g. dual-mode control [4]). table 1 model-based pid algorithms direct synthesis or imc process model ckk ⋅ it dt 1+st k ct t t 0 ( )( )11 21 ++ stst k ct tt 21 + 21 tt + 21 21 tt tt + ⋅ s k ct 1 ∞ 0 ( )1+sts k ct 1 ∞ t 1+ − st e k sth hc tt t + t 0 ( )( ) hc tt tt + + 21 21 tt + 21 21 tt tt + ⋅ 11 21 ++ − stst ek sth investigating the results in table 1 it can be concluded that up to second order systems the linear-model-based methods also result in pid algorithms. it is well known too that a large number of simple chemical processes can be modeled as first (or second) order system with dead-time. these facts support the widely accepted experience that a considerable part of chemical process control problems can be solved by different pid variants. for systems with dead-time, the smith predictor which can also be well inserted into imc structures lives its renaissance. in case of batch systems it is practical to specify the pid algorithm by phases and often more complex solutions have to be applied (e.g. dual-mode control [4]). controller design the design of the control systems, in a broader sense, involves the selection of manipulated and measured variables based on the analysis of degree of freedom, sensitivity and dynamic behavior, as well as to select the control structure and method. more specifically the design means selecting the control algorithm and determining its parameters. this later, even now, is often solved by using classical methods (zieglernichols, cohen-coon, integral criteria, etc.) with appropriate computer aids and simulation tools. based on simulation, the optimal parameters of the controller can also be found by different search methods. there are known several modified versions of the classical techniques. model-based approaches (see e.g. table 1), starting from different types of models, derive the control equations using the techniques of the linear control theory and applying suitable approximations (e.g. dead-time: pade-approximation, nonlinearities: taylor-series). in this case the identified process model and the control rule determine the control structure and the controller parameters too; separate tuning rules are not needed. building in the identification of the applied model, in the framework of classical schemes (gain scheduling, model reference, self tuning), adaptive algorithm can be 84 constructed too. it is advisable to design the supervision of their operation in advance. in the controller design several practical problems emerge, making more difficult the efficient application of academic results. problems related to control valves, like hystheresis, sticking and nonlinear valve characteristic, are well known. since the problems of hystheresis and sticking must be solved by mechanical engineering techniques they are not considered in the design model. (their indication, at the same time is a model-based diagnostic problem). taking into account the strongly nonlinear valve characteristics is a prerequisite for the appropriate design. considering the practical controller design, an important element of the model is the allowable range of its variables, i.e. taking into account the related constraints. in mathematical sense, this changes the not constrained linear model into a nonlinear one and makes the detailed analysis more difficult (that is why it is often neglected in academic studies). a number of publication confirm that using adequate models containing the corresponding constraints, the model-based algorithms are more efficient than pid controllers tuned with classical methods [5]. constrained pi(d) algorithm taking into account the physical constraints on the control variable the saturation (wind-up) effect can be eliminated. especially in case of batch systems it is frequently occurs, that the requirement for fast settling generates such huge changes in the control output that cannot be realized. this may lead considerably high overshoots which prevent achieving good control performance. this was our main reason motivating the development a constrained pid variant. to take the physical constraints of the control variable into account, two consecutive inverting of a standard pid algorithm is applied, as follows: 1. the inverse of a standard pid is formed in the transformed domain. this can be solved reciprocating the transfer function. 2. a constrained inverse of the inverse pid is formed after converting the inverse transfer function (in time domain) into a state-space model. in details the following transformations are to be done. using a p-pid controller ( 0=α ) the starting transfer function is the following: ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ++== st st k se su pid d i c 1 1 )( )( , (6) that defines an improper object. let us take its proper inverse: 2 1 1)( )( sttst s k t su se pid diic i ++ ⋅==− , (7) based on the transfer function, the inverse can be given as a time-domain input-output model: dt du k t e dt de t dt ed tt c i idi ⋅=++2 2 , (8) let us transform the input-output model into the following input-output equivalent state-space model (using the ∫== etxex i 1 , 21 state definitions): u kt x t tt dt xd cd i dd ⋅ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ +⋅ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ −− = 0 1 0 1 11 , (9) xey ⋅=≡ ]01[)( , (10) the state-space model given by eq.(9-10) is a proper inverse of a standard p-pid. the new c-pid algorithm is constructed by forming a constrained inverse of this model. to form a constrained inverse, let us consider the general scheme (fig.1) of globally linearizing control (glc) [6]. the idea is that an originally nonlinear object can be transformed into a linear one by a state feedback compensator. linear controller state feedback compensator process output map u y x vsetpoint + . . fig.1 globally linearizing control structure the order of the linear input-output model, where the input is v , the output is , is equal to the relative order of the state-space model, eq.(9-10). based on the linearization technique, the constrained inverse is formed according to the scheme shown on fig.2 [7]. the variables are interpreted in the following way: the input of the inverse is the setpoint ( ), its output is the manipulated variable ( ). let the relative order of of the state-space model, eq.(9-10) be y w u r . this means that the input of the process ( is not constrained, u is constrained) has a direct effect on the w r -order derivative of the output ( ). the not-constrained control output ( v ) is determined in such a way that the relationship between the setpoint ( ) and the controlled variable ( ) is defined by an rr dtyd / w y r -order linear input-output model. the time constant of this linear 85 model should be determined according to the time constants of the object given by eq.(9-10). relatively small time constants result in aggressive interventions; the control output ( v ) is often reaches the physical constraints (in this case u takes its minimal or maximal value). with relatively large time constants the system capacity is not exploited resulting in slow control settlings. constraint state feedback compensator u(t) x v(t) setpoint w process eq. (9) output map eq. (10) y constrained control output . . fig.2 formation of constrained inverse to invert according to the given scheme, the the output of eq.(9-10) is differentiated: u tk xx tdt dx dt dy dcd ⋅++⋅−== 1 )( 1 21 1 , (11) since the first order derivative contains the control output explicitly, the relative order of the inverse pid is one. hence the linear system can be defined in the following way: wy dt dy tf =+⋅ , (12) substituting eq.(11) in place of the derivative, the value of the required control output is obtained (output of the feedback compensator): ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ++−⋅⋅= 211 )( xxxwt t kv f d c , (13) the output constraints are treated as follows: ⎪ ⎩ ⎪ ⎨ ⎧ > < ∈ = maxmax minmin maxmin , , ],[, uvifu uvifu uuvifv u , (14) where is the physically allowed range of control output. ],[ maxmin uuu ∈ summarizing the steps above, the scheme of the constrained pid (c-pid) algorithm can be constructed (see fig.3). initial values of the differential equations are set to zero error and to zero output difference. constraint u(t) x1 e(t) + ck f d t t sti 1 ck 1 1 1 +std x2 + + + + cku / 0 + . . . . fig.3 scheme of the c-pid controller applying a similar reasoning or the limit value a c-pi algorithm can be elucidated too (see fig.4). here the relative order of the inverse is zero. 0→dt constraint u(t)e(t) + + ck 1 1 +sti ck 1 cku / . fig.4 scheme of the c-pi controller the non-constrained transfer functions can be easily constructed and the following results are obtained: c-pid: 1 11 1 + ⋅⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ++⋅=− st st st kg f d i cpidc , (15) c-pi: ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ +⋅=− st kg i cpic 1 1 , (16) it can be seen that c-pid not reaching the constraints is equivalent to a parallel pid with a filter, eq. (5), while a c-pi to a normal pi controller. hence it is clear that taking the constraints into account don’t makes the basic algorithms more complicated. this fact has a great importance for practical realizations. design of constrained pi(d) algorithms to determine the parameters of a c-pid it is practical to describe the controlled system as a second order object. the scheme of the closed loop for the non-constrained case is shown in fig.5. 86 y w + .21 ssk βα ++ 1+stpidf u fig.5 non-constrained closed loop this is equivalent to the closed loop given in fig.6. y w + 1 11 + ⋅ ⋅ sts kk t f c i .21 1 ss βα ++ 21 sttst dii ++ fig.6 equivalent loop the framed part shows well that the controller compensates the dynamics of the process if the controller parameters are chosen according to the followings: βαα /, == di tt . (17) the filter parameter should be selected at the possible smallest value ( ) allowed by the measurement noises, and then setting the time constant of the closed loop to , the controller gain can be given by the following expression: ft 0→ft ct c c tk k ⋅ = α . (18) in the direct synthesis method the time constant of the closed loop is selected as a half or fifth of the time constant of the process, therefore the gain can be estimates as: ]5,2[, ∈= γ γ k kc , (19) the two parameters of a c-pi controller can be determined also according to the above reasoning. testing of constrained pi(d) algorithms the c-pid algorithm was physicaly tested on an electrical water heating system installed in our process engineering laboratory. the p&i diagram of the system is shown on fig.7; its technical specification is given in an earlier publication [8]. the temperature of the water ( ) leaving the heater system is controlled by manipulating the heater performance ( u ). the flowrate of the water and its feed temperature are considered as non-measured disturbances. the dynamic relationship is chosen as a second order inputoutput model with dead-time that provides a structuraly adequate description. open-loop experiments were conducted in order to determine the model parameters. the parameters were estimated by fitting to the measured data using matlab (see fig.8). ty ≡ ]10,0[∈ yu → fig.7 the laboratory system for testing 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 0 10 20 30 40 5 tim e (m in) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 fig.8 identification of the process model 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 tim e (m in) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 40 fig.9 simulation test of the p-pid controller mv water tin f t < heating pc < open close adam-5000 lan u 87 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 4 tim e (m in) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 4 tim e (m in) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 fig.10 simulation test of the anti wind-up pid controller fig.12 physical test of the p-pid controller 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 4 tim e (m in) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), c on tro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 4 tim e (m in) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 fig.11 simulation test of the c-pid controller fig.13 physical test of the anti wind-up pid controller the c-pid algorithm was compared to a standard ppid algorithm as well as to an anti wind-up pid algorithm used in an industrial plc. the pid parameters are determined in each cases by the direct synthesis method based on the identified process model. in the simulation studies the mathematical model of the heater system was the process. the studies presents servo problems, however the load disturnbance compensation studies qualitatively showed similar results. simulation tests are illustrated on fig.9-11. fig.9 shows well that in those time periods when the control output approaches its physical limits, significant overshoots can be observed after changing the setpoint. overshoots can be considerably reduced by applying an anti wind-up compensator (see fig.10). fig.11 justifies that the c-pid algorithm completely eliminates the overshoot. 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 time (m in) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 40 fig.14 physical test of the c-pid controller the same tests were conducted on the laboratory physical system. the results are given on fig.12-14. the physical experiments illustrates well the effect of measurement noises, still the relation of the different methods is the same in case of the physical tests as it was shown in the simulation studies. conclusions in industrial applications several versions of pid controllers can be found. because of the physical constraints on the control output only those supplemented with anti reset wind-up compensators can follow setpoint changes without overshoots. significant overshoots can involve safety risk especially in control of batch systems. the paper presents the so called c 88 pid algorithm which takes the physical constraints into account and provides settlings practically without overshoots. the algorithm does not make the standard pid algorithm more complex and it can be readily implemented in dcs’s. for the c-pid design, considering the potential capacity of pid algorithms, it is practical to describe the object as a second order process with dead-time. in case of systems with large dead-times the use of a smith predictor is suggested that does not limit the applicability of c-pid. acknowledgement this project has been financially supported in part by the chemical engineering institute cooperative research center, iii-2 project. references 1. luyben, w. l.: effect of derivative algorithm and tuning selection on the pid control of dead-time processes, ind. eng. chem. res., 2001, 40, 36053611. 2. bódizs á.: study of model predictive control (in hungarian), ph.d. theses, veszprém, 1998. 3. seeborg, d. e., edgar, t. f., mellichamp, d. a.: process dynamics and control, wiley, new york, 1989. 4. lipták, b. g. (ed.): instrument engineers' handbook. process control, 3rd ed., chilton book c., radnor, pe, 1995. 5. nagy, l.: simulation and control of batch reactors, ph.d. theses, veszprém, 2005. 6. madar, j., abonyi, j., szeifert, f: feedback linearizing control using hybrid neural networks identified by sensitivity approach, eng. appl. of artificial intelligence, 2005, 18, 343-351. 7. szeifert, f., nagy, l., chován, t., abonyi, j.: constrained inverse model-based control (in preparation). 8. bódizs á., szeifert f., chován t.: convolution model based predictive controller for nonlinear process, ind. eng. chem. res., 1999, 38, 154-161. microsoft word 01_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 35. pp. 39-45 (2007) thermal cracking of recycled hydrocarbon gas-mixtures with high olefins concentrations in the feed: operational analysis of industrial furnaces 1t. gál, 2b. g. lakatos 1mol-tisza chemical works co. ltd (tvk), tiszaújváros, hungary 2university of pannonia, institute of chemical and process engineering, department of process engineering, veszprém, hungary simulation studies of thermal cracking of recycled hydrocarbon gas mixtures are presented. due to their relatively high unsaturated content these types of mixtures show behaviour in cracking furnaces different from that of their saturated homologues. the detailed mathematical and kinetic model developed was validated by using the process control laboratory cracked gas analysis of an industrially operated cracking furnace. the effects of different feed compositions and those of operating parameters are also examined. it is shown that the radiant coil temperature profile, online operation period of the furnace, and the yield of the main products are different at various unsaturated concentrations in the feed. the influence of the radiant section residence time is also presented. simulation results compared with the experimentally measured data of an industrially operated cracking furnace show good agreements. keywords: pyrolysis, hydrocarbons, gas-mixtures, olefins, modelling, simulation introduction thermal decomposition of hydrocarbons has been studied for more than 70 years. nevertheless, less attention has been paid on cracking behaviour of olefins since recycling of certain cracked gas-fractions has become important only in past one-two decades. while repyrolysis of formed ethane and propane has been applied for long, recycling of c4 and/or c5 fractions has only been introduced into industrial experience parallel with decreased market demand for plastics produced from butadiene and isoprene. sundaram and froment [1-3] developed kinetic models for thermal decomposition of gaseous hydrocarbons and their mixtures. kinetic parameters presented in these schemes are still applicable for thermal cracking of individual hydrocarbons and mixtures up to c4. van damme et al. [4] and froment et al. [5] compared the results given by their kinetic model with those obtained from industrial applications. ranzi et al. [6], froment et al. [7] and dente et al. [8, 9] presented the initial product distribution when cracking light hydrocarbons and prepared the first fundamental pyrolysis simulation model, the spyro. willems and froment [10] presented a method of calculation of frequency factors and activeation energies, while dente and ranzi [11] prepared a mathematical model for hydrocarbon pyrolysis reactions. more recently, poutsma [12], savage [13], sadrameli and green [14] presented the system of fundamental free radical reaction relevant to pyrolysis and mechanisms and kinetic modelling systems for hydrocarbon pyrolysis, respectively. zou et al., [15], pleiers et al. [16] and kopinke et al. [17,18] studied and presented coke formation rates that influence the online operation period of cracking furnaces. the mentioned c4/c5 fractions are hydrogenated upstream the cracking furnaces. olefin content of hydrogenation reactor effluent mainly depends on its catalyst performance and can vary between 3 and 30%. yet, unsaturated ratio of the furnace feed can also be reduced by mixing fresh, saturated hydrocarbons into reactor effluent. these are mainly butanes and/or pentanes in practice but, according to our simulation results, mixing of ethane also looks to be a promising alternative. this paper examines the effects of unsaturated components in the feed on product yields and online operation period of the furnace aiming the opportunities of harmonizing the operating parameters at different feed compositions. results obtained by numerical experimentation using a computer model are compared with experimentally measured data of an industrially operated cracking furnace. 40 mathematical model the kinetic model starting from the detailed composition of fed hydrocarbons and cracked gases a reaction network was built up with participation of all theoretically supposed ones in the first step of modelling, number of which was closely five hundred. as the second step, kinetic parameters were assigned to each reaction, source of which was the large amount of published literature data. if the published system was found to have been similar to the one examined by us, these parameters could be directly adopted [2, 3, 7]. in cases different from that, parameters were collected from other sources then interpolated or extrapolated on basis of analogy rules between the reactions in the same group [1, 4-6, 8, 9-15]. of course, a comparison was made in the first case as well. the aim of these two steps was to build up a ‘first generation’ kinetic model that could reproduce measured yield data as accurate as possible. validation of the model was performed by comparing the results with those obtained experimentally from cracked gas analysis of an industrially operated furnace. this means that a set of multiply verified data, among stabilized operational circumstances, were collected in concert with the sampling schedule and procedure. received yield data were not averaged but those in coincidence were taken as reference. secondly, influence of each reaction to the yield-structure was examined. effect of those to the yield structure was negligible could be deleted from the system with simplification purposes and for the reasons mentioned earlier. having performed these procedures, 239 reactions remained in the examined system, kinetic parameters of which were fitted to the measured yield data in case of each reaction, except those leading to coke formation (coke ‘yield’ could not be measured). the fitting was performed in such a way that the trend of a product yield or consumption of a feed component was drawn as a function of modification of parameters (a or e). table 1 presents a part of arrangement of frequency factors from different sources together with the adopted ones in the first phase of modelling and with the ones fitted during validation of the model. fig. 1 shows an example of fitting the activation energies to experimentally measured yields at reactions of the prepared network. table 1: assigning frequency factors (a, sec-1 or cm3*mol-1*sec-1) to reactions in the system reaction literature data sources adopted fitted c3h8 → ch3* + c2h5* 7.1·10 16c 2·1016 h 1.3·1016j --3·1016 2.2·1016 n-c4h10 → 2 c2h5* 5·10 16 c 1.5·1016h ----2·1016 2.5·1016 c3h8 + ch3* → ch4 + 1(2)-c3h7* 1.5·10 9c 3.4·1010 (4·109) h 108 i 4.9·109 (1.5·109)j 1.5·109 (3·109) 2.2·109 (4.2·109) 1-c3h7* → c2h4 + ch3* 5·10 13 c 4·1013 h 5·1013 k 1014 i 5·1013 4.4·1013 ch3* + c2h5* → c3h8 10 10 c 3.2·109h ----5·109 3.2·1010 sources in table 1 are indicated as follows: c – dente and ranzi (1983); d – zdenek et al. (2003); h – sundaram and froment (1978); i – ranzi et al. (1997), j – willems and froment (1988); k – ranzi et al. (1983) 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 8,4 25,1 39,8 53,6 62,8 75,4 87,9 125,6 e (kj/mol) m et ha ne y ie ld (w t% ) 18.43% figure 1: variation of methane yield as a function of activation energy in case of reaction: c2h4 + ch3* = c2h3* + ch4 the reactor model the geometry of the furnace coil and high reynoldsnumbers used in thermal decomposition process enable tubular reactor and plug-flow assumptions. as a consequence, mass, energy and momentum balances can be written as follows [19]. mass balance: rc n k i kki i nkni x txc vtr t txc r →=→= ∂ ∂ −= ∂ ∂ ∑ = 1,1 ),( ),( ),( 1 cα (1) where ci is the concentration of reactant i, x is the axial distance along the reactor, v denotes the cracked gas convective velocity, rk is the rate of the reaction k, and αki stands for the stoichiometric coefficient of component i in the reaction k. nc denotes the number of species, while nr stands for the number of reactions. 41 enthalpy balance: [ ]),(),( ),()( ),( 1 11 txttu x txt ccv trh t txt cc fb n i ipi n k kk n i ipi c rc −+ ∂ ∂ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ − −−= ∂ ∂ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∑ ∑∑ = == cδ (2) where t is the cracked gas temperature, cpi is the heat capacity of species i, δhk denotes the heat of reaction k, u denotes the overall heat transfer coefficient from the fire box to the cracked gas, dt is the inner diameter of the reactor tube, and tfb stands for the temperature of fire box. the pressure drop along the radiant pipe: 2 )( 144 2v x gd l f dx dp t t ρξ ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ += (3) where p denotes the pressure, ρ is the density of gas mixture, lt the equivalent pipe length, g is acceleration due to gravity, ξ(x) is the local resistance coefficient of reactor tube junctions or bends, and f denotes the friction factor which is calculated using the expression for smooth pipes: 25.0 3164.0 re f = (4) the balance equations are solved subject to boundary and initial conditions: )0()0,(,1)()0,( 00 txtnixcxc cii =→== (5) )(),0(,1)(),0( . ttttnitctc incinii =→== (6) the computer model the reference furnace consists of a radiant and a conection section, as well as of six transfer line exchangers (tle) with one steam drum. firing in radiant section is performed by sidewall and floor burners where natural gas is burnt which is also mixed with the methane fraction formed in cracking process. preheating of feed and dilution steam as well as preheating and super-eating of high-pressure steam takes place in convection section. between the feed preheater and steam super-heater a boiler-feed-water preheater is placed. the furnace was designed to assure uniform distribution and ‘drive’ of different streams to convection-section heat-exchanger bundles. furnace feed streams are collected in two places and distributed into 96 radiant coils by laval-nozzles. after a certain length two small-diameter (39 mm) coils unify in a bigger one (57 mm). according to this, the furnace contains 48 radiant coils connected to one tle by eight as it shown in fig. 2. the residence time of reaction mixture in the radiant section is very short (0.3 sec.). having identified the kinetic parameters, simulations were performed by chemcad computer simulator that was chosen for its large thermochemical database as well as for the fact that not only molecules but radicals can also be created and handled. as a further part of its implementation, geometrical data were given according to the technical drawings of the examined industrial furnace. data input of parameters and process-variables were also performed on basis of industrial circumstances. figure 2: radiant coil arrangement so as to determine composition of cracked gases at the furnace outlet the following input data are needed: a.) feed composition by component and its flow-rate b.) inlet and outlet temperatures (cot) of the furnace c.) pressures at inlet and outlet (to calculate pressuredrop along the coil) d.) hydrocarbon/dilution steam ratio and steam flow-rate e.) coil geometry, i.e. the lengths and internal diameters of segments f.) temperature-profile along the coil or heat-transfer coefficient (u), with tube metal temperature (tmt) g.) each chemical reaction taking place in the system with their kinetic parameters (activation energies and frequency-factors, respectively) operating parameters of the furnace (points a – d), such as temperatures, pressures, flow rates are monitored by an advanced process control system (apc) and they can be registered in accordance with feedand cracked gas analysis [20]. the factor of losses depends on convectional circumstances dominant in the pipe (re-number) and its shape. according to this, the total pipe length (point e) is the sum of straight segments and the equivalent pipe length. table 2 presents comparison of measured and simulated yield data with fitted kinetic parameters. 42 experimental: application and presentation of simulated results having validated the model, series of simulations were performed with the purpose of examining the effect of different feed components on product yields. some typical feed compositions are shown in table 3. the influence of the n-butane concentration is shown in table 4. as it is seen, 28% higher n-butane concentration is needed to achieve 4% increased ethylene yield but the relative coke formation rate was decreased by almost 25%. this decline is also due to the lower relative concentration of olefins in the feed, i.e. because of less coke precursors. neither the yield of methane nor that of propylene varies significantly but less aromatic compounds (bt) are produced. in conclusion, when increased olefin content occurs in the feed adding more butane into it appears to be economically reasonable since higher furnace run-length can be reached in parallel with the possible decreased hydrogenation reactor load that also leads to depression of olefin content in the feed. table 2: comparison of the measured and simulated product yields with fitted kinetic parameters component/ yields (wt %) measured 1 fitted 1 measured 2 fitted 2 measured 3 fitted 3 hydrogen 1.06 0.98 1.05 0.98 0.98 0.96 co 0.10 0.11 0.06 0.07 0.05 0.07 methane 18.72 18.67 18.53 18.64 18.27 18.52 ethane 3.39 3.34 3.56 3.51 3.63 3.53 ethylene 30.64 30.58 31.13 31.08 32.30 32.17 propylene 19.51 19.64 19.54 19.61 19.26 19.37 n-butane 8.50 8.58 8.57 8.63 10.08 9.87 acetylene 0.51 0.55 0.51 0.56 0.50 0.49 benzene 1.34 1.36 1.34 1.36 1.33 1.30 toluene 0.22 0.25 0.22 0.25 0.22 0.25 table 3: some typical compositions of the furnace feed component (wt%) sample 1 sample 2 sample 3 sample 4 sample 5 propane 0,8937 0,3251 0,1462 0,4315 0,0880 propylene 0,7019 0,9518 0,1881 0,9308 0,3292 i-butane 12,5453 8,6917 6,5118 6,9339 5,2723 1-butene 0,8193 0,0716 0,1484 0,0891 0,0891 n-butane 61,9166 69,5411 67,6253 72,1629 63,9667 2-butene 2,4412 0,3452 0,3934 0,3899 0,4321 i-pentane 4,9792 6,4142 8,4320 5,9221 9,4355 2m-butene-1 0,2211 0 0,0655 0,0473 0,0843 n-pentane 5,8455 7,0751 8,2326 6,3494 10,8684 2-pentene 0,2306 0 0 0 0 2m-butene-2 1,7299 0,4041 0,5704 0,4425 0,7475 cyclopentene 0,0874 0 0 0 0,0735 cyclopentane 5,9247 5,4214 6,7055 5,7778 7,7222 2m-pentane 0,5752 0,6778 0,6036 0,4434 0,8912 ∑ other c6 1,0885 0,0808 0,3773 0,0794 0 table 4: variation of product yields as a function of n-butane concentration in the feed n-butane conc., wt%→ product yields, wt% ↓ 65.95 simulated 65.95 measured 72.35 simulated 72.35 measured 79.55 simulated 79.55 measured 86.71 simulated 93.89 simulated hydrogen 0.88 0.92 0.89 0.94 0.91 0.99 0.95 0.98 methane 18.54 18.71 18.14 19.32 18.11 19.18 18.02 17.96 ethylene 30.58 30.61 31.02 31.21 32.21 32.42 33.43 34.43 propylene 19.34 19.74 19.28 19.53 19.16 19.34 19.09 19.01 n-butane (residual) 8.92 8.77 9.28 9.17 9.75 9.68 10.07 10.38 benzene + toluene 1.78 1.73 1.61 1.58 1.41 1.37 1.28 1.19 coke (theoretical) 0.0087 -----0.0084 -----0.0081 -----0.0075 0.0069 further simulations were carried out at five different unsaturated concentrations in such a way that concentration of each component in the feed was varied proportionally. rest of independent variables (cot, st/hc) was kept constant. simulated results are presented in fig. 3. as fig. 3 shows, trend of methane yield and that of propylene shows a linear decline with a rising unsaturated rate. rising conversion of n-butane is only ‘virtual’ since its relative concentration in the feed also declines when the unsaturated concentration is higher. nevertheless, variation of ethylene yield shows a slightly rising trend which, for the first sight, looks to 43 be surprising. to find the explication, it was examined how the concentration of some key unsaturated feed components vary along the radiant coil. parallel with this, their kinetic route was also followed. variation of three feed components concentration, that are present in the highest amount in the feed, is shown in fig. 4. concentrations of 2m-butene-2, butane-1 and butane-2 are the most elevated in the feed so their kinetic routes were examined. all of them take part in chain-initiation, hydrogen-abstraction, chain-forwarding and recombination reactions [3] 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 0 2,83 5,51 10,51 15,27 olefins in the feed, w/w% pr od uc t y ie ld s, w /w % methane ethylene propylene n-butane coke*1000 figure 3: variation of product yields as a function of olefin concentration in the feed 0 0,01 0,02 0,03 0,04 0,05 0,06 0 2,8 26 5 5,6 52 9 8,4 79 4 11 ,30 6 14 ,13 2 16 ,95 9 19 ,78 5 22 ,61 2 25 ,43 8 28 ,26 5 31 ,09 1 33 ,91 7 36 ,74 4 39 ,57 42 ,39 7 reactor volume, liter m as s fr ac tio n 2m-burene-2 butene-1 butene-2 figure 4: variation of some olefins concentration along the radiant coil fig. 5 shows the temperature profiles in the first part of the radiant coil revealing the differences between those in case of cracking a c3-c6 mixture in a furnace with short residence time (0.3 sec) when the feed is free of olefins and when it contains 15% unsaturated components. this examination was initiated by some operational experiences observed in industrial plants according to which higher coke deposits were realized in the first part of radiant coil, causing a very short online operation time as well as cracking of coils in certain cases. the theoretical explication of this phenomenon is that unlike saturated hydrocarbons, all the olefins and diolefins contribute more to coke deposits in the first part of cracking coil. this is more pronounced the higher the reactivity of the component is. it is a question of profitability to operate the furnace at the lowest possible steam/hydrocarbon ratio since a lower steam rate reduces specific energy consumption of the production unit. basically, one thing has to be decided: up to what extent this ratio can be reduced without having a significant negative effect on product yields and on furnace online period. table 5 shows that reducing the ratio by 20% practically has no influence on product yields but a shorter runtime can be expected because of higher coke formation rate. 0 0,002 0,004 0,006 0,008 0,01 0,012 0,014 0,016 0,018 0,02 0 3, 53 31 7, 06 61 10 ,59 9 14 ,13 2 17 ,66 5 21 ,19 8 24 ,73 2 28 ,26 5 31 ,79 8 35 ,33 1 38 ,86 4 42 ,39 7 reactor volume, liter c ok e, w t% 0% unsaturated 15% unsaturated figure 5: formation rate of coke along the radiant coil fig. 6 shows the variation of formation rates of some undesired products, such as co, coke and acetylenes along the radiant coil. as it is seen, formation of mapd starts first and rate of coke formation increases exponentially at the last part of reactor pipe. 0 0,001 0,002 0,003 0,004 0,005 0,006 0 2,4 1 9,2 7,2 4 18 ,8 12 ,1 28 ,6 16 ,9 37 ,4 21 ,7 42 ,4 reactor volume, liter y ie ld s of s ec on da ry pr od uc ts , w /w % co coke acetylene mapd figure 6: variation of formation rates of some undesired products along the radiant coil it should be noted that the effects of the dilution steam reduction cannot be simulated with high accuracy since catalytic effect of tube metals are not described by any known kinetics. though the literature survey [1518] shows a clear classification of coke precursors (such as olefins, acetylenes and aromatics) but there are no detailed discussions on dilution steam effect. nevertheless, practical experience also confirms the data shown in table 5. 44 table 5: simulation at different steam/hydrocarbon ratios steam reduced by...% temperature (cot), ºc → product yields, wt% 5 835 5 840 10 835 10 840 15 835 15 840 20 835 20 840 methane 18.22 18.75 18.32 18.72 18.43 18.83 18.53 19.06 ethylene 32.22 33.73 32.07 33.18 31.92 33.07 31.78 33.25 propylene 20.63 20.15 20.68 20.34 20.74 20.38 20.79 20.32 butadiene 3.97 3.85 3.97 3.89 3.98 3.89 3.98 3.86 n-butane (residual) 8.74 7.58 8.72 7.88 8.70 7.82 8.68 7.56 benzene + toluene 1.61 1.63 1.71 1.64 1.75 1.66 1.81 1.69 coke 0.016 0.019 0.017 0.018 0.017 0.018 0.018 0.019 according to the daily operational experience, for the relatively high unsaturated-content of the feed, online operation period of the furnace became shorter than the designed value, especially at the end of radiant coil lifetime. this is mainly due to the higher coke formation rate, which is caused by the elevated olefin content (coke precursors) in the feed and by those formed during the decomposition process. for these reasons, further alternatives were searched for to process the mixture in question more efficiently. simulations with variation of radiant coil geometry, i.e. alteration of residence time were carried out to compare yield data and coke formation rate. geometrical data of two existing furnaces (cf2 and cf3) were taken as reference so that the calculated residence times could be in real domain, i.e. 0.65 sec and 1.1 sec, respectively. it was supposed that a higher key-conversion and a higher ethylene yield could be reached, parallel with a reduced coke formation rate, when cracking these mixtures in furnaces with longer residence time. simulations at similar feed compositions, total olefin content of which was 15.27%, were carried out with three values of cot and yield data were compared with those obtained from reference furnace. st/hc ratio was adjusted similarly in all three furnaces. results are shown in fig. 7. as it was expected, a higher conversion of n-butane could be achieved both in cf2 and cf3 furnace than in the reference (cf1) furnace. yield of ethylene is by 7% higher in cf2 and by 11.1% in cf3 at same cot. though the coke formation rate is much bigger in both furnaces, by 21% and 32% respectively, this quantity of coke will be deposed on a five times higher surface in cf2 and on a ten times higher one in cf3. taking into consideration the differences in residence times as well, it can be concluded that a 35-40% longer online operation period is expectable in case of both cf2 and cf3. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 p ro d u ct y ie ld s, m /m % cf1 cf2 cf3 cf1 cf2 cf3 cf1 cf2 cf3 n-butane propylene ethylene cot=83 cot=840 cot=845 figure 7: yield comparison at furnaces with different residence time conclusions when thermal cracking of recycled hydrocarbon gas mixtures occurs in industrial furnaces, the feedstock contains a relatively large amount of unsaturated components such as olefins and diolefins, a special attention has to be paid on coke formation since these compounds are coke precursors. the simulation study, carried out by means a computer model developed for examining thermal cracking of recycled gas mixtures, confirmed that variation opportunities originating from very different feed compositions can be harmonized well with operating parameters of the furnaces, with the purpose of achieving a maximum profitability. as it was shown, coke formation rate can significantly be reduced by decreasing olefin content of the feed. this can be done by mixing fresh hydrocarbons into the recycled streams like ethane and/or n-butane. according to industrial practice, recycled ethane is always available and n-butane is also worth to be purchased for this purpose. in conclusion, recycled streams cracking in 45 furnaces with longer residence time looks to be a good alternative for olefin producers. of course, the hydrogenation reactor upstream the cracking furnace as well as its catalyst has a main role in this complex process. nomenclature δhk – heat of reaction k [j/mol] a – surface area per unit axial distance [m2] ci – concentration of reactant i [mol/m 3] cpi – heat capacity of species i [j/kg/k] d – diameter of pipe/fitting [m] ƒ – friction factor [-] gc – acceleration of gravity [m/s 2] l – equivalent pipe length [m] nc – number of species nr – number of reactions rk – rate of the reaction k [mol/m 3/s] t – temperature of cracked gas [k] t – time [s] t – mean residence time [s] tfb – temperature of firebox [k] u – overall heat transfer coefficient from the firebox to cracked gases [w/m2/k] v – convective velocity of cracked gas [m/s] x – axial distance along the reactor [m] αki – stoichiometric coefficient of component i in the reaction k δp – pressure drop [mpa] ρ – density of cracked gas [kg/m3] acknowledgement support provided by tvk olefin unit operational and laboratory staff is gratefully acknowledged. references 1. sundaram k. m., froment g. f.: chemical engineering science, 1977, 32, 601-608 2. sundaram k. m., froment g. f.: chemical engineering science, 1977, 32, 609-617 3. sundaram k. m., froment g. f.: industrial engineering chemistry fundam., 1978, 17, 174-182 4. van damme p. s., narayanan s., froment g. f.: aiche journal, 1975, 21 1065-1072 5. froment g. f., van de steene b. o., van damme p. s., narayanan s., goossens a. g.: industrial engineering chemistry proc. des. dev. 1976, 15, 495-504 6. ranzi e., dente m., pierucci s., biardi g.: industrial engineering chemistry fundam., 1983, 22, 132-139 7. froment g. f., van de steene b. o., vanden berghe p. j.? aiche journal, 1977, 23, 93-105 8. dente m. e., ranzi e. m., barendregt s., goossens a. g.: radical reaction mechanisms in the pyrolysis of light hydrocarbons. aiche-meeting 1979 9. dente m. e., ranzi e. m., goossens a. g.: computers chemical engineering, 1979, 3, 61-75 10. willems p. a., froment g. f.: industrial engineering chemistry research, 1988, 27, 19591971 11. dente m. e., ranzi e. m.: mathematical modelling of hydrocarbon pyrolysis reactions. academic press, 1983 12. poutsma m. l.: journal of analytical and applied pyrolysis, 2000, 54, 5-35 13. savage p. e. journal of analytical and applied pyrolysis, 2000, 54, 109-126 14. sadrameli s. m., green a. e. s.: journal of analytical and applied pyrolysis, 2005, 73, 305-313 15. zou renjun, lou qiangkun, liu huicai, niu fenghui: industrial engineering chemistry research, 1987, 26, 2528-2532 16. plehiers p. m., reyniers g. c., froment g. f.: industrial engineering chemistry research, 1990, 29, 636-641 17. kopinke f-d., zimmermann g., reyniers g. c., froment, g. f.: industrial engineering chemistry research, 1993, 32, 56-61 18. kopinke f-d., zimmermann g., reyniers g. c., froment, g. f.: industrial engineering chemistry research, 1993, 32, 2620-2625 19. gál t., lakatos b. g.: applied thermal engineering, 2008, 28, 218-225 20. gál t., lakatos b. g.: chemical engineering and processing: process intensification, 2008, 47, 603612 microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 37(2) pp. 159-164 (2009) mathematical modeling of diafiltration z. kovács1 , m. fikar2, p. czermak1,3 1institute of biopharmaceutical technology, university of applied sciences, giessen-friedberg, giessen, germany e-mail: kovacs.zoltan@tg.fh-giessen.de 2department of information engineering and process control fcft, slovak university of technology, slovakia 3department of chemical engineering, kansas state university, manhattan, kansas, usa the main objective of this study is to provide a general mathematical model in a compact form for batch diafiltration techniques. the presented mathematical framework gives a rich representation of diafiltration processes due to the employment of concentration-dependent solute rejections. it unifies the existing models for constant-volume dilution mode, variable-volume dilution mode, and concentration mode operations. the use of such a mathematical framework allows the optimization of the overall diafiltration process. the provided methodology is particularly applicable for decision makers to choose an appropriate diafiltration technique for the given separation design problem. keywords: membrane separations, diafiltration, mathematical modeling, optimization introduction the objective of industrial purification processes is usually dual: (1) to separate certain solutes from the process liquor and (2) to concentrate the purified solution in order to obtain a final product. in this work we examine a batch diafiltration process that is designed to fulfill these objectives simultaneously. in the following we consider a binary aqueous solution consisting of two solutes, namely a macrosolute and a microsolute. diafiltration is known as a conventional process technique to achieve high purification of macrosolutes with an economically acceptable flux [1]. the requirement for an effective separation is the utilization of a membrane which has a high rejection for the macrosolute and a low rejection for the microsolute. the terms macrosolute and microsolute are widely-used in the literature dealing with membrane diafiltration. in order to eliminate ambiguity, we would like to point out, that the separation is not necessarily based on solely size exclusion as it might be suggested by this nomenclature. membrane filtration also allows separation of solutes of similar molecular weights but having different charges as reported in many studies, for example in [2, 3]. there have been many published works on batch diafiltration. however, there is no exact and uniform definition for the term diafiltration. indeed, the terminology currently being used is somewhat conflicting. in this paper, we use the term diafiltration in its broad sense referring to the actual technological goal. thus, diafiltration is a membrane-assisted process that can be used to achieve the twin-objectives of concentrating a solution of a macrosolute, and removing a microsolute by the utilization of a diluant. in this context, batch diafiltration is a complex process that may involve a sequence of consecutive operational steps. we consider three frequently used operational modes. these are the concentration mode (c), the constant-volume dilution mode (cvd), and the variable-volume dilution mode (vvd). they differ from each other in the utilization of wash-water as it is discussed in more details later in this paper. note that an operation mode does operate with fixed operational settings. a diafiltration process, in contrast, is usually constructed by changing the settings of wash-water addition (i.e. switching to another operational mode) according to a pre-defined schedule. in the following, we examine two frequently used diafiltration techniques: the traditional diafiltration (td) and the pre-concentration combined with variablevolume dilution (pvvd). the most commonly used concept of diafiltration is the td process that involves three consecutive steps (i.e. operational modes). first, a pre-concentration is used to reduce the fluid volume and remove some of the microsolute. then, a constant-volume dilution step is employed to “wash out” the micro-solute by adding a washing solution (e.g. diluant) into the system at a rate equal to the permeate flow rate. thus, the volume of the solution in the feed tank is kept constant during this operational mode. finally, a post-concentration is used to obtain the final volume and concentrate the macrosolute to the final concentration due to the specific technological demands. the vvd is an operation mode in which fresh water is continuously added to the feed tank at a rate that is proportional but less than the permeate flow. this causes a simultaneous concentration of macrosolute and removal 160 of microsolute. this operation has been proposed by jaffrin and charrier [4], analyzed in some detail by tekić et. al and krstić et. al [5, 6], and recently revised by foley [7]. a modification of vvd is pvvd, i.e., a two step process in which the solution is first preconcentrated to an intermediate macrosolute concentration and then subjected to vvd to reach the final desired concentrations of both solutes. this concept is credited to foley [8]. several studies have examined the different types of diafiltration techniques in terms of process time and wash-water requirement [1, 4-11]. however, only a few works have considered concentration-dependent rejections in the optimization procedure [12]. assuming constant rejections might lead to inaccurate simulation and subsequent optimization results under conditions where the rejections of solutes are strongly vary depending on their feed concentrations and a considerably interdependence in their permeation occurs. in this work, we attempt to enlarge our perspective on how engineers in general should cope with the complexity of a diafiltration design problem. we present a general mathematical model in a compact form for batch diafiltration techniques. from this perspective we discuss the model limitations when simplifying assumptions on solute rejections are being used. we consider a common separation objective and through a specific example we demonstrate the power of the presented modeling methodology. finally, we present some specific ideas of how optimization should support decision makers in finding the best wash-water utilizing profile for the given engineering design problem. theory configuration of diafiltration the schematic representation of membrane diafiltration setting is shown in fig. 1. figure 1: schematic representation of diafiltration settings in a batch operation, the retentate stream is recirculated to the feed tank, and the permeate stream q(t) is collected separately. during the operation, fresh solute-free diluant stream u(t) (i.e. wash-water) can be added into the feed tank to replace solvent losses. general mathematical framework in this section we derive the governing differential equations for diafiltration. the proportionality factor α(t) is defined as the ratio of diluant flow u(t) to permeate flow q(t): )( )( )( tq tu t =α (1) where the diluant flow u(t) is given as a product of the membrane area a and the permeate flux j(t). the change in the volume in the permeate tank vp is given by the permeate volumetric flow-rate q: )( )( tq dt tdv p = (2) the change in the feed volume during the operation is given as )()( )( tqtu dt tdv f −= (3) considering two solutes and assuming that the diluant consists of no solutes, the mass balance for the solute concentrations yields 2,1)()()()( ,, =−= itctqtctvdt d ipiff (4) where cp,i(t) denotes the permeate concentration of solute i at time t. equation (4) can be rewritten in the following way: 2,1)()( )( )()( )( , , , =−=+ itctqdt tdc tvtc dt tdv ip if fif f using eq.(3) and recalling that cp,i(t) = cf,i(t)(1–ri(t)), where ri(t) is the rejection of solute i at time t, we obtain, for i = 1, 2, ... [ ])()()()( )( )( , , tutrtqtc dt tdc tv iif if f −= thus, we have the following initial-value problems: ⎪ ⎩ ⎪ ⎨ ⎧ = −= 0)0( )()( )( ff f vv tqtu tdt dv (5) and, for i = 1, 2, ... [ ] ⎪ ⎩ ⎪ ⎨ ⎧ = −= 0 ,, , , )0( )()()()( )( )( ifif iif if f cc tutrtqtc dt tdc tv (6) which describe the evolution in time of the volume in the feed tank vf and of the feed concentration cf,i. vf 0 and cf 0 ,i denote respectively the initial feed volume and the initial feed concentration of the solute i. in the next two sections, we briefly describe discuss the possible strategies to determine flux and rejection. 161 later we formulate an optimization problem that represents a frequent industrial separation flask. then, to examine and compare the td and pvvd processes, we make a use of the filtration data from our earlier work [14]. rejection and permeate flow the separation behaviour of the membrane can be characterized in terms of permeate flux and solute rejections. the estimation of the flow q(t) and of the rejection ri(t) can be carried out separately using the most convenient approach for the problem at hand. possible strategies to determine flux and rejection are presented in our previous study [13]. in brief, either mechanism-driven or data-driven models can be employed. mechanism-driven models are based on a physical understanding of the transport phenomenon. in contrast with that, data-driven models make a direct use of the experimental data obtained from filtration tests with the process liquor. the main challenges in employing a data-driven model are the minimization of necessary a-priori experiments and the conversion of raw data into useful information. in this study, we consider the following empirical relations which were reported earlier in [14]: 1,62,5 2 2,4 )( 32,2 2 2,1 )( fff cscscs ff escscsq ++ ++= (7) )()( 42,31,22,11 zczczczr fff +++= (8) 1,62,5 2 2,4 )( 32,2 2 2,12 )( fff cwcwcw ff ewcwcwr ++ ++= (9) where s1, ..., s6, z1, ..., z4, w1, ..., w6 are suitable coefficients that were previously determined from laboratory experiments with the test solution as described later. special cases and analytical solutions the complexity of the modelling problem originates from the fact that in most of the membrane filtration processes the solute rejections are concentrationdependent quantities. since the concentrations are due to change while processing the feed, the rejections of both microsolute and macrosolute are affected by the extent to which the microsolute concentration is reduced and also to which the macrosolute is concentrated. analogously, the permeate flux also depends on the actual feed concentration of both components. in general, the model equations require numerical techniques to solve them, since no closed form solutions exist. however, when the effect of the feed concentrations on the rejections is neglected, then a constant rejection coefficient σ can be introduced such that ri(t) = σi = constant for i = 1, 2. when introducing this simplifying assumption on the rejections, the differential equations can be reduced to simple algebraic equations, the resulting exact solutions are reviewed below: 1. concentration mode: since no diluant is applied, u(t) = 0 and cd,i = 0. the concentration of component i at the end of the operation is given by (10) where the expression )( )0( ff f tv v is by definition the concentration factor n. 2. constant-volume dilution mode: the solute free diluant is continuously added to the feed tank in a rate equal to the permeate flow. thus, cd,i = 0 and u(t) = q(t). the component concentration is related to the total volume of wash-water vw can be written as )( )1( ,, )0()( ff iw tv v iffif ectc − = σ i = 1, 2, ... (11) where the expression )( ff w tv v is by definition the dilution factor d. 3. variable-volume dilution mode: solute-free washwater is added at a rate αq(t) , where α is a parameter with value 0 ≤ α ≤ 1. assuming that the permeate flux remains unchanged during the process, krstić et al. [6] gave the expression for the component balance: α ασ α − − ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ − − = 1 , , )0( )()1( 1 )0( )( i f fp if fif v tv c tc i =1, 2, ... (12) note, that the main pitfall of the commonly used modelling approaches is often the assumption of constant rejection coefficients. these simplifying assumptions can easily be misused when their appropriateness is not carefully checked for the given separation process. for instance, a typical rejection profile of an inorganic salt nanofiltration is illustrated in fig. 2. figure 2: rejection of the membrane desal-dk5 for nacl as a function of feed concentration (30 bar, 25 ºc, 0.55 m2 spiral-wound element, 1.0 m3h-1 recirculation flow-rate). solid line is for eye guidance 162 the complexity of the problem further increases in the presence of more than one solute, due to their interdependent permeation. optimization problem formulation we define the optimization problem as follows: minimize (j = cf,2(tf)) (13) such that tf ≤ 6 (14) n = 3. (15) thus, the objective of the separation is to reduce the concentration of component 2 in the final product as much as possible with the restriction that the total operation time should not exceed 6 hours and a total concentration factor 3 is achieved. in the case of td, the objective is to find the optimal set of variables of pre-concentration factor n1, dilution factor d, and post-concentration factor n2. in the case of pvvd, the optimal set of variables n1 and α is to be determined. note that the numerical values of the constraints in eqs. (14) and (15) are chosen according to the processing conditions and the specifications of our laboratory system. however, the concept itself can find a general interest. industrial problems can be handled in an analogous way, when the optimal operational parameters of an existing membrane plant with a defined membrane area are to be found. experimental in this study we use the filtration data from our earlier work [13]. these data serve as input for the mathematical analysis. the laboratory apparatus, applied chemicals, and sample analysis have been described in details earlier. in brief, nanofiltration experiments were carried out with the membrane desal-dk5 separating a binary aqueous solution at constant temperature and pressure. the process liqueur was a test system consisting of sucrose (hereafter called component 1) and sodium chloride (component 2). a limited number of a-priori experiments were used to determine the dependence of r and q on concentration. the resulting functions are reported in section “rejection and permeate flow”. results the dynamics of a diafiltration process can be evaluated by simultaneous solving of eqs. (5) and (6). considering a td process with a fixed pre-concentration factor n1, the post-concentration factor n2 is readily given with the use of the constraint on the total concentration factor as n2=n/n1. it is evident that longer dilution results in lower final microsolute concentration. thus, for each preconcentration factor, a maximal dilution factor can be found so that the given constraint on the total operation time is still satisfied. for instance, when the initial solution is pre-concentrated with a factor 2, then a maximal operational time for cvd can be calculated so that the total operation time including the postconcentration step does not exceed the given 6 hours. this example is illustrated in figs. 3a and 3b. figure 3: the estimated 6-hour time-course of the concentrations and the volumes of feed and permeate for a traditional diafiltration process with a preconcentration-factor of 2 the optimization problem of pvvd is analogous to td. here, an optimal α has to be found for each fixed n1 so that the objective function is minimized while satisfying the constraints. fig. 4 shows the calculated values of α for fixed n1 values. obviously, when n1=n, α must be 1 in order to satisfy the constraint on n. in both cases of td and pvvd, the respective operation parameters of d and α for a fixed n1 were found by applying iterative methods similar to as reported in [13]. the optimization results obtained by varying n1 stepwise form 1 to n are illustrated in figs. 5 and 6. 163 figure 4: optimized α values as a function of preconcentration factor for the pvvd process figure 5: optimization diagram for traditional diafiltration. final microsolute concentration (dashed line) and required wash-water volume (continuous line) are plotted versus pre-concentration factor figure 6: optimization diagram for diafiltration involving pre-concentration combined variable-volume dilution. final microsolute concentration (dashed line) and required wash-water volume (continuous line) are plotted versus pre-concentration factor when comparing the td and the pvvd processes, from the optimization diagrams shown in figs. 5 and 6, we can conclude that the best diafiltration strategy is a specific case when n1 = n and α = 1. in other words, the optimal strategy is to pre-concentrate the process liqueur to its minimum volume and then to apply a constant-volume dilution without a post-concentration step. we would like to draw attention to the fact that a great care is needed when interpreting and generalizing such finding. the here presented methodology for choosing an appropriate diafiltration technique is general in the sense that it can be readily adopted for different solute/membrane systems without the need of major changes in the provided procedure. however, the output of the optimization is unique for each application. the choice of td versus pvvd depends primary on 1. the response of the particular membrane to the specific solution that is expressed in terms of rejection ri and permeate flow q, 2. the terms involved in the objective function (i.e. the definition of the separation goal), 3. the involved constraints (technological demands) and their numerical values that need to be satisfied. any changes in these above listed specifications may modify the output of the optimization, and lead to a different optimal strategy of diafiltration. further optimization aspects it should be pointed out that the main difference between the various types of operational modes is due to the quantity and the duration of the diluant stream introduced in the feed tank during the entire operation. in this context, diafiltration techniques differ in their strategies for controlling the introduction of the diluant stream u(t). in the widely applied conventional diafiltration processes, such as td or pvvd, the trajectory of the control variable u(t) is arbitrarily predefined for the entire operational time. however, it may happen that the optimal time-dependent profile of the diluant flow is not among these arbitrarily constructed scenarios. the optimal control trajectory can be determined by formulating an optimization problem subject to process model described by differential equations. using a dynamic optimization solver called dynopt developed by čižniar et. al [15], we are currently developing a unified technology for water utilization control that addresses generality versus special cases. this approach is currently under investigation and will be published soon. conclusions we provide a methodology that is useful for the design of batch diafiltration processes. a general mathematical model in a compact form is presented. it unifies the existing models for constant-volume dilution mode, variable-volume dilution mode, and concentration mode operations. a rich representation of the separation process is given due to the employment of concentration 164 dependent solute rejections in the design equations. thus, a formal tool is provided for describing the engineering design that supports the disciplined use of data-driven and mechanism-driven permeation models. the use of such a mathematical framework allows the optimization of the overall diafiltration process. the provided methodology is particularly applicable for decision makers to choose an appropriate diafiltration technique for a given separation design problem. further research effort is directed at the dynamic optimization of diafiltration processes. acknowledgment this research is a cooperative effort. the first author would like to thank the hessen state ministry of higher education, research and the arts for the financial support within the hessen initiative for scientific and economic excellence (loewe-program). the second author acknowledges the support of the slovak research and development agency under the contract no. vv-0029-07. list of symbols a − membrane area (m2) c – concentration (mol m-3) d − dilution factor j − permeate flux (m h-1) n – concentration factor q – permeate flow-rate r – rejection t – operation time (h) u – diluant flow-rate (m3 h-1) x – state variables (mol m-3) v – volume greek symbols α – proportionality factor of diluant flow to permeate flow subscripts d – diluant f – feed i – component (i = 1 macro-solute, and i = 2 microsolute) p – permeate w − wash-water abbreviations c − concentration mode cvd – constant-volume dilution mode vvd – variable-volume dilution mode pvvd − diafiltration involving pre-concentration and variable-volume dilution mode td – traditional diafiltration references 1. wang x.-l., zhang c., ouyang p.: the possibility of separating saccharides from a nacl solution by using nanofiltration in diafiltration mode, j. membr. sci. 204 (2002), 271–281. 2. borbély g., nagy e.: removal of zinc and nickel ions by complexation-membrane filtration process from industrial wastewater, desalination 240 (2009), 218–226. 3. kovács z., samhaber w.: contribution of ph dependent osmotic pressure to amino acid transport through nanofiltration membranes, sep. purif. technol. 61 (2008), 243–248. 4. jaffrin m. y., charrier j. ph.: optimization of ultrafiltration and diafiltration processes for albumin production, j. membr. sci. 97 (1994), 71–81. 5. tekić m. n., krstić d. m., zavargò z. z., djurić m. s., ćirić g. m.: mathematical model of variable volume diafiltration, hung. j. indus. chem. 30 (2002), 211–214. 6. krstić d. m., tekić m. n., zavargò z. z., djurić m. s., ćirić g. m.: saving water in a volumedecreasing diafiltration process, desalination 165 (2004), 283–288. 7. foley g.: water usage in variable volume diafiltration: comparison with ultrafiltration and constant volume diafiltration, desalination 196 (2006), 160–163. 8. foley g.: ultrafiltration with variable volume diafiltration: a novel approach to water saving in diafiltration processes, desalination 199 (1-3) (2006), 220–221. 9. wang l., yang g., xing w., xu n.: mathematic model of the yield for diafiltration processes, sep. purif. technol. 59 (2008), 206–213. 10. van reis r, saksena s.: optimization diagram for membrane separations, j. membr. sci. 129 (1997), 19–29. 11. wallberg o., joensson a., wimmerstedt r.: fractionation and concentration of kraft black liquor lignin with ultrafiltration, desalination 154 (2003), 187–199 12. bowen w., mohammad a.: diafiltration by nanofiltration: prediction and optimization, aiche journal 44 (8) (1998) 1799–1812. 13. kovács z., discacciati m., samhaber w.: numerical simulation and optimization of multistep batch membrane processes, j. membr. sci. 324 (2008), 50–58. 14. kovács z., discacciati m., samhaber w.: modeling of batch and semi-batch membrane filtration processes, j. membr. sci. 327 (2009), 164–173. 15. čižniar m., fikar m., latifi m. a.: matlab dynamic optimisation code dynopt, tech. rep., bratislava, user’s guide, 2006. hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 33(1-2). pp. 89-96 (2005) robust model predictive control with state estimation for an industrial pressurizer system p. tamás, i. varga, g. szederkényi and j. bokor systems and control laboratory, computer and automation research institute, has, h-1518 budapest, p.o. box 63, hungary robust model predictive control of an industrial pressurizer is presented in this paper. the physical model of the system is based on first engineering principles and the model parameters have been previously identified from measured data. to satisfy the hard constraints on the state variables and the input even in the presence of disturbances, the so-called single policy robust model predictive control method is applied. the maximal admissible level set, the disturbance invariant set and the terminal sets are determined for the system. simulation results show that the proposed controller satisfies all the requirements and shows good timedomain behavior. keywords: process control, robust model predictive control, constrained control introduction recently, there has been a growing need for automation of increasingly complex plants in different branches of industry. fortunately, the improving quantity and quality of measurements and actuators allows us to apply an increasing variety of techniques in systems and control theory developed in the last few decades. this paper presents a robust model predictive control for an industrial pressurizer system used mainly for pressure control in a nuclear power plant. in [9] an advanced dynamic inversion-based pressure controller has been designed for the systems of this type. although this controller performs very well in practice, our aim is to further develop control performance. for this, a robust model predictive control approach is proposed in this paper that is able to handle the strict input and state constraints even if disturbance affects on the system. the dynamic model of the system system description the system discussed is a pressurized water reactor, which means that in the primary circuit high pressure ensures that the coolant is not boiling. the task of the pressurizer is to keep the pressure within a predefined range. from a modeling point of view, the pressurizer is a vertical tank and inside this tank there is hot water at a temperature of about 326°c and steam above. if the primary circuit pressure decreases, water might start to boil. in order to prevent this, electric heaters switch on automatically in the pressurizer. due to the heating there will be intense boiling, more steam will be generated and this leads to a pressure increase. if the increasing pressure in the pressurizer reaches a certain limit, firstly the heaters are turned off and then cold water is injected into the tank (if needed) to reduce the pressure down to the predefined range [7]. the heating power of the electric heaters can be set continuously. the measured outputs of the system are the pressure in the pressurizer and the temperature of the tank wall. the 90 controlled output is the pressure in the tank. the simplified flowsheet of the pressurizer is shown in fig. 1. yp10 s kg m s kg m .constm = 1χ 4χ3χ2χ [ ]kt i [ ]kt figure 1: simplified flowsheet of the pressurizer the physical model of the plant modeling of industrial systems depends heavily on the modelling goal. most of the commercially available dynamic models are implemented in simulators (see e.g. [1]) and are used for equipment design and retrofitting purposes. the models used in this area are typically in the form of partial differential equations that are discretized in space to have a lumped version. this way a high dimensional (with 10-100 state variables) complicated dynamic model is obtained that is unnecessarily complex for control applications. instead, a simplified lumped dynamic model is constructed for control design purposes based on first engineering principles [2] that captures the most important dynamics of the tank. for this purpose, the following assumptions were used: 1. there are two perfectly stirred balance volumes, one for the water and another for the wall. 2. there is a single component in each of the balance volumes (water and metal, respectively). 3. constant overall mass in both balance volumes. 4. constant physico-chemical properties. 5. vapour-liquid equilibrium in the tank. the simplified model consists of two energy balances: one for the water and and another one for the wall of the tank as balance volumes. water energy balance ( )= − + − +p i p w w he du c mt c mt k t t w dt ⋅ χ (1) wall energy balance ( ) =w w w lo du k t t w dt ss (2) the following constitutive equations, describing the relationship between the internal energies and the corresponding temperatures, complete the model. = = p w pw u c mt u c tw (3-4) the variables and parameters of the above model and their units of measure are the following t water temperature °c wt tank wall temperature °c pc specific heat of water j kg°c u internal energy of water j wu internal energy of the wall j m mass flow rate of water kg s it inlet water temperature °c m mass of water kg pwc heat capacity of the wall j °c hew total heating power of one electric heater w χ portion of total heating power turned on wk wall heat transfer coefficient w °c lossw heat loss of the system w the manipulable input to the system is the external heating, all the other input variables are regarded as disturbances. then we can list the disturbances with physical meaning as follows. • cold water infiltration. this effect is taken into account with the in-convection term in the water energy conservation balance (1), where the in and outlet mass flowrate m is controlled to be equal (but might change in time) and the inlet temperature can also be time-varying. p ic mt it • energy loss towards the environment. this effect is modelled as a loss term in the wall energy balance (2). lossw the pressure of saturated vapor in the gas phase of the tank depends strongly on the water temperature in an exponential (nonlinear way). the experimental measured data found in the literature [7] have been 91 used to create an approximate analytic function to describe the dependence. the function has the form ( ) 2 3 0 1 2 3 ( ) 100 ( ) = = = + + + te p h t t c c t c t c t ϕ ϕ (5) for the parameters of ϕ , the following values were obtained 1 0 1 5 2 3 6.5358 10 4.8902 10 9.2658 10 7.6835 10 − 2 8 − − − = ⋅ = ⋅ = − ⋅ = ⋅ c c c c (6) the validity range of the model is the usual operating domain of the pressurizer, i.e. 315°c ≤ t ≤ 350°c. in pressure terms, this means 105.65 bar ≤ p ≤ 137.09 bar. state space description based on eqs (1)-(2) and (3)-(4) we can write the system model in the following standard state-space form = + +& c c cx a x b u e d (7) where the state vector [= twx t t ] , the manipulable input u is directly proportional to the heating power, and the disturbance input vector [ ]= ti lossd t w . furthermore, the matrices in (7) are the following 0 , 1 00 w w p p c w w pw pw he pc c pw k km m c m c m a k k c c mw m c mb e c ⎡ ⎤ − −⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥= ⎢ ⎥ −⎢ ⎥ ⎢⎣ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥= =⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎥⎦ (8-9) the real physical measured variable in the system is the pressure. since (according to our assumptions) the temperature in the tank is a monotonous and invertible function of the pressure, we can write a linear output equation in the form [ ]1 0y = x (10) this means that we can express the performance requirements (bounds) for the pressure in terms of the temperature in the tank. the unknown parameters of the continuous-time model have been estimated from input-output measurement data. the model structure together with the estimated parameter values have been successfully validated. the detailed system identification procedure is described in [11]. for the controller design, it is convenient to center the state, input and disturbance variables as follows: , ,x x x u u u d d d∗ ∗ ∗= − = − = − (11) where x∗ is the required steady state to be kept by the controller, d ∗ is the nominal (mean) value of the disturbances and u∗ is the constant input necessary to keep the prescribed steady state x∗ . using the centered coordinates, the system model (7)-(9) can be rewritten as c c cx a x b u e d= + +& (12) for the controller design, we need a discrete-time state space model of the system (12). the discretization was performed assuming zero order hold on the input with a sampling interval of 10s. the centered discrete-time model is given by the equations 1k k k kx ax bu w+ = + + (13) where the effect of the disturbance term is expressed in discrete-time by the state disturbance . ce d kw robust model predictive control design control problem formulation the aim of the control is the robust stabilization of a prescribed operating point in case of additive disturbance, while the state and the control are subject to hard constraints. to solve this problem we apply the single policy robust model predictive control proposed by langson et al. in [5]. since this method requires the knowledge of the entire state, in our case it has to be completed with an appropriate state estimator. the control design procedure will then consist of three steps: first, assuming that the full state is available for measurement and no disturbance affects on the system, a nominal mpc controller is designed. then the robustification of the nominal controller comes making the nominal mpc applicable in the presence of external disturbances. the last step is the design of a state estimator and its integration into the mpc control framework. before starting the procedure the following assumptions have to be made: • the disturbance is bounded and there exists a convex polytope w containing the origin in its interior s.t. kw w k∈ ∀ • the constraints on the state and the control input are convex, i.e. there are given convex, polytopic sets x 92 and u containing the origin in their interior s.t. , ku u∈ kx x∈ have to be hold . for simplicity we moreover assume that u is rectangular i.e. k∀ 1 1 2 2 [ , ] [ , ], [ , ] p pl l l l l l u u u u u u u= − × − × × −l . nominal mpc following the steps of control design procedure in [5] we have to first formulate and solve the model predictive control problem for the disturbance free case. this means the determination of an admissible receding horizon policy ( )kxµ , which steers the centered system from initial state 0x x∈ to the origin. the solution to this problem can be derived from the result of the following optimization problem: 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 arg min ( ) ( ) ( ( ), ) , [ , , ], [ , , ] , , v n n t t n n i i i i n n i i i i i k n f v v v v v v x v v x qx v rv v v v x x x x ax bv x x x x v u x x ∗ − = − − + + = = = + = = = + = ∈ ∈ ∈ ∑ k k i (14) where n is the length of the horizon and fx x⊂ is a terminal set having the following properties: there existsan admissible static state feedback control , which keeps the system trajectories in ( )u x fκ= = x fx i.e. for all ( ) , ( )f fx x x u ax b x xκ κ∈ ∈ + ∈ (15) and asymptotically stabilizes the system i.e. 1 0lim 0 if ( ) and k k k k k fx x ax b x x xκ→∞ += = + ∈ (16) in possession of the optimal control input vector v∗ we can formulate the single policy mpc controller in the following way: nom if ( ) if i i i v i x n fx i µ ∗⎧ ≤⎪ = ⎨ >⎪⎩ n (17) i.e by means of single policy approach we determine v∗ only in the beginning (and later only if the prescribed operating point changes), and after depleting the entire control sequence, we switch to the linear feedback fx (dual-mode control). it can be easily proved [5], [6] that the control policy (17) asymptotically stabilizes the plant in the disturbance free case and both the state and the input will satisfy the constraints. the lyapunov function for the closed loop dynamics can be derived from the quadratic cost . nv to implement the formulated mpc algorithm on a particular system we need to determine the feedback gain f and the associated terminal set fx . it is straightforward to choose f as an unconstrained lq controller minimizing the infinite horizon cost function defined as: 0 1 ( ) ( , ) , , , 0 t t i i i i k k k k k v v v x v x q x v r v v fx x ax bv x x q r ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ = + ∞ ∞ = = + = = + > ∑ 0 0 i = k (18) the solution f and the quadratic lyapunov function of the closed loop dynamics ( ) tw x x px= 1 ( )kx a bf x+ = + can be obtained as a solution of a discrete algebraic ricatti equation: (19) 1( ) ( ), ( )( )( ) t t t t t t t f b pb r b pa p a pa a pb b pb r a pb q − ∞ ∞ ∞ = + = − + + since the terminal set fx has to be invariant for the dynamics 1 ( )k kx a bf x+ = + it can be constructed from an appropriate level set of w(x). let fx be the maximal level set, which satisfies the input constraints, i.e. , { | } max , { | max }t i t f t i lx x px x x x px f x u iγ γ γ γ γ γ ∗ ∗ ∈γ ≤ = ≤ = γ = ≤ ∀ (20) where tif is the ith row of f. notice that is a support function of the set , ( ) max t ti x x pxh f f xγ≤= i { | }tx x px γ≤ , which can be calculated as 1( ) ti ih f f p fγ −= i ([4],[3]). consequently in single input case 2 1 , tl t u f f f p f γ ∗ − = = (21) since fx may be larger than x, let f fx x x= ∩ . (the numerical calculation of the intersection can be greatly simplified if the polytopic approximation of x and fx is used.) robust mpc the next step of the controller design is the "robustification" of the nominal control policy. this can be performed by tightening the constraints of the nominal mpc and completing the nominal control input nom ( )ixµ with an appropriate error feedback term, i.e. more precisely: 93 nom( ) ( ) ( )i i i ix x k x xµ µ= + − (22) where ix is the nominal state value – calculated by iterating 1 nom ( )k k kx ax b xµ+ = + i, x is the true state (measured / estimated), and k is a stabilizing feedback for the disturbance-free dynamics 1k k kx ax bu+ = + . (it is possible to choose k f= . in order to formalize the new, tighter constraints for the robust mpc problem, we have to determine the following disturbance invariant set: 0 ( )i i z a bk w ∞ = = +∑ (23) because of the infinite summation the equation above can not be applied directly. there are two possibilities: we can use an approximation for z ([8]), or we can apply (23) till the difference between two consecutive sets becomes smaller than the numerical accuracy of the computing software. the first approach is mathematically precise, but we used the second one, since it is easier to implement and the convergence of (23) is fast enough to make this procedure practically applicable. using z the stringent sets of constraints can be calculated as follows: , f fx x u u kz x x= ∼ ζ = ∼ , = ∼ z } (24) where ~ denotes the pontryagin difference of two sets, defined as: ~ { |a b x x b a= + ⊂ (25) at this point we can formulate the robust mpc procedure: 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 arg min ( ) ( ) ( ( ), ) , [ , , ], [ , , ] , , v n n t t n n i i i i n n i i i i i k n f v v v v v v x v v x qx v rv v v v x x x x ax bv x x x x v u x x ∗ − = − − + + = = = + = = = + = ∈ ∈ ∈ ∑ k k i (26) i.e. we follow the same procedure as (14), but – instead of , , fx u x – we use the tightened constraint sets , , fx u x . according to (22) the control policy is defined as: ( ) if ( ) ( ) if i i i i i i i v k x x i n x fx k x x i n µ ∗⎧ + − ≤⎪ = ⎨ + − >⎪⎩ (27) state estimation as we have mentioned in the first section the state 2x of the pressurizer can not be measured directly. for this, we apply discrete-time state estimator to approximate it on-line from the input u and the measured output 1y x= . the robust mpc controller will then work with this estimated state. the estimator applied is given in the following wellknown form: 1| 1 1| 1 1| 1| | ˆ ˆ ( ) ˆ ˆ k k k k e k k k k k k k k x x k y cx x ax bu + + + + + + = + − = + (28) where |k kx denotes the estimated state at time instant k. substituting (13) into (28) the following error dynamics can be derived: 1 1 1| 1 | ˆ ( )( ) ( ( ) ( ) k k k k e k k k e e k e k e x x ) ka k ca x x i k c w a k ca e i k c w + + + += − = − − + − = − + − (29) where ek is chosen so that the matrix ea k ca− will be stable. before applying the estimator we have to examine the effect of the estimation error on the stability of the controlled system and on the prescribed constraints. we examine the system behaviour after the disappearence of the initial transients of (29), i.e. we assume that the estimation error is caused only by the disturbance , and not the initial difference between the estimated and the true states. by iterating (29) we can easily see that after some steps kw |ˆk k k ex x z k∈ + ∀ , where ez is a disturbance invariant set constructed in the following way: 0 ( ) (ie e e i )z a k ca i k c w ∞ = = − −∑ (30) since by (13) 1k k kx ax bu w+ ∈ + + holds and ez is symmetric to the origin, for the estimated state a following relation can be derived: 1| 1 | | 1| 1 | ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ , k k k k k e e k k k e k k k k k k k e x ax bu w az z ax bu w x ax bu w w w + + + + ∈ + + + + = + + ⇓ = + + ∈ (31) thus, if we perform the same controller synthesis as before with instead of w we get a control policy ew ˆ( )kxµ which guarantees the stability of (31) while keeping the state ˆkx and the input in the predefined range. since the difference between the true and the 94 estimated state is considered in the real state will also satisfy these constraints. since is generally larger than w the sets ew ew , , fx u x constructed from prescribe much tighter constraints than those which are constructed from w . ew simulation results to demonstrate and examine the performance of the controller designed above an identified model of the pressurizer was used [10]. after discretization the following state space model was obtained: 0.6651 0. 0.1035 , 0.0355 0. 0.0024 a b ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ = =⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ 91 21 = 3341 9645 (32) for the simulation two reference values were chosen: (33) 327.166, 326.166a br ry y= = the corresponding operating points are as follows: (34) 327.1660 , 1.71 326.7760 326.1660 , 1.71 325.7760 a a ss ss b b ss ss x u x u ⎡ ⎤ = =⎢ ⎥ ⎣ ⎦ ⎡ ⎤ = =⎢ ⎥ ⎣ ⎦ the lq controller was designed by using the following weighting matrices: (35) 210 , 20q i r∞ ∞= the resulted feedback gain is [ ]0.1439 0.8392f = . the following constraints for state and input were chosen by considering the physical limitations of the system: (36) 1 21.5 1.5, 3 3, 1.71 1.71x x u− ≤ ≤ − ≤ ≤ − ≤ ≤ the cause why the constraint on the control input was constructed in the form above is the following: in the true system the control input has to be between 0 and 4, which is equivalent to constraints 4ss su u u− ≤ ≤ − s for the centered model. but it is more convenient to handle constraints, which are independent from the operating point and symmetric to the origin, so we restrict the bounds to [ ]1.71 1.71− where 1.71 min( , )a bss ssu u≤ by examining the system behavior, it was seen that the difference between the nominal and the true d ∗ d disturbance is at most 15%, which means that w in the centered, discrete model is inside the rectangle defined as: [ ] [ ]0.05 0.05 0.005 0.005w w∈ = − × − (37) we used kalman filter as a state estimator, which was designed according to the measurement noise conditions. the obtained filter gain was [ ]0.7712 0.5982ek = . setting the stabilizing k controller equal to f the sets needed for the mpc algorithm can be calculated. figure 4. 5. shows the results in the case when full-state measurement is assumed and figure 3. 4. shows the obtained constraint sets in the case of state estimation. it can be seen that the constraints to be satisfied by the input and states are much more tighter if state estimator is applied. in the simulation the horizon was n=50, the system started from and the weighting matrices in the mpc optimization were chosen to be [0 327.5 327 t x = ] 0i 2 ,iq i i r= ⋅ = s (38) the system had to track first, and this reference was changed to at time a ry b ry 24000t = . to illustrate the robustness of the controllers designed the maximal 15%± persistent disturbance was added to the original plant. figure 6 shows the factors by which the nominal disturbance was multiplied. the simulation results in the cases of full state measurement and state estimation the can be found in figures 7. and 9. figure 8. shows the state estimation error. it can be seen that in all cases the output remains in the 1.5-wide neighborhood of the prescribed value while the control input also satisfies the constraints. it is also seen that from reference tracking point of view there is no significant difference between the cases of full state measurement and state estimation. although the controller using estimated states has to satisfy more stringent constraints to achieve the same result. examining the settling performance it can be stated that the overshoot is negligible and the setting time is acceptable small. the time-consuming optimization procedure was executed only twice: first, in the beginning and later at 24000t s= , when the change of reference took place. conclusions and further work a single policy robust model predictive control was successfully applied to a pressurizer model. it was shown that the states and the stabilizing control input designed by this approach remain in the given range even if additive disturbance is present. by using single policy approach the computation time needed for the control input has been drastically reduced. 95 acknowledgements this research was partially supported by the grants no. otka t042710 and f046223. figure 2 : constraint sets in the case of state estimation , , ,f ex z x x figure 3 : constraint sets in the case of state estimation , , ,f fz x x u figure 4: constraint set in the case of full state measurement , ,fx x x figure 5 : constraint set in the case of full state measurement , , ,f fz x x u 96 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 x 10 4 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 u 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 x 10 4 325.5 326 326.5 327 327.5 328 y yr figure 9 : reference signal (solid), system output (dashed) and control input in the case of state estimation 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 x 10 4 0.8 0.85 0.9 0.95 1 1.05 1.1 1.15 1.2 1.25 d1 d2 figure 6 : disturbance scaling factors used in simulation. references 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 x 10 4 325.5 326 326.5 327 327.5 328 y yr 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 x 10 4 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 u 1. apros. apros – the advanced process simulation environment, vtt industrial systems, 2005. http://www.vtt.fi/tuo/63/apros/. 2. k.m.hangos and i. t. cameron: process modelling and model analysis. academic press, london, 2001. 3. i. kolmanovsky and e. g. gilbert.: maximal output admissible sets for discrete-time systems with disturbance inputs. american control conference, 1995. 4. i. kolmanovsky and e. g. gilbert.: theory and computation of dysturbance invariant sets for discrete-time linear systems. mathematical problems in engineering, 4:317-367, 1998. 5. w. langson, i chryssochoos, s. v. rakovic and d. q. mayne: robust model predictive control using tubes. automatica, 40:125-133, 2004. figure 7 : reference signal (solid), system output (dashed) and control input in the case of full state measurement 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 x 10 4 −0.1 −0.05 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 x1−x1e x2−x2e 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 x 10 4 325 325.5 326 326.5 327 327.5 328 x1e x1 x2e x2 6. d. q. mayne, j. b. rawlings, c. v. rao and p. o. m. scoakert: constrained model predictive control: stability and optimality. automatica, 36(3):789-814, 2000. 7. r. h. perry and d. w. green: perry’s chemical engineers’s handbook (7th edition). mc graw hill, new york, 1999. 8. s. v. rakovic, e. c. kerrigan, k. kouramas and d. q. mayne.: approximationof the minimal robustly positively invariant set for discrete-time lti systems with persistent state disturbances. 42th conference on decision and control, 2003. 9. z. szabó, p. gáspár and j. bokor: reference tracking of wiener systems using dynamic inversion. in 2005 international symposium on intelligent control, limassol, cyprus, pages on cd, paper id: wea06.5. 2005. 10. i. varga, g. szederkényi, k. m. hangos and j. bokor: modelling and model identification of a pressurizer at the paks nuclear power plant. in 14th ifac symposium on system identification. (submitted), 2006. figure 8 : true (solid) and estimated (dashed) states and estimation error. http://www.vtt.fi/tuo/63/apros/ microsoft word a_05_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 38(1). pp. 21-26 (2010) parameter sensitivity analysis of a synchronous generator a. fodor1 , a. magyar1, k. m. hangos1, 2 1university of pannonia, department of electrical engineering and information systems, veszprém, hungary e-mail: foa@almos.uni-pannon.hu 2computer and automation research institute has, process control research group, budapest, hungary a previously developed simple dynamic model of an industrial size synchronous generator is analyzed in this paper. the constructed state-space model consists of a nonlinear state equation and a bilinear output equation. it has been shown that the model is locally asymptotically stable with parameters obtained from the literature for a similar generator. the effect of load disturbances on the partially controlled generator has been analyzed by simulation using a pi controller. it has been found that the controlled system is stable and can follow the set-point changes in the effective power well. the sensitivity of the model for its parameters has also been investigated and parameter groups have been identified according to the system’s degree of sensitivity to them. this groups form the different candidates of parameters for subsequent parameter estimation. the ways of applying the developed methods to other generators used in the automotive industry are also outlined. keywords: synchronous machine, dynamic state space model, parameter sensitivity introduction synchronous generators are popular and widely used electrical power sources in a wide range of applications including power plants and the automotive industry, too. whatever size and application area, these generators share the most important dynamic properties, and their dynamic models have a similar structure. in almost all power plants, both the effective and reactive components of the generated power depend on the need of the consumers and on their own operability criteria. this consumer generated time-varying load is the major disturbance that should be taken care of by the generator controller. therefore the final aim of our study is to design a controller that can control the reactive power such that its generation is minimized in such a way that the quality of the control of the effective power remains (nearly) unchanged. because of the specialties and great practical importance of the synchronous generators in power plants, their modelling for control purposes is well investigated in the literature. besides of the basic textbooks (see e.g. [1] and [2]), there are papers that describe the modelling and use the developed models for the design of various controllers [3, 4]. these papers, however, do not take the special circumstances found in nuclear power plants into account that may result in special generator models. the aim of this paper is to perform model verification and parameter sensitivity analysis of a simple dynamic model of a synchronous generator (sg) proposed in [5] and [6]. the result of this analysis will be the basis of a subsequent parameter estimation step. the model of the synchronous generator in this section the bilinear state-space model for a synchronous generator is presented based largely on [5] that will be used for local stability and parameter sensitivity analysis in later sections. modelling assumptions for constructing the synchronous generator model, let us make the following assumptions: ● a symmetrical tri-phase stator winding system is assumed, ● one field winding is considered to be in the machine, ● there are two amortisseur or damper windings in the machine, ● all of the windings are magnetically coupled, ● the flux linkage of the windings is a function of the rotor position, ● the copper losses and the slots in the machine are neglected, ● the spatial distribution of the stator fluxes and apertures wave are considered to be sinusoidal, ● the stator and rotor permeability are assumed to be infinite. 22 it is also assumed that all the losses due to wiring, saturation and slots can be neglected. the six windings (three stators, one rotor and two dampers) are magnetically coupled. since the magnetic coupling between the windings is a function of the rotor position, the flux linking of the windings is also a function of the rotor position. the actual terminal voltage v of the windings can be written in the form ,)()(= =1=1 j j j jj j j irv λ&∑∑ ±⋅± where ij are the currents, rj are the winding resistances, and λj are the flux linkages. the positive directions of the stator currents point out of the synchronous generator terminals. thereafter, the two stator electromagnetic fields, both travelling at rotor speed, were identified by decomposing each stator phase current under steady state into two components, one in phase with the electromagnetic field and another phase shifted by 90°. with the above, one can construct an air-gap field with its maximal aligned to the rotor poles (d axis), while the other is aligned to the q axis (between poles). this method is called the park's transformation.[4, 5] as a result of the derivation in [5] the vector voltage equation is as follows: vdfdqq = –rrsω·idfdqq – li ˙ dfdqq (1) with idfdqq = [id if id iq iq] t and vdfdqq = [vd –vf vd = 0 vq vq = 0] t, where vd and vq are the direct and the quadratic components of the stator voltage of the sg, vd and vq are the direct and the quadratic components of the rotor voltage of the sg, id and iq are the direct and the quadratic components of the stator current, id and iq are the direct and the quadratic components of the rotor current, while vf and if are the exciter voltage and current. furthermore, rrsω and l are the following matrices ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ +ω−ω−ω− ωω+ ω q edfd d f qqe rs r0000 0rrkmkml 00r00 000r0 kml00rr =r ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ + + = qq qeq drd rff dfed lkm000 kmll000 00lmkm 00mlkm 00kmkmll l where r is the stator resistance of the sg, rf is the exciter resistance, rd and rq are the direct and the quadratic part of the rotor resistance of the sg, ld, lq, ld and lq are the direct and the quadratic part of the stator and rotor inductance, ω is the angular velocity, and mf, md and mr are linkage inductances (see later). the resistance re and inductance le represent the output transformer of the synchronous generator and the transmission-line. the state-space model for the currents is obtained by expressing i ˙ dfdqq from (1), i.e. i ˙ dfdqq = –l –1·rrsω·idfdqq – l –1·vdfdqq (2) the motion equation is the following jj dq j dq j qd j qf j qd d 3 ikm 3 il 3 ikm 3 ikm 3 il = • ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ τ − τττ − τ − τ −ω& • (3) • [id if id iq iq ω] altogether, there are 6 state variables: id, if, id, iq, iq and ω. the input variables (i.e. manipulatable inputs and disturbances) are: tmech, vf, vd and vq. observe, that the state equations are bilinear in the state variables because matrix rrsω depends linearly on ω. note, that (3) can be used as an additional state equation for state space model (2). the loading angle (δ) of the synchronous generator is dt)(= r t 0t 0 ω−ω+δδ ∫ that we can differentiate to obtain the time derivative of the δ in per unit notation δ ˙ = ω – 1 (4) the output active power equation can be written in the following form: pout = vdid + vqiq, (5) and the reactive power is qout = vdiq – vqid. (6) note, that output equations are bi-linear in the state and input variables. model analysis the above model has been verified by simulation against engineering intuition using parameter values of a similar generator taken from the literature [1]. after the basic dynamical analysis, the set of model parameters is partitioned based on the model's sensitivity on them. generator parameters because the above developed model uses pseudoparameters that are composed from the original physical ones, mathematical expressions are needed to describe how these parameters depend on the physical ones. the parameters are described only for a single phase “a” since the machine is assumed to have symmetrical tri-phase stator windings system. the stator mutual inductances for phase a are )) 6 (2(coslm=l=l msbaab π −θ−− 23 where ms is a given constant. the rotor mutual inductances are lfd = ldf = mr, lfq = lqf = 0 and ldq = lqd = 0. the phase a stator to rotor mutual inductances (from phase windings to the field windings) are given by: laf = lfa = mf cos(θ) where the parameter mf is also a given constant. the stator to rotor mutual inductance for phase a (from phase windings to the direct axis of the damper windings) is lad = lda = md cos(θ) with a given parameter md. the phase a stator to rotor mutual inductances (from phase windings to the damper quadratic direct axis) are given by: laq = lqa = mq cos(θ) the parameters ld , lq , mf , md and mr used by the state space model (2 3, 5, 6) and by the above inductance equations are defined as aqqadr adfadd mssdmssd lmlm lmlm lmlllmll 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 == == ++=++= using the initial assumption of symmetrical tri-phase stator windings we get the resistance of stator windings of the generator, where rf denotes the resistance of the rotor windings, and rd and rq represent the resistance of the d and q axis circuit. in order to avoid working with numerical values that are in order of magnitude different, the equations have been normalized to a base value. we choose the base for rotor quantities and normalize the voltage and the torque accordingly. the variables in the normalized equations are then in „per units”. the parameters of the synchronous generator were obtained from the literature [1]. the stator base quantities, the rated power, output voltage, output current and the angular frequency base values are: s/rad f2= a 6158=i kv 8.66=3/kv 15=v mva 53.333=/3mva 160=s e b b b πω the physical parameters of the synchronous machine and the external network in dimensionless values are: ld = 1.700 ld = 0.150 lmd =0.02838 lq = 1.640 lq =0.150 lmq = 0.2836 ld = 1.605 lf = 0.101 r = 0.001096 lq = 1.526 ld = 0.055 rf = 0.00074 lad = 1.550 lq = 0.036 rd = 0.0131 laq = 1.490 rq = 0.054 re = 0.2 v∞ = 0.828 le = 1.640 d = 2.004 local stability analysis the steady-state values of the state variables can be obtained from the steady-state version of state equations (2, 3) using the above parameters. equation (1) implies that the expected value to id and iq are 0, that coincide with the engineering intuition. the equilibrium point of the system is: 10 q 9 d f q d 105.3334899=i 108.6242856=i 2.97899982=i 0.66750001=i 1.9132609=i 0.9990691= − − ⋅− ⋅− − ω the state matrix a of the locally linearized state-space model x˙ = ax + bu has the following numerical value in this equilibrium: ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ −−−−−⋅− −−−−− − − − −−−− − 0.00110.00050.00080.00020.0002108 1.00050.12340.03522.58392.58393.5009 1.02470.09010.03612.64642.64643.5855 1.47371.61102.20570.09640.00440.0228 0.80250.87731.20110.07720.00490.0124 2.32852.54553.48510.01420.00040.0361 6 the eigenvalues of the state matrix are: 0.123426=104.724291= 101.67235=0.100024= 0.997704103.619088= 6 4 5 3 43 2 1,2 −⋅− ⋅−− ±⋅− − − − λλ λλ λ e j it is apparent that the real parts of the eigenvalues are negative but their magnitudes are small, thus the system is on the boundary of the stability domain. pi controller the control scheme of the synchronous machine is a classical pi controller that ensures stability of the equilibrium point under small perturbations [4]. the controlled output is the speed (ω), the manipulated input is the mechanical torque tmech. the proportional parameter of the pi controller of the speed is 0.05 and the integrator time is 0.1 in per units. model validation the dynamic properties of the generator have been investigated in such a way that a single synchronous machine was connected to an infinite bus that models the electrical network. the response of the speed controlled generator has been tested under step-like changes of the exciter voltage. the simulation results are shown in fig. 1, where the exciter voltage vf and the torque angle δ are shown. 24 when the exciter voltage is increased the loading angle must be decreased as it can be seen in the fig. 1. figure 1: response to the exciter voltage step change of the controlled generator (δ means the deviation form the steady-state value) sensitivity analysis the aim of this sub-section is to define parameter groups according to the system's sensitivity on them. linkage inductances ld, lq, ld, lq, lmd and lmq are not used by the current model, only by the flux model [5]. it is not expected that the output and the state variables of system change when these parameters are perturbed, see fig. 2. as it was expected, the model is not sensitive to these parameters. note, that the linkage inductance parameters are only used for determining the fluxes of the generator. sensitivity of the model to the controller parameters p and i and the dumping constant d has also been investigated. since the pi controller controls ω by modifying the value of tmech , the controller keeps ω at synchronous speed. this is why the output and the steady state value of the system variables do not change (as it is apparent in fig. 3) even for a considerably large change of d. sensitivity analysis of the resistance of the stator and the resistance of the transmission line led to the same result. a ±20% perturbation in them resulted in a small change in currents id, iq and if. this causes the change of the effective and the reactive power of the generator, as shown in fig. 4. the analysis of the effect of the rotor resistance rf showed, that the ±20% perturbation of rf kept the quadratic component of the stator current (iq) constant, but currents id and if were changed. the output of the generator also changed, as it is shown in fig. 5. figure 2: the model states and outputs for a ±20% change of ld figure 3: the model states and outputs for a ±90% change of d 25 figure 4: the model states and outputs for a ±20% change of rresist figure 5: the model states and outputs for a ±20% change of rf the sensitivity of the model states and outputs to the inductance of the rotor (lf) and the inductance of the direct axis (ld) has also been analyzed. the results show only a moderate reaction in id and if to the parameter perturbations, and the equilibrium state of the system kept unchanged. however, decreasing the value of the parameters to the 90 percent of their nominal value destabilized the system. the results of a ±9% perturbation in lf are shown in fig. 6. a small perturbation of the outputs is noticeable. figure 6: the model states and outputs for a ±9% change of lf finally, the sensitivity of the model (2, 3, 5, 6) to the linkage inductance lad has been examined. when the parameter has been changed ±5%, currents id and if changed only a little. on the other hand, the steady-state of the system has shifted as it can be seen in fig. 7. a parameter variation of more than 5% destabilized the system. as a result of the sensitivity analysis, it is possible to define the following groups of parameters: ● not sensitive inductances ld, lq, ld, lq, lmd, lmq, laq, lq damping constant d and the controller parameters p and i. since the state space model of interest is insensitive for them, the values of these parameters cannot be determined from measurement data using any parameter estimation method. ● less sensitive: resistances of the stator r and the transmission-line re. ● more sensitive: resistance rf of the rotor and the inductance of transmission-line le. these parameters are candidates for parameter estimation. 26 ● critically sensitive: linkage inductance lad, inductances ld and lf. these parameters can be estimated very well. figure 7: the model states and outputs for a ±4% change of lad conclusion and further work the simple bilinear dynamic model of an industrial size synchronous generator described in [5] and [6] has been investigated in this paper. it has been shown that the model is locally asymptotically stable around a physically meaningful equilibrium state with parameters obtained from the literature for a similar generator. the effect of load disturbances on the partially controlled generator has been analyzed by simulation by using a traditional pi controller. it has been found that the controlled system is stable and can follow the setpoint changes in the effective power well. eighteen parameters of the system have been selected for sensitivity analysis, and the sensitivity of the state variables and outputs has been investigated for all of them. as a result, the parameters have been partitioned to four groups. based on the results presented here, the further aim of the authors is to estimate the parameters of the model for a real system from measurements. the sensitivity analysis enables us to select the candidates for estimation that are rf, le, lad, ld and lf. it is important to emphasize that this model can be and will be used as a starting point for the model development of a permanent magnet synchronous motor (pmsm) which board spectrum, that is widely used in the automotive industry. this becomes possible by changing the exciter coil of the classical synchronous machine to a permanent magnet: this way the model of the pmsm is obtained, which is one variant of the brushless direct current motors (bldc motor). acknowledgement we acknowledge the financial support of this work for the hungarian state and the european union under the tamop-4.2.1/b-09/1/konv-2010-0003 project. this work was also supported in part by the hungarian research fund through grant k67625. references 1. p. m. anderson, a. a. fouad: power-systemscontrol and stability, the iowa state university press, ames iowa, 1977. 2. p. m. anderson, b. l. agrawal, j. e. van ness: subsynchronous resonance in power systems, ieee press, new york, 1990. 3. a. loukianov, j. m. canedo, v. i. utkin, j. cabrera-vazquez: discontinuous controller for power systems: sliding-mode bock control approach, ieee trans. on industrial electronics, 51, 2004, 340–353. 4. f. p. de mello, c. concordia: concepts of synchronous machine stability as affected by excitation control, ieee trans. power application systems, pas-88:316–329, 1969. 5. a. fodor, a. magyar, k. m. hangos: dynamic modelling and model analysis of a large industrial synchronous generator proc. of applied electronics 2010, plzen, czech republic. 6. a. fodor, a. magyar, k. m. hangos: parameter sensitivity analysis of an industrial synchronous generator proc. of phd workshop 2010, veszprém, hungary. << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word 16.15 pózna.docx hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 44(2) pp. 121–128 (2016) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0015 diagnosis of technological systems based on the structural decomposition of their coloured petri net model anna i. pózna,1* miklós gerzson,1 adrien leitold,2 and katalin m. hangos1,3 1 department of electrical engineering and information systems, university of pannonia, po box 158, veszprém, 8201, hungary 2 department of mathematics, university of pannonia, po box 158, veszprém, 8201, hungary 3 institute for computer science and control, hungarian academy of sciences, po box 63, budapest, 1518, hungary diagnosing faults during the operation of a system is an essential task when investigating technological systems. in this paper, a new online fault identification method is proposed which is based on the occurrence graph of the coloured petri net model of the system. the model is able to simulate the normal and faulty operations of the system given in the form of event lists, so called traces. the diagnosis is based on the search for deviations between the traces of the normal and the actual operations. in the case of complex technological systems, the occurrence graph can contain hundreds of nodes; therefore, the computational effort and searching-time increase significantly. our proposed structural decomposition method can manage these demands so it has a crucial impact on the practical application of diagnostic processes. the main idea of our method is that the complex systems can be decomposed into technological units. therefore, the diagnosis can be done by components separately and the diagnostic result of a unit can be used for the diagnosis of the other units connected to it. because of the structural decomposition, the diagnosis has to be performed on much smaller occurrence graphs but the effect of faults in previous units is taken into account. the proposed method is illustrated by a simple case study. keywords: technological system, diagnosis, coloured petri net model, structural decomposition, qualitative model 1. introduction identifying faults and analysing their consequences are important tasks during the investigation of technological systems. a number of diagnostic methods are known in the literature and the model-based methods are very popular among them [1]. petri nets and their different extensions (such as coloured, timed or hierarchical nets) are powerful tools for modelling discrete event systems [2]. for example, coloured petri nets are often used for modelling production lines [3]. it is important that the resultant models describe not only the normal (faultless) operation of the system, but they also take into account different, randomly occurring errors in the system. in many cases, the normal or faulty operations of technological processes can be characterised by a series of events possessing discrete or qualitative valued variables. in this case, the occurring deviations can be generated by the comparison of the normal and actual events. the occurring faults can be detected and identified based on the observed deviations. *correspondence: pozna.anna@virt.uni-pannon.hu discrete event systems are usually modelled by automata. in this case, the diagnosis is usually based on the idea of unobservable events [4]. faults can be modelled as unobservable events, which means only the effects of faults can be noticed. the problem with fault detection is specifying whether any fault has occurred or not in the system. fault isolation is the problem of identifying which fault has occurred exactly. since faulty events are unobservable by assumption, the detection and isolation problem must be solved based on the available information of the observed non-faulty events. the diagnosability of discrete event systems was first investigated [5] using the methods of automata theory. besides automata, petri nets are also frequently used for modelling discrete event systems (des). the structural and mathematical representations of petri nets both can be used for diagnostic purposes. methods include various techniques such as analysis of the occurrence graph, marking estimation, linear algebra, integer linear programming, diagnoser nets, or reverse nets. a simple fault detection method based on the measurement of token quantity is given [6]. it is assumed that the given petri net is conservative, and any change in the token quantity is caused by faults. if the difference between measured and initial token number pózna, gerzson, leitold, and hangos hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 122 exceeds a predefined threshold then a fault has occurred. sensor signals are used for token determination instead of modelling the faulty behaviour of the system. the proposed method is very simple and can be used for early fault detection; however, it is not able to isolate faults. faults can also be modelled as unobservable transitions in petri nets. the set of places can be also observable; therefore, the marking of the petri net has to be estimated. the notion of basis marking [7] (set of markings consistent with the observation) and j-vectors (minimal sequences of unobservable transitions to reach basis markings) are introduced. an online algorithm is developed to detect the occurrence of faults, which uses the basis occurrence graph. the main advantage of the proposed algorithm is that in the case of bounded petri nets the basis occurrence graph can be computed offline. it reduces the computational effort of the online diagnosis. the basis occurrence graph can be used as an online diagnoser. sufficient conditions of diagnosability of faulty transitions are given in the form of a system of inequalities [8]. in this method, the marking of places is observable. authors introduce the notion of g-markings (markings with negative elements) and unobservable explanations (sequences of unobservable transitions, whose firings can explain the negative elements of a gmarking). after an observed event, the g-marking is updated according to the petri net equation. when an observed transition fires it removes tokens from its input places and adds tokens to its output places. if this transition is not enabled under the previous g-marking then the removal of tokens causes negative marking. an online fault detection algorithm has also been developed [9], which is based on solving integer linear programming problems and checking the diagnosability conditions. the integer linear programming approach has also been used [10] to determine if the system behaviour is normal, faulty, or ambiguous. the algorithm has further been improved [11], for a more general situation where different observable transitions can share the same label. firing times of transitions are also considered, which add more constraints to the ilp problem making the fault detection algorithm more accurate. timing characteristics have also been used [12], but with a different meaning: the faults affect the firing speed of the transitions. the fault detection is based on the generation of residuals, which are computed by comparing the markings of observable places with the reference model. a bottom-up modelling methodology has been proposed using interpreted petri nets [13]. in the generated model, the faulty and normal states are represented by places. the authors introduce the definition of input-output diagnosability and also give conditions to test this property. the diagnoser model contains the normal behaviour of the system. an online algorithm based on the difference between the system output and the diagnoser model output is developed for detecting faulty markings. in the case of large systems, the models and associated diagnosers can be extremely large. furthermore, the diagnostic methods are computationally expensive. therefore, it is essential to investigate the possibility of distributed diagnosis. the idea of distributed diagnosis is to divide the system into modules or components then make a local diagnoser for each component. the challenging problem is to ascertain the diagnosis state of the whole system from the results of local diagnosers. it usually requires a distributed algorithm and a communication protocol [14]. coloured petri nets (cpn) have the advantage of making compact information representations. a cpn diagnoser equivalent to the classical diagnoser has been built [15]. in this approach, places represent different hypotheses and colours represent diagnosis results. the advantage of the cpn diagnoser is the simplified graphical representation. on the other hand, the coloured diagnoser is not necessarily smaller than the classical diagnoser. decomposition and methods of modular diagnosis of des are also studied by the authors. backward reachability can also be used for diagnosis purposes. if a marking m is reachable from m0, then m0 is backward reachable from m in a petri net. possible sources of failures for this method can be determined. backward reachability is extended to coloured petri nets [16]. transformation techniques for the inversion of cpn are also presented here. 2. basic concepts a brief description of the basic concepts and notions of our method are given in this section. at first qualitative ranges are introduced to characterise the measured values. after that events, traces, and deviations in a technological system are defined, then the most important parts of the coloured petri net model and its analysis are introduced. finally, the structural decomposition-based diagnosis is described in detail. 2.1. qualitative range spaces in many applications, it is not always necessary to know the exact values of the measured signals. qualitative models can be used in this case and it is enough to know whether the value of a signal belongs to a specified range space or not. for example, the measurement range of a sensor can be divided into the following range spaces: qs = { e0, 0, l, n, h, e1 } (1) where 0, l, n, h denote the zero, low, normal and high measured value, respectively, while e0 and e1 may refer to the extremely low and high values caused by sensor errors. the states of actuators, e.g. valves, switches, etc. can be described similarly. for example, a two-state valve can be represented by diagnosis of technological systems 44(2) pp. 121–128 (2016) doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0015 123 qv = { op , cl } (2) qualitative range spaces, where op and cl refer to the open or closed state of the valve. 2.2. events, traces, and deviations considering a technological system as a discrete event system, the state of the system can be characterised with the measured values at a given time. the actions in the system, e.g. interactions by operators, modify the values of input and output variables thus the system state changes. an event is defined as the arranged (qualitative) input and output values of the system at a given time instance τ: eventτ = (τ, in1, …, inm, out1, …, outn) . the course of the system can be described as a sequence of consecutive events, so called trace: trace = (event1, …, eventn). in a technological system the most important types of traces with respect to the diagnosis are the nominal, faulty, and characteristic traces. the nominal trace describes the normal operation of a system. the faulty trace contains the occurring events if a known fault is present while the characteristic trace refers to the actual course of the process. in this paper, it is assumed that only one fault may occur in a process unit of the technological system and this fault evolves before the start of the operation and remains unchanged during the course of the process. if a fault occurs then the trace of the system differs from its nominal trace. as a result, deviations between the nominal trace and the current characteristic trace can be defined. in our diagnosis method the following types of deviations are used: • never happened(eventτ) (abbreviated as h(eventτ): this type of deviation refers to the events of the nominal trace which (eventτ) never occur in the characteristic trace of the process. • chronological deviations: if an event of the nominal trace (eventτ) happens later or earlier in the characteristic trace than time point τ, the deviations lat(eventτ) and ear(eventτ) denote them. • quantitative deviations: this type of deviations is used to denote that the ith output value is greater (denoted by grei(eventτ)) or smaller (smli(eventτ)) in the characteristic event at time τ than in the nominal event while the input values are identical. our diagnosis method is based on the search and comparison of the deviation list on the reachability graph of the cpn model of the technological system. 2.3. coloured petri nets coloured petri nets (cpns) are extensions of the ordinary or low-level petri nets. the main differences with respect to ordinary petri nets are that so-called colours can be assigned to tokens and functions can be assigned to arcs and transitions, too. the detailed formal definition is given in ref.[17], only the special concepts used in our models are presented here. • places of the cpn model of the technological system may have three functions. at first input and output variables are represented by places and the colour of the tokens on them denotes the qualitative value of the variable at the current time. on the other hand, places may refer to the occurred fault and the generated deviations. the colours of tokens in these places denote the type of the fault and the occurring deviations, respectively. • there are three transitions in our model, which have different tasks. transition t1 is responsible for the generation of faulty or normal operations at the beginning of the process and the initialisation of the variables according to the investigated operational mode. the function of transition t2 is the timing of the process. it is assumed that the technological process is time-driven and the values of the variables change at the end of the time steps. therefore, t2 fires until the end of the process. transition t3 is used for the generation of the ‘never happened’-type deviations at the end of the process. • arc functions are assigned to the arcs between places and transitions defining the change in the colours and computing deviations. the structure of the coloured petri net for modelling and diagnosing technological systems can be seen in fig.1. places are represented with ellipses and transitions are represented with rectangles. in a technological system, the consequences of a processing step can be stochastic. for example, the step may be completed in a normal way, or a fault occurs. the probabilistic nature of a transition t associated with a processing step can be modelled in a cpn by a fault function, which is built into its guard function. this figure 1. structure of the coloured petri net model. pózna, gerzson, leitold, and hangos hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 124 fault function returns the logical value true or false with predefined probability, and the token values of the adjacent consequence places of transition t can be controlled by this logical value. this type of transition firing is called a stochastically fired transition. the occurrence graph of the cpn is a graph, which contains all of the system states reachable from a given initial state [17]. assuming that the cpn model of the examined system is given, the occurrence graph can be used for its behavioural analysis. the nodes of the graph refer to system states and the arcs connecting them refer to state transitions, e.g. events. different paths on the occurrence graph refer to different operational modes of the system and they can be used for analysing the causes and consequences of a system state. 2.4. diagnosis with structural decomposition the disadvantage of the occurrence graph-based method is the increasing size of the graph as the size, i.e. number of places, of the cpn model increases. in the case of even a simpler technological system containing three or four units, the occurrence graph of its cpn model can contain hundreds of nodes depending on the number of sensors and actuators. the refinement of the qualitative measuring range of sensors or the application of control valves instead of two-state actuators may also cause the growth of occurrence graphs because their branches will be longer. with the growth in the size of the graph, the computational effort and searching-time also increase. this is the reason why the structural decomposition has a crucial impact on the practical application of the diagnostic process. generally speaking, complex systems can be decomposed into technological units. by taking advantage of this, the diagnosis can be done by components separately, and the diagnostic result of a unit can be used for the diagnosis of the other units connected to it. to perform diagnosis with structural decomposition the full trace of the system should be decomposed, too. to do this, first the time instances belonging to the operation of the investigated units have to be selected. then the variables referring to this unit are picked out from the events belonging to the selected time instances. if the trace is represented in tabular form then specific rows and columns should be selected. afterwards, time is shifted back in the case of every unit such that the initial time step of the first event should be 1 in every sub-trace. this means that every unit has its own relative time-scale. by applying this decomposing process, the trace describing the operation of the entire system is disintegrated into the event lists referring to the operation of simpler technological units. as a next step the deviation list of the given subsystem is generated by comparing the nominal trace of the subsystem with its characteristic trace. then the diagnosis is performed using the cpn model and occurrence graph of the subsystem. the task is to compare the generated deviation list with the token distribution of the terminal nodes on the occurrence graph. if the deviation list corresponds with the token distribution of exactly one terminal node then the fault can be determined based on the token of the fault place. if the deviation list matches the token distribution of more than one terminal node then only the set of possibly occurred faults could be determined. if the deviation list cannot be found in the token distribution of any terminal nodes then an unknown failure occurs in the system. in the case of complex systems, it is necessary to take into account the effect of faults that have occurred in subsystems connected to the diagnosed unit. therefore, the cpn model of the units has to be modified such that the place of the fault has to contain not only the actual operating mode, but the operating modes of previous subsystems, too. to store this information the colour set of this place is extended with an attribute referring to the type of fault and to the place where the fault occurred. let us assume that one fault is diagnosed in the first technological unit. this information is added to the fault place of the next unit as a previous fault. then the occurrence graph of this subsystem is generated based on its cpn model where the fault of the previous unit appears as an initial condition. the resultant occurrence graph now contains those states and deviation lists which can occur in this subsystem if the fault of the previous unit is taken into account. the diagnosis is performed on this graph, the possible fault of this unit is determined based on this investigation, and the result is taken into account during the diagnosis of the following unit. in certain cases, the exact type of fault cannot be determined exactly. if the result of the diagnosis of the unit is a set of possible faults then each element of the set is treated separately. this means that the diagnosis of the next unit has to be performed taking into account every one of the possible previous faults. occurrence graphs of the subsystem are generated according to each fault of the previous subsystem. the result of the diagnosis is the union of the obtained faults. the main advantage of the described method is the smaller size of the occurrence graphs of subsystems. therefore, the search requires less time than in the case of the investigation of the entire technological system. 3. simple case studies a simple case study is presented in this section as a practical illustration of the diagnosis of complex technological systems based on their structural decompositions. 3.1. description of the technological process our simple technological example contains three uniform tanks, ta, tb, and tc, which are serially connected as can be seen in fig.2. each tank has an input valve, an output valve (denoted by vx, where x = a, b, c, and d), and a continuous level sensor (lev_x, x diagnosis of technological systems 44(2) pp. 121–128 (2016) doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0015 125 = a, b, and c). the short description of the technological process is as follows: as an initialisation, it is assumed that all the valves are closed. the process starts with the opening of the first valve (va) and then the filling of the first tank (ta) starts. the flow of liquid is considered constant so the control of the filling process is based on time. the role of the level sensors is to measure the actual liquid level only. at time step 3, the filling process of tank ta completes and its output valve (vb) is opened. the second tank tb is filled the same way as described for tank ta. at time step 5, the tb tank is full and its output valve (vc) is opened. the filling process of the third tank (tc) happens the same way. during the filling of the second and third tanks, the first (ta) then the second tank (tb) operates as a continuous unit. after the filling of the third tank (tc) has completed, the technological systems work in continuous mode. it is assumed that five possible faults can occur in each tank: • 2 faults of the level sensor: negative or positive bias error. in this case, the sensor signal is lower or higher with qualitative unit than the actual value of the level. • leaking of the tank: it is assumed that all of the incoming liquid runs out through the hole, i.e. it is a “big” hole. • 2 different faults of the output valves vb, vc, and vd: besides their normal operations, they can stay closed or open only halfway. for the sake of simplicity, only one of these faults can occur with each tank and all of the faults evolve before the filling process of the first tank ta starts. 3.2. cpn model of the system for the diagnostic investigation, a coloured petri netbased (cpn) model of the technological system is developed as follows: the system can be decomposed into three subsystems. each subsystem represents a tank together with its input and output valves. as can be seen from the technological description of the system, all the subsystems (tanks with their input and output valves and sensors) work in a very similar way, so the structure of their cpn models is identical. the cpn models were built using cpn tools 3.4.0. the cpn model of a subsystem can be seen in fig.3. the description of the cpn model is as follows: the locations of the petri nets represent input and output variables, i.e. the state of the input and output valves (denoted by in and out), and measured level value (level), respectively. the qualitative values of these variables are represented by different colour sets. • colour set of valves: qvalve = {cl, op}, which represents the closed or open-state of the twostate valve. • colour set of level sensors: qlevel = { e0, 0, l, n, h, e1 }, where 0, l, n, h denotes that the level is zero, low, normal or high, respectively, and e0, and e1 indicate that the level is below or above the measurement range, respectively. three additional places are needed: one to store the operating mode (place fault), one to collect the deviations (place dev) and one for the list of events that have not occurred until a given simulation time step (place never). the cpn model contains three transitions (t1, t2, t3). t1 is the initialisation transition, it fires only once at the start of the simulation. it generates an operating mode (normal or faulty) and updates the variables according to the generated operating mode. afterwards, transition t2 fires until the end of the process. it updates the values of variables in every simulation step and generates quantitative and chronological deviations except for the ‘never happened’-type. the ‘never happened’-type deviations can be generated after the process has ended. this is done by the firing of transition t3, which removes the events that remain at place never at the end of the simulation and attaches the nh guideword to them. the values of variables at a given time step can be read from the trace files. each trace file contains the list of events that describe the process according to the operating mode. all traces were generated by a matlab script. figure 2. the investigated technological example. figure 3. the coloured petri net model of a tank (for the sake of clarity parts of some inscriptions were omitted). pózna, gerzson, leitold, and hangos hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 126 3.3. diagnosis of the system with structural decomposition according to the general description, the technological system consists of three uniform tanks. because of the same structure and operational mode, all three tanks have the same cpn model. this model can be seen in fig.3. the occurrence graph of the cpn model of a tank can be seen in fig.4. at the time of the generation of this occurrence graph, any fault occurring in a previous technological unit was not taken into account. as can be seen in fig.4, node no. 17 refers to normal operation of the system, while the other terminal nodes (no. 20, 21, 23–25) belong to the five different faulty modes. the nominal trace of the complex technological system can be seen in table 1. the input variables of the first tank (tank ta in fig.2) are the states of valves va and vb, while the output variable is the value of level sensor lev_a. the variables of the second tank are vb, vc, and lev_b, while vc, vd, and lev_c belong to the third tank, respectively. the rows belong to time steps 1, 2, and 3, while columns va, vb, and lev_a compose the trace of the first tank. these cells are framed with a dotted line in table 1. similarly, rows 3, 4, and 5 as well as columns vb, vc, and lev_b define the trace of the second tank (framed with a continuous line) while rows 5, 6, and 7, along with columns vc, vd, and lev_c give the trace of the third tank (framed with a dashed line). consider the characteristic trace of the technological system given in table 2. as a next step, the trace pieces belonging to each individual tank are removed from the characteristic trace of the entire system. the initial time step is shifted to 1 for every unit. the resultant event lists belonging to the three tanks can be seen in table 3. the diagnostic process is started with the first tank. by comparing the nominal trace of the first tank with the characteristic trace (first column of table 3) the deviation list is generated. this deviation list is then searched for among the terminal nodes of the occurrence graph of the first tank. (this occurrence graph can be seen in fig.5). it can be stated that terminal node no. 21 contains the same deviation list and based on the token of the fault place the type of fault can be determined: the level sensor exhibits a positive failure bias in the first tank. the diagnosed fault in the first tank is used during the investigation of the second tank. this fault is added to the place fault as a token (pos_bias, prev1) in the model of the second tank. then the occurrence graph of the second tank is generated which contains those states that can occur in the second tank if the sensor of the first tank exhibits a positive bias error. the resultant graph can be seen in fig.6. the deviation list of the second tank is generated by comparing the second column of table 3 with the characteristic trace of the second tank. by checking the terminal nodes of the occurrence graph in fig.6, it can be stated that terminal node no. 24 exhibits the same deviation list. this means that the fault of the second tank is leakage and it can be identified unambiguously. the diagnosed faults of the first and second tanks are added to the model of the third tank in the form of tokens (pos_bias, prev1) and (leak, prev2) belonging to the fault place. based on this information the occurrence graph of the third tank is generated in accordance with fig.7. the nodes on this occurrence graph refer to the states if a positive failure bias occurs in the first tank and leak in the second tank. figure 4. the occurrence graph of a cpn tank model. table 1. decomposition of the nominal trace. dotted line: first tank, continuous line: second tank, dashed line: third tank. time input variables output variables va vb vc vd lev_a lev_b lev_c 1 op cl cl cl 0 0 0 2 op cl cl cl l 0 0 3 op op cl cl n 0 0 4 op op cl cl n l 0 5 op op op cl n n 0 6 op op op cl n n l 7 op op op op n n n table 3. characteristic traces of the three tanks after decomposition. ta tb tc (1, op, cl, l) (1, op, cl, 0) (1, op, cl, 0) (2, op, cl, n) (2, op, cl, 0) (2, op, cl, 0) (3, op, op, n) (3, op, op, 0) (3, op, op, 0) table 2. decomposition of the characteristic trace. dotted line: first tank, continuous line: second tank, dashed line: third tank. time input variables output variables va vb vc vd lev_a lev_b lev_c 1 op cl cl cl l 0 0 2 op cl cl cl n 0 0 3 op op cl cl n 0 0 4 op op cl cl n 0 0 5 op op op cl n 0 0 6 op op op cl n 0 0 7 op op op op n 0 0 figure 5. the occurrence graph of the first tank. diagnosis of technological systems 44(2) pp. 121–128 (2016) doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0015 127 the deviation list based on the trace pieces stemming from the filling process of the third tank (see the third column of table 3) is generated and compared to the terminal node of the occurrence graph. it can be stated that terminal nodes no. 21–24 possesses the same deviation list as the deviation list obtained from the characteristic trace of the third tank. this means that the operating mode of the third tank cannot be unambiguously determined, the set of possible operating modes, i.e. normal, leak, or fault, of valves can be defined. 4. conclusion a novel method for online fault diagnosis in a technological system is described in this paper. the method is based on the structural decomposition of a complex technological system. the process starts with the modelling of the technological system in the form of coloured petri nets. for the characterisation of sensor values and actuator states, qualitative value sets are used in the form of coloured tokens. this modelling method allows for the simulation of both normal and known faulty operations of the system. the diagnosis is performed using the occurrence graph of the basic units of the complex system. by generating the deviation list based on the normal and characteristic traces the fault or the set of possible faults can be determined. as a result of the structural decomposition, the diagnosis has to be performed on much smaller occurrence graphs but the effect of faults in previous units are taken into account. our method reduces the demand of computational efforts and search time. the proposed method was illustrated by a simple case study. acknowledgement the authors acknowledge the financial support of the hungarian research fund through grant no. k-115694. references [1] blanke, m.; kinnaert, m.; lunze, j.; staroswiecki, m.: diagnosis and fault-tolerant control (springerverlag, berlin, germany) 2006 doi: 10.1007/9781-84628-877-7 [2] hrúz, b.; zhou, m.: modeling and control of discrete-event dynamic systems with petri nets and other tool (springer-verlag, london, u.k.) 2007 [3] campos, e.j.; seatzu, c.; xie, x.: formal methods in manufacturing (crc press taylor and francis group, boca raton, usa) 2014 doi: 10.1201/b16529 [4] zaytoon, j.; lafortune, s.: overview of fault diagnosis methods for discrete event systems, ann. rev. control 2013 37(2), 308–320 � doi: 10.1016/j.arcontrol.2013.09.009 [5] sampath, m.; sengupta, r.; lafortune, s.; sin namohideen, k.; teneketzis, d.: diagnosability of discrete-event systems, ieee trans. automat. control 1995 40(9), 1555–1575 �� doi: 10.1109/9.412626 [6] prock, j.: a new technique for fault detection using petri nets, automatica 1991 27(2), 239–245 � doi: 10.1016/0005-1098(91)90074-c [7] cabasino, m.p.; giua, a.; seatzu, c.: fault detection for discrete event systems using petri nets with unobservable transitions, automatica 2010 46(9), 1531–1539 � doi: 10.1016/j.automatica.2010.06.013 [8] basile, f.; chiacchio, p.; tommasi, g.d.: sufficient conditions for diagnosability of petri nets, in proc. 9th int. workshop on discrete event systems, wodes (göteborg, sweden) pp. 370– 375, 2008 � doi: 10.1109/wodes.2008.4605974 [9] basile, f.; chiacchio, p.; tommasi, g.d.: an efficient approach for online diagnosis of discrete event systems, ieee trans. automat. control 2009 54(4), 748–759 � doi: 10.1109/tac.2009.2014932 [10] dotoli, m.; fanti, m.p.; mangini, a.m.; ukovich, w.: online fault detection in discrete event systems by petri nets and integer linear programming, automatica 2009 45(11), 2665–2672 � doi: 10.1016/j.automatica.2009.07.021 [11] fanti, m.p.; mangini, a.m.; ukovich, w.: fault detection by labeled petri nets and time constraints, proc. 3rd int. workshop on dependable control of discrete systems (dcds, saarbrucken, germany) pp. 168–173, 2011 � doi: 10.1109/dcds.2011.5970336 [12] lefebvre, d.; aguayo-lara, e.: initial study for observers application to fault detection � and isolation with continuous timed petri nets, ifacpapersonline 2015 48(7), 97–103 doi: 10.1016/j.ifacol.2015.06.479 figure 6. the occurrence graph of the second tank in the case of a positive failure bias in the first tank. figure 7. the occurrence graph of the third tank in the case of a positive failure bias in the first tank and leak in the second tank. pózna, gerzson, leitold, and hangos hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 128 [13] ramirez-trevino, a.; ruiz-beltran, e.; rivera rangel, i.; lopez-mellado, e.: online fault diagnosis of discrete event systems. a petri netbased approach, ieee trans. automation sci. engng. 2007 4(1), 31–39 doi: 10.1109/tase.2006.872120 [14] genc, s.; lafortune, s.: distributed diagnosis of place-bordered petri nets, ieee trans. automation sci. engng. 2007 4(2), 206–219 doi: 10.1109/tase.2006.879916 [15] pencolé, y.; pichard, r.; fernbach, p.: modular fault diagnosis in discrete-event systems with a cpn diagnoser, ifac-papersonline 2015 48(21), 470–475 doi: 10.1016/j.ifacol.2015.09.571 [16] bouali, m.; barger, p.; schon, w.: backward reachability of colored petri nets for systems diagnosis, reliability engng. system safety 2012 99, 1–14 doi: 10.1016/j.ress.2011.10.003 [17] jensen, k.: coloured petri nets: basic concepts, analysis methods and practical use (springer verlag, berlin, germany) 1997 doi: 10.1007/9783-642-60794-3 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 45(1) pp. 29–36 (2017) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2017-0006 formation, photophysics, photochemistry and quantum chemistry of the out-of-plane metalloporphyrins zsolt valicsek, 1* melitta p. kiss, 1 melinda a. fodor, 1 muhammad imran, 2 and ottó horváth 1 1 department of general and inorganic chemistry, institute of chemistry, faculty of engineering, university of pannonia, egyetem u. 10., h-8200 veszprém, hungary 2 department of chemistry, baghdad-ul-jadeed campus, the islamia university of bahawalpur, 63100 bahawalpur, pakistan among the complexes of porphyrins, special attention has been paid to those possessing out-of-plane (oop) structures, for the formation of which the size, as well as the coordinative character of the metal center are responsible. in these coordination compounds, the central atom cannot fit coplanarly into the cavity of the ligand, hence, it is located above the porphyrin plane, distorting it. equilibria and kinetics of the complex formation, spectrophotometric, photophysical and primary photochemical properties of post-transition and lanthanide oop metalloporphyrins were investigated, in addition electronic structural calculations were performed; hence, the general oop characteristics were determined.meanwhile, few doubtful questions have attempted to be answered concerning the categorization of metalloporphyrins, the borderline case complexes and hyperporphyrins. keywords: out-of-plane metalloporphyrins, formation kinetics, uv-vis spectrophotometry, photochemistry, borderline case complexes 1. introduction porphyrins and their derivatives play important roles in several biochemical systems. four pyrroles are connected through methylidine bridges, forming the porphin ring. its planar structure with an extended conjugated π-electron system provides aromatic characteristics and a special coordination cavity for the binding of metal ions of suitable radius [1-2]. metalloporphyrins are the central parts of naturally important compounds, e.g., magnesium(ii) chlorins in bacteriochlorophylls and chlorophylls; iron(ii) protoporphyrin in hemoglobin; and iron(iii) protoporphyrins in myoglobin, cytochromes, oxidase, peroxidase, catalase, and oxoanion reductase enzymes. ringed tetrapyrroles provide strong chelating effect which can promote the hyperaccumulation of rare metal ions in living cells, and also in abiotic environments, e.g. in kerogens. in porphyrins the conjugation favors a planar structure. however, peripheral substituents or the metal center (originating from its size or axial ligand) can cause geometrical distortion. this certainly affects the functions of enzymes, as well as the biosynthesis of metalloporphyrins. in chemical research, due to distortion, redox potentials, basicity, reactivity, catalytic *correspondence: valicsek@almos.uni-pannon.hu activity and coordinative abilities of porphyrins can be modified. also, due to the distortion, the degree of symmetry decreases, resulting in characteristic spectral changes in various ranges of the electromagnetic spectrum. the most frequent types of distortions are dome, saddle, ruffled and wave (chair-like) [3]. overcrowded substitution on the periphery [3-4] or insufficiently short metal-nitrogen bonds due to the shrinkage of the coordination cavity can cause the ruffled or saddled deformation [2, 5-7]. if, however, the m-n bonds are significantly longer than half the length of the diagonal n-n distance in the free-base porphyrin, dome deformation can occur. this happens if the radius of the metal center exceeds the critical value of about 75-90 pm (depending on the type of porphyrin ligand) or square planar coordination is not preferred. such metal ions are too big to fit into the ligand cavity. hence they are located above the plane of the pyrrolic nitrogens; forming sitting-atop (sat) or out-of-plane (oop see fig.1) complexes, displaying thermodynamic instability, kinetic lability, typical photophysical features and photochemical reactivity [89]. in this work, we review our recent results regarding the formation, structure and photoinduced behavior of water-soluble oop metalloporphyrins. these complexes with a diverse range of metal ions can be more simply produced in aqueous systems than in organic solvents. in this regard one of the most suitable free-base ligands is the anionic 5,10,15,20-tetrakis(4sulfonatophenyl)porphyrin (h2tspp 4– see fig.1) due valicsek, kiss, fodor, imran, and horváth hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 30 to its negative charge promoting the coordination of positively charged metal ions. besides, this ligand is the most frequently used reagent among the free-base porphyrins [1]. 2. experimental analytical grade tetrasodium 5,10,15,20-tetrakis(4sulfonatophenyl)porphyrin (c44h26n4o12s4na4·12h2o = na4h2tspp·12h2o) (sigma–aldrich) and simple metal salts such as nitrate, sulfate, chloride or perchlorate were used for the experiments. the solvent was double-distilled water purified with a millipore milli-q system. the ph of the majority of the metalloporphyrin solutions was adjusted to 8 by application of a borate buffer, whilst maintaining the ionic strength at a constant value of 0.01 m. in a few cases, the ph was regulated to 6, and the ionic strength to 1 m, by an acetate buffer, to hinder hydrolysis. the absorption spectra were recorded and the spectrophotometric titrations were monitored by using a specord s-100 or a specord s-600 diode array spectrophotometer. for the measurement of fluorescence spectra, a perkin elmer ls-50b or a horiba jobin yvon fluoromax-4 spectrofluorometer was applied. the latter piece of equipment supplemented with a time-correlated single photon counting (tcspc) accessory was utilized to determine fluorescence lifetimes, too. uv-vis spectrophotometric data (molar absorption, fluorescence quantum yields and lifetimes) of the free-base porphyrin were used as references for the determination of those of metalloporphyrin complexes [1]. for the determination of photochemical properties via continuous irradiations, a piece of amko lti photolysis equipment (containing a 200w xe–hg lamp and a monochromator) was applied. for the electronic structural calculations, the b3lyp density functional theory (dft) method and the lanl2dz basis set were used. on the basis of our earlier quantum chemistry experiences, the sulfonatophenyl substituents exhibit negligible effects on the coordination of the metal center in the cavity; thus, the anionic porphyrin (h2tspp 4− ) can be modeled on the unsubstituted porphin (h2p) [4, 10]. 3. results and discussion 3.1. uv-vis spectrophotometry porphyrins and their derivatives belong to the strongest light-absorbing materials (both natural and artificial), therefore, ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometry is one of the most fundamental, in addition, most informative spectroscopic techniques in porphyrin chemistry. they possess two ππ * electronic transitions in the visible range of the electromagnetic spectrum: bor soret band at about 350-500 nm, usually with a molar absorbance of 10 5 m -1 cm -1 (fig.2), and q bands at 500-750 nm generally with intensities of one order of magnitude less. these latter bands in free-base ligands split due to the presence of protons on two diagonally situated pyrrolic nitrogens, to be more precise, as a result of the reduced symmetry (because of the disappearance of the four-fold rotation axis) compared to the metallated or deprotonated forms. this split is not detectable in the soret range, hence, these two types of bands in the visible region are remarkably different [1]. in the soret region, compared to the corresponding free-base ligands, the typical in-plane metalloporphyrins (e.g. fe 3+ , au 3+ , cu 2+ , pd 2+ ) exhibit blueshifts because the atomic orbitals of their metal centers which are covalently bonded in the plane can overlap more strongly with the highest occupied molecular orbitals (homo) of the ligand, resulting in a stronger reduction in energy; whereas the lowest unoccupied molecular orbitals (lumo) do not change. thus, the energy gaps between the excited and ground states become greater. in the oop complexes, the atomic orbitals of the more weakly bonded metal ions (e.g. cd 2+ , hg 2+ , tl 3+ ) may slightly affect the unoccupied mos and to a lesser extent the occupied ones, leading to a reduction of the energy gaps, i.e. an increase in the corresponding wavelengths (scheme 1) [1, 9]. a) b) figure 1. structure of an in-plane metalloporphyrin {mtspp=metallo-5,10,15,20-tetrakis(4sulfonatophenyl)porphyrin} (a); and that of an out-of-plane complex (b) [9]. study of the out-of-plane metalloporphyrins 45(1) pp. 29–36 (2017) 31 beside electronic factors, due to the rigidity of the porphyrins’ ringed structure, steric effects also influence the spectra: the redshift of absorption bands is one of the most common spectroscopic consequences of the non-planarity of porphyrin [3]. octabrominated freebase porphyrin, h2tsppbr8 4– , was applied to investigate the spectrophotometric effects of the macrocycle’s highly saddle-distorted structure (fig.2). in porphyrins with aryl substituents, this distortion can lead to the extension of delocalization by the twisting of aryl substituents from a nearly perpendicular orientation closer to the porphyrin plane (fig.1) [4]. the larger, post-transition metal ions, e.g. thallium(i), lead(ii) and bismuth(iii) ions, can cause a similarly large redshift of the porphyrins’ absorption bands. since their complexes possess the most highly dome-distorted structures, also a ruffled-like deformation of the periphery superposes on this high degree of doming. considering the spectral effects (bathochromic or not quite exactly hyperchromic effects), the complexes possessing such highly redshifted absorption bands used to be referred to as hyperporphyrins; depending on the highest occupied electron subshell of the metal center, por d-type hyperporphyrins. previously in terms of this categorization of metalloporphyrins, only the electronic effects of the metal ion (through its electron configuration) were taken into consideration and not steric (distorting) effects [1]. nevertheless, in the typical d-type hyperporphyrins, e.g. the low-spin chromium(iii), manganese(iii), nickel(ii) and cobalt(iii) porphyrins, the radius of the metal center, and thus, the metal-nitrogen bonds are too short, resulting in the contraction of the coordination cavity, along with the ruffled deformation of the macrocycle [2, 5-7]. 3.2. equilibrium and kinetics of complex formation porphyrins are peculiar ligands in terms of complexation due to their planar, cyclic, rigid, aromatic, tetradentate, as well as protonated structure. the formation of an out-of-plane complex of a large metal ion is usually at least two orders of magnitude faster than that of an in-plane one since a smaller metal ion is not able to coordinate to all four pyrrolic nitrogens of the reaction intermediate, in the cavity of which the two protons also remain {h2-p-m}. therefore, dissociation of the metal ion is more favorable than that of the protons. besides the insertion of a smaller metal ion, its dissociation from the in-plane complex of the endproduct may be kinetically hindered due to the rigidity of the macrocycle [1]. formation of the in-plane complexes used to be enhanced by the addition of a small concentration of a metal ion with larger ionic radius (e.g. cd 2+ , hg 2+ , pb 2+ ) to the solution of the smaller one because the insertion of the larger metal ion into the ligand cavity is much faster. however, the oop complex is considerably less stable. in its dome-distorted structure, two diagonal pyrrolic nitrogens are more accessible from the other side of the ligand, owing to the enhancement of their sp 3 hybridization, hence, the metal center can be easily exchanged for the smaller one [1-2, 9]. this accessibility makes the realization of dinuclear out-of-plane monoporphyrins (2:1 complexes) possible if the metal ion possesses a low (single) positive charge and is large, i.e. its charge density is small enough, e.g. mercury(i), silver(i) and thallium(i) ions [1, 8-9]. moreover, the out-of-plane position of the metal center, together with the dome-distorted structure (owing to the twisting of aromatic substituents from a nearly perpendicular position closer to the porphyrin plane) may promote the formation of so-called sandwich complexes of various compositions, in which two metal ions can coordinate to one macrocycle, and, reversely, one metal ion can concomitantly coordinate to two ligands, (fig.3) [1-2, 9]. lanthanide(iii) ions form typical examples of metallo-oligoporphyrins because they are inclined to form complexes of higher coordination number (8-12). however, they are hard lewis acids, hence, their insertion into the coordination cavity of the softer n-donor porphyrin ligand is a slow and complicated process in aqueous solutions. this scheme 1. simplified energy level diagram for the change of the porphyrin’s molecular orbitals in different types of complexes [9]. figure 2. absorption spectra of the free base (h2tspp 4–); the highly distorted, octabrominated free base (h2tsppbr8 4–); a typical in-plane (pdiitspp4–); and a typical out-of-plane metalloporphyrin (hgiitspp4–) within the soret range [1]. valicsek, kiss, fodor, imran, and horváth hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 32 phenomenon partly originates from the stability of their aqua complexes. due to the consequence of their pearson-type hard character, they coordinate rather to the peripheral substituents of porphyrin (instead of the pyrrolic nitrogens), i.e. to the ionic group ensuring water-solubility if they possess similarly hard o-donor atoms (e.g. carboxy or sulfonatophenyl groups). at lower temperatures, under kinetic control, the early lanthanide(iii) ions are not able to coordinate into the cavity, rather to the periphery; resulting in the formation of the tail-to-tail dimer of free-base ligands (as the tail used to be referred to as the periphery). higher temperatures and thermodynamic control are also necessary for the insertion of metal ions into the cavity produced by four pyrrolic nitrogens; resulting in the formation of typical metalloporphyrin complexes. after the discovery of the possible coordination bonds between lanthanide ions and sulfonato substituents, the formation of lanthanide bisporphyrins may be realized as a tail-to-tail dimerization of two metallomonoporphyrin complexes through a metal bridge; deviating from the head-to-head connection as in the case of typical sandwich complexes (head refers to the cavity; see fig.3). on the basis of our previous experiences, the coordination position of lanthanide ions was influenced by the change in temperature [1-2], [1113]. during the investigation of the formation of “typical p-type hyperporphyrin” complexes (e.g. tl + , pb 2+ , bi 3+ ), the species possessing highly redshifted absorption bands are the end-products of metalation only in hydrophobic solvents, since they can appear in aqueous solutions as intermediates with shorter or longer lifetimes depending on the metal ion. the absorption spectra of the end-products of these transformation reactions are very similar (less redshifted) to those of the typical, common out-of-plane metallo-monoporphyrins (e.g. hg ii -porphyrin in fig.2). this phenomenon may be accounted for to the considerable coordination ability or the polarizing effect of water molecules, which can enable the complex to overcome the kinetic energy barrier towards the formation of the more stable structure, in which the metal center is located closer to the ligand plane, resulting in decreases in distortion, as well as redshift. furthermore, “hyperporphyrins” can appear as intermediates in smaller amounts during the formation of typical, common out-of-plane metallomonoporphyrins as well [1, 14]. in the case of “d-type hyperporphyrin” complexes (e.g. mn 3+ , co 3+ , ni 2+ ), the low-spin and ruffled complex with a contracted cavity can exist in a spinisomerization equilibrium with the high-spin and planar forms, which not only exhibits less redshift, but rather blueshifted absorption bands compared to those of the free-base ligand. this reaction can be influenced by the strength of the m-n bonds (owing to the electronic effects of peripheral or axial substituents), due to the size of the coordination cavity (owing to the substitution or saturation of methylidene bridges or pyrrolic carbons) [1-2, 5-7]. 3.3. photophysics porphyrins represent one of the most interesting groups of compounds in terms of photophysical properties and biological significance. due to their rigid structure and aromatic electronic system, they display two types of fluorescence: beside their relatively strong singlet-1 fluorescence in the range of 550–800 nm, weak and rare singlet-2 luminescence is observable between 400 and 550 nm upon excitation of the soret band (scheme 1) [1]. the quantum yields of s2-fluorescence are about 3 orders of magnitude lower than those of s1-fluorescence in the case of free-base porphyrins, especially ~1200fold for h2tspp 4 (6.3×10 -5 vs. 7.5%). however, this ratio decreases with metalation, mainly in the case of the formation of out-of-plane complexes. since the structure of s2-excited porphyrins may be close to that of the dome-distorted oop complexes that are already in the electronic ground state. another consequence of this structural similarity (namely small stokes shift) is that the directions of the shifts of s2-fluorescence bands invert (according to soret absorption) between the inplane (redshifted) and out-of-plane (blueshifted) complexes when compared to the free-base ligand [1]. singlet-1 fluorescence bands exhibit blueshifts in both types (in-plane and out-of-plane) of metalloporphyrins, as a consequence of the aforementioned split in free-base ligands because of the presence of two protons, as well as their reduced symmetry (scheme 1). furthermore, almost all complexes exhibit similarly large stokes shifts, as well as lifetimes and quantum yields. in the case of in-plane a) b) figure 3. potential structures of 3:2 bisporphyrin: (a) head-to-head or (b) tail-to-tail [2]. study of the out-of-plane metalloporphyrins 45(1) pp. 29–36 (2017) 33 metal centers, the spin-orbit coupling, as an electronic quenching effect, may be dominant. whereas for typical out-of-plane metalloporphyrins, the distortion, as a steric effect, can enhance their non-radiative decay. the highly distorted (dand p-type) hyperporphyrins, the paramagnetic in-plane complexes (e.g. fe iii tspp 3), as well as the head-to-head-type oop bisporphyrins {e.g. hg ii 3(tspp)2 6} do not exhibit significant levels of luminescence at room temperature. conversely, the paramagnetic out-of-plane complexes (e.g. ln iii tspp 3) possess similar fluorescence properties to that of the diamagnetic ones because a paramagnetic metal ion can cause the disappearance of fluorescence by spin-orbit coupling only if it is located in the plane. in the oop position, it is not able to perturb as efficiently the molecule orbitals of the macrocycle that result in the common absorption and emission out-of-plane characteristics [1-2, 9]. lanthanide(iii) bisporphyrins {ln iii 3(tspp)2 3} have many similarities in terms of absorption and emission properties to those of monoporphyrin complexes (ln iii tspp 3). these may only originate from the very weak π–π interactions between the macrocycles in the tail-to-tail-type aggregations (fig.3) [1-2, 11-13]. 3.4. photochemistry porphyrin derivatives are the main components of photosynthesis, synthetically as well. since the overall quantum yield of fluorescence and intersystem crossing resulting in the formation of triplet states is in excess of 95%, merely a slight proportion of excitation energy is dissipated as heat from singlet states. this ratio is the major reason why porphyrins are efficient in terms of optical sensations and photosensitizations. free-base and kinetically inert in-plane metalloporphyrins may be appropriate candidates to be applied in photocatalytic systems based on outer-sphere electron transfer. d-type hyperporphyrins can be particularly promising from this viewpoint owing to their distorted structure which may enhance the (photo)redox reactivity of these coordination compounds. in the presence of a suitable electron acceptor (methylviologen, mv 2+ ) and donor (e.g. triethanolamine, teoa), these complexes proved to be efficaciousl photocatalysts that transfer electrons between the ground-state reactants through an outersphere mechanism, generating the mv •+ radical cation. this system can be applied for the production of hydrogen from water [2, 5-7]. contrarily, the inner-sphere photoredox reactions are characteristic of the out-of-plane metalloporphyrins because of this special coordination (scheme 2): an irreversible photoinduced charge-transfer from the ligand to the metal center (ligand-to-metal charge transfer, lmct) improves the efficiency of charge separation, which allows their utilization as catalysts in cyclic processes for the synthesis of chemicals capable of conserving light energy, hopefully in terms of the photochemical cleavage of water. due to photoinduced lmct the charge of the metal center decreases and its size increases, overall its charge density diminishes, hence, the coordinative bonds can easily split. the reduced metal ion can leave the cavity, primarily in polar solvents, and induce further redox reactions. the latter processes strongly depend on the stability of the reduced metalion in the actual medium. the oxidized and metal-free (cat)ionic radical of porphyrin is a very strong base: it is immediately protonated and forms the free-base radical, which is a long-lived and rather strong electron acceptor, especally in deaerated solutions. since it would only oxidize water to oxygen at higher phs, a slightly more efficent reducer (such as alcohols or aldehydes of low molecular weight) is needed, from which useful byproducts can be produced in terms of photocatalytic hydrogen generation. in the absence of any electron donor that promotes the regeneration of the porphyrin, it undergoes the primary photochemical processes; an overall four-electron oxidation involving a ring-cleavage, the end-product of which is a dioxotetrapyrrole derivative (bilindione). this ring-opening process can be followed by spectrophotometry owing to the disappearance of the soret band, as well as the typical change in the region of q bands [2, 4, 8-16]. photochemical quantum yields of this ring-opening reaction (without regeneration) are about 2-3 orders of magnitude higher for the out-of-plane complexes (10 -4 – 10 -2 ) than for the free-base and in-plane metalloporphyrins (10 -6 – 10 -5 ). in addition, in the case of out-of-plane complexes, photoinduced dissociation in scheme 2. simplified demonstration of the mechanism for the inner-sphere photoredox reaction of an out-ofplane metalloporphyrin [8]. valicsek, kiss, fodor, imran, and horváth hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 34 the absence of a redox reaction can occur, originating from their lability, and structural transformations to another complex form or conformer were observed in some cases as a photoinduced change of the type or measure of distortion (e.g. dand p-type hyperporphyrins) [2, 4, 8-10, 14-16]. besides the typical post-transition metal ions, lanthanide(iii) ions were also applied for out-of-plane coordination because their contraction makes the finetuning of the out-of-plane distance possible, and their high negative redox potentials promote the photoinduced cleavage of water. photochemical activities of their complexes confirm that the redox potentials of the metal centers are not the main determining factor, rather their out-of-plane distances [2, 11-13]. deviating from the oop complexes of posttransition metal ions, another stable photoproduct was observable during the photolysis of lanthanide(iii) porphyrins. it displays a typical absorption band in the q range (at ~600 nm), which may be assigned as a charge transfer between the metal ion and open-chain, dioxo-tetrapyrrole derivative (bilindione, see scheme 2). its oxo-groups, as donor atoms, may coordinate with the lanthanide ions, as a consequence of their similar pearson-type hard characteristics, contrary to the softer post-transition metal ions [2, 11]. during the photolysis experiments, only small differences appeared between lanthanide(iii) monoand bisporphyrin complexes, which might confirm a special type of aggregation through the peripheral sulfonato substituents with weak π-π interactions (tail-to-tail, see fig.3) [2, 11-13]. deviating from these observations, the differences are much more significant in the case of the most typical, post-transition metallo-bisporphyrin compared to the monoporphyrin equivalent; namely between hg ii 3(tspp)2 6 and hg ii tspp 4. the overall quantum yield is ~2 orders of magnitude higher and the photoinduced dissociation of a metal ion became the dominant reaction in the head-to-head sandwich complex as a consequence of the strong π-π interactions [9-10]. 3.5. quantum chemical calculations the main aims of our electronic structural calculations were to determine the primary consequences for the outof-plane position of a metal center, and confirm the experimentally observed correlation between the uvvis spectral shifts and the coordination position of the metal center (in-plane or out-of-plane). in the light of these aspects, the unsubstituted porphin (h2p, c20h14n4) was used as a model for the calculations, instead of the tetrakis(sulfonatophenyl)porphyrin (h2tspp 4– , c44h26n4o12s4 4). on the basis of the few comparative calculations that were conducted, the phenyl-, as well as the sulfonatophenyl substituents have negligible effects on the coordination of the metal center in the cavity. however, they can significantly influence the formation of bisporphyrin complexes, even in the case of head-tohead structures [4, 10]. according to our quantum chemical experience, the value of the critical radius became ~100 pm instead of the experimentally suggested ~75-90 pm as a consequence of the significant expansion of the coordination cavity to coplanarly incorporate the metal ions. the proportion of borderline cases, i.e. complexes with questionable structures (somewhere between inplane and out-of-plane), increased with further posttransition metal ions (e.g. ag 2+ [15], cd 2+ [4], tl 3+ [16]) that possess ionic radii of ~90-95 pm. calculated bond lengths (m-n) and atomic distances (n-n) considerably deviate from the expected ones supposed on the basis of the values of the deprotonated porphyrins (p 2). to describe this phenomenon, an axial ligand was applied to these metal centers to extract them out of the cavity. consequently, expansion stopped, and the out-of-plane distance increased dramatically together with the degree of dome distortion and redshifts of absorption bands. from this point of view, two possible explanations can be supposed for the borderline-case complexes: the experimentally observed common oop characteristics may originate from this expansion, tension; and small perturbations (e.g. the axial coordination in the calculation or photoexcitation in the experiments) may facilitate the metal center to adopt an out-of-plane position, too. another possibility is that the method of calculation strongly prefers planar structures. in our time-dependent density functional theory (td-dft) calculations, the correlation found between the measured and calculated shifts associated with the position of the metal center was not totally linear, but nevertheless acceptable. the main exceptions were the borderline cases (high-spin mn 2+ , fe 2+ and zn 2+ ) and the d-type hyperporphyrins (because their structures were determined to be totally planar), as well as the p-type hyperporphyrins (because a ruffled-like deformation did not superpose on their dome-like structure). the regression of correlation was much worse within the soret band than in the case of the q bands. the soret band was also split in the calculations, which cannot be detected experimentally. on the basis of further experimental observations and doubts in the literature, the validity of the theoretical model in use at present is questionable. hence, the development of a more suitable one is in progress. 4. conclusion in conclusion, it can be declared that the categorization of metalloporphyrins was complemented by the role of their distortion, which is primarily responsible for their spectral features, whereas the electronic structure of their metal centers is a secondary factor, with a considerable level of emphasis on the in-plane complexes. the position of the metal center (in-plane or out-of-plane) in the monoporphyrin complexes, as well as the type (head-to-head or tail-to-tail) of the bisporphyrin complexes can be determined on the basis of their uv-vis absorption and emission properties. study of the out-of-plane metalloporphyrins 45(1) pp. 29–36 (2017) 35 hyperporphyrin spectra can appear, owing to the peripheral substitution (octabromination) of free-base ligands. furthermore, the high degree of redshift may disappear during the spin isomerization of d-type metalloporphyrins or the transformation of p-type ones. consequently, the real origin cannot be an electronic but rather a steric effect, namely the measure of distortion, which can confirm the absence of their fluorescence. in terms of photochemical activity, several dissimilarities were found between the in-plane and outof-plane metalloporphyrins; the most remarkable of them was the mechanism of their photoredox reactions: outer-sphere electron transfer is typical of the previous ones, while the inner-sphere equivalent is most prevalent for the latter ones. as a further consequence of the oop position of the metal center, photoinduced dissociation and transformation reactions can occur within their complexes. in our electronic structural calculations, the number of borderline-case complexes expanded, on the basis of which common oop characteristics that can be experimentally observed may acquire a novel explanation. acknowledgement this research was supported by the széchenyi 2020 fund under the ginop-2.3.2-15-2016-00016 and efop-3.6.1-16-2016-00015 projects. assistance with quantum chemical calculations provided by professor györgy lendvay (research centre for natural sciences, hungarian academy of sciences) is gratefully acknowledged. finally, this manuscript is dedicated to the memory of professor jános liszi, who, as the head of the doctoral school for chemistry at the university of veszprém, praised the corresponding author’s phd dissertation of a similar title in 2007. references [1] valicsek, z.; horváth, o.: application of the electronic spectra of porphyrins for analytical purposes: the effects of metal ions and structural distortions, microchem. j., 2013 107, 47–62 doi: 10.1016/j.microc.2012.07.002 [2] horváth, o.; valicsek, z.; fodor, m.a.; major, m.m.; imran, m.; grampp, g.; wankmüller, a.: visible light-driven photophysics and photochemistry of water-soluble metalloporphyrins, coord. chem. rev., 2016 325, 59–66 doi: 10.1016/j.ccr.2015.12.011 [3] shelnutt, j.a.; song, x.-z.; ma, j.-g.; jia, s.-l.; jentzen, w.; medforth, c.j.: nonplanar porphyrins and their significance in proteins, chem. soc. rev., 1998 27, 31–41 doi: 10.1039/a827031z [4] valicsek, z.; horváth, o.; lendvay, g.; kikaš, i.; škorić, i.: formation, photophysics, and photochemistry of cadmium(ii) complexes with 5,10,15,20-tetrakis(4-sulfonatophenyl)porphyrin and its octabromo derivative: the effects of bromination and the axial hydroxo ligand, j. photochem. photobiol. a, 2011 218, 143–155 doi: 10.1016/j.jphotochem.2010.12.014 [5] fodor, m.a.; horváth, o.; fodor, l.; grampp, g.; wankmüller, a.: photophysical and photocatalytic behavior of cobalt(iii) 5,10,15,20-tetrakis(1methylpyridinium-4-yl)porphyrin, inorg. chem. commun., 2014 50, 110–112 doi: 10.1016/j.inoche.2014.10.029 [6] fodor, m.a.; horváth, o.; fodor, l.; vazdar, k.; grampp, g.; wankmüller, a.: photophysical and photochemical properties of manganese complexes with cationic porphyrin ligands: effects of alkyl substituents and micellar environment, j. photochem. photobiol. a, 2016 328, 233–239 doi: 10.1016/j.jphotochem.2016.06.011 [7] major, m.m.; horváth, o.; fodor, m.a.; fodor, l.; valicsek, z.; grampp, g.; wankmüller, a.: photophysical and photocatalytic behavior of nickel(ii) 5,10,15,20-tetrakis(1-methylpyridinium-4-yl) porphyrin, inorg. chem. commun., 2016 73, 1–3 doi: 10.1016/j.inoche.2016.09.001 [8] horváth, o.; valicsek, z.; harrach, g.; lendvay, g.; fodor, m.a.: spectroscopic and photochemical properties of water-soluble metalloporphyrins of distorted structure, coord. chem. rev., 2012 256, 1531–1545 doi: 10.1016/j.ccr.2012.02.011 [9] horváth, o.; huszánk, r.; valicsek, z.; lendvay, g.: photophysics and photochemistry of kinetically labile, water-soluble porphyrin complexes, coord. chem. rev., 2006 250, 1792–1803 doi: 10.1016/j.ccr.2006.02.014 [10] valicsek, z.; lendvay, g.; horváth, o.: equilibrium, photophysical, photochemical and quantum chemical examination of anionic mercury(ii) monoand bisporphyrins, j. phys. chem. b, 2008 112(46), 14509–14524 doi: 10.1021/jp804039s [11] imran, m.; szentgyörgyi, c.; eller, g.; valicsek, z.; horváth, o.: peculiar photoinduced properties of water-soluble, early lanthanide(iii) porphyrins, inorg. chem. commun., 2015 52, 60–63 doi: 10.1016/j.inoche.2014.12.016 [12] kiss, m.p.; imran, m.; szentgyörgyi, c.; valicsek, z.; horváth, o.: peculiarities of the reactions between early lanthanide(iii) ions and an anionic porphyrin, inorg. chem. commun., 2014 48, 22–25 doi: 10.1016/j.inoche.2014.08.001 [13] valicsek, z.; eller, g.; horváth, o.: equilibrium, photophysical and photochemical examination of anionic lanthanum(iii) monoand bisporphyrins: the effects of the out-of-plane structure, dalton trans., 2012 41, 13120–13131 doi: 10.1039/c2dt31189e [14] valicsek, z.; horváth, o.; patonay, k.: formation, photophysical and photochemical properties of water-soluble bismuth(iii) porphyrins: the role of the charge and structure, j. photochem. photobiol. a, 2011 226, 23– 35 doi: 10.1016/j.jphotochem.2011.10.011 valicsek, kiss, fodor, imran, and horváth hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 36 [15] harrach, g.; valicsek, z.; horváth, o.: watersoluble silver(ii) and gold(iii) porphyrins: the effect of structural distortion on the photophysical and photochemical behavior, inorg. chem. commun. 2011 14, 1756–1761 doi: 10.1016/j.inoche.2011.08.003 [16] valicsek, z.; horváth, o.: formation, photophysics and photochemistry of thallium(iii) 5,10,15,20tetrakis(4-sulphonatophenyl)porphyrin: new supports of typical sitting-atop features, j. photochem. photobiol. a, 2007 186, 1–7 doi: 10.1016/j.jphotochem.2006.07.003 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 50 pp. 33–43 (2022) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.33927/hjic-2022-07 unraveling the novel bacterial assisted biodegradation pathway of morpholine rupak kumar*1 , suman kapur2 , and srinivasa rao vulichi2,3 1central drugs standard control organization, new delhi, india 2birla institute of technology and science – pilani, hyderabad campus, hyderabad, india 3svu college of pharmaceutical sciences, sri venkateswara university, tirupati, india most xenobiotics are biodegradable, persistent or recalcitrant in nature. morpholine, a typical xenobiotic, was initially regarded as recalcitrant, however, later proved to be biodegradable by bacterial species like mycobacterium and pseudomonas in particular. however, establishing the metabolic pathways involved for the successful biodegradation of morpholine is challenging because of its extreme level of water solubility that affects various analytical procedures. in addition, to date, no suitable analytical methods have been reported to directly estimate morpholine and its degradable products or intermediates. nevertheless, methods, especially optical density, gas chromatography and mass spectrophotometric analysis, could indirectly estimate the degradation product(s) of morpholine formed as a result of its biotransformation. in the present study, the degradation pathway of morpholine was ascertained by selected bacterial isolates by measuring their capacity to degrade morpholine. based on this analysis of culture filtrates, it was determined that the novel isolate is the genus halobacillus blutaparonensis which follows the diglycolic acid route from the metabolic degradation pathway of morpholine to induce one of two branches of the morpholine biodegradation pathway. in the presence of concentration of morpholine, out of two branches of morpholine degradation one branch is induced, while the other branch is inhibited. whatever the branches with regard to the degradation pathway of morpholine exhibited by bacteria are, ammonia is the final end product of degradation which might be biochemically utilized by the isolate. keywords: morpholine, xenobiotic, recalcitrant, glycolic acid route, ammonia 1. introduction environmental pollution has become a global problem. due to the indiscriminate and frequent release of xenobiotics as a result of different anthropogenic activities, each and every day our environment becomes increasingly devastated by the pollutants. morpholine (1-oxa4-azacyclohexane) is one such heterocyclic xenobiotic organic chemical with different versatile applications in various processes in the rubber, paper, iron, textile, personal care, pharmaceutical and agricultural industries amongst others. as a consequence of its vast operational usage, a significant amount of this chemical is released into the environment through the differential process of discharging at both microand macro-concentrations. therefore, it is necessary to mention that anthropogenic environmental pollutants, even at low concentrations, often produce deleterious effects on organisms, which are recieved: 1 march 2022; revised: 20 april 2022; accepted: 26 april 2022 *correspondence: rupakraman@gmail.com difficult to predict because measurable effects are expressed only after prolonged exposure. in the environment, the majority of exposure to morpholine originates from water and leads to the formation of the carcinogen n-nitrosomorpholine (nmor) by the process of natural nitrosation [1] (fig. 1). furthermore, it is pertinent to mention that this process of nitrosation may occur in biological systems when directly consumed, ingested, inhaled and applied to the skin. in addition, nmor is known as a mediator of various debilitating cancers associated with organs like the digestive tract, respiratory tract, kidneys and liver, which is eventually biomagnified through different trophic levels of biota by its application or the intake of polluted water leading to this carcinogen entering the food chain. in figure 1: formation of nmor https://doi.org/10.33927/hjic-2022-07 mailto:rupakraman@gmail.com 34 kumar, kapur, and vulichi this regard, it would be best to provide a solution for its efficient discharge or effective removal by different physical and chemical processes. recently, photocatalysis using catalysts irradiated by ultraviolet or visible light has been applied for the mineralization of toxic organic dyes in water and carbon dioxide [2, 3]. however, a costeffective, environmentally-friendly biological tool powered by microbes has been widely used as an ancient core concept for the purpose of conserving the natural environment and resources to curb the negative impacts on biotic components. therefore, a sustainable solution driven by microbes must be explored to elucidate the degradation pathway and measure how potent microbes are for the purposes of decontaminating a wide range of pollutants and their mitigation. in general, most pollutants are organic and may be biodegradable (transformed by biological mechanisms which might lead to mineralization), persistent (fail to undergo bioremediation in the environment or under a specific set of experimental conditions) or recalcitrant (inherently resistant to biodegradation) in nature. biogenic or naturally occurring compounds are biodegradable while man-made (anthropogenic) compounds may be biodegradable, persistent or recalcitrant. in terms of xenobiotics that are man-made, the microbial communities present in the environment may not have evolved suitable mechanisms for their degradation. many possible mechanisms exist which differ from one xenobiotic to another. one common mechanism is the binding of enzymes analogous to their natural substrates which contain xenobiotic functional groups, assuming these do not greatly alter or change the active site which catalyzes a reaction with the xenobiotic. the success of this enzymatic reaction (as a biodegradation mechanism) also depends on other factors such as the ability of the xenobiotic as an inducer or inhibitor and the nature of the product/intermediate formed. specific to morpholine, the metabolic degradation pathway has been very difficult to establish because of the aforementioned technical limitation. 1.1 sustainable remediation of morpholine and its degradation pathway although morpholine was previously thought to be recalcitrant, several microbes have proven to metabolically degrade it. the majority of studies showed that the species mycobacterium and pseudomonas are the two potential bacterial isolates that utilize morpholine as their sole source of carbon and nitrogen, thereby undergoing degradation [4–7]. a few studies have been carried out to understand the biodegradation of morpholine and its regulation [8–10]. later a hypothetical pathway was proposed for the complete mineralization of morpholine that could proceed via 2-(2-aminoethoxy)acetate to produce its diglycolate salt and/or ethanolamine [5, 11, 12]. these two different routes of degradation are called the ethanolamine/monoethanolamine pathway (pathway 1) (a) (b) figure 2: (a) hypothetical pathway of morpholine degradation where x = 2-(2-aminoethoxy)acetaldehyde, y = 2(2-aminoethoxy)acetate and a, b, c indicate the position of carbon atoms in the ring. (b) postulation of the morpholine degradation pathway after 1h-nmr and ion spectroscopic analyses where 1 = 2-(2-aminoethoxy)acetate, 2 = diglycolic acid and 3 = glycolic acid. and diglycolic acid/glycolate pathway (pathway 2), respectively (fig. 2a). the illustrated degradation pathway might start with the cleavage of the c-n bond, leading to the formation of an intermediary amino acid which is followed by deamination and oxidation of this amino acid to form a diacid [11, 12]. the degradation of morpholine via the ethanolamine or glycolate pathways has been described in the presence of mycobacterium chelonae and m. aurum mo1 [8, 9] (fig. 2a). the degradation of morpholine is likely to begin with the breakage of a bond between a heteroatom and an adjacent carbon atom by the enzyme morpholine monooxygenase, which is responsible for the ring cleavage. morpholine monooxygenase is an important enzyme in the degradation of morpholine as it catalyzes the biotransformation of morpholine to form 2(2-aminoethoxy)acetic acid and contains a catalytic subunit of cytochrome p450 [1, 10]. morpholine could serve as a substrate for flavin-containing monooxygenases or cytochromes p450 which is associated with oxygen consumption [13]. further inhibitory effects of metyrapone on the degradation of the mycobacterium strain rp1 have been attributed to the involvement of cytochromes p450 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry bacterial assisted biodegradation pathway of morpholine 35 in the biodegradation of morpholine [5]. depending on the concentration of morpholine in the culture medium, one pathway could be expressed while the other might be inhibited [11]. recently, a new approach was applied in which the culture filtrate was analyzed by 1h-nmr spectroscopy and ion spectroscopy to identify the metabolic intermediates of morpholine degradation by m. aurum mo1 [11, 12] (fig. 2). although many different species of mycobacterium have been shown to degrade morpholine via this shared group of degradation reactions, little information is known about the enzymes involved (fig. 2b). furthermore, the byproducts of the microbial processes can be indicative of a successful bioremediation process. consequently, since only hypothetical pathways have been proposed, limited interpretations of various experimental designs can be made to establish the degradation pathway that follows the route of degradation pathway that follows the route of pathway 1 and /or pathway 2 via the shared formation of 2-(2aminoethoxy)acetate. 2. materials and methods 2.1 environmental samples the sample used in the present degradation study was collected from natural sources (soil) in and around durgapur steel plant, west bengal, india. the site is located in durgapur at a latitude of 51◦50’43.8” north and a longitude of 8◦16’35.8” west in the state of west bengal, india. soil samples consisted of blackish fine-to-medium sub-angular gravel in the upper surface, including fine sand and a high content of iron flecks. samples were collected in a clean, sterile plastic container before being transferred to the laboratory and stored at room temperature until used for further analysis. 2.2 chemicals and reagents all chemicals and reagents were of analytical grade and used as received without any further purification. even though milli-q water (elix essential 3 water purification system with a conductance of 0.12 siemens) was used to prepare an aqueous solution of reagents, autoclaved double distilled water was used because of the microbial cultures. 2.3 screening, characterization and sequence accession of the morpholinedegrading isolate for the initial isolation and cultivation of bacteria, tenfold serial diluted samples were spread onto nutrient agar plates, which were prepared according to the manufacturer’s instructions. the specific colonies obtained were subcultured further to isolate the pure bacterial strain. the selected pure bacterial isolate was identified based on morphological, biochemical and molecular characterization. morphological characterization was achieved by visually observing colonies in terms of their appearance, shape, color, arrangement, optical nature, margin, texture and elevation. however, the biochemical tests were performed as per standard methods [14]. furthermore, the pure colony was then identified by 16s rrna gene sequence analysis. in order to verify the phylogenetic affiliation of the selected isolate, a single colony was collected for the purpose of dna isolation (instagenetm matrix genomic dna isolation kit (bio-rad catalog # 7326030) as per the kit instructions and procedures) and subjected to polymeric chain reaction (pcr) analysis using primers targeting two 16s rrna genes [27f (5’-agagtttgatcmtggctcag-3’) and 1492r (5’tacggytaccttgttacgactt-3’-). a pcr reaction (20 µl) was performed containing 8 µl of taq dna polymerase master mix, 1 µl of both 10 µm stock 27f/1492r primers, 9 µl of double distilled water and 1 µl of a dna template. the pcr (mj research ptc200 peltier thermal cycler; bio-rad ptc-200) reaction was conducted using specified conditions from the literature [15]. dna was denatured at 94◦c for 5 mins, followed by 35 cycles of amplification, each consisting of the following components: 94◦c for 45 secs (denaturation), 55◦c for 60 secs (annealing), 72◦c for 60 secs, (extension) followed by 72◦c for 10 mins (final extension). the pcr product was sequenced by yaazh xenomics, chennai, tamil nadu, india. the 16s rrna gene was sequenced using the national center for biotechnology information’s basic local alignment search tool (blast). the phylogenetic analysis of the sequence using the closely related sequence of blast results was performed by multiple sequence alignment. the program muscle 3.7 was used for multiple sequence alignments [16]. the resulting aligned sequences were filtered using the program gblocks 0.91b, which eliminates poorly aligned positions and divergent regions, that is, removes alignment noise [17]. finally, the program phyml 3.0 alrt was used for phylogenetic analysis and hky85 as a substitution model. the nucleotide sequence of the isolated bacterium was included in ncbi’s genbank and assigned an accession number consisting of 2 letters and 6 numbers [18]. 2.4 cultivation and acclimatization of the isolate: microbial adaptation against morpholine bacterial inocula were prepared by aseptically transferring the selected identified pure colonies to 10 ml of an enriched media called knapp buffer. alternatively, a mineral salt solution (mss) comprised of 100 mg of kh2po4, 100 mg of k2hpo4, 4 mg of mgso4.7h2o and 0.2 mg of fecl3 was used as previously described by the author supplemented with 0.1% v/v morpholine as previously described by the author [19]. cultures were incubated at 37oc as well as 150 rpm for 1−2 weeks and 50 pp. 33–43 (2022) 36 kumar, kapur, and vulichi table 1: gc parameters for the estimation of the monoethanolamine concentration parameters specificity column and its configuration rtx-35 30 mm × 0.32 mm × 1 µm oven/column temperature initial temp.: 60 ◦c hold: 1 min ramp rate: 30 ◦c/min final temp.: 240 ◦c maintained for 3 mins linear velocity: 37.6 cm/sec (for nitrogen) injection port temp.: 200 ◦c split ratio: 30:1 injection volume: 1 µl carrier gases (mobile phase) column gas flow rate: 2 ml/min purge gas flow rate: 1 ml/min hydrogen gas flow rate: 40 ml/min zero air flow rate: 400 ml/min nitrogen gas flow rate: 15 ml/min stationary phase 60% dimethylpolysiloxane and 35% diphenyl polysiloxane detector flame ionization detector at 300 ◦c analysis time 10 mins software gc solution workstation windows 8 their absorbance at 600 nm was taken regularly as a measure of growth. based on their growth, when an optical density of 0.5 was reached (data not shown), the culture was diluted to 1 : 100 before being further spread onto mss-agar plates (treated with 2% agar + 0.1% morpholine) to confirm the acclimatization of the isolate against morpholine stress. furthermore, the growing culture was centrifuged at 6500 rpm for 10 mins and the pellet was resuspended in the mss medium while gradually increasing the concentration of morpholine to 0.2% which was referred to as a seeded acclimatized bacterial inoculum. for each increased acclimatization study, the tested bacteria were grown in an mss broth supplemented with an increased concentration of morpholine and a respective mss-agar plate with the same concentration of morpholine to confirm the said acclimatization. the acclimatized inoculum was later grown in the presence of an intermediate degradation product of morpholine to explore whether this particular isolate follows pathway 1 or 2. this was further validated by performing in-vitro chemical and analytical assay(s) with the availability of intermediate product of morpholine degradation in the culture filtrate. lastly, estimation of the ammoniacal nitrogen (measure of the amount of ammonia) in the culture filtrate revealed the complete degradation of morpholine by this isolate following the concerned pathway. 2.5 growth on different hypothetical degradation intermediate compounds the growth of the isolate on various substrates (degradation intermediate compounds) was investigated by adding the corresponding compounds (0.15%) to the mss. the ph of the media was adjusted to 7 and growth carried out at 37◦c as well as 150 rpm for 48 hours. at regular time intervals, the absorbance was measured in terms of optical density to establish whether these degradation products might have been formed to facilitate the growth of the isolated bacteria. 2.6 chemical tests of intermediate(s) in the degradation pathway chemical tests on degradation products, mainly monoethanolamine (primary amine) and morpholine (secondary amine), were carried out by the standard simon test 1 (rimini test) and simon test 2 (modified rimini test) on the culture filtrate to determine the presence of primary and secondary amines [20]. the amine undergoes a nucleophilic addition reaction with nitroprusside ions in the presence of acetaldehyde or a ketone to yield the characteristic color of primary amines (blue) or secondary amines (violet). 2.7 gas chromatography (gc) studies of degradation intermediate(s) a gc system (shimadzu gc-2010) equipped with a standard oven for temperature ramping, split condition, injection ports, a flame ionization detector and a rtx-35 amine column (30 mm × 0.32 mm × 1µm film thickness) in the presence of nitrogen as a carrier gas by the direct injection method was used for the analysis of monoethanolamine (mea). the analytical parameters for the analysis of mea are summarized in table 1, as per the method (by modifying the column and its parameters) reported in the literature [21]. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry bacterial assisted biodegradation pathway of morpholine 37 table 2: ms operating parameters for intermediate(s) parameter specificity ionization electrospray ionization needle voltage = 4.5 kv interface temperature 350 ◦c temperature of heating block 200 ◦c sheath/drying gas flow rate 15 l/min nebulizer gas flow rate 1.5 l/min acquisition time 2 mins acquisition mode positive/negative scan m/z 50 − 200 scan speed = 52 units/sec sampling acquisition time = 1.56 hz (640 msec) detector electron multiplier software lab solutions workstation windows 7 a standard solution of 0.125 to 0.5% v/v mea (corresponding to ppm and prepared in methanol) was injected along with the processed culture supernatant (1:10, filtrate volume of 1 and 9 volumes of methanol), as per the method described above. gc of the test samples was run against blank media using positive controls to quantify or estimate the presence of mea in the culture filtrate by analyzing the area under the curve (auc) calculated by the machine. 2.8 mass spectrometry studies of degradation intermediate(s) the mass spectrometry (ms) system of an integrated liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry instrument (shimadzu lcms-2020) equipped with an inlet interface, ion source, mass analyzer and detector was used to analyze the degradation products of morpholine. the analytical parameters for ascertain the morpholine degradation products are summarized in table 2. the sample for injection was prepared without using a solvent, as per the method reported in the literature [12]. the culture sample (5 ml) was centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 10 mins before the supernatant was filtered through a nylon filter with a pore size of 0.22 µm (axiva sichem biotech, india) to remove any bacterial cells. 1 ml of neat filtrate was injected directly into the ms instrument. 2.9 estimation of the ammonia concentration the presence of ammonia in the culture supernatant was estimated by the standard nessler’s method [22], which involves coupling of ammonium to the nessler’s reagent figure 3: estimation of the ammoniacal nitrogen concentration by nessler’s method to produce a yellow color under strongly alkaline conditions (fig. 3). the resulting yellow color was formed in proportion to the ammonium (nh+4 ) concentration and was measured at a wavelength of 405 nm using an elisa reader (elx50/8ms biotek india) against a reagent blank. the ammonia level in terms of ammoniacal nitrogen was expressed in mg/l (ppm). a standard solution of 10 ppm of nh+4 −n was prepared by dissolving 4.773 mg of ammonium chloride in 125 ml of doubledistilled water and further diluted to make solutions of 1 − 5 ppm nh+4 −n. a calibration curve was plotted and is presented in the results section. 3. results and discussion 3.1 morphological, biochemical and molecular identification morphologically, the isolate was found to be white in color with a dull opaque appearance, rod-shaped, have a smooth texture and grow as a convex elevation colony. standard staining reported it to be a gram-negative bacterium with high motility which also showed signs of growth on a selective medium, namely hicrome uti agar m1353. the primary sequence of the 16s rrna from the present bacterial isolate was determined. the program phyml 3.0 alrt for phylogenetic analysis and hky85 as a substitution model on the 16s rrna gene sequences determined the phylogenetic position of said isolate to be a species closely related to the genus halobacillus blutaparonensis with a sequence representative of e. coli (fig. 4). nucleotide sequence accession was assigned by genbank, ncbi and an accession number of kc345029 was figure 4: molecular phylogeny of the 16s rrna gene sequence and sequences from identified bacteria in the database. the sequence of e. coli served as the outgroup for rooting the tree. 50 pp. 33–43 (2022) 38 kumar, kapur, and vulichi figure 5: growth of the isolate in the presence of intermediates of morpholine degradation figure 6: gc (rtx-35)flame ionization detector chromatogram of mea assigned to this bacterial isolate of genus halobacillus blutaparonensis. 3.2 growth on intermediates the isolate grew in the presence of morpholine and the intermediate, namely aminoethoxy ethanol (reduced product of aminoethoxy acetate) by consuming it as a source of carbon and nitrogen. however, no growth was recorded in the presence of ethanolamine in the culture media shown in fig. 5. the count of bacterial cells was adjusted to 1×108 cells/ml (1 unit of absorbance = 5×108 cells) by varying the incubation periods up to 48 hours. 3.3 chemical assay of intermediate(s) based on simon tests 1 and 2 [20], the presence of mea and morpholine in the culture filtrate is shown in table 3. 3.4 gc studies of mea in the culture supernatant gc of the culture supernatant was run at different concentrations (ppm) of a standard mea solution. table 4 and fig. 6 indicate a retention time of mea equal to 2.2 mins which was absent in the diluted culture supernatant. gc analysis revealed that no mea was present in the culture supernatant suggesting that bacteria might prefer the diglycolic route (pathway 2) of morpholine degradation which was later confirmed by ms analysis. 3.5 ms studies of the culture filtrate ms was run directly with a neat culture filtrate. each sample was analyzed separately in both the positive and negative ion modes (table 5 and fig. 7). it was observed that the m/z peak of the neat culture filtrate (fig. 7) indicates the presence of 2-(2aminoethoxy)acetate (c4h9no3, molecular weight = 119.119 and m/z = 120 as [m+h]+) and an anion of diglycolic acid (c4h6o5, molecular weight = 134.09 and m/z = 133 as [m-h]–) which supports the fact that this particular isolate prefers the degradation pathway of diglycolic acid (pathway 2), similar to a strain of mycobacterium reported earlier by conducting electrospray ionization mass spectrometry on the culture filtrate [12]. further ms analysis supports the gc findings that mea is not present in the culture filtrate because it might have an inhibitory effect on the bacteria. therefore, the said bacterial isolate prefers the diglycolic acid route of the metabolic pathway given the fact that in the presence of morpholine, one of the two branches of morpholine biodegradation was induced while the other was inhibited. the illustrated degradation pathway might start with the cleavage of c-n bond, leading to the formation of an intermediary amino acid followed by deamination and oxidation of this amino acid to form a diacid as is shown in fig. 2b. 3.6 ammonia release: as the end product of morpholine degradation morpholine can be degraded by bacteria which releases ammonia. whichever degradation pathway of morpholine is followed, ammonia is produced as an end product. the concentration of ammoniacal nitrogen produced by the isolate was calculated (table 6 and fig. 8) by the regression equation of a standard curve (y = 0.137x with r2 = 0.98) and found to be present at a concentration of 5.2 ppm based on nessler’s quantification. the initial morpholine concentration in the culture supernatant (before degradation) was reported to be 2000 ppm. the molar ratio with regard to the conversion of morpholine into ammonia was found to be 1 : 0.014. furthermore, it was shown that the final ph of the media throughout the experiment did not change, supporting the fact that a low concentration of ammonia was released as an end product of morpholine degradation. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry bacterial assisted biodegradation pathway of morpholine 39 table 3: simon tests for the presence of the primary amine mea and secondary amine morpholine in the culture supernatant sample test feature remark result morpholine simon 1 characteristic blue color of the secondary amine morpholine positive mea simon 2 characteristic violet color of the primary amine mea positive culture media simon 1 no characteristic blue color morpholine negative simon 2 no characteristic violet color mea negative culture supernatant (filtrate) simon 1 no characteristic blue color morpholine negative simon 2 no characteristic violet color mea negative 50 pp. 33–43 (2022) 40 kumar, kapur, and vulichi table 4: gc analysis of the diluted culture filtrate vial retention time (mins) auc interpretation (compound) methanol 1.331 378534920.9 methanol 5000 ppm mea 1.333 2.218 366649701.7 2748948.5 methanol mea 2500 ppm mea 1.331 2.216 374551161.2 2397300.9 methanol mea 1250 ppm mea 1.331 2.211 378803557.4 1149593.1 methanol mea culture supernatant (1:10) 1.334 2.331 310947764.4 92353.6 methanol no/negligible mea table 5: expected intermediate according to the ms analysis of the culture filtrate. sample m/z positive mode m/z negative mode remark neat culture filtrate 120 [m+h] + 2,2 aminoethoxy acetate 133 [m-h] – anion of diglycolic acid figure 7: electrospray ionization ms spectra recorded under positive and negative ionization of the neat culture filtrate. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry bacterial assisted biodegradation pathway of morpholine 41 table 6: estimation of ammoniacal nitrogen concentration by nessler’s reagent well 10 ppm stock nh4-n+ (µl) milli-q water (µl) culture media (µl) 50% na-k tartrate (µl) nessler’s reagent (µl) net absorbance at 405 nm 1 ppm 25 225 — 5 5 0.091 2 ppm 50 200 — 5 5 0.284 3 ppm 75 175 — 5 5 0.353 4 ppm 100 150 — 5 5 0.552 5 ppm 125 125 — 5 5 0.725 culture supernatant 250 — 5 5 0.725 figure 8: standard curve of ammoniacal nitrogen concentration by nessler’s reagent 4. discussion based on the results summarized, it has been reported that the isolate prefers to undergo the diglycolic acid route of degradation instead of the ethanolamine pathway, which might be an inhibitory effect on bacterial growth. the illustrated degradation pathway starts with cleavage of the c-n bond, leading to the formation of an intermediary amino acid which is followed by deamination and oxidation to form the diacid (fig. 9). this diacid, namely diglycolate, later participates in intermediate metabolism and is converted indirectly into tca by the krebs cycle, which is beyond the scope of the present article. moreover, the presence of degradation intermediate compounds in culture filtrate also favors this finding with the conclusion that the diglycolic acid route of biodegradation might be a common degradation mechanism, which is also shown by other strains of bacteria, proceeding via 2-(2-aminoethoxy)acetate. the said investigation to reveal the degradation pathway of morpholine is supported by similar findings published by other authors [5, 10–12]. furthermore, whatever the degradation pathway exhibited by the bacterial isolate, the end product, that is, ammonia, will be biochemically produced and used. our studies confirm the presence of ammonia as an end product in a molar conversion ratio of morpholine to ammonia of 1 : 0.014. due to the low concentration of ammonia produced, the ph of the culture medium did not change throughout the experiment. however, a higher molar ratio of morpholine to ammonia brought about an inhibitory effect on the growth of bacteria by increasing the ph of the medium and making it more alkaline. the molar ratio of morpholine to ammonia was found to be different for different strains of bacteria as viz., namely 1 : 0.5 for mycobacterium sp. he5 [6], 1 : 0.89 for mycobacterium sp. [7] and 1 : 0.82 for mycobacterium sp. mo1 [9]. 5. conclusions the large scale industrial applications of morpholine and its known carcinogenic effect thus have an environmental interest for its biodegradation and exploring the degradative pathway so that unrevertable damage to the natural environment and biota can be minimized. along with the mycobacterium and pseudomonas sp. another potential isolate namely halobacillus blutaparonensis has been investigated for its ability to removal of morpholine by adopting the diglycolate degradation pathway. hence, sustainable remediation practice by utilizing effective microbes should be applied to bring the environmental cleanup or facilitate the existing system of effluent treatment mechanism incorporation with biological approaches to minimize the impact of xenobiotic pollutants in the anthropocentric epoch. conflicts of interest the authors confirm no conflicts of interest with regard to the results derived from this study on the sustainable remediation of morpholine and its micro-scale degradation pathway. references [1] sielaff, b.; andreesen, j. r.; schräder, t. a.: cytochrome p450 and a ferredoxin isolated from mycobacterium sp. strain he5 after growth on morpholine. appl. microbiol. biotechnol., 2001, 56(3-4), 458–464 doi: 10.1007/s002530100634 [2] dhiwahar, a. t.; maruthamuthu, s.; marnadu, r.; sundararajan, m.; manthrammel, m. a.; shkir, m.; sakthivel, p.; reddy, v. r. m.: improved photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b under visible light and magnetic properties using microwave 50 pp. 33–43 (2022) https://doi.org/10.1007/s002530100634 42 kumar, kapur, and vulichi figure 9: the complete illustration of a possible degradation pathway of morpholine. the isolate, namely halobacillus blutaparonensis, prefers pathway 2 for the successful removal of morpholine. abbreviations used tca: tricarboxylic acid; atp: adenosine triphosphate; adp: adenosine diphosphate; h+: hydrogen atom; e-: free electron; o2: oxygen molecule; nh + 4 : ammonium ion combustion grown ni doped copper ferrite spinel nanoparticles. solid state sci., 2021, 113, 106542 doi: 10.1016/j.solidstatesciences.2021.106542 [3] khan, a.; valicsek, z.; horváth, o.: photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b in heterogeneous and homogeneous systems. hung. j. ind. chem., 2021, 49(1), 9–16 doi: 10.33927/hjic-2021-02 [4] chandrasekaran, s.; lalithakumari, d.: plasmidassisted morpholine degradation by pseudomonas fluorescens cas 102. world j. microbiol. biotechnol., 1997, 14, 7–10 doi: 10.1023/a:1008855912907 [5] poupin, p.; truffaut, n.; combourieu, b.; besse, p.; sancelme, m.; veschambre, h.; delort, a. m.: degradation of morpholine by an environmental mycobacterium strain involves a cytochrome p-450. appl. environ. microbiol., 1998, 64(1), 159-165 doi: 10.1128/aem.64.1.159-165.1998 [6] schräder, t.; schuffenhauer, g.; sielaff, b.; andreesen, j. r.: high morpholine degradation rates and formation of cytochrome p450 during growth on different cyclic amines by newly isolated mycobacterium sp. strain he5. microbiology, 2000, 146(5), 1091–1098 doi: 10.1099/00221287-146-5-1091 [7] magda, m.; aly: degradation of morpholine by mycobacterium sp. isolated from contaminated wastewater collected from egypt. afr. j. biotechnol., 2011, 10(42), 8351–8358 doi: 10.5897/ajb11.308 [8] swain, a.; waterhouse, k. v.; venables, w. a.; callely, a. g.; lowe, s. e.: biochemical studies of morpholine catabolism by an environmental mycobacterium. appl. microbiol. biotechnol., 1991, 35(1), 110–114 doi: 10.1007/bf00180646 [9] mazure, n.; truffaut, n.: degradation of morpholine by mycobacterium aurum mo1. can. j. microbiol., 1994, 40(9), 761–765 doi: 10.1139/m94-120 [10] shaikh, a. r.; sahnoun, r.; broclawik, e.; koyama, m.; tsuboi, h.; hatakeyama, n.; endou, a.; takaba, h.; kubo, m.; carpio, c.; miyamoto, a.: quantum chemical studies for oxidation of morpholine by cytochrome p450. j. inorg. biochem., 2009, 103(1), 20–27 doi: 10.1016/j.jinorgbio.2008.08.013 [11] combourieu, b.; besse, p.; sancelme, m.; verschambre, h.; delort, a. m.; poupin, p.; truffaut, n.: morpholine degradation pathway of mycobacterium aurum mo1: direct evidence of intermediates by in situ 1h nuclear magnetic resonance. appl. environ. microbiol., 1998, 64(1), 153–158 doi: 10.1128/aem.64.1.153-158.1998 [12] combourieu, b.; besse, p.; sancelme, m.; godin, j.-p.; monteil, a.; veschambre, h.; delort, a.m.: common degradative pathways of morpholine, thiomorpholine, and piperidine by mycobacterium aurum mo1: evidence from 1h-nuclear magnetic resonance and ionspray mass spectrometry performed directly on the incubation medium. appl. environ. microbiol., 2000, 66(8), 3187–3193 doi: 10.1128/aem.66.8.3187-3193.2000 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1016/j.solidstatesciences.2021.106542 https://doi.org/10.33927/hjic-2021-02 https://doi.org/10.1023/a:1008855912907 https://doi.org/10.1128/aem.64.1.159-165.1998 https://doi.org/10.1128/aem.64.1.159-165.1998 https://doi.org/10.1099/00221287-146-5-1091 https://doi.org/10.5897/ajb11.308 https://doi.org/10.1007/bf00180646 https://doi.org/10.1139/m94-120 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jinorgbio.2008.08.013 https://doi.org/10.1128/aem.64.1.153-158.1998 https://doi.org/10.1128/aem.64.1.153-158.1998 https://doi.org/10.1128/aem.66.8.3187-3193.2000 https://doi.org/10.1128/aem.66.8.3187-3193.2000 bacterial assisted biodegradation pathway of morpholine 43 [13] knapp, j. s.; emtiazin, g.; yusoff, s.; heron, s. t.: the utilization of morpholine as a sole nitrogen source by gram-negative bacteria. lett. appl. microbiol., 1996, 23(5), 334–338 doi: 10.1111/j.1472765x.1996.tb00202.x [14] buchanan, r. e.; gibbons, n. r.: bergey’s manual of determinative bacteriology, 8th ed., (williams and wilkins, baltimore, usa) 1974 isbn: 978-0-68301117-3 [15] unissa, r.; sudhakar, m.; reddy, a. s. k.: screening of marine bacterial cultures for extracellular production of l-argininedeiminases. world j. pharm. res., 2015, 4(6), 1194–1204 https://www.wjpr.net [16] edgar, r. c.: muscle: multiple sequence alignment with high accuracy and high throughput. nucleic acids res., 2004, 32(5), 1792–1797 doi: 10.1093/nar/gkh340 [17] talavera, g.; castresana, j.: improvement of phylogenies after removing divergent and ambiguously aligned blocks from protein sequence alignments. syst. biol., 2007, 56(4), 564–577 doi: 10.1080/10635150701472164 [18] ncbi accession number tool; https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/genbank [19] kumar, r.; manga, p.; gupta, s.; kapur, s.: biological approaches for treating industrial effluents containing morpholine. industrial and environmental biotechnology, edited by krishna pramanik and jayant kumar patra, studium press india pvt ltd new delhi, 2014, 255–264 isbn: 9789380012674 [20] united nations office on drugs and crime, scientific and technical notes scitec/20, december 2005 https://www.unodc.org [21] gerster, f. m.; hopf, n. b.; huynh, c. k.; plateel, g.; charrière, n.; vernez, d.: a simple gas chromatography method for the analysis of monoethanolamine in air. j. sep. sci., 2012, 35(17), 2249–2255 doi: 10.1002/jssc.201200196 [22] crosby, n. t.: determination of ammonia by the nessler method in waters containing hydrazine. analyst, 1986, 93(1107), 406–408 doi: 10.1039/an9689300406 50 pp. 33–43 (2022) https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1472-765x.1996.tb00202.x https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1472-765x.1996.tb00202.x https://www.wjpr.net/abstract_show/2951 https://doi.org/10.1093/nar/gkh340 https://doi.org/10.1093/nar/gkh340 https://doi.org/10.1080/10635150701472164 https://doi.org/10.1080/10635150701472164 https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/genbank https://www.unodc.org/pdf/scientific/scitec20-fin.pdf https://doi.org/10.1002/jssc.201200196 https://doi.org/10.1039/an9689300406 https://doi.org/10.1039/an9689300406 introduction sustainable remediation of morpholine and its degradation pathway materials and methods environmental samples chemicals and reagents screening, characterization and sequence accession of the morpholine-degrading isolate cultivation and acclimatization of the isolate: microbial adaptation against morpholine growth on different hypothetical degradation intermediate compounds chemical tests of intermediate(s) in the degradation pathway gas chromatography (gc) studies of degradation intermediate(s) mass spectrometry studies of degradation intermediate(s) estimation of the ammonia concentration results and discussion morphological, biochemical and molecular identification growth on intermediates chemical assay of intermediate(s) gc studies of mea in the culture supernatant ms studies of the culture filtrate ammonia release: as the end product of morpholine degradation discussion conclusions hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 48(1) pp. 131–138 (2020) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.33927/hjic-2020-19 xbrl utilization as an automated industry analysis alex suta*1 and árpád tóth1 1research center of vehicle industry, széchenyi istván university, egyetem tér 1, győr, 9026, hungary in the last two decades, electronic financial reporting went through a significant evolution, where to date, extensible business reporting language (xbrl) has become the leading platform that is already obligatory for listed entities in the united states and was also legislated in the european union from january 1, 2020. the primary objective of this research was to review the us-listed companies’ 2018 quarterly reports. the study generated an automated industry analysis for the automotive industry from the aspect of four main financial item categories as an alternative to statistics-based, manually prepared industry analyses. statistical tests were carried out between two industrial classification methodologies, the securities’ industry identification marks and the reported standard industrial classification (sic) codes. the results showed a significant difference between the industry classification methodologies. automated reporting was more precise with regard to the identification of the listed and reporting entities, however, the data fields of sic codes within the xbrl data set provided an inaccurate classification, which is a potential area of improvement along with additional recommendations outlined in the conclusion. keywords: xbrl, us-listed entities, acl, automated data analytics, industry analysis, sic codes 1. introduction the electronic reporting and automated fundamental reviews in the field of financial reporting is becoming increasingly important considering the difficulties and error-prone procedure of manual analysis from the available source of information. the extensible business reporting language (xbrl) provides a standardized platform for this activity, which supports automated and digitalized reviews compared to the paper-based reports from the previous manual. this electronic reporting platform is already used as the official reporting form in the united states for listed entities, therefore, the application of a proper industry classification is essential. even though xbrl reporting is required by the u.s. securities and exchange commission (sec), research institutions can choose from various generally accepted industry classifications. despite the lack of regulation, it is a primary interest of research institutions to protect their reputations by adequately representing companies from the various industries. the two different approaches might provide different results, which can lead to inaccurate trend projections or unreliable industry comparisons. the validation of the xbrl classification and reports by marketing research firms can only be reconciled and validated to statistical industry reports which identify discrepancies. to date, standard industrial classification (sic) codes are used in the sec’s electronic data gathering, analysis, *correspondence: suta.alex@ga.sze.hu and retrieval (edgar) system to define the type of business of companies. based on its primary activity, each company assigns a four-digit code to itself when registering an initial public offering (ipo) with the sec [1]. the four digits indicate levels of description of the industry classification, e.g. the location hierarchy for car manufacturers is division d manufacturing (codes 2039), code 37: transportation equipment, and code 3711: motor vehicles and passenger car bodies [1]. the objective of this research was to review the us-listed companies, where xbrl reports are already required and implemented. subsequently, through an automated review of the automotive industry, to then identify how these reports can be compared to the european listed entities. this information is crucial for stakeholders and regional policymakers to gain a clear view of the conditions of the target industry. according to the european securities and markets authority (esma), from january 1, 2020 onwards, new requirements on the stock exchange-listed companies in the european union came into effect to provide respective financial statements in a new european single electronic format (esef). this is a significant change to the application of xbrl as companies now have to provide reports in this specific reporting language. the data sets include structured information; for this reason, a new wave of research initiatives is expected in this academic area that could follow on from inconsistent industry classifications, further hindering comparability. https://doi.org/10.33927/hjic-2020-19 mailto:suta.alex@ga.sze.hu 132 suta and tóth 2. literature review 2.1 xbrl utilization in industry-specific data analysis prior literature has documented uses of xbrl in a variety of data analysis environments, generally in the research areas of accounting and financial reporting. systematic financial data provides data analysts and investors with the ability to measure performance and risks, as well as create comparisons, ratings and other value-added products [2]. connected to comparability aspects, several sources have been reviewed that are related to the semantic issue of industrial classification. being a driver of electronic data interchange, xbrl data sets are constructed from multiple identifying tags and numerical data that can be processed by computer software [3]. while the technical background on data-centric analysis is available [4] 2013 [5] 2014, [6], it is uncommon in the industry-specific research literature that xbrl databases are used as the primary source of data. chychyla-leone-meza [7] measured financial reporting complexity by comparing the quantity of text in us generally accepted accounting principles (gaap) and sec regulations of textual data from xbrl filings. in this study, the variation with regard to the data content of different taxonomy versions (denominative tags, labels, documentation) is emphasized. for this reason, the annual changes in published taxonomy updates have to be taken into consideration [8]. despite the existence of the xbrl industry resource group established by the fasb [8], standard industrial classification (sic) codes are not part of taxonomy updates and their current 2007 form seems to be generally accepted for statistical use. felokim-lim [9] observed changes in the information environment of analysts by the overuse of customized tags, creating assumptions based on industrial classification as a factor. zhang-guan-kim [10] proposed an expected investor crash risk model based on financial information gathered from xbrl-based sec databases. in terms of the estimation of the impacts, the industry median of customized tags is generated by 2-digit sic codes as an adjustment tool in the regression model. similarly, industrial classification was taken into account as a dummy variable during the analysis with regard to the xbrl adoption of reductions in audit fees as per shan-troshanirichardson [11]. in other xbrl-based studies, industry-specific assumptions required solutions other than basic sic codes. liu-luo-wang [12] reviewed the effect of xbrl adoption on information asymmetry, where sic was reclassified to identify high-technology industries. 2.2 discrepancies between industrial classification systems since the emergence of the north american industry classification system (naics) in 1997 as a sound replacement of standard industrial classification (sic) codes in u.s. industrial statistics, papers have reviewed the impacts of different frameworks in financial research. effective comparative statistics require the use of a standardized classification system [13]. the u.s. economic census bureau has made regulatory, business and academic purposes of performing economic research on historical data possible. in 1997, the existing framework, the sic, was replaced by the naics [14]. unlike the sic’s mixed production/market system, naics introduced a production-oriented economic concept that supports the examination of industry-specific indicators such as productivity, input-output relationships and capital intensity [15]. the specific rearrangements between industrial classes primarily affected manufacturing industries, where the sic functions as a somewhat outdated alternative. u.s. government departments, namely the bureau of labor statistics (bls), internal revenue service (irs) and social security administration (ssa), alongside the u.s. securities and exchange commission (sec), continue to use the most recent 2007 update of four-digit sic codes. while maintaining a unified classification system is necessary for government departments, the lack of conceptual harmony between industrial classification systems creates a discrepancy with academic research [16]. several papers have been collected that present empirical evidence of disharmonious schemes based on financial statement data sets. kahle-walking [17] observed differences in financial variables gathered from two statistical databases (crsp and compustat) using four-digit sic codes to be substantial, moreover, showed that commonly used methods of industrial classification disagree due to frequent changes in the sic codes of firms. bhojraj-lee-oler reviewed the capital market applications of four broadly available industrial classification schemes and found that a significant degree of variance with regard to the number of companies represented in industry divisions exists. the study argues that the six-digit global industry classification standard (gics), followed by naics, offers better comparability between firms concerning sic in terms of the critical evaluation of financial ratios and that industrial classification is essential in instances of fundamental analysis. while gics reflects the dynamic changes in industry sectors, being a privately available system mainly involved in investment processes, it is unlikely to be suitable in statistical research [18]. kelton-pasquale-rebelein [19] referred to sic codes as outdated in the field of industry cluster analysis and prepared an updated framework using naics. as opposed to classifying establishments according to similar products (sic), the groups are formed from identical production processes (naics). hrazdil-zhang [20] and hrazdil-trottier-zhang [21] published empirical results on the heterogeneity of industry concentration with the use of sic and other classification schemes based on the market shares of sales and financial ratios of companies in the manufacturing sector (sic 2000-3999). according to their findings, the sic system remains inferior to gics and naics in terms of industrial homogeneity. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry xbrl utilization as an automated industry analysis 133 instead of ordinary company databases such as compustat or s&p 1500, papagiannidis et al. proposed an exploratory big data method to gather regional research of industry clusters based in the uk. in this study, keywords connected to business operations were collected from official websites to enhance the level of detail provided by single sic codes, supporting the formation of regional clusters. it is a common conclusion in the reviewed literature that the sole use of sic codes in industry analysis could lead to the loss of information and false estimation of market forces; in this context the potential of xbrl as a primary data source of financial statements has been reviewed. 2.3 the multi-tier supply chain approach one possible outcome of the barriers of traditional statistical classification systems is the addition of extra information to existing schemes. in an industrial analysis, especially in the automotive industry, it is essential to differentiate between operational properties, e.g. their position in the automotive supply chain. the contemporary position of an industry must be judged by the different weights of its market players. assumptions about financial information are heavily affected by the final product, whether it is a part of the interorganizational supply chain, or sold to dealerships or directly to consumers in the form of passenger cars. in terms of a supply chain, manufacturers and suppliers can be classified into multi-tiered groups based on their position in the production chain, as well as the state of raw materials (tier 3 and additional sub-tiers) in addition to finished or semi-finished components (suppliers from tiers 1 and 2) compared to fully finished products (original equipment manufacturers (oems)). concerning the automotive industry, sources from both academia, business and governments [22–24] agree that market players from multi-tier supply chain structures can be ranked as follows: 1. oems: a concentrated group of companies accountable for the main manufacturing, assembly and design processes that possess a large market share and well-known brand names; 2. suppliers from tiers 1 & 2: potentially several hundred large or small companies, accountable for the supply of automotive parts and systems to oems. the range of sold goods is diverse and includes engine components, interior, exterior, transmission as well as cooling and electronic systems. although their role in the supply chain is consistent, suppliers from tiers 1 and 2 vary in their direct/indirect (through other participants) nature of interaction with oems, therefore, from a statistical viewpoint, can be aggregated; 3. tier 3 and sub-tier suppliers: several thousand smaller companies are accountable for the supply of raw materials to suppliers from tiers 1 & 2. in the scientific literature, several utilizations of the multi-tier supply chain approach exist. mena-humphrieschoi [25] reviewed the existing literature at the time on structural arrangements (buyer-supplier-customer) and prepared three cases of theoretical linkage. according to the study, the most typical structure of the automotive industry is the “closed triad”, where the buyer (oem) can insist on certain requirements (either assurance or training function) not only from tier 1 but sub-tier suppliers as well. masoud-mason [26] used the multi-tier system in the automotive industry to simulate cost optimization on a supply-chain level. thomé et al. [27] adopted a similar approach of representing many tiers and their interactions that affect selected flexibility measures (product, responsiveness, sourcing, delivery and postponement). other popular fields of use are sustainability-related questions and green supply chains [28–30]. the available literature clarifies the widespread applicability and general acceptance of tiered levels of suppliers, which supports the methodology examined in the current study. despite its academic use, the application of the well-established oem / tiered system of suppliers in automotive business reports published by major consulting firms [31–33] is common practice. 3. data collection and methods used the sec has published xbrl data sets containing raw aggregate financial statement data quarterly since 2009. at the same time, as a premium service, the sec offers a professional version of its search engine [34] designed specifically to fit the goals of professional financial analytics. however, in line with tendencies identified from the literature review, even a discrepancy on the same platform exists between the standard industrial classification codes current in xbrl data sets and the edgar search tool. to perform an automated industry analysis, a suitable classification is required. in this study, a possible classification using the software program acl (audit command language) robotics professional version 14.1.0.1581 is evaluated. from the listed u.s. entities, those operating in the automotive industry were selected to measure deviance in terms of crucial financial indicators between the two data sources. the specific choice of the automotive industry lies in its accurate definability, while the goal of the study was to provide an industry-independent methodology of data analysis that can be applied to several other fields. the two main platforms of data collection were edgar pro online (2019) operated by the sec, which is equivalent to the quasimanual download process of financial statements, and the obligatory quarterly reports of aggregate data sets in the xbrl format available on the sec website. to avoid existing industrial classification issues, a multi-tier supply chain approach was introduced by grouping companies as oems and suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 (t1&2 s). 48(1) pp. 131–138 (2020) 134 suta and tóth 4. results 4.1 data categorization: number of companies and industries by using the edgar pro online search tool, market segments can be filtered, of which three categories connected to the automotive industry are available. at the same time, in the xbrl data set, companies are provided with much general information, including sic codes that can be used for categorization. according to the list of codes provided by the sec, six four-digit codes cover the automotive industry (and related services with the exception of retail) that were reviewed in the quarterly reports of 2018. a summary of publicly listed entities is presented in table 1. all entities listed on the new york stock exchange (nyse), national association for securities dealers automated quotations (nasdaq) and better alternative trading system (bats) from the entire population are supposedly consistent data sources and regulated by the sec. in addition to the variance in the number of listed entities in the automotive industry, the size of the entire population between the two sources is inconsistent and differs by over 24%. in terms of industrial classification, the taxonomy behind sic codes in xbrl data sets is valid but incomparable to the customary edgar approach in the case of the identification of specific activities. therefore, two additional categories were created to fit the measurement process; oems and suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 (other automotive suppliers). 4.2 errors in terms of the consistency and availability of samples listed entities from both data sources that are unmatched as a result of their supposedly consistent counterparts were found. out of the sample sizes of 103 and 74, 50 companies are common in both which raises concerns over reliability. furthermore, data availability raised concerns in terms of search results from the sec edgar pro online system. out of the strong sample size of 103, 13 annual reports concerning 2018 were unavailable in the electric filing system of the sec, while an additional 10 required data collection from official websites. four financial statement items concerning the wealth and profitability of companies were selected for analysis in order to evaluate the differences between the two industrial classification schemes. the values of total assets, total equity, net sales revenue and profit after-tax are central financial factors of investor decision-making. when necessary, exchange rates of the federal reserve were used according to the asc (accounting standards codification) standards issued by the financial accounting standards board (fasb) [35]. 4.3 comparison of financial information on an industrial level based on the financial statement data, descriptive statistics were calculated on the selected reporting lines. differences were summarized in terms of both absolute values between the two data sources and percent deviations as presented in the tables 2 and 3. a general observation of the data source is that the intervals between the minimum and maximum values are substantial for all four financial statement items. it is likely that – when used as a statistical sample – a normal distribution cannot be assumed. the standard deviation exceeds the mean values in the case of total assets, therefore, the set of values (especially for the financial data of suppliers from tiers 1 & 2) is highly dispersed. a pattern can be observed in the deviation between the two data sources. the total values of oem financial statement items are higher in the xbrl data set, in contrast to data derived from the online sec source, while the opposite is seen in the case of suppliers from tiers 1 & 2, where the total values are dominated by online table 1: industrial specification of data sources sec’s edgar online pro sec’s edgar xbrl data set industrial specification number of companies industry (sic) number of companies o e m s { auto & truck manufacturers 26 3711. motor vehicles & passenger car bodies 20 oem s s up pl ie rs fr om t ie rs 1 & 2 automobiles, parts & service retailers 24 3713. truck & bus bodies 2 auto, truck & motorcycle parts 53 3714. motor vehicle parts & accessories 41 s up pl ie rs fr om t ie rs 1 & 2 3715. truck trailers 1 3716. motor homes 2 3751. motorcycles, bicycles, and parts 8 total 103 total 74 entire population size 5,736 entire population size 7,133 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry xbrl utilization as an automated industry analysis 135 sources. as an attempt to generalize the automotive industry, mean values were calculated where xbrl represents higher values except for the net sales revenues of suppliers. these deviations are partly validated by the amount of incompletely matched samples, but the 103:74 sample-size ratio is not represented by the results. the table 4 summarizes the difference between the results of descriptive statistics in the form of percentages. despite former expectations, oems do not represent the majority of the financial item totals (between 45.1 and 55.9%), total equity (between 31.8 and 48.6%), net sales revenue (44.7 and 57.6%) and profit after-tax (35.452.5%), the differences between data sources can be measured on a scale of 6.7% to 31.9% as seen in table 4. suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 match to an even lesser extent, so percent deviations are typically higher, especially in the case of net sales revenue (56.7%). based on the matrix, the individual averages of companies cannot be used for industry generalization, both in terms of absolute mean values and standard deviations. the deviation “hotspots” are clearly centered around the suppliers from tiers 1 & 2. 4.4 chi-square statistical testing to support our assumptions of statistically significant deviation between data sources, pearson’s chi-squared test was implemented, a full description of the steps is available in appendix a [36, 37]. selected categories of oems and suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 were differentiated along with expected (data derived from online sec-based financial statements) vs. observed (data derived from xbrl data sets) values. based on the performed chi-square test, the results highlighted that the differences between the expected and observed values of financial statement items (total assets, total equity, net sales revenue and profit after-tax) were significant. with a 95% confidence interval (α = 0.05), oems and suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 both exceeded the critical value of 16.92 with 7 degrees of freedom (df = 7). it is important to note the very significant (almost 10 times higher) impact of suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 in terms of the total level of deviance. 5. conclusions xbrl preparation is obligatory, however, the content can include differences from the reported and published financial statements. conclusions can be summarized in the following points: • potential duplication of lines in xbrl sources (e.g. 8 lines of certain financial statement items from china automotive systems, inc.); • lack of standardization in tags: the xbrl platform manages to integrate more financial reporting taxonomy (different annual versions of ifrs and us gaap). due to the different (and potentially customized) tags, the definitions of some financial statement items converge; the structure of financial statements has yet to be fully harmonized between annual reports and xbrl statements; • errors in the reporting period (temporal differences): in some cases, outdated (1 or 2 years prior to table 2: automotive market share of the entire population (%, number) representation % (n) sec’s edgar pro online sec’s edgar xbrl data set entire population 100% (5,736) 100% (7,113) oems 0.45% (26) 0.31% (22) suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 1.34% (77) 0.73% (52) total assets total equity net sales revenue profit after-tax total 1.80% (103) 1.04% (74) oems (matched) 0.28% (16) 0.20% (14) suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 (matched) 0.59% (34) 0.50% (36) total (matched) 0.87% (50) 0.70% (50) table 3: absolute financial data from data sources (left – sec’s edgar pro online / right – sec‘s xbrl data set) (usd in millions) statistics category total assets value total equity attributable to company owners net sales revenues profit after taxes totals oem 783.346 874.139 153.668 221.111 606.225 649.422 23.941 35.125 tier 1&2 s. 953.149 688.812 329.224 234.365 749.694 478.399 43.717 31.834 mean oem 27.012 39.734 5.299 10.050 20.904 29.519 826 1.597 tier 1&2 s. 12.880 13.246 4.449 4.507 10.131 9.200 591 612 st. dev oem 66.884 77.251 11.802 18.956 45.992 52.970 1.875 3.007 tier 1&2 s. 56.749 63.640 21.527 23.684 33.241 34.997 2.971 3.262 48(1) pp. 131–138 (2020) 136 suta and tóth table 4: deviation matrix between data sources (%) statistic category total assets value total equity attributable to company owners net sales revenues profit after taxes totals oem 10.39% 30.50% 6.65% 31.84% t1&2 s. 38.38% 40.48% 56.71% 37.33% mean oem 32.02% 47.28% 29.18% 48.29% t1&2 s. 2.76% 1.29% 10.12% 3.50% st.dev oem 13.42% 37.74% 13.18% 37.65% t1&2 s. 10.83% 9.11% 5.02% 8.93% the current fiscal year) financial information is presented in current filings (e.g. an entity presents information from the 2017 fiscal year in the q4 2018 filing as the most current); • the inability to fully and feasibly automate data analysis in the case of automotive suppliers. mean values are inconsistent between data sources due to the varying sample size of automotive suppliers. to perform a comprehensive industry analysis, error terms need to be defined clearly. otherwise such an analysis would be performed with many predefined assumptions, leading to a decrease in the overall explanatory power and raising concerns about reliability/reproducibility. financial analysts should use xbrl datasets with concern, these points kept in mind. as a currently available best practice, the methodology of the u.s. securities and exchange commission is a precedent for the building of inline xbrl statements into integrated datasets. an emerging challenge of regulatory bodies such as the european securities and markets authorities is the supervision of companies uploading their data to a central system of a similar nature to produce well-structured databases for automated financial analytics. acknowledgements the research presented in this paper was financed by the “research area excellence program – 2019 (tudfo/51757/2019-itm)” and university of győr. references [1] naics association (2019). common sic questions, https://www.naics.com/ frequently-asked-questions/#naicsfaq [2] xbrl international (2019). an introduction to xbrl, https://www.xbrl.org/the-standard/ what/an-introduction-to-xbrl/ [3] yaghoobirafi, k.; nazemi, e.: an approach to xbrl interoperability based on ant colony optimization algorithm. knowledge-based systems, 2019, 163, 342–357 doi: 10.1016/j.knosys.2018.08.038 [4] wenger, m. r.; elam, r.; williams, k. l.: a tour of five xbrl tools: products that help make tagged data work for you and your clients. journal of accountancy, 2013, 215(4), 48–55 [5] radzimski, m.; sanchez-cervantes, j. l.; garciacrespo, a.; temińo-aguirre, i.: intelligent architecture for comparative analysis of public companies using semantics and xbrl data. international journal of software engineering and knowledge engineering, 2014, 24(5), 801–823 doi: 10.1142/s0218194014500314 [6] joyner, d.: how to transform xbrl data into useful information. review of business and technology research, 2017, 14(1), 34–41 [7] chychyla, r.; leone, a. j.; minutti-meza, m.: complexity of financial reporting standards and accounting expertise. journal of accounting and economics, 2019, 67(1), 226–253 doi: 10.1016/j.jacceco.2018.09.005 [8] sec reporting taxonomy technical guide (version 2019), financial accounting standards board, financial accounting foundation, 2019 https://www.fasb.org/jsp/fasb/document_c/ documentpage&cid=1176171806866 [9] felo, a. j.; kim, j. w.; lim, j. h.: can xbrl detailed tagging of footnotes improve financial analysts’ information environment? international journal of accounting information systems, 2018, 28, 45–58 doi: 10.1016/s0740-624x(98)90003-x [10] zhang, y.; guan, y.; kim, j. b.: xbrl adoption and expected crash risk. journal of accounting and public policy, 2019, 38(1), 31–52 doi: 10.1016/j.jaccpubpol.2019.01.003 [11] shan, y. g.; troshani, i.; richardson, g.: an empirical comparison of the effect of xbrl on audit fees in the us and japan. journal of contemporary accounting & economics, 2015, 11(2), 89–103 doi: 10.1016/j.jcae.2015.01.001 [12] liu, c.; luo, x. r.; wang, f. l.: an empirical investigation on the impact of xbrl adoption on information asymmetry: evidence from europe. decision support systems, 2017, 93, 42–50 doi: 10.1016/j.dss.2016.09.004 [13] kaya, d.; pronobis, p.: the benefits of structured data across the information supply chain: initial evidence on xbrl adoption and loan contracting of private firms. journal of accounting and public policy, 2016, 35(4), 417–436 doi: 10.1016/j.jaccpubpol.2016.04.003 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://www.naics.com/frequently-asked-questions/#naicsfaq https://www.naics.com/frequently-asked-questions/#naicsfaq https://www.xbrl.org/the-standard/what/an-introduction-to-xbrl/ https://www.xbrl.org/the-standard/what/an-introduction-to-xbrl/ https://doi.org/10.1016/j.knosys.2018.08.038 https://doi.org/10.1142/s0218194014500314 https://doi.org/10.1142/s0218194014500314 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacceco.2018.09.005 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacceco.2018.09.005 https://www.fasb.org/jsp/fasb/document_c/documentpage&cid=1176171806866 https://www.fasb.org/jsp/fasb/document_c/documentpage&cid=1176171806866 https://doi.org/10.1016/s0740-624x(98)90003-x https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jaccpubpol.2019.01.003 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jaccpubpol.2019.01.003 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jcae.2015.01.001 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jcae.2015.01.001 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.dss.2016.09.004 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.dss.2016.09.004 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jaccpubpol.2016.04.003 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jaccpubpol.2016.04.003 xbrl utilization as an automated industry analysis 137 [14] comparing economic data, u.s. economic census bureau, 2016 https://www.census.gov/ programs-surveys/economic-census/guidance/ historical-data.html [15] chychyla, r.; leone, a. j.; minutti-meza, m.: complexity of financial reporting standards and accounting expertise. journal of accounting and economics, 2019, 67(1), 226–253 doi: 10.1016/j.jacceco.2018.09.005 [16] krishnan, j.; press, e.: the north american industry classification system and its implications for accounting research. contemporary accounting research, 2003, 20(4), 685–717 doi: 10.1506/n57l-0462856v-7144 [17] kahle, k. m.; walkling, r. a.: the impact of industry classifications on financial research. journal of financial and quantitative analysis, 1996, 31(3), 309–335 [18] msci (2018). global industry classification standard (gics§) https://www.msci.com/gics [19] kelton, c. m.; pasquale, m. k.; rebelein, r. p.: using the north american industry classification system (naics) to identify national industry cluster templates for applied regional analysis. regional studies, 2008, 42(3), 305–321 doi: 10.1080/00343400701288316 [20] hrazdil, k.; zhang, r.: the importance of industry classification in estimating concentration ratios. economics letters, 2012, 114(2), 224–227 doi: 10.1016/j.econlet.2011.10.001 [21] hrazdil, k.; trottier, k.; zhang, r.: a comparison of industry classification schemes: a large sample study. economics letters, 2013, 118(1), 77–80 doi: 10.1016/j.econlet.2012.09.022 [22] tassey, g.; brunnermeier, s. b.; martin, s. a.: interoperability cost analysis of the us automotive supply chain. research triangle institute, 1999, report 7007-03 [23] ilo (2005). automotive industry trends affecting component suppliers, report for discussion at the tripartite meeting on employment, social dialogue, rights at work and industrial relations in transport equipment manufacturing. international labour organization, pp. 26–42 [24] silver, d.: the automotive supply chain, explained. 2016 [25] mena, c.; humphries, a.; choi, t. y.: toward a theory of multi-tier supply chain management. journal of supply chain management, 2013, 49(2), 58–77 doi: 10.1111/jscm.12003 [26] masoud, s. a.; mason, s. j.: integrated cost optimization in a two-stage, automotive supply chain. computers & operations research, 2016, 67, 1–11 doi: 10.1016/j.cor.2015.08.012 [27] thomé, a. m. t.; scavarda, l. f.; pires, s. r.; ceryno, p.; klingebiel, k.: a multi-tier study on supply chain flexibility in the automotive industry. international journal of production economics, 2014, 158, 91–105 doi: 10.1016/j.ijpe.2014.07.024 [28] jia, f.; gong, y.; brown, s.: multi-tier sustainable supply chain management: the role of supply chain leadership. international journal of production economics, 2019, 217, 44–63 doi: 10.1016/j.ijpe.2018.07.022 [29] sauer, p. c.; seuring, s.: extending the reach of multi-tier sustainable supply chain management – insights from mineral supply chains. international journal of production economics, 2019, 217, 31–43 doi: 10.1016/j.ijpe.2018.05.030 [30] sarkis, j.; gonzalez, e. d. s.; koh, s. l.: effective multi-tier supply chain management for sustainability. international journal of production economics, 2019, 217, 1–10 doi: 10.1016/j.ijpe.2019.09.014 [31] the future of the automotive value chain supplier industry outlook 2025, deloitte, 2017 [32] automotive news north america top suppliers, tenneco, 2019 https://www.autonews.com/ assets/pdf/ca116090622.pdf [33] global automotive supplier study 2018, roland berger, 2017 https://www. rolandberger.com/it/publications/ global-automotive-supplier-study-2018.html [34] edgar pro online (2019) operated by donnelley financial, llc, https://pro.edgar-online.com/ [35] foreign exchange rates h.10, federal reserve, 2019. https://www.federalreserve.gov/ releases/h10/hist/ [36] field, a.; miles, j.; field, z.: discovering statistics using r. sage publications, 2012, pp. 814–816 isbn: 978-1-446-20046-9 [37] agresti, a.: an introduction to categorical data analysis. john wiley & sons. 2018, pp. 34–40 isbn: 978-0-471-22618-5 48(1) pp. 131–138 (2020) https://www.census.gov/programs-surveys/economic-census/guidance/historical-data.html https://www.census.gov/programs-surveys/economic-census/guidance/historical-data.html https://www.census.gov/programs-surveys/economic-census/guidance/historical-data.html https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacceco.2018.09.005 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacceco.2018.09.005 https://doi.org/10.1506/n57l-0462-856v-7144 https://doi.org/10.1506/n57l-0462-856v-7144 https://www.msci.com/gics https://doi.org/10.1080/00343400701288316 https://doi.org/10.1080/00343400701288316 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.econlet.2011.10.001 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.econlet.2011.10.001 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.econlet.2012.09.022 https://doi.org/10.1111/jscm.12003 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cor.2015.08.012 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2014.07.024 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2018.07.022 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2018.07.022 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2018.05.030 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2019.09.014 https://www.autonews.com/assets/pdf/ca116090622.pdf https://www.autonews.com/assets/pdf/ca116090622.pdf https://www.rolandberger.com/it/publications/global-automotive-supplier-study-2018.html https://www.rolandberger.com/it/publications/global-automotive-supplier-study-2018.html https://www.rolandberger.com/it/publications/global-automotive-supplier-study-2018.html https://pro.edgar-online.com/ https://www.federalreserve.gov/releases/h10/hist/ https://www.federalreserve.gov/releases/h10/hist/ 138 suta and tóth appendix a – chi-square test steps 1) contingency table financial statement items oems suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 total assets expected 783,346 953,149 observed 874,139 688,812 total equity attributable to the owners of companies expected 153,668 329,224 observed 221,111 234,365 net sales revenue expected 606,225 749,694 observed 649,422 478,399 profit after-tax expected 23,941 43,717 observed 35,125 31,834 total 3,346,977 3,509,195 2) h0 the financial values of the xbrl data source (observed values) are not significantly different from the values of the online sec edgar pro online data source (expected values). therefore, industry totals from the two sources are consistent. 3) calculated marginal totals for the observed table 4) expected value calculation based on the specific financial statement item’s proportion in the whole population 5) degree of freedom df = (r − 1)(c − 1) df = (8 − 1)(2 − 1) = 7 6) calculation of chi-square values financial statement items χ2 = n∑ i=1 (oi − ei)2 ei oems suppliers from tiers 1 & 2 total assets e-o -90,792 264,337 (e-o)2 8,243,257,799 69,874,243,884 total equity attributable to the owners of companies e-o -67,442 94,860 (e-o)2 4,548,480,637 8,998,332,516 net sales revenue e-o -43,197 271,295 (e-o)2 1,865,960,356 73,600,784,685 profit after-tax e-o -11,184 11,883 (e-o)2 125,073,800 141,206,159 chi-square total chi-square 4,417 43,490 47,907 7) determination of significance level and critical value: significance level (alpha) 0.05 critical value 16.92 8) the chi square test result showed as the h0 hypothesis should be rejected with a 95% confidence interval (degree of freedom = 7). the chi-squared test results showed that the hypothesis h0 should be rejected. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry introduction literature review xbrl utilization in industry-specific data analysis discrepancies between industrial classification systems the multi-tier supply chain approach data collection and methods used results data categorization: number of companies and industries errors in terms of the consistency and availability of samples comparison of financial information on an industrial level chi-square statistical testing conclusions 404 not found not found the requested url was not found on this server. page 1 page 2 page 3 page 4 page 5 page 6 page 7 page 8 page 9 page 10 page 11 page 12 page 13 page 14 page 15 page 16 page 17 page 18 page 19 page 20 page 21 page 22 page 23 page 24 page 25 page 26 page 27 page 28 page 29 page 30 page 31 page 32 page 33 page 34 page 35 page 36 page 37 page 38 page 39 page 40 page 41 page 42 page 43 page 44 page 45 page 46 page 47 page 48 page 49 page 50 page 51 page 52 page 53 page 54 page 55 page 56 page 57 page 58 page 59 page 60 page 61 page 62 page 63 page 64 page 65 page 66 page 67 page 68 page 69 page 70 page 71 page 72 page 73 page 74 page 75 page 76 page 77 page 78 page 79 page 80 page 81 page 82 page 83 page 84 page 85 page 86 page 87 page 88 page 89 page 90 page 91 page 92 page 93 page 94 page 95 page 96 page 97 page 98 page 99 page 100 page 101 page 102 page 103 page 104 page 105 page 106 page 107 page 108 page 109 page 110 page 111 page 112 page 113 page 114 page 115 page 116 page 117 page 118 page 119 page 120 page 121 page 122 page 123 page 124 page 125 page 126 page 127 page 128 page 129 page 130 page 131 page 132 page 133 page 134 page 135 page 136 page 137 page 138 page 139 page 140 page 141 page 142 page 143 page 144 page 145 page 146 page 147 page 148 page 149 page 150 page 151 page 152 page 153 page 154 page 155 page 156 page 157 page 158 page 159 page 160 page 161 page 162 page 163 page 164 page 165 page 166 page 167 page 168 page 169 page 170 page 171 page 172 page 173 page 174 page 175 page 176 page 177 page 178 page 179 page 180 page 181 page 182 page 183 page 184 page 185 page 186 page 187 page 188 page 189 page 190 page 191 page 192 page 193 page 194 page 195 page 196 page 197 page 198 page 199 page 200 page 201 page 202 page 203 page 204 page 205 page 206 page 207 page 208 page 209 page 210 page 211 page 212 page 213 page 214 page 215 page 216 page 217 page 218 page 219 page 220 page 221 page 222 page 223 page 224 page 225 page 226 page 227 page 228 page 229 page 230 page 231 page 232 page 233 page 234 page 235 page 236 page 237 page 238 page 239 page 240 page 241 page 242 page 243 page 244 page 245 page 246 page 247 page 248 page 249 page 250 page 251 page 252 page 253 page 254 page 255 page 256 page 257 page 258 page 259 page 260 page 261 page 262 page 263 page 264 page 265 page 266 page 267 page 268 page 269 page 270 page 271 page 272 page 273 page 274 page 275 page 276 page 277 page 278 page 279 page 280 page 281 page 282 page 283 page 284 page 285 page 286 page 287 page 288 page 289 page 290 page 291 page 292 page 293 page 294 page 295 page 296 page 297 page 298 page 299 page 300 page 301 page 302 page 303 page 304 page 305 page 306 page 307 page 308 page 309 page 310 page 311 page 312 page 313 page 314 page 315 page 316 page 317 page 318 page 319 page 320 page 321 page 322 page 323 page 324 page 325 page 326 page 327 page 328 page 329 page 330 page 331 page 332 page 333 page 334 page 335 page 336 page 337 page 338 page 339 page 340 page 341 page 342 page 343 page 344 page 345 page 346 page 347 page 348 page 349 page 350 page 351 page 352 page 353 page 354 page 355 page 356 page 357 page 358 page 359 page 360 page 361 page 362 page 363 page 364 page 365 page 366 page 367 page 368 page 369 page 370 page 371 page 372 page 373 page 374 page 375 page 376 page 377 page 378 page 379 page 380 page 381 page 382 page 383 page 384 page 385 page 386 page 387 page 388 page 389 page 390 page 391 page 392 page 393 page 394 page 395 page 396 page 397 page 398 page 399 page 400 page 401 page 402 page 403 page 404 page 405 page 406 page 407 page 408 page 409 page 410 page 411 page 412 page 413 page 414 404 not found not found the requested url was not found on this server. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 45(2) pp. 19–21 (2017) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2017-0015 examination of innovative high-throughput fermentations áron németh* department of applied biotechnology and food science, budapest university of technology and economics, műegyetem rkp. 3, budapest, 1111, hungary during the investigation of fermentations, issues such as the need for numerous parallel experiments with regard to strain improvement or screening were often met, or in the case of media optimization the need for online measurements to avoid a lack of night-samples was also required. therefore, several new instruments were introduced to solve one or more of these problems: impedimetricand reverse-spin-technologies (rst) were compared via fermentation of a well-known species of yeast, saccharomyces cerevisiae, under both aerobic and anaerobic conditions, resulting in a diauxic growth curve. to identify the most accurate method, a wellknown mathematical description was fitted to the measured data. since the initial parameters were considered reliable as they originated from real experiments, during model fitting, the parameters were further fine-tuned, and the less modifications reported the better the system since it produces a growth curve that is more similar to standard bioreactors. according to our study, the impedimetric equipment was more efficient, and could run 40 parallel experiments, but the rst was more flexible. keywords: fermentation, high-throughput, scale-down, online measurement, mathematical modelling 1. introduction developments in fermentations face numerous challenges which may require expensive analytics, media components or special tools to facilitate aseptic work and sampling. furthermore, these biological processes vary significantly. to overcome these difficulties, the process should be scaled-down in combination with high-throughput methods, resulting in many parallel, small-scale experiments. such experiments are used in terms of strain and technological improvements as well as media optimization. a good solution may be the consideration of micro-bioreactors. however, because of their high investment and operational costs, they have not become widespread in hungary. while each can provide almost every service required for bioreactors, for example, aeration, agitation and sampling in addition to ph and temperature control, they possess considerable limitations, namely non-standard conformations resulting in scaleup difficulties, or special measurement techniques that are incompatible with standard methods. a readily available alternative, to be more precise, microtiter-plates (mtp), for microscale highthroughput fermentations has already been presented and reported [1]. the basic principle is to use sterile ’96-well’ microtiter plates with a special “sandwich cover” that facilitate sufficient aeration but reduce the likelihood of cross-infection. this system requires an *correspondence: naron@f-labor.mkt.bme.hu adapter to be able to mount microtiter plates into a commercial rotary incubator shaker. the next issue is to analyse and follow the processes in the wells since their volumes are so small (ca. 100 l) that sampling is impossible. therefore, either a microplate reader is required or a simple office scanner to produce a greyscale photo taken from the bottom of the plate. the colour of high cell-densities is close to white, but empty broths have a black background. in the case of species that produce high levels of acid, like lactobacillus, even a ph indicator can be applied and besides a greyscale photo a coloured one has to be taken as well; alternatively, caco3 should be added at the start but this can disturb the scanner-based “photometry”. our partner (enzyscreen.com) even offers microtiter plates for fed-batch fermentations. to achieve this, the feed components are adsorbed onto the material of the mtp, and are programmed to slowly release the fresh substrate during cultivation. however, another innovative solution has been developed for small-scale fermentations using online monitoring: biosan ltd. (lithuania) applies reverse-spin technology in the equipment of their personal bioreactor (rts-1). this cost-effective equipment rotates a standard falcon tube, filled with ca. 10 ml of fermentation media, at different rotation speeds in several directions at various controlled temperatures using a variety of aeration holes on the cap. this instrument also involves a photometer to facilitate the programming of measuring frequencies at a given wavelength (= 850 nm). for calibrated and reproducible measurements, a constant film layer is necessary, therefore, the instruments increase the rate of németh hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 20 rotation until 2000 rpm. the changes in parameters effect shear forces as well as levels of aeration. finally, this comparative study used an impedimetric system by sy-lab (austria) which is called bactrac 4100 [2]. this equipment possesses a block thermostat composed of 40 measurement cells, each containing 4 electrodes. one pair of them follows the changes in the impedance of the media, m%, caused by the secreted acids and metabolites. in the case of microorganisms that exhibit high levels of ionic strength in the media, it is hard to detect m%, therefore, with the application of a different frequency the changes in impedance on the other electrode surface (e%) can be followed. in direct measurements, these electrodes are immersed directly into the culture, but in the case of indirect measurements, they are rinsed with koh which can adsorb the formed co2 released by the culture. while this system does not possess mixer/aerator solutions, this result can be transferred carefully to the known systems, namely benchtop fermenters or shaking flasks. however, it is able to follow forty different cultures. in this study, a well-known model organism (s. cerevisiae) was chosen that exhibits special biochemical behaviour. it was used to test the compare the ability of the three systems introduced above. what is special about s. cerevisiae is that it can change from aerobic to anaerobic cultivation according to pasteur and crabtree effects; i.e. under lack of oxygen or excess to sugar, respectively. after changing to anaerobic metabolism, it produces mostly alcohol but later this can be consumed by yeast as well resulting in a stepwise growth curve, also referred to as a diauxic growth profile. thus, the question was whether such a system could show and follow this diauxic growth. 2. experimental commercial s. cerevisiae, i.e. baking yeast produced by lesaffre, was cultured on a media of molasses that were diluted by a factor of 10 resulting in a saccharose concentration of ca. 75 g dm -3 and a 20:1 volume of molasses to nh4oh ratio at 34°c. the 100 l of inoculum possessed a cell-dry-weight (cdw) content of 10 g/dm 3 . rts-1 collected the data in a microsoft excel database. bactrac only provided the data collected on screen plots, but with the help of digitizelt v.2.3 software the measurement data was transported into microsoft excel. to compare the data in microsoft excel, the structured model of blanch et al. [3] was adopted and programmed in berkeley madonna for windows 8.1. this model can describe both anaerobic cell growth on excess sugar with the formation of alcohol and aerobic cell growth on alcohol as a substrate. it divides cells into two main compartments, i.e. substructures: one is responsible for metabolism (both aerobic and anaerobic), and the other is responsible for cell division. the parameters, for example reciprocal yields and stoichiometric coefficients of the model, were partly determined experimentally, but others were determined by nonlinear model fitting, i.e. model calibration on real samples. 3. results and analysis 3.1. reverse-spin technology vs. personal bioreactor (rts-1) fig.1 presents the results of rts-1. while optical density (od), i.e. turbidity at = 850nm, changed slowly, the specific growth rate calculated online only reflected the uncertainty of the od measurements, but the temperature remained constant as expected. additionally diauxic growth was also detected but over a very long period of time. the model fitting was quite difficult because a satisfactory fit was only achieved after remarkable changes to basic constants, for example maximum specific growth rates on both substrates, etc., had been applied. 3.2. impedimetric system: bactrac in the case of the impedimetric experiments, three different arrangements were tested: an anaerobic cell with (a) (b) figure 1. the measured parameters (temperature, , od850) and calculated data (cdw from od850) along with the data of the predicted (i.e. fitted) model. (a) green line: temperature; blue line: measured turbidity at 850nm; brown line: measured specific growth rate. (b) green line: temperature; red crosses: calculated cell dry weight from the measured turbidity at 850nm; purple line: fitted model-based prediction for cdw. 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 t(°c) od (850nm) fermentation time (h) od(850nm) µ (h ̄ ¹) t °c growth on sugar growth on ethanol d i a u x i c g r o w t h 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 t(°c)cdw fermentation time (h) cdw predicted cdw t °c examination of innovative high-throughput fermentations 45(2) pp. 19–21 (2017) 21 an incorporated valve for gas release, an aerobic one, and an indirect one (fig.2). only m% values yielded explainable curves. indirect measurements yielded an inverse growth curve (decreasing) as expected, but did not exhibit a two-step decrease, i.e. diauxic growth, therefore, m% values of direct measurements were evaluated. the two curves of aerobic and anaerobic m% values were very similar to each other, but perhaps the anaerobic example is more relevant as in the case of high sugar content, the metabolism of yeast shifted in the anaerobic direction. fig.3 shows the fits of the model in which less constants had to be changed and diauxic growth was detected. 4. conclusion both tested systems – personal bioreactor (rts-1, biosan) and bactrac (sy-lab) – detected diauxic cell growth of baking yeast. rts-1 seemed to be a little bit more flexible, but bactrac gave faster results, was able to make 40 measurements at the same time and offered three options in terms of evaluation. maybe in the near future a solution to regular automatic sampling from larger-scale fermenters will be found and then the results can be compared with the ones presented here. acknowledgement we are sincerely grateful to sy-lab for the support provided with regard to bactrac, and to biocenter kft. for importing rts-1. references [1] németh, á.; kiss, á.; sevella, b.: experiments for d-lactic acid production with fermentation, hung. j. ind. chem., 2011 39(3), 359–362 [2] bankovsky, v.; bankovsky, i.; bankovsky, p.; isakova, j.; djackova, i.; sharipo, a.; eskin, j.; dišlers, a.; rozenstein, r.; saricev, v.; djacenko, s.; makarenko, v.; balodis, u.: reverse–spin® technology innovative principle of microbial cultivation, manufacturer's online leaflet: https://biosan.lv/images/uploads/content/files/reverse_spinner.pdf [3] blanch, h.w.; clark, d.s.: biochemical engineering (marcel dekker, ny, usa), 1996, pp. 231–236 isbn 9780824700997 (a) (b) (c) figure 2. the results of three bactrac measurements: relative changes in impedancy in the m% of media vs. time (h) (a) indirect-; (b) aerobic-direct-; (c) anaerobic-direct measurements. figure 3. model fitting to the anaerobic bactrac curve (m%): red crosses: measured data; purple line: modelpredicted values; green line: temperature (°c). 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 t(°c) measured (m%) and predicted impedancy fermentation time (h) m(%) predicted impedancy t °c d i a u x i c g r o w t h growth on ethanol growth on sugar microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 95-99 (2008) galacturonic acid recovery from pectin rich agro-wastes by electrodialysis with bipolar memranes e. molnár , n. nemestóthy, k. bélafi-bakó 1university of pannonia, research institute of chemical and process engineering egyetem u. 10., 8200 veszprém, hungary e-mail: emolnar@mukki.richem.hu pectin rich agro wastes can be utilised for manufacture of galacturonic acid. pectin is a complex polysaccharide found in the primary cell walls and intercellular regions of higher plants. backbone of pectin molecules is composed of galacturonic acid as a monomer. galacturonic acid and derivates are valuable raw materials in food and cosmetic industries as acidic agents and for production of vitamin c. in this work the aim was to produce galacturonic acid from citrus pectin and sugar beet pulp. the hydrolysate of pectin contains mainly carbohydrates (oligoand monosaccharides) and galacturonic acid. electrodialysis with bipolar membranes (edbm) represents an efficient technology to separate charged compounds from a solution. to remove galacturonic acid, edbm seems a suitable process, because galacturonic acid is present as a charged compound in the solution. to obtain galacturonic acid from hydrolysate of pectin laboratory experiments were performed, similar to the system applied by novalic et al. for recovery of other organic acids. an ed stack containing anion and cation selective and bipolar membranes was applied to obtain ga from hydrolysate. keywords: agro wastes, galacturonic acid, electrodialysis, bipolar membrane introduction pectin rich agro-wastes are available to manufacture galacturonic acid (ga). pectin is a complex polysaccharide found in the primary cell walls of higher plants. function of pectin is formation of bond in cells and between cell wall substances. the strength and structure of plants texture are determined also by this polysaccharide. the main component of pectin is backbone of α-1,4-linked galacturonic acid residues. galacturonic acid and derivates can be utilised in food industry (as acidic agents), chemical industry (as washing powder agent and nonionic or anionic biodegradable surfactants) and pharmaceutic of industry (for production of vitamin c) [1]. sugar beet pulp, apple pomace and other wastes (e.g. press cakes) from fruit juice industry are pectin rich raw materials. to obtain galacturonic acid, pectin is extracted from raw resources then its enzymatic hydrolysis results in galacturonic acid in diluted aqueous solution. in this work the plan was to produce galacturonic acid from citrus pectin and sugar beet pulp. for this purpose firstly pectin was extracted with hot water from sugar beet pulp then enzymatic hydrolysis was carried out using pectinex 100l enzyme preparation. the hydrolysate contains mainly carbohydrates (oligoand monosaccharides) and galacturonic acid. to recover galacturonic acid, electrodialysis with bipolar membranes (edbm) [2-4] seems to be a suitable process, because only galacturonic acid is present as a charged compound in the solution. electrodialysis with bipolar membranes (edbm) is an electromembrane process to separate ions and produce acids and basis. under electrical potential difference, charged compounds move in the direction of the oppositely charged electrode. anion(a) and cationselective (c) membranes let counter-ions cross and exclude co-ions. the function of bipolar membrane (bm) is to generate protons and hydroxyl ions which are removed from interphase of the membrane to outside phases. base is formed by hydroxyl ions and cations, acid is formed by protons and anions. uncharged components of salt solution are retained by bipolar membrane. to obtain galacturonic acid from hydrolysate electrodialysis with bipolar membranes was used [5]. galacturonic acid was separated and concentrated by edbm. the principle of our edbm shows fig. 1. when an electric field is applied, galacturonate ions migrate towards the anode. galacturonate ions leave the diluate solution and move through anion-selective membrane into acid compartment where galacturonic acid are formed by galacturonate ions and protons. sodium ions pass through cation-selective membranes and naoh is formed by generated hydroxyl and sodium ions. uncharged saccharide components are retained in the diluted solution. 96 anode + caustic solution (h2o) caustic solution (naoh) diluted solution (salt solution) cathode acid solution (h2o) acid solution (ga) diluted solution ohohohoh h+ h+ h+ h+ na+ na+ na+ na+ gagagagana+ ac c a a ac c cbm bm bm bm anode + caustic solution (h2o) caustic solution (naoh) diluted solution (salt solution) cathode acid solution (h2o) acid solution (ga) diluted solution ohohohoh h+ h+ h+ h+ na+ na+ na+ na+ gagagagana+ ac c a a ac c cbm bm bm bm figure 1: the principle of recovery galacturonic acid materials and methods the experimental set-up was purchased from fumatech (ft-ed-4-100-10 module). the electrodes were made of stainless steel. fumasep fkb, fumasep fab and fumasep fbm membranes, which are commercially available from fumatech gmbh (germany), were used. characteristics of membranes are shown table 1. the set-up composed of 10 anion-, 11 cation and 10 bipolar membranes. the effective membrane area was 0.31 m2. galacturonic acid applied as a standard and for model solution was purchased from sigma-aldrich, while sodium sulphate (electrolyte solution) from spectrum (hungary). firstly experiments were carried out with sodiumgalacturonate model solution, then secondly hydrolysate of sugar beet pulp was used to investigate removal of galacturonate. hydrolysis of pectin solution obtained from sugar beet pulp and citrus pectin was carried out by pectinase enzymes (pectinex 100l enzyme preparation) in a shaking incubator. the operation conditions were: 500 μl enzyme/ dm3 solution, 40 °c and 120 rpm. degradation of pectin was followed by acid titration (0.5 m naoh) and hplc, using perkin-elmer lc200 hplc. in order to recover ga, pretreatment of hydrolysate could be needed, because the membrane fouling is one of the main limiting factor of the process. large molecules can be removed by ultrafiltration or centrifugation. concentration of galacturonic acid in acid and diluted solutions was measured by colorimetrically with the dinitrosalicylic acid test (dna) method [6].in the acid solution, ph was followed by wtw microprocessor ph-meter. the data of conductivity in diluted, acid and base solutions, the electric current and voltage between electrodes was collected by data acquisition device (national instruments usb-6008/6009). the data were recorded by the program labview. table 1: main characteristics of membranes membrane characteristic fumasep fkb cation-exchange membrane peek-reinforced selectivity >98% electric resistance <4 ω*cm2 stability acid and caustic stable thickness 0,08–0,10 mm specific conductance >2 ms/cm ion exchange capacity 0,9–1,0 meq/g swelling 15% fumasep fab anion-exchange membrane peek reinforced selectivity >0,96% electric resistance <1 ω*cm2 stability 0–13 ph thickness 0,10–0,13 mm specific conductance >6 ms/cm ion exchange capacity >1,3 meq/g swelling 20% fumasep fbm bipolar membrane peek reinforced electric resistance <3 ω*cm2 thickness 0,2–0,25 mm thermal stability max 60 °c efficiency of water splitting >98% experiments were carried out at room temperature. 97 diluted, acid, caustic and electrode solution were circulated by peristaltic pumps. the flow rate of diluted, acid and caustic solution was 51 dm3/h, 44 dm3/h and 46 dm3/h. results voltagecurrent curves the voltage vs. current curves (u-i) were measured across the 31 compartment cell under different concentrations of na2so4 in electrode solution. the concentration of electrode solutions was 0.05/ 0.1/ 0.5/ 1 mol na2so4/dm 3-solution. the results are plotted in fig. 2. three regions are observed on the experimental u-i curves: at low value of voltage, the increase of potential voltage does not cause electric current increase, because the electric field turns to generate protons and hydroxide ions by bipolar membrane. in second region, rise of voltage causes rising current, nearly linear relationship exist between applied voltage and electric current. at high voltage, the resistance increases drastically when a certain current is reached. the amount of protons and hydroxyl ions produced at the transition region becomes a limiting factor. during experiments the current should not exceed this certain value (limiting current) otherwise membranes will be destroyed. the limiting value of electric current increases with increasing concentration of electrode solution. although at high concentration of electrolyte, lower limiting current was measured because of evolved concentration polarization. by the grounds of experiments electrode solution of concentration 0.1 mol na2so4/dm 3 was chosen, because the curve did not show limiting current in the voltage range studied. 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 voltage (v) el ec tr ic c u rr en t ( a ) 0.05 m na-sulphate 0.1 m na-sulphate 0.5 m na-sulphate 1 m na-sulphate figure 2: potential drop as a function of electric current comparison of measurements at constant voltage with model solution the experiments with model solutions were carried out with constant voltage namely at 12 v, 24 v and 36 v. the diluate concentration was initially 20 g nagalacturonate/dm3. the volume of circulated diluted, acid and caustic solution was 0.4 dm3, 0.4 dm3 and 0.45 dm3. the driving force for the transport of ions is the electrical potential difference. increasing voltage obviously enhances the ion transport through the membrane. the current in the stack as a function of time are plotted in fig. 2. due to ohm's law, at he beginning of experiments higher electric current was measured at higher constant voltage. as ions were transported from diluate solution, the concentration of ions and conductivity in diluate solution decreases, the resistance of diluate increases therefore electric current drops. 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 0 50 100 150 time (min) el ec tr ic c ur re nt (a ) 12 v 24v 36v figure 3: electric current in the edbm cell due to the transport of galacturonate ions and protons, galacturonic acid is formed in acid solution. the concentration of galacturonic acid (fig. 4) tends to a limiting value, independently of the value of voltage, as a function of time. 0 5 10 15 20 0 50 100 150 time (min) co nc en tr at io n (g g a /l) 12v 24v 36v figure 4: concentration of galacturonic acid in acid compartment in acid solution the ph value rapidly decreases at beginning then it slightly increases (fig. 5). the ph drop depends generated protons and formed galacturonic 98 acid. protons are transported faster from interphase than galacturonate ions from diluate solution. at the beginning protons cause rapid ph drop. increase of ph shows galacturonic acid formation in acid solution. at lower applied voltage, ph has lower value because the transport of galacturonate ions is slower. 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 0 50 100 150 time (min) ph 12 v 24 v 36 v figure 5: ph vs. time in acid solution 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 0 50 100 150 time (min) co nd uc tiv ity (µ s ) 12v 24v 36v figure 6/a: conductivity of the diluate solution as a function of time 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 0 50 100 150 time (min) co nd uc tiv ity (µ s ) 12v 24v 36v figure 6/b: conductivity of the acid solution as a function of time conductivity of diluate solution (fig. 6/a) decreases as a function of time due to the carried galacturonate and sodium ions. at the beginning conductivity in acid solution (fig. 6/b) increases rapidly at higher value of voltage (36 v). this increase is caused by protons, after 7.5 minutes the produced galacturonic acid decreases the conductivity. at lower value of voltage the water dissociation is slower, that causes less conductivity increase. our results shows measurements can be efficiently performed at voltage of 36 v. experiment with citrus pectin hydrolysate edbm with citrus pectin was carried out at 36v. the volume of citrus pectin hydrolisate was 2.95 dm3, the concentration of hydrolysate was 35.4 g nagalacturonate/dm3. the volume of acid and caustic solution was 1 dm3. results were agreement with results of model solutions. the concentration of ga in acid and diluate solution are shown in fig. 7. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 time (min) co nc en tr at io n (g g a /l) acid solution diluate solution figure 7: concentration of galacturonic acid in the acid and the diluate solution in an electrodialysis process not all of the current flowing through the stack can be utilized. average current efficiency [7] for galacturonic acid can be calculated as ni cqfδ =η where q is volume flux of acid solution, f is the faraday constant, δc is the concentration difference between acid solution in the feed of the entrance and that in the exit, n is the number of the cell units, and i is the average current. the change of current efficiency shows fig. 8 in the course of experiment with citrus pectin hydrolisate. as shown in fig. 8, the average current efficiency decreases with time therefore restricts the possibility of obtaining higher concentration of ga in acid solution. 99 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 time (min) cu rr en t e ffi ci en cy figure 8: the change of current efficiency as a function of time recovery of galacturonic acid from acid solution the saccharide composition (determined by hplc) of hydrolysate is 76% galacturonic acid, 3% partly hydrolysed pectin, 2.4% pectin, 8.2% glucose and 10.4% other monosaccharide, while acid solution is composed of 97.97% galacturonic acid and 2.03% partly hydrolysed pectin. to obtain galacturonic acid from the acid solution it was crystallised with methanol, then water and methanol were eliminated by vacuum filtration and vacuum drying. conclusion bipolar membrane electrodialysis can be applied for separation galacturonic acid. crystallised galacturonic acid has purity of 98%. references 1. kertesz z. i.: the pectic substances (1951), interscience publishers, new york 2. mulder m. h. v.: basic principles of membrane technology (1996), kluwer, dordrecht 3. hodúr c.: élelmezési ipar, 44 (1990) 270-272 (in hungarian) 4. gyura j., seres z., vatai gy., bekassy-molnar e.: desalination, 148 (2002) 49-56 5. novalic s., kongbangkerd t., kulbe k. d.: journal of membrane science, 166 (2000) 99-104 6. miller g. l.: analytical chemistry, 31 (1959) 426-428 7. strathmann h.: ion-exchange membrane separation (2004), elsevier, amsterdam hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 45(2) pp. 45–49 (2017) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2017-0020 application of a hydrophobic polymeric membrane for carbon dioxide desorption from an mea-water solution zenon ziobrowski * , adam rotkegel institute of chemical engineering of the polish academy of sciences, ul. balycka 5, 44-100 gliwice, poland carbon dioxide desorption from a monoethanolamine (mea) solution using a hydrophobic polydimethylsiloxane (pdms) tubular membrane on a ceramic support is presented. the effects of operating parameters such as feed temperature, liquid flow rate and mea concentration on mass transfer were examined. the mass transfer of co2 from the liquid to gaseous phase was predicted by a multilayer film model with an accuracy of ±25%. research into new selective materials is needed to develop more efficient and environmentally friendly co2 capture technology keywords: mea, desorption, carbon dioxide, hydrophobic membrane, pdms 1. introduction fossil fuel combustion from power plants is one of the most significant sources of co2 emissions [1]. the separation of carbon dioxide from gases can be realized by processes such as adsorption, absorption, low temperature distillation and membrane separation. the absorption of carbon dioxide in amine based solutions is currently the most widespread method in industry for the post-combustion capture of co2 [2]. the advantage of chemical absorption in amine solutions is the fact that at higher temperatures the chemical reaction can be reversed and the amine recycled. on the other hand, obstacles include a relatively low co2 capture capacity, solvent losses caused by evaporation, thermal stability, highly corrosive characteristics, ecotoxicity and biodegradability in the natural environment [2-4]. it was shown that mea and diethanolamine (dea) might promote potential long-term toxicity effects towards living organisms [5,6]. in addition the regeneration step may increase the total operating costs of the capture plant by up to 70%, especially for primary and tertiary amines where the heat of reaction is quite high [7]. the amine scrubbing processes carried out in packed columns are currently most widely used in industry for the post-combustion capture of co2. limiting factors for the application of this technology are its size and large capital costs. the mass transfer performance of this solution can be reduced by flooding, foaming and entrainment conditions. *correspondence: zenz@iich.gliwice.pl in comparison to the studies on co2 absorption in mea solutions there are only a few concerning co2 desorption, despite the fact that the stripping unit is responsible for most of the separation cost of the process [8]. it is important that materials used in the processes concerning post-combustion capture of co2 exhibit low or no environmental effects. various tubular membranes were operated as catalyst supports [9]. recently a new type of ceramic hollow fiber membrane contactor has been studied [10]. this kind of membrane can be modified to be hydrophobic which enables it to be applied for co2 absorption-desorption in amine solutions. in this study the process of co2 removal from an mea solution using a hydrophobic polydimethylsiloxane (pdms) tubular membrane on a ceramic support was investigated. 2. experimental 2.1. experimental setup the experimental setup shown in fig.1 consisted of a membrane module, reactor vessel, cooling system, as well as circulation and vacuum pumps. the hydrophobic pdms membranes on ceramic support (ceramic tubes with an outer diameter of 0.01 m and length of 0.25 m using a pvm 250 membrane module made by pervatech bv) was studied. the feed was circulated by a pump and the flow rate was controlled by a flowmeter. in all experiments the feed temperature was stabilized by a thermostat (1c). the permeate was condensed and collected in cold traps immersed in liquid nitrogen. the vacuum pump was used to maintain the pressure between 7 and 10 mmhg on the permeate side. the concentration of ziobrowski and rotkegel hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 46 carbon dioxide in the permeate was calculated by measuring the mass of carbon dioxide and water in the analyzed permeate sample. the pressures on the feed and permeate sides were measured by pressure gauges. the temperatures of the feed in the reactor vessel, before and after the membrane module were measured by thermocouples. pure monoethanolamine (mea) and deionised water were used to prepare the liquid-feed solution. afterwards the obtained solution was loaded with co2 by bubbling pure co2 in a magnetically stirred vessel until the required carbonation ratio, , was achieved. in our experiments the carbonation ratio was determined by measuring the mass of absorbed co2 in the amine solution at a given temperature. additionally, independent pervaporation experiments with the same pdms membrane under similar thermal and hydrodynamic conditions for a 2-propanol – water mixture were performed to estimate the membrane resistance (1/km). 2.2. experimental results the performance of the pdms membrane was examined experimentally. the operating temperature was between 323 and 348k (50 and 75°c), liquid flow rate between 20 and 600 l/h and the mea concentrations were 5, 10 and 15 wt%. the effect of liquid flow rate on the co2 mass flux and selectivity is presented in figs.2 and 3 for the temperature of 323k (50°c) and 10% mea concentration. the selectivity of the process is defined as follows: 2 2 2 2 co co co co ( (1 )) ( (1 )) p f w w s w w (1) the measured fluxes increase with the reynolds number. the highest values were obtained for re>10,000 (turbulent flow). this can be explained by the co2 mass transfer increase in the liquid phase for turbulent regime. the measured selectivities rise with the reynolds number and for turbulent flows reach the value of 10. the operating temperature is an important parameter as far as the efficiency of the membrane is concerned as shown in fig.4. for a given turbulent liquid flow rate the measured co2 mass fluxes rise with the feed temperatures due to the increased driving force in favour of co2 mass transfer. the selectivity does not change significantly with the operating temperature, fig.5. the effect of the mea concentration on mass flux and selectivity is presented in figs.6-7 at an operating temperature of 323k (50°c) and turbulent flow (re of about 40,000). the measured mass fluxes do not change significantly with mea concentration (fig.6), because of the figure 1. the experimental setup: 1 – membrane contactor, 2 – feed tank, 3 – cold traps, 4 – circulation pump, 5 – vacuum pump, 6 – heater figure 3. the effect of re number on selectivity (t = 50°c and wmea = 10 wt%) figure 2. the effect of re number on co2 mass flux (t = 50°c, wmea = 10 wt%) figure 4. the effect of feed temperature on co2 mass flux (wmea = 10 wt%) application of hydrophobic polymeric membrane for co2 desorption ... 45(2) pp. 45–49 (2017) 47 relationship between equilibrium constants of the co2 mea reaction and the co2 solubility in water at a given temperature. the selectivity decreases with mea concentration as a result of the rising amount of co2 absorbed in the mea solution and the constant co2 flux in the permeate, see fig.7. 3. mathematical model and calculation results when co2 is absorbed in aqueous monoethanolamine (mea) solution, the following reactions can be written as [11]: slow 2 2 2co rnh rn h coo (2) fast 2 2 3rn h coo rnh rnh rnhcoo (3) the formation of carbamate is well understood and the rate of the forward reaction has been determined as first order with respect to both co2 and rnh2: cf 2 2[co ][rnh ]r k (4) during the desorption process the differences in the concentration of the component and the temperature between the inlet and outlet in the liquid phase are very small. therefore, the desorption rate may be simply calculated using the arithmetic mean value of co2 in the liquid phase. with this assumption we can calculate the mass fluxes of co2 can be calculated as follows: 2 2 2 * lco co co( )n k x x (5) where nco2 [kmol/s] is the flux of co2 and kl [kmol/m 2 s] is the overall mass-transfer coefficient of the liquid phase. the overall mass-transfer coefficient for co2 can be evaluated by a resistance-in-series model [12]. the numerical calculations based on model equations were performed and estimated values of membrane resistance (1/km) used. in the calculations the experimental values of the henry’s constant for co2 in water and mea under standard conditions are 1.2456 and 1.5732, respectively [13]. the enhancement factor of the chemical reaction of co2 in the liquid phase, as defined by decoursey [14], was between 20 and 60. the viscosity of the water–mea mixture was calculated according to a grunberg and nissan equation [15]. calculated and experimental values of co2 mass fluxes are figure 5. the effect of feed temperature on selectivity (wmea = 10 wt%) figure 6. the effect of mea concentration on co2 mass flux figure 7. the effect of mea concentration on selectivity figure 8. comparison of calculated values of co2 fluxes with experimental ones ziobrowski and rotkegel hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 48 shown in fig.8. the scattering of calculated and experimental values of co2 mass fluxes was within the range of ±25% . the experimental values of co2 mass fluxes were compared with those obtained from the literature for co2 stripping in a ceramic hollow fiber membrane contactor [10]. in spite of the different types of membrane type and hydrodynamic conditions the measured values of co2 mass fluxes were comparable in both cases. conclusions the application of a membrane in the process of co2 stripping from mea solutions avoids some technical problems that are encountered in industrial practices. the pdms hydrophobic tubular membrane on a ceramic support can be applied for the removal of co2 from mea solutions. in developed turbulent flows the measured co2 mass fluxes and selectivities do not change significantly with re number (figs.2-3). the measured co2 mass fluxes increase as the feed temperature rises (fig.4) and slightly depend on the mea concentration (fig.6). the measured and calculated co2 mass fluxes are in good agreement with each other (fig.8). the ±25% variation in scattering can be explained by the accuracy of the correlations, experimental precision and simplification of the model. 4. symbols c – concentration, kmol m-3 d – diffusion coefficient, m2 s-1 kl – overall mass transfer coefficient, kmol m -2 s-1 km – mass transfer coefficient of the membrane, kmol m -2 s-1 n – mass flux kmol m-2s-1 r – reaction rate, kmol s-1 re – reynolds number s – selectivity t – temperature, k w – mass fraction x – mole fraction of co2 in the liquid phase superscripts * refers to equilibrium subscripts calc – calculation co2 – carbon dioxide exp experimental f – feed g – gaseous phase l – liquid phase p permeate references [1] budzianowski w.m.: single solvents, solvent blends, and advanced solvent systems in co2 capture by absorption: a review, int. j. global warming, 2015 7 (2), 184-225, doi: 10.1504/ijgw.2015.067749 [2] rochelle g.t.: amine scrubbing for co2 capture, science, 2009 325, 1652-1654, doi: 10.1126/science.1176731 [3] zhao b.; sun y.; yuan y.; gao j.; wang s.; zhuo y.; chen c.: study on corrosion in co2 chemical absorption process using amine solution, energy procedia, 2011 4, 93–100, doi: 10.1016/j.egypro.2011.01.028 [4] eide-haugmo i. et al.: environmental impact of amines, energy procedia 2009 1, 1297–1304, doi: 10.1016/j.egypro.2009.01.170 [5] libralato g.; volpi ghirardini a.; avezzù f.: seawater ecotoxicity of monoethanolamine, diethanolamine and triethanolamine, j. hazard. mat., 2010 176, 535–539, doi: 10.1016/j.jhazmat.2009.11.062 [6] ethanolamine compounds (mea, dea, tea and others), online: http://www.safecosmetics.org/getthe-facts/chemicals-of-concern/ethanolaminecompounds/, accessed: 2017-10-05 [7] schäfer b.; mather a.e.; marsh k.n.: enthalpies of solution of carbon dioxide in mixed solvents, fluid phase equilib., 2002 194, 929-935, doi: 10.1016/s0378-3812(01)00722-1 [8] dugas r.; rochelle g.: absorption and desorption rates of carbon dioxide with monoethanolamine and piperazine, energy procedia, 2009 1, 11631169, doi: 10.1016/j.egypro.2009.01.153 [9] keil f. j.; flügge u.: high performance catalytic tubular membrane reactors owing to forced convective flow operation, hung. j. ind. chem.,2005, 32(1-2), 31-42 [10] koonaphapdeelert s.; wu z.; li k.: carbon dioxide stripping in ceramic hollow fibre membrane contactors, chem. eng. sci., 2009 64, 1-8, doi: 10.1016/j.ces.2008.09.010 [11] astarita g.; savage d.w.; bisio a.: gas treating with chemical reaction, john wiley & sons, new york, 1983 [12] kreulen h.; smolders c.a.; versteeg g.f.; van swaaij w.p.m.: microporous hollow fiber membrane module as gas-liquid contactors. part 2: mass transfer with chemical reaction, j. membrane sci., 1993 78, 217-238, doi: 10.1016/03767388(93)80002-f [13] browning g.j.; weiland r.h.: physical solubility of carbon dioxide in aqueous alkanolamine via nitrous oxide analogy, j. chem. eng. data, 1994 39, 817-822, doi: 10.1021/je00016a040 [14] decoursey w.j.: enhancement factors for gas absorption with reversible reaction, chem. eng. sci., 1982 37, 1483-1489, doi: 10.1016/0009-2509(82)800055 application of hydrophobic polymeric membrane for co2 desorption ... 45(2) pp. 45–49 (2017) 49 [15] meng-hui l., yei-chung l.: densities and viscosities of solutions of monoethanolamine + nmethyldiethanolamine + water and monoethanolamine + 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol + water, j. chem. eng. data, 1994 39, 444-447, doi: 10.1021/je00015a009 microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 39-42 (2008) investigation of satureja hortensis l. as a possible source of natural antioxidants l. gontaru , s. plánder, b. simándi budapest university of technology and economics, department of chemical and environmental process engineering budapest 1111, budafoki út 6-8. f/ii. 1. floor, hungary e-mail: gontaru@vtp.rub.de natural antioxidants play important roles as health-protecting factors. antioxidants are also widely used as additives in fats and in food processing to prevent or delay spoilage of foods. spices have received an increased attention as natural sources of many effective antioxidants. in this study satureja hortensis l. (summer savory) was examined as a potential source of natural antioxidant compounds. for the isolation of the active components two extraction methods were investigated: conventional soxhlet extraction and supercritical fluid extraction. conventional soxhlet extraction was carried out with organic solvents with different polarities. supercritical fluid extractions were performed with neat co2 at two different pressures (300 and 450 bar) at 40 °c. to estimate the antioxidant activity of the extracts, 1,1-diphenyl-2picrylhydydrazyl (dpph) assay was used. the results were reported as ic 50%, where ic 50% was defined as the extract concentration required decreasing the initial dpph concentration by 50%. the antioxidant activity of the extracts obtained with organic solvents decreased in the following order: ethanol 50% > ethanol 96% > isopropanol > ethanol 100% > acetone > ethyl acetate > pentane. the highest antioxidant activity exhibited the extract obtained with ethanol 50% (with an ic 50% value of 14.48 ± 0.02 µg/ml), while the extract obtained with pentane showed the lowest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 98 ± 0.1 µg/ml). the antioxidant activity of the extracts was also compared with the antioxidant activity of butylated hydroxytoluene (bht). the extract obtained with ethanol 50% showed approximately similar antioxidant activity as bht (with an ic 50% of 12.86 ± 0.19 µg/ml). although in the case of the supercritical extraction the antioxidant activity increased with increasing the pressure, it was lower than the antioxidant activity of the extracts performed with organic solvents. keywords: summer savory, extraction, antioxidant activity introduction recently the interest in natural antioxidants has increased dramatically due to: (1) concerns regarding the safety of the chronic consumption of synthetic antioxidants (butylated hydroxyltoluene and butylated hydroxylanisole), (2) the antioxidant efficiency of a variety of phytochemicals, (3) the consensus that foods rich in certain phytochemicals can affect the aetiology and pathology of chronically diseases and the ageing process and (4) the public’s conceived belief that natural compounds are innately safer than synthetic compounds and are thus more commercially acceptable [1]. herbs, spices and teas are the most important targets in research for natural antioxidants from the point of view of safety. satureja hortensis l. is an annual culinary herb belonging to the family labiatae. it is known as summer savory, native to southern europe and naturalized in parts of north america [2]. the leaves, flowers and stems of summer savory are frequently used as additives in commercial spice mixtures for many foods to confer aroma and flavour. this plant is also used in the traditional medicine to treat various ailments as cramps, muscal pains, nausea, indigestion, diarrhoea, and infection diseases [3]. besides, it was demonstrated that extracts from satureja hortensis l. exhibited antimicrobial, antioxidant, sedative, antispasmotic and antidiarrheal properties [2-8]. the objectives of the present study were first of all to select the plant material, and then to identify the most suitable solvent to recover the antioxidant compounds from this plant. in order to select the raw material a preliminary investigation on the quality was carried out. the antioxidant activity of natural extracts has been found to depend on the active components of the raw material, the type and polarity of extraction solvent and the isolation procedure [9]. in our study two extraction methods were compared: conventional soxhlet extraction and supercritical fluid extraction. 40 materials solvents and reagent for the laboratory extraction, co2 used was of 99.5% (w/w) purity and was supplied by linde gas hungary co. ltd. all other solvents (pentane, ethyl-acetate, isopropanol, ethanol 100%, ethanol 96%, acetone) used for the conventional soxhlet extractions were purchased from molar chemicals ltd, hungary. the ethanol 50% (50% water) used also for the conventional soxhlet extraction was prepared from ethanol 96%. 1,1pdipheny2-picryl-hydrazyl (dpph) free radical used for the estimation of the antioxidant activities of the extracts and bht used as a standard were purchased from fluka, switzerland. plant material four samples of dried summer savory plant (satureja hortensis l.) were bought from three different companies fitodry kft, rózsahegyi kft, biodrog-berta kft in hungary. in our work the samples are noted with savory 1, savory 2, savory 3 and savory 4, respectively. a preliminary investigation on the quality of the samples was carried out. the moisture content of every sample was measured. the moisture content decreased as follows: savory 1 (14.37%) > savory 2 (11.42%) > savory 3 (11.25%) > savory 4 (8.81%). for the characterization of the rubbed raw material sieving was performed using a vertical vibratory sieve shaker (labortechnik gmbh, ilmenau) for 20 min. the particle size of the rubbed raw material was approximately 0.8–1.2 mm. methods soxhlet extraction extractions with organic solvents of different polarities (pentane, acetone, ethyl-acetate, isopropanol, ethanol 100%, ethanol 96% and ethanol 50%) were carried out. samples about 15–20 g raw material were extracted in a soxhlet apparatus with 250 ml solvent, until totally depleted. the whole process took 22–24 h. after extraction the solvent was removed under vacuum using a rotator evaporator rotadest, type 2118. two parameters were measured: the yield% (w/w) (which was determined as the amount of the extract/100 g of dry material) and the antioxidant activity. every extraction was carried out in triplicate. supercritical fluid extraction the extraction experiments were performed in a high pressure pilot plant equipped with a 5 l volume extractor vessel (delivered by natex, austria). two extractions with neat co2 at two different pressures (300 and 450 bar) at 40 °c were performed. for each extraction about 1000 g rubbed savory plant was weighted accurately and filled into the extractor. the desired temperature and pressure were adjusted, and the co2 feed was started. the accumulated product samples were collected and weighed at certain time intervals. the co2 flow rate was measured with a micro motion rft 9729 type mass flow meter and it was about 7 kg/h in both cases. the extractions were carried on until the amount of the last product sample decreased for one hour under 0.1% of the raw material. a more detailed description of the equipment is given extensively elsewhere [10]. estimation of antioxidant activity by dpph assay to estimate the antioxidant activity of the extracts dpph (1,1-diphenyl-2-picryl-hydrazyl) assay was used. dpph is a stable free radical which is often used as an indicator in testing hydrogen-donation capacity and thus antioxidant activity. the dpph assay was carried out following the same method as reported elsewhere [11]. different concentrations of various extracts dissolved in methanol were added to 2.5 ml methanol solution of dpph. after 30 min incubation period at room temperature, the absorption was read against a blank at 517 nm using a uv/vis spectrophotometer m501 single beam – camspec. the inhibition of the free radical dpph was calculated in percent (i%) in the following way: i% = [(ablank asample)/ablank] · 100 where: ablank – is the absorbance of the control reaction (containing all reagents except the test compound), asample – is the absorption of the test component. results were reported as ic 50%, where ic 50% was defined as the extract concentration required decreasing the initial concentration by 50%. results and discussion selection of plant material in order to select the plant material for our experiments a preliminary investigation on the quality of four different samples of summer savory was performed. antioxidants are known to interrupt the free radical chain of oxidation by donating hydrogen from phenolic hydroxy groups and to form stable products, which do not initiate or propagate further oxidation [12]. the concentration of an antioxidant needed to decrease the dpph concentration by 50% is a parameter widely used to estimate antioxidant activity [13]. the 41 lower the ic50 value, the higher is the antioxidant activity [14]. the results of the extraction yield and antioxidant activity of the ethanol and pentane extracts are shown in table 1 and 2. table 1: yield and antioxidant activity of different samples of satureja hortensis l. extracted with ethanol 96% ethanol extract raw material ayield (%) aic 50% (μg/ml) savory1 28.96 ± 0.41 40 ± 0.1 savory2 24.83 ± 0.22 27 ± 0.3 savory3 17.92 ± 0.93 80 ± 0.1 savory4 15.27 ± 1.09 50 ± 0.6 amean value of three measurements ± sd (standard deviation) it can be observed that the ethanol extracts showed both antioxidant activities and the yields higher than the extracts obtained with pentane. among the extracts obtained with ethanol, the savory 2 extract exhibited the highest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 27 ± 0.3 µg/ml), while the savory 3 extract showed the lowest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 80 ± 0.1 µg/ml). in the ethanol extracts no correlation could be observed between the antioxidant activity and the yield. table 2: yield and antioxidant activity of different samples of satureja hortensis l. extracted with pentane pentane extract raw material ayield (%) aic 50% (μg/ml) savory1 3.19 ± 0.19 160 ± 0.2 savory2 3.51 ± 0.12 160 ± 0.2 savory3 2.27 ± 0.09 185 ± 0.8 savory4 2.44 ± 0.11 180 ± 0.3 amean value of three measurements ± sd (standard deviation) in the case of the extractions performed with pentane the extracts of savory 1 and savory 2 manifested a higher antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 160 ± 0.2 µg/ml) and higher yield than the extracts of savory 3 and savory 4 but less than the antioxidant activity of the same samples obtained with ethanol. it can be concluded that the best quality exhibited the extract of savory 2. this sample was used in our further experiments. in the attempt to increase the yield and the antioxidant activity, the savory 2 was subjected to the extraction with three different organic solvents in milled form and without milling. influence of the milling on the yield and antioxidant activity of different extracts of savory 2 is represented in table 3. although by the milling of the plant material the yield increased, the antioxidant activity decreased. therefore for the next experiments it was decided to use the plant material (savory 2) without milling. table 3: extraction yield and antioxidant activity of different extracts of savory 2 with and without milling ayield (%) aic 50% µg/ml s with milling without milling with milling without milling 1 26.91 ± 0.50 25.36 ± 1.07 35 ± 0.1 24 ± 0.1 2 25.77 ± 0.35 18.67 ± 0.90 60± 0.1 53 ± 0.7 3 11.48 ± 0.54 8.48 ± 0.44 90 ± 0.2 80 ± 0.3 amean value of three measurements ± sd (standard deviation) s solvent; 1: ethanol 96%; 2: ethanol 100%; 3: ethyl acetate. selection of the solvent in order to isolate the active compounds two extraction methods were investigated: conventional soxhlet extraction and supercritical fluid extraction. fig. 1 shows the effect of the polarity of the solvents on the antioxidant activity of different extracts of savory 2. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 bht 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 solvent ic 5 0% (µ g/ m l) figure 1: antioxidant activity of different extracts of savory 2 and bht 1: ethanol 50%, 2: ethanol 96%, 3: isopropanol, 4: ethanol 100%, 5: acetone, 6: ethyl acetate, 7: pentane, 8, 9: supercritical fluid extracts performed at 450 and 300 bar, respectively at 40°c in the case of the extraction performed with organic solvents the antioxidant activity of the extracts decreased as follows: ethanol 50% > ethanol 96% > isopropanol > ethanol 100% > acetone > ethyl acetate > pentane. the extract obtained with ethanol 50% exhibited both the highest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 14.48 ± 0.02 µg/ml) and the highest yield (34.67 ± 1.57 w/w) whereas the extract performed with pentane showed the lowest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 98 ± 0.1 µg/ml) and the lowest yield (3.08 ± 0.1 w/w). the extraction yield of different extracts of savory 2 is represented in fig. 2. a correlation between the antioxidant activity and the extraction yield was found. 42 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 solvent y ie ld (% ) figure 2: yield of different extracts of savory 2. 1: 50% ethanol; 2: 96% ethanol; 3: isopropanol; 4: 100% ethanol; 5: acetone; 6: ethyl acetate; 7: pentane; 8, 9: supercritical fluid co2 at 450 and 300 bar, respectively at 40 °c supercritical fluid extraction was carried out with neat co2 at two different pressures, 300 and 450 bar at 40 °c. it was observed that by increasing the pressure both the antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% from 147.3 to 137.6 µg/ml) and the yield (from 2.23 to 3.02 w/w) increased. however, the antioxidant activity of the extracts performed with supercritical fluid co2 was lower than the antioxidant activity of the extracts obtained with organic solvents. the explication can be found in the polarity of the solvents, because the active compounds are usually polar compounds. since the co2 is non-polar solvent more non-polar compound can be extracted. more experiments with supercritical fluid co2 in present of different concentrations of a modifier are in progress in order to concentrate the active compounds. we assume that the maximum antioxidant activity was recovered with ethanol 50%. conclusions satureja hortensis l. was investigated as a potential source of natural antioxidant compounds. to recover the antioxidants two isolation methods, conventional soxhlet extraction and supercritical fluid extraction were compared. the best organic solvent to recover the antioxidant compounds was found to be ethanol 50% (with an ic 50% of 14.48 ± 0.02 µg/ml). the extracts obtained by using supercritical fluid extraction with neat co2 at two different pressures (300 and 450 bar) at 40 °c showed approximately 10 times lower antioxidant activity then the extracts obtained with organic solvents. to increase the polarity of the active compounds by using supercritical co2 a modifier is required. more extraction experiments with different concentrations of an entrainer are in progress. acknowledgements this research was financially supported through a european community marie curie fellowship (project mest-ct-2004-007767). for further information: http://www.cordis.lu/imprcong. references 1. dorman, d., hiltunen, r.: journal of food chemistry 88 (2004) 193-199. 2. sahin, f., karaman, i., güllüce, m., et al.: journal of ethnopharmacology 87 (2003) 61-65. 3. esquivel, m. m., ribeiro, m. a., bernardo-gil, m. g.: the journal of supercritical fluids 14 (1999) 129-139. 4. güllüce, m., sökmen, m., daferera, d., et al.: journal of agriculture and food chemistry 51 (2003) 3958-3965. 5. exarchou, v., nenadis, n., tsimidou, m., et al.: journal of agriculture and food chemistry 50 (2002) 5294-5299. 6. hajhashemi, v., sadraei, h., ghannadi, a. r. et al.: journal of ethnopharmacology 71 (2000) 187-192. 7. deans, s., svobova, k. p.: journal of horticultural science 65 (1989) 205-210. 8. madsen, h. l., andersen, l., christiansen, l., et al.: journal of food research and technology 203 (1996) 333-338. 9. cuvelier, m., richard, h., berset, c.: journal of american oil chemists’ society 73 (1996) 645-662. 10. simandi, b., deák, a., rónyai, e., et al.: journal of agriculture and food chemistry 47 (1999) 16351640. 11. blois, m. s.: nature 181 (1958) 1199-1200. 12. kouri, g., tsimogiannis, d., bardouki, h., et al.: innovation food science & emerging technologies 8 (2007) 155-162. 13. atoui, a. k., mansoury, a., boskou, g., et al.: journal of food chemistry 89 (2005) 27-36. 14. brand-williams, w., cuvelier, m. e., berset, c.: lebensmittel – wissenschaft und technologie 28 (1995) 25-30. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 46(2) pp. 33–36 (2018) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2018-0015 comparison between static and dynamic analyses of the solid fat content of coconut oil vinod dhaygude *1 , anita soós1 , ildikó zeke2 , and lászló somogyi1 1department of grain and industrial plant technology, szent istván university, villányi út 29–43, budapest, 1118, hungary 2department of refrigeration and livestock products technology, szent istván university, ménesi út 43-45, budapest, 1118, hungary the objective of this work was to compare the physical and thermal characteristics of two coconut oils and their blends which were observed by the results of differential scanning calorimetry (dsc) and pulsed nuclear magnetic resonance (pnmr). fat blends composed of different ratios (fully hydrogenated coconut oil / non-hydrogenated coconut oil: 25/75, 50/50 and 75/25) were prepared and examined for solid fat content. the solid fat content of samples was determined as a function of temperature by pnmr. the dsc technique determines the solid fat index by measuring the heat of fusion successively at different temperatures. dsc calculates the actual content of solids in fat samples and how it changes throughout the duration of heating or cooling. a characteristic curve is constructed by the correlation of enthalpies. based on our results, it is clear that both dsc and pnmr techniques provide very practical and useful information on the solid fat content of fats. dsc is dynamic and pnmr is static. a difference in the values of the solid fat indexes of samples was observed which may be due to a fundamental difference between the two techniques. these data can be used by food manufacturers to optimize processing conditions for modified coconut oil and food products fortified with coconut oil. keywords: solid fat content, solid fat index, pnmr, dsc, and coconut oil 1. introduction nowadays, a proper understanding of the crystallization and melting properties of coconut oil systems is essential to increase the number of applications in the food industry. coconut oil is considered as a multi-component mixture of various triglycerides which determines the physical properties that affect the structure, stability, flavor as well as sensory and visual characteristics of foods [1]. modification of the properties of solid fat has received much attention in research recently because of its importance during the processing and production of new food products. the crystallization and melting properties of modified fat used as a shortening in bakery products are critical [2]. the crystal networks present in modified fat strongly enhance its texture, stability and acceptance of fatty-food products. an essential aspect of the industrial manufacture of edible oils and fats is the ability to measure the physical and thermal properties of the materials such as melting and crystallisation profiles, solid fat content (sfc), solid fat index (sfi) and enthalpy. nuclear magnetic resonance (nmr) spectroscopy and differential scanning calorimetry (dsc) are easier to implement and faster techniques than dilatometry which is time-consuming and inaccurate *correspondence: vinod.dhaygude05@gmail.com [3]. nmr has been widely used for the analysis of food materials such as dairy products, fats and oils, in addition to wine and beverages. over the past two decades, dsc has been increasingly utilised for the thermodynamic characterisation of edible oils and fats as well as the sfi determination of food fats. considering the significant scientific and practical importance of the physical properties of coconut oil from a few studies, the solid fat content determined by nmr and dsc methods was investigated and the obtained results compared. ultimately, this research study is beneficial to the food industry which continues to reformulate many products. 2. experimental 2.1 materials in this research study, barco coconut oil was used as a source of non-hydrogenated coconut oil (nhco) which was kindly provided by mayer’s kft. in budapest. the fully hydrogenated coconut oil (fhco) was obtained from local industry in hungary. blends of nhco and fhco were mixed in 25:75, 50:50 and 75:25 (w/w) proportions. the blends were melted and maintained at 80 ◦c for 30 mins to erase crystal memory. subsequently, mailto:vinod.dhaygude05@gmail.com 34 dhaygude, soós, zeke, and somogyi table 1: fatty acid composition (%) of nhco, fhco and their blends. fatty acid fhco fhco:nhco nhco (%) 75:25 50:5 25:75 c6:0 0.1 0.225 0.35 0.475 0.6 c8:0 1.9 3.175 4.45 5.725 7 c10:0 2.7 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.5 c12:0 53.3 51.425 49.55 47.675 45.8 c12:1 0.1 0.075 0.05 0.025 − c14:0 21.3 20.675 20.05 19.425 18.8 c16:0 10 10.025 10.05 10.075 10.1 c18:0 10 8.25 6.5 4.75 3 c18:1 trans 0.03 0.0575 0.085 0.1125 0.14 c18:1 cis 0.3 2.0 3.7 5.4 7.1 c18:2 trans − 0.02 0.05 0.08 0.11 c18:2 cis 0.1 0.5 0.9 1.3 1.7 c20 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 other 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.065 0.08 all blends and pure samples of fat were stored in a refrigerator at 10 ◦c until use. 2.2 methodologies static analysis the static analysis of the solid fat content was conducted by pulsed nuclear magnetic resonance (pnmr) apparatus (bruker minispec 300, bruker gmbh, germany) according to the official method cd 16b-93 of the american oil chemists’ society (aocs) [4]. the solid fat content was measured at 5 ◦c, 10 ◦c, 15 ◦c, 20 ◦c, 25 ◦c and 30 ◦c. three parallel measurements were conducted and average values reported (fig. 1). additionally, these sfc values were converted into percentages where the initial value was considered to be 100 %. these percentage sfcs were compared with the sfis. dynamic analysis dynamic analyses of the samples were studied by dfc according to aocs official method cj 1–94 [4]. samples of nearly 20 mg were loaded onto the middle of the aluminum pans using a small spatula and hermetically sealed by an empty pan that served as a reference. samples were cooled to 0 ◦c at a rate of 1 ◦c min−1 and maintained at this temperature for 10 mins. the heating of blends and pure samples of oil was performed until a temperature of 80 ◦c was achieved at the same rate as for the cooling. the samples were maintained at 80 ◦c for 30 mins. the cooling process started after this period and the rate of cooling was 1 ◦c min−1 until the temperature reached −20 ◦c. before being heated again to ambient temperature, the samples were maintained at this temperature for 10 mins. after that, heating commenced once more at a rate of 5 ◦c min−1 up to 20 ◦c at which point calorimetric measurements ended. three parallel measurements were taken and the average thermogram was reported. the sfi of fat is expressed as a function of temperature. the numbers of solids in the samples of oil in relation to the temperature were estimated on the basis of the calorimetric results. areas of the thermograms were figure 1: solid fat content profiles of two coconut oils and their blends. calculated and correlated with the percentage of solids in the samples. 3. results and discussion 3.1 fatty acid composition samples were characterized by their fatty acid composition (see table 1). the dominant fatty acids in the sample of coconut oil were lauric acid (c12:0) 45.8-53.3 % and myristic acid (c18:0) 18.8-21.3 %. the nhco exhibited a higher percentage of medium-chain fatty acids and a lower percentage of unsaturated fatty acids. the fhco was rich in polyunsaturated fatty acids (pufa) and monounsaturated fatty acids (mufa). 3.2 solid fat content according to nmr the composition of fatty acids and triacylglycerols (tag) would contribute to the percentage of solid fat particles in liquid oil at various temperatures. the sfc profiles of the original fats and their blends at temperatures ranging from 5 ◦c to 30 ◦c are presented in fig. 1. the sfc profile of nhco exhibited low values of 81.06 %, 69.70 %, 54.61 %, 34.54 %, 25.86 % and 0.17 % over the temperature range of 5 ◦c – 30 ◦c because of the concentration of fatty acids. in the case of fhco, the solid fat content was high at 90.49 %, 81.28 %, 69.29 %, 54.15 %, 48.30 % and 4.46 % over the same temperature range. the sfc profiles of blends changed following the addition of fhco to nhco. an increase in the maximum values of sfc was also observed by ribeiro et al. following the addition of fully hydrogenated soybean oil to soybean oil [5]. this can be explained by the changes in the composition of triacylglycerols of the blends. at 5 ◦c, the blends exhibited sfcs ranging from 84.94 % to 90.02 %, which decreased non-linearly until melting completely at 30 ◦c. during the blending, the concentration of tags with high melting points increased and subsequently the sfc values of blends were modified. in all blends, the sfc values at 30 ◦c were almost identical to the sfc of the fhco. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry static and dynamic analyses of the solid fat content of coconut oil 35 figure 2: melting profiles of two coconut oils and their blends. table 2: thermal properties of nhco, fhco and their blends. sample max. peak temperature enthalpy (◦c) (j/g) fhco 24.61 80.24 75:25(w/w)fhco:nhco 24.30 76.21 50:50(w/w)fhco:nhco 23.96 63.44 25:75(w/w)fhco:nhco 23.52 55.84 nhco 23.27 46.38 3.3 melting characteristics the melting profiles of nhco in the presence of fully hydrogenated coconut are depicted in fig. 2. the melting behavior of the original oils and blends was characterized by only one endothermic peak. a similar thermal behavior of coconut oil and hydrogenated coconut oil was observed by one major peak in various studies [6, 7]. components with the lowest melting points tend to melt first and represent the most unsaturated triglycerides, while components with higher melting points that represent the most saturated triglycerides melt later. similarly, results showed that nhco started melting first compared to other samples because of its higher content of unsaturated triglycerides. the addition of fhco to nhco did not alter the melting behavior but as the content of fhco was increased, the peaks according to the melting profiles of blends shifted towards the highmelting temperatures (fig. 2). this melting profiles provided an indication of the amount of crystallized fat and the occurrence of polymorphic transitions. the thermal characteristics of the original oils and their blends are shown in table 2. no significant differences were observed between the values of onset temperature (ton) and peak temperature (tp) in addition to the enthalpies of nhco and fhco. ton ranged from 15.60 ◦c to 20.50 ◦c while tp ranged from 23.27 ◦c to 24.61 figure 3: solid fat index profiles of two coconut oils and their blends. ◦c. melting enthalpies of nhco following the addition of fhco increased from 46.38 j/g to 80.24 j/g (see table 2). 3.4 solid fat index (sfi) the solid-liquid ratio in fats expressed as solid fat content is determined from the melting curves that result from dsc by partial integration. the heat flow into or out of samples of fat was measured as they were heated and cooled isothermally. the estimation of the sfis of samples is dependent upon the onset and final temperatures of melting. the sfi profiles of all samples calculated by melting thermographs are shown in fig. 3. nonhydrogenated coconut oil exhibited a characteristic steep slope and a rapid decrease in the percentage of solids at 20 ◦c. this ratio of solids to liquids decreases differently in these blends of fat as the temperature rises and is at its minimum for all blends at around 30 ◦c (see fig. 3). 4. discussion the results obtained from two methods exhibited a wide range of solid fat content values of the same samples. the values of sfc calculated from pnmr results were lower than values of sfi according to dsc where dsc is a dynamic method and nmr is a static method. the values of the percentages of sfc for each blend at 15 ◦c calculated by dsc were 87.55 %, 88.38 % and 95.95 % (see fig. 3) but 68.05 %, 68.83 % and 72.35 % when calculated by pnmr, respectively (see fig. 4). dsc samples exhibited a sharp decline in their sfi or ratio of solids to liquids when heated from 15◦c to 25◦c, however, the sfc of samples according to nmr exhibited a gradual slope. dsc measurements of physical behavior were observed under controlled heating conditions. the results of dsc describe the whole melting process whilst being heated. the nmr results indicate the statistical values of solid fat content. the difference between the two measurements was possibly due to the time-dependent process concerning the development of crystal structure where sfi describes the status of the fat system and sfc 46(2) pp. 33–36 (2018) 36 dhaygude, soós, zeke, and somogyi figure 4: solid fat content (%) of two coconut oils and their blends. the solid status after stabilization. in addition nmr identified state vise crystals at respective temperatures. the difference in values may be due to the method of tempering, the rate of heating or cooling, and the degree of accuracy. 5. conclusion the results revealed that by combining fhco with nhco the melting behavior of blends of coconut oils was modified, leading to significant increments in the melting point and in the maximum solid fat content. these two methods yielded more descriptive and clear information about melting behaviour by determining amounts of solids in the samples of coconut oil in relation to the temperature. static and dynamic analytical methods showed a difference in the solid-to-liquid ratio of samples which may be due to fundamental differences. the blending of fhcos with vegetable oils can produce valuable blends of fat of good consistency and with reduced or even in the absence of trans-isomers of unsaturated fatty acids suitable for margarine. acknowledgement this research was supported by the doctoral school of food sciences at szent istván university. references [1] dayrit, f. m.: the properties of lauric acid and their significance in coconut oil. j. am. oil chem. soc., 2015 92, 1–15 doi: 10.1007/s11746-014-2562-7 [2] o’brien, r. d.: fat and oils formulating and processing for applications boca raton, fl crc/taylor & francis, 2009, usa isbn: 9781420061666 [3] walker, r. c.; bosin, w. a.: comparison of sfi, dsc and nmr methods for determining solidliquid ratios in fats. j. am. oil chem. soc., 1971 48, 50–53. doi: 10.1007/bf02635684 [4] aocs: official method cd 16b-93 solid fat content (sfc) by low-resolution nuclear magnetic resonance; in: firestone, d. (ed.) official methods and recommended practices of the aocs. the american oil chemists society, 2005 , champaign, usa. isbn: 9780935315974 [5] ribeiro, a.; grimaldi, r.; gioielli, l. a.; gonçalves, l.: zero trans fats from soybean oil and fully hydrogenated soybean oil: physicochemical properties and food applications. food research international, 2009 42, 401–410 doi: 10.1016/j.foodres.2009.01.012 [6] tan, c. p.; che man, y. b.: differential scanning calorimetric analysis of palm oil, palm oil based products and coconut oil: effects of scanning rate variation. food chemistry, 2002 76, 89–102 doi: 10.1016/s0308-8146(01)00241-2 [7] shen, z.; birkett, a.; augustin, m. a.; dungey, s.; versteeg, c.: melting behavior of blends of milk fat with hydrogenated coconut and cottonseed oils. j. am. oil chem. soc., 2001 78, 387–394 doi: 10.1007/s11746-001-0273-4 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1007/s11746-014-2562-7 https://doi.org/10.1007/bf02635684 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodres.2009.01.012 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodres.2009.01.012 https://doi.org/10.1016/s0308-8146(01)00241-2 https://doi.org/10.1016/s0308-8146(01)00241-2 https://doi.org/10.1007/s11746-001-0273-4 https://doi.org/10.1007/s11746-001-0273-4 introduction experimental materials methodologies results and discussion fatty acid composition solid fat content according to nmr melting characteristics solid fat index (sfi) discussion conclusion microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 65-69 (2008) modelling of multi-step microfiltration process for solvent exchange z. kovacs1 , m. discacciati2 1johannes kepler university linz, institute of process engineering, welser st 42 a-4060 leonding, austria e-mail: zoltan.kovacs@jku.at 2ecole polytechinque fédérale de lausanne, iacs chair of modeling and scientific computing (cmcs) ch-1015, lausanne, switzerland industrial-scale microfiltration (mf) separation is applied to process a dispersed ternary system containing an organic solvent, water and fine particles. the objective of the separation is to exchange the organic solvent with water and concentrate the water-particle dispersion. the mf separation is carried out in a multi-step batch operation including preconcentration, dilution mode, and post-concentration process steps. in this study, we present a practical computational algorithm which can be used as a basis for process simulations of both concentration and dilution modes. the numerical method is based on mass balance processing and on empirical relations of the rejection and the permeate flux to the feed composition. these empirical relations are obtained from the experimental data of a single test-run with the process liquid. we discuss the input data of the code and the respective experimental design with the necessary sampling. finally, we provide optimum-search techniques considering economical aspects and technological demands. keywords: microfiltration, modelling, solvent exchange, diafiltration, optimization introduction one of the major solvent consuming processes in the chemical and the pharmaceutical manufacturing is solvent exchange. organic solvents are widely used as reaction media for chemical synthesis, raw materials, and as cleaning agents [1]. membrane technology has a great potential to improve the performance of many liquid phase synthesis reactions by reducing the need for complex solvent handling operations. membrane separation can provide a cheaper solution over the conventional solvent exchange via distillation, when the solvent to be removed has a lower boiling point than the replacing solvent [2]. in batch membrane system design, a common separation strategy for selective removal of components with low retentions is to employ a multi-step membrane process. a multi-step batch process is a chain of operations of a defined number and order that are carried out consecutively using the same membrane module. there are two basic operation modes: the concentration and the dilution mode. in a general case, a multi-step process consists of three steps (e.g. operations): preconcentration, dilution mode and post-concentration steps. this concept is one of the conventional process techniques to achieve high purification of macro-solutes with an economically acceptable flux [3]. batch membrane separation has been presented in a number of different forms in the past, which is, and continues to be an active area of interest both academically and industrially. the classical mathematical modelling [4,5] uses the concentration factor as a basis for the calculations, while numerical techniques [6,7] handle the permeate flux and the component rejections as (time-dependent) state functions of the feed composition. in this study, we present a practical computational algorithm which can be used for the simulation of batch operations. the numerical method is based on mass balance processing and on empirical relations of the rejection and the permeate flux to the feed composition. these empirical relations are obtained from experimental data that were obtained from a test-run with the process liquid. we discuss the input data of the computational algorithm and the respective experimental design with the necessary sampling. finally, we provide optimumsearch techniques considering economical aspects and technological demands. although real-life experimental data are used in this study, the latter strictly focuses on the mathematical programming approach, and it does not aim to give a detailed insight into the properties of the applied colloidal system and the confidential technological specifications of the industrial settings. problem statement industrial-scale mf separation is applied to process a ternary dispersed system containing an organic solvent, water and fine particles. the objective of the separation 66 is to exchange the organic solvent with water, and concentrate the water-particle dispersion. the schematic configuration of the industrial membrane filtration plant is shown in fig. 1. figure 1: schematic representation of the batch configuration two basic modes of batch operation are considered: the concentration and the dilution mode. in the concentration mode, the retentate stream is completely recycled into the feed tank, and the permeate stream is collected separately, that results in a continuous volume decrease in the feed tank. in the dilution mode, a diluant is added into the feed tank at a rate equal to the permeation rate. a level sensor is activated in the feed tank, which keeps the adjusted level of the feed volume constant by continuous addition of the wash water. the total weight of the particle in the feed tank remains constant due to the complete rejection, but the solvent passes through the membrane. since the permeate stream is replaced with wash water, there is a continuous decrease of solvent concentration in the feed tank during the dilution mode. the colloidal dispersion is produced batch-wise via chemical synthesis. this ca. 250 kg dispersion is the initial feed for the mf process, and it contains ca. 10 w/w% fine particles and ca. 30 w/w% solvent. the mf separation is carried out in a multi-step batch operation including pre-concentration, dilution mode, and post-concentration process steps. due to technical requirements, the solvent concentration has to be reduced to 0.05 w/w%, and the dispersion concentrated to 100 kg. as far as the membrane separation performance is concerned, the water and solvent permeation rates through the mf membrane are equal, and the dispersed particles are completely rejected by the membrane. the stability of the colloidal system can also affect the mf process performance. at certain feed composition range, the dispersion becomes unstable. this phenomenon can lead to sludge formation which can completely plug the membrane. thus, extra care is needed in the process design. the objective of this study is to define the mathematical basis of the chemical engineering problem by building a model based on real-life experimental data. the problem is attacked with suitable mathematical programming techniques that gives quantitative prediction for the unit operation steps, and provides the optimum operational settings for the overall multi-step separation process. modelling concept the multi-step process is carried out at constant pressure and temperature, and the same hydrodynamic conditions are maintained during the operation. thus, at any time and at any step of the process, the permeate flux can be described solely as a non-linear function of the actual feed composition. the computational technique summarized in the scheme of fig. 2 was developed in order to predict the changes of the feed tank volume and the feed composition during the membrane filtration process. figure 2: uml activity diagram of the process simulation it is assumed that the initial feed concentration of both particle cfp and solvent c f s are known. for simulation purpose, we prior define a sufficiently small time interval δt. if the relationship between permeate flux and feed composition is known, than the permeate flux can be calculated for the initial feed dispersion at the beginning of the process. therefore, the small volume of the permeate δv, which passes through the membrane in the small time-interval, can be quantified. the relationship between flux and feed composition, e.g. j = j(cfp, c f s), can be obtained from theoretical membrane transport models. however, in this study, we use a practical approach based on experimental data. this approach ensures the derivation of a reliable relation from a limited number of experimental data without prior approximations. the function j = j(cfp, c f s) was empirically determined during a test-run with the process stream. complete particle retention is proved with analytical measurements, and the water and solvent permeation rates through the membrane are found to be equal. thus, the mass of each component in the very small permeated volume δv can be estimated. 67 thereafter, mass and component balances for both permeate and feed tank can be used to determine the new compositions and total masses. then, the above described procedure can be repeated with the new values. obviously, in dilution mode operation, we assume a wash-water volume inlet into the feed tank, which is equal to the δv permeated volume. the exit condition of the cycle is the prior defined volume, which is collected in the permeate tank, or alternatively, the solvent concentration in the feed tank. during the computational cycle, the feed composition is checked to determine whether the dispersion is stable and separation can be continued. this code can be run either in concentration or in dilution mode and multi-step process can be built up from individual blocks by defining the input arguments of a latter step as the output arguments of the previous step. the number and the order of the individual steps can be freely chosen by the user. this practical computational technique is not restricted to mf applications, and one can simulate diverse modes of operations. in a recent study [7], a similar numerical approach is presented for the simulation of the separation of inorganic salts from organic molecules with multi-step batch nanofiltration. process simulation the permeate flux was experimentally determined for different feed compositions during one test-run of the industrial-scale membrane plant on place at the chemical company. the initial ca. 250 kg feed was concentrated to ca. 160 kg, and thereafter, 90 kg water was added into the feed tank. then this procedure was repeated several times. although membrane cleaning was not performed in between the concentration mode operations during the test-run, an increased permeate flux was always observed after each concentration step. this may indicate that fouling has minor importance during the process. during this test-run, the permeate flux was measured periodically, and at the same time, samples were taken from the permeate stream for solvent concentration analysis. the solvent/water ratio in the permeate stream was always equal to the actual solvent/water ratio of the feed tank. the total particle mass in the feed tank was 28 kg, and it remained constant during the operation due to complete rejection. the particle concentration in the feed tank was determined by monitoring the total feed volume at the time of sampling. the experimental data of the permeate flux as function of particle and solvent feed concentrations are shown in fig. 3. both particle and solvent feed concentrations have significant contributions to the observed permeate flux. the unstable composition regime, that is where no permeate flux can be measured, is well visible in fig. 3. based on the experimental data, this regime is empirically defined by the set of feed concentrations which satisfy 0.142 ≤ cfp ≤ 0.17 and 0.018 ≤ c f s ≤ 0.092, where cfp and c f s are the particle and the solvent concentration in the feed tank, respectively. figure 3: experimental data of permeate flux (illustrated with x) in the function of particle and solvent concentration (lines are to guide eyes.) it is important to understand that the pronounced flux decline in the above defined region is provoked by the physical-chemical changes in the colloidal system, and the membrane permeation decline is a response to these radical dispersion-based changes. the experimental values of permeate flux follow a uniform trend which is broken only in the unstable regime. thus, it seems reasonable to determine the overall trend for the permeate flux, and to handle the instable regime separately. the permeate flux can be expressed in terms of cfp and c f s by fitting the non-zero experimental results using an equation like: ( ) ( ) ( )fsfsfs cxfpcxfpcx excexcexj 642 5321 −−− ++= , where xi, i = 1, 2, … 6 are the fitting parameters. the estimated empirical plane and the set of coefficients are shown in fig. 4. figure 4: estimated (solid lines) and experimental data (*) of permeate flux in the function of solvent and particle concentration (curve-fitting is based on non-zero flux data.) 68 the changes in the permeate flux and in the concentrations in feed tank are calculated through the computational procedure using the actual (timedependent) feed concentrations. this dynamic method differs from the conventional calculation procedures that are based on volume concentration factors. the currently applied process has three operational steps. first, the initial feed is pre-concentrated. this step is characterized with the pre-concentration grade mpre, which is defined as the total mass of the dispersion in the feed tank when the second step, the dilution mode, starts. thus, for example a pre-concentration grade mpre=200 kg means that the initial 250 kg dispersion is concentrated to 200 kg before the dilution mode starts. fig. 5 shows the complete simulation of a 3-step process. the feed was first concentrated to 200 kg, then dilution mode operation was carried out by applying 1100 l wash-water, and finally the dispersion was concentrated to 100 kg. the permeate flux and the solvent concentration in the feed tank can be predicted over the operation time as shown in fig. 5. figure 5: simulation example for a three-step process including pre-concentration, dilution mode, and post-concentration steps during the pre-concentration step, the increasing feed concentration causes a decreasing flux. it is a conventional wisdom that the amount of wash-water is minimized if it is added where the feed concentration is high [8]. however, as shown in fig. 4, high feed concentrations lead to lower solvent fluxes through the membrane. thus, an optimum pre-concentration grade exists for performing the dilution mode. process optimization the aim of the optimization is to find the set of operation parameters that result in the most economical process, and satisfy the given technological demands of the final product. thus, the total processing cost is the objective function that has to be minimized; the operational parameters of pre-concentration grade mpre and xdiluant volume vd are the decision variables, and the given technological requirements are the constraints of the optimization. we define a product quality and a product mass constraint, e.g. the final solvent concentration has to be reduced under a limit value of climit=0.05 w/w% and the final product mass m final of 100 kg has to be obtained. the objective function can be defined as the total cost per unit of product produced. the total cost is a sum of two terms, which are the operational cost of the pump and the cost of the utilized dilution water. the mathematical problem can be described as follows: minimize f(mpre,vd) = k1t + k2vd subject to the constraints mfinal =100 kg and cs final ≤ climit where f(mpre,vd) is the objective function, t is the total operation time, vd is the dilution water consumption, while k1 and k2 are constants. the constant k1 is a product of the power consumption of the pump and the electricity price, and k2 is the unit price of the utilized dilution water. computer simulation of 3-step processes was performed for sets of mpre and vd input parameters. thus, in the first process step, the dispersion was concentrated to a pre-concentration grade mpre, then the diluant volume of vd was applied to wash out the solvent, and finally the dispersion was concentrated to 100 kg in the last step. during these 3-step processes, membrane plugging caused by sludge formation can occur when the composition in the feed tank becomes instable. fig. 6 shows the instable area for the applied operational parameters. figure 6: instable dispersion area illustrated for the applied operational parameters a flux decline can also occur due to high feed concentration as shown in fig. 4. with other words, the dispersion can not be concentrated to a too high extend, because in that case no permeate flux can be gained. obviously, the location of the optimum is affected, not only by the pre-concentrated grade, but also by the extent to which the solvent concentration is reduced in the dilution mode step. the applied diluant volume vd has to be sufficiently big in order to exchange the 69 solvent in the feed tank. if vd is too low, the final solvent concentration can not be reduced to the desired limit value. these issues all contribute to a reduced feasible region in the (mpre,vd) matrix. fig. 6 shows the calculated objective function values in the feasible range. figure 7: objective function in the feasible range as function of pre-concentration grade and diluant volume as shown in fig. 6, for each pre-concentration grade mpre can be found a diluant volume vd, where the quality demand for the final solvent content is satisfied. the optimum operational parameters (mpre,vd) are given by the minimum value of the half-plane of the calculated objective function in the feasible range, and it can be directly read from the graph. it should be noted that the outcome of the optimization is not generally valid. a change in the constants k1 and k2 of the objective function, or the utilization of an other type of membrane would result in a different set of optimum operational parameters. summary a numerical technique is presented to simulate and optimize multi-step batch membrane processes for solvent exchange. this technique can be also used to simulate membrane filtration processes where not only the flux, but also the rejections of the components are dependent on the feed composition. the approach followed in this work did not use the volume concentration factor as a basis for the calculations, but rather the flux as a state function of the feed concentrations. references 1. hellweg s., fischer u., scheringer m., hungerbuhler k.: green chem. 6 (2004) 418 2. lin j. c., livingston a. g.: chem. eng. sci. 62 (2007) 2728-2736 3. blatt w., robinson s.: anal. biochem. 26 (1968) 151-173 4. baker: membrane technology and applications, wiley, west sussex, (2004) 5. mulder m.: basic principles of membrane technology, kluwer academic publishers, dordrecht, (2000) 6. discroll k.: development of a process simulator for the ultrafiltration/diafiltration process. ph.d. thesis, university of arkansas, fayetteville, us (2004) 7. kovacs z., discacciati m., samhaber w.: j. memb. sci. 324 (2008) 50-58 8. morison k. r., she x.: j. memb. sci. 211 (2003) 59-70 microsoft word 1423 mario 102.docx hungarian journal of industry and chemistry veszprém vol. 42(2) pp. 65–70 (2014) telemedical heart rate measurements for lifestyle counselling mario salai,* gergely tuboly, istván vassányi, and istván kósa faculty of information technology, university of pannonia, egyetem u. 10.,veszprém, 8200, hungary *email: mario.salai@gmail.com in this paper we analyse a low-cost commercial chest belt to be integrated into a lifestyle counselling system as a source of heart rate data. we compared data from a schiller ecg holter device, which serves as a reference to a cardiosport device. due to missing data in the cardiosport device caused by loss of contact with the body, the creation of special algorithms was necessary for synchronization and data validation. the results show that when using our synchronization algorithms the average absolute percentage error between the two signals was 2% with correlation of more than 99%. using a data validation algorithm, we were able to get on average more than 70% of the signal with an absolute percentage error of 3% and a high average correlation of 99%. the mean rr interval values and standard deviation of rr intervals are very close to those of the reference device using both the synchronization and data validation algorithms. when using the data validation algorithm, the reference measurements produced only slightly better results with regard to false detections of atrial defibrillation than the cardiosport device. in conclusion, we found that with a simple preprocessing algorithm, cardiosport as a low-cost device can be safely integrated into a lifestyle support system as a telemedical solution. keywords: telemedicine, lifestyle counselling, heart rate monitor introduction low-cost telemedical sensors are often used in modern ambient assisted living (aal) telemonitoring and selfmanagement systems for providing inputs to medical intelligence algorithms [1]. such systems extend the scope of traditional health care that is based purely on data measurement. however, the proper interpretation and reliability of the results depends on the reliability of the measured data and the sensor itself. nevertheless, there are still surprisingly few reviews reported in the literature to date on the validation of the information content of such low-cost sensors compared to the clinically accepted reference device. an example of a device that was tested for validity is the sensewear hr armband [2]. in this study, they used the reference device simultaneously with the tested device as a way of validating data. however, most of the compared devices are expensive high-end devices, which present an obstacle for their wide use in telemedicine. in this proof-of-concept paper, we analyse a simple commercial chest belt chosen to be integrated into the lavinia lifestyle mirror system [3] as a source of heart rate (hr) data. in the lavinia system, the hr signal of the patient will be used to (i) estimate the calories burnt by physical activity, (ii) calculate the heart rate variability (hrv) in order to detect periods of mental or emotional stress, and (iii) analyse arrhythmia patterns (poincare plots) for atrial fibrillation detection. our approach involves the comparison of the hrv and poincare plots computed from the filtered chest belt signal, with those parameters computed from a reference holter device. methods measurements two devices were used simultaneously by a healthy volunteer over a 24 hour period. a schiller mt101/mt-200 holter device was our reference device designed for clinical use. the chest belt was a cardiosport tp3 heart rate transmitter device. since this device does not have its own memory for storing data, we used a nexus 7 tablet with android version 4.4.2 to connect the device via the bluetooth 4.0 protocol and store the measured data on the tablet. although both devices were worn by volunteers for 24 hours, only 12 hours of the overall signal were used for analysis due to frequent detachments of the device from the body during nighttime. the measurements of 12 hours were repeated on 4 additional healthy male subjects. signal analysis the direct comparison of measured data was not possible due to the different designs of the reference and the telemedical devices. however, we wanted to 66 compare signals directly in terms of time and also to develop a data validation algorithm for removing the noisy parts of the cardiosport device measurements reliably without using the reference data. the problem was that the chest belt was not firmly attached to the body and sudden movements of the device caused signal loss. therefore, we needed to create a software module for synchronization and data validation before any analysis. data validation means removing obviously bad data (artefacts) and keeping only ‘good’ data segments of sufficient length, because, as a rule of thumb, both hrv and poincare plot computations require data chunks of at least 5 minutes. even though the data validation algorithm removed a considerable amount of data from the original signal, we still had enough useful data for analysis from the daytime. the synchronization algorithm our simple algorithm for signal synchronization uses a sliding window that passes from the beginning of the chest belt signal to the end and calculates the absolute error between the two signals. when sliding finishes, the location of the sliding window with the minimum absolute error is considered as the point where the two signals should be synchronized. this applies only if the correlation of the data in the sliding window and the same amount of data from the reference device are higher than a minimum set by the user. if these conditions are met, the algorithm copies data from the sliding window into a newly generated third signal, which represents the chest belt signal fully synchronized with the reference signal. if conditions are not met, the third signal is filled with zeros. finally, the algorithm extracts all the highly correlated segments from the third signal ignoring zero values. also, a file with all the merged segments is generated for general analysis. the algorithm uses the following 5 main parameters that can be set up by the user: 1. window size: amount of data copied from the signal into the sliding window (default: 200), 2. window shift step: the number of samples by which we shift the sliding window in each iteration (default: 50), 3. absolute error window: amount of data used for calculating the minimum absolute error (default: 200), 4. maximum error distance: the number of samples by which we shift the absolute error window in order to find the minimum absolute error (default: 1000), 5. minimum correlation: minimum correlation, expressed as a percentage, required for the two signals to consider data in the chest belt signal as accurate (default: 97%). each parameter’s default value was determined empirically. after running the synchronization process, we obtained segments of highly correlated data. fig.1 shows the distribution of the lengths of signal segments. we can see that most segments are 3 to 18 minutes long. the longest highly correlated segment with the reference data is 110 minutes long. the default parameter settings minimize the number of overly short (< 5 min) segments. most of the bad segments (fig.2) are shorter than one minute, and only one bad segment was 60 minutes long. data validation algorithm another type of algorithm was used in the real telemedical scenario for finding good parts of the signal without relying on reference data. this implies finding gaps and abnormal values and omitting them. first, we compared the timestamp of each data point with the timestamp of the previous one. if the difference between the timestamps was longer than 3 seconds, we marked this as a ‘gap’. the 3-second gap detection was enabled by the chest belt’s buffering system that can tolerate short detachments of the device from the body. in the second step we identified abnormal values in the signal that were treated as gaps. the abnormal values are identified by observing the mean value of 20 neighbouring data points (10 before and 10 after a given point). if the mean value differs from the value of the figure 1: the distribution of strongly correlated segment lengths for all subjects figure 2: the distribution of weakly correlated segment lengths for all subjects 67 current sample by more than 300 units, we consider it invalid and mark it as a gap/error in the signal. finally, we extract the good segments from the signal with a length of more than 5 minutes. we implemented the above algorithm in a simple software tool (fig.3). on the left-hand side we can load the two signals and set the parameter values as well as the amount of data to be analysed. the graph shows two signals after the synchronization process was completed. the user can examine signals by clicking the previous and next buttons. general statistics are shown in the middle part of the screen, while in the lower part, we can see the histogram, and save the histogram and results as a file. two tabs in the top left-hand corner allow the user to switch between synchronization and data validation algorithms. statistical analysis time and frequency domain analyses, correlation comparisons, mean absolute percentage errors, and the slopes of scatter plot diagrams were compared between two measurements for hrv analysis. the specificities of a self-developed atrial fibrillation detector algorithm were compared for atrial fibrillation analysis. the latter algorithm is based on the k-means clustering of poincaré plots (consisting of rr intervals) the time and frequency domain analyses for hrv were performed using kubios hrv analysis software, while the rest of the analysis for hrv and atrial fibrillation was performed in microsoft excel. atrial fibrillation detection was done using the matlab environment and the results were saved as microsoft excel workbooks. results and analysis heart rate variability after the synchronization process, we got strongly correlated (greater than 97%) synchronized data segments of various durations. table 1 summarizes the duration of signals analysed. table 2 shows results in the time domain for schiller and cardiosport devices after using the algorithm for the synchronization of signals. time domain analysis shows similar values for mean rr values and standard deviation (std rr in eq.(1)). the average mean rr values for the schiller and cardiosport devices are 851 and 871 respectively. the average std rr for the schiller device is 108 and 110 for the cardiosport device. figure 3: synchronization and data validation software table 1: signal duration after the synchronization process subject duration (h:m:s) #1 10:53:28 #2 8:45:40 #3 10:30:17 #4 7:46:56 68 𝑆𝑇𝐷 𝑅𝑅 = ! !!! (𝑅𝑅! − 𝑅𝑅)! ! !!! (1) the frequency domain analysis for the synchronization process is presented in table 3. the absolute power was compared for very low frequencies (vlf: 0-0.04 hz), low frequencies (lf: 0.04-0.15 hz), high frequencies (hf: 0.15-0.4 hz) and ratios between low frequencies and high frequencies (lf/hf). results show no significant difference between schiller and cardiosport device values. the average mean absolute percentage error (mape) between two signals is 2% with a high average correlation of close to 100%. using the data validation algorithm, we extracted data points from the collected signals. the duration of the resulting signal is shown in table 4. it is important to note that due to the noise on schiller device recordings, we had to remove noisy parts from the original signal. therefore, even though the signal was recorded continuously for 12 hours, overall duration is much less. calculations show that in the worst scenario only 45% of the signal can be used for analysis using this data validation method, while in the best scenario this number reaches 95%. this leads to a conclusion that results are rather subject dependent. the results of data analysis in the time domain after the removal of bad parts using the validation algorithm can be seen in table 5. the mean rr intervals for schiller and cardiosport devices are 851 and 871 and standard deviations are 104 and 106, respectively. the cardiosport device has slightly greater values, but these are practically identical. the frequency domain analysis for the data validation process is presented in table 6. the absolute power was compared for very low frequencies (vlf: 00.04 hz), low frequencies (lf: 0.04-0.15 hz), high frequencies (hf: 0.15-0.4 hz), and ratios between low frequencies and high frequencies (lf/hf). as in the synchronization process, the results show no significant difference between the schiller and cardiosport device values. the minimum, maximum and average percentage errors on whole signals were calculated using 5 minute long sliding windows with one minute long shift steps (table 7). only one subject had a high maximum error value of 34%. by visual examination, it was determined that the cause of such a high error was the artefact of the schiller device. in spite of that, the average error remained low (2%). table 2: time domain analysis after synchronization mean rr (ms) a std rr (ms) b subject schiller cardiosport schiller cardiosport #1 738 755 123 125 #2 704 720 91 93 #3 908 929 90 93 #4 855 875 145 148 #5 937 959 107 109 average 851 871 108 111 a with 2% error, b with 1-3% error table 3: frequency domain analysis after synchronization schiller cardiosport error subject absolute power (ms2) absolute power (ms2) % % % % vlf lf hf lf/hf vlf lf hf lf/hf vlf lf hf lf/hf #1 7937.6 3086 1578 1.956 8444 3224 1330 2.4235 6 4 19 19 #2 5431.5 626.6 245 2.557 5723 659.3 250.9 2.6281 5 5 2 3 #3 4251.2 1927 494.4 3.898 4543 2055 538.8 3.8146 6 6 8 2 #4 12682 1790 636.5 2.813 13514 1869 621.5 3.0077 6 4 2 6 #5 6139.8 1212 476.7 2.542 6465 1274 481.4 2.6459 5 5 1 4 table 4: signal duration after data validation subject duration (h:m:s) #1 1:28:10 #2 11:20:03 #3 6:15:38 #4 9:27:07 #5 4:29:44 table 5: time-domain analysis after data validation mean rr (ms) a std rr (ms) b subject schiller cardiosport schiller cardiosport #1 701 724 136 139 #2 700 717 91 93 #3 899 921 100 100 #4 846 866 139 142 #5 958 981 88 90 average 851 871 105 106 a with 2% error, b with 0-2% error table 6: frequency domain analysis after data validation schiller cardiosport error subject absolute power (ms2) absolute power (ms2) % % % % vlf lf hf lf/hf vlf lf hf lf/hf vlf lf hf lf/hf #1 10414 2297 1171 1.96 10847 2442 1004 2.43 4 6 17 19 #2 5446 631 245 2.57 5718 654 245 2.67 5 3 1 4 #3 5163 1990 523 3.80 5424 2054 540 3.80 5 3 3 0 #4 11683 1769 616 2.87 12149 1831 594 3.08 4 3 4 7 #5 4356 1235 317 3.89 4522 1303 330 3.95 4 5 4 1 69 fig.4 represents a typical relationship between cardiosport and schiller devices. all gradient values are close to 1. the lowest slope value is 0.98 while the highest value is 1.02. the average mean absolute percentage error (mape) between two signals was 3% with a strong average correlation of 99%. atrial fibrillation we carried out the detection of atrial fibrillation (afib) by analysing poincaré plots consisting of 30 rr intervals. we considered 30 rr intervals per iteration and in each iteration after constructing the poincaré plot we calculated the dispersion around the diagonal line and used k-means based cluster analysis to determine the number of the clusters. if the dispersion was too high (greater than 0.06) and the number of clusters was 1, or the number of clusters was more than 9; we assigned “afib” to that series of rr intervals, otherwise to “non-afib”. the details of the algorithm can be seen in our previous study [16]. since our data set did not contain real afib cases, only specificity could be calculated with regard to the efficiency of detection. the evaluation of atrial fibrillation detection results for synchronized data validation can be seen in tables 8 and 9. conclusion even though the cardiosport device may suffer from signal loss due to its design, we managed to determine that it can be safely used for telemedical purposes of measuring hrv and atrial fibrillation. we found only a few usable data segments that were less than 5 minutes long. with our algorithm that detects gaps and errors in table 7: the minimum, maximum and average percentage errors subject minimum error maximum error average error #1 0.1% 3.5% 1.5% #2 0.0% 7.7% 2.1% #3 0.0% 33.9% 3.2% #4 0.1% 6.7% 1.9% #5 0.1% 5.1% 2.2% average 0.1% 13.4% 2.4% figure 4: comparison of the cardiosport and schiller devices after data validation table 8: results from the synchronized data related to atrial fibrillation detection subject number of iterations schiller mt-101/mt-200 system cardiosport tp3 heart rate transmitter afib cases non-afib cases afib cases non-afib cases #1 331 26 8% 305 92% 31 9% 300 91% #2 1796 9 1% 1787 99% 3 >1% 1793 ~100% #3 1120 7 1% 1113 99% 5 1% 1115 99% #4 1427 11 1% 1416 99% 16 1% 1411 99% #5 964 46 5% 918 95% 45 5 919 95% min 1% 92% >1% 91% max 8% 99% 9% ~100% mean 3% 97% 3% 97% std 3% 3% 4% 4% table 9: results from the data validation process related to atrial fibrillation detection patient number of iterations schiller mt-101/mt-200 system cardiosport tp3 heart rate transmitter afib cases non-afib cases afib cases non-afib cases #1 241 3 1% 238 99% 8 3% 233 97% #2 1879 29 2% 1850 98% 2 >1% 1877 ~100% #3 808 15 2% 793 98% 3 >1% 805 ~100% #4 1296 10 1% 1286 99% 20 2% 1276 98% #5 544 6 1% 538 99% 7 1% 537 99% min 1% 99% >1% 97% max 2% 99% 3% ~100% mean 1% 99% 1% 99% std >1% >1% 1% 11% 70 the signal and removes them with an average effectiveness of more than 70%, which translates into having enough data to calculate hrv and atrial fibrillation from daytime measurements. regarding atrial fibrillation detection, we can conclude that by using the developed data validation algorithm the reference schiller mt-101/mt-200 measurements produced only slightly better results with regard to false detections than the cardiosport tp3 heart rate transmitter. in two cases the cardiosport measurements proved to be even better than schiller records, which implies that some relatively simple heart rate recorders are equivalent to some holter devices after signal processing using the data validation algorithm. we have to emphasize; however, that we have not performed any measurements on actual atrial fibrillating patients yet. therefore, the investigation of the sensitivity of our atrial fibrillation detection algorithm under the presented circumstances could be the subject of further studies. in summary, the cardiosport as a low-cost device can easily be integrated into a lifestyle support system as a telemedical solution. acknowledgments this research was supported by the european union and co-funded by the european social fund “telemedicinefocused research activities in the field of mathematics, informatics and medical sciences” támop-4.2.2.a11/1/konv-2012-0073. references [1] patel s., park h., bonato p., chan l., rodgers m.: a review of wearable sensors and systems with application in rehabilitation, j. neuroengng. rehab., 2012, 9(21), 1–17 [2] kristiansen j., korshøj m., skotte j.h., jespersen t., søgaard k., mortensen o.s., holtermann a.: comparison of two systems for long-term heart rate variability monitoring in freeliving conditions a pilot study, biomed eng. online, 2011, 10(27), 1–14 [3] kósa i., vassányi i., nemes m., kálmánné k.h., pintér b., kohut l.: a fast, android based dietary logging application to support the lifestyle change of cardio-metabolic patients, global telemedicine and ehealth updates: knowledge resources, eds.: m. jordanova, f. lievens, 2014, 7, 553–556 [4] salai m., tuboly g., vassanyi i., kosa i.: reliability of telemedical heart rate meters, ime j., 2014, 8(5), 49–55 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 46(2) pp. 67–71 (2018) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2018-0021 formation of glycidyl esters during the deodorization of vegetable oils erzsébet bognár *1 , gabriella hellner2 , andrea radnóti2 , lászló somogyi1 , and zsolt kemény2 1department of grain and industrial plant processing, szent istván university, villányi út 29-43, budapest, 1118, hungary 2bemea katalin kővári r&d centre, illatos út 38, budapest, 1097, hungary glycidyl esters are foodborne contaminants formed during the production of fats and oils, especially during the deodorization of palm oil. the hydrolyzed free form of glycidol has been categorized as probably carcinogenic to humans by the world health organization’s international agency for research on cancer. the aim of this research was to study the formation of glycidyl esters during the lab-scale deodorization of the three most widely produced seed oils in the world (sunflower, rapeseed and soybean). the effects of two independent factors – temperature and residence time – were analyzed by a 32 full factorial experimental design and evaluated by response surface methodology. in accordance with findings in the literature, the greatest amount of glycidyl esters was formed in the soybean oil matrix. for all three oils, the effects of both residence time and temperature were significant, while the latter was more so. to reduce the formation of glycidyl esters, milder deodorization is required, which is limited because of the purposes sought by the thermal operation and removal of volatile minor components and contaminants. keywords: glycidyl esters, deodorization, seed oils 1. introduction glycidyl esters (ges) are foodborne contaminants formed in fat-containing food and food ingredients during high-temperature thermal treatment. according to previous studies, glycidol is produced during digestion from the enzymatic hydrolysis of ges [1, 2]. the iarc (international agency for research on cancer) has listed glycidol as a group 2a or genotoxic carcinogen [3]. this year, the european commission adopted the commission regulation (eu) 2018/290 that stipulates the maximum level of glycidyl fatty acid esters permitted in vegetable oils and fats, infant formula, follow-on formula and foods for special medical purposes intended for infants and young children. the maximum concentration of glycidyl fatty acid esters is 1 mg/kg in vegetable oils and fats placed on the market for end consumers or for use as an ingredient in food, and 0.5 mg/kg for vegetable oils and fats destined for the production of baby food and processed cereal-based food for infants and young children [4]. ges are formed in vegetable oils during the refining process in the deodorization step, which is conducted at high temperatures (200-275 ◦c) under vacuum (of less than 10 mbar residual pressure) [5, 6]. deodorization is the last step of refining of conventional edible oils and is intended to remove undesirable substances in order to im*correspondence: zsofi.bognar@outlook.hu prove the taste, odor, color and oxidative stability of such oils [7]. according to data from the literature, high levels of ges are primarily measured in refined palm oil and its fractions. destaillats et al. [8] showed in their study that ges are formed from diand monoacylglycerols (dags and mags), but not from triacylglycerols (tags). accordingly, high levels of ge can be traced back to high levels of dags in crude palm oil [8]. the formation of ge starts at about 200 ◦c [8]. analytical methods for the determination of ges can be divided into two main groups: direct and indirect methods [9]. individual ges are determined by direct quantitation methods which are mainly based on liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry (lc-ms), requiring a significant number of reference compounds and internal standards [10, 11]. indirect determination is based on the conversion of ges into glycidol which is then isolated, derivatized, chromatographically separated and quantified. the result is expressed as the amount of glycidol that can be released from ges. these methods require only a small number of internal standards [9]. in our study, the quantity of ges in seed oil during lab-scale deodorization was determined in order to examine the effects of two independent factors – temperature and residence time – on the formation of ges. mailto: zsofi.bognar@outlook.hu 68 bognár, hellner, radnóti, somogyi, and kemény 2. experimental 2.1 samples and measurements bleached sunflower, rapeseed and soybean oils were supplied by bunge limited (bunge zrt. hungary and bunge ibérica, s.a.u.). diethyl ether, ethyl acetate, n-hexane and high-performance liquid chromatography (hplc)grade water were obtained from vwr international kft. (debrecen, hungary). toluene, isohexane, sodium bromide and phenylboronic acid were obtained from merck kft. (budapest, hungary). methanol, sodium hydroxide and anhydrous sodium sulfate were purchased from reanal laborvegyszer kft. (budapest, hungary). the internal standards glycidyl palmitate-d5 and 3-chloro-1,2propanediol-d5 (3-mcpd-d5) were obtained from labstandards (budapest, hungary). all reagents and chemicals were of analytical grade. lab-scale deodorization trials were conducted in 150 g batches at temperatures between 220 and 260 ◦c. the bleached oils (sunflower, rapeseed or soybean) were heated to the target temperature (220, 230, 240, 250 or 260 ◦c) within 10–15 minutes. the process lasted 3 hours at a pressure of 3–4 mbar using nitrogen as a stripping gas. without breaking the vacuum, sampling was conducted after 0, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120 and 150 minutes had elapsed. the quantities of glycidyl esters were determined using the american oil chemists’ society (aocs) official method cd 29b-13, which is based on alkalinecatalyzed ester cleavage and transformation of the released glycidol into monobromopropanediol (mbpd) and derived free diols using phenylboronic acid (pba). these derivatives are measured by the gas chromatography/mass spectrometry (gc/ms) coupled system (agilent 6890 coupled with 5973) in the selected ion monitoring (sim) mode. quantitative determination was based on the deuterated internal standard using characteristic ions for derivatised glycidol-d5 at m/z 150 and 245, and derivatised glycidol at m/z 147 and 240. 2.2 experimental design and statistical analysis the temperature and residence time were studied using response surface methodology (rsm). the results of the 32 full factorial experimental design (see table 1) were evaluated by analysis of variance (anova) models using statistica 13. the center point of the 32 full factorial design (mid temperature 240 ◦c) and mid time 90 minutes) was repeated three times. only the significant effects (of main effects and interactions) were taken into account in the response surface methodology. the generalized polynomial model for describing the response of independent variables is given in y = β0 + β1x1 + β2x 2 1 + β3x2 + + β4x 2 2 + β5x1x2 + β6x1x 2 2 + + β7x 2 1x2 + β8x 2 1x 2 2 (1) table 1: 32 full factorial experimental design independent variables levels -1 0 +1 x1 temperature (◦c) 220 240 260 x2 residence time (min) 0 90 180 dependent variables (yi) glycidyl esters (mg/kg) 3. results and evaluation 3.1 experiments the results of the lab-scale investigation of ge formation are shown in fig. 1. in our experimental design, the greatest amount of ges formed in soybean oil, in which the concentration of ges reached 5.5 mg/kg at 260 ◦c after 180 minutes (fig. 1a). in the sunflower and rapeseed oils, the maximum concentrations of ges reached were 1.6 and 1.5 mg/kg, respectively (figs. 1b and 1c). the ge content of sunflower and rapeseed oils was kept under 1 mg/kg after 120 minutes of deodorization at a temperature of 250 ◦c or less, but for soybean oil this level was obtained at or below 230 ◦c. this demonstrates that the amounts of precursors in the oils strongly influence the formation of ge, and consequently the optimal deodorization temperature. the threshold concentration of figure 1: ges of seed oils during deodorization: a) sunflower oil, b) rapeseed oil, c) soybean oil hungarian journal of industry and chemistry formation of glycidyl esters during the deodorization of vegetable oils 69 figure 2: fitted surfaces for seed oils: a) sunflower oil, b) rapeseed oil, c) soybean oil 0.5 mg/kg permitted for infant food was complied with at 240, 230 and 220 ◦c for rapeseed, sunflower and soybean oils, respectively (after 120 minutes of deodorization). in the applied experimental setup, up to 0.3 mg/kg of ge formed after 10–15 minutes of heating. at lower deodorization temperatures, the effect of time becomes practically insignificant, especially at 220 and 230 ◦c. 3.2 statistical analysis the application of rsm allowed the main effects and interactions to be determined simultaneously. anova shows the significant effects, which can be used for buildtable 2: regression coefficients for intercept (i), linear and quadratic factors, as well as interactions between factors in the fitted models of seed oils sunflower oil rapeseed oil soybean oil i 7.95 7.12 10.32 t −6.72 × 10−2 −5.9×10−2 −9.02×10−2 t 2 1.45×10−4 1.23 × 10−4 2 × 10−4 t 1.17×10−1 2.16×10−1 1.14 t2 n.s. n.s. n.s. tt −1.13 × 10−3 −1.96×10−3 −1.01 × 10−2 t 2t 3 × 10−5 4 × 10−5 2.2 × 10−5 tt2 n.s. n.s. −2.38 × 10−8 n.s.: effect not significant ing the response surface model. the fitted surfaces for sunflower, rapeseed and soybean oils are presented in figs. 2a-c, respectively. the shapes of the surfaces are very similar, the only difference is in their heights. the interactions between the independent variables can be observed from the fitted surfaces, because at lower temperatures the concentrations of ges gradually increased over time, while at higher temperatures a more rapid increase occurred. for all three seed oils the temperature had the largest effect. the interaction between the independent variables and the effect of time were the second and third most significant, but the quadratic components and their interactions with the other factors were noticeable in most cases, as well. the regression coefficients are shown in table 2 coefficients in the case of sunflower and rapeseed oils are very similar so the rsm diagrams of these oils fall within the same range of values (figs. 2a and 2b). 4. discussion according to the data from the literature, the oil that has been studied the most in this respect is palm oil along with its fractions [8, 12]. cheng et al. [13] summarized the data from previous studies and according to this review the highest concentrations of ges in seed oil were found in soybean oil when compared to rapeseed and sunflower oils. this is in agreement with our observations. the higher concentrations of ges that formed during deodorization were due to the higher levels of dags and mags in the raw material. it was found that the critical temperature range is between 220 and 240 ◦c, above which more than 0.5 mg/kg of ges may form, depending on the quality of the raw material. this conclusion is similar to the results of previous investigations. craft et al. [12] concluded that between 230 and 240 ◦c, the formation of ge is extensive, consequently this value should be considered as an upper limit for the deodorization process. de kock et al. [14] suggested conducting deodorization for a longer period 46(2) pp. 67–71 (2018) 70 bognár, hellner, radnóti, somogyi, and kemény of time at temperatures below 240 ◦c, which might also minimize the formation of trans fatty acids. 5. conclusion the present investigation suggests that the formation of ges in seed oils during deodorization is not negligible. the rate of formation can be traced back to the level of dags and mags [15] in the raw material. a simultaneous increase in temperature and time could result in extremely high levels of ges in oils. on an industrial scale, the formation of ges can be controlled in the oils examined, meaning that the upper limit of ges (1 mg/kg) in vegetable oils and fats placed on the market for general consumption can be achieved through preventive measures. the stricter limit imposed on oils destined for the production of food for infants and young children presents greater challenges, and thus requires a combination of high quality raw materials as well as a controlled refining process. acknowledgement funding for this research was provided by the doctoral school of food sciences at szent istván university (budapest) and by the bemea katalin kővári r&d centre. the project is supported by the european union and cofinanced by the european social fund (grant agreement no. efop-3.6.3-vekop-16-2017-00005). symbols β0−8 regression coefficients for intercept, linear and quadratic factors and interactions between factors x1, x2 independent factors t deodorization temperature t deodorization time references [1] appel, k.e.; abraham, k.; berge-preiss, e.; hansen, t.; apel, e.; schuchardt, s.; vogt, c.; bakhiya, n.; creutzenberg, o.; lampen, a.: relative oral bioavailability of glycidol from glycidyl fatty acid esters in rats, arch. toxicol., 2013 87(9), 1649–1659 doi: 10.1007/s00204-013-1061-1 [2] frank, n.; dubois, m.; scholz, g.; seefelder, w.; chuat, j.-y.; schilter, b.: application of gastrointestinal modelling to the study of the digestion and transformation of dietary glycidyl esters, food addit. contam. part a, 2013 30(1), 69–79 doi: 10.1016/j.foodchem.2010.08.036 [3] iarc (international agency for research on cancer): glycidol, in: iarc monographs volume 77. on the evaluation of carcinogenic risks to humans (who press, lyon, france) 2000 pp. 469–486 isbn: 9283212770 [4] official journal of the european union: commission regulation (eu) 2018/290 of 26 february 2018 amending regulation (ec) no 1881/2006 as regards maximum levels of glycidyl fatty acid esters in vegetable oils and fats, infant formula, follow-on formula and foods for special medical purposes intended for infants and young children 2018 [5] carlson, f.k.: deodorization. in: hui, y. h. (ed.) bailey’s industrial oil and fat products. edible oil and fat products: processing technology. 5th edition. volume 4. (john wiley & sons inc., new york, usa) 1996 pp. 411–449 isbn: 9780471594284 [6] o’brien, r.d.: fats and oils formulating and processing for applications. third edition. (crc press taylor & francis group, boca raton, florida, usa) 2009 pp. 153–164 isbn: 9781420061666 [7] sipos, e.f.; szuhaj, b.f.: edible oil processing. in: hui, y.h. (ed.) bailey’s industrial oil and fat products. edible oil and fat products: oils and oilseeds. 5th edition. volume 2. (john wiley & sons inc., new york, usa) 1996 pp. 497–602 isbn: 9780471594260 [8] destaillats, f.; craft, b.d.; dubois, m.; nagy, k.: glycidyl esters in refined palm (elaeis guineensis) oil and related fractions. part i: formation mechanism, food chem., 2012 131(4), 1391–1398 doi: 10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.10.006 [9] ermacora, a.; hrncirik, k.: indirect detection techniques for mcpd esters and glycidyl esters. in: macmahon, s. (ed.) processing contaminants in edible oils mcpd and glycidyl esters (aocs press, urbana, usa) 2014 pp. 57–90 isbn: 9780988856509 [10] thürer, a.; granvogl, m.: direct detection techniques for glycidyl esters. in: macmahon, s. (ed.) processing contaminants in edible oils mcpd and glycidyl esters (aocs press, urbana, usa) 2014 pp. 91–120 isbn: 9780988856509 [11] blumhorst, m.r.; venkitasubramanian, p.; collison, m.w.: direct determination of glycidyl esters of fatty acids in vegetable oils by lc–ms, j. am. oil chem. soc., 2011 88(9), 1275–1283 doi: 10.1007/s11746-011-1873-1 [12] craft, b.d.; nagy, k.; seefelder, w.; dubois, m.; destaillats, f.: glycidyl esters in refined palm (elaeis guineensis) oil and related fractions. part ii: practical recommendations for effective mitigation, food chem., 2012 132(1), 73–79 doi: 10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.10.034 [13] cheng, w.w.; liu, g.q.; wang, l.q.; liu, z.s.: glycidyl fatty acid esters in refined edible oils: a review on formation, occurrence, analysis, and elimination methods, compr. rev. food sci. f., 2017 16(2), 263–281 doi: 10.1111/1541-4337.12251 [14] de kock, j.; papastergiadis, a.; de greyt, w.: technological solutions and developments in edible oil processing to minimize contaminants in various oils and fats. 5th leipzig symposium ‘processing and hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1007/s00204-013-1061-1 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2010.08.036 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2010.08.036 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.10.006 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.10.006 https://doi.org/10.1007/s11746-011-1873-1 https://doi.org/10.1007/s11746-011-1873-1 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.10.034 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodchem.2011.10.034 https://doi.org/10.1111/1541-4337.12251 formation of glycidyl esters during the deodorization of vegetable oils 71 analytics: how does co-operation work in practice?’ (9-10 march 2016, leipzig, germany) 2016 [15] csányi, e., bélafi-bakó, k.: semi-continuous fatty acid production by lipase, hung. j. ind. chem., 1999 27(4), 293–295 46(2) pp. 67–71 (2018) introduction experimental samples and measurements experimental design and statistical analysis results and evaluation experiments statistical analysis discussion conclusion page 1 page 2 page 3 page 4 page 5 page 6 page 7 page 8 page 9 page 10 page 11 page 12 page 13 page 14 page 15 page 16 page 17 page 18 page 19 page 20 page 21 page 22 page 23 page 24 page 25 page 26 page 27 page 28 page 29 page 30 page 31 page 32 page 33 page 34 page 35 page 36 page 37 page 38 page 39 page 40 page 41 page 42 page 43 page 44 page 45 page 46 page 47 page 48 page 49 page 50 page 51 page 52 page 53 page 54 page 55 page 56 page 57 page 58 page 59 page 60 page 61 page 62 page 63 page 64 page 65 page 66 page 67 page 68 page 69 page 70 page 71 page 72 page 73 page 74 page 75 page 76 page 77 page 78 page 79 page 80 page 81 page 82 page 83 page 84 page 85 page 86 page 87 page 88 page 89 page 90 page 91 page 92 page 93 page 94 page 95 page 96 page 97 page 98 page 99 page 100 page 101 page 102 page 103 page 104 page 105 page 106 page 107 page 108 page 109 page 110 page 111 page 112 page 113 page 114 page 115 page 116 page 117 page 118 page 119 page 120 page 121 page 122 page 123 page 124 page 125 page 126 page 127 page 128 page 129 page 130 page 131 page 132 page 133 page 134 page 135 page 136 page 137 page 138 page 139 page 140 page 141 page 142 page 143 page 144 page 145 page 146 page 147 page 148 page 149 page 150 page 151 page 152 page 153 page 154 page 155 page 156 page 157 page 158 page 159 page 160 page 161 page 162 page 163 page 164 page 165 page 166 page 167 page 168 page 169 page 170 page 171 page 172 page 173 page 174 page 175 page 176 page 177 page 178 page 179 page 180 page 181 page 182 page 183 page 184 page 185 page 186 page 187 page 188 page 189 page 190 page 191 page 192 page 193 page 194 page 195 page 196 page 197 page 198 page 199 page 200 page 201 page 202 page 203 page 204 page 205 page 206 page 207 page 208 page 209 page 210 page 211 page 212 page 213 page 214 page 215 page 216 page 217 page 218 page 219 page 220 page 221 page 222 page 223 page 224 page 225 page 226 page 227 page 228 page 229 page 230 page 231 page 232 page 233 page 234 page 235 page 236 page 237 page 238 page 239 page 240 page 241 page 242 page 243 page 244 page 245 page 246 page 247 page 248 page 249 page 250 page 251 page 252 page 253 page 254 page 255 page 256 page 257 page 258 page 259 page 260 page 261 page 262 page 263 page 264 page 265 page 266 page 267 page 268 page 269 page 270 page 271 page 272 page 273 page 274 page 275 page 276 page 277 page 278 page 279 page 280 page 281 page 282 page 283 page 284 page 285 page 286 page 287 page 288 page 289 page 290 page 291 page 292 page 293 page 294 page 295 page 296 page 297 page 298 page 299 page 300 page 301 page 302 page 303 page 304 page 305 page 306 page 307 page 308 page 309 page 310 page 311 page 312 page 313 page 314 page 315 page 316 page 317 page 318 page 319 page 320 page 321 page 322 page 323 page 324 page 325 page 326 page 327 page 328 page 329 page 330 page 331 page 332 page 333 page 334 page 335 page 336 page 337 page 338 page 339 page 340 page 341 page 342 page 343 page 344 page 345 page 346 hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprem vol. 30. pp. 1 5 (2002) water temperature distribution in a vertical cross-section of a wet counterflow cooling tower d. skobalj, z. zavarg61 and l. juhasz1 (" vujic-valjevo", alekse dundica 61/1, 14000 valjevo, yu 1faculty of technology, university of novi sad, bul. cara lazara i, 21000 novi sad, yu) received: november 29, 2000 the conventio_nal method of ~ooling tower calculation does not take into account heat exchange under the fill the basic reas~ns for this are: substantially less amount of heat is exchanged under the fill than in the fill and the definition of phys1cal model of heat transfer is rather complicated. nevertheless, in the case of cooling tower of greater dimension this method of ~alcu~atio~ may give uncorrect results. there are very few authors who treat this problem by experiments: the results obtained m this work show that the heat exchange under the fill is significiant. keywords: cooling tower, heat exchange, temperature distribution, counterflow introduction in industrial and energetic plants, water is commonly used as cooling medium. due to lack of industrial water, in most countries, there are in use only recirculated cooling systems. the main part of these systems are cooling towers in which water is cooled by atmospheric air. in the commonly used wet cooling tower the water and the air are in direct contact. there are several types of cooling towers depending on the air and water stream direction. one of the types is the counterflow cooling tower (fig. i). the first theorethical formulation of water cooling in the counter cooling towers was given by walker et al. [ 1]. according to this theory there are two independent coefficients: heat and mass transfer coefficients. merkel [2] was the ftrst who realized the conection between these two phenomena. the amount of heat transferred from water to air, according to merkel, is proportional to the difference in the enthalpy of the saturated air and the enthalpy of the humid air. merkel [2] was the first who recognised the relation between these two processes. he gave the first appliciable formulation of differential equation of water cooling proces. according to this formulation, the amount of heat transfer is proportional to the difference in enthalpy of the saturated air and the humid air in the main stream. in determining the value of heat transfer it is sufficiant to use only one empirical coefficient; which includes both heat and mass transfer processes. the results of experimental investigation gave a certain deviation from the merkel theory. according to some references this deviation is due to approximation in the merkel equation [3] while in some others the merkel theory is fully rejected [4]. there are also a great deal of engineering ·calculation procedures which are differing in a level of approximation of the theory. the main reason for such great number of procedures lies in the fact that simultaneous momentum, heat and mass transfer in the cooling towers is one of the most complicated processes in the enginerring practice. most of these procedures are based on the merkel theory. because of its simplicity and relatively satisfactory results, the merkel theory is widely used and accepted in most well known international standards as a procedure for cooling tower performance calculation [5,6]. however, heat and mass transfer, according to this procedure, are taken into account only in the fill, while the space above and under the fill are neglected. the relatively high.price of the cooling tower fill demand the need to include the effect of water cooling in the zone under the fill. the experimental investigation shows that effect of cooling in the zone under the fill cannot be neglected. it enables to use less fill, keeping the same cooling intensity. 2 fig. i wet counterflow cooling tower merkel theory the wellknown international standards (din, cti) used in the merkel formulation for counterflow cooling tower performance calculations, often called as standard procedure [5,7]. the equation which describes heat and mass transfer according to merkel is: madha =:= {j(has -ha)·dv (i) setting air heat gain equal to water heat loss ma·dha =mw·dhw =mw· cpw" dt {2) combining with eq.( 1) we have (3) the integral term in the above equation is known as merkel number (4) the analytic solution of the integral (4) is not known. one way to solve it is to have an approximate analytic function between has and tw (linear or parabolic for example}. another way is to solve the integral (4) numerically. the left side of eq.( 3} can be written in the following form. connecting it with the fib characteristics: (5) distributor cs1 cs2 cs3 cs4 ~1 ~1 ta1 t41 . . . . ~2 ~ ~ t42 t,3 tn tu t.a . . . . ~4 ~ ta. t .. . . . . (s (s (. .t experlm ents of mitra et al (1992} 0.5 50 100 150 200 250 300 time (s) fig. i concentration within a drop as a function of time of exposure to s02 (for a 2.88 mm drop radius, drop temperature =10 °c, [s02] = 1035 ppbv) .. = 0 1.5 .s • ;! . -u 0.5 20 40 --present model <> experiments of mitra et al (1992) ~a time (o) 80 • 100 120 fig.2 concentration within a drop as a function of time of exposure to s02 (for a 2.88 mm drop radius, drop temperature =12.5 oc, [s02] = 97 ppm) results and discussion comparison with laboratory studies for a constant gas concentration , which is the typical case for laboratory studies, the eqs.(l), (2), (6) and (7) are sufficient to describe sulfur dioxide absorption by individual freely falling large water drops. in order to evaluate the model adequacy, we test the model for the case of low and intermediate gas concentration (the mass transfer resistance is located both in the gas and the aqueous phase). the comparison is made between the model and the experimental results for sulfur dioxide absorption from individual large water drops. the model is compared to the mitra et al. [13] and mitra et al. [14] experimental results concerning two broad categories of sulfur dioxide absorption. the experiments were carried out in a vertical wind tunnel which allows to freely suspend a single drop in the vertical air stream of the tunnel. in the first category a 2.88 mm radius drop were exposed to sulfur dioxideair mixture. fig.l shows the evolution 173 0.8 --present model <> experiments of mftra & hannemann (1993) ~ 0.6 e= u 0.4 0.2 20 40 60 80 100 120 time (s) fig.3 the variation of the rate cvcinitial of s(iv) desorption with time exposure s02 (for a 2.88 tnm drop radius, drop temperature= 15 °c, c;nitial = 3.39 10'3 mole liter' 1 ) of the average total sulfur dioxide concentration vs. the time exposure in the case of 1035 ppbv s02 concentration in the gas phase. in fig.2 results are reported for the absorption in the case of 97 ppm so2 concentration in the gas phase. from fig.l and fig.2, we observe that the values predicted by the present model are in good agreement with the experimental results. in the second category of experiments (mitra et al., [14]), a drop initially containing s(iv) was exposed to sulfur-free air to determine the rate of sulfur dioxide desorption. fig.3 shows the evolution of the average total sulfur dioxide concentration vs. the time exposure for a 3.39 10·3 mol liter·1 drop initial concentration. the results obtained from the model agree well with those from experiments. example of model application a brief illustration of the proposed model, applied to the sulfur dioxide washout by rain falling through a polluted plume, is shown below. this case is of growing interest, because the precipitation scavenging constitutes an important sink for gases in the atmosphere and can influence their local, regional and global distributions. a similar attempt was first made by barrie [4j extended by walcek et al. [17, 18, 191 and hannemann et al. [10]. the walcek et al. [17, 18, 19] procedure, adapted to the present model, may be summarized by the following: let us consider a vertical column containing of air and sulfur dioxide. we suppose ·gaussian concentration distribution in the plume with a peak centered 200 m above the ground. assuming the absence of s02 initially, the drops are supposed to fall sequentially in the air column that is devised into 300 layers, each of one meter in height. the drops enters a given layer of air with concentration ctop and exit at its bottom with concentration cbot· cbo! is calculated from eqs.(l), (2), (6) and (7), and represents the c1op value for the next layer. 174 300 250 200 .§. .. 150 .s:; "' ;; :1: 100 "' --lnitl~i plume ~ .... /: '• i --plume after 1 em rain '• i i 50 i\ i i i -----plume after2 em rain ......... plume after 3 em rain i ., i ~ 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 concentration, c /c g gmax figavariation of s02 concentration with height in pollution layer after specified amounts of raindrops have fallen through. initial concentration is 500 ppb (v). rainfall rate, r = 1 mmlh the gas phase concentration is calculated from eq.(5) which is rewritten in discrete form as: vd (cbot -ctop) vg ru (10) where c 8 n and c 8 n+l are the concentration in the layer before and after the drops have passed trough . vg is the air volume and vd is the volume of raindrops falling through the layer. the same equatien was applied to each layer as the drop progress through the entire column. from eq.(jo) the gas concentration in each layer is determined according to, c;+l = c; (cbo, c,op )aq (11) az where aq is the rainfall increment and az is the layer height (respectively 0.1 rum and 1m, in this study). the gas profile will be modified after each aq, (corresponding to a given set of drops falling through the column). another set of drops is allowed to fall through this new profile and the procedure is repeated until the trace gas reaches a certain gas concentration. for further simplification, we consider the mean raindrop radius, r m representative for this distribution: (12) where r m is given in rum and the rainfall rate, r, in mmlh. plume washout results plume washout was calculated for 'precipitation intensity, r, of 1 mmlh and 15 mmlb. fig.4 shows the time evolution of the specified gaussian distribution of sulfur dioxide concentration as a population of drops faits the plume pollution with an initial peak profile concentration of 500 ppb (v). in the case of 300 250 200 ~: .§. e 150 ~ " :1: 100 50 0 0 . t' '( 'i 'i : i i \ {: ! ,, :j tl il ,: 0.2 0.4 --lnil!al plume -plume after 1 em rain -----plume after 2 em rain · · · ·-plume after 3 em rain ......... plume after 4 em rain 0.6 0.8 concentration, c /c g gmax fig.5 variation of s02 concentration with height in pollution layer after specified amounts of raindrops have fallen throngh. initial concentration is 500 ppb (v). rainfall rate, r = 15 mm/h 1 mmlh rainfall rate , corresponding to small drop size ( = 1.1 rum), the drops absorb and desorb the sulfur dioxide rapidly. we see that the gas concentration have a maximum and that the corresponding heightmax depends on rainfall quantity passed through the plume. the maximum gas concentration is displaced to shorter height with increasing rainfall quantity. for rainfall rate of 15 mmlh (fig.5), corresponding to larger raindrop ( = 2.06 rom), the average concentration is reduced, while the height of the plume remains roughly constant to. explain the difference between these two cases, combination of the following two effects has to be considered : residence time (drop terminal velocity) and the absorption ability (drop diameter and gas concentration). from figa and 5, we can note also that the scavenging is mainly controlled both by the total amount and intensity of the rainfall, which is in agreement with some in situ observations (see for example durana et al. [8]). conclusion in the first part of this paper, a simple analytical model was used to determine the sulfur dioxide absorption/desorption by freely falling drops. data obtained by the model of the so2 absorption/desorption by single drop are compared with published experimental data and a fairly good harmony was found. in the second part, a particular important application of the above model is presented as an illustration of its predictive ability. as an example, sulfur dioxide washout by rain, falling through a pollution plume, is considered. the model predicts the redistribution of the plume through which the raindrops had fallen as function of the rainfall rate. although the observed agreement between model and experimental results, from which some useful predictions on the atmospheric scavenging can be drawn, further investigations are needed for the initial rate under realistic conditions. effects as multicomponent gas phase, oxidation, break-up and/or coalescence, evaporation, air motions, have to be considered. symbols a radius of drop c dimensionless concentration cg bulk gas concentration c interface gas concentration gi cd drag coefficient (z concentration of drop eli equilibrium concentration of drop d drop diameter d molecular diffusivity gas/liquid phase g,l kt liquid mass transfer coefficient kg gas mass transfer coefficient r rainfall rate re reynolds number r radial coordinate tm mean drop radius s surface area sc schmidt number sh sherwood number t dimensional time u terminal velocity * interfacial liquid friction velocity u v drop volume p g,l fluid density ( gas/liquid) references 1. altwicker e. r. and llndidem c. e.: aiche j., 1988, 34(2), 329-332 2. amokrane h., saboni a. and caussade b.: aiche j., 1994, 40, 1950-1960 3. baboolal l. a., pruppacher h. r. and topalian j. h.: j. atmos. sci, 1981, 38, 856-870 4. barrie l. a.: atmospheric environment, 1978, 12, 407-412 5. beard k. v. and pruppacher h. r.: j. atm. sci., 1971,28,1455-1464 6. berry e. x. and pranger m. r.: j. appl meteor., 1974, 13, 108-113 7. caussade b. and saboni a.: in s. e. schwartz and w. g. n. slinn {eds.), precipitation scavenging and atmosphere-surface exchange, vol. 1 hemisphere publishing corp., washington, 29-40, 1992 8. durana n., casado h., ezccura a., garcia c., lacaux j.p., and dinh p. v.: experimental study of the scavenging process by mean of sequential precipitation collector: preliminary results. atmospheric environment part a: general topics 26a(13), 2437-2443, 1992 9. garner f. h. and lane j. j.: tran. inst. cbem. eng., 1959, 37, 162 10. hannemann a. u., mitra s. k. and pruppacher h. r.: j. atm. chern., 1996,24,271-284 175 11. kaji r., hishinumay. and kuroda h.: j. chern. eng. japan, 1985, 18(2),169 12. maahs h. g.: sulfur dioxide water equilibria between 0 an 50 °c. in d. r. schryer (ed.). heterogenous atmospheric chemistry. am. geophy. union., 187-195,1982 13. mitra s. k., w altrop a. hannemann a. u., flossmann and pruppacher h. r.: in s. e. schwartz and w. g. n. slinn (eds.), precipitation scavenging and atmosphere-surface exchange, vol. 1 hemisphere publishing corp., washington, 123-141, 1992 14. mitra s. k. and hannemann a. u.: j. atm. chern., 1993, 16, 201-218 15. pruppacher and rasmussen: j. atmos. sci, 1979, 36, 1255-1260 16. saboni a.: these de doctorat de l'inp de toulouse, 1991 17. walcek c. j. and pruppacher h. r.: j. atm. chern., 1984, 1, 269-289 18. w alcek c. j., pruppacher h. r., topalian j. h. and mitra s. k.: j. atm. chern., 1984, l, 290-306 19. w alcek c. j. and pruppacher h. r.: j. atm. chern., 1984, 1, 291-306 appendix equilibrium relations for sulfur dioxide in water when sulfur dioxide is absorbed into water, the resulting equilibrium relations (walcek et al. [17, 18, 19}, amokrane et al.,[2]) are written us: (al) hso~ + h 2 0 ¢::? h 3 0+ +so; (a3) the values of the equilibrium constants k8 , k 1 and k2 , of the reactions ai, a2 and a3 are respectively (maahs [121, mitra et al [131): [h so j {~-6.sz1) k h ::: 2 3 = 10 r rt (moles/moles) (a4) [s02 ] [hso;j[h30+] =10( 8 :-·m) (moles/liter) (a5) [h 2s03 ] rso=jrh o+j (621.91_9.278) k1 = 3 3 == 10 t (moles/liter) (a6} [hso;] where t is the absolute temperature expressed in kelvin. the total sulfur concentration [s} is written as {sj={h2s03 ]+[hs0i]+[so~] (a7) after several manipulations from eqs.(a4}-(a6), together with the following conditions. 176 • condition of electroneutrality: (a8) • condition of water ionization: • the equilibrium constant of the ionization of water is defined by: kw =[h3 0+][0h-] (thatiskw =1014 at25 ·c) (alo) • the total sulfur concentration as function of ph of the solution is given by: _( + -~j[h3 0+] 2 +k1[h 30+]+k!kz (all) [s]-l[h30 ] [h30+] kl[h30+]+2k!kz for ph< 5.5, reaction a3 may be neglected. thus the total s concentration is then given by: [h o+f +k [h o+] [sj = [h 2 s0 3 1 + [hso; j = 3 k 1 3 (al2) l which may be written in this form: [s]=[h 2s0 3]+[hso;j=kh[s0 2 ] 8 +~k1 kh[s02 ] 8 (al3) page 174 page 175 page 176 page 177 page 178 page 179 microsoft word b_01_arpad_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 39(2) pp. 163-167 (2011) investigation of sensible heat storage and heat insulation in the exploitation of concentrated solar energy i. árpád university of pannonia, doctoral school of chemical engineering and material sciences 10, egyetem street, h-8201 veszprém, hungary e-mail: arpad.istvan@hotmail.com mvm erbe power engineering & consulting ltd. 95, budafoki road, h-1117 budapest, hungary this paper analyses the exploitation of solar energy by wholly relying on it to heat homes by 100% solar heating in hungary. it determines the necessary amount of heat and the heat storage capacity and considers the time sequence between charge and discharge. further, it provides a feasible technology for sensible heat storage and it determines the sizes of heat storebuilding, the thickness of heat insulation and it calculates the heat losses of heat storage. on the basis of the results, the paper provides proposals for the method of heat storage and for the technical parameters to be considered for the heat insulation. it describes the application of the heat storage method for district heating and electricity generation. keywords: solar energy, sensible heat storage, heat insulation, 100% solar heating of home, electrical energy generation introduction we have been striving for a long time to be capable of collecting the energy of solar radiation and of storing it. certainly, we would like to store and use solar energy for a long time without suffering any great losses. the question is, whether the collected and stored energy could provide 100% of the homes’ heatingthe whole year round or whether it could generate electricity over several months? to achieve that several problems need to be solved: the flux of solar energy is low. there is no harmony between energy generation and consumption and it is incalculable as a function of time. because of that big energy storage is needed. efficient and economic energy storage for a long time is an unsolved problem. this paper analyses this issue and presents a feasible technological solution of how the buildings could continuously be supplied with heat energy from the direct solar radiation and how the energy must be stored as sensible heat storage and how the heat insulation of the heat storage facilities must be planned [1]. calculations for the size of solar radiation field and for the heat storage capacity the solar radiation, that passes directly through the atmosphere to the earth’s surface, is called direct solar radiation. the period, when the direct radiation is more than 210 w/m2, is called sunny hours. in hungary, the number of sunny hours varies between 1900–2200 hours per year, which is quite long compared to that in the world. the indicated data are based on statistics of several years [2, 3, 4]. the direct radiation is approx. 1000 w/m2 on the surface of the earth in fine weather. this value is lower under cloudy weather conditions and during air pollution. we use in the following calculations the average sunny hours of 400 w/m2 (fig. 1). in a year’s time period, perpendicularly to the direction of solar radiation, we can estimate the amount of the collectable direct solar energy as below: 2 2 2000 3600 400 2880 ( ) h s w year h m mj m year ⋅ ⋅ = = ⋅ ⋅ (1) figure 1: intensities of direct solar radiation 164 heat energy consumption of a family house in a dwelling-house. heat energy is used for heating and hot water production. without detailed explanation of the calculations, we have estimated alltogether 80000 mj heat energy consumption per year for five persons and an average house of cc. 100 m2. that number is equivalent to approx. 2350 m3 natural gas (34 mj/m3). table 1 shows the energy consumption (heating and hot water generation) in each month of a year. as a matter of fact, new houses and block houses have lower energy requirements. the task is to collect the above indicated 80000 mj heat energy and the heat losses of the heat storage “tank”. sizes of the solar field we can collect energy of approx. 400 w on a surface area of 1 m2. this energy can be collected by a surface right-angle to solar radiation in sunny hours and if there are approx. 2000 sunny hours/year in hungary. we can calculate this surface area of solar radiation by using the following formula (the calculation relates to the demand of 80000 mj energy): 2 2 2 80000 400 2000 3600 ( ) 27.75 28 mj year a j s h s m h m m = = ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ = ≈ (2) this 28 m2 does not include the heat losses. table 1: energy consumption of a dwelling-house per year period (days) sunny hours collectable direct solar energy per m2 [mj/m2] charge [mj] collected solar energy on 27.75 m2 heating [mj] hot water production [mj] discharge [mj] total heat energy requirement amount of energy to be stored [mj] apr (30) 187 269 7470 1840 1200 3040 4430 may (31) 253 364 10110 900 1240 2140 12400 june (30) 267 384 10670 0 1200 1200 21870 july (31) 297 428 11870 0 1240 1240 32500 aug (31) 278 400 11110 0 1240 1240 42370 sept (30) 202 291 8070 260 1200 1460 48980 oct (31) 139 200 5550 1900 1240 3140 51390 ≈52000 mj nov (30) 63 91 2520 9470 1200 10670 43240 dec (31) 40 58 1600 14730 1240 15970 28870 jan (31) 57 82 2280 16830 1240 18070 13080 feb (28) 83 120 3320 12100 1120 13220 3180 mar (31) 136 196 5430 7360 1240 8600 10 year (365) 2002 2883 80000 65390 14600 79990 capacity of heat storage a heat storage “tank” shall be used due to the sequence of time between charge and discharge. table 1 shows the calculating of the capacity of heat storage “tank”. the heat capacity depends on the charge and the discharge. the total capacity of the heat storage “tank” amounts to 52000 mj. this size of heat storage “tank” can ensure heat energy supply for a house all the year round. method of heat storage and sizes of the heat storage “tank” the method of sensible heat storage is the simplest one. we have surveyed many heat storage materials and have chosen magnesite brick. calculations with magnesite brick showed the best results. table 2 shows the properties of the magnesite brick. corundum (95% al2o3) brick is also a very good heat storage material: its density of energy amounts to 3.3 mj/(m3k) and its melting point is 2020 °c. table 2: properties of magnesite brick [5, 6] content application range of temperature δt specific heat j/(kgk) density kg/m3 density of energy mj/(m3k) heat conductivity w/(mk) price $/ton 37–98 % mgo 1–60 % cao and/or cr2o3 65–500 °c (melting point: 2852 °c) 1172 3020 3.54 8.4 (on 500 °c) 100–500 165 we can calculate the mass and volume of magnesite brick from the energy capacity of heat storage “tank” (≈52000 mj), from the planned range of temperature (∆t = 500 – 65 °c = 435 °c) and from its specific heat and density. the following calculation is applicable: q q c m t m c t = ⋅ ⋅δ → = ⋅δ (3.a) 952 10 101997 1172 435 102 j m kg j k kg k m tons ⋅ = = ⋅ ⋅ ≈ (3.b) 3 3 3 102 33, 7 3, 02 34 m tons v m tons m v m ρ = = = ≈ (4) this size seems to be a normal value and normal scale. if the end point of maximum temperature were just 430 °c, the size of heat receiver would be 40 m3. however, the 500 °c of maximum temperature is real too, scilicet the thermooils (heat transfer fluids) work on 580 °c (1060 °f) in the existing concentrated solar power plants. the temperature difference, needed to the heat exchange, is ensured. heat insulation and heat losses heat store-building made of bricks hereinafter, the heat storage “tank” will be named as heat store-building because there is no tank in the construction. we analyise here only a cubic shaped heat store-building. the construction is shown in fig. 2. we make a difference between the bottom and the upper parts of the store-building as follows [7]: figure 2 1 − external wall, 2 − coat of heat insulation from rock wool, 3 − magnesite bricks, 4 − concrete pad, 5 − gravel bed, 6 − pipe of heat transfer fluid the bottom part is in contact with the soil and the upper parts of the store-building are in contactwith the the ambient air. the upper parts are built up from lateralwalls and from the roof. we calculated these parts (wall and roof) in the same way. the thermal resistance of the upper part and of the bottom part (rcond = δ/λ, respectively rconv = 1/α) are indicated below: joint 1 1 conv rad r α α α = = + (5) ruppers = rcond + rjoint (6) ruppers = rins + rbrick + rjoint (7) rbottom = rconcret + rgravel + rsoil (8) the value of the heat transfer coefficient between the external side of the wall and the ambient air is α = 24 w/(m2k). this value has been derived from a hungarian architectural standard (msz 04-140-02). the foundation of the store-building would be constructed from cellular concrete: its density is 700 kg/m3 and its bearing strength is more than 150 n/m2. table 3 shows the material properties of the storebuilding, which we have used in the calculation process [6, 7, 8,]. table 3: applied value of λ thermal conductivities and δ coating thickness rock woll brick/barge stone cellular concrete gravel soil °c w/(mk) 500−400 0.180 400−300 0.100 300−200 0.070 200−100 0.049 <100 0.038 0.64 w/(mk) < 0.17 w/(mk) 0.35 w/(mk) 1.3 w/(mk) δins= to be determined δbrick = 0.12 m δconcrete = 0.6 m δgravel = 0.3 m δsoil = 0.4 m 166 the thermal conductivity of the heat insulation (rock wool) increases significantly with the rise of temperature λ(t). the curve can be seen in fig. 3. the above mentioned function λ(t) has been considered in the calculation process. actually, in every month we experienced various heat resistances. table 4 shows the values of the ambient temperature and the soil temperature at a dept of 1 m. figure 3: thermal conductivity of rock wool versus temperature heat losses of the heat store-building we calculated the heat current as heat conduction through the flat wall. the heat transfer between the external surface of the wall and the ambient air (at the joint) equals to the conductive heat current in the wall. if we know the temperature of the external surface of the wall, the internal temperature δtconductiv = tmagnesite brick – toutside wall (9) δtconductiv = tint – text (10) and the thickness of heat insulating material δins, we are able to calculate the heat current q& [w/m2]: transfer cond transfer cond t t q és q r r δ δ = =& & (11,12) ;cond transfercond ins transfer t r r q t δ δ ⋅ = → δ & (13) q q a= ⋅& (14) we designed the maximum internal temperature (tint) and the maximum external temperature of the wall’s surface area (text) to be 16 °c under conditions in october. further, we calculated 40 cm thick insulating material (rock wool), which represents a realistic value. table 4 shows the heat losses suffered in each month and all the year round. the calculations were performed on one house (with a store building volume of 34 m3), on 50 houses (with a store building volume of 1700 m3) and on 100 houses (with a store building volume of 3400 m3). it is a remarkable result that the specific heat losses fall with increasing store-building size (m³). the amount of decrease is remarkable. the cause of that is that the specific surface “a/v – surface/volume” decreased. further, we calculated the following values: the specific heat loss is as high as 14% in the case of store-building of 500 dwelling-houses ( with size of 17000 m3) and it is as high as 11% in the case of 1000 dwelling-houses (34000 m3)! we analysed the dependence of specific surface area “a/v” on the volume “v”. we performed the analysis by using a cube. table 5 shows the results of the volume (v [m3]) and the specific surface (a/v [m2/m3]) with different lengths of the edge of the cube. then we graphed them in fig. 4. table 4: the heat losses of different sized heat store-buildings with 40 cm thickness of the rock wool 34 m3 1700 m3 3400 m3 tint [°c] text [°c] tamb [°c] qupper [w/m²] tsoil [°c] qbottom [w/m²] qtotal [gj] qtotal [gj] qtotal [gj] apr (30) 102 12 12 8 10 20 1.6 22 35 may (31) 168 18 17 16 14 33 3.2 43 68 june (30) 247 21 20 28 18 49 5.1 70 111 july (31) 335 24 22 45 20 67 8.2 111 177 aug (31) 417 24 21 69 21 84 12.1 164 260 sept (30) 472 21 17 94 19 97 15.4 209 332 oct (31) 492 15 11 104 14 102 17.5 237 377 nov (30) 424 9 6 74 10 88 12.5 169 268 dec (31) 305 4 2 40 7 63 7.4 100 159 jan (31) 174 1 0 18 5 36 3.5 48 76 feb (28) 91 2 2 8 4 19 1.5 20 32 marc (31) 65 6 6 5 5 13 1.1 14 23 total heat losses of a year [gj] 89.1 1209 1919 total heat consumption of a year [gj] 80.0 4000 8000 heat losses versus heat consumption per cent [%] 111% 30% 24% 167 table 5: the specific surface area of a cube versus its size a [m] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 a [m²] 6 24 54 96 150 216 294 384 486 600 2400 5400 9600 15000 v [m³] 1 8 27 64 125 216 343 512 729 1000 8000 27000 64000 125000 a/v [m²/m³] 6.00 3.00 2.00 1.50 1.20 1.00 0.86 0.75 0.67 0.60 0.30 0.20 0.15 0.12 the next algebraic formula describes the function of fig. 4: 3 6 y x = (15) figure 4: specific surface versus volume of cube conclusions the paper sets out that it is possible to store solar energy all the year round or for a long period. the stored heat energy stored can meet the total heating demand of the houses or can also generate electricity in hungary. we can keep the heat losses at low level (<20%). certainly we must consider some technical facts. heat energy shall be stored as below: at high temperature: the higher the better, using materials with high energy density [mj/(m3k)] (using one of solid materials, for example magnesite brick) and in store-building whose size is big enough, because the heat losses shall be low. we would emphasize here that the increase of size, up to a certain size, is one of the best heat insulation technique. the heat storage in solid material is easy and safe. no steel tank is used and the brick isn’t flammable and explosive. in my opinion this method should be used for district heating and for electricity generation. our next goals are: to determine the optimum size of the heat storebuilding and the thickness of heat insulation coat [9, 10] and to investigate different heat transfer materials. we would like to achieve higher temperature in the store-building. perhaps gaseous materials would be good heat transfer materials from the solar trough to the store building. references 1. i. árpád: investigation of the sensible heat storage and the heat insulation in the exploitation of solar energy (in hungarian). 19th international conference on mechanical engineering april 28 – may 1 2011. oget 2011. p. 31–34, sumuleu ciuc, romania 2. gy. major, a. v. morvay, f. weingartner, o. farkasné takács, zs. zemplényiné tárkányi (eds.): solar radiation in hungary (in hungarian). official publication of hungarian meteorological service, no. 10, budapest, hungary, 1976, isbn 9637701052 3. homepage of hungarian meteorological service, data of climate, www.met.hu 4. i. barótfi: exploitation of solar energy (in hungarian). handbook for users of energy. környezettechnikai szolgáltató kft., budapest, hungary, 1994 5. i. szűcs, á. b. palotás, n. hegman: effect of inhomogeneous radiation coefficient on the surface temperature field of refractory lining using thermovision (in hungarian). sciences of material and metallurgy, research report, miskolc, hungary, 2000 6. f. tamás (ed.): handbook of silicate industry (in hungarian). műszaki könyvkiadó, budapest, hungary, 1982 7. k. c. kwon: engineering model of liquid storage utility tank for heat transfer analysis. international joint power generation conference, minneapolis, 1995 8. brochures of rockwool. insulation of high temperature applications. rockwool hungary kft., budapest 9. i. timár, i. árpád: optimization of pipes’ insulation. (in hungarian). energiagazdálkodás 27(10), (1986), 449–459, budapest, hungary 10. i. timár: optimierung ebener fachwerke mit mehreren zielfunktionen. forschung im ingenieurwesen, 68, (2004), 121–125 << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 48(1) pp. 87–93 (2020) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.33927/hjic-2020-14 examination of fuel consumption factors, basics of precision and on-board diagnostic measurements tibor busznyák∗1 and istván lakatos1 1department of road and rail vehicles, széchenyi istván university, egyetem tér 1, győr, 9026, hungary in this paper, different factors of fuel consumption are examined. driveload equitation is used as a basis and the parts that handle energy consumption in particular are analyzed. for the purposes of visibility, it was implemented using matlab. in statistical works, fuel consumption data require that the energy consumption of vehicles be analyzed correctly. variables which affect fuel consumption during a given drive are defined. research is analyzed in the second part of the paper where vehicle diagnostics are combined with global positioning. examinations are necessary to create on-board diagnostics-based positioning. keywords: gps, obd, correlation, drive, assistance 1. introduction nowadays, innovation is a key. economical, safetycentred or traffic optimization tasks are increasingly regulated. these criteria require developers to actuate and consequently upgrade their conceptions. new technologies are rapidly emerging so industries have to keep up to date. drive options, including alternative drive solutions, are continuously being updated, the number of driverassistance features is ever-increasing towards a possible fully autonomous level [1]. the role of development focusing on smart city concepts and sustainable traffic is becoming more important. critical aspects of it are efficient energy use (the central question of the present paper), range of online communication systems, autonomous transport systems and conceptions of autonomous vehicles. reliable operation requires cooperation between different participants, e.g. the information technology, urban development and automotive industries. these aspects are interrelated, therefore, a more efficient intelligent transportation system (its) could be realized [2–4]. information technologies between different units of traffic are elementary in terms of automated traffic. the stability of dataflow is unavoidable. communication channels play a key role in everyday life as information is accessed from the internet. as information content defines the quality of data, the demands of traffic quality have recently been increasing. the number of automobiles in hungary has almost doubled over the past twenty years. safety issues and ∗correspondence: busznyaktibor@gmail.com accidents are increasingly commonplace. besides accidents, traffic jams have also become more frequent. as a result, driving has become harder. rush-hour traffic that slowly inches forward, searching for a parking space or simply parking itself put drivers to the test under crowded, metropolitan conditions. the need to avoid similar situations has led to the emergence of driverassistance systems. the quality of data transmissions as well as trouble loggerand indicator systems, which evaluate inputs from sensors or on-board diagnostics, are closely connected to vehicle information. the aforementioned technologies help driver-assistance systems to function. due to information technology and automatization, it is possible to create a vehicle network. one of these networks is the vehicle-to-everything (v2x) communication platform where vehicles communicate with each other along with the infrastructure provider to share information about the locations of traffic jams and avoid congestion. vehicle communication and driver-assistance systems help to improve road traffic safety and make more accurate predictions [5–7]. an important task is to define databases based on the optimization of traffic. several methods, e.g. based on vehicles or infrastructure, are available in order to build a database. if the vehicle investigated predominantly drives in well-maintained, intelligent infrastructure, then the number and complexity of built-in vehicle systems can be reduced. in this case, information is supplied to the vehicle by an uninterrupted connection with external systems. this could also be true of the drive of a vehicle on predefined routes, e.g. buses. it is easier to build infrastructure for https://doi.org/10.33927/hjic-2020-14 mailto:busznyaktibor@gmail.com 88 busznyák és lakatos public transport vehicles because their routes are predefined. on the other hand, a vehicle can be defined as a separate unit. without infrastructure, vehicles rely on built-in sensors and can drive anywhere, external infrastructure is unnecessary. how could the complexity of a given vehicle’s sensor system be reduced? would it be possible to use built-in on-board diagnostics for positioning tasks. basic ideas originate from simple experiences. if people drive uphill in cruise control, the amount of data concerning fuel consumption that appears on the dashboard increases. the core of this research is the possible connection between elevation and fuel consumption: 1. can a connection between elevation data from global positioning and fuel consumption data from on-board diagnostics at a constant or various speeds be identified? 2. is it possible to create a topographic elevation model from fuel consumption data? 3. if it is possible, then the fuel consumption can be predicted from road conditions. 4. by integrating on-board diagnostics into conventional or intelligent transportation systems using the presented relations, a vehicle can be located. connections between data from global positioning systems and fuel consumption are sought. it is necessary to define important variables that affect the fuel consumption of a vehicle. the relevant equations and propulsion power requirements are analyzed. 2. experiment 2.1 propulsion power requirements and fuel consumption – defining variables internal combustion engines function by burning fuel which is blended with air in line with energy requirements. propulsion power is necessary for a vehicle to move but its movement is restricted by various internal and external driving resistances. external driving resistances rolling resistance is fg = µmg (1) the rolling force resists motion when tires are rotating on a given surface. internal and external factors are included in the equation. the external factor is the rolling resistance coefficient which depends on contacting surfaces. the internal factor is the deformation of the tires which is dependent on the load of the vehicle. a loss in power results. power against rolling resistance is pg = fgv (2) aerodynamic drag is fl = cwρav 2/2 (3) drag acts in the opposite direction to which the vehicle is moving. it plays a major role in terms of vehicle dynamics and efficiency. at higher speeds, it is more significant because drag increases with the square of the velocity. power against drag is pl = flv (4) climbing resistance is fe = mg sin(α) (5) climbing resistance depends on the elevation of the route, mass of the vehicle and road gradient. power against climbing resistance is pe = fev (6) internal driving resistances acceleration resistance is fgy = (1 + θ)ma, (7) where θ is a coefficient of rotating components (table 1). energy is required to accelerate. the acceleration resistance can be calculated from the masses of the rotating components and vehicle. power against acceleration resistance is pgy = fgyv (8) other internal resistances, e.g. transmission resistance, are peff = (1 −η)ph (9) another internal resistance arises when the transmission system moves and depends on the efficiency of its parts, moreover, it is used to calculate power. this internal resistance is constant and includes the efficiency of the differential (0.93), efficiency of the clutch (0.99), efficiency of the drive shaft (0.99), efficiency of the gearbox (0.97) and efficiency of the bearings (0.98): η = ηtk ηdiff ηkt ηcs ηny (10) finally, energy produced by the combustion of fuel is translated into the energy requirements of given resistances. at constant velocities, the acceleration resistance is zero and transmission resistance constant as well as calculable, as is shown in table 2. thus, the traction force or driveload equitation can be written in the following wellknown form: fv = fe + fg + fl (11) pv = fvv (12) hungarian journal of industry and chemistry examination of fuel consumption factors 89 table 1: values of θ gear [ith] θ 1 0.4 2 0.3 3 0.2 4 0.1 5 0.08 table 2: defined variables known values a, m, g, µ, cw, ρ variables v, α 2.2 matlab implementation the analysis of traction force components was conducted in the matlab development environment to try and define how variations in velocity and road gradient can explain power requirements. an analysis was conducted based on theoretical elements and data were defined by given measurements. vehicle: ford b-max (2014) • empty mass (m) = 1275 kg; • maximum power (pmax, peff ) = 74 kw; • drag coefficient (cw) = 0.32; • frontal area (a) = 2.8 m2; • rolling coefficient (µ) = 0.007 velocity codomain: • v = [0, 140 km/h] road gradient codomain: • α = [0, 30 ◦] figs. 1-3 show the effects of different resistances. the rolling resistance diagram (fig. 1) exhibits a linear trend. the power demand increases as the velocity and road gradient increase. the climbing resistance diagram (fig. 2) also exhibits a linear trend. according to real data, it is necessary to define a power limit, in this case 74 kw, which is the maximum power of the vehicle. analysis above this limit in not required since the engine is incapable of providing more power. on the contrary, the vehicle would decelerate or remain stationary beyond this limit. the air resistance diagram (fig. 3) exhibits a square trend between the velocity and power demand of the vehicle. the power demands of external resistances are presented in fig. 4. important values were compiled in tables 3–5. in the first part of this chapter, constant, discrete velocities were assumed. the next step is the parameterization of acceleration. for this task, values of theta are required (table 1). acceleration codomain figure 1: diagram of the power demand of rolling resistance as a function of velocity and road gradient figure 2: diagram of the power demand of climbing resistance as a function of velocity and road gradient figure 3: diagram of the power demand of air resistance as a function of velocity and road gradient • a = [0, 5 m/s2] gravitational acceleration [g] is a dimensionless, unofficial and descriptive measure. g codomain can be derived from a codomain. the effects of acceleration are shown in fig. 5. it is visible that at predefined shifts, diagram flow refracts and represents real cases. important values are compiled in tables 6–8. 3. results and analyses at high velocities and on steep road gradients, the power demand is also higher. the declaration of variables is necessary as a result of precise planning to follow on-board diagnostics (obd) measurements, especially routes. two independent measurement systems, obd and gps, are 48(1) pp. 87–93 (2020) 90 busznyák és lakatos figure 4: diagram of the power demand of external resistances as a function of velocity and road gradient comparable to connect the concept [8]. precision positioning is widely used and consists of numerous important boundary conditions. this paper examines the obd side of the concept, details of precise gps and gnss measurements are presented in previous papers of ours. a statistical analysis of the fuel consumption database is given from the equation of motion. for this database, work was used, that is the product of the force and displacement in the direction of the force. table 3: notations of v and α variables v(↓) low velocities v(←) medium velocities v(↑) high velocities α(↓) shallow road gradients α(←) medium road gradients α(↑) steep road gradients table 4: values for p[v,α] calculated in the matlab environment v(↓) = 3.6 [km/h] α (↓) = 0◦ p = 0.3064 [kw] α(←) = 5◦ p = 1.178 [kw] α(↑) = 30◦ p = 6.342 [kw] v(←) = 50 [km/h] α (↓) = 0◦ p = 2.824 [kw] α(←)) = 5◦ p = 18.09 [kw] α(↑) = 30◦ p = 74 [kw] v(↑) = 140 [km/h] α (↓) = 0◦ p = 40.78 [kw] αmax (140) = 4◦ p = 74 [kw] α (↑) = α (←) = αmax table 5: p [v,α] matrix p [v,α] v(↓) v(←) v(↑) α(↓) p(↓) p(↓) p(←) α(←) p(↓) p(←) p(↑) α(↑) p(←) p(↑) p(↑) figure 5: diagram of the power demand of acceleration as a function of velocity and g lifting work is wem = fem∆s = mg∆h (13) lifting work is the work that is done by lifting an object over a given period of time. it is proportional to its mass and change in height. friction (or rolling) work is ws = µmg∆s (14) table 6: notation of v and g variables v(↓) low velocities v(←) medium velocities v(↑) high velocities g(↓) low accelerations g(←) medium accelerations g(↑) high accelerations table 7: values for p [v,g] calculated in the matlab environment v(↓)=3.6 [km/h] g(↓)=0.01 p=0.1785 [kw] g(←)=0.1 p=1.185 [kw] g(↑) = 0.3 p = 5.93 [kw] v(←)=50 [km/h] g(↓)=0.01 p=2.142 [kw] g(←)=0.1 p=21.42 [kw] g(↑)=0.3 p=64.26 [kw] v(↑)=140 [km/h] g(↓)=0.01 p=5.508 [kw] gmax(140)=0.1424 p=74 [kw] g(↑)=g(←)=gmax table 8: p [v,g] matrix p [v,g] v(↓) v(←) v(↑) g(↓) p(↓) p(↓) p(←) g(←) p(↓) p(←) p(↑) g(↑) p(←) p(↑) p(↑) hungarian journal of industry and chemistry examination of fuel consumption factors 91 table 9: proportionalities over the period of time wem v, ∆h ws v wgy v 2 wk v 2 table 10: determination of coefficients constant velocity [km/h] coefficient of determination [r2] 30 0.9549 40 0.9160 50 0.8370 friction work is proportional to its mass and displacement. acceleration work is wgy = 1 2 m∆v2 (15) acceleration work is proportional to its displacement, mass and the square of its velocity. work done by air resistance is wk = 1 2 acwρv 2∆s (16) work done by air resistance is proportional to its displacement, drag coefficient (cw), frontal area (a), density (ρ) and square of its velocity. for the purpose of statistical analysis, proportionalities were compiled in table 9. now the statistical analysis can be conducted. in the first step, a single variable analysis is carried out. previously, a given route was measured, thus gps and obd databases were available. a connection between elevation and fuel consumption data was sought. table 10 shows that the concept is highly usable at low velocities, but when the range of velocities increases, the coefficient of determination becomes less efficient. multivariate analysis provides a solution to this problem. in this case, experienced variables, as summarized in table 9, were used. a route comprised of different road gradients and velocities was examined. a visual check is recommended to summarize the regression model, with which it is possible to forecast correlations according to different predictors (r2). range of velocity = [20, 70 km/h] 1. examination with ∆(v2) • r2 = 57.2% • where ∆(v2) = variation in the square of the velocity. 2. examination with ∆(v2) and ∆h figure 6: results of the multivariate analysis • r2 = 86.4% • where ∆h = change in height. 3. examination with ∆(v2), ∆h and v • r2 = 87.1% • where v = actual velocity. fig. 6 respresents the regression equation with the coefficient of determination. the regression equation can be rewritten in the following form: con = a∆(v 2) + b∆h + cv + d (17) con is an abbreviation of fuel consumption and appears constant. it reflects other possible predictors that have not been examined, for example, losses of the internal combustion engine. 3.1 obd-based positioning a drawback of precision positioning devices on the market are their prices, but the obd connectors are basic, standardized accessories of vehicles. the presented structure, when a connection is made between the positioning and on-board diagnostics, can be used for driver assistance tasks [9]. a matlab implementation of obd-based positioning has been proposed that is connected to the aims of this paper and will be presented shortly. dataflow and the stability of the system with regard to a precision positioning measurement are crucial. its boundary conditions are the following: • connection to 5 gnss satellites simultaneously; • dataflow stability in terms of the satellites and the base; • online connection with the base, from where the correction of data originates. 48(1) pp. 87–93 (2020) 92 busznyák és lakatos figure 7: operation of the matlab algorithm for obdbased positioning while weighing up the risks of two independent measurement methods, it is clear that the precision positioning technique is riskier. a significant safety risk can be reduced if it can be substituted for other alternatives. an alternative to the elevation database of the routes and obd data, which is accessible to every vehicle, may exist. to summarize our matlab implementation, continuously incoming obd data are compared to a reference database which consists of a map with coordinates. by searching for the minima of the squared differences of the two databases, an algorithm was derived that is capable of defining position based on changing trends. fig. 7 presents the operation of the developed algorithm at a constant velocity of 30 km/h. few incorrect obd data points were obtained, for example, at a horizontal displacement of 125 m. as the database of fuel consumption is continuously expanding, the significance of this imprecision is decreasing. 4. conclusion in this article, the driveload equitation was examined and special care taken with regard to its power demands. in the matlab environment, characteristics of different resistances were shown. moreover, the fixing of dependent variables was the main exercise in this research besides understanding the basic connections between onboard diagnostics and precision positioning. obd-based positioning is a possible method to determine the actual position of a vehicle without constantly being connected to gps or gnss. it could be useful as part of v2x or other intelligent transportation systems. in order to extend the concept to electric vehicles, the velocity and road gradient are the main variables, the power demands of both are comparable, and optimal charging points on a given route can be calculated. this could form the basis for a future paper. symbols µ rolling resistance coefficient m mass of moving object g gravitational acceleration v velocity cw drag coefficient ρ density a front surface α road gradient θ coefficient of rotating object a acceleration g gravitational constant η efficiency ηtk efficiency of gearbox ηdiff efficiency of the differential ηkt efficiency of cardan-shaft ηcs efficiency of bearings ηny efficiency of the clutch h altitude s displacement acknowledgements this research was carried out as part of the efop3.6.2-16-2017-00016 project within the framework of the new széchenyi plan. the completion of this project was funded by the european union and co-financed by the european social fund. references [1] takács, á.; rudas, i.; bösl, d.; haidegger, t.: highly automated vehicles and self-driving cars, ieee robotics & automation magazine, 2018, 25(4), 106– 112 doi: 10.1109/mra.2018.2874301 [2] derbel, o.; peter, t.; zebiri, h.; mourllion, b.; basset, m.: modified intelligent driver model for driver safety and traffic stability improvement, ifac proceedings volumes, 2013, 46(21), 744–749 doi: 10.3182/20130904-4-jp-2042.00132 [3] iordanopoulos, p.; mitsakis, e.; chalkiadakis, c.: prerequisites for further deploying its systems: the case of greece, periodica polytechnica transportation engineering, 2018, 46(2), 108–115 doi: 10.3311/pptr.11174 [4] lim, c.; kim, k.; maglio, p. p.: smart cities with big data: reference models, challenges, and considerations, cities, 2018, 82, 86–99 doi: 10.1016/j.cities.2018.04.011 [5] omae, m.; fujioka, t.; hashimoto, n.; shimizu, h.: the application of rtk-gps and steer-by-wire technology to the automatic driving of vehicles and an evaluation of driver behavior, iatss research, 2006, 30(2), 29–38 doi: 10.1016/s0386-1112(14)60167-9 [6] péter, t.; bokor, j.: modeling road traffic networks for control, annual international conference on network technology & communications: ntc 2010, 2010, paper 21, 18–22 isbn: 978-981-08-7654-8 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1109/mra.2018.2874301 https://doi.org/10.3182/20130904-4-jp-2042.00132 https://doi.org/10.3182/20130904-4-jp-2042.00132 https://doi.org/10.3311/pptr.11174 https://doi.org/10.3311/pptr.11174 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cities.2018.04.011 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cities.2018.04.011 https://doi.org/10.1016/s0386-1112(14)60167-9 examination of fuel consumption factors 93 [7] péter, t.; bokor, j.: new road traffic networks models for control, gstf international journal on computing, 2011, 1(2), 227–232 doi: 10.5176/2010-2283_1.2.65 [8] sun, q.; xia, j.; foster, j.; falkmer, t.; lee, h.: pursuing precise vehicle movement trajectory in urban residential area using multi-gnss rtk tracking, transportation research procedia, 2017, 25, 2356– 2372 doi: 10.1016/j.trpro.2017.05.255 [9] busznyák, t.; pálfi, g.; lakatos, i.: on-board diagnostic-based positioning as an additional information source of driver assistant systems, acta polytechnica hungarica, 2019, 16(5), 217–234 issn: 1785-8860 48(1) pp. 87–93 (2020) https://doi.org/10.5176/2010-2283_1.2.65 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.trpro.2017.05.255 introduction experiment propulsion power requirements and fuel consumption – defining variables matlab implementation results and analyses obd-based positioning conclusion microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 11-16 (2008) enhancing of biodegradability of sewage sludge by microwave irradiation s. beszédes, zs. lászló, g. szabó, c. hodúr university of szeged, institute of mechanical and process engineering moszkvai krt. 5-7, hu-6725 szeged, hungary e-mail: hodur@mk.u-szeged.hu in our work we focused on the effect of the microwave energy at the aerobic and anaerobic biological degradability of sewage sludge. the sewage sludge is a multiphase system with high water content. because of the presence of water molecules sludge is able to absorb the microwave energy efficiently. because of the variable dielectric properties the different component of sludge heat differently, these effects cause „thermal shock”. during the microwave treatment the configuration of macromolecules are varied and the cell walls of the microorganisms are opened by the thermal shock, it means the organic compounds are accessible for further biological degradable. in our experiments digested municipal sewage sludge and undigested dairy-sludge were used. labotron 500 professional microwave equipment was used for the microwave treatment at 2450 mhz frequency. the specific microwave power level was changed between 1 to 5 w/g. oxitop pm barometrical measurement system was used for determination of the biogas production at 40 °c, the measurement of the chemical oxygen demand (cod) of sludge was based on a potassinium-bichromate method, and a respirometric bod meter was used for the biochemical oxygen demand (bod) measurement (20 °c). our results showed that, the microwave energy could be a practical and effective alternative technique to enhance the biodegradability of sludge, because after microwave treatment increases the biodegradability from 7 up to 40% by diary sludge and from 12 up to 48 % by municipal sludge. it was found, that the originally resistant sludge after a microwave pre-treatment became more degradable, and its biogas production increased from 20-30 ml/g dry weight up to 500 ml/ gdry weight. the highest microwave power level effects the highest biogas yield, but the energy balance at lower specific power level (1-2 w/g) and longer treatment time gave just notable net energy production compared to the control sample. keywords: sewage sludge, biodegradability, biogas, microwave pre-treatment introduction nowadays, the most limiting factor of human being has been the clear water, and for this reason the efficiency of wastewater treatment technologies has increased. but the development and the widespread using of waste water technologies causes a large increasing in the municipal and industrial sewage sludge production. sludge represents the major solid waste from biological and physico-chemical waste water treatment processes. handling of this waste is difficult, and gives rise to secondary collateral environmental pollution. so the amount and the environmental risk of sludge have growing. the most common alternatives of treatment of sewage sludge are sludge landfill, cropland application, ocean dumping and incineration. but for example by agricultural using the existing landfill sites are running out of space, however secondary pollution is becoming a serious problem. for these reasons it is the most urgent challange to improved novel process to minimized final sludge quantity. environmental problems of sewage sludges the municipal and for instance the food industrial sludge, because of high organic content, is a special type of biomass, thus it may be utilized in biogas production. in the case of sludge it is some limiting compounds for example hazardous heavy metals and pathogen microorganisms. the anaerobic conditions in presence of methanogenic microorganisms lead to sludge stabilization by converting a part of organic substance into biogas [1]. the carbohydrates and the lipids of sludge are easily degradable by microorganisms, while the proteins normally less accessible for biological degradation. the anaerobic digestion of sewage sludge has many advantages for example the produced biogas can be used as renewable energy source, digestion has low energy requirement (if the produced biogas is used for heating of reactor), the pathogenic microorganisms are efficiently killed and digested sludge is harmless to dispose [2-4]. the main structure of sludge consists of extracellular polymeric substance (polysaccharide, proteins), other organic and inorganic matter and microbial cells which 12 agglomerated together. this complex flock structure of sludge is resistance to a direct anaerobic degradation since cell walls and polymeric conformation present physical and chemical barriers for microbial and enzymatic degradation [5]. the non-biodegradable polymeric structure does not only originate from cell autolysis and sludge bacterial cell but also originates from the raw wastewater. so besides the dosed chemical, the organic matter removal efficiency of applied waste water technology is determinative too. but the amount of biological degradable component of organic matter is essential not only in anaerobic digestion but in aerobic process for example in composting or in soilbioremediation, also. there are many possibilities to improve the digestibility and aerobical biodegradability of sludge. mechanical, thermal, ultrasound, chemical, thermochemical and enzymatic pre-treatment methods can enhance the extent and the rate of biological degradation [6-8]. it is verified the thermal pretreatments improve pathogen destruction and dewaterability process of sludge, too [9, 10]. the value of biodegradability (bd) is commonly characterized by the bod/cod ratio. cod is the chemical oxygen demand; the quantity of oxygen required oxidation by chemical oxidant. the soluble cod (scod) indicate the water soluble part of cod. bod is the biochemical oxygen demand, the quantity of oxygen consumed by aerobic microorganisms due to carbonaceous oxidation at a standard temperature (20 °c). the anaerobic degradability batch mesophilic biochemical methane potential (bmp) tests are used with applying of acclimated inoculums of methanogenic bacteria at mesophilic temperature range (25–45 °c). possibilities of microwave technic in sewage sludge treatment microwave heating is used as a popular alternative to conventional heating mainly due to considerable reaction time reducing effect. in conventional heating a large part of process time is needed to heat the vessel before the heat is transferred to the sample, while microwave irradiation heats matter directly. the microwave equipment generally uses 2450 mhz frequency with a 12.24 cm operating wavelength. the microwave magnetron with 900 mhz operating frequency is used for industrial scale heating and drying of solid and low water content matter on the ground of larger penetration ability [11]. nowadays microwave digestion methods have been developed for different sample types such as environmental, biological, geological and metallic matrices [12]. applications of microwaveassisted techniques in many fields of analytical methods, such as sample drying, moisture measurements and extraction processes are used. besides the examination of microwave irradiation on biological system the microwave oven reaction engineering (more) demonstrates promising results, for example in synthesis of organic molecules. the microwave irradiation has thermal and athermal effect. the thermal effect can be attributed heat generation in the matter due to rotation of dipole molecules or ionic conduction. ionic conduction is the electrophoretic migration of ions when an electromagnetic field is applied. dipole rotation means realignment of dipoles with the applied fields, for example at 2450 mhz the dipoles align and randomized 4.9·109 times per second and this forced molecular motion results heat. in many applications these two mechanisms have been applied simultaneously. due to high water content the sewage sludge can absorb microwave energy efficiency. microwave irradiation causes increasing of kinetic energy of water molecules, thus the boiling point is reached rapidly. although the quantum energy of microwave radiation is too low (1.05·10-5 ev) to break the chemical bounds but some structures can be altered by the energies carried by microwaves. for example the athermal effect of microwave radiation is caused by polarized parts of macromolecules, it results breakage of hydrogen bound. therefore, for instance the microwave irradiated microbial cell shows greater damage than convective heating cells to a similar temperature. a sample with non-homogenous structural characteristics and different dielectric properties is possible to produce a selective heating of some areas or components of material, it is known as superheating effect. the intensive microwave heat generation and the different dielectric properties of compounds of cell wall lead to a rapid disruption of extracellular polymer network and residue cells of sludge [13]. however the cell liquor and extracellular organic matter within polymeric network can release into the soluble phase, hereby increase the ratio of accessible and biodegradable component. during the intensive microwave heating the odorous compounds of sludge e.g. volatile fatty acids were reduced too. to summarize, by application of microwave treatment could be achieve a higher flock and cells destruction compared to conventional heating, this effect could be manifested by difference ratio of soluble and total cod and the increased rate of biogas production [14]. but it is had to notice that the temperature control of a microwave pre-treatment process causes some practical difficulties because the conventional thermistors cannot provide accurate temperature measurement, since the local superheating effect within the sample due the interaction of thermistor and thermocouple with electromagnetic field [15]. in the microwave technique widely used infrared thermometer can measure only the surface temperature of sample. by the glass fiber instruments can be measured more exact values of temperature distribution of matters but by a sample with a low moisture content and varying, non homogenous structure, the method is less applicable in practice. 13 materials and methods in our experiments two different sewage sludge were used. the municipal sewage sludge was from an urbanwaste water treatment plant (hódmezővásárhely, hungary). the sludge was the residual solid phase of the biological waste water management technology, the average moisture content was 53.4 w/w%. the industrial sewage sludge was originated from the waste water treatment plant of a local dairy works (sole-mizo ltd., szeged, hungary). in the case of dairy sewage sludge a phyico-chemical waster water technology was applied and the water content of sludge was 58.2 w/w%. the microwave pre-treatments were performed in a labotron 500 (buchner-guyer ag, switzerland) professional microwave equipment, at 2.45 ghz frequency, at 100 to 500 w microwave power. the turntable of microwave equipment compensated for the non-uniform heat distribution. the microwave irradiation time was 10 to 40 minutes. the applied specific microwave power level was 1, 2 and 5 w/g, which was adjusted by the ratio of magnetron power and the quantity of treated sludge. the power of magnetron is changeable continuously 100 to 500 w by toroidal-core transformer, the quantity of sludge was constant 100 g. the disk-form sludge samples were placed invariably in 2 cm layer because of penetration depth of microwave radiation. poly-tetrafluor-ethylene (ptfe) vessels (6 cm internal diameter) were used on account of efficient microwave penetration and absorption. cover was applied to prevent the evaporation during the irradiation. the convective heat-treatment was performed in automatic temperature controlled laboratory heater equipment (medline cm 307, uk) at 95 °c. the surface temperature of sludge an infracam (flir infracam-sd, sweden) was determined after microwave irradiation. chemical oxygen demand (cod) was measured according to the dichromate standard method in cod tests with an et 108 digester and a lovibond pc checkit photometer. the biochemical oxygen demand (bod) measurements were carried out in a respirometric bod meter (bod oxidirect, lovibond, germany), at 20 °c. to ensure the consistency of the results bod microbe capsules (cole parmer, usa) were used for measurements. biodegradability during 5 days (bd5%) was characterized by the following expression: %100 cod bod %db 55 ×= the cumulative biogas production tests were performed in batch mode under mesophilic conditions, at 40 °c for 30 day, in a temperature controlled anaerobic digester with oxitop control type pressure mode measuring system (wtw gmbh, germany). the digesters were inoculated with an acclimated anaerobic sludge from a biogas reactor of municipal wastewater treatment plant (hódmezővásárhely, hungary) in order to eliminate the possible lag-phase of biological degradation process. after inoculation nitrogen gas was flowed through the reactor to prevent exposure to air. for methane determination the measurements were performed parallel in two vessels: one of them contained co2 absorber, the other measured the total gas pressure. the resulting pressure difference is proportional to the co2 concentration; the remaining overpressure is proportional to the methane concentration. the composition of produced biogas also was measured by gas chromatographic and mass spectrometric method (agilent 6890n-5976 gc-ms). the net energy product (nep) of processes with microwave pre-treatments can be calculated by the equation [16]: τ×−×= mmethanecomb pmqnep where nep is the net energy product [j], qcomb is the combustion heat [j/kg] of methane, mmethane the mass of the produced methane [kg], pm the power of microwave magnetron [w], τ the time of microwave irradiation [s]. results and discussion the surface temperature of samples was measured by infracam, and the average temperature and standard deviation were represented in the following table. table 1: the surface temperature of microwave irradiated sludge after treatments surface temperature [°c] mw power level 10 min. 20 min. 30 min. 40 min. 1 w/g 75,7 ± 2,9 83,5 ± 1,8 89,2 ± 1,6 90,2 ± 1,3 2 w/g 79,3 ± 2,2 86,7 ± 1,4 89,6 ± 1,1 91,7 ± 0,7 5 w/g 83,6 ± 0,8 89,1 ± 0,9 90,8 ± 0,3 92,8 ± 0,4 in the first series of our experiments the effect of microwave irradiation on biodegradability of sewage sludge was investigated at different specific microwave power level. besides the specific power level the effect of irradiation time was studied too. the biodegradability of untreated dairy and municipal sewage sludge was 7% and 12% respectively. it was found that without pretreatment either municipal or dairy industrial sludge was resistant to aerobical biological degradation. 0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 mw pre-treatment time [min] b d [% ] 1 w/g 2 w/g 5 w/g convectiv (95°c) figure 1: biodegradability (bd%) of dairy sewage sludge after microwave and convective pre-treatments 14 0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 mw pre-treatm ent tim e [m in] b d [ % ] 1 w/g 2 w/g 5 w/g convectiv (95°c) figure 2: biodegradability (bd%) of municipal sewage sludge after microwaveand convective pre-treatments the low biodegradability of municipal sewage sludge was caused by large-scale degradable organic material removal of previous biological waste water treatment. the residual components, which was concentrated in the sludge, was less degradable or more resistant to microbial or enzymatical degradation. the structure of dairy sludge, formed by interaction of extracellular polymeric substance and applied chemicals, caused less accessible property for biological decomposition. for comparison the convective heat pre-treatment was examined. the convecive treatment at 95 °c caused increasing in biodegradability, but this effect was less effective than pre-treatment at lowest microwave power level. the microwave pre-treatments increased the biodegradability of investigated sludge. microwave irradiation at low power level (1 w/g) had a sligh effect on biodegradability, especially at sludge originated from dairy industry, but the higher microwave power level and enhanced irradiation time seemed to be more efficient. at highest applied power level (5 w/g) a saturation value of biodegradability was observed. in the case of municipal sludge the ratio of biodegradable component was enhanced from 8 % up to 40 % after 30 minutes irradiation at 5 w/g. the same microwave pre-treatment increased the value of bd% to 48 % at dairy sewage sludge. enhancing of biodegradability may be linked to solubilization of organic matter which was indicated by the increased scod/cod ratio, besides the digestion effect of microwave irradiation on cell wall of residual died and alive microorganisms. besides the change of biodegradability the effect of microwave irradiation on anaerobic digestion was investigated, the digestionable was characterized by cumultive methane production, which were depicted on figs 3-4, in the case of pre-treatment at 1 w/g and 5 w/g . similar to aerobical biodegradation the microwave pre-treatment improved the anaerobical decomposation performance and the increased irradiation time enhanced the biogasand methane production of pre-treated sewage sludge related to control. the untreated control samples had very small (15–30 cm3) methane production, but after a 40 minute long, 1 w/g mw pre-treatment enhanced the methane production up to 200 cm3 at municipal sludge and up to 250 cm3 at dairy sludge. the convectie heat-treatment had a substantially smaller effect on anaerobic biodegradation than microwave irradiation since the smaller biogas product. after a 40 minutes heat-treatment at 95 °c a 25% enhancing of biogas product was experienced by both sludge, but these enhancing was significantly smaller than after a 20 minutes microwave irradiation, although the average temperature of microwave iradiated sludge was just about 83 °c. 0 100 200 300 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 digestion time [day] c um ul at iv e m et ha ne p ro du ct io n [m l] 20 min d 40 min d control d 20 min m 40 min m control m figure 3: methane production of sludge after 1 w/g microwave pre-treatment (d-dairy sewage sludge, m-municipal sewage sludge) the applied microwave treatment both given sludge could decreased the lag-phase period of digestioning process. the higher specific microwave power caused higher increasing in the methane production and higher decreasing in the period of lag-phase. 0 100 200 300 400 500 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 digestion time [day] c u m ul at iv e m et ha ne p ro du ct io n [m l] 20 min d 40 min d control d 20 min m 40 min m control m figure 4: methane production of sludge after microwave pre-treatment at 5 w/g (d-dairy sewage sludge, m-municipal sewage sludge) enhancing of microwave power level to 5 w/g resulted an increasing in the methane production 500 cm3 by 40 minutes pre-treatment at municipal sludge. approximately the same biogas yield was achieved by 5 w/g specific mw level at 40 minute long treatment at dairy sludge as it was achived with a 20 minute long mw treatment at municipal sludge. to a first approximation a longer process time and a higher microwave power level seemed to be optimal. 15 after all not only the biogas production itself, but the other energetical parameters must be take into consideration. by assessing the energy of extra-methane produced and calculation of energy requirements of microwave pre-treatments the energy balance of mw enhanced treatment was investigated, and the efficiency of process was characterized by net energy prouction (nep). -18000 -15000 -12000 -9000 -6000 -3000 0 3000 6000 control conv ectiv e (95°c, 40 min) 1 w/g 20 min w/g 40 min 2 w/g 10 min 2 w/g 40min 5 w/g 10 min 5 w/g 20 min δ e [ j/ g ] figure 5: energy balance of pretreatments of dairy sewage sludge -12000 -10000 -8000 -6000 -4000 -2000 0 2000 4000 6000 control conv ectiv e (95°c, 40 min) 1 w/g 20 min w/g 40 min 2 w/g 10 min 2 w/g 40min 5 w/g 10 min 5 w/g 20 min δ e [ j/ g ] figure 6: energy balance ofpretreatments of municipal sewage sludge in spite of large energy demand of microwave treatments, there is optimal specific microwave power which produce positive energy balance. in comparison with optimal parameters of methane production different results can be obtained by calculate the energy balance of the treatments. with the exception of the highest microwave power level (5 w/g) the invested microwave energy was balanced by extra methane energy and moreover in the case of dairy sewage sludge at a 40 minute long treatment at 1 and 2 w/g specific power level and in the case of municipal sewage sludge also 40 minute long duration of irradiation of 1 w/g specific power level was beneficial compared to control sample and conventional convective heat-treated sample. therefore, at the different born sludge investigated the lower specific microwave power level used were more advantageous regarding the energy efficiency of sludge pre-treatments by microwave irradiation. conclusion the application of microwave irradiation has advantages in sludge treatment processes. the microwave pretreatments can enhance more efficiently the aerobical biodegradability and biogas yield than the convective heat pre-treatments. the efficiency of treatments is dependent on the applied specific microwave power level and the time of irradiation. our results showed that despite of the quantity of produced biogas the lower specific microwave power level usage could be recommended from energetically aspect. acknowledgements this work was supported by the hungarian national office of research and technology (nkth) and the agency for research fund management and research exploitation (kpi) under contract no. ret-07/2005, and gvop 3.2.1.2004-04. 0252/3.0 project. references 1. bougrier c., delgenes j. p., carrere h.: chemical engineering journal 139 (2008) 236-244 2. banik s., bandyopadhay s., ganguly s.: bioresource technology 87 (2003) 155-159 3. gavala h. n., yenal u., skiadas i. v. westerman p., ahring b. k.: water research 37 (2003) 5461-4572 4. watenabe h., kitamure t., ochi s., ortega s., ozaki m.: water science technology 36 (1997) 239-246 5. eskicioglu c., kennedy k. j., droste r. l.: water research 40 (2006) 3725-3736 6. wang q., kuninobu m., kakimoto k., ogawa h., kato y.: bioresource technology 68 (1999) 309-313 7. stasta, p., boran, j., bebar, l., stehlik, p., oral, j.: applied thermal engineering 4 (2005) 241-250 8. bougrier c., delgenes j. p., carrere h.: process safety and environmental protection 84(b4) (2006) 280-284 9. wojciechowska e.: water research 39 (2005) 4749-4754 10. neyens e., baeyens j.: journal of hazardous materials b98 (2003) 51-67 11. gabriel, c., gabriel, s., grant, e., halstead, b., mingos, d.: chemical society reviews 27 (1998) 213-223 12. jones, d. a., lelyveld, t. p., mavrofidis, s. d., kingman, s. w., miles, n. j.: resources, conservation and recycling (2002) 75-90 16 13. eskicioglu c., terzian n., kennedy k. j., droste r. l., hamoda m.: water research 41 (2007) 2457-2466 14. climent m., ferrer i., baeza m., artola a., vazquez f., font.: chemical engineering journal 133 (2007) 335-342 15. veshetti, e., maresca, d., santarsiero, a., ottaviani, m.: microchemical journal 59 (1998) 246-257 16. beszédes s., kertész sz., lászló zs., géczi g., hodúr c., szabó g.: proceedings of 5th international congress on food technology (2007) vol. 3. 441-446 conferenceproceedtings hungarian journal of tindustrial chemistry veszprem vol. 2. pp. 59· 64 (2000) description of a pilot plant for the co-composting of the solid residue and wastewaters from the olive oil industry a. g. vlyssides, a.a zorpas*, p.k. karlis and g.a. zorpas (national technical university of athens, department of chemical engineering, 9 heroon polytechniou st., zographou athens, g-15700, greece) this paper was presented at the second international conference on environmental engineering, university of veszprem, veszprem, hungary, may 29june 5, 1999 the co-composting of the solid residue and wastewater from the olive oil production process have been studied as a new method fo~ the treatm~nt of wastewater containing high organic and toxic pollutants. the experimental results for a dem?nstrat10n plant usmg solid residue from olive extraction as bulking material and olive oil processing effluents as continuously fed wastewater are reported. composting temperature was controlled between 45 and 65 °c by air supply and the wastewater addition was fed mainly in order to keep the moisture in the range of 45 to 60% and secondary to replace the carbon substrate. during twenty three days of operation in the thermophilic region, the system was fed with 26~ m3 wastewater in total, which means an average rate of 11.4 m3 day"1 wastewater or 2.9 kg wastewater per kg solid residue. then followed a three months stabilisation period in the mesophilic region until the final product reached ambient temperature. keywords: composting; solid waste residue; oil olive industry introduction olive oil extraction is among the most traditional agricultural industries in greece and it has always been, and is still of primary importance for the national economy, as greece has a share of 15% of world production [1]. the annual olive oii production is in the range of 350.000 ~ 400.000 tons per year resulting in the generation of about 1.500.000 tons of olive mill wastewater, which causes serious environmental problems, mainly due to its high organic content. the quantity and the physico-chemical characteristics of olive mills wastewater, commonly called 'vegetation water', depends on the place, age of growth, harvesting season, yearly changes, olive variety, extraction method, etc. the organic matter of vegetation water contains mainly polyphenols, carbohydrates, polysaccharides, sugars, nitrocompounds, polyalcohols, fats and oil, substances generally worth recovering. a number of vegetation water treatment methods have recently been employed, especially in the mediterranean area, and these can be divided into physico-chemical and biological methods. * author to whom correspondence should be addressed. the physico-chemical methods have the disadvantages of high cost and low efficiency: lime precipitation results in 40% reduction of the organic matter but production of large quantities of sludges. moreover, the effluents after precipitation as well as the chemical-organic sludges that are produced, have all the toxicity of the ii:ritial vegetation water leading to serious disposal problems [2]; reverse osmosis has over 90% efficiency in removing organic matter, but on the other hand high operating cost and sludge disposal problems [2]; incineration (with or without concentration) is reliable but expensive, and complicated by high energy demand and emission of air pollutants; lagooning as a physical method for water evaporation, since a very · limited biological degradation takes place [31 has significant cost disadvantages due to land requirements and the necessity for taking special measures to protect public health [4]. biological methods have certain clear benefits due to their potential for the utilisation of by~products. (compost for fertilising, biogas for energy production, natural colouring substances, proteins for cattle feed enrichment): protein production has low fixed costs but requires additional treatment methods due to the low 60 table 1 composition of the solid residue characteristics total solids (ts), % total carbon content, % of ts total kjeldahl nitrogen, % of ts total phosphorous as p20 5, % of ts fats and oils, % of ts total sugars, % of ts cellulose, % of ts hemicellulose, % of ts ash, %ofts bther extraction substan<;es, % of ts lignin, % of ts potassium as k20, % of ts calcium content, % of ts c/nratio cip ratio specific weight, g cm-3 porosity,% value 86.00 ±3.33 55.45 ±4.48 1.06±0.015 0.11 ±0.008 1.8 ±0.69 2.07±0.025 37.27 ± 0.438 16.57 ± 0.942 3.65 ±0.225 8.38 ±o.q35 21.9 ±0.45 0.83 ±0.07 0.82±0.092 52.14±5.2 1123.79 ± 147 1.09 ±0.02 52.4 ± 5.5 table 2 composition of the vegetation water characteristics total solids (ts), % total volatile solids,% ofts total carbon content, % of ts total kjeldahl nitrogen, % ofts total phosphorous as p20s, % ofts ph bod5,gdm-3 cod,gdm-3 ash, %ofts c/nratio c/pratio specific weight, g cm~3 value 6.33 ± 1.81 90.36 ±3.31 62.71 ± 16.27 1.2 ± 0.173 0.84 ± 0.158 5.00 ± 1 55± 35 130 ± 40 9.64 ± 3.31 53.57 ± 5.4 75 ± 9.8 1.048 ± 0.033 initial removal of organic matter (about 50%}; &naerobic digestion has the benefit of energy production but also relatively low efficiency (80%) compared to the high capital cost of the hightechnology installations and equipment [5,6]; co-composting is the optimum method from the environmental ·point of view as the organic matter is totally recovered. furthermore it has low fixed cost and the final product could be marketable as a highquality soil conditioner [7]. for the present work a co-composting demonstration plant was designed and constructed in order to treat the wastewater from an olive oil extraction factory. the design of this plant was based on laboratory scale results obtained previously [7]. the results from the operation of this plant are presented in this work. the fundamental principle of a co-composting system is the biodegradation of the organic matter through exothermic aerobic bioreactions which take place in the thermophilic region with the simultaneous evaporation of the moisture of the wastewater due to the release of thermal energy [8}. in application to wastes from olive oil extraction plants, the critical parameters for the growth of microorganisms and bioreactions are the oxygen demand, the moisture (which must be in the range of 40 tel 60%) the temperature (which must be retained between 45 and 65°c; optimum 60°c) and the carbon/nitrogen (c/n) ratio (which must be kept below 30/1). the solid residue from the olive oil extraction process is used as substrate (bulking material), the vegetation water as supplier of moisture, carbon and nutrients. air is supplied for cooling and oxygen needs. in addition, excess nitrogen, in form of urea, is provided for the system. methods plant description and operation based on the above mentioned principles a wastewater treatment plant was constructed in kouisouras, crete, greece, in order to handle the effluents from an olive oil factory with 250-300 t annual oil production and 10001200 t wastewater. the plant was operated simultaneously with the olive oil factory for 120 days, the common olive oil extraction period in greece, between september 1992 and january 1993. figs. i and 2 illustrate the flow diagram of the plant, which consisted of: an aerobic bioreactor of 18m length,· 6m width and 2.2m height (195m3 active volume) with an agitation system of a travelling bridge with a helical type agitator of 0.90m blade diameter. an aeration system of three fans and nine diffusion pipes installed over the bottom of the bioreactor. a wastewater storage tank of 80 m3 active volume and two dosing pumps. a nutrient preparation and dosing unit, including a preparation tank eqnipped with a mechanical agitator and two dosing pumps. a programmable logical controller {plc) for the control of the plant operation and data collection. the steps followed in the successive periods are described below. start-up period at the start-up of the plant, a quantity of about 91.5 t solid residue, 119 t vegetation water and 1600kg urea (as nutrient source) were fed into the bioreactor. the solid residue was agitated and sprinkled with the vegetation water and urea in order to achieve a· homogenous mixture in the bioreactor. the compositions of the solid residue and vegetation water are reported in tables 1 and 2 respectively. these values were obtained from the analysis of five samples of solid residue and vegetation water and average concentrations are reported. from the analysis, it was indicated that vegetation water did not contain enough nitrogen and so urea was added to cover the needs for this particular nutrient. co-composting period this period got under way when the temperature in the bioreactor came into the thermophilic region due to the 61 fig.] flow diagram of the plant. a: wastewater feeding; b: feed storag~ tank; c: co-composti,ng bioreactor; d: urea feeding system; e:agitator; f: air feeding fans; g: roofto prevent access of rainwater; h:mono-pumpfor wastewater dossing; i: proportional pump feeding of urea solution; k:computer for controlling and data collection; l :travelling ridge for the agitator; m: motors; tc: temperature controller 18.0 m ---,--------fig.2 sectional plan of the bioreactor. c : co-composting bioreactor; e: agitator; f: air feeding fans; l:travelling bridge for the agitator;_m: motors; ----·-······ ··-·-... agitator running; air line increase of the bioreaction rate. during the thermophilic period, oxygen, vegetation water and nutrients were provided for the system. the compost was mixed by a travelling helical agitator as shown in fig.2. one complete mixing period of total bioreactor content was achieved within two hours. the bioreactor was divided into three areas of 6x6 m. in each area one fan and three diffusing pipes were installed (see fig.2). the travelling bridge, with velocity 1 m min "1, entered each area every 20 min. a temperature control system, fixed on the travelling bridge, controlled the operation of each fan in order to maintain the temperature about 60 °c, according to the following principle: minimum air flow (4.6 m3 pert of compost) was provided at low temperature (<30 oq and maximal air flow (56 m3 per t of compost) was provided at high temperature (>60 °c). the minimum airflow should have corresponded to the minimum oxygen demand for the microorganisms and the maximal airflow to meet the needs of air supply for cooling purposes (9]. the vegetation water was sprinkled on the bioreactor surface in the area of agitation (imaginary cylinder) in quantities inversely proportional to the temperature. the feeding rate was calibrated by the following linear equation according to vlyssides et al. (7]: q = 2.228 0.034 t (1) fl 3 h-1 t. where q is the vegetation water ow rate, m ; is the temperature, oc with boundary conditions: q = 1.2 for t:o;30 oc and q = 0 for ~65 oc. urea (15% solution) was fed simultaneously with the vegetation water at a steady rate of 1.34 kg urea per m3 of vegetation water. the air, vegetation water and urea feeding processes were performed automatically and controlled by the plc. stabilisation period after the thermophilic period, in which the organic material was biodegraded, the final product remained in the bioreactor, without any addition of infiuents. this stabilisation step was necessary in order to assure that the compost could be environmentally safe after its disposal the stabilisation period took place in the mesophilic region and it was terminated after three months, when the temperature dropped and reached ambient values. 62 70 60 50 40 30 o tempel>ture pc} --q-m o:is!ws (i; } 20 w~~~~~~~~~-r~~~~~y 10 15 20 25 deys fig 3 temperature and moisture changes during composting 9 days fig.s ph during composting methods of analysis during the plant operation, especially the composting period to which emphasis is given in this work, daily samplings and analyses were performed. every day 36 different core samples of loog weight each were taken from various places and depths of the bioreactor. every sample was homogenised before analysis. the sample moisture was measured according to standard methods [10] and the evaporated water was calculated by mass balance. total organic nitrogen was determined by a macro-kjeldahl method . according [11). total phosphorous was determined according to the chapman method [12]. total organic carbon was determined according to higgins et al. [13]. the ph was determined by the method chang and hudson [14). results and discussion temperature and moisture as shown in fig.3 the temperature rapidly increased to 63°c after 36 hours from the start-up and remained above 60°c (control set point) for 9 days. it was controlled by the air supply for which the flow rate is shown in fig. 4. this indicates an insufficiency of the air supply for cooling the system and the reasons for this are discussed later. other, uncontrolled, parameters that were affecting the temperature were the periodic mixing (one minute mixing time for each point per two hours) of the bulking material, and the wastewater feeding. after 2l days the temperature dropped to 36°c, which meant that the system was operating in the mesophilic region and the bioreactions rate was reduced as shown by the limiting carbon content. it was decided that the composting period was finish~d atler 23 days, when the temperature dropped below 35 c. as was expected the moisture continuously decreased during the tirst ten days unijl it stabilised in 12 3 4 56 7 8 91011121314151617181920212223 fig.4 air flow during the composting 1 2 3 ~ 5 6 7 8 9 d ll ~ d y 6 d ll e b ~ill~~ cl¥; fig.6 water balance during composting the range of 48-52% (fig.3). after the 20th day, the moisture started to increase due to the low energy production related to the low biodegradation rate. as shown in fig.4 the air feeding fluctuated during the first 9 days while the following days, after about 11 days, the air feeding stabilised near to 20000 jtrl day·1 due to the temperature drop. ph ph is a parameter, which greatly affects the composting process. the optimum ph values are 6-7.5 for bacterial development, while fungi prefer an environment in the range of 5.5-8.0 [15]. usually during composting the ph values are initially low because of volatile acids production, then the ph increases and in the final stage of composting a decrease in the ph is expected. this pattern was not followed in the present experiments (fig.5) in the final stage when the ph gradually increased because of excess ammonia production from biodegradation of urea. water balance as shown in fig.6, the water that entered the composting system by wastewater feeding was not in balance with the evaporated water over the entire period. during the first ten days the water evaporation was much higher than the rate of sprinkling of wastewater and the following ten days the sprinkled water rate was higher than the evaporated one, so the overall water balance was not kept stable during the process. it would be difficult to achieve a stable water balance, since there is a need for moisture control by using an on-line moisture probe, which is generally not available in practice. the stabilisation of the water and carbon balance is the main key for successful continuos carbon content ~ m ~ ~ ~ ~ m ~ ~ m ~ ~ ~-~-~nc\1 deys fig. 7 total solids, volatile matter and carbon content changes during composting isis fig.9 active bioreactor volume during composting co-composting process [7], and this was the main target duting the present process. at the end of the composting period, the system had consumed 263 m3 wastewater, which was equal to an average rate of 11.4 m3 day·1, corresponding finally to 2.9 kg wastewater per kg solid residue. these figures indicate that in order to treat the total amount of the wastewater that is produced in the plant (about 1200 m3 annually), four to five similar plants would be required or the plant must be used for successive batches of waste solids. carbon content and carbon balance fig. 7 shows the changes in total carbon content, of solids and liquid, during composting. the daily carbon dioxide that was produced during the composting was calculated by the following relation (ccoz)t == (c)t-i (c)t + cw.w. · cfw.wjt (2) where ( c c02) 1 is the total carbon content of coz produced at day t, kg; ( c)1_1 total carbon content of the bioreactor at a day before day t kg (data from fig.l) (c)r total carbon content of the bioreactor at day t, kg (data from fig.l); cww carbon content of wastewater, kg m· 3 (table i); cfww)r daily flow rate of wastewater at day t, m3 (data from fig.6). the carbon balance is shown in fig.8 and it was stable only between the 13th and 20th day of composting. a significant amount of the solid residue was consumed during the first ten days of the composting process as was observed by the reduction of the volume of the bulking material as shown in fig.9. the minimisation of residue consumption would be beneficial for the wastewater treatment process. 75 25 0~~~~==~~~~~~ l23456789dll~ekbbybhidz~~ devs fig.8 carbon balance during composting 35 800 • 30 700 25 600 500 ~ 20 400 ~ 15 300 10 200 100 10 15 20 25 days fig. i 0 ratio of carbon/nitrogen and carbon/phosphorous variation during composting carbon/nitrogen and carbon/phosphorous 63 as shown in fig. i 0 the c/n ratio steadily decreased due to the continuous urea inflow as well as wastewater feeding. the excess of nitrogen showed that the urea addition was not necessary. this could not be foreseen because it was not known at the beginning how much wastewater was going to be consumed during the process. the c/p ratio rapidly decreased during the first 10 days, when the vegetation water inflow was maximal and afterwards the ratio stabilised at about 80/1. conclusions the plant operated successfully with respect to the wastewater consumption without any hazardous effects to the enviromnent. furthermore, the general design of the plant as well as the selection and the quality of equipment were also successful. . . the short duration of the co-compostmg penod (23 days) with 263 m3 vegetation water consumption indicates that the total wastewater effluent from the particular factory (1200 m3) coul~ be treat~d in five similar successive phases of operatton. for th1s purpose, the content of the bioreactor, after the end of thermophilic operation, should be transferred out into a static pile for mesophilic stabilisation in order to start a new phase of thermophilic treatment. it should be stressed that the solid waste required to treat the volume of wastewater produced is sufficient due to the fact that the waste production rate from the olive oil mills is about 1 t of solids per 3 m3 of wastewater. the main issues, which require more investigation and optimisation, are given below: . " . the production of high temperatures (>60 c) during the first 9 days indicates apotential 64 wastewater loading increase, leading to possible efficiency improvement. thus the modification of eq. ( 1) might be advisable. the air feeding process was rather unsuccessful for cooling the bioreactor content at high temperatures. as previously reported the fans operation was controlled by temperature measurements which were taken at one spot of each bioreactor area every 20 minutes, which did not represent the mean area temperature. the optimum solution for this problem would be the instailation of additional temperature probes across the travelling bridge in order to obtain an accurate profile of the real temperature conditions. a possible explanation for the low cooling efficiency could be attributed to the nonhomogeneous air distribution in the bioreactor, due to the high solids concentration (formation of air pathway channels). the accumulation of nitrogen and the final high ph in the system indicates that an excess urea feed was provided. therefore, the application of a flexible and dynamic feeding control formula based on daily analyses is required. references 1. michelakis n. olive oil processing wastewaters managment. proceedings of futernational conference in olive oil processing wastewater treatment methods, hania, crete, greece, 1991 2. fiestas ros a.j.: reuse ·and complete treatment of vegetable water: current situation and prospects in spain. proceedings of international conference in olive oil processing wastewater treatment methods, hania, crete, greece, 1991 3. vlyssides a., loizidou m., bouranis d.l., and karvouni g.: journal, 1995, paper in preparation 4. marinos e.: lagooning concentration of olive oil processing wastewaters. proceedings of international conference in olive oil processing wastewater treatment methods, hania, crete, greece, 1991 5. boar! g., brunetti a., passino r. and rozzi a.: agricultural wastes, 1984, 10, 161-175 6. georgacakis d., kyritsis s., manios b. and vlyssides a.: economic optimization of energy production from olive oil wastewater. proceedings of the ltit. conference on energy from biomass, brescia, italy, 1986 7. vlyssides a., parlavantza m. and balis k.: cocomposting as a system for handling of liquid wastes from olive oil mills. proceedings of the futernational conference in composting, athens, greece, 1989 8. jewell j.w. and kabrick m.r.: j. w.p.c.f, 1980, 52, 3, 512-523 9. f!nstein m.s.: biocycle, 1980,2125-7 10. american public health association (apha), standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater, 17th edn, 1989 11. jackson m.l.: soil chemical analysis. prentice-hall inc., 1962 12. charman h.d. and pratt p.f.: methods of analysis for soils, plants and waters. univ. ofcallifornia, 1961) 13. higgins a.j., kaplovsky a.j. and hunter j.v.: j. w.p.c.f., 1982, 54, 5, 466-473 14. chang y. and hudson h.j.: trans.br.mycol.soc., 1967, 50(4) 649-666 15. kapetanios g.e., loizidou m. and valkanas g. bioresource technology, 1993, 44, 13-16 page 65 page 66 page 67 page 68 page 69 page 70 microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 37(2) pp. 131-137 (2009) preparation and characterization of zno and tio2 sol-gel thin films deposited by dip coating r. baranyai, á. detrich, e. volentiru, z. hórvölgyi department of physical chemistry and materials science, budapest university of technology and economics 1111 budapest, budafoki út 6-8., building f, staircase 1, high ground floor, centre for colloid chemistry, hungary e-mail: zhorvolgyi@mail.bme.hu zno and tio2 thin films were prepared by sol-gel technique. dip coating was applied for film deposition and withdrawal velocity was varied in order to control the film thickness. the deposited films were annealed to remove additives and obtain oxide layers. large silicon and glass substrates were coated with homogeneous, reflective semiconductor layers of different refractive index values. uv-vis spectroscopy and scanning angle reflectometry measurements were performed to determine refractive index and thickness values. the using of different stabilizers for zno precursor sol preparation resulted in different layer thicknesses and very different response to the varying of the withdrawal speed. according to photoluminescence measurements zno films are of good crystallinity. thicknesses of deposited films were found to be in the range of 6-200 nm. tio2 coatings show strong interference colours due to their high refractive index. keywords: zno, tio2, sol-gel coating, scanning angle reflectometry, uv-vis spectroscopyintroduction nanostructured wide gap semiconductors emerged in the last decade and many researchers [1, 2, 3, 4] began to pay attention to unique properties of these materials. oxide semiconductor thin films, aerogels and nanocrystals can be used in photonic devices, drug delivery, sensors, solar cells, wastewater treatment etc. among these promising materials zno and tio2 are the most versatile ones, since their non-toxicity, stability and ease to prepare. zno has been recently used in uv leds as light emitting material [5, 6] and in solar cells as transparent conductive oxide [7, 8], while tio2 plays the basic role as electron acceptor in the grätzel cell [9, 10], and also used as antimicrobal and self-cleaning coating [11] because of its photocatalytical property [12, 13, 14]. thin films of zno and tio2 can be deposited by many methods, e.g. chemical bath deposition [15, 16], spray pyrolysis [17, 18], rf magnetron sputtering [19, 20]. among them sol-gel technique [21, 22] and dip coating provide low-cost deposition method which can be applied in large scale production and allows the possibility to tailor the film properties. refractive index and thickness of thin films used in optical devices have to be adequately controlled. determining these parameters is of great importance in many optical applications [23, 24] and particularly in the semiconductor industry [25, 26]. ellipsometry provides means to perform fast and non-destructive measurements [27, 28] on thin films however for very thin coatings (e. g. film with thickness below 100 nm, nanoparticulated layers and monomolecular coatings) scanning angle reflectometry (sar) [29, 30, 31] can be an other appropriate choice. this method possesses the capability to determine those important parameters very precisely since it operates with polarized monochromatic light and measurements are usually performed in angle range around the brewster angle of the substrate/air interface providing good sensitivity due to the lack of reflected light from the substrate. sar also can be used for measurement of layers on transparent substrates. our investigation focused on the preparation of oxide semiconductor coatings and adjusting their thicknesses and refractive indices. deposition method and starting precursor sol have obvious influence on sol-gel film properties. several additives such as monoethanolamine [32], triethanolamine [33] and acetic acid [34] are used for zno precursor sol preparation to stabilise the sol and control the hydrolysis. in this work two different zno precursor sols were prepared and thin films were deposited from each sol by dip coating using different withdrawal velocities. the influence of chemical composition of precursor sols on the optical properties and thickness of mono and multilayered coatings were investigated by optical methods. since tio2 possesses many properties similar to zno our investigation was extended to tio2 thin films. tio2 precursor sol was prepared and tio2 films were deposited and characterized on the same way as zno films. 132 experimental details preparation of precursor sols different zno precursor sols were prepared using polyvinylpyrrolidone (pvp) [35] or diethanolamine (dea) [36] as stabiliser. in the former case 1.098 g zinc acetate dihydrate (a.c.s. reagent, 98+%, sigmaaldrich) was added to 50.0 ml ethanol (a. r. >99.7%, reanal). under vigorous stirring 0.450 ml distilled water (conductivity: 18.2 ms/cm, purified with millipore simplicity 185 filtration system) was added drop by drop to the solution in order to promote the hydrolysis. after 15 minutes 2.000 g pvp k90 (m.w. 360000, fluka) was added to the solution in small portions. the sol became clear after 20 minutes. the sol was aged for 24 hours under continuous stirring at room temperature then it was labelled as pvp-zno and was stored in the dark. precursor sol containing diethanolamine was prepared by dissolving 5.488 g zinc acetate dihydrate in 50 ml ethanol. after 30 minutes of vigorous stirring 2.4 ml dea (for synthesis, ≥98%, merck) was added dropwise to the solution. in a few minutes after adding dea the solution became clear. it was aged for 24 hours under continuous stirring at room temperature before film deposition. the sol was labelled as dea-zno and was kept in the dark. in order to obtain tio2 precursor sol [37], 11.74 ml tetrabuthyl orthotitanate (purum, ≥97.0%, fluka) was dissolved in 55.40 ml ethanol under continuous stirring at room temperature. it was followed by addition of 65% hno3 (rpe, carlo elba) to adjust the ph of the sol to ~1.5. then 0.453 ml distilled water was added to the solution then it was stirred with 400 rpm. at 60 °c for 2 hours before film coating. precursor sols were stored in closed containers to prevent evaporation. zno sols can be used for film coating even after 2 months, but tio2 sol showed slow gelation resulting in solidification in two weeks. deposition of thin films thin films from different precursor sols were deposited by dip coating (dip coater, mfa, hungary). this equipment provides withdrawal velocities between 0.1–18.0 cm/min. glass microscope slides (menzel-gläser, 76×26 mm, refractive index: 1.517) were used as substrates for purposes of sar and spectroscopy measurements. thin films for photoluminescence investigations were coated onto si (100) substrates. prior to dip coating all substrates were cleaned consecutively with detergent, cc. hno3, distilled water and ethanol. after cleaning they were dried in dust free environment. after preliminary tests a range of withdrawal velocities were applied, films from pvp-zno sol were deposited with rates of 1, 4, 8 and 12 cm/min, while films from dea-zno and tio2 sols were prepared using 12, 15 and 18 cm/min withdrawal velocities. all films were deposited from freshly prepared precursor sols. after coating pvp-zno films were dried at room temperature for 5 min then annealed at 500 °c for 1 h. tio2 films also were dried at room temperature for 5 min then treated at 450 °c for 30 min. dea-zno films were placed into hot (250 °c) furnace immediately after coating and annealed at 500 °c for 1 h. all films were heated up with 5 °c/min heating rate. investigation methods refractive indices and thicknesses of thin films were determined by uv-vis spectroscopy and scanning angle reflecometry (homemade sar device, he-ne laser, wavelength: 632.8 nm, power: 17 mw, melles-griot). measured reflectance curves were smoothed before evaluating to eliminate the effect of interference. refractive index and thickness values were obtained by fitting simulated reflectance functions [38]. uv-vis spectroscopy measurements were performed by agilent 8453 spectrophotometer. crystalline quality was investigated with photoluminescence measurements performed by perkin elmer ls50b fluorimeter. results and discussion the resulted thin films were found to be transparent, visually homogeneous and reflective as can be seen in fig 1. figure 1: smooth and reflective surface of tio2 film on a piece of 3” si wafer uv-vis transmittance spectra of pvp-zno films prepared with different withdrawal speeds are shown in fig. 2. decrease of transmittance around 380 nm (transmittance edge) is related to the band gap of zno. transmittance around this wavelength decreases with increasing velocities indicating increase of thickness of the thin film. theoretically, in case of ideal fluids the thickness of fluid film stacked onto the substrate increases with ascendent velocity [39]. therefore the 133 growing tendency of film thicknesses is expected for films prepared with increasing velocities. uv-vis spectra seem to confirm our expectation. for further confirmation sar measurements were performed. they are shown in fig. 3. results can be found in table 1. thickness values grow with increasing velocities and refractive index values are lower in comparison to one of the substrate except for film prepared with 1 cm/min. low refractive indices can be attributed to interstices formed due to the burnout of the polymer (pvp) during annealing. low refractive indices resulted in faint antireflection effect. transmittance maxima corresponding to this effect can be recognized in spectra of films prepared with rates of 8 and 12 cm/min, however the interference is not severe enough for the correct quantitative analysis. figure 2: transmittance spectra of pvp-zno films prepared with different withdrawal velocities figure 3: result of sar measurements on pvp-zno films prepared with different withdrawal velocities table 1: results of sar measurements on pvp-zno films withdrawal velocity refractive index thickness 1 cm/min 1.684 6.2 nm 4 cm/min 1.338 16.7 nm 8 cm/min 1.420 45.4 nm 12 cm/min 1.404 72.9 nm effect of varying withdrawal speed on film thickness was also studied for films prepared from dea-zno and tio2 precursor sols. in both cases it was found that those precursor sols are not appropriate for the preparation of films at velocities below ~10 cm/min. films prepared with lower velocities were inhomogeneous, which might be caused by contraction of thin fluid film before gelation. therefore films were deposited at higher velocities. withdrawal speed did not influence significantly the light transmittance of dea-zno films. transmittance at 380 nm, as can be seen in fig. 4, only decreases few percents with growing velocity, indicating only slight increase of film thickness. probably because of material properties of that precursor sol the differences between applied speeds are too small to observe notable change in film thickness. for preparation of multilayered films 15 cm/min speed was applied. figure 4: transmittance spectra of dea-zno films prepared with different withdrawal velocities dea-zno films containing 1, 2 and 3 layers were prepared. heat treatment was repeated and uv-vis as well as sar measurements were performed after deposition of each layer. measured spectra and reflectance curves are shown in figs. 4 and 5, respectively. transmittance spectra of films containing two and three layers show interference extrema, hence refractive indices and film thicknesses can be calculated by analyzing the positions of extrema [40]. results can be found in table 2. since transmittance of the threelayered film at the maxima is higher than transmittance of the substrate (~92%), this film is thought to be optically inhomogeneous [41] and its refractive index should decrease towards the outer layer. this phenomenon can be caused by consecutive annealing steps: the inner layer was treated at high temperature three times, while the outer one just once. therefore the inner parts of the film can be denser and possess higher refractive index. to confirm these results, sar measurements were performed. as can be seen in table 2 values obtained by applying different measurement methods are in reasonable agreement for the two layered film, but there is notable difference between refractive index values calculated from uv-vis and sar measurements in case of the three-layered film. this deviation is probably caused by the aforementioned refractive index inhomogeneity of that film. these refractive index values 134 are only reported as rough estimation. this phenomenon must be subjected to further investigations and analysis. figure 5: transmittance spectra of dea-zno films containing 1, 2 and 3 layers figure 6: results of sar measurements on dea-zno films containing 1, 2 and 3 layers in case of tio2 thin films transmittance spectra show interference extrema due to high refractive index of the films. (refractive index of anatase (rutile) is 2.52 (2.72) [42], while bulk zno possesses refractive index of 2.08. [43]) therefore refractive indices and film thicknesses were calculated by analyzing positions of interference extrema. transmittance spectra of tio2 films deposited at different withdrawal velocities are shown in fig. 7. as can be seen in table 3 film thicknesses rise with ascendent velocity. refractive index values show slight decrease. much like in the case of zno, tio2 films containing 1, 2 and 3 layers were prepared and examined. transmittance spectra and measured reflectance curves are reported in figs. 8 and 9, respectively. as can be seen in table 3, film thickness can be risen up to ~200 nm by repeating layer deposition three times. on the three-layered film there was no sar measurement performed, since it was too thick to obtain precise results. values obtained by different methods are in reasonable agreement. no sign of optical inhomogeneity could be observed. table 2: results of sar and uv-vis spectroscopy on multilayered dea-zno films nr. of layers thickness (sar) thickness (uv-vis) 1 27.2 nm 2 88.0 nm 74.8 nm 3 129.3 nm 136.9 nm nr. of layers refractive index (sar) refractive index (uv-vis) 1 1.653 2 1.719 1.725 3 2.278 1.724 figure 7: transmittance spectra of tio2 film prepared with different withdrawal velocities table 3: results of sar measurements and uv-vis spectroscopy on tio2 films withdrawal velocity refractive index thickness 12 cm/min 2.073 57.0 nm 15 cm/min 2.044 65.9 nm 18 cm/min 2.023 79.6 nm nr. of layers thickness (sar) thickness (uv-vis) 1 60.6 nm 58.5 nm 2 133.9 nm 128.7 nm 3 201.6 nm nr. of layers refractive index (sar) refractive index (uv-vis) 1 1.994 2.073 2 1.978 1.998 3 2.079 135 figure 8: transmittance spectra of tio2 films containing 1, 2 and 3 layers figure 9: results of sar measurements on tio2 films containing 1 and 2 layers films prepared from the same sol, under the same conditions were found to be highly uniform. uv-vis measurements were performed for comparison. according to our estimation thin films can be prepared with max. 2% standard deviation of average thickness. sol-gel zno thin films generally consist of nanosized wurtzite crystals. for comparison of crystalline quality of the dea-zno and the pvp-zno films photoluminescence measurements were performed. excitation wavelength was 310 nm; spectra were recorded using a 350 nm cut-off filter. normalized pl spectra are displayed in fig. 10. both samples showed strong violet emission peak at 386 nm, indicating good crystallinity. this peak is related to band edge emission [44]. in the pl spectrum of dea-zno a broad band centered at ~650 nm can be observed, which is related to carrier recombination due to defects, possibly interstitial oxygen ions [45]. the defect-related orange band is absent in the pl spectrum of pvp-zno, however a violet-blue peak is observable around ~430 nm, which can be ascribed to zinc-related defects [46].therefore we can draw the conclusion, that different stabilisers for sol preparation result in diverse defect structures of zno thin films. figure 10: photoluminescence spectra of dea-zno and pvp-zno films conclusions zno thin films were prepared from precursor sols containing diethanolamine or polyvinylpyrrolidone as stabiliser. effect of varying withdrawal speed on refractive index and film thickness values were studied by means of uv-vis spectroscopy and scanning angle reflectometry. thicknesses of zno-pvp films were found to be in range of 6–74 nm, depending on the withdrawal speed. refractive indices are low, indicating porous films and resulting in antireflection effect. withdrawal speed seems to provide good control over thickness of pvp-zno layers in contrast with dea-zno layers. in latter case the speed does not seem to possess severe influence on film thickness. tio2 thin films were also prepared at different withdrawal velocities and their thicknesses were found to be in the range of 43–80 nm depending on velocity. multilayered dea-zno and tio2 films were prepared; hence film thickness could be elevated up to ~130 nm in case of zno films and up to ~200 nm in case of tio2 films. multilayered zno was found to be of in-depth optical inhomogeneity. photoluminescence measurements revealed good crystalline quality and diverse defect structures of films prepared from different precursor sols. it is apparent that refractive index and film thickness can be properly tailored by using appropriate starting precursor sol, withdrawal velocity and/or by repeating film deposition. therefore sol-gel technique and dip coating seem to provide powerful means to fabricate wide gap semiconductor structures with unique optical properties. acknowledgements the authors would like to thank to dr. erzsébet hild for her help by optical calculations. we gratefully he financial support of the hungarian scientific research fund (otka ck 78629). 136 references 1 fernandes d. m., silva r., winkler hechenleitner a. a., radovanovic e., custódio melo m. a., gómez pineda e. a.: synthesis and characterization of zno, cuo and a mixed zn and cu oxide, materials chemistry and physics 115 (2009) 1, 110 2 irimpan l., krishnan b., nampoori v. p. n., radhakrishnan p.: nonlinear optical characteristics of nanocomposites of zno–tio2–sio2, optical materials 31 (2008) 2, 361 3 kurz a., aegerter m. a.: novel transparent conducting sol–gel oxide coatings, thin solid films 516 (2008) 14, 4513 4 pál e., sebők d., hornok v., dékány i.: structural, optical, and adsorption properties of zno2/poly(acrylic acid) hybrid thin porous films prepared by ionic strength controlled layer-by-layer method, journal of colloid and interface science 332 (2009) 1, 173 5 könenkamp r., word r. c., godinez m.: ultraviolet electroluminescence from zno/polymer heterojunction light-emitting diodes, nano letters 5 (2005) 10, 2005 6 guo h., zhou j., lin z.: zno nanorod lightemitting diodes fabricated by electrochemical approaches, electrochemistry communications 10 (2008) 1, 146 7 martínez m. a., herrero j., guitérrez: deposition of transparent and conductive alm. t. doped zno thin films for photovoltaic solar cell, solar energy materials and solar cells 45 (1997) 1, 75 8 németh á., major cs., fried m., lábadi z., bársony i.: spectroscopic ellipsometry study of transparent conductive zno layers for cigs solar cell applications, thin solid films 516 (2008) 20, 7016 9 kay a., grätzel m.: low cost photovoltaic modules based on dye sensitized nanocrystalline titanium dioxide and carbon powder, solar energy materials and solar cells 44 (1996) 1, 99 10 grätzel m.: conversion of sunlight to electric power by nanocrystalline dye-sensitized solar cells, journal of photochemistry and photobiology a: chemistry 164 (2004) 1-3, 3 11 ewans p., sheel d. w.: photoactive and antibacterial tio2 thin films stainless steel, surface and coatings technology 201 (2007) 22-23, 9319 12 bosc f., ayral a., guizard c.: mixed tio2-sio2 mesostructured thin films, thin solid films 495 (2006) 1-2, 252 13 naszályi l., bosc f., mansouri a. e., van der lee a., cot d., hórvölgyi z., ayral a.: sol-gelderived mesoporous sio2/zno active coating and development of multifunctional ceramic membranes, separation and purification technology 59 (2008) 3, 304 14 bosc f., ayral a., guizard c.: mesoporous anatase coatings for coupling membrane sparation and photocatalyzed reactions, journal of membrane science 265 (2005) 1-2, 13 15 watanabe t., hayashi h., imai h.: lowtemperature praparation of dye-sensitized solar cell through crystal growth of anatase titania in aqueous solution, solar energy materials and solar cells 90 (2006) 5, 640 16 wu z. y., chai j. h., ni g.: zno films fabricated form chemical bath deposition form zinc nitrate and ammonium citrate tribasic solution, thin solid films 516 (2008) 21, 7318 17 abou-helal m. o., seeber w. t.: preparation of tio2 thin films by spray pyrolysis to be used as a photochatalyst, applied surface science 195 (2002) 1-4, 53 18 krunks m., mellikov e.: zinc oxide thin films by the spray pyrolysis method, thin solid films 270 (1995) 1-2, 33 19 pál e., seemann t., zöllmer v., busse m., dékány i.: hybrid zno/polymer thin films prepared by rf magnetron sputtering, colloid and polymer science 287 (2009) 4, 481 20 major c., nemeth a., radnoczi g., czigany zs., fried m., labadi z., barsony i.: optical and electrical characterization of aluminium doped zno layers, applied surface science 255 (2009) 21, 8907 21 murali k. r.: properties of sol-gel dip-coated zinc oxide thin films, journal of physics and chemistry of solids 68 (2007) 12, 2293 22 mohammadi m. r., fray d. j., mohammadi a.: sol-gel nanostructured titanium dioxide: controlling the crystal structure, crystallite size, phase transformation, packing and ordering, microporous and mesoporous materials 112 (2008) 1-3, 392 23 serényi m., rácz m., lohner t.: refractive index of sputtered silicon oxynitride layers for antireflection coating, vacuum 61 (2001) 2-4, 245 24 volk j., fried m., polgár o., bársony i.: optimisation of porous silicon based passive optical elements by means of spectroscopic ellipsometry, physica status solidi a 197 (2003) 1, 208 25 fried m., lohner t., aarnink w. a. m., hanekamp l. j., van silfhout a.: determination of complex dielectric functions of ion implanted and implanted-annealed amorphous silicon by spectroscopic ellipsometry, journal of applied physics 71 (1992) 10, 5260 26 petrik p., polgár o., fried m., lohner t., khánh n. q., gyulai j.: ellipsometric characterization of damage profiles using an advanced optical model, journal of applied physics 93 (2003) 4, 1987 27 fried m., lohner t., polgár o., petrik p., vázsonyi é., bársony i., piel j. p., stehle j. l.: characterization of different porous silicon structures by spectroscopic ellipsometry, thin solid films 276 (1996) 1-2, 223 137 28 fried m., wormeester h., zoethout e., lohner t., polgár o., bársony i.: in situ spectroscopic ellipsometric investigation of vacuum annealed and oxidized porous silicon layers, thin solid films 313-314 (1998), 459 29 regalado l. e., machorro r., leyva-lucero m., garcía-llamas r.: angle scanning reflecometry: study of two characteristic isoreflectance angles, journal of phyics d: applied physics 25 (1992), 1365 30 mann e. k., van der zeeuw e. a., koper g. j. m., schaaf p., bedeaux d.: optical properties of surfaces covered with latex particles: comparison with theory, journal of physical chemistry 99 (1995), 790 31 koper g. j. m.: optical properties of colloidal films, colloids and surfaces a: physicochemical and engineering aspects 165 (2000), 39 32 chena j. t., wanga j., zhanga f., zhanga g. a., wua z. g., yan p. x.: the effect of la doping concentration on the properties of zinc oxide films prepared by the sol–gel method, journal of crystal growth 310 (2008) 10, 2627. 33 sasani ghamsari m., vafaee m.: sol-gel derived zinc oxide buffer layer for use in random laser media, materials letters 62 (2008), 1754. 34 armelao l., fabrizio m., gialanella s., zordan f.: sol-gel synthesis and characterisation of zno-based nanosystems, thin solid films 394 (2001) 12-13, 90 35 ratana t., amornpitoksuk p., ratana t., suwanboon s.: the wide band gap of highly oriented nanocrystalline al doped zno thin films from sol-gel dip coating, journal of alloys and compounds 470 (2009) 1-2, 408 36 dutta m., mridha s., basak d.: effect of sol concentration on the properties of zno thin films prepared by sol–gel technique, applied surface science 254 (2008) 9, 2743 37 trapalis c., todorova n., anastescu m., anastescu c., stoica m., gartner m., zaharescu m., stoica t.: atomic force microscopy study of tio2 sol-gel films thermally treated under nh3 atmosphere, thin solid films 517 (2009) 23, 6243 38 deák a., hild e., kovács a. l., hórvölgyi z.: characterisation of solid supported nanostructured thin films by scanning angle reflectometry and uvvis spectrometry, materials science forum 537538 (2007), 329 39 guglielmi m., zenezini s.: the thickness of solgel silica coating obtained by dipping, journal of non-crystalline solids 121 (1990) 1-3, 303 40 hild e.: period. polytech., chem. eng. 19 (1975) (4), 291 41 hild e., deák a., naszályi l., sepsi ö., ábrahám n., hórvölgyi z.: use of the optical admittance function and its wkb approximation to simulate and evaluate transmittance spectra of graded index colloidal films, j. opt. a: pure appl. opt. 9 (2007), 920 42 wells a. f.: structural inorganic chemistry, 5th ed.; claredon press: oxford, 1984 43 wypych g.: handbook of fillers, 2nd ed., chem. tech. publishing, canada, 1999 44 sagar p., shishodia p. k., mehra r. m., okada h., wakahara a., yoshida a.: photoluminescence and absorption in sol–gel-derived zno films, journal of luminescence 126 (2007) 2, 800 45 o'brien s., koh l. h. k., crean g. m.: zno thin films prepared by a single step sol–gel process, thin solid films 516 (2008) 8, 1391 46 valerini d., caricato a. p., creti a., lomascolo m., romano f., taurino a., tunno t., martino m.: morphology and photoluminescence properties of zinc oxide films grown by pulsed laser deposition, applied surface science 255 (2009) 24, 9680 microsoft word b_03_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 38(2). pp. 83-88 (2010) modelling of polymer particle formation using population balance model á. bárkányi , b. g. lakatos, s. németh department of process engineering, university of pannonia, 8200 veszprém, egyetem str. 10., hungary e-mail: barkanyi.agnes@gmail.com the paper presents a study of formation of the primary particle size distribution in suspension “powder” polymerization of vinyl chloride. the process is modelled by means of a population balance model, and the primary particle size distribution inside the polymerizing monomer droplets is determined by analysing the population balance equation, governing the nucleation, growth, and aggregation of the primary particles, using the moment method. the infinite set of moment equations obtained by moment transformation was closed using a sum aggregation kernel, and for numerical experimentation a second order moment equation model was used. the results show how important are to choose the correct parameters in production of poly(vinyl chloride) by suspension polymerization. changing the parameters a bit the quality of product may change significantly. the results presented in the paper illustrate well that the population balance model can be used for describing the process and a number its properties with sufficient accuracy. keywords: suspension polymerization, vinyl chloride, population balance equation, moment equation, simulation. introduction plastics are major industrial goods used in the building, construction, packaging, transportation, electronic , etc., idustries. plastics can be in general classified into thermoplastics, thermosetting resins and engineering plastics. commodity thermoplastics are manufactured in large volumes and comprise polymers such as polyvinil chloride, polyethylene (low and high density), isostatic polypropylene, polystyrene. the main basic material of the plastics manufacturing is the polyvinyl chloride. due to its unique morphological characteristics, pvc can be combined with a number of additives resulting in materials exhibiting a broad range of end-use properties. the morphological properties of the pvc grains are determined by the following process variables: polymerization temperature, quality of agitation, type and concentration of the surface active agents, so it is needed to studying the effects of these variables. the quality of pvc is primarily characterized by the morphology of the polymer grains. the morphology of pvc grains, produced by the suspension polymerization process, is determined by the grain shape, and grain size distribution, the average grain porosity and pore size distribution as well the accessibility of the grain’s internal pores. it should be noted that pvc morphology greatly affects its handling, processing and application characteristics. grain porosity largely influences the removal of unreacted vcm and plasticizer uptake by the pvc grains during processing. the morphology of the pvc grains is depended on the properties of primary particles. the primary particle size distribution influences the porosity of the final grains to a large degree. so, the first goal is modelling the primary particle size distribution in suspension polymerization. the population balance approach has proved to be an adequate tool for model-based investigation of suspension polymerization by tracking the time evolution of polymer particles [1, 2, 3]. this approach was applied also by bárkányi [4] and bárkányi et al. [5] to study formation of the primary particle size distribution in suspension polymerization of vinyl chloride. the aim of the paper is to present the population balance equation and its second order moment equation reduction used in analysing formation of the primary particle size distribution in suspension polymerization of vinyl chloride. the infinite set of moment equations obtained by moment transformation is closed using an approximate sum aggregation kernel. results obtained by numerical experimentation by a second order moment equation model illustrate well that the population balance approach can be used for describing the process. 84 the mechanism of the suspension pvc process the suspension polymerization of vinyl chloride monomer (vcm) proceeds in two phases: the first one is the monomer-rich phase and the other one is the polymerrich phase. so, the model includes the polymerization processes in the two phases and the describing of the component transfer between the phases. [6, 7, 8]. previously published papers [9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15] on the morphology of pvc grains have postulated the following five-stage kinetic-physical mechanism, shown in fig. 1, to describe the nucleation, stabilization, growth, ad aggregation of pvc primary particles. figure 1: evolution of primary pvc particles during the first polymerization stage (vcm conversion range: 0 < x < 0.01%), primary radicals, formed via thermal decomposition of initiator molecules, rapidly react with monomer to produce polymer chains that almost instantaneously become insoluble in the monomer phase. the polymer chains precipitate out of the continuous vcm phase when they reach a specific chain length. it has been postulated that approximately 10–50 polymer chains are subsequently combined together to form nano-domains also called basic particles. the nanodomains are swollen with monomer and have an initial diameter of about 10–20 nm. in stage two (vcm conversion range: 0.01 < x < 1%), the formation of pvc domains, also called primary particle nuclei, takes place. because of the limited stability of the domains, they rapidly undergo coagulation leading to the nucleation of the primary particle nuclei. the initial size of these primary particle nuclei has been found to be in the range of 80–100 nm. typically, a primary particle nucleus may contain about 1000 nanodomains. the primary particle nuclei carry sufficient negative electrostatic charges to form stable colloidal dispersions in the monomer phase. in stage three (vcm conversion range: 1 < x < 20%), growth and aggregation of the primary particles occur. the size and the number of the primary particles depend on the growth rate and the electrostatic-steric stability of the primary particles. the latter attribute decreases as the monomer conversion increases. massive aggregation of the primary particles results in the formation of a continuous three-dimensional primary particle network within the vcm droplet. the three-dimensional primary particle network structure, i.e. its initial porosity and mechanical strength depend on the size and the number of primary particles, the electrostatic and steric forces between the primary particles, the polymerization temperature and the polymer viscoelastic properties. in stage four (vcm conversion range: 20 xf: [ ] )2/exp( )1( )1( 1 2/1 2 2/1 0 tk bx x i x pk dt dx d f −× − − − = (7) where k = kp (fkd / kt) 1/2 and f is the initial factor, and q = ap – a +1. the dimensionless coefficients of the kinetic model: a = (1 – xf) / xf (8) b = (ρp – ρm) / ρm (9) ( ) ( ) )273(14,027/2 /2 −−≈= t mt kdfk pt kdfk p (10) for determination of the primary particle size distribution can we used the gamma distribution function: b x eax aab baxfy − ⋅−⋅ γ == 1 )( 1 ),( (11) where a and b parameters which can be determined from the moment equations, and γ is the gamma function. solution and results the numerical solution of eq. (1) is very difficult while analytic solution is not known. thus we solved it by using moment transformation. it was assumed that b(v, u) = b0(v + u), where π γ& =0b and )/1(8 21 μμ π γ + = v rd δ & , where rd is the radius of the monomer droplets, δv is the relative velocity of the droplets, μ1 and μ2 are the viscosity of waterand polymer phases. the moment equations are: equation for the zero order moment: ( ))()()( 0100 txstbt t +⋅−= ∂ ∂ μ μ (12) where: μ0 is the zero order moment of volume v: ∫ ∞ = 0 0 ),( dvtvnμ (13) eq. (12) provides the time evolution of the total number of particles. equation for the first order moment: ( ) ( ))()()()( 00101 txsvttxgt t ⋅=⋅− ∂ ∂ μ μ (14) where: μ1 the first order moment of volume, v: ∫ ∞ ⋅= 0 1 ),( dvtvnvμ (15) eq. (14) gives the total volume of particles. equation for the second order moment: ( ) ( ))( )( )()( 2)()(2 )( 0 2 0 0 21 020 2 txsv t tt bttxg t t ⋅+ ⋅ =⋅− ∂ ∂ μ μμ μ μ (16) μ2 has not got any physical meaning but the knowledge of these properties is needed for characterizing the system. the initial conditions of moment equations are: μ0(0) = μ1(0) = μ2(0) = 0; t = 0. the set of moment equations were solved in matlab environment, and the parameter values used were obtained from the literature. as the model provided adequate results we examined how the results regarding the 86 moments varied changing the parameters. in this case, examination of process was focused on the analysis of the b0’s effect. this parameter influences the rate of aggregation in the process. we varied parameters rd and δv since, because the kinetic parameters were constant it did not influence the conversion and the time variation of the concentration of initiator. but changing these parameters influenced the moments significantly. 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 x 104 0 1 2 3 4 5 x 10 12 0. moment time (sec) m u0 rd=5e-4,du=5e7 rd=5e-5,du=5e7 rd=5e-4,du=5e4 rd=5e-4,du=5e6 rd=5e-5,du=5e4 rd=5e-5,du=5e6 rd=5e-6,du=5e4 rd=5e-6,du=5e6 figure 2: evolution in time of the zero order moment fig. 2 shows the time evolution of the zero order moment in function of changing of parameters. the differences between the running down of curves are on account of the changing of the rate of aggregation. the bigger the rate of aggregation the fewer particles there are in the system, because they cohere. 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 x 104 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 x 10 -3 1. moment time (sec) m u1 rd=5e-4,du=5e7 rd=5e-5,du=5e7 rd=5e-6,du=5e7 rd=5e-4,du=5e4 rd=5e-4,du=5e6 rd=5e-5,du=5e4 rd=5e-5,du=5e6 rd=5e-6,du=5e4 rd=5e-6,du=5e6 figure 3: evolution in time of the first order moment in fig. 3 one can see that changing the parameters in question do not influence the first order moment. because the first order moment denotes the total volume of particles it is not a surprising fact since the total volume of particles is independent on aggregation. in fig. 4 we see two different types of curves. if the rate of aggregation is able to neglectful compared to the rate of nucleation, the curve monotonously increases, otherwise it goes through a maximum, and after it starts decreasing. after that we studied the dependence of behaviour of the process as a function of the parameter b0. in figs 5 and 6 it can be seen that changing the parameter b0 influence only the zero and second order moments so we studied these two moments. 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 x 104 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 x 10 4 2. moment time (sec) m u2 rd=5e-4,du=5e7 rd=5e-5,du=5e7 rd=5e-4,du=5e4 rd=5e-4,du=5e6 rd=5e-5,du=5e4 rd=5e-5,du=5e6 rd=5e-6,du=5e4 rd=5e-6,du=5e6 figure 4: evolution in time of the second order moment 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 x 10 4 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5x 10 12 time (sec) b0=1e9 b0=1e10 b0=0 b0=1e11 b0=5e10 b0=1.1e11 figure 5: evolution in time of the zero order moment 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 x 10 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6x 10 4 time (sec) b0=1e9 b0=1e10 b0=0 b0=1e11 b0=5e10 b0=1.1e11 figure 6: evolution in time of the second order moment figs 5 and 6 show that evolution of the process depends strongly on the ratio of growth and aggregation rates. with increasing aggregation rate the number of particles in the system decreases significantly. as the aggregation rate passes a critical value the process likely exhibits gelation phenomenon what would be the subject of a future interesting study. 87 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 x 10-4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x 10 -17 diameter of particle (m) fu nc tio n va lu e t=1e-21 sec t=1.3e3 sec t=3.8e3 sec t=7e3 sec t=1.1e4 sec t=1.5e4 sec t=1.8e4 sec t=1.9e4 sec t=2.1e4 sec t=2.3e4 sec figure 7: primary particle size distribution 0 1 2 x 10-4 0 1 2 x 104 0 2 4 6 8 x 10-17 diameter of particle (m) time (s) fu nc tio n va lu e figure 8: primary particle size distribution (3d) figs 7 and 8 show the primary particle size distribution. it can be seen when the polymerization is going, the diameter of particles continually grows. conclusions a population balance model and a second order moment equation system was presented for analysing formation of the primary particle size distribution in suspension “powder” polymerization of vinyl chloride. the model involves nucleation, growth and aggregation of primary particles having significant influence on the properties of polymer grains. the infinite set of moment equations obtained by moment transformation was closed using an approximate sum aggregation kernel, and for numerical experimentation a second order moment equation model was used. the results revealed that it is very important to choose the correct parameters in production of poly(vinyl chloride) by suspension polymerization since changing the parameters a bit the quality of product may change significantly. the results presented in the paper illustrate well that the population balance model can be used for describing the process and a number its properties with sufficient accuracy. acknowledgements this work was supported by the hungarian scientific research fund under grant k77955. the financial support from the tamop-4.2.208/1/2008-0018 (livable environment and healthier people – bioinnovation and green technology research at the university of pannonia) project is gratefully acknowledged. symbols a, b constants a, b parameters of gamma-distribution d diameter of particle, m f iniciator factor g growth rate in volume-scale, m3/s i0 initial value of iniciator concentration, kmol/ m 3 k constant kd the rate constant for initiator decomposition constant, 1/s kp monomer phase propagation constant, 1/s kt termination rate constant, 1/s m weight, kg m monomer concentration, kmol/ m3 n number density function, db/m6 p, q constants r radius of particle, m rd radius of vcm droplet, m rpm polymerization rate in the monomer phase, mol/s/m 3 rpp polymerization rate in the polymer phase, mol/s/m 3 s0 nucleation rate, db/m 3/s t time, s t temperature, k u volume, m3 v volume, m3 v0 volume of pvc basic particles, m 3 x conversion xf critical conversion greek letters β aggregation rate kernel, m3/s δ dirac-delta function μ0 0. moment μ1 1. moment μ2 2. moment ρ density, kg/m3 φm monomer volume fraction in the polymer phase γ gamma function subscripts m monomer p polymer 88 references 1. c. kiparissides: chemical engineering science 51, 1996, 1637–1659. 2. w. h. ray, s. k. jain, r. salovey: journal of applied polymer science 19, 1975, 1297–1315. 3. c. kiparissides: in: macromolecural chemistry macromolecular symposium, 35/36, 1990, 171-19. 4. á. bárkányi: msc thesis. university of pannonia, veszprém, 2010, 1–110. 5. á. bárkányi, s. németh, b. g. lakatos: proc. chem. eng. day’s. veszprém, 2010. apr. 27-29. 6. y. saeki, t. emura: progress in polymer science, 27, 2002, 2055–2131. 7. p. v.smallwood: in: h. marc (ed.), encyclopedia of polymer science and engineering, wiley, new york, 1985, 295pp. 8. a. h. alexopoulos, c. kiparissides: chemical engineering science, 62, 2007, 3970–3983. 9. m. w. allsopp: pure and applied chemistry 53, 1981, 449–465. 10. t. y. xie, a. e. hamielec, p. e. wood, d. r. woods: journal of vinyl technology 13 (1), 1991, 2–25. 11. c. kiparissides, g. daskalakis, d. s. achilias, e. sidiropoulou: industrial and engineering chemistry research 36 (4), 1997, 1253–1267. 12. h. g. yuan, g. kalfas, w. h. ray: macromolecular chemistry and physics 31 (c283), 1991, 215–299. 13. d. g. rance: in: r. buscall, t. corner, j. f. stageman (eds.): polymer colloids, elsevier, applied science publishers 1985. 14. p. h. geil: journal of macromolecular sciencechemistry a11 (7), 1977, 1271–1280. 15. m. ravey: journal of applied polymer science 21, 1977, 839–840. 16. k. endo: progress in polymer science 27, 2002, 2021–2054. 17. g. talamini, a. visentini, j. kerr: polymer 39 (10), 1998, 1879–1891. 18. a. h. abdel-alim, a. e. hamelec: journal of applied polymer science, 16, 1972, 783–799. << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word 16.07 zaini.docx hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 44(2) pp. 129–133 (2016) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0016 metal-chloride-activated empty fruit-bunch carbons for rhodamine b removal muhammad abbas ahmad zaini1,2* and mohd shafiq mohd shaid1 1 faculty of chemical & energy engineering, universiti teknologi malaysia, johor bahru, johor, 81310, malaysia 2 centre of lipids engineering & applied research, ibnu sina institute for scientific & industrial research, universiti teknologi malaysia, johor bahru, johor, 81310, malaysia this study aimed to investigate the adsorptive ability of activated carbons derived from empty boil palm fruitbunch carbons through metal-chloride activation. the derived activated carbons were characterized in terms of yield, ph, surface functional groups, and specific surface area. rhodamine b dye was used as a pollutant probe to evaluate the performance of activated carbons. results show that empty, zncl2-activated fruit-bunch carbon exhibits a higher surface area of 866 m2 g-1 and a rhodamine b removal yield of 105 mg g-1. activation at the same temperature of 600 ºc using the recovered fecl2 yields an activated carbon with nearly twice the surface area compared to the fresh one. a direct correlation was obtained between the roles of the specific surface area and removal of rhodamine b. empty fruit-bunch carbon is a promising adsorbent precursor for colour removal from water. keywords: activated carbon, chemical activation, empty fruit-bunch, metal-chloride, rhodamine b 1. introduction malaysia and indonesia are the leading producers worldwide of palm oil. due to the growth in palm oil production and despite the high economic returns, this industry also generates a huge amount of was that has negative implications on the environment. as one of the largest oil palm producers in the world, malaysia generates abundant empty fruit-bunch (efb) residues amounting to 12.4 million tonnes annually [1]. at present, only a small quantity of efb is used as fuel for boilers in the oil palm mills while the remaining large quantity is left to decay in fields or disposed of in landfills. due to the limited area of landfill sites and other associated environmental implications, the quest for the effective utilization of efb has become a subject of significant interest. because efb is rich in carbon and lignin, it has a great potential to be converted into adsorbent or activated carbon for a variety of purification and environmental purposes [2]. nasir et alia [3] reported the selectivity of methylene blue removal over copper(ii) ions by empty fruit-bunch. yet, the uptake capacity was too small (32.3 mg methylene blue per g of efb) to warrant large-scale adsorption operation. in a recent related work, wirasnita et alia [4] reported the preparation of zncl2-activated empty fruit-bunch carbon with a specific surface area of 86.6 m2 g-1. however, the *correspondence: abbas@cheme.utm.my surface area obtained is somewhat small to be regarded as that of activated carbon [5]. there are also reports on the use of co2 and steam to physically activate the efb into activated carbons. however, the surface area is often not controllable and the yield is very low because of high activation temperatures (800 to 900 ºc) [6,7]. our present work aimed to evaluate the adsorptive characteristics of metal-chloride-activated empty fruitbunch carbons. zinc(ii) chloride and iron(ii) chloride were used for the chemical activation of efb. attempts were also made to recover the activator for the second activation. rhodamine b was used as a model pollutant to establish the adsorption data. the activated carbons were characterized and the adsorptive results compared and discussed. 2. experimental oil palm empty fruit-bunch (efb) was obtained from sungei kahang palm oil factory in johore state, malaysia. the material was oven-dried at 110oc overnight to remove moisture. all chemicals used in the preparation of activated carbons and adsorption were of analytical reagent grade. 2.1. preparation of activated carbon empty fruit-bunch was loosened and separately modified with zinc chloride and iron(ii) chloride in the mass ratio (activator : efb) of 3:2. firstly, the activator was dissolved in water, sufficient for the efb to be immersed. next, the efb-activator mixtures were zaini and shaid hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 130 stirred at 90 ºc for 40 minutes. after that, the sample was placed in the oven overnight at 110 ºc for impregnation. the impregnated sample was put in a crucible wrapped in aluminium foil, and heated in a furnace for 1.5 h at 300 ºc and 550 ºc for zinc chloride activation and iron(ii) chloride activation, respectively. the selected activation temperatures are half of the boiling points of the activators. the resultant activated carbon was washed with distilled water, and the washed water was used for the second activation using the same impregnation ratio of 3:2 at 550 ºc for both activators. activated carbons were designated as z1 and f1 for activation using fresh zinc(ii) chloride and iron(ii) chloride, respectively, and z2 and f2 when using recovered activators, respectively. 2.2. characterization of activated carbon the yield of activated carbon was calculated from the mass of the resultant product over that of the dried efb used. the adsorbent ph was determined by soaking 1 g of adsorbent in 100 cm3 of distilled water. the ph was measured using a ph meter (hi 8424, hanna instruments). the specific surface area of activated carbon was measured using a surface area analyser (pulse chemisorb 2705, micromeritics) at the temperature of liquid n2, 77 k. fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (ftir) (ir tracer-100, shimadzu) was used to obtain the peaks of functional groups at specific wave numbers ranging from 400 to 4000 cm-1. 2.3. adsorption of rhodamine b rhodamine b of commercial purity was utilized without further purification. 500 mg of rhodamine b powder was weighed using an analytical balance and then dissolved in 1 dm3 of distilled water in a volumetric flask to make up a stock solution. the dilution of stock solution was needed for preparing the working concentrations for adsorption. adsorption was performed according to the bottlepoint technique. briefly, about 0.5 g of activated carbon was added to 50 cm3 of rhodamine b solution at varying concentrations. the mixture was allowed to equilibrate on an orbital shaker at 120 rpm and room temperature for 72 h. the residual concentration was measured using a spectrophotometer (halo vis-10, dynamica scientific ltd.) at a wavelength of 555 nm (absorption unit = 0.014 × concentration, r2 = 0.99). the adsorption capacity (mg g-1) was calculated by a simple material balance (eq.(1)), and the adsorption data were analysed by general isotherm models, namely langmuir (eq.(2)) and freundlich (eq.(3)). the respective constants were solved by non-linear regression using solver as implemented in ms excel for the smallest sum-of-squared error (sse) and optimum coefficient of determination (r2). 𝑞! = (!!!!!) ! 𝑉 (1) 𝑞! = !"!! !!!!! (2) 𝑞! = 𝐾!𝐶! ! ! (3) where, qe (mg g -1) is the adsorption capacity of rhodamine b, co and ce (mg dm -3) are the initial and equilibrium concentrations, respectively, m (g) is the mass of activated carbon, and v (dm3) is the volume of rhodamine b solution. constant q (mg g-1) is the maximum monolayer capacity, b (dm3 g-1) is the adsorption intensity, and kf ((mg g -1)(dm3 mg-1)1/n) and 1/n are the freundlich constants related to the adsorption capacity and intensity, respectively. 3. results and analysis 3.1. characteristics of activated carbons chemical activation using freshly prepared metalchlorides was performed at a temperature of about half of the boiling point of each activator. the boiling point of zncl2 and fecl2 are 723 and 1023 ºc, respectively. this is to allow a sufficient amount of activator to be recovered upon activation as it is commonly understood that chemical activators, e.g. zncl2, koh, etc., are prone to intercalate with the matrix material and/or lost when the activation is done close to the boiling point of the activators. in addition, it enables one to evaluate the effectiveness of activated carbon preparation at the selected temperatures. table 1 displays the yield, ph, and specific surface area of metal-chloride-activated empty fruit-bunch carbons. in general, the yield of activated carbons ranges between 38 and 47%. this indicates the underlying role of metal-chlorides as dehydrating agents to enhance the burning off the carbonaceous material. this is also true for zncl2 activation at a temperature of 300 ºc. in addition, it signifies that a significant portion of metalchlorides could be recovered for the subsequent activation. the ph values of activated carbons are in the range of 3.8 to 5.3. the activated carbons are slightly acidic because both metal-chloride activators are lewis acids. the ph values were found to increase when the recovered activators were used in the activation. this could be attributed to the decreased amount of metalchlorides that probably could not be fully recovered after the first activation. from table 1, the developed surface area of z1 upon activation is undeniably small, even smaller than for raw efb (28.4 m2 g-1) [3]. this could be due to the table 1. properties of activated carbons. activator type temp. (°c) yield (%) ph surface area (m2 g-1) zncl2 fresh (z1) 300 44.0 3.8 2.64 recovered (z2) 550 41.2 4.9 866 fecl2 fresh (f1) 550 46.8 4.6 98.4 recovered (f2) 550 37.9 5.3 226 metal-chloride-activated empty fruit-bunch carbons 44(2) pp. 129–133 (2016) doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0016 131 blockade of existing pore channels because of the intercalation of zinc cations within the material matrix. intercalation of a chemical activator normally creates new pathways for the porous structure when adequate heat is supplied to the impregnated material. this often results in an increase in pore volume, thus increasing the specific surface area. yet, the activation temperature for z1 (300 ºc) may not be sufficient to initiate the job, consequently the activator becomes lodged inside the rudimentary pores even though burning off decreases the activated carbon yield. therefore, z1 could not be regarded as activated carbon because of its inferior development of surface area. activation using the recovered activators was performed at 550 ºc. there is a tremendous increase in the surface area of z2 using the recovered zncl2 from z1. although the amount of zncl2 in the recovered solution is presumably less than for the fresh one (ratio 3:2), the elevated activation temperature shows a positive effect in increasing the surface area by more than 300 times. this could be related to the fact that more volatiles (nearly 65% weight loss) are liberated from the empty fruit-bunch at 550 ºc [8]. it is suggested that the liberation of volatiles from the material also contributes to creating the pore pathways. these combined effects bring about the development of activated carbon with a high surface area. from table 1, f2 shows a higher surface area than for f1 at the same activation temperature. this could be associated with the optimum impregnation ratio in the preparation of activated carbon. the specific surface area of activated carbon normally increases as the impregnation ratio increases, but decreases when an excessive amount of activator is used. too much activator may result in the collapse of pore textures, thus decreasing the surface area [9]. in other words, fecl2 used in the activation of f1 could have already exceeded the optimum impregnation ratio. however, further experimental works of varying impregnation ratios of fecl2 are needed to establish the optimum surface area of fecl2-activated empty fruit-bunch carbons. nevertheless, f2 demonstrates a 3.8 times lower surface area than z2. this shows that zncl2 is an effective activator for empty oil palm fruit-bunch-based activated carbon. fig.1 shows the ftir spectra of efb and its derived activated carbons. the designated possible functional groups are summarized in table 2. the spectroscopy technique measures the absorption of various wavelengths of infrared light by materials of interest to identify specific organic functional groups on the surface of activated carbon. from fig.1, the efb displays various peaks that correspond to the presence of functional groups. the broad and strong band at 3300 cm-1 is assigned to the stretching vibration of the (–oh) hydroxyl group. the intensity of the peak decreased by the order of efb > z1 > f1 ≈ f2 > z2. the peak completely disappeared in z2 probably due to the stronger dehydrating effect of zncl2 compared to fecl2 in activating the efb at 550 ºc. it also signifies that the activation of z1 remains incomplete because most of the attributes of efb spectra remained unchanged. as the efb is converted into activated carbon, the complicated peaks become simplified indicating the liberation of functional groups in the activated carbons. the absorption peaks at 2930– 2850 cm-1 are attributed to the (c–h) stretching vibration of the (–ch3) group. the peaks between 1400 and 1000 cm-1 are ascribed to (c–o) stretching or (si– o) of silica containing minerals (ash). the peak at 1026 cm-1 in z1 is assigned to the out of plane (c–h) bending. 3.2. adsorption of rhodamine b water polluted with dyes especially from the textile industries has become a subject of great concern because of the disruption to biodiversity and food chains [10]. basic or cationic dyes are very bright dyes that are water-soluble. in this work, rhodamine b (c28h31c1n2o3, mw = 479 g mol -1, solubility in water = 15 g dm3) was chosen as the model dye to evaluate the performance of empty fruit-bunch-based activated carbons. the ph of the rhodamine b solution was not adjusted, and the values were measured as 5.1±0.2 for all concentrations. at equilibrium, the ph values slightly changed as they are measured to be 5.3±0.1. fig.2 illustrates the molecular structure of rhodamine b. figure 1. ftir spectra of efb and activated carbons. table 2. functional groups used in characterizing samples. wave number (cm-1) functional group type sample 3100–3550 a o—h alcohol efb, f1, f2, z1 1000 c—o 2900, 2810 c—h aldehyde efb, z1 1600, 1470 c=c aromatic efb, z1 1600 c=c alkene efb, z1, f1, f2 3300 n—h amine efb 1300 c—n a broad feature zaini and shaid hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 132 fig.3 shows the removal of rhodamine b by efbderived materials. from fig.3, the removal of rhodamine b was found to increase with concentration by the order of z2 > f2 > f1 > z1. activated carbon z2 demonstrates the highest rhodamine b removal of 105 mg g-1. this trend is in agreement with the increase in specific surface area of adsorbents. in general, the concentration of dye in the solution provides a driving force for adsorption if the adsorbent or activated carbon possesses abundant active sites. in this case, the active sites are directly associated with the surface area. fig.4 displays the correlation between the removal of rhodamine b and the surface area. a linear relationship for rhodamine b removal (mg g-1) = 0.124 × specific surface area (m2 g-1), r2 = 0.993 was obtained. a bigger surface area normally provides better interaction probabilities for the rhodamine b molecules to lodge onto the pore channels. in addition, it is presumed that all types of pore play a dominating role in the adsorption especially mesopores [5,11]. the adsorption data were analysed using the langmuir and freundlich models, and the constants are tabulated in table 3. the adsorption data reasonably fitted to both adsorption models with r2 ranging between 0.71 and 0.97, except for z2 according to the langmuir model. the values of langmuir model capacity (q) are in close proximity to the experimental data (qexp). in addition, z2 shows a higher adsorption affinity (b) for rhodamine b when compared with the other counterparts. this signifies a higher removal efficiency (~99%) at concentrations below 80 mg dm-3. similar explanations apply for the freundlich model. the deviation of the lines of the model from the experimental data is shown in fig.3, which indicates that the removal of rhodamine b by efb-based materials is neither a strict monolayer adsorption nor heterogeneous coverage, but could be a blend of the two – monolayer adsorption onto a heterogeneous surface [11]. in a related work, santhi et alia [12] reported a removal capacity of 22.3 mg g-1 of rhodamine b using h2so4-treated a. nilotica leaves. generally, z2 shows a higher dye removal capacity compared to this chemically treated natural adsorbent. this is likely due to the well-developed graphitic structure and surface area of z2 for the effective removal of rhodamine b. figure 2. chemical structure of cationic rhodamine b dye. figure 3. removal of rhodamine b by (a) z1, f1 and f2, and (b) z2. lines were predicted by the langmuir (solid) and freundlich (dashed) models. figure 4. correlation between rhodamine b removal and specific surface area. table 3. parameters of isotherm models. z1 z2 f1 f2 qexp (mg g -1) 2.33 105 14.8 33.4 langmuir model q (mg g-1) 2.85 97.9 18.5 42.2 b (dm3 g-1) 0.166 2.92 0.248 0.187 r2 0.907 0.434 0.857 0.967 sse 0.233 403 23.7 26.3 freundlich model kf (mg g -1)(l mg-1)1/n 0.560 72.5 4.73 8.86 n 2.10 13.4 2.61 2.33 r2 0.882 0.707 0.718 0.869 sse 0.435 209 44.7 94.3 metal-chloride-activated empty fruit-bunch carbons 44(2) pp. 129–133 (2016) doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0016 133 4. conclusion oil palm empty fruit-bunch was used in the preparation of activated carbons via metal-chloride activation. zinc chloride is a more effective activating agent for activated carbon than iron(ii) chloride. activation at 500 ºc yields empty fruit-bunch-based activated carbon with a surface area of 866 m2 g-1. a bigger surface area offers greater removal of rhodamine b dye and a higher adsorption affinity at lower dye concentrations. the maximum removal efficiency was recorded as 105 mg g-1. the mechanism could be described as monolayer rhodamine b adsorption onto heterogeneous activated carbon. empty fruit-bunch is a promising alternative to activated carbon precursors for wastewater treatment. acknowledgement the research was supported by universiti teknologi malaysia through tier one research grant #10h42. references [1] tanaka, r.; rosli, w.; magara, k.; ikeda, t.; hosoya, s.: chlorine-free bleaching of kraft pulp from oil palm empty fruit-bunches, jpn. agric. res. 2004 38(4), 275–279 doi: 10.6090/jarq.38.275 [2] duan, x.; peng, j.; srinivasakannan, c.; zhang, l.; xia, h.; yang, k.; zhang, z.: process optimization for the preparation of activated carbon from jatropha hull using response surface methodology, energy sources, part a: recovery util. environ. effect, 2011 33(21), 2005–2017 doi: 10.1080/ 15567030903515047 [3] nasir, n.h.m.; zaini, m.a.a.; setapar, s.h.m.; hassan, h.: removal of methylene blue and copper(ii) by oil palm empty fruit-bunch sorbents, j. teknologi 2015 74(7), 107–110 doi: 10.11113/ jt.v74.4707 [4] wirasnita, r.; hadibarata, t.; yusoff, a.r.m.; lazim, z.m.: preparation and characterization of activated carbon from oil palm empty fruit-bunch wastes using zinc chloride, j. teknologi 2015 74(11), 77–81 doi: 10.11113/jt.v74.4876 [5] ming-twang, s.; lin-zhi, l.; zaini, m.a.a.; zhiyong, q.; pei-yee, a.y.: activated carbon for dyes adsorption in aqueous solution, in: advances in environmental research, ed.: daniels. j.a. (nova science publishers, inc., new york, usa) pp. 217–234, 2015 [6] hidayu, a.r.; mohamad, n.f.; matali, s.; sharifah, a.s.a.k.: characterization of activated carbon prepared from oil palm empty fruit-bunch using bet and ft-ir techniques, proc. engng. 2013 68, 379–384 doi: 10.1016/j.proeng.2013.12.195 [7] alam, m.z.; ameem, e.s.; muyibi, s.a.; kabbashi, n.a.: the factors affecting the performance of activated carbon prepared from oil palm empty fruit-bunches for adsorption of phenol, chem. engng. j. 2009 155(1–2), 191–198 doi: 10.1016/j.cej.2009.07.033 [8] nyakuma, b.b.; johari, a.; ahmad, a.; abdullah, t.a.t.: thermogravimetric analysis of the fuel properties of empty fruit-bunch briquettes, j. teknologi 2014 67(3), 79–82 doi: 10.11113/jt.v67.2768 [9] zaini, m.a.a.; okayama, r.; machida, m.: adsorption of aqueous metal ions on cattlemanure-compost based activated carbons, j. hazard mater. 2009 170(2–3), 1119–1124 doi: 10.1016/j.jhazmat.2009.05.090 [10] ming-twang, s.; zhi-yong, q.; lin-zhi, l.; peiyee, a.y.; zaini, m.a.a.: dyes in water: characteristics, impacts to the environment and human health, and the removal strategies. in: advances in chemistry research, ed.: taylor, j.c. (nova science publishers, inc., new york, usa) vol. 23, pp. 143–156, 2015 [11] zaini, m.a.a.; zakaria, m.; setapar, s.h.m.; yunus, m.a.c.: sludge-adsorbents from palm oil mill effluent for methylene blue removal, j. environ. chem. engng. 2013 1(4), 1091–1098 doi: 10.1016/j.jece.2013.08.026 [12] santhi, t.; prasad, a.l.; manonmani, s.: a comparative study of microwave and chemically treated acacia nilotica leaf as an eco-friendly adsorbent for the removal of rhodamine b dye from aqueous solution, arabian j. chem. 2014 7(4), 494–503 doi: 10.1016/j.arabjc.2010.11.008 microsoft word 16.16 halmagyi.docx hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 44(2) pp. 135–139 (2016) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0017 characterisation of cements from dominantly volcanic raw materials of the carpathian bend zone timea halmagyi,1 emilia mosonyi,2 józsef fazekas,2* maria spataru1 and firuta goga2 1 s.c. valdek impex srl, sfantu gheorghe str. 1 decembrie 1918, bl. 15, sc. e, et. 3, ap. 9., judetul covasna, romania 2 “babes-bolyai” university, kogalniceanu str. 1, 400082 cluj-napoca, romania this paper presents the results of laboratory investigations regarding the production of cements from local raw materials, such as limestone from varghis, gypsum from nucsoara, basaltic scoria from racosul de jos, volcanic tuff from racosul de sus, diatomite from filia, and red mud from oradea. the raw mixtures, based on modified bogue calculations, contain limestone, gypsum, and one or two of the above-mentioned materials. the cements resulted from clinker grinding in a laboratory gas furnace at 1260–1300 ºc, with one hour at the peak temperatures, and were characterised for blaine specific surface area, specific density, and mineral phases. physico-mechanical properties, such as water content for normal consistency, setting time, soundness, and compressive strength were also determined. results show that these cements contain belite, ferrite, calcium sulphoaluminate, anhydrite, and some minor compounds. keywords: experimental cement, varghis limestone, racosul de sus volcanic tuff, setting time, mechanical properties 1. introduction manufacturing of portland cement is energy consuming, globally accounting for 2% of primary energy and 5% of industrial energy consumption. moreover, portland cement production contributes significantly to greenhouse gas emission in the order of 5% of the global co2 emissions due to anthropogenic sources [1]. new civil engineering requirements impose the production of a new type of cement, which is of good quality, environmentally friendly, and requires low energy utilization. low-energy cement manufacturing is economically and ecologically preferable. these cements could be used in places where high early strength or expansion compensation and also increased durability are required. in cement chemistry, notation of oxides are abbreviated by their first capital letters: c=cao, s=sio2, a=al2o3, f=fe2o3, cs=so3, and h=h2o. lowenergy cements comprise those that belong to the caosio2-al2o3-fe2o3cs system. they are mainly sulphoaluminate belitic and sulphoferroaluminate belitic cements [2]. these can be produced from both natural raw materials or raw material mixtures, containing byproducts or industrial waste, by firing at lower temperatures than for portland cement clinkers. a large variety of cements was developed in china based on the *correspondence: chemiceramic@gmail.com composition c4a3s . these were standardized and named as “third cement series” [3]. these cements have special features such as quick setting time, good impermeability, and rapid strength development even at low temperatures. there are numerous investigations on the laboratory-scale production of sulphoaluminate belite (sab) cement [4–18]. sab cement can be classified into three major categories according to the content and proportions of the phase compositions. the tentative naming and some basic properties are summarized below: 1. calcium sulphoaluminate-rich belite cement: they are mostly composed of only two main phases of sab cement, the major components being c4a3s (around 55–75 (g/g)%) and c2s. this type of cement is typically used for applications requiring rapid setting and high early strength [4, 6, 8, 9, 19, 20]. 2. expansive belite-rich calcium sulphoaluminate cements: besides the main components of the sab cements they contain free lime up to 10 (g/g)% which promotes expansion. this type of cement can be used in restricted areas requiring shrinkage-resistant and self-stressing cements [4, 12, 16, 20, 21]. 3. non-expansive belite-rich calcium sulphoaluminate cements: these cements have higher belite, lower calcium sulphoaluminate, and much lower or completely deficient of free lime content than those of commercially produced sab cements. industrial by-products with high sulphate content can be used in high halmagyi, mosonyi, fazekas, maria, and firuta hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 136 percentages in production. this type of cement shows high mechanical strength both at early and late ages comparable to ordinary portland cement and has the potential to replace it [4, 6, 8, 14, 16]. there is no commercial production of the beliterich calcium sulphoaluminate-type of cement. mehta [18] produced sab cements containing no free cao, but large amounts of belite rich in caco3, silicic acid, hydrated alumina, iron oxide, and gypsum. the clinkers were obtained by heating the raw materials in an electric muffle furnace at 1200 ºc for about 1 hour. clinkers were ground to a blaine specific surface area of about 400 m2 kg-1. microstructure examinations of the clinkers showed that c4a3s appears as cubic crystals whereas belite appears as large rounded grains. the clinkers were very easy to grind due to their brittleness [4]. sahu et alia [12] produced cements of types 2 and 3 from limestone, fly ash and gypsum at 1200 ºc, for a bearing time of 30 minutes and cooled by fresh air. kasselouri et alia [17] in 1995 obtained cement of type 3 at 1280 ºc from limestone, gypsum, bauxite, silica sand, and iron-rich industrial by-products. cements composed from a mixture of baghouse dust, f-class fly ash, and scrubber sludge, sintered at 1175–1250 ºc for bearing times of 30, 45, and 60 minutes, and cooled by natural air were obtained according to arjunan et alia [10]. mixtures composed of limestone, bottom ash, baghouse filter ash, bauxite, and gypsum fired at 1250 and 1300 ºc, for a bearing time of 60 minutes, lead to sab cement of c4a3s – ye’elimite, c2s-larnite (belite), c4af-brownmillerite, and csanhydrite compositions [4]. the absence of tricalcium aluminate (c3a) in these cements indicates that the decomposition of the desired mineral c4a3s does not take place at these temperatures. the presence of the desired minerals and the absence of c5s2s confirmed the formation of the sab cement at 1250 ºc and 1300 ºc after 1 hour. this article presents our study on the cement series sintered using local raw materials, such as volcanic tuffs from racosul de sus, basaltic scoria from racosul de jos, and diatomite from filia (all in the carpathian orocline), and red mud. 2. experimental the raw materials used for the cement experiments carried out as part of this study are natural (varghis) limestone, bodoc clay, nucsoara gypsum, racosul de jos basaltic scoria, racosul de sus volcanic tuff, filia diatomite, and artificial industrial waste (oradea red mud). the selected raw materials were investigated for chemical compositions. the chemical compositions of the limestone, red mud, diatomite, and basaltic scoria were analysed by sem/edax. the volcanic tuff and gypsum analyses were performed by wet chemical methods, according to the sr en 192-2 (table 1). the theoretically estimated mineralogical, chemical compositions based on modified bogue calculations [1, 4, 22] are given in table 2. the compositions of the raw material mixtures are presented in table 3. the raw material mixtures were obtained by grinding them in a laboratory ballmill up to a sieve residue of 90 µm about 12%. afterwards, the raw material mixtures underwent a process of briquetting and drying followed by firing in a laboratory gas oven for one hour at a constant temperature of 1260–1300 ºc. the inside temperatures of the furnace were estimated with a thermocouple thermometer. fast cooling was achieved in the air. the obtained cements from grinded clinkers (five hours in a mill, balls:clinkers ratio of 2:1) were tested. mineralogical table 1. chemical compositions of the raw materials in (g/g) %. oxides varghis limestone oradea red mud racosul de jos basaltic scoria racosul de sus volcanic tuff filia diatomite nucsoara gypsum cao 89.61 12.71 10.38 2.88 0.71 28.31 sio2 4.01 8.93 46.10 64.53 92.52 9.83 al2o3 5.16 17.04 18.78 11.80 3.24 2.73 fe2o3 48.37 9.93 2.57 2.18 1.07 na2o 3.68 3.23 1.89 0.15 k2o 1.69 2.75 0.46 0.55 mgo 1.30 7.21 0.45 0.39 tio2 6.80 1.61 0.27 0.13 v2o5 0.19 0.04 p2o5 1.22 0.98 1.07 0.04 so3 0.89 37.08 mn2o3 0.02 p.c. 12.40 19.90 table 2. theoretical mineralogical and chemical compositions of the cements in (g/g) %. sample mineral composition oxidic compositions c2s c4a3s! c4af cs! cao fe2o3 sio2 al2o3 so3 c1, c2, c3 56 12 22 10 55.15 7.23 19.53 10.63 7.46 c4 50 18 15 17 53.11 4.93 17.44 12.17 12.36 c5 43 28 23 6 51.38 7.56 15.00 18.86 7.20 characterisation of cements from dominantly volcanic raw materials 44(2) pp. 135–139 (2016) doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0017 137 compositions of cements made by xrd analyses with a panalytical-philips cubix pro x-ray spectrometer, according to il lab 41 proceedings are presented in table 4. experimental laboratory-produced cements were tested in conditions provided by the romanian crh cement s.a. plant in hoghiz (brasov county). the blaine specific surface area, specific density, heat of hydration (table 5), volume of water for normal consistency, setting time, soundness, and compressive strength (table 6) have been determined. identification of mineral phases formed during the burning of clinkers was carried out by means of the cubix pro spectrometer. 3. results and discussions the mineralogical compositions of the experimental cements are summarized in table 4. all cement samples contain belite, ferrite, anhydrite, and many other phases in small amounts. the largest amount of belite found in a cement sample is in the raw mixture containing diatomite (sample c2 with c2s = 69.1%), followed by the sample prepared with volcanic tuff (sample c3 with c2s = 65.9%). soner et alia reported [4] that the mineral c4a3s is stable between 1250–1350 ºc, but probably it can decompose during cooling. furthermore, it was demonstrated that aluminium could be substituted by iron in the ye’elimite structure forming c4a3-xfxs [23– 26]. the experimental cement samples were characterized with regards to specific density and fineness, representing the blaine specific surface area [27]. the heat of hydration according was also determined to the sr en 196-9/2006 method [28]. the physical properties of experimental cements are presented in table 5. the experimental blaine fineness data are characterised by large specific surface areas. the biggest blaine specific surface area was found in sample c2 (with diatomite) followed of sample c3 sample (with volcanic tuff). these samples have the smallest specific densities in the same order. the binding behaviour of the cements was estimated by measuring the setting time, volume of water for normal consistency, soundness, and compressive strengths (after second and twenty-eighth days). to determine the table 5. physical properties of cement samples c1-c5. sample blaine specific surface area, cm2 g-1 heat of hydration, j g-1 specific density, g cm-3 c1 7367 29 3.17 c2 8745 123 3.04 c3 7963 32 3.07 c4 6501 44 3.14 c5 7553 110 3.26 table 3. the compositions of raw material mixtures in (g/g) %. samples varghis limestone oradea red mud racosul de jos basaltic scoria racosul de sus volcanic tuff filia diatomite nucsoara gypsum cement 1 48.90 36.67 14.43 cement 2 54.08 13.70 32.22 cement 3 54.35 23.37 22.28 cement 4 54.66 0.98 31.53 12.83 cement 5 47.45 1.19 20.66 30.70 table 6. physico–mechanical properties of cement samples c1-c5. sample water for normal consistency, cm3 setting time, hour : minutes soundness, mm compressive strength, n mm-2 early final 2 days 28 days c1 135 0:44 1:44 2.75 0.24 0.42 c2 225 0:13 0:35 0.50 4.12 26.67 c3 124 3:35 4:29 3.00 0.23 8.42 c4 185 1:57 > 10 hour 1.00 0.53 0.72 c5 178 0:05 0:15 2.00 1.44 2.28 figure 1. early and final setting times of the cement samples in minutes. table 4. mineral compositions in (g/g) % of the cement samples c1-c5 according to the il-lab-41 testing method. minerals c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 belite 24.2 69.1 65.9 52.7 58.4 ferrite 7.5 13.1 8.5 24.6 20.8 cubic aluminate 8.5 0.4 0.0 0.2 4.7 orthorhombic aluminate 20.5 0.0 0.0 1.5 0.0 free lime 1.4 0.5 1.7 0.6 0.1 anhydrite 2.1 6.8 3.8 1.5 5.3 halmagyi, mosonyi, fazekas, maria, and firuta hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 138 setting times, the quantity of water required to form cement paste of standard (normal) consistency was determined previously [29]. the water data for standard consistency are presented in table 6. the setting time for the paste with standard consistency was measured using a vicat device. the initial and final setting data of the investigated cements are also shown in table 6 and fig.1. the compressive strengths have been determined according to the sn en-1/2006 method [30] and the data are shown in fig.2. the investigated cements exhibited different mechanical strengths, as a function of their mineral compositions. the strength of sab cements depends mainly on the mineral ye’elimite (ca4al6o12so4 or c4a3s ) during the initial minutes up to hours of hydration [31, 32]. yeʼelimite is almost entirely responsible for the hydration reactions at early ages of csa-type cements [23]. the presence of belite was found to be responsible for compressive strength at late ages. the compositions of raw material mixtures for these experimental cements influenced their mineral contents. taking into consideration these, the initial strengths are better for the cements containing diatomite (sample c2), volcanic tuff (sample c3), basaltic scoria (sample c4), and red mud (sample c5). a higher content of red mud is favoured over sample c4 (see tables 3 and 4, fig.2). a good evolution of mechanical strength over time is shown for samples c5 and especially for the c2 cements. c3 cement sample is also notable, but with lower initial strength, which is an important characteristic for a favourable evolution of specific surface area. this is clearly the largest value for cement sample c3. the cements containing basaltic scoria generally developed lower mechanical strengths in comparison to those containing diatomite or volcanic tuff. the cement containing diatomite is noticeable due to its very high initial strength (table 6). for this cement, the compressive strength, after two days increased, which may be a consequence of the increased specific surface area. in terms of practical applications, the development of cement of good mechanical strength and workability depending on the setting time is of importance. the setting time of investigated cements was decisively influenced by the content of raw material mixtures (see table 3). in the order of c4→c3→c1→c2→c5, the setting time becomes shorter. for the cement samples containing 1.2% red mud, 20.7% basaltic scoria (c5) and 13.7 % diatomite (c2), the setting time is quick. this is a consequence of rapid hydration processes. because of this, these latter samples can be considered for practical applications only as retarding admixtures or super-plasticizers due to their set-retarding effect. soundness shows reasonable values, which is required to be less than 10 mm for portland cement. 4. conclusion based on investigations into cement samples in the laboratory of the hoghiz plant, it can be concluded that from all raw material mixtures, heated at temperatures of between 1260 and 1300 ºc, resultant clinkers contain more belite, ferrite, and anhydrite. physico-mechanical properties show good compressive strength at early ages, good soundness, the biggest blaine specific surface area (ssp = 8745 cm 2 g-1) for cement containing limestone, diatomite, and gypsum, as well as belite and anhydrite. the use of the local raw materials from the carpathian orocline area, e.g. varghis limestones, bodoc clays, nucsoara gypsum, volcanic tuffs from racosul de sus, basaltic scoria from racosul de jos, and filia diatomite, facilitated the formation of cements that are more belitical than sulphoaluminate. acknowledgement the authors are grateful to chemi ceramic srl in sfantu gheorghe where the specific experimental cements were manufactured and to the hoghiz plant where their physico-mechanical characteristics were tested. references [1] chen, i.a.: synthesis of portland cement and calcium sulfoaluminate-belite cement for sustainable development and performance, ph.d. dissertation, the university of texas at austin, 2009 www.lib.utexas.edu/etd/d/2009/cheni55279 [2] jun-an, d.; de-dong, l.; mu-zhen, s.; jan-mon, w.: a study of mineral composition of cement in the quinary system cao-sio2-al2o3-fe2o3-so3, j. chin. ceram. soc. 1982 article no. 4 en.cnki.com.cn/article_en/cjfdtotalgxyb198204000 [3] zhang, l.; su, m.; wang, y.: development and use of sulphoand ferro-aluminate cements in china, adv. chem. res. 1999 1, 15–21 doi: 10.1680/adcr.1999.11.1.15 figure 2. compressive strength of cement samples after 2 and 28 days in mpa. characterisation of cements from dominantly volcanic raw materials 44(2) pp. 135–139 (2016) doi: 10.1515/hjic-2016-0017 139 [4] soner, i.: utilization of fluidized bed combustion ashes as raw material in the production of a special cement, m.sc. dissertation, middle east technical university, haziran, turkey, june 2009 www.osti.gov/scitech/biblio/5635811 [5] majling, j.; roy, m.d.: the potential of fly ash for cement manufacture, am. ceram. soc. bull. 1993 72(10), 77–81 www.osti.gov/scitech/biblio/5635811 [6] gartner, e.: industrially interesting approaches to “low-co2” cements, cement concrete res. 2004 34, 1489–1498 doi: 10.1016/j.cemconres.2004.01.021 [7] quillin, k.: performance of belite-sulfoaluminate cements, cement concrete res. 2001 31, 1341– 1349 doi: 10.1016/s0008-8846(01)00543-9 [8] phair, w.j.: green chemistry for sustainable cement production and use, green chem. 2006 8, 763–780 doi: 10.1039/b603997a [9] zhou, q.; milestone, b.n.; hayes, m.: an alternative to portland cement for waste encapsulation the calcium sulfoaluminate cement system, j. hazard. mat. 2006 136, 120–129 doi: 10.1016/j.jhazmat.2005.11.038 [10] arjunan, p.; silsbee, r.m.; roy, m.d.: sulfoaluminate-belite cement from low-calcium fly ash and sulfur-rich and other industrial by products, cement concrete res. 1999 29, 1305– 1311 doi: 10.1016/s0008-8846(99)00072-1 [11] janotka, i.; krajci, l.; mojumdar, c.s.: influence of portland cement addition to sulphoaluminate belite cement on hydration and mechanical properties of hardened mortars, ceramics-silikaty 2002 46(3), 110–116 www.irsm.cas.cz/materialy/ cs_content/2002/janotka_cs_2002_0000.pdf [12] sahu, s.; majling, j.: preparation of sulphoaluminate belite cement from fly ash, cement concrete res. 1994 24(6), 1065–1072 doi: 10.1016/0008-8846(94)90030-2 [13] janotka, j.; krajci, l.; mojumdar, c.s.: performance of sulphoaluminate-belite cements with high c4a3 content, ceramics-silikaty 2007 51(2), 74–81 www.irsm.cas.cz/materialy/cs_content/2007/ janotka_cs_2007_0000.pdf [14] adolfsson, d.; menad, n.; viggh, e.; björkman, b.: steelmaking slags as raw material for sulphoaluminate belite cement, adv. cement res. 2007 19(4), 147–156 doi: 10.1680/adcr.2007.19.4.147 [15] popescu, d.c.; muntean, m.; sharp, h.j.: industrial trial production of law energy belite cement, cement concrete composites 2003 25, 689–693 doi: 10.1016/s0958-9465(02)00097-5 [16] katsioti, m.; tsakiridis, e.p.; leonardou-agatzini, s.; oustadakis, p.: examination of the jarositealunite precipitate addition in the raw meal for the production of sulfoaluminate cement clinker, j. hazard. mat. 2006 131(1–3), 187–194 doi: 10.1016/j.jhazmat.2005.09.028 [17] kasselouri, v.; tsakiridis, p.; malami, c.; georgali, b.; alexandridou, c.: a study on the hydration products of a non-expansive sulfoaluminate cement, cement concrete res. 1995 25(8), 1726–1736 doi: 10.1016/00088846(95)00168-9 [18] mehta, k.p.: investigations on energy-saving cements, world cement technol. 1980 11(5), 166– 177 [19] zhang, l.; glasser, p.f.: hydration of calcium sulfoaluminate cement in less than 24 h, adv. cement res. 2002 14(4), 141–155 doi: 10.1680/adcr.2002.14.4.141 [20] uchikawa, h.: management strategy in cement technology for the next century part 3, world cement 1994 vol(11), 47–54 [21] teoreanu, i.; muntean, m.: expansive sulphate aluminate cements, cement concrete res. 1983 13, 711–720 [22] dan, e.: the low energy cements durability, manufactured with addition of industrial waste materials, ph.d. thesis (university politehnica bucharest, bucharest, romania) 2004 (in romanian) [23] bullerjahn, f.; haka, m.b.; scrivener, k.: iron solid solutions of yeʼelimite-effect on reactivity, proc. 19th int. building material expo (weimar, germany) 2015 researchgate.net/publication/282356671 [24] cuesta, a.; álvarez-pinazo, g.; sanfélix, s.g.; peral, i.; aranda, m.a.g.; de la torre, a.g.: hydration mechanisms of two polymorphs of synthetic yeʼelimite, cement concrete res. 2014 63, 127–136 doi: 10.1016/j.cemconres.2014.05.010 [25] idrissi, m.; diour, a.; damidot, d.; greneche, j.m.; alami talbi, m.; taibi m.: characterisation of iron inclusion during the formation of calcium sulfoaluminate phase, cement concrete res. 2010 40(8), 1314–1319 doi: 10.1016/j.cemconres.2010.02.009 [26] pöllmann, h.; stöber, s.; schmidt, r.: synthesis and characterization of sulfoaluminate (belite) cements from industrial residues, proc. 1st int. conf. on sulphoaluminate cement: mat. engng. technol (wuhan university of technology press, wuhan, china) pp. 366–384, 2013 www.irsm.cas.cz/ materialy/cs_content/2013/ma_cs_2013_0000.pdf [27] sr en standard 196-6: method of testing cement part 6: determination of blaine specific surface area and specific density, 2006 tpm.fsv.cvut.cz/ student/documents/files/bum1/chapter12.pdf [28] sr en standard 196-9: method of testing cement part 9: determination of the heat of hydration, 2006 tpm.fsv.cvut.cz/student/documents/files/bum1/chapter12.pdf [29] sr en standard 196-3: method of testing cement part 3: determination of setting time and le chatelier soundness, 2006 tpm.fsv.cvut.cz/student/ documents/files/bum1/chapter12.pdf [30] sr en standard 196-1: method of testing cement part 1: determination of strength, 2006 [31] zhang, l.; su, m.; wang, y.: development and use of sulfoand ferro-aluminate cements in china, adv. cement res. 1999 1, 15–21 doi: 10.1680/adcr.1999.11.1.15 [32] winnefeld, f.; barlag, s.: calorimetric and thermogravimetric study on the influence of calcium sulfate on the hydration of yeʼelimite, j. therm. anal. calorimet. 2009 101(3), 949–957 doi: 10.1007/s10973-009-0582-6 microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 37(2) pp. 165-167 (2009) new results on the field of “white biotechnology” a. nemeth , g. nagy, b. sevella budapest university of technology and econpomics, department of applied biotechnology and food science h–1111 budapest műegyetem rkp. 3., hungary e-mail: naron@f-labor.mkt.bme.hu “white biotechnology” term is used to describe the production of chemical compounds by enzymatic or microbial (biotechnological) methods. our research group focuses on the field of glycerol utilization and lactic acid production, and in this work we present a new kinetic model based on our laboratory lactic acid experiments, and used for planning continuous fermentation with high productivity. keywords: lactic acid, kinetic model, continuous fermentation introduction “white biotechnology” was defined by karl-erich jaeger [1] as an expression describing the biotechnological production of compounds with the help of enzymes and/or microorganisms. the work in our research group has been focusing on this field since many years, and the main topics became glycerol and lactic acid platforms. in this report we present the results of our developments on the field of fermentative lactic acid production. lactic acid (la) is a chiral carbon acid, known since more than a century, and used over several decades mostly for food industry. recently its application field was significantly expanded (pharmaceutical and polymer industry) as well as its production volume, thus it came again into the focus of researches. although it can be produced chemically as well as biologically, in the former case racemic mixture is formed, in the latter case – depending on the producer strain – optically pure (lor d-lactic acid) arises. most probably this is the reason, why it is mainly biologically produced via microbial fermentation. the fermentation ability of microorganism admit of biological production of lactic acid on glucose (glu) substrate resulting in either lactic acid alone as product (homofermentatives, using embden-meyerhof-parnas metabolic route) or lactic acid together with further products such as acetic acid, ethanol, co2 (heterofermentatives, pentose-phosphate route). there are also some strains producing solely lactic acid on glycose, or together with by-products on c5 sugars. they are usually called as facultative homofermentatives. while from the point of view of white biotechnology certainly homofermentatives are of most important, for the food industry heterofermentatives are also in the focus of interest. the reason is that in the former case the goal is to convert as much substrate into product as much is possible, while in the latter case, the given ratio of the various fermentation products serves as aroma and flavour compounds. the efficiency of lactic acid fermentation is usually given with volumetric productivity (g lactic acid/l broth/hour). in this term the published data are in a very wide range (1.5–35 g·l-1·h-1) [2] depending on the applied strain, fermentation technique, and media. however, the known industrial processes with batch operation resultin a productivity range of 2.5–3 g·l-1·h-1. we already presented [3-4] that our homofermentative microorganism belonging to lactobacilli genus makes a competitive lactic acid production possible. in this report we present a kinetic model built up on the basis of several batch lactic acid fermentations. this model was applied in simulation studies to plan continuous fermentation resulting in higher volumetric productivity. material and methods lactobacillus mkt878 was chosed on the basis of an earlier screening program run at our laboratory [3] and was deposited at national collection of agricultural and industrial microorganism with reference number ncaim-b02375. batch fermentation were carried out on the media optimized for this strains previously as follows: 120 g·l-1 glucose, 30 g·l-1 cornstep-liquor (hungrana, roquette), 6 g·l-1 yeast extract (ye), 0.5 g·l-1 mgso4·7h2o, 0.3 g·l -1 feso4·7h2o, 0.01 g·l -1 mnso4. fermentations were carried out in biostat q bench top fermenter (bbraun) at ph = 5.8 (controlling with 20% naoh and 25% h2so4), 37 °c and 700 rpm stirring 166 rate. 3 agar slants served as inoculums after suspension of cells in sterile water. the process was followed due sampling, and od600 was measured after 20x dilution to determine cell density (dry weight (g·l-1) = 0.5·od600). the filtered (through 0,2 μm pore size filter)) supernatant of the sample was analysed with waters breeze hplc system (0,5 ml·min-1 5 mm h2so4 as eluant on biorad aminex hpx87h column at 65 °c with ri detection at 40 °c) for glucose and lactic acid. since the rather rare sampling there were not enough measured data for kinetic evaluation, further dry weight, glucose and lactic acid data was calculated on the basis of base consumption (of ph control) which is proportional to the cell and product formation, and these data series were used for fitting the kinetic equations with berkeley madonna 8. software. for the calculation of dry weight, glucose and lactic acid the following factors were applied: odcalculated = 1.26·base consumption, dwcalculated = 0.5·odcalculated lacalculated=0.52·base consumption, glucalculated = glu0-(dwcalculated-lacalculated)·1.2 results in fig. 1 a tipical batch fermentation is shown with the measured and calculated data points, the latter was enabling the kinetic studies. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 20 40 60 [g*l-1] fermentation time [h] 090219 la m easured la calculated glucose m easured glucose calculated od m easured dw calculated base consum ption figure 1: batch la fermetnation as basis of our fermentation model the monod equation was applied (eq. 1) completed with the product formation model of luedeking-piret (eq. 2). while the monod-model can calculate the changes in biomass concentration, l-p model is able to predict the changes in product concentration. the substrate consumption was calculated with the overall yield (yx/s) from the growth rate (eq. 3). the applied initial conditions were as follows: s0 = 105.3 g·l -1, x0 = 0.67 g·l -1 and p0 = 3.3 g·l -1. sk s x dt dx s + ⋅=⋅= max, μμμ (1) xbxa dt dp ⋅+⋅⋅= μ (2) dt dx ydt ds sx ⋅−= / 1 (3) it can be seen on fig. 1 biomass reaches its maximum (plateau) much earlier than the product concentration. the 1-3. equation system is not able to handle this situation, since through the overall yield the biomass is connected directly to the substrate. thus, when the culture reaches its plateau, the substrate has already zero value, although according to the measurements, there is a continuing product formation from substrate. to solve this problem, the model had to be reconstructed as follows: the growth-independent part of the product formation had to be converted into maintenance term (eq. 4) which appeared also in the substrate equation (eq. 5) xmxa dt dp ⋅+⋅⋅= μ (4) xm dt dx ydt ds sx ⋅−⋅−= / 1 (5) the value of the specific maintenance coefficient (‘m’) was determined from the slope of the substrate consumption, after the biomass reached its plateau. in the case of the presented fermentation (fig. 1) m = 0.222 h-1 was obtained. finally 3 variables had to be fitted to 3 data series, meanwhile 3 parameter had to be determined (yield, ks, μmax) for the flexibility of the model the duration of the lagphase and the time point of cell growth stop had to be determined either by experiments or simulations. the measured and simulated data of the presented (fig. 1) batch fermentation can be seen on fig. 2. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 c o nc en tr at io ns [ g* l1 ] fermentation time [h] calculated and simulated values 090219 s(model) gluc(calculated) p(model) la(calculated) x(model) dw(calculated) r2average=0.998 figure 2: fitting model to calculated dataseries model fitting resulted in an adequate model with the following parameters: μmax = 0.134 h -1, ks = 0.268 g·l -1, yx/s = 0.143 g·g -1, tlag = 0.132 h, tstop = 20.22 h, a = yp/yx/s = 4.18. 167 although, the fitting results showed excellent agreement with the experimental data further fermentation was used for model verification (fig. 3). 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 0 20 40 60 80 100 c on ce nt ra tio ns [ g* l1 ] fermentation time [h] measured and simulated values 081030 s(model) gluc(measured) p(m odel) la(m easured) x(model) dw(measured) r2average=0.89 figure 3: model verification with further fementation, tlag = 26,5 h, tstop = 46 h since the correlation in this case was also appropriate after setting up the individual parameters (i.e. tlag and tstop), we used this model to predict the behaviour of a continuous system. figure 4: modelling continuous operation (1) cell growth stop (tstop) (2) feed start with sf = 80 g·l-1 substrate concentration the aim of our simulation was to reach high volumetric productivity beside high (industrially preparable, cost effective) product concentration. according to simulation results (fig. 4) beside d = 0.1 h-1 dilution rate 51.6 g·l la concentration can be reached, which resulted in jp = 5.2 g·l·h -1 volumetric productivity, that is nearly two fold of the original batch process’s value. since the presented product concentration is really high, before using the model in further simulation studies we want to try experimentally to verify the continuous operation. summary during the development of a fermentation technology of the more and more promisable and platform forming lactic acid we build up a kinetic model, which is able to describe the two steps of the fermentation: 1. cell growth, and 2. product formation as a “byproduct” of energy production of cells for maintenance. this model predict results beeing very closely to the measured data, thus we used it for examining the continuous operation of la fermentations. references 1. jaeger k. e.: current opinion in biotechnology, 15:269–271, (2004). 2. rojan p. j., k. madhavan nampoothiri, ashok pandey: applied microbiology and biotechnology, 74, 524–534 (2007), mini review. 3. hetényi k., németh á., sevella b.: fifth croatian professional and scientific conference on biotechnology with international participation 2007, stubicke toplice. 4. hetényi k., németh á., sevella b.: 35. műszaki kémiai napok 2007, veszprém, 164–167. << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word a_06_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 38(1). pp. 27-33 (2010) power conditioning with electric car battery charging from renewable sources p. görbe , a. magyar, k. m. hangos department of electrical engineering and information systems, university of pannonia veszprém egyetem u. 10. 8200 hungary e-mail: gorbep@almos.vein.hu a control method for electric car battery charging combined with small domestic power plants using renewable energy is described in this paper. this method is not only capable of optimizing the working point and charging current of the system but also implements robust energy flow control to balance the convenient process variables.the proposed controller has been investigated by simulation in matlab environment, and as a result, succesful combination of a grid synchronised inverter and a electric car battery charger robust operation could be achieved in changing operational modes. keywords: power quality, electric car, battery charging, simulation, nonlinear distortion, renewable power sources introduction with the price of electrical energy rising the small domestic power plants are coming into general use in the european union too (in the range of 1–5 kva). the isolated working mode of these plants is not an efficient way since the cost effective energy storage is not a solved problem yet. on the other hand the electric cars development turns to be general in vehicle industry. these two problems can be handled jointly, since the optimal working point of the renewable power source (photovoltaic panel or wind generator) and the optimal charging current of the li-ion battery can only be optimized jointly. the optimal working point is important for the economical operation, the optimal charging current is important for extending the lifetime of the expensive electric car batteries. the optimal working mode sometimes needs additional electrical power, sometimes gives remaining efficient power and theese need additional storage capacity. grid tie inverter systems can be used to inject the spare power to the local low voltage mains. this power is utilized in the local neighborhood, not far from the injection point so the loss is small. in addition, the construction of this type of inverters makes them suitable for conditioning the line, correcting the accurate voltage forms, and repairing the reactive power in the mains. therefore, this additional functionality doesn't need expensive change of the constructions, we should only modify the control methods and regulators to develop the ability of line conditioning. the cost of changing the controlling processor and control software negligible to the cost of equipment. on the other hand with high percentage of fluctuating renewable energy sources the connected electric car batteries can absorb peaks of power production or feed the power into the grid [12]. several papers deal with power injection to the grid, see e.g. [1] for a recent survey. the possibility of power factor correction in conjunction with power injection has also been realized [2, 3, 5]. furthermore, its connection with nonlinear distortion reduction has also been explored [6] and [8]. in [6] and [8] the authors use the dsp based current control technique for distortion reduction with active power filters (apf) for compensating an exact nonlinear load. sensing the nonlinear current time function and the ideal sinusoid current with phase locked loop (pll) technique, they inject the exact deviation current into the grid with radical distortion reduction. the aim of our work has been to develop and investigate control methods for performing active power factor correction and lowering the extant harmonic distortion in the line without the need for current measurement. as our earlier papers show [9, 11], this aim can be achieved in addition to control the maximum power operating point from the renewable source (wind generator or photovoltaic panel) by adding new elements to the schematic construction designed for the built-in elements. the aim of this paper is to develop an improved construcion of combination of a small domestic power plant and battery charger components and to investigate the robustness of the proposed method with respect to working mode changes of the system consisting of a renewable source, an electric car battery charger and the nonlinear distorted low voltage electric network. 28 background and motivation the use of low consumption equipments with simple switching power supplies (mobile phone chargers, notebooks, networking products, small variable frequency motor drives, telecommunication consumer electronics) a capacitive load with high nonlinearities creates significant 3rd and 5th upper harmonic current components, which cause serious distortion in the voltage shape. it is well-known, that it is difficult to compensate the reactive power of this type of nonlinear distorted voltage shape with traditional shunt capacitances (compensator). the distortion of the voltage shape is commonly characterized by the overall reactive power 2 )(sin|)(ˆ||)(ˆ| == =1=1 kkikv qq ls n k k n k b φ ∑∑ where the positive integer n is the (highest) number of harmonics of interest, qk, v ˆ s(k), i ˆ l(k) and φ(k) are the the reactive power, the source (s) peak voltage, the load (l) peak current and the phase-angle difference of the k-th harmonic, respectively. the power factor (pf) of the source is defined by [3] as |||||||| , = ss ss iv iv pf ⋅ 〉〈 where 〉〈 ss ivp ,= is the active (real) power and the product s = ║vs║·║is║ is the apparent power calculated from effective values. from the cauchy-schwartz inequality, it follows that p ≤ s. hence 1,1][−∈pf is a dimensionless measure of the energy-transmission efficiency. the total harmonic distortion (thd) is defined as [5]: 2 1 2 2= || )|(| = v v thd k k ∑ ∞ where v1 equals to the voltage amplitude of the fundamental frequency and vn is the voltage amplitude of the n-th harmonic. in applications with capacitive input stage, thd > 0 holds. upper harmonic components have many undesirable effects on power grid [11] causing faulty operation of the network. problem statement as it is indicated in the above discussion, it is desirable to develop a control method that can compensate the distortion caused by the capacitive nonlinear load using the built-in and available controller of electric car battery charger combined with small domestic power plants. the controller unit of these plants can be extended with three new elements to form a complex multifunctional controller unit. the first function of this complex control unit is a conventional maximum power controller that is used to inject base harmonic in phase with the sinusoid current to the mains. the second function is a conventional charger controller that controls the convenient charging current value. the third function, that is to be implemented, is the compensation of the undesirable effects of the linear network with production base harmonic current being not in phase, by injecting reactive power to compensate the inductive and capacitive loads. the third function to be implemented would be the compensation of the nonlinear distortion that is intended to achieved by injecting upper harmonic (mainly 3rd and 5th, but possibly higher) sinusoid current components to reduce the harmonic distortion and to lower the reactive power of the upper harmonic load currents. our aim has been to implement the missing three elements and their relationship, the simplest possible way. the main goals of the three new elements are to approach unity power factor for the overall system for the range of the possible loads and working modes, and to reduce thd. there is a trade-off between these goals that should be taken into account. the intervention to these factors is limited by the renewable source maximum power point, the semiconductors of the bridge and the serial inductances, as well as by the speed and cycle time and the computational capacity of the control device. the optimum would be to have a unit pf and zero thd, but unfortunately, this optimum is not achievable in practice, just approachable. the practical aim is to compensate the upper harmonic component. these values will be used to reduce the nonlinear distortion at the output. structure of the multifunctional complex controller a simple model of the grid tie inverter [2] is used for the controller structure design, that is shown in fig. 1. it contains a simple booster stage with an igbt bridge, connected to the grid through serial inductance. the control system is divided to six main functional parts as shown in fig. 2 in shadowed boxes. • maximum power controller it is a general part of the control system, independent from the other control parts. its' only task is to operate the renewable power source (photovoltaic panel or wind generator) at the optimal working point in any wind and solar condition to get the maximal amount of electric power from the source. the output of the maximum power controller is the input current setpoint of the inverter. the input current control is a simple on/off switching nonlinear hysteresis controller [6]. • charger controller this part of the control system is also independent from the other control parts. it is responsible for controlling the bulk converter's switching element s6 (fig. 3) to adjust the convenient charging current value of the li-ion 29 battery. the current control is also a simple on/off switching nonlinear hysteresis controller [6]. • intermediate voltage controller it senses the intermediate voltage, and observes the difference between the measured and the setpoint value. the controller changes the fundamental harmonic amplitude of the injected current using a simple p controller based on the difference. upper harmonic components have no effect on the intermediate voltage so they are not used by the upper harmonic controller. the controller adjusts the effective power injection to the grid in each 20 ms cycle. • upper harmonic controller the main controller of the complex multi-functional unit is the upper harmonic controller. its' inputs are the computed 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th and 11th upper harmonic component amplitudes of the measured voltage, the outputs are the output current base, and its 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th and 11th upper harmonic components' amplitudes and phases. these currents are used for compensating the nonlinear distortion using an advanced controller (see details in [9, 11]). • current waveform generator this block will calculate the necessary exact time function of the output current setpoint, which is the setpoint of the bridge current controller. • bridge controller it calculates the difference between the measured output current and the output current setpoint, and switches the igbt bridge two half's control signal (s1s4, s2-s3) on and off in alternate way using a simple schmitt trigger comparator, that realizes a simple on/off switching hysteresis controller [6]. the above blocks influence each other directly, and also through some measurable voltages and currents of the inverter (see fig. 4). figure 1: grid tie inverter model 30 figure 2: control flow chart diagram figure 3: system matlab simulink model 31 modeling and simulation the mathematical model of the nonlinear distorted network has been implemented in matlab simulink using the power electronics toolbox [7]. the control flow chart of the complete model can be seen in fig. 3. modeling the nonlinear network and the battery three type of loads have been modeled: (i) an ohmic one, that represents, for example, heating devices, traditional bulbs, (ii) an ohmic with serial inductance representing motors and rotating household appliances (washing machine, lawnmower etc.) and (iii) a capacitive input stage load for representing the simple nonlinear switching mode power supplies. table 1: load parameter values load nl1 nl2 nl3 resistance 25 ω 50 ω 35 ω capacitance 10 mf 5 mf 7 mf the battery has been modeled by the battery block of matlab simulink power electronics toolbox using the following parameters: nominal voltage 153.6 v, rated capacity 200 ah. simulation experiments as a first step of model verification, the basic elements of the system, the load part, the maximum power controller, and the intermediate voltage controller have been tested. these results served as reference values for comparison. fig. 4 shows these simulated voltage and current values as functions of time. figure 4: voltage and current with inverter on robustness analysis against the energy flow the robustness of the intermediate voltage controller against the changing of the energy flow from the sources to the different loads has been examined using the following four cases: ● normal inverter mode the energy flows from the renewable source to the grid only (fig. 5). ● normal inverter and battery charger mode the energy flows from the renewable source to the li-ion battery and to the grid too (fig. 6 and 7). ● battery charger mode the energy flows from the grid to the li-ion battery only (fig. 8). ● distortion reduction mode the energy flows from the grid into the intermediate capacitance and from the intermediate capacitance into the grid. the energy balance is zero for a whole period, the active power is zero (fig. 9) [9, 11]. figure 5: energy flow: normal inverter mode figure 6: energy flow: normal inverter and battery charger mode 32 the robustness analysis has been performed by changing the energy flow modes in subsequent time intervals as seen in table 2 implemented by changing the source (u0pv) and load (ibattcharge) parameters. the simulation results can be seen in fig. 13, where uintermediate (the intermediate voltage value of the puffer capacitor) and ibaseampl (the amplitude of the base harmonic current component injected to the grid) are plotted as a function of time. figure 7: energy flow: normal inverter and battery charger mode figure 8: energy flow: battery charger mode figure 9: energy flow: distortion reduction mode the controller has been found very robust and tolerant against changing the energy flow mode; the operating mode change transients are monotonous without overshoot. the castor time is less than 0.1 second. a preliminary distortion reduction performance has also been computed in normal inverter mode, the results are seen in fig. 10 and table 3. figure 10: robustness analysis of the controller table 2: parameters of the robustness analysis time 0–0.5 sec 0.5–1 sec 1–1.5 sec 1.5–2 sec u0pv 300 v 300 v 0 v 0 v ibattcharge 0 a 30 a 30 a 0 a table 3: preliminary performance analysis results in normal inverter mode mode irms error thd inverter off ni 39.63 14.26% upper h.contr on 5.74 a 3.87 5.23% conclusion a novel control structure for small domestic power plants integrated with electric car battery charger using renewable energy is described in this paper. it is capable of optimizing the working point of the plant and maintaining the convenient energy balance. the proposed controller has been investigated by using matlab simulation, and a stable and robust operation has been achieved. preliminary analysis showed that the extended controller was able to reduce voltage thd almost as much as our previous inverter controller [11]. future work will be directed towards investigating the effect of the upper harmonic compensation in this combined application using the different source-load modes on the thd and effective current values. furthermore, a new connection type will be defined to allow the injection of the electric power into the grid from the stored reserve in battery in case of highly fluctuating needs [12]. acknowledgement we acknowledge the financial support of this work by the hungarian state and the european union under the tamop-4.2.1/b-09/1/konv-2010-0003 project. the work has also been partially supported by the hungarian national science fund through grant no. k67625. 33 references 1. a j. m. carrasco, l. g. franquelo, j. t. bialasiewicz, e. galván, r. c. p. guisado, ma. á. m. prats, j. i. león, n. m. alfonso: powerelectronic systems for the grid integration of renewable energy sources: a survey, ieee transactions on industrial electronics, 53(4), 2006, 1003–1015. 2. y. k. lo, t. p. lee, k. h. wu: grid-connected photovoltaic system with power factor correction, ieee transactions on industrial electronics, 55(5), 2008, 2224–2227. 3. e. gar e. garcía-canseco, r. grino, r. ortega, m. salichs, a. m. stankovic: power-factor compensation of electrical circuits, a framework for analysis and design in the nonlinear nonsinusoidal case, ieee control systems magazine, (april 2007.). 4. c. i. budeanu, puissance réactives et fictives. bucarest: institut national roumain pour 1'étude de i'aménagement et de 1'utilisation des sources d'énergie, 1927 [online]. available: http://wwwl.lib.uchicago.cdu/e/index.php3. 5. a. cerdeira, m. a. alema, m. estrada, d. flandre: integral function method for determination of nonlinear harmonic distortion, solid-state electronics, 48(12), 2004, 2225–2234. 6. l. r. limongi, r. bojoi, g. griva, a tenconi: comparing the performance of digital signal processor-based current controllers for three-phase active power filters, ieee industrial electronics, 3(1), 2009, 20–31. 7. matlab simulink power electronics toolbox http://www.mathworks.com. 8. l. r. limongi, r. bojoi, a. tenconi, l. clotea: single-phase inverter with power quality features for distributed generation systems optimization of electrical and electronic equipment, 2008. optim 2008. 11th international conference (may 2008.) 313–318. 9. p. görbe, a. magyar, k. m. hangos: line conditioning with grid synchronized inverter's power injection of renewable sources in nonlinear distorted mains, 10th international phd workshop on systems and control (sept. 2009.) isbn:97880-903834-3-2, on cd. 10. r. c. dugen, m. f. mcgranaghan, s. santozo, h. w. beaty: electrical power systems quality, second edition, mcgraw-hill 2003. 11. p. görbe, a. magyar, k. m. hangos: thd reduction with grid synchronized inverter’s power injection of renewable sources, 20th international symposium on power electronics, electrical drives, automation and motion (speedam) (2010) isbn:978-1-4244-7919-1, on cd, 1381–1386. 12. c. binding, o. sundström, d. gantenbeim, b. jansen: integration of an electrical vehicle fleet into the power grid, european research consortium for informatics and mathematics news nr 82, july 2010, 57–58. << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 45(1) pp. 9–15 (2017) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.1515/hjic-2017-0003 selective removal of hydrogen sulphide from industrial gas mixtures using zeolite naa tamás kristóf* department of physical chemistry, institute of chemistry, university of pannonia, egyetem u. 10., veszprém, h-8200, hungary hydrogen sulphide removal from simple gas mixtures using a highly polar zeolite was studied by molecular simulation. the equilibrium adsorption properties of hydrogen sulphide, hydrogen, methane and their mixtures on dehydrated zeolite naa were computed by grand canonical monte carlo simulations. existing all-atom intermolecular potential models were optimized to reproduce the adsorption isotherms of the pure substances. the adsorption results of the mixture, also confirmed by iast calculations, showed very high selectivities of hydrogen sulphide to the investigated non-polar gases, predicting an outstanding performance of zeolite naa in technological applications that target hydrogen sulphide capture. keywords: hydrogen sulphide, zeolite, selectivity, gas mixture, molecular simulation 1. introduction hydrogen sulphide is a highly toxic, acidic and corrosive substance. it is present naturally in landfills, natural and biogases, as well as in several synthesis gases. one of its main anthropogenic sources is the processing of crude oil in industrial refineries, where hydrodesulfurization (hds) of a variety of streams (e.g. engine fuels) produces hydrogen sulphide-containing gas mixtures, which need to be purified. the economic removal of hydrogen sulphide is a long-standing task of the oil and gas industry. adsorptive separation involves the use of solid substrates with a specific affinity with particular compounds of the mixture. zeolites have been applied as catalysts in the petrochemical industry for a relatively long time and these materials can also be used for purification/separation purposes. zeolites are crystalline aluminosilicates consisting of a threedimensional framework of sio4 and alo4 tetrahedra of a highly regular porous structure [1]. the typical size of zeolitic micropores is similar to that of many small molecules. in contrast to various other adsorbents, zeolites generally endure high temperatures and pressures well, and can tolerate harsh chemical environments. the si/al ratio is a key factor in the application of zeolites. zeolites with lower si/al ratios are more hydrophilic, whereas high-silica zeolites often possess fewer structural defects. these latter adsorbents are preferred in the separation of non-polar gases. zeolite naa is a synthetic microporous zeolite which accommodates extraframework na + ions. it exhibits an especially high affinity with small polar *correspondence: kristoft@almos.uni-pannon.hu molecules such as water. the adsorption and separation properties of zeolite naa have already been examined in several experimental [2-6] and theoretical/simulation [7-16] works. in our laboratories, the adsorption characteristics of zeolite naa and its performance as a drying agent by classical atomistic simulations [10, 1214] were studied, and new intermolecular potential models for this zeolite [12-14] proposed. our models were optimized for the study of the selective adsorption of water from its mixtures with less polar or non-polar molecules like simple alcohols, carbon monoxide, hydrogen and methane. in this paper, the selective removal of hydrogen sulphide by zeolite naa is investigated. molecular simulation predictions for mixture adsorption from two and three-component gas mixtures containing hydrogen sulphide (h2s), hydrogen (h2) and methane (ch4) are presented. 2. models and simulation details zeolite naa [17-18] is of lta framework type, the structure of which belongs to the fm-3c space group with a lattice parameter of 2.4555 nm. the threedimensional cubic arrangement of its framework atoms is comprised of three kinds of rings with four (4r), six (6r) or eight (8r) oxygen atoms. the interconnection of 4r and 6r rings forms nearly spherical cages (sodalite cages) and these cages are linked by oxygen bridges, shaping straight channels of supercages with a maximum diameter of about 1.2 nm. the standard type of zeolite naa has a si/al ratio of 1. in the present study, the unit-cell composition of the standard type of zeolite naa was chosen: it consists kristóf hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 10 of 576 framework atoms, namely 96 silicon, 96 aluminium and 384 oxygen atoms. the framework atoms were fixed at the atomic positions measured in xray diffraction experiments [17] and the 96 nonframework na + ions were allowed to move. according to the löwenstein rule that prohibits aloal linkages, each alo4 tetrahedron of this framework is connected to a sio4 tetrahedron. realistic and rigid all-atom intermolecular potential models, consisting of lennard-jones and coulombic interaction sites, were used in the simulations. in these models, the interaction sites were fixed at their experimental atomic positions and assigned their lennard-jones energy (ε) and size (σ) parameters, as well as point charges (q). for zeolite naa, the model that was developed earlier was modified slightly [14] by adding weak lennard-jones interaction sites with realistic size parameters [16, 19] to the (originally) pure coulombic silicon and aluminium atoms, thus preserving the dominant role of oxygen atoms in the dispersion interactions of the framework. for hydrogen sulphide, a rigid four-site model proposed recently by shah et al. [20] was adopted, in which the location of the charge parameter of the sulphur atom is offset on the hsh angle bisector towards the hydrogen atoms. an opls-aa model [21] was used for the methane molecules, and its lennard-jones h parameters were also applied to the h2 molecules, with partial charges on the atomic sites and on the molecular centre of mass [22]. table 1 lists the potential parameters of the above models. instead of the generally accepted lorentz-berthelot combining rule, the unlike lennard-jones interactions were computed by the combining rule proposed by waldman and hagler [23]. this combining rule links the behaviour of the unlike energy parameter εij to the relative sizes of atoms i and j and yields somewhat smaller values for the parameters εij and ij when ii≠jj. song et al. [24] found that the experimental thermodynamic properties of pure methane can be reproduced more accurately using the waldman-hagler combining rule. gas adsorption simulations were carried out by the standard grand canonical monte carlo methodology [25]. total pressure p and partial pressures in the gas phase were specified by the chemical potentials of the components; in a diluted gas, these can be calculated from the ideal gas law [12]. the long-range coulomb interactions were treated with the wolf method [26-27] using a convergence parameter of = 2/rc and cutoff radius of rc = l/2 (l is the length of the simulation box). the simulations involved an equilibration period of 5×10 7 monte carlo moves and an averaging period of 2×10 8 moves, consisting of 70% molecular insertion/deletion and 30% molecular translation steps. since the random insertion of molecules is unable to take into account the inaccessibility of the sodalite cages by multiatomic molecules (the physical diffusion pathways to them), creation of h2s and ch4 molecules inside these cages was blocked artificially by placing repulsive dummy atoms at the centres of the cages. as h2 molecules are sufficiently small to pass through the windows of the sodalite cages, the insertion of h2 molecules into these cages was permitted. in either case, the transition of molecules into sodalite cages via translational trial moves was not artificially prevented. in addition to the adsorption loading, the isosteric heat of adsorption was calculated using the equation: tv a a tp b b n u n h q ,, , (1) where h b and u a stand for the residual enthalpy and residual internal energy, respectively, n is the number of moles of the substance in the adsorbed (a) or bulk (b) phases. in the grand canonical ensemble, the second part of the equation can be determined from the particle number fluctuations of the simulation and the crosscorrelation of potential energy and particle number fluctuations [28-29]. assuming the ideal gas adsorbates, the first part of the equation is equal to rt, where r is the gas constant and t is the temperature. predictions for mixture adsorption were also made using the ideal adsorbed solution theory (iast) [30-31], which is an analogue of the ideal raoult’s law. using iast, mixture adsorption loadings at a given t can be obtained from single-component adsorption loadings by determining the bulk pressure of each component p o at the same spreading pressure of the adsorbed phase: )(/ o i b i a i ppyy . (2) table 1. lennard-jones energy (ε), size parameters (σ) and partial charges (q) for the models used in this work (d is the bond length, k is the boltzmann constant). interaction site σ / nm (ε/k ) / k q / electron charge position in the structure/molecule na+ (naa) 0.250 100 0.60 random positions in supercages si (naa) 0.230 22.0 2.40 experimental atomic positions [17] al (naa) 0.240 16.5 1.80 experimental atomic positions [17] o (naa) 0.330 190 -1.20 experimental atomic positions [17] s (h2s) 0.360 122 ds-h = 0.134 nm h (h2s) 0.250 50.0 0.21 hsh angle: 92° xs (h2s) * -0.42 ds-x = 0.03 nm c (ch4) 0.350 33.21 -0.24 dc-h = 0.109 nm h (ch4) 0.250 15.1 0.06 hch angle: 109.47° h (h2) 0.250 15.1 0.4829 dh-h = 0.0741 nm centre of mass (h2) -0.9658 geometric centre of the linear h2 molecule * off-atom site on the h–s–h angle bisector towards the hydrogen atoms selective removal of hydrogen sulphide using zeolite 45(1) pp. 9–15 (2017) 11 here, y i is the mole fraction of component i, and )( o ip is given implicitly by: o 0 o ln)()( ip a ii pdpn a rt p , (3) where a is the surface area of the adsorbent. 3. results and discussion the intermolecular potential models were tested by determining equilibrium adsorption isotherms for pure h2s, h2 and ch4 on zeolite naa. experimental data at 298 k are available for h2s [32] and h2 [8] and nearly room-temperature (t = 283 k) data for ch4 were taken from [33]. fig.1 shows that the models are largely able to reproduce the experimental adsorption data for these substances. the reproduction of the experimental isotherm is quite good for h2s and h2. in the case of ch4, the extent of overestimation of the experimental results at 283 k is considered acceptable, given that the availability of transferable zeolite models that are appropriate as far as adsorption predictions are concerned for both polar and non-polar compounds is rather limited [16]. furthermore, it is expected that the observed discrepancies between simulation and experimental results for this non-polar component are unable to cause significant errors in terms of mixture adsorption data, where the ch4 content of the gas phase is low and the adsorption of h2s is dominant. the calculated isosteric heat of adsorption data together with available experimental results for h2 and ch4 [5] are also plotted in fig.1. the pressuredependence of these data is weak. the general order of qh 2 s > qch 4 > qh 2 is in line with expectations, bearing in mind that the isosteric heat of adsorption at low loadings proves the strength of interaction between the zeolite framework and the adsorbate molecules. q values are considerably higher for polar h2s than for non-polar substances and the order of magnitude of the former indicates the significance of electrostatic interactions. the relation of qch 4 > qh 2 can be attributed to the greater polarizability of ch4 molecules (this is implicitly included in the attracting lennard-jones terms of the potential model), and to that the explicitly modelled real quadrupole moment of h2 molecules is very weak. considering the greater uncertainties of these simulation results and that the experimental data for h2 and ch4 were obtained for zero coverage within a given temperature range, these simulation results also confirm the suitability of the models used in this study. equilibrium adsorption selectivities were predicted for typical hydrodesulfurization stream outlets of petroleum refinery units separated by zeolite naa at near-atmospheric pressures. the studied gas streams were comprised of between 1 and 2% h2s and ~95% h2; the remaining hydrocarbon content (low alkanes) was represented by the presence of ch4 in the model mixtures. for comparison, other compositions including very low and reasonably high h2s contents, as well as low pressure ranges were also investigated. the raw simulation results for the h2s-h2 mixtures in comparison with iast predictions shown in fig.2 illustrate well the dissimilar levels of adsorption of the two substances, with the exception of the nearly zero h2s contents of the bulk mixture. the iast calculations underestimate the simulation results for h2 at higher pressures and on the whole overestimate the simulation results for h2s at lower pressures (for visual reasons, data obtained within the very low pressure range are not presented in this figure). the most accurate estimations were achieved at 10 kpa, which is an impractical parameter for the present applications. strictly speaking, the hypothesis of iast which states that the different adsorbate molecules have access to the same adsorbent surface cannot be applied to microporous adsorbents such as zeolite naa, where the accessible surface area depends on the size of the adsorbate. in light of this, the iast predictions can be considered to be remarkably accurate. a b c figure 1. equilibrium adsorption loading (n) and isosteric heat of adsorption (q) as a function of the bulk-gas pressure for pure hydrogen sulphide (a), hydrogen (b) and methane (c) on zeolite naa at the temperatures indicated. the statistical uncertainties of the simulations results do not exceed the size of the symbols. the lines connecting simulation data at 298 k are only drawn to guide the eyes. sim.: simulation data; exp.: experimental data. kristóf hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 12 the calculated equilibrium selectivities are defined as: b j b a j a nn nn s / / sh sh 2 2 , (4) where nj stands for the equilibrium number of moles of h2 in the investigated two-component mixtures or the sum of the equilibrium numbers of moles of h2 and ch4 in the three-component mixtures, as plotted in fig.3. on the whole, this zeolite exhibits an exceptional level of selectivity of h2s to the other substances; this is not surprising given the significant differences between the equilibrium adsorption loadings of the pure components (cf. fig.1). in the case of the two-component gas mixtures, the tendency of the data satisfies the criterion that at the low-pressure limit the selectivity as defined here should be independent of the composition of the bulk-gas mixture (it is the quotient of the ratio of the single-particle partition function of the two substances in the adsorbed phase and the ratio of their free-particle partition functions [34-35]). because of technical reasons, at lower pressures the uncertainties of the selectivity data are relatively large as these data are calculated from simulation results at very low zeolite loadings. at higher pressures the separation efficiency of this zeolite is somewhat weaker. this and the fact that the change with pressure is less intense at lower h2s contents suggest the existence of a ‘crowding’ effect, which inhibits more strongly the sorption of the larger molecule, h2s. in the case of the investigated three-component mixtures, the overall picture is similar, but the selectivity values are smaller. this makes sense since the competitive effect of the additional component, ch4, for the adsorption sites is stronger. yet, the values far in excess of 1000 obtained for the typical hydrodesulfurization streams (1-2% h2s and ~95% h2) are compelling. from the mixture adsorption data, once again it was verified that electrostatic effects control the adsorbent-adsorbate interactions with this zeolite, which implies that the amount of adsorption of pure h2 and ch4 should always be small. adsorbed mole number data showed that the presence of the non-polar components does not affect the sorption of h2s in the adsorbed phase. this conclusion is also supported by the heat of adsorption data (not presented) calculated by assuming one-component mixtures (i.e. using eq.(1)). these data turned out to be simply the amount-weighted average of the q values of pure components and are very close to qh 2 s at the given pressure. on the other hand, the degree of adsorption of the non-polar substances is reduced by the presence of h2s. selectivities under real conditions (at 50, 100 and 200 kpa and with realistic h2s contents; 1, 2 and 5%) shown in fig.4 make this fact obvious. here, s values obtained from mixture adsorption simulations significantly exceed their counterparts calculated for an ideal case of independent adsorption (i.e. by substituting into eq.(4) the purecomponent adsorption loadings determined at pressures that are equal to the partial pressures of the mixture components). extensive non-ideality in the adsorbed phase can also be seen from the comparative failure of iast (which utilizes the assumption that the adsorbed mixture is an ideal solution) to predict the simulation results accurately at near-atmospheric pressures. it is remarkable that the selectivity of h2s to the two non-polar substances decreases as the temperature and partial pressure of h2s in the bulk gas increase. as the adsorption loading of the zeolite rises, steric hindrance plays an increasingly important role, and sorption of the larger h2s molecules reduces to a greater extent. the impact of an increase in temperature is as expected, e.g. from the higher qh 2 s values, but the magnitude of decrease in selectivity with temperature changes significantly as a function of the partial pressure of h2s. data lines at the two investigated temperatures seem to converge to similar values at higher partial pressures, because the drop in the sorption of h2s as the temperature increases already becomes figure 2. comparison of the iast predictions with simulation data for hydrogen sulphide (black) and hydrogen (blue). equilibrium adsorption loading (n) as a function of the mole fraction of hydrogen sulphide (yh2s) in the binary gas phase mixture on zeolite naa at 298 k and at the pressures indicated. the statistical uncertainties of the simulation results do not exceed the size of the symbols. (for interpretation of the references to colour in this figure, the reader is advised to refer to the online version of this article.) a b figure 3. equilibrium adsorption selectivity (s) on zeolite naa at 298 k as a function of the bulk-gas pressure for binary (a) and ternary (b) gas mixtures with the compositions indicated. selective removal of hydrogen sulphide using zeolite 45(1) pp. 9–15 (2017) 13 less significant at higher loadings. the two panels of fig.4 also illustrate the above-mentioned difference between the data of the binary (a) and ternary (b) mixtures, i.e. the numerical values are smaller for the ternary mixtures. besides this, the scatter of the points is larger in panel b, because the ratio of nh 2 to nch 4 in the bulk gas unavoidably changes as the partial pressure of h2s increases (for compositions, see fig.3). finally, panel c in fig.4 illustrates the influence of adsorbateadsorbate attraction on the adsorption characteristics. it was simulated by eliminating the coulomb potential and the attractive part of the lennard-jones potential, but retaining its soft-sphere repulsion potential component, when calculating the instantaneous adsorbate-adsorbate pair interactions in the adsorbed phase. the observed reduction in nh 2 s and selectivity is sizable enough to establish that like-like attraction is an important factor in the adsorption of h2s. 4. conclusion in this work, molecular simulation predictions for the adsorption of h2s from simple non-polar gas mixtures of technological interest (hydrodesulfurization stream outlets in petroleum refinery units) on zeolite naa were presented. the realistic all-atom intermolecular potential models adopted for the computations were validated by comparing the calculated isotherms of the pure substances with available experimental adsorption data. what is especially noticeable here is the matching of the experimental and simulated adsorption loadings for h2s that was achieved. the investigated zeolite exhibited a remarkable ability to capture h2s, from either binary or ternary mixtures with non-polar gases, namely h2 and ch4. the interactions between the polar h2s molecules and the hydrophilic zeolite framework were found to be particularly favourable, and the mixture-adsorption loadings for h2s essentially agreed with the corresponding pure component loadings (with the exception of the very low h2s contents of the bulkgas mixture). the reverse is true when considering the adsorption of the non-polar gaseous components under technological conditions (at near-atmospheric pressures and with a small proportion of h2s in the bulk); their bindings to the inner surface sites of the zeolite were suppressed by h2s. these results can be of practical importance in terms of selectivity. selectivities of h2s to the non-polar substances were generally higher at lower h2s partial pressures in the bulk gas, and well over 1000 for the range of h2s contents of the typical hydrodesulfurization streams. the obtained order of magnitude of the isosteric heat of adsorption data and the large decrease in selectivity with increasing temperature suggest that electrostatic interactions play a more pronounced role in the selective removal of h2s by zeolite naa and the effect of size has only a limited impact. in association with this, it was also revealed that h2s-h2s attraction contributes to the preferred adsorption of this substance. acknowledgement present article was published in the frame of the project ginop-2.3.2-15-2016-00053 (“development of engine fuels with high hydrogen content in their molecular structures (contribution to sustainable mobility)”). we gratefully acknowledge the financial support of the hungarian national research fund (otka k124353). the author would like to thank tamás kovács and zoltán ható (department of physical chemistry, institute of chemistry, university of pannonia) for their assistance in terms of data analysis. references [1] auerbach, s.m.; carrado, k.a.; dutta, p.k. (eds.): handbook of zeolite science and technology (marcel dekker, new york) 2003 isbn: 0-8247-40203 a b c figure 4. equilibrium adsorption selectivity (s) as a function of the partial pressure of hydrogen sulphide in the bulk gas for selected binary (a) and ternary (b) gas mixtures on zeolite naa at 298 k and 323 k, and at bulk gas pressures of 50 kpa, 100 kpa, and 200 kpa. comparison of the mixture selectivity data with the selectivity data for independent adsorption (indep. ads.; panels a, b) and with mixture selectivity data calculated without adsorbate-adsorbate attractions (no attr., panel c). (for interpretation of the references to colour in this figure, the reader is referred to the web version of the article.) kristóf hungarian journal of industry and chemistry 14 [2] xu, x.; yang, w.; liu, j.; chen, x.; lin, l.; stroh, n.; brunner, h.: synthesis and gas permeation properties of an naa zeolite membrane, chem. commun. 2000 0, 603-604 doi: 10.1039/b000478m [3] aoki, k.; kusakabe, k.; morooka, s.: separation of gases with an a-type zeolite membrane, ind. eng. chem. 2000 39, 2245-2251 doi: 10.1021/ie990902c [4] okamoto, k.; kita, h.; horii, k.; tanaka, k.; kondo, m.: zeolite naa membrane: preparation, single-gas permeation, and pervaporation and vapor permeation of water/organic liquid mixtures, ind. eng. chem. 2001 40, 163-175 doi: 10.1021/ie0006007 [5] zhu, w.; gora, l.; van den berg, a.w.c.; kapteijn, f.; jansen, j.c.; moulijn, j.a.: water vapour separation from permanent gases by a zeolite4a membrane, j. membrane sci. 2005 253, 57-66 doi: 10.1016/j.memsci.2004.12.039 [6] yamamotoa, t.; kimb, y.h.; kimb, b.c.; endoa, a.; thongprachana, n.; ohmoria, t.: adsorption characteristics of zeolites for dehydration of ethanol: evaluation of diffusivity of water in porous structure, chem. eng. j. 2012 181-2, 443-448 doi: 10.1016/j.cej.2011.11.110 [7] lee, s.h.; moon, g.k.; choi, s.g.; kim, h.s.: molecular dynamics simulation studies of zeolitea. 3. structure and dynamics of na + ions and water molecules in a rigid zeolite-a, j. phys. chem. 1994 98, 1561-1569 doi: 10.1021/j100057a006 [8] akten, e.d.; siriwardane, r.; sholl, d.s.: monte carlo simulation of singleand binary component adsorption of co2, n2, and h2 in zeolite na-4a, energy & fuels 2003 17, 977-983 doi: 10.1021/ef0300038 [9] furukawa, s.; goda, k.; zhang, y.; nitta, t.: molecular simulation study on adsorption and diffusion behavior of ethanol/water molecules in naa zeolite crystal, j. chem. eng. japan 2004 37, 6774 doi: 10.1252/jcej.37.67 [10] kristóf, t.; csányi, é.; rutkai, g.; merényi, l.: prediction of adsorption equilibria of watermethanol mixtures in zeolite naa by molecular simulation, mol. sim. 2006 32, 869-875 doi: 10.1080/08927020600934179 [11] cosoli, p.; ferrone, m.; pricl, s.; fermeglia, m.: hydrogen sulphide removal from biogas by zeolite adsorption, part i-ii, chem. eng. j. 2008 145, 8692 and 93-99 doi: 10.1016/j.cej.2008.07.034 & 10.1016/j.cej.2008.08.013 [12] rutkai, g.; csányi, é.; kristóf, t.: prediction of adsorption and separation of water-alcohol mixtures with zeolite naa, microporous and mesoporous mat. 2008 114, 455-464 doi: 10.1016/j.micromeso.2008.01.044 [13] csányi, é.; kristóf, t.; lendvay, gy.: potential model development using quantum chemical information for molecular simulation of adsorption equilibria of water-methanol (ethanol)mixtures in zeolite naa-4, j. phys. chem. c 2009 113, 1222512235 doi: 10.1021/jp902520p [14] csányi, é.; ható, z.; kristóf, t.: molecular simulation of water removal from simple gases with zeolite naa, j. mol. model. 2009 18, 2349-2356 doi: 10.1007/s00894-011-1253-7 [15] sun, y.; han, s.: diffusion of n2, o2, h2s and so2 in mfi and 4a zeolites by molecular dynamics simulations, mol. sim. 2015 41, 1095-1109 doi: 10.1080/08927022.2014.945082 [16] vujic, b.; lyubartsev, a.p.: transferable forcefield for modelling of co2, n2, o2 and ar in all silica and na + exchanged zeolites, modelling simul. mater. sci. eng. 2016 24, 045002 (1-26) doi: 10.1088/0965-0393/24/4/045002 [17] pluth, j.j.; smith, j.v.: accurate redetermination of crystal structure of dehydrated zeolite a. absence of near zero coordination of sodium. refinement of si, al-ordered superstructure, j. am. chem. soc. 1980 102, 4704-4708 doi: 10.1021/ja00534a024 [18] mikula, a.; król, m.; kolezynski, a.: periodic model of an lta framework, j. mol. model. 2015 21, 275 (1-9) doi 10.1007/s00894-015-2820-0 [19] bai, p.; tsapatsis, m.; siepmann, j.i.: trappe-zeo: transferable potentials for phase equilibria force field for all-silica zeolites, j. phys. chem. c 2013 117, 24375-24387 doi: 10.1021/jp4074224 [20] shah, m.s.; tsapatsis, m.; siepmann, j.i.: development of the transferable potentials for phase equilibria model for hydrogen sulfide, j. phys. chem. b 2015 119, 7041-7052 doi: 10.1021/acs.jpcb.5b02536 [21] kaminski, g.; duffy, e.; matsui, t.; jorgensen, w.: free energies of hydration and pure liquid properties of hydrocarbons from the opls allatom model, j. phys. chem. 1994 98, 1307713081 doi: 10.1021/j100100a043 [22] darkrim, f.; levesque, d.: monte carlo simulations of hydrogen adsorption in single-walled carbon nanotubes, j. chem. phys. 1998 109, 49814984 doi: 10.1063/1.477109 [23] waldman, m.; hagler, a.: new combining rules for rare gas van der waals parameters, j. comput. chem. 1993 14, 1077-1084 doi: 10.1002/jcc.540140909 [24] song, w.; rossky, p.j.; maroncelli, m.: modelling alkane+perfluoroalkane interactions using all-atom potentials: failure of the usual combining rules, j. chem. phys. 2003 119, 9145-9162 doi: 10.1063/1.1610435 [25] gubbins, k.e.; quirke, n. (eds.): molecular simulation and industrial applications: methods, examples and prospects (gordon & breach, amsterdam) 1997 isbn: 9056990055, 9789056990053 [26] wolf, d.; keblinski, p.; phillpot, s.r.; eggebrecht, j.: exact method for the simulation of coulombic systems by spherically truncated, pairwise r -1 summation, j. chem. phys. 1999 110, 8254-8282 doi: 10.1063/1.478738 [27] demontis, p.; spanu, s.; suffritti, g.b.: application of the wolf method for the evaluation of coulombic interactions to complex condensed matter systems: aluminosilicates and water, j. chem. phys. 2001 114, 7980-7988 doi: 10.1063/1.1364638 selective removal of hydrogen sulphide using zeolite 45(1) pp. 9–15 (2017) 15 [28] nicholson, d.; parsonage, n.g.: computer simulation and the statistical mechanics of adsorption (academic press, london) 1982 isbn: 0125180608, 9780125180603 [29] karavias, f.; myers, a.l.: isosteric heats of multicomponent adsorption: thermodynamics and computer simulations, langmuir 1991 7, 3118-3126 doi: 10.1021/la00060a035 [30] myers, a.; prausnitz, j.m.: thermodynamics of mixed-gas adsorption, aiche j. 1965 11, 121-127 doi: 10.1002/aic.690110125 [31] simon, c.m.; smit, b.; haranczyk, m.: pyiast: ideal adsorbed solution theory (iast) python package, comp. phys. commun. 2016 200, 364380 doi: 10.1016/j.cpc.2015.11.016 [32] cruz, a.j.; pires, j.; carvalho, a.p.; carvalho, m.b.: physical adsorption of h2s related to the conservation of works of art: the role of the pore structure at low relative pressure, adsorption 2005 11, 569-576 doi: 10.1007/s10450-005-5614-3 [33] mohr, r.j.; vorkapic, d.; rao, m.b.; sircar, s.: pure and binary gas adsorption equilibria and kinetics of methane and nitrogen on 4a zeolite by isotope exchange technique, adsorption 1999 5, 145-158 doi: 10.1023/a:1008917308002 [34] tant, z.; gubbins, k.e.: selective adsorption of simple mixtures in slit pores: a model of methane-ethane mixtures in carbon, j. phys. chem. 1992 96, 845-854 doi: 10.1021/j100181a059 [35] battisti, a.; taioli, s.; garberoglio, g.: zeolitic imidazolate frameworks for separation of binary mixtures of co2, ch4, n2 and h2: a computer simulation investigation, microporous and mesoporous mat. 2011 143, 46-53 doi: 10.1016/j.micromeso.2011.01.029 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 49(1) pp. 77–82 (2021) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.33927/hjic-2021-10 daphnia magna acute immobilization test: an opportunity to test the ecotoxicity of alternative fuels katalin eszter hubai*1 1center for natural sciences, university of pannonia, egyetem u. 10, 8200 veszprém, hungary the increasing need for environmental protection has led to the development of alternative biofuels. while the use of alternative fuels has significantly increased recently, only a few studies have addressed the problem of their ecotoxicity. the main aim of this work was to provide a short review of the daphnia magna acute immobilization test, which has been the most commonly discussed in the literature. keywords: daphnia magna, immobilization, ecotoxicology, alternative fuels 1. introduction over recent decades, rapid population growth has been accompanied by a growth in the consumption of energy and use of transport fuels, which has caused irreversible environmental degradation and climate change [1]. desires for a green environment have increased the demand for alternative fuels which in turn has necessitated researchers and industries to develop renewable alternative and cleaner energy sources worldwide [2]. biofuels are energy-enriched substances manufactured from vegetable oils, recycled cooking grease and oil as well as animal fats through a chemical process known as transesterification, which is described below, to produce chemical compounds known as fatty acid methyl esters (fame) [3, 4]. biodiesel is the name given to these esters when they meet biodiesel standards such as the american astm d6751 or the european en14214 for use as transport fuels [4]. biodiesel is an eco-friendly form of fuel and may provide a solution to some problems associated with petroleum diesel [5]. alternative fuels are key to improving the eu’s security of energy supply, reducing the impact of transportation on the environment and boosting the eu’s competitiveness. they are also an important building block for the eu’s transition towards a low-carbon economy. in 2007, the production of biofuels in the eu reached 8,500 ktoe (kilotonnes of oil equivalent), while in 1996, this figure was less than 500 ktoe [6]. in 2010, 15.5% of power generation and 1.3% of energy consumption worldwide was attributed to renewable energy, while today, it is estimated that 86,000 kt per year of biofuels are produced, with the usa and brazil being the primary producers [7]. *correspondence: hubai.katalin@mk.uni-pannon.hu more studies have shown that the use of biodiesel would reduce emissions of hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and volatile organic compounds [8,9]. however, the results of analyzing the biological effects related to the presence of biodiesel in the environment are ambiguous [10]. although the use of alternative fuels has significantly increased recently, relatively few studies have addressed the problem of their ecotoxicity. therefore, the main objective of this study is to provide a short overview of the daphnia magna acute immobilization test which has been the most frequently discussed in the literature. 2. methodology 2.1 test organism in addition to the chemical characterization of a substance, ecotoxicological tests provide an important tool for ecological risk assessments [11], giving a quantitative estimation of the overall toxic effect of the test organisms selected [12]. in general, the daphnia magna acute immobilization test is amongst the most widely used ecotoxicological methods [13]. international standards apply such as oecd 202:2004 [14] or iso 6341:1996. the test organisms are the freshwater crustaceans d. magna and d. pulex. for the tests, neonates (newborn, freshly hatched juveniles) are used. (the main purpose of any standard protocol is to increase quality assurance which in turn might increase the credibility of the data produced [15]. in order to minimize any possible errors caused by improper maintenance of stock cultures, so-called toxkits have been developed and marketed by microbiotests inc. (mariakerke-gent, belgium) [16]. the main benefits of using a toxkit are that they are maintenance-free and user-friendly [17] test organisms https://doi.org/10.33927/hjic-2021-10 mailto:hubai.katalin@mk.uni-pannon.hu 78 hubai figure 1: freshly hatched d. magna neonate whose genetic material is practically uniform and, prior to testing, juveniles of approximately the same age are reproduced (fig. 1). 2.2 implementation of experiments there are several options for conducting alternative fuel toxicology studies. in one part of the research, the fuel was stirred in water before the test organisms were introduced into the test chamber [18–20]. in this method, the layer of oil on the top of the wells can cause some problems. in other experiments, aqueous extracts were used, for example, a stock solution was made by adding seawater (depending on the test organism) to the sample and stirring the mixture for 10 − 24 h [21–23]. three different biodiesels, that is, two based on the vegetable oils produced by canola and soybean as well as waste frying oil that originated from animals, were used by hollebone et al. [24]. oil-in-water dispersions (owd) and water-accommodated fractions (waf) were used for the daphnia magna assay. different results were observed during the tests; higher lc50 values were measured in wafs compared to in owds. this suggests that the soluble fraction is of lower toxicity compared to the physical danger of the organisms being smothered by the oily fuel (see table 1). müller et al. [23] assessed the toxicity of the watersoluble fraction (wsf) of biodiesel on d. magna in comparison to the wsf of diesel [24]. the tested sample of biodiesel was a fatty acid methyl ester (fame) mainly produced by soybean oil (95%). this biodiesel did not elucidate a measurable degree of toxicity either following acute or chronic exposure. on the other hand, in a study by eck-varanka et al. [21], the ecotoxicity of a rapeseed biodiesel was profiled using a battery of test organisms and d. magna exhibited an extremely high degree of toxicity, being the most sensitive assay in the battery. khan et al. [18] carried out an extensive study to compare the ecotoxicity of diesel, neat biodiesel (b100) and blends of both (b50, b20 and b5). b100 was produced from recycled cooking oils and fats. the lowest and highest levels of ecotoxicity were exhibited by b100 and diesel, respectively, while the ecotoxicity of the blends, expressed both in terms of mortality rates and ec50 values, were in the intermediate range. however, the differences between the measured responses were quite small: the lc50 values of daphnia magna in neat biodiesel and diesel were 4.65 and 1.78 ppm, respectively. tjarinto et al. (2014) conducted a similar study on biodiesel produced from waste vegetable oil and reported an ec5 value of 3.157 ppm for daphnia magna [25]. heger et al. [26] compared the ecotoxicity of two biofuel candidates (1-octanol and 2-butanone) and found that 1-octanol exhibited a significant level of ecotoxicity on d. magna while 2-butanone did not. however, assays conducted on other test organisms revealed that the metabolites of the tested products could pose a higher risk of toxicity. heger et al. [27] applied the d. magna acute immobilization test to compare the aquatic toxicity of the two biofuel candidates, namely 2-methyltetrahydrofuran (2-mthf) and 2-methylfuran (2-mf), and found that the latter induced a significantly higher mortality rate than 2-mthf (see table 1). ecotoxicity, more precisely the ecotoxicity impact, is also included in the life cycle assessments (lca) of alternative fuels [28]. since lcas follow the whole production line of a product, bunzel et al. [29] used a d. magna assay to evaluate pesticide runoff from agricultural fields used for the cultivation of energy crops. khan et al. [18] stressed that one possible major purpose of ecotoxicity testing is assessing the potential risk of fuel spills in aquatic ecosystems. as such, it should be emphasized that daphnia magna, being a freshwater taxon, cannot represent marine ecosystems, instead marine surrogates are used such as the brine shrimp artemia salina [30]. gateau et al. [31] investigated water-soluble fractions (wsfs) of four different vegetable oil methyl esters. lower ec50 values (> 1000 mg/l) were calculated for vegetable oil methyl esters than for regular diesel (ec50< 100 mg/l) (see table 1)). the toxicity of biodiesel blends and crude oils have been investigated in other studies and biodiesel has been found to be less toxic to d. magna than both the biodiesel blends and crude oil (see table 1). 3. conclusion in conclusion, it should be emphasized that the number of available studies is surprisingly low. furthermore, these studies are extremely difficult to compare due to the following reasons: since the studies have been conducted on alternative fuels of very different origins, more extensive research on their chemical compositions to determine potential toxic effects is required. by taking into considhungarian journal of industry and chemistry daphnia magna acute immobilization test 79 ta bl e 1: r es ul ts of th e d ap hn ia m ag na ac ut e im m ob il iz at io n te st (w a f :w at er -a cc om m od at ed fr ac ti on ;o w d :o il -i nw at er di sp er si on ) f ue lt yp e m et ho d l c 50 r ef er en ce 1oc ta no l w a f ; m et ho ds of ac ut e to xi ci ty te st in g us in g fi sh ,m ac ro in ve rt eb ra te s an d am ph ib ia ns (u s e pa ) 52 0 m g/ l l eb la nc ,1 98 0 [3 2] 1oc ta no l o w d ;s ec ti on 5, pa ra .1 “n o. 3 of th e r eg ul at io n on a pp li ca ti on d oc um en ts an d e vi de nc e un de r th e c he m ic al s a ct " (f ed er al e nv ir on m en ta la ge nc y) 26 m g/ l k ün h et al ., 19 89 [3 3] r ap es ee d oi lm et hy le st er s (r m e ) w a f ;o e c d 20 2 > 10 00 w a f m g/ m l g at ea u et al ., 20 05 [3 1] e ru ci c r ap es ee d oi lm et hy le st er s (e r m e ) > 10 00 w a f m g/ m l s un fl ow er oi lm et hy le st er s (s m e ) > 10 00 w a f m g/ m l h ig h o le ic s un fl ow er oi lm et hy le st er s (h o s m e ) > 10 00 w a f m g/ m l d ie se lf ue l < 10 0 w a f m g/ m l ba se d on ve ge ta bl e oi lp ro du ce d fr om ca no la o w d ;e nv ir on m en tc an ad a te st m et ho d "b io lo gi ca l te st m et ho d: a cu te l et ha li ty te st u si ng d ap hn ia sp p" 28 0 (2 00 -4 10 ) m g/ l h ol le bo ne et al ., 20 08 [2 4] ba se d on ve ge ta bl e oi lp ro du ce d fr om so il cr op s 37 .8 (2 3. 063 .1 ) m g/ l ba se d on w as te fr yi ng oi lp ro du ce d fr om an im al s 58 2 (3 16 -1 08 0) m g/ l u lt ra -l ow su lp hu r di es el 15 .2 (8 .2 -2 9. 3) m g/ l l ow su lp hu r di es el 17 .9 (1 2. 725 .3 ) m g/ l ba se d on ve ge ta bl e oi lp ro du ce d fr om ca no la w a f (2 5 g/ l fu el (1 :4 0, fu el :w at er ); e nv ir on m en tc an ad a te st m et ho d "b iol og ic al te st m et ho d: a cu te l et ha li ty te st u si ng d ap hn ia sp p" 24 65 0 (2 50 014 00 00 ) m g/ l ba se d on ve ge ta bl e oi lp ro du ce d fr om so il cr op s 75 00 (5 10 011 00 0) m g/ l ba se d on w as te fr yi ng oi lp ro du ce d fr om an im al s 75 00 (5 10 011 00 0) m g/ l u lt ra -l ow su lp hu r di es el 33 00 (1 80 058 00 ) m g/ l l ow su lp hu r di es el > 25 00 0 m g/ l bi od ie se l( fa tt y ac id m et hy le st er ) w a f ;o e c d 20 2 0. 02 26 % (1 00 % w as 1: 1 w ate r: bi od ie se l) e ck -v ar an ka et al ., 20 18 [2 1] 2bu ta no ne (m et hy le th yl ke to ne ) o w d ;o e c d 20 2 21 52 .1 ± 44 .6 m g/ l h eg er et al ., 20 18 [2 6] 2m et hy lt et ra hy dr of ur an (2 -m t h f ) o w d ;o e c d 20 2 1. 11 6± 0. 10 2 m g/ l h eg er et al ., 20 18 [2 7] 2m et hy lf ur an (2 -m f ) 0. 03 2± 0. 00 4 m g/ l 49(1) pp. 77–82 (2021) 80 hubai eration the practical aspects of the tests, different periods of exposure have been employed (chronic exposures of 24, 48 and even 96 h). sample preparation protocols also differ: oil-in-water dispersions (owd) and wateraccommodated fractions (waf) have also been used as alternatives [34]. generally, the daphnia magna acute immobilization tests show an appropriate degree of sensitivity to a wide variety of compounds or complex mixtures [35–37]. however, as different components of an ecosystem will exhibit taxon-specific sensitivity to a chemical, a carefully composed battery of biotests should be used to gain a more comprehensive understanding [38]. it is possible that these tests will represent different functional and/or taxonomic groups as the ecotoxicity of pollutants influences the function and structure of aquatic or terrestrial ecosystems [39], moreover, possible endpoints will differ [40]. the minimum battery should involve the luminescent bacteria test, algae and zooplanktonic crustaceans [41]. acknowledgments this study was funded by the ntp-nftö-19-b-0148 project. references [1] darda, s.; papalas, t.; zabaniotou, a.: biofuels journey in europe: currently the way to low carbon economy sustainability is still a challenge, j. clean. prod., 2019, 208, 575–588 doi: 10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.10.147 [2] shote, a.s.: biofuel: an environmental friendly fuel, in anaerobic digestion, eds.: banu, j.r. (intech open, london, england), 2019. doi: 10.5772/intechopen.82856 [3] alleman, t.l.; mccormick, r.l.: biodiesel handling and use guide, fifth edition (u.s. department of energy), 2016, doe/go-102016-4875 [4] milbrandt, a.; kinchin, c.; mccormick, r.: the feasibility of producing and using biomass-based diesel and jet fuel in the united states, technical report nrel/tp-6a20-58015, 2013. doi: 10.2172/1260324 [5] aransiola, e.f.; ehinmitola, e.o.; adebimpe, a.i.; shittu, t.d.; solomon, b.o.: prospects of biodiesel feedstock as an effective ecofuel source and their challenges, in woodhead publishing series in energy, advances in eco-fuels for a sustainable environment, eds.: azad, k. (woodhead publishing, sawston, england), 2019. isbn: 978-0-081-02728-8 [6] european commission (2014): report on the assessment of the member states national policy frameworks for the development of the market as regards alternative fuels in the transport sector and the deployment of the relevant infrastructure pursuant to article 10 (2) of directive 2014/94/eu, https://ec.europa.eu [7] rastogi, m.; shrivastava, s.: recent advances in second generation bioethanol production: an insight to pretreatment, saccharification and fermentation processes, renew. sust. energ. rev., 2017, 80, 330–340 doi: 10.1016/j.rser.2017.05.225 [8] makareviciene, v.; janulis, p.: environmental effect of rapeseed oil ethyl ester, renew. energy, 2003, 28(15), 2395–2403 doi: 10.1016/s0960-1481(03)00142-3 [9] bamgbose, i. a.; anderson, t.a.: phytotoxicity of three plant-based biodiesels, unmodified castor oil, and diesel fuel to alfalfa (medicago sativa l.), lettuce (lactuca sativa l.), radish (raphanus sativus), and wheatgrass (triticum aestivum), ecotoxicol. environ. saf., 2015, 122, 268–274 doi: 10.1016/j.ecoenv.2015.08.003 [10] hawrot-paw, m.; izwikow, m.: ecotoxicological effects of biodiesel in the soil, j. ecol. eng., 2015, 16(5), 34–39 doi: 10.12911/22998993/60451 [11] klimkowicz-pawlas, a.; maliszewska-kordybach, b.; smreczak, b.: triad-based screening risk assessment of the agricultural area exposed to the long-term pahs contamination, environ. geochem. health, 2019, 41(3), 1369–1385 doi: 10.1007/s10653018-0220-y [12] kessler, n.; schauer, j.j.; yagur-kroll, s.; melamed, s.; tirosh, o.; belkin, s.; erel, y.: a bacterial bioreporter panel to assay the cytotoxicity of atmospheric particulate matter, atmos. environ., 2012, 63, 94–101 doi: 10.1016/j.atmosenv.2012.09.048 [13] allan, i.j.; vrana, b.; greenwood, r.; mills, g.a.; roig, b.; gonzalez, c.a.: a “toolbox” for biological and chemical monitoring requirements for the european union’s water framework directive, talanta, 2006, 69(2), 302–322 doi: 10.1016/j.talanta.2005.09.043 [14] oecd/ocde, 2004. oecd guideline for testing of chemicals no. 202: daphnia sp. acute immobilisation test. issn: 20745761 oecd (2004), test no. 202: daphnia sp. acute immobilisation test, in oecd guidelines for the testing of chemicals, section 2, (oecd publishing, paris) doi: 10.1787/9789264069947-en [15] koëter, h.b.w.m.: mutual acceptance of data: harmonised test methods and quality assurance of data the process explained. toxicol. lett., 2003, 140– 141, 11–20 doi: 10.1016/s0378-4274(02)00491-5 [16] persoone, g.; baudo, r.; cotman, m.; blaise, c.; thompson, k.cl.; moreira-santos, m.; vollat, b.; törökne, a.; han, t.: review on the acute daphnia magna toxicity test – evaluation of the sensitivity and the precision of assays performed with organisms from laboratory cultures or hatched from dormant eggs, knowl. managt. aquatic ecosyst., 2009, 393, 01 doi: 10.1051/kmae/2009012 [17] kokkali, v.; van delft, w.: overview of commercially available bioassays for assessing chemical toxicity in aqueous samples. trends in anal. chem., 2014, 61, 133–155 doi: 10.1016/j.trac.2014.08.001 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.10.147 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.10.147 https://doi.org/10.5772/intechopen.82856 https://doi.org/10.5772/intechopen.82856 https://doi.org/10.2172/1260324 https://doi.org/10.2172/1260324 https://ec.europa.eu/transport/sites/transport/files/legislation/swd20190029.pdf https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2017.05.225 https://doi.org/10.1016/s0960-1481(03)00142-3 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecoenv.2015.08.003 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecoenv.2015.08.003 https://doi.org/10.12911/22998993/60451 https://doi.org/10.1007/s10653-018-0220-y https://doi.org/10.1007/s10653-018-0220-y https://doi.org/10.1016/j.atmosenv.2012.09.048 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.talanta.2005.09.043 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.talanta.2005.09.043 https://doi.org/10.1787/9789264069947-en https://doi.org/10.1787/9789264069947-en https://doi.org/10.1016/s0378-4274(02)00491-5 https://doi.org/10.1051/kmae/2009012 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.trac.2014.08.001 daphnia magna acute immobilization test 81 [18] khan, n.; warith, m.a.; luk, g.: a comparison of acute toxicity of biodiesel, biodiesel blends, and diesel on aquatic organisms. j. air waste manag. assoc., 2007, 57(3), 286–296 doi: 10.1080/10473289.2007.10465333 [19] bamgbose, i.a.; anderson, t.a.: assessment of three plant-based biodiesels using a daphnia magna bioassay. environ. sci. pollut. res., 2018, 25(5), 4506–4515 doi: 10.1007/s11356-017-0678-7 [20] pikula, k.s.; zakharenko, a.m.; chaika, v.v.; stratidakis, a.k.; kokkinakis, m.; waissi, g.; rakitskii, v.n.; sarigiannis, d.a.; hayes, a.w.; coleman, m.d.; tsatsakis, a.; golokhvast, k.s.: toxicity bioassay of waste cooking oil-based biodiesel on marine microalgae. toxicol. rep., 2019, 6, 111–117 doi: 10.1016/j.toxrep.2018.12.007 [21] eck-varanka, b.; kováts, n.; horváth, e.; ferincz, á.; kakasi, b.; nagy, s.t.; imre, k.; paulovits, g.: ecoand genotoxicity profiling of a rapeseed biodiesel using a battery of bioassays. ecotoxicol. environ. safety, 2018, 151, 170–177 doi: 10.1016/j.ecoenv.2018.01.015 [22] leite, m.b.n.l.; de araújo, m.m.s.; nascimento, i.a.; da cruz, a.c.s.; pereira, s.a.; do nascimento, n.c.: toxicity of water-soluble fractions of biodiesel fuels derived from castor oil, palm oil, and waste cooking oil. environ. toxicol. chem., 2011, 30(4), 893–897 doi: 10.1002/etc.444 [23] müller, j.b.; melegari, s.p.; perreault, f.; matias, w.g.: comparative assessment of acute and chronic ecotoxicity of water soluble fractions of diesel and biodiesel on daphnia magna and aliivibrio fischeri. chemosphere, 2019, 221, 640–646 doi: 10.1016/j.chemosphere.2019.01.069 [24] hollebone, b.p.; fieldhouse, b.; landriault, m.; doe, k.; jackman, p.: aqueous solubility, dispersibility and toxicity of biodiesels, in international oil spill conference proceedings, savannah, usa, 2008. doi: 10.7901/2169-3358-2008-1-929 [25] tjarinto, r.; rachmatiah, i.; salami, s.: toxicity test of water-soluble fractions of waste vegetable oil-based biodiesel and biodiesel/diesel blends on daphnia magna and allium cepa. in: proceedings of the 3rd applied science for technology innovation, astechnova international energy conference, yogyakarta, indonesia, 2014, 294–301 [26] heger, s.; du, m.; bauer, k.; schäffer, a.; hollert, h.: comparative ecotoxicity of potential biofuels to water flea (daphnia magna), zebrafish (danio rerio) and chinese hamster (cricetulus griseus) v79 cells. sci. total environ., 2018a, 631–632, 216–222 doi: 10.1016/j.scitotenv.2018.03.028 [27] heger, s.; bluhm, k.; du, m.; lehmann, g.; anders, n.; dechambrec, d.; bardowc, a.; schäfferdef, a.; hollert, h.: aquatic toxicity of biofuel candidates on daphnia magna. ecotoxicol. environ. safety, 2018b, 164, 125–130 doi: 10.1016/j.ecoenv.2018.08.008 [28] yang, y.: life cycle freshwater ecotoxicity, human health cancer, and noncancer impacts of corn ethanol and gasoline in the u.s., j. clean. prod., 2013, 53, 149–157 doi: 10.1016/j.jclepro.2013.04.009 [29] bunzel, k.; schäfer, r.b.; thrän, d.; kattwinkel, m.: pesticide runoff from energy crops: a threat to aquatic invertebrates? sci. total environ., 2015, 537, 187–196 doi: 10.1016/j.scitotenv.2015.08.011 [30] camargo, r.p.l.; carrim, a.j.i.; filho, n.r.a.: study ecotoxicity of biodiesel from residual oils and fats and the effects of salinity aquatic ecosystems. ecotoxicol. environ. contam., 2017, 12(1), 63–67 doi: 10.5132/eec.2017.01.08 [31] gateau, p.; van dievoet, f.; bouillon, v.; vermeersch, g.; claude, s.; staat, f.: environmentally friendly properties of vegetable oil methyl esters. j. am. oil chem. soc., 2005, 12(4), 308–313 doi: 10.1051/ocl.2005.0308 [32] leblanc, g.a.: acute toxicity of priority pollutants to water flea (daphnia magna). bull. environ. contam. toxicol., 1980, 24(1), 684–691 doi: 10.1007/bf01608174 [33] kühn, r.; pattard, m.; pernak, k.d.; winter, a.: results of the harmful effects of selected water pollutants (anilines, phenols, aliphatic compounds) to daphnia magna. water res., 1989, 23(4), 495–499 doi: doi: 10.1016/0043-1354(89)90141-3 [34] bluhm, k.; heger, s.; seiler, t.b.; hallare, a.v.; schaeffer, a.; hollert, h.: toxicological and ecotoxicological potencies of biofuels used for the transport sector -a literature review. energy environ. sci., 2012, 5, 7381–7392 doi: 10.1039/c2ee03033k [35] pedersen, f.; petersen, g.i.: variability of species sensitivity to complex mixtures. water sci. technol., 1996, 33(6), 109–119 doi: 10.1016/02731223(96)00318-6 [36] pintar, a.; besson, m.; gallezot, p.; gibert, j.; martin, d.: toxicity to daphnia magna and vibrio fischeri of kraft bleach plant effluents treated by catalytic wet-air oxidation. water res., 2004, 38(2), 289–300 doi: 10.1016/j.watres.2003.09.027 [37] czech, b.; jośko, i.; oleszczuk, p.: ecotoxicological evaluation of selected pharmaceuticals to vibrio fischeri and daphnia magna before and after photooxidation process. ecotoxicol. environ. safety, 2014, 104, 247–253 doi: 10.1016/j.ecoenv.2014.03.024 [38] brack, w.; aissa, s.a.; backhaus, t.; dulio, v.; escher, b.i.; faust, m.; hilscherova, k.; hollender, j.; hollert, h.; müller, c.; munthe, j.; posthuma, l.; seiler, t.b.; slobodnik, j.; teodorovic, i.; tindall, a.j.; de aragăo umbuzeiro, g.; zhang, x.; altenburger, r.: effect-based methods are key. the european collaborative project solutions recommends integrating effect-based methods for diagnosis and monitoring of water quality. environ. sci. eur., 2019, 31, 10 doi: 10.1186/s12302-019-0192-2 [39] marzullo, r.c.m.; matai, p.h.l.s.; morita, d.m.: new method to calculate water ecotoxicity footprint 49(1) pp. 77–82 (2021) https://doi.org/10.1080/10473289.2007.10465333 https://doi.org/10.1080/10473289.2007.10465333 https://doi.org/10.1007/s11356-017-0678-7 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.toxrep.2018.12.007 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecoenv.2018.01.015 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecoenv.2018.01.015 https://doi.org/10.1002/etc.444 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chemosphere.2019.01.069 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chemosphere.2019.01.069 https://doi.org/10.7901/2169-3358-2008-1-929 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2018.03.028 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecoenv.2018.08.008 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecoenv.2018.08.008 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2013.04.009 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2015.08.011 https://doi.org/10.5132/eec.2017.01.08 https://doi.org/10.1051/ocl.2005.0308 https://doi.org/10.1051/ocl.2005.0308 https://doi.org/10.1007/bf01608174 https://doi.org/10.1007/bf01608174 https://doi.org/doi: 10.1016/0043-1354(89)90141-3 https://doi.org/10.1039/c2ee03033k https://doi.org/10.1016/0273-1223(96)00318-6 https://doi.org/10.1016/0273-1223(96)00318-6 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.watres.2003.09.027 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecoenv.2014.03.024 https://doi.org/10.1186/s12302-019-0192-2 82 hubai of products: a contribution to the decision-making process toward sustainability. j. clean. prod., 2018, 188, 888–899 doi: 10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.03.307 [40] jos, a.; repetto, g.; rios, j.c.; hazen, m.j.; molero, m.l.; peso, a.; salguero, m.; fernándezfreire, p.; pérez-martín, j.m.; cameán, a.: ecotoxicological evaluation of carbamazepine using six different model systems with eighteen endpoints. toxicol. in vitro, 2003, 17, 525–532 doi: 10.1016/s08872333(03)00119-x [41] manusadžianas, l.; sadauskas, k.; vitkus, r.: comparative study of indices used in toxicity evaluation of effluents. desalination, 2010, 250, 383–389 doi: 10.1016/j.desal.2009.09.061 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.03.307 https://doi.org/10.1016/s0887-2333(03)00119-x https://doi.org/10.1016/s0887-2333(03)00119-x https://doi.org/10.1016/j.desal.2009.09.061 introduction methodology test organism implementation of experiments conclusion microsoft word 01_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 35. pp. 47-55 (2007) control structures based on constrained inverses f. szeifert, t. chován, l. nagy university of pannonia, department of process engineering, h-8201 veszprém, p.o. box 158, hungary the widespread use of the pid algorithms in the classical feedback scheme is due to the following to basic reasons: the role of pid-controllers in the traditional process control profession, and the good control performance achieved at the local control level. present paper proposes a well structured control solution for the local control level allowing the integration of different types of engineering information into the control algorithm. based on a comparative study of the structures of pid and imc controllers a novel control structure with two degrees of freedom (or three if the possibility of adaptation is considered too) is defined. the application of the new control structure is illustrated by the example of the temperature control in a laboratory water heater system. keywords: pid, imc, constrained inverse introduction more open control solutions which, at the same time, allow taking into account the inherent steady-state and unsteady-state (dynamic) characteristics of the process are recently introduced for chemical processes, too. in spite of the fact that the ifac technical committee on “chemical process control” has already outlined the necessity of the integration of process design and control design at its world congress in 1994, the broader application of control solutions mapping all the aspects of process characteristics directly requires much more time. this integration can assure that the a priori chemical engineering knowledge used in the process design could be employed in the development of the control algorithms in an explicit way. the introduction of this methodology is slowed down by several factors: ● it is well known that in the most part of chemical process control pid controllers, that map the model of the traditional instrumental controllers, are used. the digital technology allowed the implementation of several pid-modifications softening the difficulties of the application of common pid-algorithms in many cases. the consequence is that configuring a real control loop on the control system involves determining numerous structural and calculation parameters beside the three original control parameters. this way the simple algorithm loses its transparency and makes it almost impossible for the personnel operating the process application carefully the tuning methods of the control theory enforcing the application of empirical tuning techniques. according to an estimation, the ratio of pid controllers is 98 % in an average chemical process and only 5-10 % can be considered as more advanced solution. among these, 80 % of industrial pid-controllers are poorly tuned, 30 % of them are operated in manual mode and 30 % of them use the parameters set at commissioning [1]. limited competitors of pid-controllers are the mpc techniques which are mainly applied at the hierarchy level above the pid-controllers. ● control theory has a wide range of linear techniques, however thorough investigation the prerequisites of the practical applications has started only recently. measurement noises got a large attention from the beginning; while the dead-time, steady-state characteristics (e.g. nonlinearity of valves), the constraints of control outputs, the model error and the effect of the non-measured disturbances are getting into the researchers’ interest only recently. ● the chemical engineering knowledge regarding the process is principally given in form of balances for the phase masses, the component masses, the enthalpy (heat) and maybe the momentum which is a complex set of partial differential equations supplemented with the constitutive algebraic equations. in process design generally the simplified steady-state form of the equation set is used. the chemical engineering approach can be mainly tied to the steady-state models. the unsteady-state model is usually too complex to be employed directly in the control. on the other hand the black box models applied in control theory do not include any information regarding the structure of the controlled process. recently published approaches use models reflecting the structure of the controlled process to some extent while maintaining a simplified 48 form of the model (tendency models [2], grey box model, etc). present paper proposes a well structured form of the local control level which allows the integration of different types of engineering information in the control algorithm. comparison of control structures the widespread use of the pid algorithms in the classical feedback scheme is due to the following to basic reasons: 1. the role of pid-controllers in the traditional process control profession. 2. the good control performance achieved at the local control level. the second one is accounted for in a bit more details. the algorithm is transformed as follows: )1( 1 ) 1 1( 2 ++∗=++= ststt t tk st st st kg idi i cc c d i cc (1) i.e. the pid-controller can be interpreted as a serial system of an integrator and the inverse of a second order system (see fig. 1). if the dynamics of the process is second order then the transfer function of the part in dotted frame could be set to unity by appropriately tuning the pid parameters. this way the transfer function of the closed loop is a first-order filter and its time constant can be set arbitrarily. since many of the chemical processes can be well approximated by first or second-order dynamics, in such cases the excellent performance of pid controllers is not surprising. it should be emphasized, that the same results are obtained with model-based design techniques (direct synthesis, imc, etc.), in case of nonlinear systems the results are not equivalent rather they are only similar. figure 1: classical feedback scheme fig. 1 illustrates well the functions of the two parts of the controller used in the feedback loop. the inverse part compensates for the dynamics of the process, while the integrator eliminates the control error (and ultimately the final control error completely). the feed-back part can compensate for the influence of both the changes of the setpoint and disturbances (causes) by feeding back the output (time-delayed effect). measuring the dominant disturbances, the dynamics of the compensation can be significantly improved by applying a feed-forward part. the feed-back and feed-forward parts can be synthesized in the imc structure (see fig. 2). the applied filter has two functions; on the one hand it filters the noises, and on the other hand assures the operability of the scheme (without a filter a short circuit can be obtained). applying a first-order filter, the scheme can be transformed according to fig. 3. taking into account that the product of the transfer functions of the model and the inverse is unity, the transfer function of the part in dotted frame is the following: inverse stmodelinverse st inverse st g c c c ∗= ∗∗ + − ∗ + = 1 1 1 1 1 1 (2) figure 2: the imc structure filter inverse process model + + inverse of the second order system process + 1=sg stc 1 49 figure 3: the transformed imc this gives the same result shown on fig. 1, except that there was not any assumption made for the model. therefore the part in dotted frame fulfils both the inverting and the error elimination functions. the above analyses are valid for linear system models. the imc structure allows taking into account the effect of the measured disturbances in the model construction as well as in the model-based inverse formation. the model error and the effect of the unmeasured disturbances are measured together by the model error. therefore the accuracy of the model is known by very instant by calculating the model error. in the original imc structure the model error is compensated by feeding back the model error to the input of the feed-forward inverse model. this way the model approximates the real system. in the structure shown on fig. 2 the input of process and the model are the same, consequently it can be used for the control of stable systems only. new control structure in the construction of the new structure related to the above ones the following starting assumptions are made: 1. the system model includes all important properties regarding the process dynamics and it maps the manipulated variables, the measured disturbances and the parameters of the model to the controlled variables. 2. based on the model a constrained inverse model is constructed. the constrained inverse maps the setpoints, the measured disturbances and the parameters of the inverse model to realizable (constrained) manipulated variables. sound knowledge of the process is utilised in feedforward form. 3. the difference between the dynamics of the process and model is to be eliminated by applying a model-error compensator. as it was shown earlier, the model error comes from the direct error of the applied model and from the unmeasured disturbances. missing knowledge about the process is compensated for by feeding back the model error obtained from the measurements and the calculations. based on the above assumptions a control structure shown on fig. 4 can be constructed. the manipulated variable which is the feed-forward part of the real (physical) manipulated (uff) variable is calculated from the setpoint and the measured disturbances by forming the constrained inverse. from this signal the controlled variable which serves as reference signal for the process output can be calculated using the model. the difference (control error which is not equivalent with control deviation calculated directly from the setpoint) is due to the different dynamics of the model and the process. in the imc scheme this error can be compensated for by correcting the setpoint (see fig. 2, the correction is on the input of the inverse model, i.e. this correction approaches the model to the process). another option is to apply the correction on the input of the process (i.e. the output of the inverse model) using a compensator (this approaches the process dynamics to the model by correcting on its physical input). this correction is the feed-back part of the physical manipulated variable (ufb). the compensator is required to eliminate the difference (control error) between the controlled variable and the reference signal, i.e. it has an integrating character. the imc scheme synthesises the feed-back and feed-forward parts and makes the correction on the input of the inverse model. in the above structure, defining distinct functionalities, the feed-forward and feed-back terms are firmly separated, hence the degrees of freedom of the controller increases. the feed-forward part treats the servo problem while the feed-back part provides the “noise” compensation. the design of the above two parts of the controller can be separated. inverse model process 1 1 +stc + + + g 50 figure 4: the control scheme using feed the control error relative to the reference signal arising from the different dynamics of the model and the process can be set to zero. the actual model error is generated in a parallel scheme of the process and the model. based on the model error the model parameters can be refined too (adaptive systems). this involves a secondary feed back with a much larger time constant than that of the primary feed back. the different adaptation possibilities are not discussed in this paper. construction of the constrained inverse the function of the inverse term is to generate the input for the specified output. this is interpreted on fig. 5. the model of the process to be controlled maps the manipulated variable(s), the measured disturbance(s) (inputs) and the parameter(s) to the controlled variable(s) (outputs). this is a cause-effect relationship inferring that a physically feasible output can always be generated for every physically realizable input. the inverse model maps the physically possible disturbances, the references given independently from process and the parameters to the process inputs. this is a goal-cause relationship, i.e. the suitable system inputs must be find for the given system outputs. it is not always guaranteed that the specifications can be satisfied. this is the basic problem of composing the inverse. the impractical specifications can be corrected by applying constrained inverses. the details of this method are discussed in the following. let us define the model of the process to be controlled in the following state-space form (the principle of the method is not affected when, for the sake of simplicity, only one manipulated and one controlled variable considered in the calculations in the continuous time domain): ),,( zuxf dt dx = , state-transition function (3) y = g(x, u, z), output function (4) where u input signal, z measure disturbance(s), y controlled variable, x state variables t time. figure 5: interpretation of the constrained inverse constrains model inverse manipulated variable, u constrained manipulated variable input, u output, y measured disturbance, z reference signal, w constrained inverse model process compensation model adaptation model setpoint disturbance manipulated variable controlled variable parameters 51 the relative order of (3-4) system has an important role in the invertation [3]. the relative order basically means the smallest order differential of the output signal which is affected by the manipulated variable directly. therefore if the relative order of the system is r, then the following applies: ),,( xzu dt yd r r ϕ= , (5) while the (r-1)-differential is not a direct function of u. function φ(u, z, x) can be obtained by differentiating equation (4) r-times and taking into account the statetransition function too. the ideal form of inverting was, if the output followed the reference signal without any time delay (y = w). apart from the zero-order systems without any time delay, this is impossible in case of finite manipulated variables. consequently an r-order filter can be applied as inverting rule: ,... 11 1 10 wydt dy a dt yd a dt yd a rr r r r =++++ −− − (6) where a0, a1, ..., ar–1, altogether r pieces of parameters of the inverse formation. the r-order filter can be given as cascading r first-order filter. in this case the inverting has only one parameter. substituting relationship (5) into specification (6) and ordering the equation, φ(u, z, x) can be expressed as: )...( 1 ),,( 1 1 11 0 − − − −−−−= r r r dt yd a dt dy ayw a xzuϕ (7) the manipulating variable can be expressed by inverting φ(u, z, x) with respect to u: u = φ-1(u, z, x) (8) the smaller is the time constant of the inverse, the more aggressive is the control action, at the same time the higher is the risk that the manipulated variable gets outside the physical constraints. conversely, at higher time constants, the physical constraints of the manipulated variable are more rarely attained. the physical realization of the manipulated variable calculated according to equation (8) cannot be guaranteed, hence usually the constraints are considered: u = {umin, if u < umin; umax, if u > umax; u otherwise} (9) where the allowable range of u: u ∈ [umin, umax]. the constrained manipulated variable calculated according to equation (9) can always be realized; however during the cutbacks the invertation rule (6) cannot be applied. model error compensation the design of the model error compensator is based on fig. 4 and the scheme of the constrained inverse based feed-back controlled process given on fig. 6. the input of the constrained inverse is the setpoint and the measured disturbance and its output is the feedforward manipulation variable (uff) and the reference signal calculated from the model. the model error is compensated by correcting the physical input of the process (u), while the control error (y) is calculated from difference of the reference signal and the measured output. the model for calculating the model error (merr) describes the relationship. the error model can be derived from the process model (3-4); however an autonomous black-box model can also be identified. e.g. if the error model is a maximum second-order input-output model, then a constrained pid controller (c-pid, [3], see fig. 7) can be well applied. the model error can also be compensated in imc structure, assuming that the constrained inverse which makes unnecessary the application of a separate filter and discussed in the previous part, is used. eliminating the model error, the setpoint is implicitly zero; therefore the scheme becomes simpler as shown on fig. 8. it is well known, that the model is required to be selfadjusting in the imc structure. figure 6: classical feedback scheme constrained inverse model process + fbu+ ffu+ control error y correction u 52 figure 7: model error compensation with c-pid controller figure 8: model error compensation with c-pid controller application of the method the application of the new control structure is illustrated by the example of the temperature control in a laboratory water heater system. the scheme of the system is shown on fig. 9. the feed flow rate can be controlled; the discharge temperature of the water can be controlled by the performance of the electric heater [4] figure 9: scheme of the laboratory water heater system the objective is to control the discharge temperature of the water while the feed flow rate and the feed temperature can fluctuate. accordingly, the controlled variable (y) is the discharge temperature, the manipulated variable (u) is the performance of the electric heater, the measured disturbances are the feed temperature (z1) and the feed flow rate (z2). the model of the process is the following heat balance of the tubular equipment: )( hpp ttkux t cb t t cv −= ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ ρρ (10) where x ∈ [0, 1] dimensionless length coordinate, t(t, x) temperature function, th pure time delay, b volumetric flow rate, disturbance signal (z2), v total volume, ρcp heat capacity of the liquid, ku(t – th) source density of electric heating, manipulated variable. the necessary initial and boundary conditions: t(0, x) given, t(t, 0) = z1 temperature of liquid feed (disturbance signal), y = t(t, 1) controlled variable. the heat balance (10) is a partial differential equation (distributed-parameter model) which is practical to be spatially discretized. the so called cascade model, obtained this way, can be transformed into the following state-space model: )]([ 211 1 21 httupxzp z dt dx −+−= )]([ 21 1 2 hii i ttupxx p z dt dx −+−= − , i=2,…,n, (11) y = xn, where n the number of cascade elements (the order of the state-space model), n k p n v p == 21 , parameters. the state-space model (11) has four parameters (p1, p2, th, n) which can be determined from a priory knowledge or by parameter estimation from experimental data. based on the experimental and simulation studies it was concluded that the model adequately reflects the experimental data; therefore it is suitable for the controller design. mv water t in f t < heating pc < open close adam-5000 lan u process for feed back constrained inverse error model control error c-pid process for feed back 53 the first step of controller design is the development of the constrained inverse model. since y does not directly depend on u, the output signal is differentiated according to equation (5): )]([ 21 1 2 hnn n ttupxx p z dt dx dt dy −+−≡= − . (12) the differential of the output is a direct function of u; therefore the relative order of the system is one. according to equation (6) the rule for inverting is the following: wy dt dy c =+τ , (13) where w setpoint, τc time constant. substituting relationship (12) regarding the differential into equation (13), the manipulated variable can be calculated based on equations (7-8): ])([ 1 1 2 1 2 −−+−= nnn c xxxw z p p u τ . (14) since the system is time-delayed, the variables on the right hand side of equation (14) can be considered as the values predicted for time t + th. the constraints corresponding to equation (9) are the following: if u < 0, then u = 0; if u > 10, then u = 10. (15) this way the constrained inverse model is completely defined. the scheme given on fig. 8 is applied for compensating the model error. since the state-space model (11) can be considered as a linear system with changing parameters for variables u, x, y, a model which is isomorphic to model (11) can be used as error model too. the difference is that in this case the input is the correction feed back while the output is negative control error (with respect to the reference signal). zero initial values are used as initial conditions involving that there is not any the control error initially. due to the isomorphism of the two models, the constrained inverse error model is isomorphic to the constrained inverse model. the input, output and state variables as well as the constraints are different, while the disturbances and the parameters are the same. the scheme of the controller constructed according to the above reasoning is shown on fig. 10. the control algorithm based on the scheme on fig. 10 was implemented in matlab/simulink programming environment. the algorithm was tested in several simulation and physical experiments. the results of a representative simulation study are presented on fig. 11. while the temperature of the feed is constant, a simulated disturbance is generated by applying a step function on the setpoint of the ideal flow controller. the controlled system is excited by step-wise changes of the temperature setpoint and the disturbance signal. the controller parameters can be directly estimated on the basis of the parameters of the a priori model. the control performance is significantly better than that of a pid controller; the tuning is much simpler; however the construction of the model is much more time consuming. after acquiring simulation experiences physical experiments were conducted (see fig. 12). in this case the flow control of the system was not ideal either due to other (unpredictable) disturbances affecting the system disturbances. in spite of the poor performance of the flow controller the experience collected in the simulation studies regarding the temperature control are still valid. figure 10: temperature control of the water heater system calculation of uff (14) constraint (15) constraint (15) model (11) error model (11) calculation of ufb (14) water heater delay (th) delay (th)) setpoint disturbance constrained inverse error model constrained inverse model controlled cariable manipulated variable 54 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 fl ow r at e (l/ h) , h ea tin g (% ) wtout tout u f figure 11: results of the simulation study 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 fl ow r at e (l/ h) , h ea tin g (% ) wtout tout f u figure 12: results of the experimental study 55 conclusions based on a comparative study of the structures of pid and imc controllers a novel control structure with two degrees of freedom (or three if the possibility of adaptation is considered too) is defined. at the given setpoint and measured disturbances, the firm knowledge regarding the controlled process is fed forward through a constrained inverse model (i.e. the feed-forward solution of the servo problem). the difference between the reference signal and the measured controlled variable is a control error coming from the model error and the effect of the unmeasured disturbances which is not accounted for. this error represents the lack of knowledge regarding the process to be controlled that can only be compensated for in feed-back scheme (i.e. the feed-back solution of the noise compensation). this can be designed on the basis of model error in several ways. the application of imc structure is advantageous in case of stable systems. simulation and physical experiments conducted on a water heater system, which can be described by a distributed parameter model, justified the feasibility and good performance of the proposed scheme. references 1. luyben w. l.: effect of derivative algorithm and tuning selection on pid control of dead-time processes, ind. eng. chem. res., 2001, 40, 36053611 2. filippi-bossy c., bordet j., villermaux j.: marchal-brassely s., georgakis c.:, batch reactor optimization by use of tendency models, comp. chem. eng., 1989, 13, 35-47 3. szeifert f., nagy l., chovan t., abonyi j.: constrained pi(d) algorithms (c-pid), hung. j. ind. chem., 2005, 33, 81-88 4. bodizs a., szeifert f., chovan t.: convolution model based predictive controller for nonlinear process, ind. eng. chem. res., 1999, 38, 154-161 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry vol. 49(1) pp. 9–16 (2021) hjic.mk.uni-pannon.hu doi: 10.33927/hjic-2021-02 photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b in heterogeneous and homogeneous systems asfandyar khan1,2 , zsolt valicsek1 , and ottó horváth*1 1department of general and inorganic chemistry, center for natural sciences, faculty of engineering, university of pannonia, veszprém, hungary 2department of textile engineering, national textile university faisalabad, pakistan this study focuses on the photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b (rhb) in heterogeneous and homogeneous photofenton reactions. in the heterogeneous system, iron(ii) doped copper ferrite cuii (x) feii (1−x)fe iii 2 o4 nanoparticles (nps) prepared in our previous work were employed as potential catalysts. the photodegradation of rhb was carried out in a quartz cuvette located in a diode array spectrometer. the experimental conditions such as ph, nps dosage and h2o2 dosage with regard to the photocatalytic degradation of rhb were optimized to be 7.5, 500 mg/l and 8.9 × 10−2 mol/l, respectively. in addition, visible light-induced photodegradation of rhb was also carried out by using h2o2 over a wide ph range in the absence of heterogeneous photocatalysts. it was observed that the reaction rate significantly increased above ph 10, resulting in a faster rate of degradation of rhb, which may be attributed to the deprotonation of hydrogen peroxide. furthermore, the potential antibacterial property of such catalysts against the gram-negative bacterium vibrio fischeri in a bioluminescence assay yielded inhibition activities of more than 60% in all cases. keywords: heterogeneous photo-fenton system, iron(ii) doped copper ferrites, deprotonation effect, photodegradation 1. introduction synthetic dyes have numerous applications in several industries, e.g., paper, textile, leather and paint. besides these applications, some dyes are toxic organic compounds and their discharge into the environment causes eutrophication, aesthetic pollution and distress for marine organisms [1, 2]. some synthetic dyes are recalcitrant, that is, resistant to biological degradation and direct photolysis. in addition, many dyes contain nitrogen which produces carcinogenic as well as mutagenic aromatic amines as a result of natural anaerobic reductive degradation [3, 4]. these toxic organic dyes can be mineralized into water and carbon dioxide via photocatalytic reactions using catalysts under ultraviolet or visible light irradiation [5, 6]. only a handful of research groups have developed and applied ferrite nanoparticles (nps) as catalysts which can utilize larger bandwidths of the visible light spectrum. manganese ferrite [7], zinc ferrite [8–10], aluminium doped zinc ferrite [11], manganese doped cobalt ferrite [12], barium ferrite [13], copper ferrite [14], and nickel ferrites [15, 16] have been investigated with regard to the degradation of certain dyes and other toxic compounds. *correspondence: horvath.otto@mk.uni-pannon.hu our research group prepared and applied iron(ii) doped copper ferrites cuii (x) feii (1−x)fe iii 2 o4 (where x = 0, 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1) for the photo-induced degradation of methylene blue (mb) [17]. here, a detailed photocatalytic study on the degradation of rhodamine b is presented by using heterogeneous photo-fenton systems and compared to homogeneous photocatalytic procedures. in addition, the antibacterial property of iron(ii) doped copper ferrites in the vibrio scheri bioluminescence inhibition assay was investigated. 2. experimental 2.1 materials rhodamine b (molecular formula: c28h31cln2o3) was used as a model dye for visible light-induced photocatalytic degradation. anhydrous copper(ii) sulfate, ferric chloride hexahydrate, ammonium iron(ii) sulfate hexahydrate and sodium hydroxide were used to prepare the catalysts. sodium hydroxide or hydrochloric acid was added to adjust the ph during photocatalysis. hydrogen peroxide (30%w/w) was employed as fenton’s reagent and double distilled water used as a solvent throughout the study. all the laboratory-grade chemicals were obtained from sigma-aldrich (budapest, hungary) and used without further purification. https://doi.org/10.33927/hjic-2021-02 mailto:horvath.otto@mk.uni-pannon.hu 10 khan, valicsek, horváth 2.2 applied catalysts the catalysts applied in this study were iron(ii) doped copper ferrite cuii (x) feii (1−x)fe iii 2 o4 nps (where x = 0 (np-1), 0.2 (np-2), 0.4 (np-3), 0.6 (np-4), 0.8 (np5), 1.0 (np-6)), which were prepared by a simple coprecipitation-calcination technique. the detailed methods for the synthesis of these catalysts and their structural elucidation have been reported in our earlier studies [17, 18]. 2.3 rhb photocatalytic reactions for photocatalysis, a stock solution of 0.5 g/l rhb was prepared. in order to perform the photocatalysis, a small cuvette used as a reactor was adjusted to a s600 uv/vis diode array spectrophotometer. the concentration of rhb (approximately 1.8×10−5 mol/l) in the cuvette was calculated by using the beer-lambert law [17]. control experiments for the self-degradation of rhb were carried out without ferrite nanoparticles in the absence and presence of both light and hydrogen peroxide (for the oxidant effect). then the np catalyst of a given concentration was added to the rhb solution and stirred for 30 mins to ensure a good degree of dispersion and reach an adsorption equilibrium before photodegradation. the temperature of the photoreactor (25±2 ◦c), concentration of rhb (1.8 × 10−5 mol/l) and duration (140 mins.) of photocatalytic experiments were kept constant. the process variables investigated were the catalyst dosage (80 to 800 mg/l), hydrogen peroxide concentration (2.2 × 10−2 to 3.0 × 10−1 mol/l) and ph (2 to 12). meanwhile, the original ph of the total aqueous solution was approximately 7.5. the ph was adjusted by adding hcl or naoh before starting the photocatalytic experiment. 2.4 determination of reaction rate the beer-lambert law was used to determine the reaction rate of each experiment. the spectral changes observed in the visible range of the absorption spectrum (fig. 1) indicate that the intermediates and end products formed during the photocatalytic degradation of rhb did not produce any remarkable peaks. therefore, the reaction rate of rhb photodegradation can be determined from the reduction in absorbance at the maximum wavelength (λmax = 554 nm). the addition of heterogeneous photocatalysts caused the baseline in the recorded spectra to change as a consequence of scattering. this problem was resolved during the evaluation of the reaction rate by applying baseline corrections. 2.5 assessment of antibacterial property a luminoskan ascent microplate luminometer (thermo scientific) was used to measure the antibacterial property of the ferrite nps in a vibrio scheri bioluminescence figure 1: spectral changes during rhodamine b photodegradation in the presence of np-3. the inset shows the absorbance vs. time plot at 554 nm. experimental conditions: concentration of rhb is 1.8 × 10−5 mol/l, concentration of h2o2 is 1.8 × 10 −1 mol/l, concentration of np-3 is 400 mg/l, initial ph is = 7.5, and irradiation time is 140 mins. inhibition assay. according to the manufacturer’s (hach lange gmbh, germany) recommendations, a test specimen of a gram-negative vibrio fischeri (nrrl-b-11177) suspension was prepared with a lifespan of 4 hours after being reconstituted. the same test protocol was followed as reported in the literature [19]. during the evaluation, the results obtained from 2 parallel measurements were averaged before the relative inhibition (%) was calculated using relative inhibition (t) = ic(t) − is(t) ic(t) × 100 % (1) where ic(t) denotes the emission intensity of the control sample at time t and is(t) represents the emission intensity of the test specimen at the same time. 3. results and discussion a detailed explanation regarding the control experiments concerning the photodegradation of rhb was reported in one of our previous studies [18]. the experiment used as a basis for comparisons (rhb + h2o2 + light) is shown in fig. 2. after the control experiments, the photocatalytic efficiency of six doped ferrite nanoparticles was investigated. fig. 1 shows the spectral changes obtained during the photocatalytic experiment using np-3 and the decrease in the absorbance of rhb at λmax = 554 nm (inset of fig. 1). the degradation reaction of rhb follows apparent rstorder kinetics (fig. 3), which is also consistent with earlier observations regarding other catalysts [20, 21]. the slight deviation from the straight line is due to the complex nature of this heterogeneous system. fig. 4 reveals that all doped ferrite nps in the series of cuii (x) feii (1−x)fe iii 2 o4 (x = 0 − 1) delivered higher apparent rate constants for the degradation of rhb compared to the control experiment. doped copper ferrites hungarian journal of industry and chemistry photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b 11 figure 2: spectral changes during the photodegradation of rhodamine b in the absence of nps. the inset shows the absorbance vs. time plot at λmax = 554 nm. experimental conditions: concentration of h2o2 is 1.8 × 10 −1 mol/l, concentration of rhb is 1.8×10−5 mol/l, and irradiation time is 140 mins. figure 3: a plot of the logarithm of the absorbance at 554 nm vs. time for the photodegradation of rhb (see the inset of fig. 1) np-2 and np-3 exhibited outstanding photocatalytic performances in the series studied. nickel doped cobalt ferrite nps revealed a very similar trend with regard to the photo-oxidative degradation of rhb [22]. the higher apparent rate constants for the degradation of rhb using np-2 and np-3 may be attributed to their special needlelike crystalline structure [17]. on the basis of the first experimental series, np-3 was chosen to further investigate three important determinants, namely the catalyst dosage, hydrogen peroxide concentration and ph of the heterogeneous photo-fenton system. 3.1 the effect of catalyst dosage fig. 5 shows the effect of the np-3 dosage (0−800 mg/l) on the apparent rate constant. the increase in dosage from 0−500 mg/l yielded a significant increase in the apparent rate constant. this phenomenon can be attributed to the higher number of available active sites in heterogeneous photo-fenton processes [23]. however, increasing the dosage of nps above 500 mg/l caused a moderate figure 4: photocatalytic efficiency in terms of apparent rate constants (compared to the control experiment) for np-1 to 6. experimental conditions: concentration of nps is 400 mg/l, concentration of rhb is 1.8 × 10−5 mol/l, concentration of h2o2 is 1.8 × 10 −1 mol/l, initial ph is 7.5, and irradiation time is 140 mins. figure 5: effect of the concentration of np-3 on the apparent rate constant of rhb photodegradation. experimental conditions: concentration of rhb is 1.8 × 10−5 mol/l, concentration of h2o2 is 1.8 × 10 −1 mol/l, initial ph is 7.5, and irradiation time is 140 mins. decrease in the apparent rate constant, which may be attributed to the fact that higher concentrations of nps can increase the turbidity of the reaction system, thereby hindering the absorption of light [4]. therefore, for the photocatalytic experiments that followed, an optimum np-3 dosage of 500 mg/l was used. 3.2 the effect of the hydrogen peroxide concentration at first, the effect of h2o2 on the photodegradation of rhb in the absence of nps was investigated (fig. 6). the concentration of h2o2 was increased from 4.5 × 10−2 to 6.7 × 10−1 mol/l. the reaction rate was enhanced by increasing the concentration of h2o2 up to 3.5 × 10−1 mol/l. however, beyond this value, a slight decrease in the apparent rate constant was observed. the second experimental series focused on checking the effect of increasing the concentration of h2o2 from 2.2 × 10−2 to 3 × 10−1 mol/l in the presence of nps 49(1) pp. 9–16 (2021) 12 khan, valicsek, horváth figure 6: effect of the concentration of h2o2 on the apparent rate constant of rhb photodegradation in the absence of nps. experimental conditions: concentration of rhb is 1.8 × 10−5 mol/l, initial ph is 7.5, and irradiation time is 140 mins. figure 7: effect of the concentration of h2o2 on the apparent rate constant of rhb photodegradation in the presence of np-3 in a heterogeneous photo-fenton system. experimental conditions: concentration of rhb is 1.8 × 10−5 mol/l, concentration of np-3 is 500 mg/l, initial ph is 7.5, and irradiation time is 140 mins. in a heterogeneous photo-fenton system (fig. 7). the reaction rate was remarkably improved by increasing the concentration of h2o2 up to 8.9 × 10−2 mol/l. a further increase in the concentration of h2o2 did not enhance the reaction rate significantly, moreover, similar results have been published in the literature [24, 25]. the excess h2o2 could act as a •oh scavenger, producing the less reactive ho•2 species instead of the highly potent •oh [4, 23, 25]. hence 8.9 × 10−2 mol/l as an optimum concentration of h2o2 was used in experiments on the photocatalytic degradation of rhb that followed. 3.3 the effect of ph the surface charge properties of the photocatalyst and the ionic species present in the photocatalytic reactor are greatly influenced by the ph. furthermore, the photodegradation efficiency of the dye is affected by the ionic figure 8: effect of the initial ph on the apparent rate constant of rhb photodegradation in the absence of nps. experimental conditions: concentration of rhb is 1.8×10−5 mol/l, concentration of h2o2 is 8.9×10 −2 mol/l, and irradiation time is 140 mins. species and surface charge of the photocatalyst in the reaction mixture. two experimental series were designed to study the effect of ph on the visible light-induced degradation of rhb. in the first series, the ph was varied from 3.8 to 12.1 while the concentrations of rhb and h2o2 were kept constant in the absence of nps. remarkably, neutral and alkaline phs were found to be more effective in this system concerning rhb photodegradation (fig. 8). in addition, the presence and absence of h2o2 were also investigated at higher ph values (approximately ph 12), which can be seen from the last two data points in fig. 8. it was observed that significantly enhancing the fraction of the more reactive deprotonated form of hydrogen peroxide (ho –2 ) at higher ph values ( pka = 11.75 [26]) noticeably accelerated the rate of rhb degradation. on the basis of fig. 8, it was possible to determine the individual (apparent) rate constants (under these conditions) for the differently protonated forms of peroxide, namely 1.9 × 10−5 s−1 for h2o2 and 6.2 × 10−4 s−1 for ho – 2 . deprotonation resulted in increasing the degradation effect by 32 times. moreover, the effect of the ph in the presence of nps (fig. 9) revealed that a neutral or near alkaline ph could be optimal during this type of reaction. although the best apparent rate constant was observed at ph ≈ 8, further increasing the ph resulted in a slight decrease in the reaction rate. by comparing figs. 8 and 9, it can be observed that the partly hydroxylated forms of the metal ions ([feiii(oh)2] +, [cuii(oh)]+) could also be identified at the local maximum of approximately ph = 8 presented in fig. 9. therefore, the partly hydroxylated metal ions can react with h2o2, resulting in a ≈ 14times increase in the individual (apparent) rate constant (2.7×10−4 s−1 compared to 1.9×10−5 s−1 for h2o2 in the absence of nps). the ph can also alter the charge state of rhb in the reaction mixture. furthermore, at high ph values, rhb aggregates are produced as a result of the excessive concenhungarian journal of industry and chemistry photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b 13 figure 9: effect of the ph on the apparent rate constant of rhb photodegradation in the presence of np-3 in a heterogeneous system. experimental conditions: concentration of np-3 is 500 mg/l, concentration of rhb is 1.8 × 10−5 mol/l, concentration of h2o2 is 8.9 × 10 −2 mol/l, and irradiation time is 140 mins. tration of oh– ions, which compete with coo– to bind with n+. in addition, since the surface of the solid catalyst is negatively charged, it repels the rhb due to the presence of ionic coo– groups under basic conditions. therefore, the degradation efficiency on the surface of the photocatalyst is decreased. the same phenomenon in the case of bismuth ferrite nanoparticles has been reported in the literature [4, 27]. however, an increase in the ph above 11 significantly enhanced the reaction rate (fig. 9) in a very similar manner to the reaction in the absence of nps. as a result, the presence of nps does not further increase the reactivity of ho –2 . in addition, the effect of light, hydrogen peroxide and nps at an approximately constant ph is illustrated in table 1. the light-induced degradation of rhb at ph 12 in the absence of both hydrogen peroxide and np-3 yielded a very low reaction rate (step 1). in step 2, the addition of hydrogen peroxide in the absence of both light and np-3 at ph 11.9 yielded a faster reaction rate. step 3, which represents a heterogeneous fenton system, yielded a much faster reaction rate. the heterogeneous photofenton system shown in step 4 yielded the best reaction rate as far as the degradation of rhb is concerned. the catalyst np-3 (cuii (0.4) feii (0.6) feiii2 o4) was able to overcome the disadvantage of the narrow ph range of conventional photo-fenton processes. based on this experimental series, the catalyst cuii (0.4) feii (0.6) feiii2 o4 is a promising candidate for the degradation of various recalcitrant dyes. 3.4 generalized rhb degradation mechanism a very simple schematic mechanism is proposed for the purpose of rhb degradation since the reactive species produced during irradiation, namely •oh, h+ and •o−2 , oxidize rhb molecules to intermediates of lower molecular weights. generally speaking, the active species react figure 10: visual and spectrometric comparison of rhb before and after its degradation; experimental conditions: concentration of nps is 500 mg/l, concentration of rhb is 1.8×10−5 mol/l, concentration of h2o2 is 8.9×10 −2 mol/l, and irradiation time is 140 mins. with the central carbon atom in the chemical structure of rhb. then the oxidizing agents attack the intermediates produced in the previous step, yielding smaller open-ring compounds. subsequently, the latter compounds are mineralized to water and carbon dioxide [28]. as is displayed in fig. 10, the uv/visible absorption spectrum of rhb degradation yields prominent peaks at 262, 358 and 554 nm. however, no significant peaks were observed following photodegradation (fig. 10) in neither the visible nor uv region, which confirmed the complete mineralization of rhb. the images obtained from the photoreactor (cuvette) before and after photocatalysis also confirmed the complete degradation of rhb, namely a clear, colorless solution was obtained after the removal of solid catalysts (fig. 10) by centrifugal filtration. 3.5 photocatalytic efficiencies under optimized conditions finally, the photocatalytic efficiencies of all six nps (np1 to 6) were determined under optimized conditions for the degradation of rhb (fig. 11). it was observed that all of the nps were active photocatalysts, the application of np-3 yielded the highest reaction rate. these results are quite comparable to those presented in fig. 4 obtained from the first series of experiments. however, the concentration of hydrogen peroxide under the optimized conditions (8.9 × 10−2 mol/l) is considerably lower than in the first series (1.8×10−1 mol/l) and is, therefore, much more economical. although the concentration of the photocatalyst is higher under the optimized conditions (500 vs. 400 mg/l), the nps can be reused over several cycles. according to our results, all nps in the series can potentially be applied for the purpose of environmental remediation. 49(1) pp. 9–16 (2021) 14 khan, valicsek, horváth table 1: comparison of the reaction rate and apparent rate constant at ph ≈ 12 in homogeneous (steps 1 & 2) and heterogeneous (steps 3 & 4) systems. step no. light hydrogen peroxide np-3 (mg/l) initial ph final ph apparent comparison (mol/l) by adding 15 rate constant (1/s) with basic µ l 1m naoh) reaction (%) 1 visible 0 0 12.1 11.7 2.6 × 10−6 12 2 no 8.9 × 10−2 0 11.9 11 1.6 × 10−4 749 3 no 8.9 × 10−2 500 11.9 11.3 2.7 × 10−4 1256 4 visible 8.9 × 10−2 500 11.9 11.2 3.6 × 10−4 1642 figure 11: photocatalytic efficiency in terms of apparent rate constants (compared to the control experiment) for np-1 to 6. experimental conditions: concentration of nps is 500 mg/l, concentration of rhb is 1.8 × 10−5 mol/l, concentration of h2o2 is 8.9 × 10 −2 mol/l, initial ph is 7.5, and irradiation time is 140 mins. 3.6 assessment of the antibacterial activity of doped copper ferrites the inhibition effect (%) of doped copper ferrites against gram-negative vibrio scheri in bioluminescence assays is illustrated in fig. 12. the inhibition (%) of bacteria in the presence of doped nanoparticles containing varying ratios of copper (cuii) and iron (feii) revealed that all doped copper ferrites yielded sufficient antibacterial activities. in our research, higher ratios of cuii proved to be useful in improving antibacterial activity. the same trend in terms of bacterial inhibition against gram-negative escherichia coli was observed using cobalt ferrite nanoparticles synthesized by co-precipitation [29]. generally speaking, cuii can disrupt the functions of cells in several ways, hence the ability of microorganisms to develop resistance to cuii is remarkably reduced. the attachment of cuii ions to the surface of microorganisms plays a key role in their antibacterial activity [30]. the ions from the surface of doped copper ferrites, especially cuii, are adsorbed onto bacterial cell walls, damaging the cell membrane in two possible ways, namely by altering the functions of enzymes or solidifying the structures of proteins. therefore, the presence of copper ferrites in the bacterial growth medium immobilizes and inactivates bacteria, inhibiting their ability to replicate and ultimately leading to cell death [31]. figure 12: comparison of the degree of bacterial inhibition using doped copper ferrites against gram-negative vibrio scheri. in our study, a mechanism is proposed (fig. 13) in which doped copper ferrites are attached to the cell wall of the bacterium vibrio fischeri, reducing its ability to replicate. the degree of bacterial inhibition in all cases is approximately 60%, which confirms the potential application of doped copper ferrites in terms of antibacterial developments. 4. conclusion iron(ii) doped copper ferrites cuii (x) feii (1−x)fe iii 2 o4 have been proven to be efficient catalysts for the degradation of organic pollutants under visible-light irradiation in the presence of hydrogen peroxide. the performances of nps with copper(ii) ratios of x = 0.2 and 0.4 were especially promising under optimized conditions. contrary to conventional homogeneous photo-fenton systems, our catalysts exhibit higher efficiencies under neutral and near alkaline conditions. besides their advantageous photocatalytic ability, these nps also show a sufficient degree of antibacterial activity, due to their copper(ii) constituents. by taking both properties into consideration, cuii (0.4) feii (0.6) feiii2 o4 yields the optimum combination of these features. therefore, from the series of nps studied in this work, np-3 is the most promising candidate for the combined photocatalytic purification and disinfection of water. hungarian journal of industry and chemistry photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b 15 figure 13: proposed mechanism for the attachment of nanoparticles to vibrio fischeri: bacterium and nanoparticles before (a) and after (b) attachment. acknowledgments the proficient support of prof. dr. éva kristóf-makó, prof. dr. kristóf kovács and dr. balázs zsirka in terms of the structural elucidation of nanoparticle catalysts is gratefully acknowledged. this work was supported by the national research, development and innovation office of hungary in the framework of the bilateral hungarian-french science and technology (s&t) cooperation project 2019-2.1.11-tét-2019-00033). declaration of interest the authors declare that they have no known competing financial interests or personal relationships that may have appeared to influence the work reported in this paper. references [1] bao, n.; feng, x.; yang, z.; shen, l.; lu, x.: highly efficient liquid-phase photooxidation of an azo dye methyl orange over novel nanostructured porous titanate-based fiber of self-supported radially aligned h2ti8o17 • 1.5 h2o nanorods. environ. sci. technol., 2004, 38(9), 2729–2736 doi: 10.1021/es034388k [2] abdi, j.; yahyanezhad, m.; sakhaie, s.; vossoughi, m.; alemzadeh, i.: synthesis of porous tio2/zro2 photocatalyst derived from zirconium metal organic framework for degradation of organic pollutants under visible light irradiation. j. environ. chem. eng., 2019, 7(3), 103096 doi: 10.1016/j.jece.2019.103096 [3] horikoshi, s.; hojo, f.; hidaka, h.; serpone, n.: environmental remediation by an integrated microwave/uv illumination technique. 8. fate of carboxylic acids, aldehydes, alkoxycarbonyl and phenolic substrates in a microwave radiation field in the presence of tio2 particles under uv irradiation. environ. sci. technol., 2004, 38(7), 2198–2208 doi: 10.1021/es034823a [4] guo, s.; zhang, g.; jimmy, c. y.: enhanced photofenton degradation of rhodamine b using graphene oxide–amorphous fepo4 as effective and stable heterogeneous catalyst. j. colloid interface sci., 2015, 448, 460–466 doi: 10.1016/j.jcis.2015.02.005 [5] huang, y.; li, j.; ma, w.; cheng, m.; zhao, j.; yu, j. c.: efficient h2o2 oxidation of organic pollutants catalyzed by supported iron sulfophenylporphyrin under visible light irradiation. j. phys. chem. b., 2004, 108(22), 7263–7270 doi: 10.1021/jp036054n [6] dhiwahar, a. t.; maruthamuthu, s.; marnadu, r.; sundararajan, m.; manthrammel, m. a.; shkir, m.; sakthivel, p.; reddy, v. r. m.: improved photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b under visible light and magnetic properties using microwave combustion grown ni doped copper ferrite spinel nanoparticles. solid state sci., 2021, 113, 106542 doi: 10.1016/j.solidstatesciences.2021.106542 [7] luciano, a. j. r.; de sousa soletti, l.; ferreira, m. e. c.; cusioli, l. f.; de andrade, m. b.; bergamasco, r.; yamaguchi, n. u.: manganese ferrite dispersed over graphene sand composite for methylene blue photocatalytic degradation. j. environ. chem. eng., 2020, 8(5), 104191 doi: 10.1016/j.jece.2020.104191 [8] mandal, s.; natarajan, s.; tamilselvi, a.; mayadevi, s.: photocatalytic and antimicrobial activities of zinc ferrite nanoparticles synthesized through soft chemical route: a magnetically recyclable catalyst for water/wastewater treatment. j. environ. chem. eng., 2016, 4(3), 2706–2712 doi: 10.1016/j.jece.2016.05.020 [9] mahmoodi, n. m.: zinc ferrite nanoparticle as a magnetic catalyst: synthesis and dye degradation. mater. res. bull., 2013, 48(10), 4255–4260 doi: 10.1016/j.materresbull.2013.06.070 [10] han, l.; zhou, x.; wan, l.; deng, y.; zhan, s.: synthesis of znfe2o4 nanoplates by succinic acidassisted hydrothermal route and their photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b under visible light. 49(1) pp. 9–16 (2021) https://doi.org/10.1021/es034388k https://doi.org/10.1021/es034388k https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2019.103096 https://doi.org/10.1021/es034823a https://doi.org/10.1021/es034823a https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jcis.2015.02.005 https://doi.org/10.1021/jp036054n https://doi.org/10.1016/j.solidstatesciences.2021.106542 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2020.104191 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2020.104191 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2016.05.020 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2016.05.020 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.materresbull.2013.06.070 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.materresbull.2013.06.070 16 khan, valicsek, horváth j. environ. chem. eng., 2014, 2(1), 123–130 doi: 10.1016/j.jmrt.2020.10.080 [11] borhan, a. i.; samoila, p.; hulea, v.; iordan, a. r.; palamaru, m. n.: effect of al3+ substituted zinc ferrite on photocatalytic degradation of orange i azo dye. j. photochem. photobiol. a chem., 2014, 279, 17–23 doi: 10.1016/j.jphotochem.2014.01.010 [12] dou, r.; cheng, h.; ma, j.; komarneni, s.: manganese doped magnetic cobalt ferrite nanoparticles for dye degradation via a novel heterogeneous chemical catalysis. mater. chem. phys., 2020, 240, 122181 doi: 10.1016/j.matchemphys.2019.122181 [13] roonasi, p.; mazinani, m.: synthesis and application of barium ferrite/activated carbon composite as an effective solar photocatalyst for discoloration of organic dye contaminants in wastewater. j. environ. chem. eng., 2017, 5(4), 3822–3827 doi: 10.1016/j.jece.2017.07.035 [14] tehrani-bagha, a.; gharagozlou, m.; emami, f.: catalytic wet peroxide oxidation of a reactive dye by magnetic copper ferrite nanoparticles. j. environ. chem. eng., 2016, 4(2), 1530–1536 doi: 10.1016/j.jece.2016.02.014 [15] goyal, a.; bansal, s.; singhal, s.: facile reduction of nitrophenols: comparative catalytic efficiency of mfe2o4 (m = ni, cu, zn) nano ferrites. int. j. hydrog. energy, 2014, 39(10), 4895–4908 doi: 10.1016/j.ijhydene.2014.01.050 [16] liu, s. q.; feng, l. r.; xu, n.; chen, z. g.; wang, x. m.: magnetic nickel ferrite as a heterogeneous photo-fenton catalyst for the degradation of rhodamine b in the presence of oxalic acid. chem. eng. technol., 2012, 203, 432–439 doi: 10.1016/j.cej.2012.07.071 [17] khan, a.; valicsek, z.; horváth, o.: synthesis, characterization and application of iron (ii) doped copper ferrites (cuii(x)fe ii (1−x)fe iii 2 o4) as novel heterogeneous photo-fenton catalysts. nanomaterials, 2020, 10(5), 921 doi: 10.3390/nano10050921 [18] khan, a.; valicsek, z.; horváth, o.: comparing the degradation potential of copper (ii), iron (ii), iron (iii) oxides, and their composite nanoparticles in a heterogeneous photo-fenton system. nanomaterials, 2021, 11(1), 225 doi: 10.3390/nano11010225 [19] szabó-bárdos, e.; kulcsár, p.; kováts, n.; békéssy, z.; eck-varanka, b.; horváth, o.: assessment of the potential bactericide effect of self-cleaning floors: a proposed protocol. luminescence, 2020, 35(3), 434–436 doi: 10.1002/bio.3745 [20] li, y. f.; xu, d.; oh, j. i.; shen, w.; li, x.; yu, y.: mechanistic study of codoped titania with nonmetal and metal ions: a case of c+ mo codoped tio2. acs catal., 2012, 2(3), 391–398 doi: 10.1021/cs2006668 [21] rahman, q. i.; ahmad, m.; misra, s. k.; lohani, m.: effective photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b dye by zno nanoparticles. mater. lett., 2013, 91, 170–174 doi: 10.1016/j.matlet.2012.09.044 [22] singh, c.; goyal, a.; singhal, s.: nickel-doped cobalt ferrite nanoparticles: efficient catalysts for the reduction of nitroaromatic compounds and photo-oxidative degradation of toxic dyes. nanoscale, 2014, 6(14), 7959–7970 doi: 10.1039/c4nr01730g [23] wang, x.; pan, y.; zhu, z.; wu, j.: efficient degradation of rhodamine b using febased metallic glass catalyst by fenton-like process. chemosphere, 2014, 117, 638–643 doi: 0.1016/j.chemosphere.2014.09.055 [24] zhang, l.; nie, y.; hu, c.; qu, j.: enhanced fenton degradation of rhodamine b over nanoscaled cudoped latio3 perovskite. appl. catal. b environ., 2012, 125, 418–424 doi: 10.1016/j.apcatb.2012.06.015 [25] salem, m. a.; abdel-halim, s. t.; el-sawy, a. e.-h. m.; zaki, a. b.: kinetics of degradation of allura red, ponceau 4r and carmosine dyes with potassium ferrioxalate complex in the presence of h2o2. chemosphere, 2009, 76(8), 1088–1093 doi: 10.1016/j.chemosphere.2009.04.033 [26] skounas, s.; methenitis, c.; pneumatikakis, g.; morcellet, m.: kinetic studies and mechanism of hydrogen peroxide catalytic decomposition by cu (ii) complexes with polyelectrolytes derived from lalanine and glycylglycine. bioinorg. chem. appl., 2010, 2010, 1–9 doi: 10.1155/2010/643120 [27] sun, z.; xiao, c.; hussain, f.; zhang, g.: synthesis of stable and easily recycled ferric oxides assisted by rhodamine b for efficient degradation of organic pollutants in heterogeneous photo-fenton system. j. clean. prod., 2018, 196, 1501–1507 doi: 10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.06.122 [28] isari, a. a.; payan, a.; fattahi, m.; jorfi, s.; kakavandi, b.: photocatalytic degradation of rhodamine b and real textile wastewater using fedoped tio2 anchored on reduced graphene oxide (fe-tio2/rgo): characterization and feasibility, mechanism and pathway studies. appl. surf. sci., 2018, 462, 549–564 doi: 10.1016/j.apsusc.2018.08.133 [29] samavati, a.; ismail, a.: antibacterial properties of copper-substituted cobalt ferrite nanoparticles synthesized by co-precipitation method. particuology, 2017, 30, 158–163 doi: 10.1016/j.partic.2016.06.003 [30] hoshino, n.; kimura, t.; hayakawa, f.; yamaji, a.; ando, t.: bactericidal activity of catechincopper (ii) complexes against staphylococcus aureus compared with escherichia coli. lett. appl. microbiol., 2000, 31(3), 213–217 doi: 10.1046/j.13652672.2000.00800.x [31] hu, c. h.; xia, m. s.: adsorption and antibacterial effect of copper-exchanged montmorillonite on escherichia coli k88. appl. clay sci., 2006, 31(3-4), 180–184 doi: 10.1016/j.clay.2005.10.010 hungarian journal of industry and chemistry https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jmrt.2020.10.080 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jmrt.2020.10.080 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jphotochem.2014.01.010 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.matchemphys.2019.122181 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2017.07.035 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2017.07.035 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2016.02.014 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jece.2016.02.014 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijhydene.2014.01.050 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijhydene.2014.01.050 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cej.2012.07.071 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cej.2012.07.071 https://doi.org/10.3390/nano10050921 https://doi.org/10.3390/nano11010225 https://doi.org/10.1002/bio.3745 https://doi.org/10.1021/cs2006668 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.matlet.2012.09.044 https://doi.org/10.1039/c4nr01730g https://doi.org/10.1039/c4nr01730g https://doi.org/0.1016/j.chemosphere.2014.09.055 https://doi.org/0.1016/j.chemosphere.2014.09.055 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.apcatb.2012.06.015 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chemosphere.2009.04.033 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chemosphere.2009.04.033 https://doi.org/10.1155/2010/643120 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.06.122 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.06.122 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.apsusc.2018.08.133 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.partic.2016.06.003 https://doi.org/10.1046/j.1365-2672.2000.00800.x https://doi.org/10.1046/j.1365-2672.2000.00800.x https://doi.org/10.1016/j.clay.2005.10.010 introduction experimental materials applied catalysts rhb photocatalytic reactions determination of reaction rate assessment of antibacterial property results and discussion the effect of catalyst dosage the effect of the hydrogen peroxide concentration the effect of ph generalized rhb degradation mechanism photocatalytic efficiencies under optimized conditions assessment of the antibacterial activity of doped copper ferrites conclusion microsoft word a_37_kovacs_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 39(1) pp. 73-78 (2011) estimation of the maximum applicable voltage level of aluminium electrolytic capacitors by automated spark-detection measurement l. kovács1, d. fodor2 1electronic parts and components ltd., csaba st. 30., 9700 szombathely, hungary e-mail: laszlo.kovacs@epcos.com 2university of pannonia, faculty of engineering, institute of mechanical engineering egyetem str. 10., 8200 veszprém hungary e-mail:fodor@almos.uni-pannon.hu the paper deals with the presentation of a complete measurement automation system (mas) implemented in an aluminium electrolytic capacitor development laboratory at epcos hungary. the main function of the mas is to facilitate electrolyte and capacitor research and development by automation of the related measurement tasks and to provide a powerful database system background for data retrieval and decision support. the presentation focuses on the architecture of the spark-detection measurement system and introduces a reliable estimation procedure for determining the maximum level of the voltage which can be applied to the capacitor without damage. for the design engineers it is often impossible to determine the exact maximum voltage which will never be exceeded in the application. with the presented spark detection measurement a good estimation of the allowable maximum voltage can be given. keywords: measurement automation, test automation, passive electronic components, electrolytic capacitor introduction there are many different kinds of capacitors (ceramic, foil, electrolytic and tantalum capacitors). the most widely used type is the aluminium electrolytic capacitor which can be found in many electrical systems like energy storage, power conditioning in power supply, power factor correction in electric power distribution, etc. the lifetime of electronic systems depend significantly on the lifetime of the capacitor, so they use this type of capacitors because reliability is very important in these systems. the aluminium electrolytic capacitor has many really important properties: capacity (1 µf – 3 f), operational voltage (from a few volts up to 700 v), operational temperature (from -55 °c to 125 °c), loss factor, size and shape. the design engineer must determine the exact maximum operating voltage. it is not an easy task, in contrast with the other parameters, because the capacity of the capacitor is specified by the surface capacitance of the anode foil. the spark-detection measurement system presents a good estimation procedure for determining the maximum level of the voltage which can be applied to the capacitor without damage. in addition to that, the paper deals with the basic construction of the wet aluminium electrolytic capacitor and introduces a measurement automation system (mas) of an electrolytic capacitor development laboratory at an international company in hungary. aluminium electrolytic capacitor the winding of aluminium electrolytic capacitors contains two foils (anode and cathode foil) with an impregnated paper. they are rolled together tightly into a winding [1] as shown in fig. 1. the positive foil is made from pure aluminium (the purity is higher than 99.9 %). the foil has been etched to increase the effective surface area (and the capacitance of the capacitor). it is typically 30–100 times larger than the plain area of the foil. on the etched surface of the foil an aluminium oxide layer has been formed electrochemically. the voltage of the etched foil is 30–40 % higher than the rated voltage [2] of the capacitor. the cathode foil is made from pure aluminium, too, and it has a thin oxide film (only a few volts, regardless of rated voltage). it is typically etched to increase the surface area slightly. the function of the aluminium cathode foil is to reduce the series resistance of the capacitor by making contact with the paper over a wide area. the positive pole of the capacitor is the anode foil. the other pole is a combination of high-absorption paper impregnated with an electrolyte, in contact with the cathode foil. the electrolyte is there to make good contact with the anode, by permeating its etched structure, and also to repair any flaws in the oxide layer when the capacitor is polarized. the anode and the cathode foils are contacted by aluminium tabs which are extended from the winding 74 and are riveted to the aluminium terminals of the cover disk. the tab foils are not etched but they also feature an oxide film made by electrochemical oxidization. figure 1: winding of aluminium electrolytic capacitor before being housed in a suitable container, the complete winding is impregnated with electrolyte. after housing the edges of the can are curled back. before being sleeved and packed, capacitors are first aged. the purpose of this stage is to repair any damage in the oxide layer and thus reduce the leakage current to very low levels. leakage current of capacitors the leakage current is the most important parameter of capacitors. real capacitors have failure places on the oxide layer of the anode foil. damage to the layer can occur due to the failure of the oxide layer’s structure or mechanical breakdown, e.g. slitting of the anode foil (foil manufacturers produce the anode foil in rolls), riveting the tabs to the anode foil, or minor mechanical damage caused during winding. numerous effects depend on the magnitude of the leakage current, for example the time, the ambient temperature and the voltage of the capacitor. the time-function of the leakage current [3] is shown by fig. 2. at the initial stage, the current has a peak, and then decreases by time until it reaches a low, almost constant value (irb). figure 2: characteristic of leakage current according to fig. 2, decreasing of the leakage current is exponential. the decreasing can be written down by a simple relation: a t t ii ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ = 2 1 12 or a t t ii ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ = 1 2 21 (1) where: i1 – the leakage current value at the t1 time i2 – the leakage current value at the t2 time t1 and t2 – time of the leakage current’s measurement a – constant. a well-operating capacitor's a index value is equal to 0.5. as a result of a = 0.5, the previous figure changes to: 2 1 12 t t ii = or 1 2 21 t t ii = (2) for the calculation of the leakage current, t1 and i1 assets are needed. however, the value of the leakage current is affected not only by the time but the ambient temperature, too. its characteristic can be seen on fig. 3. figure 3: ratio of leakage current increasing dependence on ambient temperature the figure above shows the ratio of the increasing current caused by the ambient temperature and the irb value at 20 °c. the higher the ambient temperature the higher the leakage current. moreover, the capacitor’s leakage current depends on the operating voltage, too, shown by fig. 4. figure 4: leakage current dependence on voltage of aluminium electrolytic capacitors it can be seen that the irb leakage current increases by ub operating voltage. after reaching the un rated voltage, the gradation of the current curve increases. the closer the voltage level to the uf forming voltage, the bigger the gradation of the current curve becomes. between us surge voltage and uf forming voltage the leakage current does not regenerate the capacitor's oxide 75 layer but starts damaging procedures, e.g. heating of the capacitor, gas emission, electrolyte decay, formation of imperfect oxide layer. when devising the capacitor's construction, design engineers must set the optimal operating voltage. it is important not to cause too high current during operation because that can lead to the breakdown of the capacitor. developing process of capacitor development of aluminium electrolyte capacitors is a complex process. the ideal flow-chart is shown by fig. 5. figure 5: flowchart of capacitor development the flowchart shown on fig. 5 consists of two parts: the first part is electrolyte development, and the second part is capacitor construction development. both sections include measurements and experiments. measurements of and experiments on electrolyte last for a short time while measurements of and experiments on capacitor construction can last for thousands of hours. the stages of development are determined by the purpose of the development project: there are cases when the only object is developing a new construction so measurements of and experiments on electrolyte are irrelevant. regarding measurements of electrolyte, this article only deals with spark measurement which helps design engineers in determining the optimal operation voltage. the automation of multi-operating, data-registering, mid-long and long measurements and experiments was optimal, increasing the efficiency and speed of capacitor development. the automation has been realized by creating an information technological system which studies every aspect of capacitor development. measurement automation system (mas) the main purpose of mas [4] is to help capacitor development, which is a time-consuming and really complicated task. the base of the whole software system is a framework originally designed to provide a common user interface for different measurements and registry programs. the measurement system includes at least 30 different measurements and software modules. the whole system can not be presented here we only focus on the software modules related to the estimation of the maximum voltage level. the main structure has two different parts. the first one contains the measurements, while the second one contains the data evaluation modules, concluding data management and data visualization modules that can display all the results of measurements, tests and experiments. the “class” of measurements has two subgroups involving the electrolyte and the capacitor measurements. the electrolyte experiments are controlled by a ni-pxi which is connected to the database. the structure of the measurements is shown by fig. 6. the graphical interfaces of electrolyte measurements have two pages. the first one contains the settings of the measurements and equipments (e.g. number of serial port, cell voltage of conductivity equipment, file path of saved data, etc.). this page is used before the measurement. the second one shows the status of the experiment. it displays the measurement results with numeric indicators and graph, the elapsed and remaining time, etc. the software can store the results into a file and the global database. figure 6: structure of the electrolyte measurements the most important electrolyte measurements are the following: ● “conductivity(t)”: measuring temperature dependence of conductivity. in this experiment the temperature of the solution is regulated and after the stabilization time the conductivity value is measured with the controlled equipment. ● “ph(t)”: measuring ph value as a function of temperature. the structure of the program is the same as that of the above-mentioned one, with the only difference that a ph meter is used instead of conductivity meter. the measurement is important because the ph value of the electrolyte used in the electrolytic-capacitor must be within a specified range. 76 ● “mixing(ph with single temperature)”: measuring ph value as a function of the concentration of an electrolyte composition at a specified temperature. as a matter of fact, we use this measurement in order to set up the ph value of the electrolyte. ● “spark detector”: measuring the breakdown potential of the electrolyte. this measurement is one of the most important tasks, and will be presented in detail in the next section. the second subgroup contains the capacitance management modules which simplify the electrical measurements and data registration. in addition, it includes the registration interface of the capacitor experiments for qualification approval. the most important measurements in this group are the following: ● capacitor registration: this module simplifies the registration of the properties (anode, cathode foil, type of can, cover disk, etc.) of the capacitor. ● “esr (equivalent serial resistance) matrix”: this measurement is mostly used in order to determine the resistance of the capacitor at different frequencies and temperatures. ● “gas pressure”: measuring the internal gas pressure of the capacitor in various operating conditions. ● electrical measurement: measuring the electrical parameters (capacitance, impedance, esr) of the capacitor by an agilent lcr equipment at different frequencies. ● leakage measurement: the oxide layer of the capacitor's anode foil is not flawless, so dc current is flowing through the capacitor if voltage is applied to it. this current is the leakage current. its value depends on the applied voltage, the duration of the charging period and the capacitor's temperature. the last part of the system has been developed for data management. this software module contains really useful tools, which facilitate the representation and evaluation of the stored data. for example: the report generate module can make a standard report in less than one minute. this module contains the following software: ● report generate: for composing a standard report about the specified experiment (e.g. endurance, surge test, etc.) ● search: for constructing several sql commands that can build "ad hoc" queries. ● documentation library: for handling the reports on experiments. the software package facilitates electrolyte and capacitor development because these tools accelerate the experiments and make work easier. the most important measurement is the “spark detector” experiment, which helps estimate the maximum applicable voltage of aluminium electrolytic capacitors. spark measurement during a spark measurement the breakdown voltage of the tab foil's oxide layer is measured. breakdown voltage is the voltage where the dielectric starts to conduct. a spark can occur because of the electric field. this phenomenon happens by growing of the polarization bias. the field strength is increasing. if the increase is adequate, the neutral corpuscles become polarized and the insulator starts to conduct. such spark phenomenon occurs too if the dielectric loss heats up the insulator. above a specified heat level the insulating attribute no longer exists. a spark is featured by its time interval, which can extend from a few nanoseconds to seconds. spark is affected by the pressure, the humidity, the temperature and the material purity. because of the spark phenomenon's sensitive nature, small voltage changes in short time intervals must be detected. the equipment built for this purpose detects spark the following way: damages of the dipped tab are repaired by the current. the oxide layer becomes thicker, so voltage is increasing. during etching a limited oxide layer with limited sturdiness can be produced. above this critical voltage level spark happens, accompanied by a hissing and crackling sound. the current of the circuit is momentarily increasing. instead of voltage generator mode, the system's power supply works in current generator mode. by this method a sufficient layer of insulating material can be produced on the freshly cut edges on the influence of the electrolyte's limited current level. after reaching a critical voltage level, the voltage is no longer increasing and spark happens. the oxide layer starts to conduct and the power supply's voltage falls. this voltage can easily be detected. the complete measurement system can be seen on fig. 7. the system includes the power supply, the thermostat, the thermostated beaker and the spark detector. figure 7: the spark measurement system for collecting, registering and handling measurement results a suitable software has been developed. the user's interface of the software is shown in fig. 8. 77 figure 8: graphical interface of spark measurement the equipment and the measuring pxi communicate through an rs-232 port. the software can set the properties of the equipment and control the entire experiment. the users just have to start the experiment. there are two graphs on fig. 8. the upper one shows the number of sparks while the lower one shows the voltage level. after the experiment, the measured results can be saved into the database or exported into ms excel. results many experiments were performed with the equipment and the data on voltage and sparking density of the electrolytes were stored. the spark phenomenon was measured at the maximum temperature of the climatic category of capacitors (as previously discussed, breakdown voltage is influenced by the temperature). the results showed (fig. 9) that the peak of the gausscurve of spark density specifies a voltage, which is approximately the maximum voltage level of the electrolyte. the applicable voltage is determined by the paper construction of the capacitor: spark voltage of the electrolyte has grown by about 5 to 10 percent. by this method, the capacitor's maximum applicable voltage can be approximately evaluated. this voltage level is not used during the usage of the capacitor. the actual voltage levels in practice are 400 v, 450 v, 500 v, etc. international standards determine certain experiments to be performed for qualification approval. the capacitor's selected rated voltage must withstand a defined voltage level. for example, a capacitor with a 450 v rated voltage must withstand a 495 v voltage level, which is determined by the surge test. in practice, first the spark voltage of the capacitor must be measured (the experimental electrolyte's spark voltage is 479 v), and after that a ramp test is recommended. figure 9: spark voltage of the electrolyte in the ramp test the voltage level is continuously increased until the failure of the capacitor. the experimental electrolyte was tested with capacitors of different paper construction. (with a thinner paper during the first, and with a thicker paper during the second test). the first test's current curves can be seen on fig. 10 and the second test's current curves can be seen of fig. 11. figure 10: the current, with the first paper construction figure 11: the current, with the second paper construction 78 the breakdown voltage of the capacitor is 516 v and 525 v. the first one is 107.7 % while the second one is 109.6 % of spark voltage. this proves that the paper's thickness influences the spark voltage. the capacitor's rated voltage is 450 v. the cecc standard defines a surge test, where the capacitor must endure 110 % of the rated voltage, in this case 495 v. conclusion this paper presents the measurement automation system of an electrolytic capacitor development laboratory at epcos hungary that contains more than 30 modules, including measurements on electrolytes and capacitors and data visualization software. all measurements have been implemented in a similar manner. first, the user initializes the measurement, sets the measurement parameters, launches the execution and leaves the program to run on its own, sending the results of the measurements to a database system, from where the data can be retrieved in a predefined or non-predefined way. the data acquisition system increases the efficiency of work (by decreasing the possibility of failures and assisting the developer engineer), and accelerates the process of development. these advantages are due to the automation of the measurements and the effective data visualization tools. the paper presents in detail an important and very useful method, the spark measurement which helps determining the maximum applicable capacitor voltage level by measuring the electrolyte's breakdown voltage. this voltage level is 90–95 % of the capacitor's operating voltage. for defining the maximum voltage level, a ramp test must be executed after the spark measurement where the voltage of the capacitor is continuously increasing. the voltage measured this way is the capacitor's maximum voltage. the executed tests prove the accuracy and adaptability of the measurement. acknowledgments the authors express their gratitude for the auspices of the project „tamop-4.2.1/b-09/1/konv-2010-0003: mobility and environment: researches in the fields of motor vehicle industry, energetics and environment in the middleand west-transdanubian regions of hungary”, supported by the european union and cofinanced by the european regional development fund”, and to their colleagues at the epcos company. references 1. online postgraduate courses for the electronics industry homepage, http://www.ami.ac.uk/courses/topics/0136_ec/index. html 2. o. klug, a. bellavia: high voltage aluminium electrolytic capacitors: where is the limit (2001) 3. k. theisbürger: “der elektrolyt-kondensator”, frako kondensatorenund apparatbauen gmbh. teningen, (internal material) 4. d. fodor, l. kovács: aluminium electrolytic capacitor research and development time optimisation based on a measurement automation system, factory automation (2010) << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word content.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 40 (2) pp. 65–67 (2012) comparative study on electrodialysis systems for galacturonic acid recovery k. bélafi-bakó , e. molnár, z. csanádi, n. nemestóthy university of pannonia, research institute on bioengineering, membrane technology and energetics, 10 egyetem str., 8200 veszprém, hungary e-mail: bako@almos.uni-pannon.hu electrodialysis (ed) is an electromembrane separation process suitable for recovery of organic acids. in this work galacturonic acid (ga) obtained by enzymatic hydrolysis of pectins from various sources was separated by a laboratory scale, two-step ed stack and a scaled-up, complex ed system. the experimental results from the two systems were compared. keywords: electrodialysis, pectin, galacturonic acid introduction galacturonic acid is the monomer of pectin, a polysaccharide [1] often occurred in agro-wastes, like sugar beet pulp, apple pomace, press cakes of fruits... etc. pectin can be hydrolyzed by enzymes and the process results a galacturonate (gat) solution. since it is an acidic (charged) compound, its recovery and separation can be carried out by electrodialysis (ed). electrodialysis is an electro membrane process, where charged components move in the direction of the oppositely charged electrode under electrical potential difference [2, 3]. ed has already been applied to separate various organic acids like citric acid, lactic acid, acetic acid, propionic adic, gluconic acid, maleic acid [4–8]. in case of pectin hydrolysates ed can be used for recovery and desalination of galacturonate ions (the counter ion is usually na). a laboratory scale, two step ed stack and a fumatech ft-ed-4-100-10 scaled-up complex module were applied in our laboratory to recover ga ([9 ,10]. in this work the stacks are compared from the aspects of yield, operation parameters, energy requirement and average current efficiency. material and methods galacturonic acid (ga) applied in the model solutions was purchased from sigma-aldrich, while sodium sulphate from spectrum (hungary). cation(fumasep fkb), anion-selective (fumasep fab) and bipolar (bp) membranes were purchased from fumatech. hydrolysis of pectin solutions from sugar beet pulp and citrus was carried out by pectinase enzymes (pectinex 100l enzyme preparation) in a shaking incubator. the process was followed by acid titration (0.5 m naoh). the laboratory scale ed set up consisted of two stacks (one conventional and the other contains bipolar membrane) was constructed in our workshop. the first stack was an symmetric ed cell (described in [9]), with 0.0225 m2 membrane surface area. here the galacturonate ions from the hydrolysate moved toward the anode and passed through the anion selective membrane, while sodium ions are transported in the other way. thus a concentrate stream containing mainly na-galacturonate was formed. then its desalination was carried out in the second ed cell, where 2 cation selective and a bipolar membrane were built in (figure 1) altogether with 0.0135 m2 membrane surface area. separation of sodium and galacturonate ions was possible: galacturonate anions remained in the feed solution forming an acid solution, while na ions passed through the cation selective membrane into the alkali solution forming naoh. figure 1: set-up of the second laboratory scale ed module 66 the scaled-up complex module containing cation, anion selective and bipolar membranes was described in [10], its membrane surface area was 0.31 m2. both ed stacks were operated by recirculation, using na2so4 solution (electrode solution). the experiments were followed by measuring the concentration of ga (dns test [11]) in various streams, conductivity, ph, electric current and voltage, the data were collected by a data acquisition device (national instruments usb6008/6009) and recorded by the program labview. the important stack and operation parameters for the laboratory scale stacks and the scaled-up complex ed module were summarized in tables 1 and 2, respectively. table 1: parameters of the two-step ed system for galacturonic acid recovery and desalination features of the modules conventional asymmetric ed combined with bp membrane membranes 3 cation selective, 2 anion selective 2 cation selective, 1 bipolar membrane surface area 0.0225 m2 0.0135 m2 volumes of solutions feed (diluate): 100 ml, concentrate: 150 ml feed (acid): 100 ml, alkali: 150 ml recirculation rate 32 ml/min 32 ml/min electrode solution 200 ml 0.5 mol/l na2so4 200 ml 0.5 mol/l na2so4 recirculation rate 60 ml/min 60 ml/min applied voltage 5 v 5 v processes galacturonate anions and na cations pass through the membranes to accumulate in the concentrate galacturonate anions remain, bp provides h+, acid formation na cations pass through the membranes, form alkali solution final results concentrate rich in na-galacturonate formation of galacturonic acid and naoh solutions table 2: parameters of the scaled-up complex ed system features of the module scaled-up complex module membranes 10 anion selective, 11 cation selective, 10 bipolar membrane surface area 0.31 m2 volumes of solutions feed (diluate): 400 ml, acid: 400 ml, alkali: 450 ml recirculation rate 380 ml/min electrode solution 500 ml 0.1 mol/l na2so4 recirculation rate 500 ml/min applied voltage 36 v processes both galacturonic anions and na cations pass through the membrane, formation of acid and alkali solutions final results recovery and desalination of galacturonic acid in one step results pectin hydrolysates from sugar beet pulp and citrus were studied by using the two ed systems. the experimental results are compared in table 3. from the table it can be seen, that higher initial concentration feed was applied in case of the two-step laboratory module, since in the second step we had to use the result of the first step: the na-galacturonate solution (recovered from the hydrolysate). it was desalinated in the bp module. in the scaled-up complex system the separation process (recovery and desalination) was achieved in one single step. though the energy consumptions were much higher in the scaled-up system and the current efficiencies were lower (than in the laboratory scale stack), but larger amount of product solutions (pure galacturonic acid) were manufactured. if the product acid obtained were related to the energy consumption, we found that – in case of ed separation of sugar beet pectin hydrolysate – 1 wh energy resulted in 0.09 g and 0.13 g ga production by the two-step, laboratory and the scaled-up, complex system, respectively. the scaled-up system worked with higher effectiveness, moreover it should be taken into account that its operation can be further optimised, and the energy consumption might be reduced even more. 67 table 3: comparison of the two ed systems two-step laboratory ed system hydrolysate asymmetric ed bp module scaled-up complex ed system from sugar beet pulp pectin feed volume feed conc. yield current eff. energy final result 100 ml 36.5g/l 63% 56% 9.2 wh 150 ml 15.4 g/l nagat solution 100 ml 15.4 g/l desalination – 4.6 wh 100 ml 12.1 g/l desalinated ga solution 400 ml 15 g/l 65% 41% 31 wh 400 ml 9.8 g/l desalinated ga solution from citrus pectin feed volume feed conc. yield current eff. energy final results 100 ml 48.9 g/l 78% 63% 8.9 wh 150 ml 25.4 g/l nagat solution no data 400 ml 39 g/l 86% 54% 39 wh 400 ml 33.5 g/l desalinated ga solution the yield, current effectiveness values are better for citrus pectin hydrolysate than for sugar beet pulp pectin hydrolysate, which may be explained by the higher purity of the citrus pectin preparation. as a summary, we concluded that electrodialysis is a suitable method for recovery, desalination and purification of galacturonic acid from hydrolysates of various pectins. the complex module was able to separate the product in one step and it seems that the scaled-up system worked more efficiently: higher yield was achieved by less energy consumption. therefore the complex ed system is suggested to apply for further experiments, aiming to study the possibilities of industrial applications. acknowledgement this work was partly supported by the támop4.2.1/b-09/1/konv-201-0003 and támop-4.2.2/b10/1-2010-0025. references 1. z. i., kertész: the pectic substances, interscience publishers, new york (1951) 2. h. strathmann: ion-exchange membrane separation processes, elsevier, amsterdam (2004) 3. s. beszdes, zs. lászló, g. szabó, c. hodúr: enhancing of biodegradability of sewage sludge by microwave irradiation, hungarian journal industrial chemistry, 36 (2008), pp. 11–16 4. s. novalic, j. okwor, k. d. kulbe: the characteristics of citric acid separation using electrodialysis with bipolar membranes, desalination, 105 (1996), pp. 277–283 5. m. cytko, k. ishi, k. kawai: continuous glucose fermentation for lactic acid production: recovery of acid by electrodialysis, chemie ingenieur technik, 59 (1987), pp. 952–954 6. n. yoshiyuki, i. masayoshi, h. motoyoshi: acetic acid production by an electrodialysis fermentation method with a computerized control system. applied environmental microbiology, 54 (1988), pp. 137–142 7. s. novalic, t. kongbangkerd, k. d. kulbe: recovery of organic acids with high molecular weight using a combined electrodialytic process, journal of membrane science, 166 (2000), pp. 99–104 8. k. bélafi-bakó, n. nemestóthy, l. gubicza: study on application of membrane techniques in bioconversion of fumaric acid to l-malic acid, desalination, 162 (2004), pp. 301–306 9. e. molnár, m. eszterle, k. kiss, n. nemestóthy, j. fekete, k. bélafi-bakó: utilisation of electrodialysis for galacturonic acid recovery, desalination, 241 (2009), pp. 81–85 10. e. molnár, n. nemestóthy, k. bélafi-bakó: utilisation of bipolar electrodialysis for recovery of galacturonic acid, desalination, 250 (2010), pp. 1128–1131 11. g. l. miller: use of dinitro-salicylic acid reagent for determination of reducing sugar, analytical chemistry, 31 (1959), pp. 426–428 microsoft word 2012_dr_bodor_endre_hjic.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 39(3) pp. 413-418 (2011) reduced aromatic jet fuels z. eller , j. hancsók university of pannonia, mol department of hydrocarbon and coal processing h-8200 veszprém, egyetem str 10., pf. 158, hungary e-mail: ellerz@almos.uni-pannon.hu at present time growing demand and more sever quality specifications are observed for the jet fuels. the reasons of these are the growing aviation and the more conscious environmental requirements. the expansion of aviation featured the last two decades, especially the 2% at the beginning of the reviewed period approaches 15%, if we calculate in the point of passenger kilometers the driven passages with vehicles, buses, railroads and jets. it can not be left from focus that aviation generates only 2% of the co2 emission of the world. this value can grow only for 3% to 2050, moreover it generates 12% of the co2 emission of the full transportation section, for comparison the public way transport generates 76% of the co2 emission. one of the greatest problems is the jets that fly at one time more than 1500 kilometers, because aviation produces 80% of the greenhouse gases. but there are no other alternatives for bridging these distances in the transport section. the quality of the jet fuels is improvable with reducing their sulphurand aromatic content. the hydrogenation of the aromatic content of the jet fuels to naphtenic hydrocarbons can produce products that are environment-friendly, they have high energy content, lower density, which contributes to satisfying the growing demands. our aim was to study the possibilities of producing low sulphur and aromatic content jet fuels in a catalytic way. on a transient metal catalyst we studied the possibilities of quality improving of russian crude oil based petroleum fraction depending on the change of the operating parameters (temperature, pressure, liquid hourly space velocity, volume ratio). with 1800 mg/kg sulphur content petroleum on the nimo/γ-al2o3 catalyst we carried out the experiments at 200–340°c, 20–50 bar pressure, 1.0–3.0 cm3/cm3h liquid hourly space velocity and 200-400 nm3/m3 hydrogen/hydrocarbon ratio. based on the quality parameters of the liquid products we found that we made from the russian based petroleum in the adequate technological conditions products which have lower sulphur content than 10 mg/kg and which have reduced aromatic content, so these are excellent jet fuels, and their stack gases damage the environment less. we blended bioparaffins to the products of the catalytic experiments. we reached products with lower aromatic content than 5%. keywords: jet fuel, hydrodesulphurization, bioparaffin, aromatic saturation introduction recent demands for jet fuels have shown significant increase in the last 20 years. (fig. 1) [1]. this was generated by the constant growing of aviation. in addition the quality requirements of jet fuels get more tightened. this was generated by the more severe environmental regulations and the increasing quality requirements. for the production of the jet fuels with good burning properties low aromatic hydrocarbons fractions are mainly suitable [1, 2, 3]. the expansion of aviation featured the last two decades, especially the 2% at the beginning of the reviewed period approaches 15, calculating passenger kilometres the driven passages vehicles, buses, railroads and jets. it can not be left from focus that aviation generates only 2% of the co2 emission of the world [5, 6]. this value can grow only for 3% to 2050, moreover it generates 12% of the co2 emission of the full transportation section, for comparison the public way transport generates 76% of the co2 emission [4, 7, 8]. figure 1: quantity demands of fuels (eu-27) [1] one of the greatest problems is the jets that fly at one time more than 1500 kilometres, because aviation produces 80% of the greenhouse gases. the reason of it the reserve fuel is let in the atmosphere at the end of the flying, so the formation of green house effect is 414 increased. but there are no alternatives for bridging these distances in the transport section [9, 10]. recently the properties of gasolines and diesel gas oils got continuously more severe, so the properties of jet fuels will become more severe, too. so now some people study the possibilities of producing low aromatic and low sulphur content jet fuels in a heterogeneous catalytic way [2, 7, 8]. in our present jet fuels are produced from different origin feedstocks. with the increasing demand more feedstocks must be in the focus. with using these feedstocks environmental friendly (low sulphurand aromatic content) and good performance fuels are productable (fig. 2) [1-6, 11, 12]. role of produce jet fuels from triglycerides on catalytic way will be more important in the near future. during the hydrogenation, the formed normaland isoparaffin hydrocarbons have suitable energetically and low temperature properties near the hydrogenation of triglycerides two other renewable feedstock processing technology can get role in the future; one produces different fuels with transformation and hydrogenation of lignocelluloids, while the other is the fischer-tropsch synthesis, which is applied in our present and processes synthesis gas from biomass. figure 2: classification of jet fuel production possibilities 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. i-2 i-3 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. h ydrogen feedstock purge gas l iquid product 22. 23. figure 3: the applied experimental apparatus 1: bottle-storage; 2, 4, 6: non-return valves; 3, 5: gas reductors; 7: gas flow controller; 8: feedstock vessel; 10: filter; 11: feedstock pump; 12: throttle valve, 13: flow meter; 14: reactor; 15, 16, 17: thermometers; 18: separator; 19: pneumatic valve; 20: gas-meter; 21: magnetic valve; 22: product receiver; 23: liquid product outlet 415 experimental our aim was to study the possibilities of producing low sulphur and aromatic content jet fuels in a catalytic way with hydrogenation of a petroleum fraction. we studied the effect of the process parameters to the product yield and quality. our further aim was to study kerosene boiling point range paraffin mixture, produced with catalytic hydrogenation of triglycerides, as a possible jet fuel blending component. experimental apparatus the heterogeneous catalytic hydrogenation experiments for aromatic saturation were carried out in a reactor system which contained all of the important apparatus and units that can be found in a reactor loop of an industrial desulphurizer and aromatic hydrogenation plant. the simplified process flow diagram of the apparatus is shown in fig. 3. the effective volume of the reactor was 100 cm3. used materials during the experiments we used a nimo/al2o3 catalyst, which is suitable for the desulphurization of gas oils. before the starting of the experiments we loaded 60 cm3 (56.79 g) catalyst into the middle sector of the reactor. the preparation of the new not activated catalyst we carried out by the activation method, that is made at the department after the loading. we given the properties of the feedstock for the catalytic experiments in table 1. this is produced from russian crude oil with distillation by mol plc. table 1: quality properties of the used petroleum fraction appearance clear, transparent and sediment free aromatic content, % monoaromatic diaromatic 17.9 3.8 mercaptan sulphur content, % 0.01 total sulphur content, mg/kg 1800 density on 15 °c, g/cm3 0.8083 crystallization point, °c -43 heating value, mj/kg 42.37 smoke point, mm 23.4 table 2 contains the main quality properties of the alternate origin blending component (paraffin mixture), that we used at the blending of jet fuel. table 2: main properties of the alternate based jet fuel blending components (c10-c12 paraffin mixture) density, g/cm3 0.7404 sulphur content, mg/kg <1 aromatic content, % <0.1 heating value, mj/kg 43.2 crystallization point, °c -52 process parameters of the catalytic experiments the circumstances of the catalytic experiment are given in table 3. table 3: applied process parameters during the catalytic experiments temperature, °c 200–380 pressure, bar 20–50 h2/hydrocarbon volume ratio, nm 3/m3 400 lhsv, cm3/cm3 h 1.0–3.0 methods we determined the quality properties of the feedstock and the liquid products with standards, given in this table. table 4: standard test methods of the feedstock and liquid products property standard number appearance msz 10870:1995 density on 15°c, g/cm3 en 12185:1998 sulphur content en 14596:2007 en 20846:2004 aromatic content en 12916:2000 hydrocarbon-group analysis (ir) msz 09.60134 smoke point msz 970:1984 crystallization point en 2047:1986 distillation properties en 3405:2000 results and discussion the yield of the liquid products were greater than 96%, which is very preferable for the main product (fig. 4). the loss comes from the cracking reactions and from the h2s, that is formed during the desulphurization reactions. based on the measurements with hplc, total aromatic content of products decreased with the rising of the temperature (fig. 5). the quantity of the decreasing, so the effectiveness of the aromatic saturation was the 416 highest at 340 °c and 50 bar pressure. at the same time on temperature 360 °c the aromatic concentration of the products was higher than at 340 °c. the reason is the exothermic aromatic saturation reactions are inhibited by the thermodynamically inhibition. the saturation of monoaromatics comes to the foreground at 280 °c (fig. 6), until this temperature high desulphurization and hydrogenation of diaromatics are typical. above 280 °c the hydrogenation activity of studied nimo/al2o3 is increased very well. 96.0 96.5 97.0 97.5 98.0 98.5 99.0 99.5 100.0 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 temperature, °c l iq u id p ro d u ct y ie ld , % lhsv=1.0 1/h; p=50 bar lhsv=2.0 1/h; p=50 bar lhsv=3.0 1/h; p=50 bar lhsv=1.0 1/h; p=20 bar lhsv=2.0 1/h; p=20 bar lhsv=3.0 1/h; p=20 bar figure 4: yield of the liquid products (h2/hc ratio: 400 nm 3/m3) 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 temperature, °c t ot al a ro m at ic c on te n t, % . 0 15 30 45 60 75 a ro m at ic s at u ra ti on e ff ic ie n cy , %p=20 bar p=30 bar p=40 bar p=50 bar p=20 bar p=30 bar p=40 bar p=50 bar total aromatic content of feedstock: 21.7% diaromatic : 3.8 % figure 5: changing of the total aromatic content of products as a function of the temperature (lhsv: 1.0 1/h, h2/hc ratio: 400 nm 3/m3) 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 temperature, °c m on oa ro m at ic c on te n t, % . p=20 bar p=30 bar p=40 bar p=50 bar figure 6: changing of the monoaromatic content of products as a function of the temperature (lhsv: 1.0 1/h, h2/hc ratio: 400 nm 3/m3) we studied with infrared spectroscopy the hydrocarbongroup composition of the products, to determine what hydrocarbons are formed from the aromatic content of the feedstock. the values of this test method are not equal with the hplc aromatic content values, but they give correct information about the composition of the hydrogenated products. the share of nand isoparaffin hydrocarbon-groups changed a little during the experiments (table 5). oppositely the cycloparaffin content of the products are increased compared to the cycloparaffin content of the feedstock, the rate of this was equal with the decreasing of the aromatic content (fig. 7). based on this we determined the aromatic content of the feedstock is hydrogenated to cycloparaffin hydrocarbons, so ring opening reactions did not work or worked in low rate and resulted linear paraffins. this hydrogenation is very preferable, because cycloparaffins are not just environmental friendly, but the have better energetically properties and lower crystallization point than that aromatics with the same carbon number (table 6). table 5: nand i-paraffin contents of products based on ir test nand i-paraffin content, % lhsv=1.0-2.0 1/h; h2/ch ratio: 400 nm 3/m3 t,°c p, bar 280 300 320 340 360 20 51.9 51.2 51.6 51.6 51.9 30 52.2 52.2 51.6 51.6 51.8 40 52.2 52.2 51.6 51.6 51.8 50 52.1 51.6 51.6 51.6 51.8 30 32 34 36 38 40 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 temperature, °c c yc lo p ar af fi n g ro u p c on te n t, % 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 a ro m at ic g ro u p c on te n t, % p=50 bar p=40 bar p=30 bar p=20 bar p=50 bar p=40 bar p=30 bar p=20 bar figure 7: changing of the cycloparaffin-group content of products as a function of the temperature (lhsv: 1.0 1/h, h2/hc ratio: 400 nm 3/m3) table 6: heating values and crystallization points of aromatics and cycloparaffins with the same carbon number heating value, mj/kg crystallization point, °c n-penthyl-benzene 34.1 -43 n-penthyl-ciklohexane 36.5 -58 n-hexyl-benzene 34.1 -42 n-hexyl-ciklohexane 36.5 -52 n-hepthyl-benzene 34.2 -40 n-hepthyl-ciklohexane 36.6 -47 the legal sulphur content of jet fuels is maximum 3000 mg/kg. in the near future this value will be decreased. so it composed a part of our experimental work to study the effect of the different process parameters to the sulphur content of the products. at the mildest process parameters (t: 200°c, p: 20 bar, lhsv: 3.0 1/h) sulphur content of the product decreased well compared to the feedstock. with increasing of the temperature and the pressure 417 sulphur content of the products decreased further (fig. 8 and 9). at low lhsv (1.0 1/h) and on 20 bar we approached lower sulphur content than 10 mg/kg, which is the specification for gasolines and diesel gas oils in the european union. on 50 bar pressure and on 280 °c sulphur content of the product decreased under 50 mg/kg, while on 300 °c and 1.0 1/h lhsv it didn’t exceed 10 mg/kg, moreover increased lhsv to 3.0 1/h it didn’t exceed 200 mg/kg. 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 temperature, °c s u lp h u r co n te n t, m g/ k g. p=20 bar p=30 bar p=40 bar p=50 bar figure 8: changing of the sulphur content as a function of the temperature (lhsv: 1.0 1/h, h2/ch ratio: 400 nm 3/m3) 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 lhsv, 1/h s u lp h u r co n te n t, m g/ k g. t=300°c t=320°c t=340°c t=360°c t=380°c t=280°c figure 9: changing of the sulphur content as a function of the lhsv (p: 50 bar, h2/ch ratio: 400 nm 3/m3) we introduced some of the performance properties of the products – smoke point, crystallization point. aromatic hydrocarbon content of the middle distillate influences value of smoke point decisively. aromatics burns smoke flame by their lower hydrogen-carbon ratio, than the cycloparaffins and paraffins with higher hydrogen-carbon ratio. on fig. 10 hydrogenation of aromatic hydrocarbons smoke point value increased well. on 320 °c the some point values of the products exceeded the standardized minimum 25 mm. this is given by the cycloparaffins with better flaming properties, that are formed during the hydrogenation reactions. crystallization point of products decreased continuously compared to the crystallization point of feedstock (-50.5 °c–(-51.5 °c)) by the high hydrogenation of aromatics. decreasing of crystallization point is favourable, the current stand standard prescribes maximum -47 °c (fig. 11). 22 24 26 28 30 32 280 300 320 340 360 380 temperature, °c s m ok e p oi n t, m m p=50 bar p=40 bar p=30 bar p=20 bar figure 10: changing of the smoke point as a function of the temperature (h2/ch ratio: 400 nm 3/m3, lhsv: 1.0 1/h) -52 -51 -50 -49 -48 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 temperature, °c c ry st al li za ti on p oi n t, ° c p=50 bar p=40 bar p=30 bar p=20 bar figure 11: changing of the smoke point as a function of the temperature (p= 50 bar, lhsv: 1.0 1/h) we blended bioparaffin mixture to the products of catalytic experiment to study their effect to the aromatic content and performance properties. we blended 10–30% bioparaffin to the product, that we reached at 340 °c, 50 bar and on 1.0 1/h, than we studied the important properties of these mixtures. as we decreased sulphur content of the products during the catalytic experiments, so sulphur content of product mixtures did not change significantly, moreover the studied performance properties did not change in important quantity, but at the same time aromatic content decreased under 5% (table 7). based on these results we determined, bioparaffin mixture from catalytic hydrogenation of triglycerides (c10-c12) do not worsen the properties of the crude oil based jet fuel. table 7: effect of blending bioparaffin to properties of the products from the catalytic experiments bioparaffin content, % property 0 10 20 30 density, g/cm3 0.7998 0.7938 0.7878 0.7819 sulphur content, mg/kg 9 8 7 6 heating value, mj/kg 43.0 43.1 43.1 43.1 crystallization point, °c -51 -51 -51 -51 aromatic content, % 5.9 5.3 4.7 4.1 418 results and discussion our aim was to produce low aromatic and sulphur content jet fuel, which has better energetically property, lower crystallization point, moreover its burning products damage the environment less by its changed hydrocarbon group composition during the hydrogenation. we studied the effect of the process parameters (t: 200–380 °c, p: 20–50 bar, lhsv: 1.0–3.0 h-1, h2/ch volume ratio: 400 nm3/m3) to the yield and quantity of the products, moreover we determined the preferable process parameters of the aromatic saturation and hydrodesulphurization. we determined, the yield of the products was greater than 96.0%, which is very preferable. increasing of the temperature and the pressure have significant effect to the aromatic saturation, liquid hourly space velocity has effect to the hydrodesulphurization. total aromatic content of the products decreased to 340 °c, than with further temperature increasing hydrogenation of aromatics declined by the thermodynamically inhibition. quantity of hydrodesulphurization did not change. decreasing of aromatic hydrogenation caused by the thermodynamically inhibition by the high temperature. aromatic hydrocarbons formed to cycloparaffins, they have better performance properties than aromatics. based on experimental results, the determined preferable process parameters for desulphurization and aromatic saturation are the following: temperature: 340 °c, pressure: 50 bar, liquid hourly space velocity: 1.0 h-1, h2/hydrocarbon ratio: 400 nm 3/m3, with these parameters, aromatic content of product was 5.9%, and the sulphur content was lower than 10 mg/kg. so, we produced successfully product, that has better properties than the prescriptions of the actual jet standard. blended 10–30% bioparaffins to the products that produced at the preferable process parameters, we determined, the aromatic content decreased from the investigated properties, the other properties did not change significantly. acknowledgement we acknowledge the financial support of this work by the hungarian state and the european union under the tamop-4.2.1/b-09/1/konv-2010-0003 project. references 1. m. dastillung: “oil refining in the eu in 2015”, concawe report, no. 1/07, 2007 2. j. hancsók: „fuels for engines and jet engines part ii: diesel fuels”, publisher of the university of veszprém, veszprém, 1999, isbn 963 9220 27 2 3. j. hancsók, g. gárdos, e. szatmári, zs. keresztessy: “catalytic hydrogenation of petroleum fractions” 7th international symposium of heterogenous catalysis, bourgas, 1991, in proceedings, 827–832 4. g. nagy, j. hancsók, z. varga: “investigation of the hydrodearomatization of diesel fuels”, 5th international colloquium on fuels 2005, esslingen, germany, 2005 january 12-13. in proceedings (isbn 3-924813-59-0) 385–392 5. l. vradman, m. v. landau, m. herskowitz: hydrodearomatization of petroleum fuel fractions on silica supported ni-w sulphide with increased stacking number of the ws2 phase, fuel 82(6) (2003) 633–639 6. r. h. natelson, m. s. kurman, n. p. cernansky, d. l. miller: experimental investigation of surrogates for jet and diesel fuels, fuel, 87(10-11) (2008) 2339–2342 7. j. hancsók, t. kasza, s. kovács, p. solymosi, a. holló: production of bioparaffins from natural triglycerides, chemical engineering transactions, 25 (2011) 821–826 (isbn 978-88-95608-16-7) 8. j. hancsók, t. kasza: “the importance of isoparaffins at the modern engine fuel production”, 8th international colloquium fuels 2011, germany, stuttgart/ostfildern, 2011. january 19-20, in proceedings (isbn 3-924813-75-2), 361–373 9. f. y. e. kady, l. k. mohamed, s. a. shaban: hydrotreatment of kerosene petroleum fraction to improve its properties international journal of academic research, 2(4) (2010) 173–182 10. z. varga, j. hancsók, g. nagy, á. stumpf, d. kalló: “investigation of hydrotreating of gas oil fractions of different crude oils”, 7th world congress of chemical engineering incorporated the 5th european congress of chemical engineering, secc, glasgow, scotland, 2005 july 10-14. 11. c. song: an overview of new approaches to deep desulfurization for ultra-clean gasoline, diesel fuel and jet fuel catalysis today, 86(1-4) (2003) 211–263 12. e. benazzi: „the evolving worldwide diesel market & composition”, 7th annual european fuels conference, paris, 14-15, march, 2006. 13. p. dagaut, a. e. bakali, a. ristori: the combustion of kerosene: experimental results and kinetic modelling using 1to 3-component surrogate model fuels, fuel, 85(7-8) (2006) 944–956 14. l. q. maurice, h. lander, t. edwards, w. e. harrison: advanced aviation fuels: a look ahead via a historical perspective fuel, 80(5) (2001) 747–756 15. p. dagaut, m. cathonnet: the ignition, oxidation, and combustion of kerosene: a review of experimental and kinetic modelling, progress in energy and combustion science, 32(1) (2006) 48–92 16. m. egorova, r. prins: competitive hydrodesulfurization of 4,6-dimethyldibenzothiophene, hydrodenitrogenation of 2-methylpyridine, and hydrogenation of naphthalene over sulfided nimo/γal2o3, journal of catalysis, 224(2) (2004) 278–287 17. s. honne, k. seshadri, u. niemann, n. peters: a surrogate fuel for kerosene, proceedings of the combustion institute 32 (2009) 485–492 18. o. r. koseoglu: “property prediction of petroleum fractions: smoke point” preprints of papers american chemical society, division of fuel << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth